GIFT or
METHOD GASPEY - OTTO - SAUER.
PORTUGUESE
C0NVER8ATI0N-GRAMMAE
BY
LOUISE EY,
TKACHUt OF THB POSTUOTTBSK LAN6UAOB AT THS COLONIAL INSTITUTf AMD THE
SVFKRIOB COMHBBCIAL SCHOOL IN HAMBCBG.
SECOND EDITION.
LONDON.
©AVID NDTT (A. G. Berr>), 212 Shaftesbury Avenue, VV.C. 2^
DULAU ft CO^ 34-36 Margaret Street, Cavendish Square W. 1.
HEW YORK: BRENTANO'S, Fifth Avenue and 27"' Street.
THE INTERNATIONAL NEWS COMPANY, 83 and 85 Duane Street.
G. E. STECHERT & CO., 151—155 West 25* Street.
E: STEIGER & CO., 49 Murray Street-
BOSTON: G. REUSCHEL, 110 Tremont Street
SCHOENHOF BOOK COMPANY, 128 Tremont Street
HEIDELBERG.
19221
PRESERVATION
REPLACEMENT
The (ilaspey*Otto-Saaer Method has become my 8ole property by
right of purchase. These books are continually revised. All rights,
especially those of adaptation and translation into any language, are
reserved. Imitations and copies are forbidden by law. Any information
as to infringement of my rights always thankfully received.
London, Paris, Rome, St. Petersburgh, Ileiddberg. Julius Groos,
i^nHO^
\ Pr/nfed in Germany T
^XiSO(^
MAiN
Preface,
This Portuguese Grammar is an adaptation of my
"Neue Portugiesische Konversations-Grammatik," issued
in 1910 by the same pubUsher, Juhus Groos, of Heidel-
berg, who, in consideration of the extremely favourable
reception that work met with in German-speaking and
Portuguese -speaking countries, commissioned me to
compile a Portuguese Grammar for English use. This
work I undertook the more readily, as the close rela-
tionship existing between Great Britain and her Portu-
guese ally, the increasing commercial intercourse between
the two nations, and the evergrowing needs of tourists,
demand further means of linguistic correspondence.
In this Grammar, as well as in that employed as
a model, I have tried to overcome one of the greatest
difficulties of the Portuguese language — i.e., the pro-
nunciation— by adopting the phonetical system of the
Association phonetique Internationale . It was carefully
applied to the Portuguese language by Sr. Gon^alves
Viana, who also kindly revised the chapter on Pro-
nunciation in this grammar.
As for the orthography — the difficulty of which is
next in importance to the phonetical one, as hitherto
the Portuguese have apparently considered this as a
problem to be solved individually — I have employed
that given in the "Novo Diccionario da Lingua portu-
lesa," by Candido de Figueiredo, member of the Aca-
temy of Sciences in Lisbon, which tends to simplify
le writing and to facilitate the pronunciation of Por-
iguese.
*
69610S
IV Preface.
In compiling the Exercises I have felt the desira-
bility of furnishing objective material— so far as this
is compatible with the grammatical Rules to be worked
out — in the form of imaginative pictures. Further, I
have aimed at making the student acquainted not only
with the language, but with the countries where Por-
tuguese is spoken-— vi^., Portugal and Brazil— by giving
a geographical, historical, and cultural view of them.
Wishing to make use, so far as is possible, of
original Portuguese in the Reading Exercises, and this
of the purest and most popular kind, I was fortunate
enough to fall in with what proved to be a real mine
of legitimate linguistic gold, both in subject and in the
form in which it is presented. The student will notice
that the greater part of the Reading lessons is taken
from Trindade Coelho, a modern Portuguese writer
who is acknowledged to be the most accomplished in
popular language, whose literary excellence has been
recognised, and whose tragic destiny has called forth
expression of sympathetic sorrow wherever he has been
known. I have profited by this great pedagogue's
three "Livros de Leitura," described as "wonderful
reading-books for public instruction" by Dr. Carolina
Michaelis de Vasconcellos, the learned woman, respected
by all Romanists, hitherto holding a professorship in
the University of Lisbon.
These three books have been appreciatively referred
to by the Portuguese school-inspector, Senhor Brito
Moreno, in the Civilisagao Foxmlar, a highly respected
pedagogical review, as "the very best of their kind to be
found in Portugal, as they combine an extreme clearness
with a lively and characteristic performance, uniting an
amiable simplicity to an honest conviction" — and, we
may perhaps be allowed to add, a sincere devotion for
the subject to the utmost consideration for the reader.
Preface. V
I am gratified at finding that Portuguese and Bra-
zilian critics declare my selection of reading material
to be the most meritorious feature of my "Neue Por-
tugiesische Konversations-Grammatik" (which contains
substantially the same exercises as the present work),
while German critics highly appreciate the advantage
of being introduced through this medium to the Por-
tuguese countries and customs as to a home worthy of
our fullest sympathy and esteem.
I beg to express here my sincerest thanks to Mr.
W. G. Priest, of London, for his assistance in revising
the English portion of the work. Should any student
of Portuguese, in using this Grammar, meet with errors
or defects, I shall be grateful if he or she will com-
municate with me, in order that I may be able to
rectify the same in future editions.
Pinneberg (Holstein), October 1911.
Louise Ey.
VI
Remarks on the Recent Reform of
Portuguese Orthography.
While this Grammar was in course of preparation
— when, in fact, nearly the whole of the work had been
printed — the Portuguese Government officially adopted
the Reform of Orthography recommended by a Com-
mission of members of the Academia das Sciencias. In
order, however, to avoid, the confusion that would re-
sult from the universal application of so drastic an
alteration in spelling, its operation is for the present
limited to the "Diario do Governo" and official docu-
ments, the schools being accorded a period of three
years in which to 'accustom themselves to the change.
It has, therefore, not been considered advisable to
alter the orthography of this Grammar, more particularly
as all Portuguese literature is, of course, still written
in the style of spelling hitherto employed. At the
same time, it is obviously desirable that students of
the Portuguese language should acquaint themselves
with and prepare for the new method; accordingly, in
the Vocabulary at the end of the book, the letters ex-
cluded by the Reform have been indicated by paren-
theses, which system especially tends to estabhsh a
concordance between the orthography and the phonetical
rendering.
The principal alterations are: the avoidance of
doubled consonants where only one is pronounced (bb,
ff^ 99, llr'nim, mi, pp, ti —now b, f\ g, I, etc.); the
omission of the h in its combinations of th or ch (= A;,
this sound being substituted by c or qu, e.g., pcUriarca^
quimica), also its omission from the interior of words
Remark on the Recent Reform of Portuguese Orthography. VII
(e.g., proibir, coerente), even in those which conserve
the initial h — justified by etymology — when compounded
with a prefix. Thus the new orthography will be: haver,
hoje, homem, honra, but: ontem, destimano, desonra, etc.
Instead of ph, f will be written: fotografo.
It is obvious, of course, that the doubled ss and rr
cannot be reduced to single s and r, as the pronun-
ciation would thereby be altered. Also the 7}im and nn
are conserved when the first m or n is nasal (e.g., cm-
moldurar, ennervar).
For the accentuation, we have to distinguish, as
hitherto, by a graphical accent the tonical vowel of
those words which for want of some characteristic mark
might be confounded; e.g., sede, sede; gosto, m., gosto, v.
Also those words ending by the generally Atonic syllable
-em, -ens are marked by a when this syllable is
tonical; e.g., contem contains (cf. contem they count),
porem however (cf. porem of por), armazem^ armazens
magazine(s).
As the Reform admits —though it does not pres-
cribe— the vowels e and o to be written e and 6 wherever
they have the close pronunciation, it has been thought
convenient for the student, to accentuate them where
any doubt might arise, it being understood that the
tonical endings -oso and -or are always -oso and ,-0}%
the latter presenting the following exceptions^: major,
suor, melJior, peor, maior, menor, where the o is pro-
nounced 0, similar to the English a in "all."
These being the chief alterations, the remainder,
of a slighter nature, will be presented in a future
edition.
^ In soror the ending -or is also or, but it is not tonical.
L. E.
VIII
Index.
First Part.
Pronunciation. Page.
§ 1. The Sounds of the Portuguese .... 1
§ 2. Types 1
§ 3. Auxiliary Signs of the Portuguese Alphabet 2
§ 4. Stress and Duration . 3
§ 5. Vowels 3
§ 6. Diphthongs 6
§ 7. Nasal Vowels and Diphthongs .... 8
§ 8. Triphthongs 8
§ 9. Consonants 9
§ 10. Compound, Doubled and Mute Letters . II
§ 11. Summary of the Phonetic Signs in their
Relation to the Port. Alphabet . . . 12
§ 12. Accentuation ......... 13
§ 13. Syllabication 14
§ 14. Homonyms 15
§ l5. Homographs 16
§ 16. Abbreviations 17
§ 17. Punctuation 18
Ist Lesson. The Gender of the Noun and the Article 20—24
Na Escola.
2nd » The Plural of Substantives .... 24—30
8rd » The Address 30—36
4th > The Auxiliary Verb scr and the Adjective 36—40
6th » The Auxiliary Verb estar 40 — 46
Lishoa.
6th , The Auxiliary Verb haver .... 46—52
Os verbos auxUiares.
7th > Employment and Concord of Tenses ♦« . 52—59
Index. IX
Page.
8th LesBon. Exercises on the Auxiliary Verbs . . 59 — 64
Quintal e drvores.
Jardim e.flores.
0 hordrio.
9tli » The Partitive Article ...... 64—68
Refeigoes.
IQth » The Complements and the most Frequent
Prepositions 68—72
Numa loja.
llth » The Attributive Adjective in Gender and
/Number 72—78
A visita.
12tii » The Position of the Attributive Ad-
jective 78—83
A habitagao.
ISth » Comparison of the Adjective. . . . 83—88
A trovoada.
14tb » The Absolute Comparative and Super-
lative 88—93
Portugal.
15th . The Numerals: I. Cardinal Numbers . 93—99
A ligdo d' arithmitica.
16th » The Numerals: II. Ordinal Numbers . 99—106
0 sy sterna decimal ou mStrico.
17th » The Numerals: III. Multiplicative Num-
bers 106—111
Problemas de muUiplicagao.
18th » Kegular Verbs: First Conjugation.
A. Simple Tenses 111—120
Ao deitar-se e levantar-se.
19th » Regular Verbs: First Conjugation. B. Com-
pound Tenses 120—128
0 linho.
The Tower of Belem.
20th » Pronominal or Reflective Verbs . . . 128-137
AUmentagdo. Solicitagdo d'um emprego.
The Foot and the Hand. The Egg
and the Nut.
21st » Paradigm of the Regular Conjugations . 137—146
The Studious Pupil and the Lazy.
X Index.
Page.
22rd Lesson. Phonetical and Orthographical Peculia-
rities of Otherwise Regular Verbs . . 146—154
0 aJgodcto. As pelles.
The Seamstress. The Tailor.
23rd » Exercises on the Full Verbs .... 154—160
As batatas. As frutas; a lavra; a
sementeira; a grade; a monda
Conselhos duma mae etc.
0 vaqueiro.
24Ui » On the Pronouns: Personal Pronouns . 161—168
0 espinheiro maldoso. 0 ccLo e a
vacca. The Faithful Bogs.
25th » On the Pronouns: Demonstrative and
Possessive Pronouns 168 — 174
A vlhora e a cobra. 0 mocho.
26th » On the Pronouns: Interrogative and Re-
lative Pronouns 174 — 181
N'um album.
27th » On the Pronouns: Indefinite Pronouns 182—186
0 lido e a raposa. The Nut.
28th » The Irregular Verbs 186—194
0 cabrito e 0 lobo.
29th y> The Irregular Verbs (continued) . , . 195—201
Annuncios. Building,
30th » The Irregular Verbs of the Third Con-
jugation 201—209
Carta. Bequerimentos.
31st » Impersonal and Defective Verbs . . . 209—216
Muu tempo. Annuncios. Correio.
32nd y> Verbs with a Double Participle . . . 216—221
33rd » The Adverbs 221—228
Os Pessegos. Soneto.
34th » The Conjunctions 228—236
A andorinha.
35th » Interjections 236—239
No theatro. Na rua.
Index. XI
Second Part.
First Diyision: Flection.
Page.
1st Lesson. The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns 240—246
Caule, tronco ou haste.
2nd » The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns
(continued) 246—255
Vozes d'animaes.
. 3r<5 » The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns:
Compound Nouns 255 — 261
A Lusitdnia.
4th » Formation of the Plural of the Nouns . 261—266
Nuvens.
5th » Formation of the Plural of the Nouns
(continued; . 266—270
Tomada de Santarem.
6th » Use of the Article 271—278
Portugal continental e insular.
7th » Use of the Article (continued) . . . 278—284
Portugal ultramarino.
8th » Omission of the Article 284—291
Joao I.
Second DiTision: Syntax.
9th Lesson. Congruence 291—296
Jodo I (continued).
10th » Intransitive and Transitive Verbs. Com-
plements without Preposition . . . 296—301
Tomada de Santarem.
11th » The Complement preceded by de and a 301—307
A preposigao «<fe».
12th » Remarks on the Prepositions . . . 308—313
A emigragcio portuguesa.
13th » Prepositions (continued): How to Ex-
press Certain English Prepositions . 313 — 320
0 automovel.
14th >v Syntactic Peculiarity of Certain Parts
of Speech; Possessive Pronouns . . 321 — 324
Cario ao Sr. G. P.
XII Index.
Page.
15tii Lesson. Syntactic Peculiarities of Personal Pro-
nouns 324—328
Trecho de '^Guerreiro e Monger.
16th » Syntactic Peculiarities of Personal Pro-
nouns (continued) 328—332
JDia no campo.
A Cigarra e a formiga.
11^^ » Syntactic Peculiarities of Demonstrative,
Relative and Indefinite Pronouns . . 832 — 336
The Whistle.
0 trahalho physico e mental.
ISth » Syntactic Peculiarities of Adjectives and
Participles . . . • 336—341
O terremoto de Lisboa.
19th >, The Gerund and the Periphrastical Con-
jugation 341—346
0 Brasil.
20th > Tenses of the Indicative 346—354
Extract from Portugtiese History.
21st „ The Subjunctive Mood 354—360
Passeio d Rivieira j^ortiiguesa.
22nd » The Subjunctive Mood (continued) . . 360-364
Dom Jodo de Castro.
23rd . The Subjunctive Mood: Future Tense . 364—368
Consiglieri Pedroso e o nccordo Ittso-
brasileiro.
24th » The Infinitive: I. General Use . . . 368—371
Podrigues de Freitas.
25th , II. Use of the Personal and the Im-
personal Forms of the Infinitive.
III. The Independent Infinitive . . 372—374
0 rato. 0 ledo e a lebre.
26th ), IV. The Dependent Infinitive (without
preposition) 374—379
On Education of Children.
A Hgnoranciaj> do pom portugues.
27th ^ IV. The Dependent Infinitive (with pre-
ceding de) :^ 379—882
Letter to a Friend.
A respiragafo.
Index. XUI
Page.
28th Lesson. IV. The Dependent Infinitive (with pre-
ceding a) . • 382—388
Women as Silkivorm-breeders.
A Mulher portuguesa como serici-
cultora.
29th » Construction 388-390
Preparation of Olive-oil.
Supplement 391—405
English-Portuguese Tocabulary 406—420
Portuguese-English Vocabulary 421—457
■^
XIV
Errata.
Page 5, Remark 11, instead of harder, read: lordar.
» 8, 1. 7 from below, instead oi pvu, read: p§u.
»' 11, 1. 3 from above, instead oi [u^'tisjius], read: [uj'tvjiufj.
» 17, § 16 is to be added: V^ S^ = Vossa Senhoria.
» 40, 1. 6tli, instead of Coimbra is, read: Coimhra was.
» 61, 1. 3rd from below, inst. of tmito, read: tanta,
» 63, Palavras, inst. of irreJci'etii, read: irrtlct'etu.
» 66, PalavraSf inst. of levantar to get up, etc.
a mesa to rise, etc.
read: levantar a mesa to rise etc.
» 98, 1. 3rd from the end of the Exercise, inst. of As Por-
tugal . . . has, read : As Portugal had.
» 98, 1. Stli of 39, inst. of so many hundreds, read: so many
tens, the next so many hundreds.
» 98, 1. 15tli of 39, inst. of § 106, read § 105.
» 110, 1. 5th of 43, inst. of Twice jive times five^ read: Twice
the fivefold of five.
» 110, 1. 7th of 43, inst. of men where, read: men were.
» 135, title of 48, inst. of Alimentago, read: AUmentagao.
From the page 226 until the end of the 1st part the exercises
87-95 are to have the numbers of 92—100.
Page 290, 1. 8, inst. of saltisfying^ read: satisfying.
» 290, NO 22, title, inst. of Jao, read: Joao.
» 353, 1. 3rd, inst. of 1583, read: 1383.
-K38SH>-
First Part
Pronunciation.
§ 1. The Sounds of the Portuguese.
The Portuguese orthography corresponds only im-
perfectly to the pronunciation. And there are signs
(as the tilj the cedilla, the accents) and sounds (as the
nasal vowels, the Ih, the nh), which do not exist in the
English language. To give an idea of the Portuguese
pronunciation next to accuracy, we have had to recur to
a phonetic transcription and adopted that of the Asso-
ciation phonetique internaiionale. In order to be easily
distinguished from the remaining text, the phonetic
signs are invariably put in parenthesis. Each of these
signs represents always the same sound, and each sound
is always given by the same figure. If you want to
acquire the most possible correctness in speaking the
Portuguese idiom, please to pay a careful attention to
the phonetics. Whenever you have an opportunity, let
the sounds be pronounced to you by a native of Lisbon,
the pronunciation of the Portuguese capital being the
one adopted for this grammar.
Be careful also in distinguishing voiced sounds
from dumb ones, in vowels as well as in consonants.
§ 2. Types.
The Portuguese letters are equal to the English,
but their denomination is different for the most part.
The vowels and also some of the = consonants have
several different values. In the alphabetic list here-
after we give their alphabetic value which mostly cor-
responds to their names:
Portuguese Convereation-Grammar. 1
ft
2
Pronunciation.
Character
Name.
Character.
Name.
a
a (like a in bar)
P
pe (as in ■pay)
h
be (as in hay)
q
ke (like the first syllable
c
s^ ( » 5 in say)
. r
in kali)
(er)re (as in ere, or re . . .
Jollowed by a con-
d
dd ( » in day)
e
6 (ai > air)
s
sonant)
(es)se (like in English)
te (as the first syllable
f
(ef )fe (as in English)
t
g
ge (as in gentle, but
without the initial d)
of tailor)
i7
u
U (as 00)
h
aga (dumb)
i (ee in deep)
V
Ve (as in vein)
i
IV
ve dobrado
J
k
ii (as in jifir, but without
•^ the initial d)
ka (the a as in bar)
X
(the ;English ;t)
chis (= shish, like
sh).
I
(el)le (as in English)
m
(em)me (as in English)
(en)ne (» » » )
y
i gregO (as in English)
n
z
Ze (as in English).
0
6 (like aw in law)
Remark. The letter k is to be found in very few Por-
tuguese words, as kysto cyst; else (as also w) only in foreign
words.
§ 3. Auxiliary Signs of the Portuguese Alphabet.
1. The accents, which mark not only the tonical
accentuation, but also the colouring of a vowel, are
well to be distinguished from the French accents.
(a) The acute accent (') may be put upon an}^
vowel, conferring to it, besides the tonical accen-
tuation, an open, ringing sound: md, si, alii, fora,
hahu.
(b) The circumflex (^) gives to the (tonical) vowel
a dim and closed sound : chammitos, sede, corte (cf. :
cJiamdmos, sede, corte).
(c) The grave accent (^) is not obligatory. Where-
ever it is to be found (upon a, e or o), it denotes
the open sound of an unaccented syllable (pddeiro,
fregues, pdtetice, somente).
2. The cedilla (>,) is placed under the letter c (qX
to which it gives the articulation of 5 before the vowels
a, 0, u, where else the c would be pronounced like k:
louga, mogo, agude (of.: louca, moca, acitdir).
stress and Duration. — Vowels. 3
3. The til C^) is a sign peculiar only to the Castilian
and the Portuguese languages. But being in the former
employed upon a consonant (ft), it is found in the latter
only upon vowels and diphthongs, conferring nasality
to them: la, mae, pao^ pde (pdij, mui. On the u it is
to be met with only in (the equally antiquated) mrd
and muito (actually written only muito); it has altogether
disappeared from upon the i, being supplied by follow-
ing n or m: insua for Isua, sim for si etc.
4. The apostrophe (') indicates that some vowel [e
or a, rarely an o) has been dropped: d'elle (de ellej;
Sanf Anna (Santa Anna); Nun' Alvares (Nuno Alvares).
Formerly also the m of com was sometimes dropped.
(N.B. — Actually the contraction of the elided words end-
ing in e is preferred to the apostrophe: delle^ duma,
nesse, etc.)
5. The hyphen (-) unites tw^o words to one idea:
agua-ardente brandy, mal-afortunado unhappy, bem-casado
well married, recem-chegado new-comer. N.B. — These
words may be written in one (aguardenfe, etc.).
Bemarh. As for the (') employed in this grammar for
the prosodical accent, see § 4.
§ 4. Stress and Duration.
In the phonetics we indicate the prosodical accent
by an acute (') placed hefore the tonical syllable.
The vowels are of a middle length when having
the tonical accent; they- are shorter hefore the accented
syllable and shorter still after it.
§ 5. Vowels,
' A has three chief sounds:
1. [a] an open sound resembling the English far,
father, but with the throat less open and the tongue
less down: md [ma]^ chave ['favo], caso ['I'azu].
2. [a] a sound like the English a followed by w:
atve, saiv. In Portuguese it is always followed by i or
u of the same syllable: mal [mai], mau [man].
3. [u] a close sound like a in hag or ahout. It is
tonical only before a nasal consonant: pan(n)o ['pvnu]^
1*
4 Pronnnciation.
lama [Ivmv]^ manha ['misjiv] and in para ['psrv] and
cada ['hvd'B] ; otherwise generally unaccented; ex.: lima
[lim^]^ Europa feu 'ropy], hater [hv 'ter].
Remark. The e in the tonical diphthong ei, and when ;
followed by a prepalatal sonnd (x, ch, j, Ih, nh) has the same
sound: fecho f'fyfu], lei [Ivi], igreja fi'grvgv], espelho [if-
yv^ki]f tenho [tvjiu] ; it is equally indicated by [v].
JE in accented syllables has two different sounds:
1. [sj an open sound like ai in air or a in hare,
often indicated by an accent, as fe [fe] faith, se fsej
cathedral; prelo, prelo ['prelu] printing-press, sede, sede
[sedd] seat.
2. [e] a close sound (like ea in the English words
greats hreak); this sound may be indicated by the circum-
flex, as aldea [ai 'dee], rede [ 'rredd], sede [ sedd]; comer
[ku'mer], perder [psr'der].
3. [9] it is found short in unaccented open syllables
and before r in an unaccented syllable, if not final:
resoar, designar, per dido, like the e in matter; but in
ether ['dtr], cadaver [hv ' ^aver] , pi. cadaveres fkv-
'davdrdf] the e is quite distinct, similar to very, but
more open. It is nearly inaudible between voiceless
consonants (repetir [rrdp(d)'tir]) and at the end of a
word, as lote ['lotdj, molde ['moidd], parte [' partd] ; while
at the beginning of a word it sounds like a short i
(= ee, phonetically i), as edade [% dsLdd] , emenda [i'niendv],
eleger [ih'ger]; and still shorter [t] in the terminal
syllable es (fazes ['fsLzif], deveres [di'vmf]) and before
cJi (=: sh) and the initial st, sq, sp: espago [}/' pa.su] ^
estranho ['if'trvjiu], esquadra [ifkwadrv], fechar [ff/ar].
Remark. When in the middle of a word the e is fol-
lowed by a or 0, it is pronounced also like a short i : theatro
[tt'atru], deante [dt'vntd], pear [pt'or], thedlogo [ti'olugu],
theoria [tiu'rie]. Also the conjunction e and is pronounced /.
when followed by a word beginning with a vowel.
4. see A, Remark.
■ -^ A\ ?7 sounds:
1. when long, like the English ee in heen: riso
['rrim], estiina [}f'timv], sentir [seAtir];
2. short, it corresponds to the English i in. gni,
gUd: hilro f'hitrrul, viu f'viu], virgula f'virgulv].
Vowels. 5
3. Before another vowel and not having the tonical
accent, it is very short and sounds nearly hke the
English y: ocio ['os^u] (but: macio [mv'siu])^ inercia
[i'mrsiv] (but: vertia [vdr'ti'ej), rdio f'rratuj (but:
saia [sv ivj); meia f'nivwj.
N.B. — In those words containing two or more e-syl-
lables the last of which is stressed, only this one is pro-
nounced i (=^ ee) while the preceding are pronounced
like voiceless e [9]: dividido [d^vd'^idu]; selicula [sd-
'likulvj^ divino [dd'vinu]. — This rule has various
exceptions.
O in accented syllables has two different sounds:
1 . [0] (0, 0) : an open sound like the 0 in nor, Gody
short. When tonical it is a little longer and more
ringing than in unaccented syllables: cor [hor], avo
[v'vojy for a [forv] ; adoptar [vdo'tar].
2. [0] (6, 0, ou): a close sound as in lode, stone:
cor fkorj, avo fv'voj, loho ['loiu], grou [gro] ; solfar
[soi'far], colmaga fkof'masBj.
Bemark I. In northern Portugal the diphthong ou is
pronounced o-u, so that there is a difference between ougo
['ousuj I hear, and osso ['osuj bone, while these words are
similar in Lisbon as well as in Brazil.
Bemark II. Before an I of the same accented or unac-
cented syllable, the 0 is generally close: solto ['soUu], colza
['kolzv] ; voltear [voiti'ar] (exc: volta [voitv]^ volte ['voits]
etc.). In open syllables and before r or s of the same syl-
lable, the unaccented 0 is pronounced u (= 00): barco ['barku],
moroso [mu 'rozu], border [bur 'darj^ costura [kuf'turv].
Bemark III. The definite article of the masculine
gender 0, pi. os, always being unaccented, is pronounced u
(= 00 is foot), us [uf]; same pronunciation as for the con-
tractions of the article: dos, nos [duj, nuj], etc. N.B.: nos
(=z em os) is not to be confounded with the objective pronoun
nos (us), which corresponds to the subjective pronoun fids
[nofj tee (cf. also v6s [vof] you and vos [vuj] to you, you).
U.
1. fuj (u, u) sounds like 00 in root, when ac-
cented: tu [tu], luva ['luvv].
6 Pronunciation.
2. (u, o): It sounds like oo in foot when unaccented:
Cb [du], disputar [d}fpu'tar], lodo f'lo&uj,
N.B. — Nearly every unaccented o, if not nasal, is
pronounced u (cf. 0, Remark II.).
Bemark. The u after a q and before a or o, is pro-
nounced like the English w: qual [Icirai]. It is the same
when at the end of a word, and after a voiceless consonant
the u meets with an o or a: vdcuo ['vakwu]. The u after
a g and before an e or i is mute. (Exc. : arguir [vrgu 'irj and
derived words, unguento [ugu'entuj, sanguento^ etc., and some
others.) See also § 10, end.
§ 6. Diphthongs.
A. Falling Diphthongs.
Such diphthongs where the weight rests more upon
the first vowel than upon the second, are called falling
diphthongs. Their second vowel is either i or w.
1. Feeble i-sound.
ai (ai)^; Ex.: pat (pai or pae) father, like pie.
£t (ei); » rre'ff (reis) Portuguese copper-coins;
like a in rare^ ai in fair.
VI (ai, ei); » rrvif (reis) kings; a sound between
fair and way; almost identical
with the a of the diphthongised
a in late of the South of Eng-
land.
01 (6i^ oi, oe); » rroif (roes) lists; like oi in moisty
roisterer.
0} (oi, oi): » bof (hoi) ox; same sound but with
a close 0.
» oiru (oiro or ouro) ^ gold ; same sound
iDut with a close o.
tit (ui); » fut (fui) I was, I went; like in ruin.
* Here and in other places hereafter the phonetic sounds
are put in the first place, while the ortographical examples are
put in parenthesis.
* The diphthong oi, not being terminal, may — but for few
exceptiona — be supplied by ou (cf. § 5, 0, Remark I.). In northern
Portugal the ou-sound is preferred, while the south pronounces
oi or 0.
a sound between
2)ouch audpause,
similar to the
German Haus
Diphthongs.
2. Feeble w-^ound
au (ail or ao); Ex.: pau (pan)
stick
» mau (man
or mao)
bad
6U (eu or eo); » sew (ceu or ceo) sky, the e like
ai in a^V (cf. § 5, E 1).
eu (eu, eu or eo); » &re«^ (breu) tar, same sound
with a close e (cf. § 5, E 2).
2*w ("m or io); » t'iw (%^M^ he saw, in accor-
dance with the pronuncia-
tion of the simple vowels.
0 or ou (ou); » do(u)ru (Douro)^ Douro, river
in Portugal.
B. Bising Diphthongs.
1. Feeble i-sound.
Such diphthongs where the w^eight rests upon the
second vowel, are called rising.
ia (ia or ea); Ex.: di'anu (diario) diary ) nf 8 5 i 3
vt'adu (veado) hart | ' ^^ \ \
u (ie or ie); » dt'ete (dieta) diet I
lo (io); » mi'oluf (miolos) brains \
'to (io) ; » 7nt 'olu (miolo) crumbs I cf. § 5, o
?w (iu or eu); » mi'u&u (miudo or meiido) i and u.
small )
2. Feeble tf-sonnd.
wa (ua or c)«>); Ex.: mu'ar (muar) mule- . . in compound
words.
» su'ar(suar) to sweat.
» suar (soar) to sound,
wa (ua); » (^w'af- (dual) dual.
?i£ (we or oe^- » su'eto (sueto) holiday.
» mu 'edv (moeda) coin.
ue (ue or oe): » rw'er ("roerj to gnaw.
» pu'emv (poenm) poem.
* Nowadays written and pronounced only Douro (not Doiro).
Nor can the diphthong ou be supplied by oi in the following words :
ou or, oiisar dare, ousadia, ousado; outorgar, ouvir, ouvido, outuhro,
ouco, couve, moucoj louco, and their derivatives, and never in a
verbal form — e.g. — comprou.
o Prontinciation.
ui (ui or oi); Ex.: fu'ijiu (fuinho) woodpecker.
» mu'ijtu (moinho) mill.
§ 7. Nasal Vowels and Diphthongs.
The Dasal sound of a vowel is either indicated by
the til (s. § 3, 3) or by placing m or n behind it. The
nasality of the vowel, especially when making part of
a diphthong, is not attainable without considerable
practice. It is not so pure and ringing as in French,
but rather squeezed. We shall try to approach the
sound by means of examples, as much as possible.
1. » C-a, an-y am-), vn before d or t, vm before b
or p, is the nasalised v (see § 5, 3), almost alike to that
of pang: 'irmd, 'santo, 'lampada.
2. e (m-, e^n-), en before d or t, em before b and
p, alike to that in length: 'tenro, 'lento, bem'posto, 'sendo,
em' bora.
3. i (m, in ; em-, en- as unaccented initial sounds) :
ahke to that in ring: fim, fins, findo, Umpo.
4. 0 (om, on) alike, to that in so^ig, wrong: som,
ofiga.
5. U (um, un), alike to the German jung: urn, atum.
6. Nasal diphthongs with terminal feeble i or u.
vt (ai, de, em) ; Ex. : m§} (mdi or m&e) ] like the a in
mother | pang, followed
» bvt (bem) well ) by an L
of (oi, oe); » pot (poi or pde)
he puts
Ofsi (Oem); » pom (poem) they
put
ui (ui); » mU} (mUi, mui) very (see § 3, 3)
vu (ao, am); » pvu (pdo) bread
> 'kdmprvu (compram) they buy.
§ 8. Triphthongs.
There are in Portuguese numerous triphthongs
which consist of a falling diphthong with preceding
feeble i or u. These latter vowels are never nasal,
even in nasal triphthongs.
like the o in
song, followed
by an i.
Consonants. 9
Ex.: Uais [IfatJ], plural of leal fh'afj true; fieis
[fV^IJy plural of fid faithful; fieis //)'»?// from fiar to
spin; miau [mjauj the mewing of the cat; poeira-fpu-
'vtrsj dust; ledo [U'vuJ lion, leoes [l}'d}f] lions.
§ 9. Consonants.
1. Those Portuguese consonants which in their
denomination and pronunciation diiffer from the English,
have already been mentioned (§ 2). F, Tcf* m, n, p, t, v,
w are generally pronounced as in English.
2. As for the voiced consonants, they are very
carefully to be distinguished from the voiceless. Espe-
cially, the h and the d which, standing between vowels
or between a vowel and an r, or being doubled, are
very soft (as, e.g., those letters in the English words
ndk, lad\ the h approaching the v, and the ^ the voiced
English th in though ; we indicate these letters so : d, &.
Ex.: reboar [rrdhii'ar^ nearly like rrdvu'ar]; abhade
[v'ha^d], addigdo [v&i'sni]. The b is mute when ter-
minal: Jacob [s^'ho].
3. The same as for the g, which sounds like the g
in give before a, o, u and consonants; and like g [£j
in gentle (but without the initial d) before e, i, y (or
rather like the z in azure): the terminal g [g] is soft
as in English (hug). If the g is to keep its ^CjVe>sound
before e, i, y, a dumb u is put between the two letters
(cf. § 5, Z7, Remark). Ex. : garfo ['garfu] fork, gume
['gurm] blade,, gUria ['ghriv] glory, Gog [gog] ; gelo
['gelu] ice, giis /ji// chalk; guerra [g^rre] war; gtiiar
[g}'a,r] to guide.
4. The j has the pronunciation of the g before e,
«, y (the z in azure or the s in pleasure) and is equally
represented by /j7' jd /ja/ already, jejum /j^jw/
fasting, joelho [gu'efiu] knee.
5. The initial I sounds like the English; when ter-
minal, it corresponds to the English U: falar ffv'hrj
to speak; mal fniafj bad.
6. I united to a following h (Ih) forms a sound
which corresponds to the Castilian II and may be com-
pared to the I and y in the combined English words
will you, — e.g.: filho. It is figured by [fl].
10 Pronunciation.
7. A similar union forms the h with the n (nJi)
figured by [ji] and pronounced like the Castilian n
in nino or the French gn in ligne: linha ['lijiv] line,
manhd [mv'jiv] morning.^
8. As for the r, it must not be confounded with
the English vocal r (in far, further). Good Portuguese
speakers trill all r's, whether initial, medial, or terminal.
Only there is a difference in the energy employed with
the strongly rolled initial or doubled r and the weaker
r that is found after a consonant (not being ^, n or s)
between vowels or at the end of a syllable. We re-
present the former by rr and the latter by r. Ex.:
preto ['pi'etu] black; hravo ['hravu] brave; caro f'haru]
dear; flor [flor] flower; perto ['pertu] near; rei [rrei]
king; carro- [^ka,rru] carriage; fe^7ro ['hiirru] bobbin;
honra ['orrv] honour; Israel [igrre'el].
N.B. — In some words the initial r is followed by a
mute h: r/iewma /"Vrewm^y rheumatism ; Bheno ['rrenu]
Rhine.
9. S is pronounced like Enghsh s in such^ silver,
[s] 1. at the beginning of a word and when
doubled. Ex.: servir [sdr'vir] to serve; massa ['masv].
2. after a consonant and before a vowel. Ex.:
cansar [Ice'sar]^ arsenal ['^rsd'nai], ohservar [ohsdr var] .
Exc: obsequio and derivatives, where it sounds soft:
[ohd ' ztkixi]
[e] like s in the English words loose, rose, when
between two vowels: luso ['luzu] , rosa ['rrozv].
Exc: after a prefix: resmtir [rrdsen'iir, presdgio [pro-
sagiu].
/j7 before a voiced consonant: rasgo [rvaggu],
lesmo ['le^m'B].
[S] At the ^d of a word before a pause, and be-
fore the consonants p^ t, c, q^ it sounds like English sh :
esperar [ifpd 'rar], estd [}f'ta,]^ escapa [}f'hapv], esquerdo
[t/kerdu].
^ In some words, as anhelo. inhihir, inhalar, inherente, in-
hdspito inhdbil, enharmdnico, and others, where the n is part of a
prefix nh is pronounced like n; the h is mute.
Compound, Doubled and Mute Letters. 11
Bemark. The terminal [f] is changed into [is] when followed
by a vowel; Ex.: as aves [vz'avif] ; and if followed by a
voiced consonant, it is changed into /j7 ; os banhos [ug 'bejiusjy
as rosas [vg 'rrDZvf].
10. X has various sounds. It is pronounced:
(a) [f] (= s^) ^* *^® beginning of a word: xadrez
[f^'dref], xarope [f'e'ropd]; generally in the middle of
the words: feixe ['f^fi] ; sexto f'svijluj ;
(b) [ksj (= EngUsh x) in some words fixo f'fiksuj,
sexo f'seJcsuJ;
(c) fsj in some words as auxilio [au'sihuj, proximo
fprostmuj;
(d) />/ in some words ,as : exame [i '.zvnid]^ exercicio
[isdr' sisfuj ;
(e) [hf] (very rare): horax ['horvhf]:
(f) The prefix ex , ., when followed by. a consonant,
is pronounced either [if] or /"«?//: expor [('B)ifpor]^ ex-
pensas [('^)}fpesvf].
11. Z is pronounced like />/ in English zeal at
the beginning or in the middle of a word: zelo ['zelu] ;
fazc/r [fv'zer]; and like [f] at the end of a word: pez
[pef], juiz /jw 'if J (cf. 9, Remark).
Bemarh In Brazil the terminal s and z are pronounced s.
§ 10. Compound, Doubled and Mute Letters.
1. The Ih, nil and rh have already been mentioned
in § 9.
2. The h is still found in union with t (ih), where it
is mute (theatre [ti ' airu]), and with p (ph), where it
forms the sound f: apht(h)as f'aftvj thrush, photographo
ffo 'togrvfuj.
3. Ph is mute before th: phthisica ['tiziTce],
4. With the c (ch) it forms two sounds:
(a) [f]; cJiave ['favd]^ enclier [I'fe/r]^ chilro [fiirru],
(b) [h] in words of Greek origin : chrmica f'kromkvj,
mdchina f'makinvj, monarcha fmu'narkvj.
5. The cia found compound also to t and a second
c, (ct, cc), where it is often miite: actttal [atu'at], ac-
12
Pronunciation.
cento [v'sentu]; pacto ['paktu], friccOo [frtk'sdu]. It is
also mute after an initial s (sc): sceptro f'setruj, sciencia
fst'SswJ.
6. The p is often mute before s and t (ps, pt): psalmo
f'safmuj, adoptar [edo'tar], prompto fprdntuj ; ph is
mute before th: phthisica ['tisftkv] (cf. 3).
Eemark. The vowels e and o, even when unaccented,
are open before the mute consonants c and p : director [dire-
'tor] J excepgdo [(v)ifse' svu] ; while a is open before ct and pt
and in a few words before cc: activo [a'tivuj, aptidao fapti-
'dvuj; accdo fa'svu], fracgdo [fra(hy svu] .
7. Doubled consonants are generally pronounced like
one (cf. § 9, 2, 8 and 9): apparelho [apv'rvHn]^ matto
['matu], penna f'penvj, commissao [kumi'svu], foliar
[fv ^lar]. Yet when, of two m's or *i's, one belongs to a
prefix, it is pronounced with a nasal sound : emmalhar
[imis fiar]; ennovelar [inu' volar].
N.B. — m is mute before n: gymndsio [gVnazm], con-
demnar [hondd' nar] , somno f'sonuj.
8. As for the gu and qu see § 5, w, Remark and
§ 9, 3. In qu the u is mute before e or i: queda
[lc£dv]^ quinhao [hx'jivu]. Exc. : frequente [frd'hiventd],
tranquillo [tre'Tcivilu] and derivatives, and also in some
scientific words. Before a and o it is sometimes mute:
quatorze [kvtorisd]., quotigar [kuti' zar or kwuti'zar],
§ 11. Summary of the Phonetic Signs in their
Relation to the Portuguese Alphabet.
a, a, V
h, h
d, 6
f, e, d
f
9^ 9
h h *
k
fi
m
see § 5
.» § 9
» § 9
■■' § 5
>^ § 9
g(a)v g(u), g(r), -g
etc. (see § 9)
see § 5
* § 9
^ § 9
* § 9
m, mm
n, nn
r-
: nh
0, d
: see § 5
p
• P» PP
r
: -r-, -r
rr
r-, rh-, -rr-
s
S-, -SS-, (-)8c-, c(e),
c(i), 9, -X
ks
-X-, -cs-
z
Z-, -S-, -X-
J
g{e), g(i); j, -s, -z
/
X-, ch-; -s, -z
i
t-, -tt-, th-; -ct, -pt-
ti
see § 5
Accentuation. 13
V : V-, -V- N.B. 1:
hw : qu(a); qu(e), qu(i) -r signifies terminal r,
(rare) -r- » medial sound,
V, e, I, r- » initial » .
0, w : see § 7 N.B. 2: A letter in pa-
/ : after a vowel, stret- renthesis indicates that the
ches it one preceding has the pro-
' : before a syllable, nunciation of the phoneti-
means the toni- cal sign only in this corn-
eal accent. bination.
§ 12. Accentuation.
1. Words of two or more syllables, ending by
^, 6, 0, have the stress generally on the penultimate
syllable: lama, 'vinte, cas'tello, anted' pado.
N.B.— Another vowel (^, u or o>, preceding those
vowels, does not form a diphthong, and is to be con-
sidered an independent syllable: 'lia, harmo'nia, 'crm,
*tua^ ma'goa, 'hroa.
2. Words ending in a consonant, a nasal vowel
or diphthong, or in i or u, generally bear the stress
on the last syllable; so, for instance, all the infinitives
{cha'mar, vender, influ'ir); pa' pel, nacio'nal, ir'md, ir-
'moo, ale'mOo, java'U, balm. Principal exc: the ad-
jectives ending in -vel (a'mavd, indefi'nivel) and some
in -il Cfacil).
N.B. — The s forming the plural of the nouns and
adjectives, or the termination of a verb, does not affect
the accentuation ('mesa, 'mesas; 'alto, 'altos; sa'bias),
even when by the flection the last syllable is changed
into two: ta'ftd, pi. ta'fues, in'gles, in'gleses; difficil,
difficds.
3. Words with stress on the ante-penultimate syl-
lable are rarer and generally marked by a graphic ac-
cent: nitido, fotografo, comprdvamos; they are called
esdruxulas fij ' cfruful'^f] .
4. A word consisting of many syllables frequently
has a secondary stress (marked thus: ^) on a syllable
preceding the tonical, yet. never upon one following
it. To this group belong (a) the adverbs formed of the
14 ' PronuDciation.
adjectives by adding the termination -niente [altiva'mente
haughtily); (b) the diminutives and augmentatives with
the intercalated letter -z-: cadeira'Mnha small chair,
from cadeira; homemza' rrdo big man (from 'homem). In
such words it is the originally accented syllable which
has the secondary accent.
5. Atonic pronouns of only one syllable are added
to the verbs, melting together with them: sabe-lo (or
sahel-o), ver-nos, dar-lhe.
§ 18. Syllabication.
1. Any vowel, whether accented or unaccented,
even nasal, may terminate a syllable.
2. Of the consonants, only the following ones may
do so: Z, m, n, r, s, z. More rarely and only in scienti-
fic terms: ^, c, fc, 2>, g.
(Even here we meet words separated thus : corru-pQao, aprovi-
ptar, au-gmentar, te-chnica, pra-gmatica, etc.)
3. Ih, nh must not be separated. They are found
only in the middle of a word and belong always to
the following vowel : mi-uJia, ve-lho. An only apparent
exception form words from the Greek, as phil-harmonicay
and from the Latin, as in-hihir, an helar, in-hospitOy in"
habil, etc., where in- is a prefix (see p. 10, foot-note).
4. Not to be separated are the diphthongs and tho
nasal syllables am, an, em, en, im, in, om, on, um, un.
Vowels not forming diphthongs may be separated : ma-
gu-a-do.
5. A syllable may begin by one of the following
groups of consonants: pr-, hr-, fr--, vr-, tr-, dr-, cr-,
gr-, cl-, gl-, pi-, hi-, ft- [r or I with another preceding
consonant), and sc- (this only in foreign words).
N.B.— There may also be read syllabications hke:
corru-pgdo, pra-gmatica, aprom-ptar,eic . (see 2), but as they
contradict the rules 1 and 5, given by the most learned
Portuguese phonetician, Mr. Gonial ves Viana, they are
not to be imitated.
6. The consonantal combinations of st-, sp-, sph-y
spl-y spr- and sc- are found only in scientific or in
foreign words: sparadrapo, sphinx or sphince (pop.:
Homonyms.
15
esphinge); splenico, stylita, sciencia. (In genuine Portu-
guese or nationalised words they are always preceded
by e, spoken like a fugitive i, which with the following
s forms a syllable: espargo [j/parguj, estado, estilo, es-
casso, esplendor, espraiar.) These groups cannot be se-
parated.
7. As for the consonantal gemination, the con-
sonants are distributed on two syllables: fer-renho, in-
nato, im-^aculado, ap-parente, as-sistir, pel-Ies, ah-bade^
at-testar, dif-ficuldade.
§ 14. Homonyms.
Homophonos [o' mofimuf] .
There are a number of homonymical words in
Portuguese — that is, words of equal sound and different
orthography.
Here some examples:
accento [v'sentu] accent
apregar [yprd'sar] to ap-
praise
area ['aria] area
atestar [vti/tar] to fill up
to the top
lucho I'hnfu] craw, maw
cdga ['Icasv] hunting, game
cegar [sd'gar] to blind, to
dazzle
cella ['sells] cell
celleiro [sd'lviru] granary
cem [se] hundred
cerrar [sd'rrar] to shut
chamma ['femv] flame
concebo [ko'sebu] I under-
stand, I conceive
concelho [ho's^du] council
condega [kon'desvj willow-
basket
consigo [ho' sign] I obtain
descripgdo [difkri's^u] de-
scription
doiito fdotu] learned
assento seat
apressar to hurry
aria air
attestar to attest ^
huxo box-tree
cassa muslin
segar to mow
sella saddle
selleiro saddler
sem without
serrar to' saw
ckama he calls, call
com seho with tallow
conselho counsel
condessa countess
comsigo with(in) himself
discrigdo discretion
doii-to I give it you
16
Pronunciation.
ega ['esvj bier, cenotaph
hera f'e:raj ivy
maga ['masv] mace
pago ['pa,su] palace
pello ['pelu] hair
pena ['pen's] punishment,
pain
perdigao [prdi'sSu] perdi-
tion
perfeito [pr'fntul perfect
rugo ['rrusu] grey
seio I'sviu] bosom
valle [vat] valley
essa that (one)
era was
massa paste
passo step
'pdo = por 0.
penna pen
predicgdo prediction
prefeito prefect
russo Russian
sei-o I know it
vale post-office order.
§ 15. Homographs.
Honwgraphos [o 'mografuj],
A. Examples of Homograplis with the same sonnd,
but different meaningc
u vista ['vifta] view, sight vista (pp. f. of ver to see)
0 dado [ da>du] die
o conto ['hontu] story
a conta [Icontv] bill
a cara ['hare] face
a ferida [f9'rvM] wound
a conquista [hd'kiftv] con-
quest
a sahida Fsv'iidv] issue
a alta ['atty] raising; halt
a haira [haife] decrease;
furlough; lower part of
the town (of Lisbon)
a aherta [v'bertv] opening,
gap
aceito [v'smtu] I accept
preciso [prd'sii^u] I want
c6mo ['komu] I cat
entre ['entrd] imper. of
entrar to enter
dado given
conto I count
conta he (she) counts
cara (adj. f.) dear
ferida (pp. f. of ferir)
wounded
conquista (pp. f. of con-
querir) conquered
sahida (pp, f. of sahir)
gone out
alta (adj. f.) high
haixd (adj. f.) low
aherta (pp. f.) open
aceito accepted
preciso wanted
coino as, like
entre between, among.
Abbreviations.
17
B. Examples of Homographs with Different
Fronnnciation and Meaning,
da [dv] =z de a oi the
da [da,:] give(s)
regia [rn ji»7 ^^i'- ^^ reger
to reign
seria fsd'rivj cond. of ser
to be
governo [gu'vernu] govern-
ment
publico fpuUiJcu] public
contrario ('hdn'traryu] con-
trary
analise [v'nalizdj analysis
domino [domin'o] domino
continuo [hon'tinuu] con-
tinual
concerto ['ko'sertuj concert
gosto ['goftu] taste
historia [i/tortv] history
presente [prd'zentd] present
regia ['rreigw] adj. f. king-
ly, royal
seria ['seirivj adj. f. serious
governo [gu'vernu] I govern
publico [pu 'UiTcu] I publish
contrario [hdntrv 'riii] I con-
tradict
analise [vnv ' li:09] ! analysel
domino [du'mimu] I lord
continuo [honti 'nuu] I con-
tinue
concerto [WseHu] I mend
gosto [goftu] I like
historia [ijlu 'riv] he writes
histor}^
presente [prd 'sentd] he
foresees.
§ 16. Abbreviations.
Abreviaturas [vbrdviv 'turvf].
ya J^^a
= Vossa Excel-
S'^ S. =
= Santo, Sao
lencia Your
Saint
Excellence,
dig"^ =
= dignissimo
you
most worthy
yaj^i
= Vossa Merce
Hlmo^ illma ^
= illustrissimOy
Your mercy,
-a most il-
you
lustrious
yi
= Fo5se(abbr. of
ex"^*^, ex"^ =
= excellentissp-
ya jyre)
mo, -a most
sr.
= senhor Mister,
excellent
Mr.
Br. =
= JDoutor Doctor
Sf^
= senhora Mis-
F.E.F. =
-por especial
D., D<»
tress, Mrs.
= Dom, Donna
(addressing an
Inclosed letter)
favor by es-
pecial fa-
gta
= Santa
vom'
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar.
18
Pronunciation.
S. E. C. = sua e:r"»« casa, g^-^"^, gr""^
(addressing a letter) }i grfi
m^^ = muito much,
very p. ex.
->w<« __ ^r^etite (see
§ 12, 4) V, g. ,
att^ = attentorespect-
ful(ly) a s.
ven^^', v^'' = venerador
venerator L e
cr
,v-do
= criado servant
adm^^ = admirador ad- p^
rairer
= grato, gratis-
simo thank-
ful
= por exemplo
for instance
= verhi gratia for
instance
= a saber name-
ly, viz.
= isto e that is
(to say)
=para for, to.
§ 17. Punctuation.
I^onctua^do fpontuv 'sguj.
1. The signs of punctuation are the same as in
English; they are called as follows:
« » aspas or virgula do-
brada notes of quo-
tation ;
[ 0 ] parenthese, -sis paren-
thesis;
- hyphen or fisca de unido
hyphen;
* asterisco asterisk.
' apostropho apostrophe.
. ponto (final) full stop;
, virgula comma;
; ponto e virgtda semicolon ;
: dots pontos colon;
? ponto de interrogagap note
of interrogation;
! ponto de admiragdo note
of exclamation;
— risco or travessdo dash
, . . reticencias points of
suspension or reti-
cence ;
2. On the whole, the rules of punctuation do not
differ from the English. Before the conjunctions e
(and) and ou (or), the comma is generally not em-
ployed; also not before a relative sentence. On the
other hand, elucidating adjectives and, frequently, ad-
verbs are separated by commas from their nouns or
verbs. When c or cm do not only add a particle, but
introduce an independent phrase, they are also pre-
ceded by a comma.
Punctuation. 19
Examples of Portuguese Punctuation:
Com bom vento, a can6a cacilheira atravessa o Tejo mais de-
pressa do que os vapores.
Para o seu 8ervi90, ou para a rebocar em calma, a fragata
tern uma lancha que leva a reboque.
0 catraio e a mais pequena das embarca9oes que fazem ser-
vi90 no Tejo, e emprega-se ordinariamente no transporte de passa-
geiros, e ka vezes na pesca ao candeio. — 0 bote-fragata 6 uma
fragata pequena, que em geral transporta carga mais leve.
Onde houver pessdas, o pardal presume logo, como o rato,
que ha comida, e 6 ahi que elle esti bem, para comer sem grande
trabalbo.
A cobra, por^m, 6 inoffensiva . . .
A este respeito, contem-se coisas muito inter essantes , . ,
(Trindade Coelho.)
Eu, pordm, observei-lhe que, sendo ess' outro artigo, na ver-
dade, notavel, elle, a men juizo, estava incomplexo, e, insuffioiente,
nao esgotava o assumpto. (Bruno.)
^!^
20
First Lesson. Ligao primeira.
The Gender of the Noun and the Article.
0 genero dos suhstantivos e o artigo,
§ 18. There are only two genderg in Portuguese:
the masculine and the feminine; there is no neuter.
Those nouns which designate beings of masculine sex
(e.g., homem man, cavallo horse), are naturally also of
the masculine gender; while those which indicate beings
of feminine sex (e.g., mulher woman, egua mare), are
naturally of feminine gender. Neuter nouns are con-
ventionally ranged either amidst the masculine or the
feminine ones. Examples: mesa table, feminine; pais
country, pardal sparrow, masculine.
§ 19. The Portuguese language distinguishes the
gender, not only by the pronoun, but by the very
article; by:
(a) the definite article (o the^ for the masculine
singular; a the^ for the feminine singular), when there
is a definite person or thing spoken of amidst others
of the same kind;
(b) the indefinite article (mn a(n) for the mascu-
line, uma a(n) for the feminine), when we speak of an
indefinite person or thing among others of the same
kind (see 2°^ Lesson). Ex.: o homem the man; nm
homem a man; a mulher the woman; uma mulher a
woman.
Bemark, Before rei kingr there was generally used the
definite article el (of Spanish origin), when a reigning Por-
tuguese King was spoken of: El-Itei Dam, Manusl II.
§ 20. To signify the masculine sex (and gender)
and the feminine, the Portuguese language has various
ways:
^ The definite article the is conseqaently employed for the
two genders and even for the two nambers: o os, a as.
The Gender of the Noun and the Article. 21
(a) a different word (for persons nearly always):
Jiommi^ mulher; frade monk, freira nun; cavallOf egua ;
touro bull, hoi ox, vacca cow.
(b) a different termination — e.g., pomho, pomba
pigeon; mestre, mestra teacher; leitor, leitora reader.
§ 21. In the latter case the feminine^ is obtained
by the following rules:
1. Those nouns ending in -o (not being the second
vowel of a diphthong) change the -o into -a, ex. : filhOy
filha child (= son and daughter); tio uncle tia aunt;
pomho, pomha.
Excep. — diacono deacon, fern.: diaconisa deaconess.
2. Those ending in -do change the -do into -da:
ledo Mon, , leoa lioness, abegao head man-servant, abegoa
head maid-servant.
The chief exceptions to this rule are: bardo baron,
baronesa; cidaddo citizen, cidadd; irmdo brother, irmd;
ladrdo thief, ladra; sidtdo sultan, sultana; valentdo boaster,
valentona.
3. Those ending in -or (or) and -es {ez) add an a
for the feminine : senhor sir, senhora ; leitor reader, leitora ;
lavrador peasant, lavradora; ingles English, inglesa.
The chief exceptions are: actor actor, actriz; em-
baixador ambassador, embaixatriz; imperador emperor,
imperatriz; prior prior, prioresa.
Words. Palayras.
Isto ['iJtuP thi8(nexttothe j esse, essa
speaker) aqiielle, \ that (one)
isso f'isuj that (next to the | aquella
accosted)
t/aquillo [v'kUu] that (next to a
third person)
estefeftdj, esta^ this (one)
cd [kaj, aqui here (next to t^e
[dki] speaker)
ahi [vij there (next to
the accosted)
^ Also of the adjectives.
2 Isto, isso, aqidllo are pronouns and consequently employed
independently (e.g. — Que e isto? Isto e uma penna What is this?
This is a pen), while este, esse, aquelle are adjectives and employed
only with a noun clearly expressed or imagined (esta penna e
aquella.— There is the same difiFerence between este, esse, aquelle,
as between isto, isso, aquillo.
22
Lesson 1.
ali[v'U],U[U]
there (next to a
0 chdo [u'fvu]
the ground
acoldfvku 'la] third person)
0 banco fu'bvku]
the bench
e[c]^
18 (mostly an-
0 gis fu'sif]
the chalk
swering to
0 muro
the wall
what? or
[u'muru]
who?)
0 tinteiro
the inkstand
estd [if'ta]
is (mostly an-
[utin'tviru]
swering? to
0 quadra preto
the blackboard
' where?)
[u 'kwa&rw
€18 MP ]
pretu]
eis aqui
here is, tbis is
0 Idpis [u'lapif]
the lead-pencil
[vizv 'kij
0 mappa
the map
eis ahi fstzv'ij
, there is
[u'mapv]
alt or acold
0 caderno
the copy-book
que [k9f before
which, what (a)
[ukv '&ernu]
a rowel ki]
que e [ki'e]?
0 menino
the boy
what is?
[um9 'ninu]
quern i [kvi 'e] "i
' who is?
0 alumno [m-
the pupil.
onde i [ondi-
'lunu]
school#Dy
■c]?
0 lugar [ulu-
the place
onde estd
[ondiifta]
' where is?
'gar]
a mat or mae
the mother
onde fica
[v 'mvi]
[ondd'fikv]?
0 rei [u'rrvf],
the king
tern fmj
has (he, she, it)
El-rei [eh
0 pae or pai
the father
'rmf]
fupat]
a rainha
the queen
0 mestre
[v'rrviyv]
fu'tneftrifj
a escola
the school
0 professor
the teacher
[mf'kolej
[u 'pruf9-
a penna
the pen
^or]
[v 'penvj
a mestra
a professora
the (female)
atinta[v'tmtv]
the ink
teacher or
governess
a cadeira [vkv-
'&vtrsj
the chair
0 livro [u 'Uvruj
the book
a cancta [vkv-
the penholder
0 tecto [u'tetu]
the ceiling
'netv]
* J$, estd e fica mean is, but they are very clearly to be
distinguished: ^ marks a quality inherent to a person or an object
(ex. : 0 pae e urn homem, 4 horn [good]), or the place of a person
or thing that it cannot or not easily be removed from (ex.; a es-
cda i aqui). JEstd marks a passing or casual quality (ex. : o pae
estd doente [ill]); or the staying of somebody or something on a
epot that he (or it) can be easily removed from (ex.: o livro estd
na mesa ; a mesa estd na aula. Fica is employed to designate the
place appointed to something (rarely to somebody), ex.: a porta
fica perto (near) da janella. Sometimes you may doubt whether
to employ fica or estd or even estd or e; there are cases where you
may indifferently employ the one or the other. (See 5^^ Lesson.)
* Eis aqui or simply eis', also aqui i or (less correctly)
tstd (cf. •).
The Gender of the Noun and the Article.
23
a parede [vpv-
the wall
aportafn'pjrtvj
the door
red-gj
a janetta /»je-
the window
a cidade [vsi-
the town
'nelv]
'&ad9]
a aula [e'aulBj the school-
a lousa [v'lozv]
the slate
room, the
a rua [rrwe]
the street
class
a esi)onja [vtf-
the sponge
a escola [vtf-
the school
'posvj
'kolv]
a mesa f'mezvj
the table
sim, ndo
yes, no
■a menina
the girl
e, ou
and, or
a alumna
the school-girl,
tamhem ftvvi-
too, also.
the pupil
'bnij
em fvi, i] in, on, at, contracted with the following article or de-
monstrative pronoun into no, na, n'um, numa, nHsto, n'isso,
n'este, etc. (or num, nisto, etc.).
de [da] of, from, contracted with the following article or demon-
strative pronoun into do, da, dum, dfuma, d'isto, d'isso, d'este,
etc. (or dum, deste, etc.), is equivalent to our genitive form.
a [v] at, to, contr. with the following def. article or aquelle into
ao, a, aquelle, dquella, etc., is equivalent to our dative.
1. Exercicio. Leitura e versa o.
Aqui ^^ a escola.
Na escola.
Onde fica^ (or e) a aula?
Eis aqui^ a
aula. Onde esta^ o professor? 0 professor esta na cadeira.
Onde e (or fica) o lugar do alnmno ? 0 lugar do alumno ou
da alumna 6 (or fica) ali no banco. Quern tem o giz? 0 mestre
tem 0 giz e a esponja. Que e isto? Isso 6^ o quadro preto. Que
6 isso? Isto 6 o mappa. E que e aquillo? Aquillo e o tecto.
2. Exercise.
Where is the window? The window is in the wall.
Has the reader the book ? The book is on the table. There
is a lead-pencil on the ground. Where is the copy-book of
the school-boy? The copy-book is on the chair of the teacher.
Who is that man ? That man is the head man-servant of the
baron. Has the daughter of the baroness a governess? Yes,
and the friend of the girl has also a governess. Where is
the inkstand? The inkstand is on the table. The pen-
holder too is on the table. Who is there? The father of
the boy is there. Who is at (a) the door of the school-room?
The pupil of the teacher is at the door. Is here the place
of the boy? Yes, here on the bench.
Conversation. Conversa^ao.
Quern 6 esse menino? E (He is) um aiumno da aula.
E quern 6 o professor d'esta E um cidadao d'esta cidade.
aula?
1 See note ' of p. 22.
2 See note 2 of p. 22.
24 Lesson 2.
Que ma e esta? Esta e a rua do Abe.
Onde e (or fica) a escola? A escola 6 (or fica) aqui.
Tern o menino um lapiz? Sim, eis nm lapiz e oma ca-
n6ta.
(0 professor apontara para os objectos de que fala ou pegari
nelles, emquanto dirigir as seguintes ou semelhantes perguntas ao
alumno):
P. Que 6 isto? i?. Isso e a m6sa. Isso ^ o giz. Isso 6 o
quadro preto, etc.
P. Que 6 isso? B. Isto 6 o livro. Isto e a penna. Isto
e a canfita, etc.
P. Que e aquillo ? B. Aquillo 6 o tecto, a porta, a janella,
o mappa, a parede, etc.
(Tlie same exercise to be continued for all objects already
mentioned.)
Second Lesson. Ligao segunda.
The Plural of Substantives.^
A formagdo do plural nos suhstantivos,
§ 22. All nouns ending in a vowel or diphthong
(except -do) or in -n form the plural by adding -5, thus:
o banco the bench' os hancos the benches
a janella the window as janellas the windows
0 pae (or pat) the father os^jaes the fathers, the parents
a mde (or mdi) the mother as mdes the mothers
0 dia^ the day os dias the days
a irmd [vir'mv] the sister as irmds the sisters
0 dolmen ['udoimenJihQhvkxroyf os dolmens the barrows.
§ 23. Nouns ending in -m change this letter into
-n before taking the -s of the plural:
o homem fu'omvi] the man os homens the men
0 jardim fujvr 'dl] the garden os jardins the gardens
0 som [u'sdj the sound os sons the sounds
um [u] a, one uns some, any.
§ 24. Nouns terminating in -ao distinguish two
chief classes:
^ The rules given for the formation of the plural of the
noun are applied also to the adjective.
^ Those words ending in a are generally of the feminine
gender, but there are exceptions— e.g., dia, gramma, monarchal
dilemma, imtriarcha, clima (climate), drama, thema, and others
derived from the Greek.
The Plural of Substantives.
25
(a) those where this termination is not accented
take simply an 5:
0 orfao or orphao f'orf^uj os orfdos the orphans
the orphan
a bengdo['bes§uJ^ the blessing as hengdos the blessings.
(b) those where this termination is accented may
be divided into three subdivisions:
(a) such as change -uo into -uos (rare)
(P) » . » •> -do » -des (rarer still)
(t) » » » -ao » -des.
(a) To the first class belong the following sub-
stantives :
o irmdo the brother
OS irmdos the brothers, the
brethren
OS cidaddos the citizens
OS christdos the Christians
0 cidaddo the citizen
0 christdo [krif'ivu] the
Christian
0 cortesdo [kurtd zvu] the cour-
tier
0 villdo [vi'lvu] the peasant,
villain
0 chdo [fvu] the ground
a mdo [meu] the hand
(p) To the second class belong the following:
OS cortesdos the courtiers
OS villdos the peasants, villains
OS chdos the grounds
as mdos the hands.
0 cdo [kvu] the dog
0 pdo fpvu] the bread, the
loaf
0 alemdo [vb'mvu] the Ger-
man
0 capitdo [hvpi'tvu] the cap-
tain
0 escrivdo fffkri'vvu] the clerk
of the court
OS cdes [kvifj the dogs
SffJ
OS pdes fpvifj the loaves
OS alemdes [vJd'mv}/] the Ger-
mans
05 capitdes [kepi'tvif] the
captains
OS escrivdes [tfkri'vvif] the
clerks of the court.
(t) Most substantives ending in -ao (among these
all abstract nouns ending in -do) form their plural by
changing -do in -des, as:
0 coragdo [kurv 'svu] the heart,
OS coragoes [kuru'soif]
0 lido the lion, os IWes
0 cangdo the song, os cangoes
0 meldo the melon, os meloes
0 aldedo the peasant, os aldeoes^
a acgdo the action, as acgdes
a divisdo the division, as di-
vis5es
a licdo the lesson, as ligdes.
* bengao may also be accented on its termination.
^ aldedo [aid} 'vuj may form the plural in aldedos or aldeoes.
26
Lesson 2.
§ 25. Nouns (and adjectives) ending in -r or
'Z add -es in the plural, as:
•5 or
0 mar [mar] the sea, os
mares [marifj
0 mes [mefj the month, meses
o rapaz [rrv'paf] the boy,
rapazes
o portugues [purtu'gufj] the
Portuguese, Portugueses
a paz [paj] peace, pazes
[paz'if]
a flor [flor] flower, flores
a mulher [mu 'fier] woman,
mulheres women.
superior [supdri'orj superior
(sub. and adj.).
N.B. — Many words may be written with an -s or a
-z, as : mcs or mez, lapis (pencil) or lapiz, ingles or inglez,
etc.; but nowadays the -s is preferred to the -z.
§ 26. Words (nouns and adjectives) ending in ac-
cented -al, 'Ol, -uly change the letter -I into -es:
0 animal [vni'mai] the ani- os animaes [uni'majfj
mal
OS soes ['s.7jf]
OS tafues [tv'fwif]
geraes [s^'raif]
azues. [v 'zutfj.
0 sol [sol] the sun
0 taful [tv'ful] the gambler
geral hd 'ral] general
azul [v'zui] blue
Exception. — 0 mal the evil; o consul ['kosul] the consul;
o cal [kai] form their plural by adding -es: os males, os con-
sules, as cales. 0 real [rri'ai] the ree (unit of the Por-
tuguese coin), forms the plural os reis [uz'rre]]].
§ 27. Nouns ending in -el or unaccented -il change
these letters into -eis. N.B. — If the termination -el
— which is always pronounced [ef] — is accented, -eis is
pronounced [e}/] ; if not accented, it is /V?//.
0 papel [pv'pii] the paper papeis [pv'peij]
0 tonnel [tu 'nel] the barrel tonneis [tu 'ne-ifj
o tunnel ['tunel] the tunnel tunnels [tumnj].
agradavel [ngrv'davd] agree-
able
reptil f'rreptii] reptile
fdcil ['fasti] easy
diifuU [dd'fisiij difficult
iextil [ tvtftii] textile
agradaveis [vgrv 'davvij]
reptis^
fdceis ['fasvjf]
difficeis [d9 flsvij]
texteis^.
^ Textil (with the accent on the first ayllable) has the scieo-
tifical plural-form: texteia, and the popular form: textis. JReptil
(sclent ifical form ['rrcptil]^ popular form: [rrep'tii]) forms the
plural in reptis [rrep'ti/J, instead of repiis ['rreptif], as would be
correct.
The Plural of Substantives. 27
Exception.— 0 mel honey, forms meles; o fel gall, bill,
has no plural.
§ 28. Nouns (and adjectives) ending in accented
'il change the letter -l into -5, as:
o.funil [fu'niij the funnel funis [fu'nij]
o burril [hu'rrii] the chisel burris
civil [sd'vil] civil (adj.) civis.
§ 29. Nouns ending in -s preceded by an un-
accented vowel or falling diphthong, do not change in
the plural: o{s) alferes [af'ferif] lieutenant(s) ; o{s) lapis
flapif] pencil(s); simples simple.
Exception.— 0 calis ['kahf] cup, calyx, glass, pL calls or
calices; deus ['deuj] god, deuses [deustf].
§ 30. Some substantives are only used in the
plural, as :
as calgas ["kalsuf] the trousers os generos ['genoruf] the vie-
as ceroulas [sd 'roluf] the dra- tuals
wers as fontes ['fontif] the temples
as tenazes [td'nazij] the tongs as castas [hofivj] the back
OS arredores [arrd'dorif] the os dculos ['okulufj the spec-
envirOns tacles.
Rule. — As already mentioned, the adjective follows
the same rules as the noun, as for the feminine and
plural forms; so it agrees with the word qualified by it,
in gender and number, as:
0 Jwmem e alto the man is tall
a torre e alta the spire is high
as torres sao alias the spires are .high.
§ 31. Present Tense (Presente) of ter to have.
Eu ienho [eu'tvpoj I have tenko (eu)? have I?
tu tens [tu'tnifj thou hast tens (tu)? hast thou?
elle tern [eh't'Si] he has tern (elle)? has he?
ella tern [eIv 'iui] she has tern (ella) ? has she ?
nos temos [nDf'temuj] we temos (nds) ? have we ?
have
v6s tendes [vof'tendtfj you tendes (vos)? have you?
have
elles teem [ehj'tvivi] they ^eem CeZZes) . ^ have they ?Cwasc.^
(masc.) have •
ellas teem [ehj'tvivi] they teem (ellas) ? have they (fern.).
(fern.) have
Lesson 2.
Eu ndo tenho I have not, etc.
Ndo tenho eu? have I not? etc.
Rule.— The negative n&o is put before the verh.
BemarJc. — The conjunctive personal pronoun may be
omitted. Yet it must be employed: 1. when it has the em-
phasis—e.g., eu (e que) tenho; 2. to avoid a misunderstand-
ing; 3. when necessary to the harmony of the phrase. — In
the interrogative form it is put after the verb, but may also
stand before it.
N.B.— As for you have, etc., see the following
lesson.
Palavras.
Men, minha my
f'meu, mijiv]
seu, sua ['seUf his, her, its,
8uv] your
doiSyduasf'dotf, two
'dunfj
quanta [kwvntuj, how much?
quanta ?
quantos, quantas how many ?
tres [tref] three
quatrof'kwatruj four
cinco I'siku] five
0 pe [u'pej the foot
o dedo [u&e&u] the finger, the
toe
obrago [u'i>rasuj the arm
esteSf estas these
esses, essas those
aqueiles, aquellas those (of. p. 21,
footnote 2)
cada [Tcv&ib]
ndo [n%u]
sao f&vuj 1
estao [}f'tvu] ]
algum [ai'guj
alguma [al-
gumv]
alguns [ai' gUf] [
algumas [al-
gumvf]
ha [a]
0 sdgro [' sogru] the father-in-
law
a sogra f'sogrej the mother-in-
law
each
no, not
are
some, any
vdho [vefiUf
vsfiu]
there is,
are
old, aged
there
a cdthedra
["katd&rv]
o principe
['pris}pd]
a princesa
[prl'sezv]
a leitura [Ivi-
'turvj
a versdo fv^r-
'svuj
0 herdeiro [ir-
'dv}ru]
a herdeira
[ir'&virv]
0 fidalgo
[fi 'ffaigu]
a fidalga
[fi'&aigv]
0 avo [v'vo]
a av6 [v'vo]
0 cad [kvuj
the lecturing-
desk
the prince
the princess
the reading
exercise
translation,
version
the heir
the heiress
the gentleman
the gentlewo-
man, the lady
the grand-
father
the grand-
mother
the dog
the bitch
the
a cadella [lev-
'&£lv]
0 rapaz
a rapariga
[rrvpv 'rigvj
iambem [tvm-
'bvij
Rule. — The possessive adjectives are generally pre-
ceded by the article, if the noun is not a title of re-
the boy
the girl,
young woman
also.
The Plural of Substantives. 29
lationship, in which case the article is generally
omitted. The article is dropped also at addressing per-
sons. Ex. : 0 meu lapis, a sua penna; l^t meu pae^
sua mde; my good friend I
3. Exercicio. Leitura e Tersao.
Meu pai tern dois filhos e duas filhas. Sen sogro e urn
homem velho, sua sogra 6 uma mulher velha. Na aula ha
uma cathedra, dois bancos, duas janellas e uma mesa. Ka mfisa
ha uma esponja, tres can3tas e quatro lapis. Os meus cadernos
estao tambem na m6sa. Tenho [um]" av6 e [uma] avo. 0
mestre 6 portugufis. 0 francos e um valentao. 0 principe 6
o filho do rei e da rainha. 0 fidalgo ^ o herdeiro do seu amigo.
Onde esta o cao do ingles? Esta ali no chao.
4. Exercise.
Translation.
I have two hands. Each hand has five fingers. We
have also two feet, and each foot has also five toes. These
are my copy-books and my pens. Is this your lead-pencil?
No, it is not^; it is the pencil of my father. My mother's
father-in-law (= The father-in-law of my mother) is niy
grandfather, and her mother-in-law is my grandmother.
These girls and those boys are pupils of my master. Have
you any brothers? Yes, I have three brothers; they are
in the garden. The princes are the sons of the king and
the queen. Those men are aged. They are German captains.
The English, the Portuguese, and the Germans are Christians.
There are four dogs in the street. Have we a map in the
school-room? Yes, there is a map on the wall.
Conversai^ao.
Tem 0 menino uma lousa? Sim, tenho uma lousa e dois
cadernos.
Ha uma esponja? Nao ha esponja nesta aula.
Quantos alumnos ha aqui? Ha cinco alumnos e tr6s
alumnas.
Qnantos ha em cada banco? Ha um em cada banco.
Onde esta o menino Carlos Esta na rua.
(Charles)?
Onde fica a porta? A porta fica acold.
Ha tinta no tinteiro? Ha^, sim, senhor.
Que tens tu ahi? Eu tenho alguns meloes.
1 The impersonal it is is rendered by e without a pronoun.
' The Portuguese generally answers by employing the same
verb as in the question; if the latter contains a compound form,
he generally employs in the answer only the auxiliary verb. Ex.:
Tem tido sorte? Have you had good luck? Tenho Yes, I have.
30 Lesson 3.
Isto 6 uma mfisa. Isto 6 um banco. Isso 6 a porta
da aula. Isso 6 o caderno do menino. Aquillo e a
cathedra do professor. A cadeira tern quatro pes,
elle esta no chao. 0 papel esta na mesa. Ha cinco
rapazes na classe. Cada rapaz tern dois lapis.
0 professor (apontando o objecto): Que e isto?, isso?,
aquillo?
0 alumno (apontando o objecto) : Isto e o meu caderno,
a minha penna; isso e o seu livro; aquillo 6 o
lapis do menino Carlos, etc.
0 professor: Onde esta o banco? Onde fica a porta, a.
janella? etc. Que tem o menino?, a cadeira?, a
m6sa?, etc. Que temos nos?, etc.
(The same exercise to be continued for all objects and forms
already mentioned.)
Third Lesson. Ligao terceira.
The Address. 0 tratamento [trvtv'mmtu].
The Yerb ter to have.
§ 32. The English address ''you" is given in
Portuguese by different expressions:
(a) Mostly it is not expressed at all: Tem tempo?
Have you time? Ndo tens lugar? Have you no place?
Esta doente? Are you ill? Fode diser-me , . .? Can
you tell me . . . ?
(b) You is rendered by the state or title of the
person addressed: 0 senhor dis-me You tell me. A
senhora quer sentar-se? Will you sit down? Qual e a
opinido do senhor DoutorP Doctor, what is your opinion?
0 sr. Conde (count) deseja passar? Do you wish to pass,
sir? 0 pae (a mde) que di^? What do you say, father
(mother)? Que manda o senhor patrdo (principal)? What
do you command? 0 meu amigo nao vd Id don't (you)
go there, my friend! 0 vissinho (o menino) cmno esta?
Neighbour (my boy), are you well? A prima quando
vae? When shall you go, my cousin?
(c) You may be rendered by the name of a person:
0 Carlos jd foi ? Charles, did you already go there?
The Address. 31
Ndo disse a Maria? Mary, didn't you say? It is to
be considered, that with gentlemen the family name
(sometimes also the Christian name) is employed directly
after senhor, while with ladies only the Christian name
is used, but preceded by senhora Dona (B^). 0 sr.
(Antonio) Correa dOlivevra escreveu urn novo poema ? Have
you written a new poem, Mr. d'Oiiveira? Tern (uma)
creada a sr"' D^ Maria? Have you a maid-servant, Mrs.
(or Miss) Mary? Upon country people or person of low
condition, the title Dona is not bestowed.
Itemarlc.—\n addressing somebody, the Portuguese general-
ly summons him by an introductory «c>/> (oh!).
(d) You must be rendered by Vossa Excellencia
( V" E") [vosytfSQ 'lenstvj in speaking to persons of rank,
especially to ladies and to strangers. This form may
be abbreviated io Vossencia fvo'ses'ivj.
N.B.— In Brazil these forms (d) are not usual; they
are substituted by:
(e) Vossa 3Ierce (V° Me) [vosv mdr'se]. Your
grace^ a title given in Portugal to lower people, maid-
servants, etc. This form may be abbreviated to:
(f) Vosse (V^) [vo'se], used for men-servants,
etc.; in familiar conversation it is also used among
gentlemen.
(g) In commercial correspondence there is still the
now antiquated « Vossa Senhoria^ [vosv sfpu'rivj, your
honour, to be found (abr. : F" Sr^).
Bemarhs. 1. With all these addresses above mentioned
the verb is to be employed in the third person— e.g., V^ Ex^
tern or e . . ., F«» Ex^^ teem or sdo; 2. as already said, yon
need not employ the address at every verb. If on the one hand
it would not be polite to dispense with it, a too frequent em-
ployment would be heavy. 3. The pronoun €tu» is used only
in familiar treatment and may be altogether avoided by
foreigners. 4. The pronoun «t;os», if not taken in the plural
(and even here it is better to substitute it by the third
person), is antiquated and only used in pathos, at prayers^
and in solemn allocution, for instance, to the king.
S2 Lesson 3.
§ 33. The verb ter to have.^
Present participle (participio presente): tendo having.
Past participle (participio passado) tido: f'ti&uj had.
Indicative (Indicativo).
Present Tense (Presente).
(See 2°d Lesson.)
Imperfect Tense (Preterito imperfeito).
Eu tinha ['tipv] I had nos tinhamos ['iijivmuf] we
iu tinhas you had (thou hadst) had
elle, ella tinha he, she, it, had v6s tinheis f'tijivtf] you had
dies tinham ['tipvu] they had.
Perfect Tense (Preterito perfeito).
JEu tive ['tivd] I have got, I nds tivemos [ti'vemuj] we h&Ye
had got
tu tiveste [ti'vejtd] you have v6s tivestes [ti'veft9f] jonh&ye
got got
elle, ella teve ['tevsj he, she, elles, ellas tiveram [ti'vervu]
it has got they have got.
Present Perfect (Preterito composto).
Eu ienho tido I have had
tu tens tido you have had, etc.
Pluperfect (Mais-que-perfeitq).
Eu tinha tido I had had
tu tinhas tido you had had, etc.
Future (Futuro).
Eu terei [t9'rvi] I shall have nds' teremos we shall have
f f ^ I thou wilt \ V vds tereis you will have
lu leras ^ ^^^ ^.jj ^ nave ^^^^^^ ^^^^^ ^-^^ ^^^^ ^^jj
elle, ella terd he, she, it will have,
have
* We hesitated to give so early, in this lesson, the whole verb
ter, successively followed by the other auxiliary verbs ser, estar,
haver; but as these verbs cannot be dispensed with to form even
the simplest phrase, and as experience taught us that a summary
arrangement impresses more easily and lastingly, we resolved to do
80. Yet the student is not supposed to learn at once all the verbal
forms, so as to master them, as, indeed, these verbs with their
resemblances and differences constitute one of the greatest diffi-
culties of the Portuguese language for the foreigner. But he is ear-
nestly requested not to put these lessons aside before having at-
tained an absolute understanding of the meaning and employment
of the auxiliary verbs.
The Address. 33
Future Perfect CFuturo perfeitoj.
Eu ierei tido I shall have had.
Conditional (Cdndiciondl).
JEu teria [t? 'riv] I should ells, ella teria he, she, it would
have have
. / thou wouldst \ ^ n6s teriamos we should have
tti terias^^^^ ^^^1^ ^nave ^^^ ^^^.^.^ ^^^ ^^^j^ ^^^^
elles teriam they would have.
Conditional Perfect (Condicional perfeito).
Eu teria tido I should have had.
Subj uncti ve (Conjunctivo). ^
Presente. ^
Eu tenha I have nds tenhdmos we have
tu tenhas you have v6s tenhais you have
elle tenha he have eUes tenJmm they have.
Imperfeito.
(Se) eu tivesse [ti'vesd] (if) (Se) n6stivessemos[ti'v€Sdmuf]
I had (if) we had
(Se) tu tivesses (if) you had (Se) v6s tivesseis (if) you had
» elle tivesse (if) he had » elles tivessem (i^) they h.a.d.
Futuro.
eu tiver [ti'ver] if (or when) I am to have or: if
tu tiver es (or when) I shall have, etc.
elle tiver
nds tivermos [ti'vermuj]
v6s iiverdes
elles tiver em. *
Personal Infinitive. Infinit(iv)o pessoal.
(Para) eu ter (hat 1 may have, to have (I)
» tu teres » you » » » » (you)
» elle ter » he » » » » (he)
» nds termos » we » » » » (etc.)
» vos terdes » you » ^ » » »
» elles terem » they » » » »
Imperative (Imperaiivo).
Tern (tu); tende (vos); tenha ndo tenhas (tu); ndo tenhais;
(79 have ndo tenha(m) (V^('>) do not
have.
^ The Subjunctive Moods in Lessons 3—7 may be only read
over here, while well learned later on.
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. S
.«
34
Lesson 3.
JRemark. Ter que or ter de indicates necessity:
Tenho de Id ir I must go there.
Tens que fazer a tua obrigagdo you must do your duty.
In the same manner are conjugated the compound
Yerbs, as:
ahster-se to abstain,
bear
ater to stick to
conter to contain
deter to detain
to for- entreter to entertain
manter to maintain
obter to obtain
reter to retain
suster to sustain.
Palayras.
A drvore
f'arviirjj
a droore fru-
ctifera [fru-
'tifarej
a fructa [ 'frutv]
0 fructo [' frutu]
andado [vn- )
'dad'uj >
ido I'i&uJ I
ir [ir]
a saude fsv 'u&d]
voUar [vot'tarj
a carta ['kartv]
a noticia [nu-
'tis^v]
0 trahalho [tre-
'bdfiuj
por muito tempo
[pur muitu
'tempuj
ficar ffi'karj
a casa ['kazvj
em casa
a ordetn f'ordv}]
nenhutn [ni 'jiUj
o assucnr
[e 'dukarj
o leite [Ivitd]
o queijo f'kvi^uj
a manteiga
[mvn'tvigv]
0 ovo f'ovu, 1)1.
'ovuf]
the tree
the fruit-tree
the fruit
(eatable)
the fruit (in
general)
gone
to go
the health
to return
the letter
the news
the work,
trouble
for a long time
to stay
the house
at home
the order
non3
the sugar
the milk
the cheese
the butter
the egg
0 did [J a]
0 pudim [pu '&l]
0 pastel fpvf'tei J
a batata [b^-
'tatnj
a pimenta [pi-
'mentv]
o sal fsaij
o vinho I'vijiuJ
0 pdo fpvuj
a came [karnd]
a volataria
[vuletv 'riv]
a caga ['kasn]
a dgua ['agwis]
a dgua ardente
[vr'dentd]
o pato f'patuj
0 copo f'kjpuj
0 dinheiro [di-
'jiisyru]
0 chocolate
[fuku'latd]
quando [kivin-
duj (algum
dia)
precisar [prdsi-
'zarj
0 jantar fsvn-
'tarj
0 caldo f'kaiduj
0 arroz [v 'rrofj
a cerveja [s^r-
a gaveta [gs-
'vetvj
the tea
the pudding
the pie
the potato
the pepper
the salt
the wine
the bread
the meat
the poultry
the game
the water
the brandy
the duck
the glass
the money
the chocolate
whenever
to want
the dinner
the broth
the rice
the beer
the drawer.
The Address. 35
Rule. — The nouns of material, taken in a partitive
and indefinite sense, are, as in English, used without
the article or a preposition: Tenho pao I have (some)
bread. But: Te^iho um pouco de pao I have a little
bread.
5, Exercicio. Leitura e yersao,
U menino, que tern na mao? Tenho uma can6ta. Nao
tern tambem um lapis? Nao tenho. 0 sr. vizinho tern um
cao? Tenho dois caes. Nao tinha meu Amigo (um) jardim
com algumas flores? Tinha, sim, senhor, e ainda tenho. Se
tivesse arvores fructifel-as, tambem teria fructa. Tern a menina
andado a escola nestes dias? Nao tenho ido, tenho andado
{or estado) doente. Quando tiver saiide, terei muito gosto em
voltar a aula. Teve V*. Ex*, uma carta da sua amiga? Tive
hontem. Tenho tido noticias d'ella (from her) em cada m6s.
Temos tido muito trabalho, para termos uma creada. Agora
teem ? Temos, mas nao a (her) teremos por muito tempo.
Nao tendo drdem para la ires, terds de (to) ficar em casa.
, 6. Exercise.
Have you some fruit, my friend? I have none. She
has the sugar. They have the milk. We had the cheese.
You had the butter. 1 shall have eggs. He will have tea.
We shall have a pudding. You will have" a pie. They had
no potatoes. He has had pepper and salt. Had you some
wine ? Will you have butter and cheese ? I shall have bread
and meat. The boy has soup and meat. I shall have no
poultry, but I shall have game. Your horse will have bread
and brandy. Shall you have a duck? My daughter would
have a glass of milk. If you had money, you would have
chocolate. Whenever we are to have money, we shall have
everything we want (iuda quanto precisarmos) .
Conversaijao.
Que temos nos nesta m^sa? Temos uma penna, tinta e
papel.
Terao os rapazes pao e leite? Nao, elles terao pao e agua.
Nao teve V^- queijo esta Nao, eu tive juanteiga.
manha ?
Nao terei eu came de boi e Nao, tu teras um pastel e
vinho para o meu jantar? cerveja.
Onde tern a sua penna e a Tenho-as (them) na minha
canfita? . gav6ta.
Nao teve ainda caldo com Ainda nao (not yet), mas eu
arroz? tive um copo de leite.
3*
36 Lesson 4.
Teria o meu amigo escripto Teria, sim, senhor. Mas ha
tuna carta, se tivesse tido muito que nao tenho tido
tempo ? tempo.
(Oral exercises to be done on the subject, as indicated in the
preceding lessons.)
Fonrtli Lesson. Ligao qnarta.
The Auxiliary Verb ser and the Adjective,
0 verbo auxUiar sev e o adjectivo,
§ 34. The verb ser to be.
Participio imperfeito: sendo f'senduj.
Participio perfeito: sido f'siS^uJ.
Indicativo.
Presente.
Eu sou [sou] I am nds somos ['somuf] w% are
tu is [ef] thovL &rt j vds sois ['so}J] you are
(elUj ella) e he, > you are (elles, ellas) sao [svu] they
she, it is ) (you) are.
Imperfeito.
Eu ira ['erv] I was nds eramos we were
tu Sras thou wast I v6s ereis you were
(elle, ella) era he > you were elleSj ellas eram they (you)
she, was | were.
Preterito perfeito.
Eu fui^ [fut] I was or have nds fomos ['fomujj
been, etc. ^ v6s fostes tfofttfj
tu foste ['fojtd] elles, ellas fdram f'forvuj.
eVSy ella foi [fot]
Preterito perfeito eomposto.
Eu tenho sido f'sidu] I have been
tu tens sido you have been, etc.
Mais-que-perfeito.
Eu tinha sido I had been, etc.
1 As fui is also the preterito of tV to go, it means also I
went (fui-me I went away); it is tte same for tenses derived from
the preterito (fosse, fdr^ f6ra)\ see § 44 and 45.
The Auxiliary Verb ser and the Adjective.
37
Futuro imperfeito.
Eu serei [s9'rvij I shall be n6s seremos [sd'remuj] we
tu seras [sd'raj] you will be
(elle, ella) serd [sd'ra] he,
she, it, you will be, etc.
shall be
v6s sereis [sd'rvif] you will be
elles, ellas serdo [sd'mu] they
will be.
Futuro perfeito.
Eu terei sido I shall have been, etc.
Condicional imperfeito.
Eu seria [sd'riv] I should be, nds seriamos [sd'rimnuj]
tu serias etc. vds serieis [sd'rivif]
elk, ella seria elles, ellas seriam.
Condicional perfeito.
Eu ieria sido I should have been, etc.
Subjunctivo.
Presente.
Eu seja ['sv^u] T be, etc. nds sejdmos [sd'gvmuj]
tu sejas
elle, ella seja
Eu fosse^ I'fosd]
tu fosses [fostj]
die, ella fosse
vds sejais [s9'sa'ij]
elles , ellas sejam.
Imperfeito.
were, etc. nds fossemos ['fosdmu}]
vds fosseis
elles, ellas fOssem.
Futuro.
^
-§
Eu for^
^
tu fores
03
elle, ella for
I am or happen to be
nds formos
f'
or if I shall be.
vds fordes
o
elles ellas forem
**->
Infinitivo
pessoal.
Eu ser
-^
tu seres
elle ser
T«' J
I may be or to be (I,
nds sermos
you, etc.), etc.
vds serdes
O
elles, ellas serem
,c
Imperativo,
Sc (tu); seja (V^.); side (vds) be. — nao sejas (tu);
ndo seja (V^.); ndo sejaes (vds) do not be.
^ See note of the preceding page.
38
Lesson 4.
§ 35. The Portuguese adjective follows, as already
mentioned, the same rules of inflexion as the substan-
tive with which it consequently agrees in gender and
number. It is the same as for the demonstrative, pos-
sessive, and indefinite adjectives, and the ordinal numbers,
which are all considered adjectives. Also the cardinal
numbers um and dois have a different form for the
feminine (cf. 2'^'^ Lesson): este Uvro, esta penna; meu
paCy minha mde ; algum papel, algiima tinta; o primeiro
(first) cdumno, a primeira alumna; dois bancos, dims
mesas, etc.
§ 36. There are adjectives, denominated uniforms,
which have only one form for both genders. This class
embraces those ending by -e, -Z, -ar, -az, -is, -oz, -im,
-ea and -o, and those ending by -s in syllable not accen-
tuated. Ex.: doce, grande, leal, amdvel, fdcil, getittl,
singular, capas, feliz, veloz, ruim, femea, so, simples.
Exceptions:— e5fe_, esse, aquelle, mestre (chief— e.g., mure
mestre), which have the feminine: esta, essa, aquella, mestra.
§ 37. The place of the Portuguese qualifying ad-
jective is for the most part after the noun as for those
denoting colour, form, dimension, nationality, religion;
while the demonstrative, possessive, and indefinite ad-
jectives precede the noun.
Palarras.
bad
good, kind
Velho ['vefiu] old
novo f'novuj young, new
ruim frru'i,
'rrui]
mau fmauj, adv.
mal fmaij
ham, boa [bo,
bov]
doente [du' entjj ill, sick
rico f'rrikuj rich
applicado fvpU- diligent
'ka&uj
preguigoso lazy
fprc/gi'sozuj
hello f'beluj beautiful, fine
cede f'seduj early, soon
tarde f'tanh] late
melhor fmi'fijr] better, best
duravel [du- durable, lasting
'ravdj
caro ['karuj dear
alto [aituj high, tall
gravde [' grvndd] great, grand,
large, big
sempre [aemprj] always, ever
0 caminho [kv- the way
'mijiuj
a invengao [tve- the invention
'svuj
0 teUgravho the telegraph
[t) 'Isgr^fuJ
o Paldcio de the Crystal
Cri/stal fcrif' Palace
'tai]
0 edificio [}^^^- the edifice
o poeta fpu'ft7!j the poet
opoemafpu'imv] the poem
colhido [kw gathered,
Tn&u] plucked
madurecido ripe
fmB&ur.f 'siifu]
The Auxiliary Verb ser and the Adjective.
39
a crianga f'kri- the child
pequeno [pl-
little; small
'vsvj
'kenuj
a fazenda [fv- the stuff, cloth
grosso ['grosu]
thick, big
'zendpj
0 marmelo fmvr-
the quince
opanno ['pvnu] the cloth
'mclu]
0 signal [si' ndl] the sign, mark
situ ado [situ-
situated
« duvida the doubt
'a&u]
[v 'tfuviiTv]
universidade
the university
nao tern duvida is does not
[univ9rsi-
matter
'&a&,j]
airadofai'raduj airy
0 2Jdu [pan]
the wood, stick
eomprado [kom- bought
'prad'uj
batitante [hvf- enough, adv.
a madeira [mv-
'dvjrv]
de madeira or
the wood
of wood,
'tvntd] rather
de pdu
wooden
0 negociante the merchant
a infancia
the childhood
[ndgust 'vntd]
[I'fi^v]
0 quarto the room
a manha
the morning
f'kwartuj
[ymv 'jivj
muito very, much
d^yianha
to-morrow
f'mumtuj
[amv 'jiv]
ideia [i'&£}vj the idea j
escovado [ifku-
brushed.
honito [hu'nitu] pretty |
'va&uj
7. Exercicio. Leitura e yersao.
Eu sou velho. Tu es muito novo. Elle 6 um homem
ruim. Ella 6 uma mulher nova. Essa penna 6 boa. Aquelle
menino 6 doente. Nos nao somos ricos. V6s sois applicados.
Elles sao pregui9030s. Ellas sao bellas. Eu era teu amigo.
Nos ja nao eramos crian9as. Era isso um bom conselho?
Nao, foi mal pensado. Eu fui tarde duma hora. Fostes vos
(fOste tu, foi V^.) mais cedo? Nao 6 Y^. Ex^ de opiniao que
j4 seja tarde? Se fosse mais cedo, seria melhor. Se as fructas
ja f6rem colhidas, 6 signal de ja terem madurecido. Isto que
sera? Sera um vestido para a menina. Nao teria sido melhor
escolher uma fazenda que fosse mais duravel? Se nao for
duravel, nao tern duvida; o panno nao foi caro. Tudo quanto
tenho eomprado a esse negociante, tem sido bom. A nossa
casa era muito alta e tinha quartos bastante grandes e airados.
8. Exercise.
Translation.
You are a tall man. The rooms are very large. He is
[a] Portuguese. Those are big horses. It was a grand idea.
She was a pretty little girl. He has always been a good boy.
If it be late, you will not find (nao encontrard) the way. The
telegraph is a grand invention. Be kind to the boy ! Be good,
and I will give you the fine fruit. If the stick were not so thick,
40 Lesson 5.
it would not be bad. If I were you, I should be diligent.
The Crystal Palace is a grand edifice. Camoes was a great
Portuguese poet. His best poem is *'0s Lusiadas.^^ He is an
heir. Is this an apple? No, it is a quince. We are no bad .
boys. The dog of my cousin is good and useful. Coitnbra
is the only university in Portugal. It is situated on the
Mondego.
Conyersatjao.
Nao 6 elle um bonito rapaz? Nao e tao bonito como (o)
Carlos.
E V^. tao velho como eu? Nao sou tao velho como V*.
Ex^
Sao estas mesas de madeira? Sim, ellas sao de madeira.
FCste bondCso para com (to) Fui muito bondoso para com
o velho homem? elle.
Esta Va- Ea- doente? Tenho sido doente desde
crian9a (from childhood).
0 tempo ^manha serd bom ou Sera bom tempo kmanha.
mau?
Estao escovados os vestidos? Estao; foram escovados pela
manha (this morning).
(0 professor dira, apontando paro o objecto, e o alumno
repetira:)
0 quadro preto ^ largo, a tinta e preta, o banco 6
alto. 0 papel e branco, o giz tambem 6 branco, o
tecto 6 branco tambem. Assim o papel, o giz e o
tecto sao brancos. Este mata-borrao e amarello, esse
e vermelho, aquelle ^ azul. — Como e o quadro
preto, 0 banco, a porta? Que cor tem a tinta, o
papel? etc.
Fifth Lesson. Licao quinta.
The Auxiliary Verb estar.
Difference between ser and estar.
0 verho auxiliar estcir, BiffereriQa entre ser
e estar.
§ 38. The verb estar to 'be (to stand, to lie, to
dwell, etc.).
The Auxiliary Verb estar. 41
Participio imperfeito: estando [i/tvndu],
Participio perfeito: estado [t/tadu].
Indicative.
Presente.
Eu estou ['tj'tou] I am nds eslamos (tftamuf] we are
iu estas flf'iitj] thou | vos estaes [jftdjf] you are
art I elles, ellas estam [{f'Wu] they
(elle, ella) estd [tf'ta] | ^^^ ^^® (you) are.
he, she, it is j
Imperfeito.
Eu estava [jftavvj I was, etc. nds estavamos [if'favvmuf]
tu estavas vos estaveis [tf'tavvtf]
(elle, ella) estava elles, ellas estavam.
Preterifo perfeito.
Estive [if'tivdj I was or I have estivemos hfti'vemvjj
[ifti'vc"
been, etc. estivestes [tfti'vcftg/j
iiveste ftfti'v
esteve [tf'tevd]
estiveste [ifti'vEftd] estiveram [tfti'vervu].
Y'ii ~
Preterito perfeito composto.
Tenho estado I have been, etc.
Preterito mais-que-perfeito.
Tinha estado I had been, etc.
Futuro imperfeito.
Estarei I shall be, etc. estaremos
estards estareis
estard estarao.
Futuro perfeito.
Terei estado I shall have been, etc.
Condicional imperfeito.
Estarta I should be, etc. estariamos
estarias estarieis
estaria estariam.
Subjunctive.
Presente.
Esteja ['tf't'esv] I be, etc. estejamos hfti' svmuf]
estejas estejaes [}jt}' gaif]
esteja estejam [}J'tv^vu].
Imperfeito.
Estivesse [tfti 'vesd] I were, etc. estivessemos
estivesses estivesseis
estivesse estivessem.
42
I
v..
S»4
Lesson 5.
Futuro.
Estiver [ifti
'verj
1
estiveres
>
0)
estiver
I
am or happen to be
estivermos
•^
^
fe
or
estiverdes
if I shall be.
estiverem
Infinitivo pessoal
.
Estar
^
estates
•^
estar
^ u
I may be
estarmos
or
estardes
fe
to be (I, you, etc.).
estar em
_c
Imperativo.
Estd (tu); esieja(VK) be, estae(v6s); ndo estejas (tu);
ndo esteja (V^.)i wao esteja.es (vds) do not be.
§ 39. Difference between ser and estar.
A. Ser expresses:
1. Existence in a general meaning, and is therefore
called "Verbo substantive." Ex.: Eu respiro^ pois sou
I breathe, consequently I am (existing).
2. A permanent state of existence, an essential and
lasting condition, which may be expressed by substan-
tive or adjective attribute or an infinitive. Ex.: A
terra e uma esphera the earth is a sphere. Sou feliz I
am happy. E um lento morrer it is a slow dying.
Meu primo e soldado my cousin is a soldier. A rosa
e uma flor, e vernielha the rose is a flower, it is red.
3. Followed by the past participle of a transitive
verb, ser is employed to form the passive voice.
N.B. — The past participle is submitted to inflection like
an adjective: Elles for am censurados, they were blamed.
4. Ser de means to belong to; ex.: de quern 6 esta
casa? To whom does this house belong? E de meu pas
it is my father's. Estes livros sdo do professor these
books belong to the master.
^ De before the Infinitivo pessoal corresponds to the English
of with the gerund preceded by a possessive adjective: A certeza
de estarmos salvos the certainty of our being safe.
The Auxiliary Verb eslar. 43
B. On the contrary, estar is used:
1. If the attribute appears merely accidental or
temporary. Ex. : A rosa estd murclm the rose is faded.
Elle estd feliz he is (just now) happy. Estamos ricos
we are rich — vis., we have at this moment and casually
some means, Estou doente, estou mal de saiidc I am
ill, I am in bad health. (Eu sou doente would mean
that I have bad health.) Estou hom (de saude) I am
well; sou hom I am good. Estd hem it is all right, he
(she) is well, you are well; estd mal it is bad, or he
(she) is ill, you are ill.
2. If a dwelling is to be expressed in any place
that can be left or the object can be removed from:
A criada estd na eozinha the servant is in the kitchen.
But: Onde e a cozinha? Where is the kitchen?
Bemark.—'S.QrQ it may as well be said: onde fica a
cozinha? because the place of the kitchen has been appointed
from the beginning (of. 1^^ Lesson, Remark 2"<^). Also: A
hoca flea debaixo do nariz the mouth is underneath the nose.
3. While ser with the past participle of the verb
forms the passive voice, estar with the same indicates
the state or condition, as: 0 negocio estd feito the
business is done, finished. A casa estd construid a the
house is built. Cf.: A casa e construida the house is
building. Elle estd preso he is a prisoner. Foi preso
he has been imprisoned. A conta estd paga the bill is
paid. (Cf. : e pago de contado to be paid in cash.
Somos pagos aos meses we are paid monthly.)
4. Very often estar with another verb (in the In-
finitive or with the Present Participle) is employed as an
equivalent for to be with the Present Participle : Estou
a escrever, estou escrevendo I am writing. Estamos col-
leceionando (or a colleccionar) estampiJhas ha dois annos
we have been collecting stamps these two years. Estar
a ferver to boil, to be boiling. Such a paraphrase is
called: conjugagao periphrastica periphrastical conju-
gation.
5. There is a certain number of adjectives that
are generally used with estar, such as : attento attentive,
contente content; satisfeito satisfied; cansado tired; za7i-
gado angry — e.g., estamos aitentos, satisfeitos, zangados.
44
Lesson 5.
§ 40. The verbs of the first coDJugation (in -ar)
form the participles in -ando and -ado; those of the
second (in -er) in -endo and -ido; those of the third
(in -ir) in -indo and -ido.
Palayras.
Situado, sito
situated
torto f'tortuj
crooked,
a foz [fof]
tortuous
a embocadura
the mouth
estreito ftf-
narrow, tight
[imhukv-
(of a river)
'trTsttuJ
'&urv]
sen, sua
his, her, your
hem 'conhecido
well known
its, their
[hekum'siffu]
apraiaf'pi'aivj
inteiro [m-
entire, whole
beach, (aea)-
'tr>iru]
shore
0 bairro
quarter of a
halnear [hahn-
bathing- . . .
[u 'ba.}rru]
town
'ar]y adj.
destruir
to destroy
populoso fpupw
populous
[diftru 'ir]
lozu] *
0 marquez
the marquis
a travessa [tris-
cross-path
[mvr'kef]
'V£8VJ
0 ministro
the minister
ingreme
steep
[md 'niftru]
['tgrdmd]
a caidstrofe
the catastrophe
empedrado
paved
[kv 'taftrufd]
[impd'&ra&u]
rnandou [man-
ordered
0 terrerw [td-
the ground
'do]
* 'rrenuj
(re)edificar
to (re)build
montanhdso
mountainous
[(rr9)iffdfi-
[mdntv 'yozti]
a cdlgada
paved (or steep)
direito fdi-
straight
[kai'aa&n]
street
'rvitu]
a escada [}?•
stairs
regular [rvdau-
regular
'ka&v]
'larj
a ribeira frri-
terrace on the
atravessar
to cross
'bvfrv]
bank of a
[vtrvvo 'sar]
river
cruzar [kru-
to intersect
que [Tcd], rd. pr.
which, who
'zar]
antes ['vnttfj
before
entao fin'ivu]
then
de
reinar [rrvt-
to reign
0 norte ['nort^J
the north
'nar]
condvaem ['kon-
lead
0 sdcco f'soku]
the sock, socle
'duzvi]
a ynedalha [m3-
the medallion
a Baixa
the lower part
'tfafiv]
[n'Uifv]
of the town
0 bronze ['brozd] the bronze
(of Lisbon)
representar
to represent
a Alta['aHv]
the higher part
[rreprDzen'tar
7
of .the town
a cidade [si-
the town
(of Lisbon)
'dfatf?]
0 terremoto
the earthquake
a colli n a fku-
the hill
[terra 'tnotuj
'lifiv]
a maioria
the majority
apra^af'prasv]
the square,
[mvju'riv]
market-place
The Auxiliary Verb estar.
45
seven
as
'^f^:^ }f''itM„,
after
0 peixe ['py}/}] the fish
yesterday
0 passeio [pv- the walk
the day before
'sviuj
yesterday
concluir to conclude
the night
pcoUu'irJ
last night
0 estudo [if- the study
the theatre
'tu&uj
a estada [}/- the abode
the concert
'ta&vj
ingrato ungrateful.
possible
[VgratuJ
sete [s£t9]
como f'komuj
depois [dd'poyf]
hantem ['ontvi]
ante-hontem
[§nti — J
a noite ['no}t9j
hontem a noite
0 theatro
[ti 'atruj
0 concerto
[ko'sertuj
possivel [po-
'sivsij
9. Exercicio, Leitnra e yersao.
Lisboa.
A cidade de Lisboa esta situada na iqz do rio Tejo.
Ella foi edificada em sete collinas. E grande e populosa. As
suas ruas, pra9as e travessas sao empedrados. Como o terreno
e muito montanhoso, ha muitas cal^adas e escadas que con-
duzem da Baixa para a Alta. Antes do terremoto do anno
de 1755 (mil sete centos e cincoenta e cinco), as rnas na sua
maioria eram tortas e estreitas. Bairros inteiros foram destrui-
dos pelo terremoto. Foi o marquez de Pombal que, sendo
ministro do rei Dom Jose I (Primeiro), depois d'esta catastrofe
mandou reedificar a capital em bairros regulares que sao atra-
vassados e cruzados por ruas direitas e largas. Na Pra^a do
Commercio esta um monument© do rei Dom Jose I que entao
estava reinando. No socco deste monumento ha uma medalha
de bronze, representando o marquez.
10. Exercise.
Translation.
Yesterday I was^ at church. Were you at the theatre
yesterday? No, sir, I was at the theatre the day before
yesterday; last night I was at the concert. Where is Charles?
He will be at his uncle's (em casa de sen tio). It is possible
that he has been ill. This hat is too large to be beautiful.
It would have been easy for Charles always to be faithful
to his master. We have always been very attentive. Are
you satisfied? He was angry while (emquanto) he was writing
that letter. The water is boiling. The fish is boiled. Our
walk has been beautiful. My sister had already been in
London.
1 A fact belonging to the past is commonly given by the
Preterite perfeito — e.g., in the above sentence by estive.
46 Lesson 6.
Conversa^ao.
0 meu nome 6 Fulano^. Qual 0 meu nome e Sicrano*.
e o seu? —
Eu sou alemao, mas estive Eu sou portugu^s e tenho
por muito tempo em Por- estado na Alemanhaha cinco
tugal. E o senhor? — annos ^favskca. (these oyears).
Tern sempre sido alumno Nao, senhor, estive primeiro
d'esta escola? (first) numinternato (board-
ing-house) de Berlim. —
Que tempo estara ainda aqui? Estarei ate estiverem con-
cluidos OS mens estudos.
Esta satisfeito com a sua Estou, sim, senhor. Eu seria
estada aqui? um ingrato, se nao o
estivesse; pois e muito bo-
nito aqui.
Sempre tem estado com saiide Nem (not) sempre; mas agora
emquanto ca esta? ^ estou bem e dou-me bem
(agree) com o clima.
Sixth Lesson. Li(?ao sexta.
The Auxiliary Verb haver to have, to be
(left), to take place, to get, to obtain, etc.
§ 41. As for to be, there are also for to have
two correspondiog verbs in Portuguese : ter (see 3*^ Lesson)
and haver. The latter, less common in the meaning
to have than the former, is especially employed
1. As a true auxiliary verb to form the simple
Future (Indicative) and Conditional tenses of any verb,
whereby it drops the h(av) and hangs its personal
endings on the Infinitive of the verb (see §§ 33,
34, 38).
2. as an independent verb in its meaning to he
(existing or at hand)— -e.g., ha there is, there are (cf.
1^^ Lesson). While so employed, it is impersonal and
consequently used only in the third person singular
and without a pronoun:
1 The Portuguese indicates by FuJano (and in the 2"^! place
Sicrano) a person (or persons) unknown or not to be named or, as
meant here, a name to be substituted by the right one.
The Auxiliary Verb haver. 47
3. To form the compound Future (Indicative) and
Conditional tenses: eu hei or havia de comprar I shall
(should) buy. Here it may be used with the pronoun
and must be followed by de. (Modern writers join
this preposition to the verb by a hyphen: hei-de
comprar).
4. In the meaning of to obtain: Elle houve o per-
ddo do rei he obtained the King's pardon. Havendo o
premio da nossa canceira obtaining the reward of our toil.
§ 42. Haver.
Participio presente: havendo.
Participio perfeito: havido,
Indicativo.
Presente.
Eu hei [vi] I have nds h(av)emos [(vv)emuf] wa
tu has [afj you have have
elle ha [a] he has v6s h(av)eis [(Tsv)vif] you have
ha there is elles hao [vu] they have.
Imperfeito.
Eu havia [v'viv] I had nds haviamos [v'vivmuj] we
tu havias you had had
elle havia he had v6s havieis [v'vivij] you had
havia there was elles haviam they had.
Preterito perfeito.
Houve^ ['ovd] I had houvemos [o'vsmKJ] we had
houveste [o'veftd] you had houvestes [o'veftij] you had
houve hQ had, there was houveram [o'vervu] they had.
Preterito perfeito composto.
Tern havido there has been.
Mavi-que-perfeito.
Tinha havido there had been.
Future imperfeito.
Haver ei I shall have, etc. haveremos we shall have, etc.
haverds havereis
haverd (there will be or is haverdo.
to be)
1 As this verb, with the exception of the Present and Im-
perfect, is rarely employed personally, we leave the pronoun aside
and also the uncommon forms in the following tenses.
48 Lesson 6,
Futuro lierfeilo.
Terd kavido there will be had, etc.
Condicional imperfeito.
Haver ia there would be.
Condicional perfeito.
Teria havido there would have been.
Subjunctivo.
Present e.
Haja [ajv] that I have, etc.
hajas
haja that there he
hajamos fv'^muf] that we have
hajaes /V'ja?// that you have
hajam that they have.
Imperfeito.
I Houvesse [o'vssd] if I had / houvessemos [o'vesdmuf]
I houvesses if you had 2o < houvesseis [o'v€8d}J]
\ houvesse if there were \ houvessem
Futuro.
houver [o'ver] if or whenever I shall have
houveres
houver if or whenever there will he
hauvermos
houverdes
houverem.
Imperative.
Haja let there be. (All other imperative forms are
unusual.)
Jnfinito pessoal.
Haver, haveres, haver^ havermos, haverdes^ haverem
(that) I, you, he, etc., may have.
In the same manner is conjugated the compound
verb rehaver to have or get back ; but this verb is only
used in forms which have the -v- (rehavendOj rehavido,
rehavia, rehouve, etc.)
I,
o
03
§ 43. There are still other (compound) forms,
Buch as: tenha havido j tivesse havido, ter (and tendo)
havidOy which we do not write at large, as they are
The Auxiliary Verb haver. ' 49
easily formed by themselves and rarely employed. The
same is to be said for the other auxiliary verbs, already
mentioned. The omitted tenses may easily be sub-
stituted.
§ 44. Yet there is still a tense quite peculiar
to the Portuguese language, which we have not yet
spoken of, because we wanted to mention it apart: it is
the Simple Pluperfect (mais-qiie-perfeito simples). It is
formed from the 2"^ person sing, of the Perfect by
hanging the ending -ste into -ra (houvesie: Jiouvera;
civeste; tivera; foste: for a; estiveste: esiivera):
thouvera, tivera
houveras, tiveras
Jiouvera, tivera
houveramos, tivhamos
houvereis, tivereis
houveram, tiveram
o fora, estivera
® foras, estiveras
"^ fora, estivera
■^ foramos, estiveramos
^ foreis, estivereis
^ foram, estiviram
§ 45. The student may at the same time be
conscious that from the same person (2^^ pers. sing,
perf.) there are formed two other tenses : l^J". the Im-
perfect of the Subjunctive, by changing the ending
-ste into -sse., and 2^^. the future of the same mood,
by changing -ste into -V (cf. the auxiliary verbs already
mentioned). This derivation is the same in any regular
or irregular verb.
§ 46. As for the employment of the Compound
Future and Conditional tenses^ there is some Httle
difference with the simple tense. Ilei-de fazer expresses
not only that something will be done by me, but that
I intend or am willing to do it. 0 que elle havia-de
faser corresponds to : what he ought to do. Nos Iia-
viamos-de ser mais economicos we ought to be more
economical. Nos seriamos mais economicos we should
be more economical.
§ 47. Haver de^ to be obliged to, may also be
used in other forms than Present and Imperfect tenses:
Ilouve-de ser cortes he had to be polite. Se ndo houvesse-
de considerar isso if that were not to be considered. Se
houver('inos)-de luctar com difficuldadas if there are diffi-
culties to be fought with, or if we are obliged to fight
against difficulties. Hade haver tempo p^ara tudo there
must be time for everything.
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. *
50
Lesson 6.
§ 48. In some tenses the 3^^^ person sing, of haver
indicates a time past and corresponds to these . . .,
since or ago: ha (havia, haverd, haveria) quinze (15)
dias a fortnight since or ago; haverd muito tempo it
will be long since. Ha tres horas que estamos esperando
or a espera we have been waiting these three hours.
§ 49. Ha {houve, haverd, etc.) quem, followed by
a verb in the S'"^ person and in the Indicative or Sub-
junctive mood, means there is a person or there are
persons who . . .—e.g. Ha quem diz (or diga) = it is
said, somebody says.
Que ha? = what is the matter? I^do ha nada there
is nothing the matter.
§ 50. Haver por hem means to think proper. It
is scarcely used but by or of the King or the govern-
ment. Haver por mal is rarely used and means: to
take in ill part.
§ 51. The reader will already have noticed that
in the Imperative mood the second person sing, when
employed affirmatively is derived from the same person
of the Present tense Indicative by losing the s; and
from the Present Subjunctive, when employed nega-
tively;—e.g., estd! ndo estejas! ,
Yet there are still for the auxiliary verbs some
little irregularities to be noticed: 1. tens becomes after
losing the s: tern, because a verbal form is not al-
lowed to end in n; 2. es is changed into se; 3. the
Imperative of haver is not used in the 2°*^ pers. sing.
Bemarli. Addressing a plurality of persons, the Imper-
rative form is the 3^^^ person plur. pres. subj. : tenham, sejam,
estejam (hajam not to be used). There is indeed an Impera-
tive of the 2°d person plur., but it is antiquated and rarely
used by modern writers. The reader will find it in the
general conjugation-table.
Palavras,
Traduzir
to render
hem [bvf]
well (very)
[trvd'u'zirj
pouco(s)
little (few)
outro(s) ianioCa)
as much (as
I'-poku]
many)
uma vez [oefj
onee
ultimo I'uUimu]
last
outra vez
another time
O U80 ['UZUJ
the use, the
ds vezes [&$-
sometimes
employment
'veztfj
fazer [fv'zer]
a differ enga
the diiference
to make, to
[difo'resv]
do
The Auxiliary Verb haver.
51
a lingua
' ['ligwKj
a disiinguo
[diftfsvuj
fazer distinguo
a pacie'Acia [jin-
aprender
[epren 'derj
depressa [d:?-
'presv]
a semana [sj-
'mvnv]
sabemos
covjuyar
[ko^u'gar]
a interrupguo
[U9rrup's§uJ
um dia santo
as ferias
I'fcn^f]
a (loenga
jdii'tsv]
cedo f'seouj
rencer [ve'serj
vencido
the language
distinction
to distinguish.
discern
the patience
to learn
quickly
the week
we know
to conjugate
tlie interrup-
tion
a saint's day
the holidays
the illness
soon
to overcome
p. p. of veneer
11. Exercicio.
a eoragem
[ku 'rajinj
0 dnimo
[ 'Tsnimu]
appUcado
[epU'ka&uJ
em haixo'
[ihaifu]
0 erro f'erni]
0 dinheiro
[di'jinrruj
a Inglaterra
[ilv 'terrv]
passear
[pes} 'ar]
ir a casa
em casa
de duas (horas)
so [soj \
unico I
a grammdtica
fgre 'mntiJcvJ
desde [dezifj]
0 principno
[pri'sipju]
Loitura o versao,
the courage
diligent
downstairs
the mistake.
error
the money
England
to walk
to go home
at home
at 2 o'clock
already
only
the grammar
from
the beginning.
Os verlos auxiliares.
Em portnguCs ha dois verbos auxiliares para traduzir o
veibo ingles to have, e outros tantos, para traduzir to he. Os
primeiros sao ter e haver; os liltimos ser e estar. No uso
d'elles (in their use) ha alguma, diiferen^a. As vezes essa diffe-
renQa e bem pouca, outras vezes nao ha nenhuma. Ha quern
considera uma das maiores difficuldades da lingua portuguesa
o fazer distincuo dos verbos ser e estar. Se nao houvesse
maior difficuldade, ou se essa fosse a linica, o estudo da lingua
nuo seria difficil. Mas haja paciencia, que havemos-de aprender
portugu^B bem depressa. Ha poucas semanas que o (it) esta-
mos estudando o ja sabemos conjugar os verbos auxiliares.
Estes verbos, sendo os mais (most) irregulares, sao os mais
difficeis. Nao havendo interrup^oes, como ja as houve com
dias Santos e ferias, e se nao houver doen^as, cedo hao-de ser
vencidas as primeiras difficuldades. Tenham pois animo e
sejam applicados.
12. Exercicio.
Translation.
There is a man downstairs. There are two men down-
stairs. There is to be a saint's day this week. There must
4*
62 Lesson 7.
be some mistake. There being no one there, I went (see
§ 36, note) away. Is there much money in England? Yes,
there is (transl. : there is, yes, sir). Will there be a concert
to-night? No, there has been a concert last night. What's
the matter? There's nothing the matter. I have been walk-
ing these two hours. I must go home. We all (todos) intend
to go home (see § 46), we must (see p. 34, Kemark) be at
home at two o'clock. Is it long since you have been learning
Portuguese? No, it is only a few weeks. And there has
been some interruption by holidays. Have you had a gram-
mar? Now we have, but we had not from the beginning.
Conyersa^ao.
Que tem o alemao? 0 alemao tern uma casa na
rua d'El-rei.
Ha ali grandes casas? . Ha, sim, senhor; e a d'elle
(his) e uma das maiores.
Houveterremoto em Portugal? Houve, mas ja ha alguns
mezes.
Tem havido terremotos mais Tem. 0 (that) do anno 1755
vezes ? (mil sete cento^ e cincoenta
e cinco) foi o maior.
Nao foi o criado comprar Nao havia peixe nomercado;
peixe no mercado? como o tempo estiv^ra man,
nao tinha havido quem fosse
(see p. 36, footnote) pescar
(to fish).
Seventh Lesson. Li?ao setima.
Employment and Con<3ord of Tenses.
Emprego e concordancia de tempos,
§ 52. As we have seen, there are two forms of
the Infinitive: the impersonal one corresponds in its
employment to the English form; the personal Infini-
tive is a peculiarity of the Portuguese language and
characteristic as for the personal terminations added to
the simple form. It is employed after a preposition.
(N.B. — In the regular verbs it is consonant to the Sub-
junctive Future.) Ex.:
Faze dUigencia para seres horn.
Take pains to be good.
Employment and Concord of Tenses. 53
Instead of Fassci sem ser vistOj you may say:
Passei sem me verem I passed without being seen (lit.:
without their seeing me).
Depots de (nos) estarmos seniados, conversdmos.
After having sat down, we talked.
§ 53. While the Present has only one tense, the
Past is divided into two, or — taking also the Pluperfect
—into three simple tenses:
A. The Preterito imperfeito is used:
(a) In descriptions of character, opinion, state, man-
ners and customs, representing an action as often re-
peated ; it embraces a space of time or a state already
existing and still continuing as for the time spoken of:
elle tinha uma casa; o homem era pohre; Tiavia rnido
(noise); havia reunido todos os sahhados, an assembly
took place every Saturday. Passdvamos o vcrno no canijw
we used to pass the summer in the country.
(b) If two actions are represented as being per-
formed at, or as lasting, the same time, as:
fJhovia emqtianto eu passeava.
It was raining while I took a walk.
(As^ for an action being interrupted by another,
see B, (c)).
(c) The Imperfect is used for all actions that do
not immediately belong to the relation, but are added
by the speaker in order to express accessory circum-
stances or his own meaning, as:
FMes foram a um siiio que ficavq muiio longe.
They went to a place that was very far off.
A lebre, coma corria muito, fioti-se nas pernas.
The hare, being a good runner, trusted to its legs.
liemarh. As in English, the Imperfect may often be
substituted by the first Participle— e.g., A lebre, sendo horn
corredor . . .
B. The Preterito i^rfeito or definido is used to ex-
press actions following one another. It is the historical
tense, being peculiarly appropriated to the narrative
style and therefore used:
54 Lesson 7.
(a) To mark a (point of) time positively fixed, en-
tirely elapsed relatively to the present or the time
spoken of:
0 cdo foi morto the dog was killed.
Na batalha de Aljuharrota os Portugueses venceram os
castelhanos.
In the battle of Aljuharrota the Portuguese vanquished
the Castilians.
(b) To mark the beginning of an action or a state :
Eu tive (uma) carta I got a letter. i
Elle teve medo he became frightened
Houve gritaria there was a clamour. ;
(c) If one action is interrupted by another, the ■
Imperfect denotes the action that was going on when
the other began ; the latter requiring the Freterito per-
feitOf as:
JEmquarito havia trovoada, elle entrou em casa.
Whilst there was a thunderstorm, he entered the house.
(d) Very often the Freterito is employed when in
English the compound Perfect is used, as:
Jd jantou? Have you already dined (or had dinner)?
Tive uma cJiicara de chd I have had a cup of tea.
Comprdwos cafe we have bought coffee.
The compound Perfect is, indeed, always rendered \
by the simple Preterite, and not by the compound, j
when the action of the verb is altogether finished in 1
the past and has nothing to do with the present time.
Compare: Gomprdmos assucar we have bought sugar,
and: Temos sempre comprado assucar ao ne-
gociante, nosso vizinho.
C. Another tense peculiar to the Portuguese is
the Simple Pluperfect (Mais-que-perfelto simples) already !
spoken of in § 44. There is no difficulty whatever in
its use. It may anywhere be substituted by the com-
pound form; yet, as the Portuguese likes to employ
simple forms, the student will do well in equally prac-
tising the simple Mals-que-perfeito,
§ 54. The first participle or gerund (Farticipio
Imperfeito or gerundlo) does not essentially diifer in its
Employment and Concord of Tenses. 55
use fropa the English ; it is used to express some reason
or cause, condition or manner. Yet it must not be
employed after certain prepositions which in EngUsh
require the gerund, while in Portuguese the Infinitive
or the i^ast Participle is used (cf. § 52, examples).
§ bo. The Future of the Subjunctive Mood, also
a form connected solely with the Portuguese language,
is used to express some uncertain future event. It is
nearly exclusively employed after the conjunctions se
if, quanct? when, eniqiianto while, as long as. Ex.:
Quando tivermos dinheiro, compraremos essa casa.
When we shall have money, we shall buy that house.
Se tftiver em casa, a porta esiard aherta.
If he is (or be) at home, the door will be open.
Emquanto ndo fizerem diligencia, nao serdo succedidos.
As 'long as they do not take pains, they will not
sicceed.
J
§ 56. The Conditional is employed as in EngHsh.
Examples :
Se tivesse dinheiro, compraria (or cowprava) essa casa.
If I had money, I should buy that house.
Ainda que fosse rico, nuo a compraria (or ndo a com-
prava).
Even if I were rich, I should not buy it.
Se ndo tivesse sido tdo tarde, o liomem ndo teria (or ndo
tinha) estado cm casa.
If it had not been so late, the man would not have
been at home.
So we employ in the subordinate sentence the
Imperfect (or Pluperfect) of the Conjunctive, and in the
principal sentence the first (or second) Conditional.
Instead of the Conditional the Portuguese prefers to
employ the Imperfect (and Pluperfect) of the Indicative
(see Ex.).
§ 57. The Subjunctive^ being the mood of un-
certainty, it is used:
(a) After those verbs expressing a will, desire, hope,
command, expectation, aspiration, merit. (N.B.— The
1 The rules on the subjunctive mood need be only read over
here and can be learned thoroughly later on.
56 Lesson 7.
subordinate sentence is introduced by the conjunc-
lion que^):
Quero (mandn^ desejo, espcro) que sejam modestos.
I want (order, desire, trust) you to be mod^t.
Merecia que fcsse^^attendido. t
He would deserve to b^ attended to. ^
(b) After the verbs expressing thought, speech,
beUef, employed in the negative or interrogative, and
the subordinate sentence containing an unce/tainty:
Eu ndo digo que seja assim. \
I do not say that it is so. /*
Julga que elle tenha comprehendido ?
Do you think he will have understood? ,'
(c) After verbs expressing some emotion (joy, fear,
fright, etc.):
Beceio que fido esteja em casa. [
I fear he will not be at home. p
Estimei que tivesse vindo.
I was glad he had come.
(d) After duvidar to doubt, ter duvida to have some
doubts, negar to deny, impedir^ estorvar to hinder,
ignorar to ignore, because of the negation or uncer-
tainty already included in the verb:
Buvido que ienhas chegado a tempo.
I doubt that you have arrived in time.
Ndo tenhas duvida que eu seja teu amigo.
Don't have any doubt that I am your friend.
0 pae ignordra que o filho estivesse doente.
The father did not know that his son was ill,
§ 58. With respect to the concordance, it is to
be noticed that, as in English, to a main time (Fre-
sente^ Freterito [perfeito e compostoj, and Futuro imperf.
indie.) in a principal sentence corresponds a main time
in the accessory clause*; while to a secondary time in
* This conjunction may not be omitted so easily as in English;
there are only a few verhs which dispense with it— e.g., Fedir
to ask, beg: -pego (que) esteja ds duas horas I beg you will be
there at 2 o'clock; esperar to hope: esperamon (que) sejam pan-
tuaes we hope you (or they) will be punctual.
Employment and Concord of Tenses.
57
the priucipal ^sentence corresponds a secondary time in
the accessory clause, as:
Mando ^ue escreva I oirder him to write.
Julgdra que tivesse escripto I thought he had written
Palayras.
A empresa
[I'prezvJ
dar [dar]
deu fdeuj
the enterprise
0 give
^3rd pers. pret,
of dar) gave
0 lucro f'lukruj the gain
dez fdef] ten
0 accionista /the shareholder
[astu 'niftv]
cO think
t\e position
to ^^eem
to v]ealise
to ameliorate
the ambition
pensar [pe'sarj
a posigao
fpuzi 'svuj
parecer
[pvrQ'serJ
realisar
[rivli 'zarj
melhorar
[mifiu'rar]
a amhigao
[vmhi'svu]
ensinar [isi'nar] to teach
morar [mu'rarj to dwell, live
curioso curious
[kuri'ozuj
a regido the region
[rd^y'vu]
0 temporal the storm
[tempu 'raij
durar fdu'rarj to last
causarfkau'zarj to cause
0 damno I
0 estrago ( ^^® <iamage
[if'traguj )
estar a espera to expect, to
[ifperv] wait
acahar [vku'har] io finish, ter-
minate
enorme enormous
[i'norm9]
avaliar to appraise
[isvvli'ar]
0 combdio the train
['kom'bo}uj
0 atraso
fn 'trazuj
0 relSgio
fryiDgtuJ
adiantado
[v&ivn 'ta^uj
ouga ! f'osr?J,
a noticia
[nu'tistv]
triste ['triftd]
esorever
fffkrd 'verj
outra vez
0 prazer
[prv 'zer]
a bondade
[bon 'da&d]
que horas sdo?
i uma hora
i hora e meia
sao duas
(horas)
sao horas
dar horas
estar enganado
[Igv 'na&uj
abwrecido
[vburr9 'si&uj
a quietagao
[kistv'svu]
0 remSdio
[rd 'me&iuj
gasto ['gaftuj
0 caso i'kazuj
tardar
levar [hvar]
0 descango
[dif'kvsuj
se Bens quizer
fki'zerj
the delay
the watch
fast, advanced
hark!
the news
sad
to write
another time,
once more
the pleasure
the kindness,
goodness
what o'clock is
. it?
it is one o'clock
it is half past
on§
it is two
o'clock
it is time
to strike
to be mistaken
tedious, bored
the quiescence
the remedy
worn
the case
to be long
to take along
or away
the rest
God willing.
58 Lesson 7.
13. Exercicio. Leitura c Tersj|o.
Esta empresa tern dado bom lucre; dea dez por cento
aos accionistas no anno passado. Temos pensado muito na
sua posi9ao que ^o primeiro momento nos parecia (Imp. of
parecer) impossivel a realisar, mas que cedo iavemos-de me-
Ihorar. Ha muito tempo que tem sido a min|:ia ambicjao saber
bem a lingua portuguesa. Se tivesse quern ji'a (it to me) en-
sinasse, havia-de estudar essa bella lingua. Desde que ca
more (1st pers. pres. of morar) sempre tenho tide bons vizinhos.
E curioso seres tu que tenha essa ideia. Na nossa regiao,
0 temporal, que tem durado uns poucos de (tiveral) dias, estd
causando enorme damno. Estamos i, espera que elle acabe
para avaliarmos o estrago que tiver feito. Ji chegou o com*
boio? Ainda nao; tera atraso; ja sac seis horas no meu relo-
gio. Talvez esteja adiantado o seu relogio. "^lao esta. Ouga!
Estao a dar as seis.
14. Exercise.
Translation.
What have you there? It is a hotter. Is it for me
(mim)7 No, it is not. It is for your neighbour who is there
at the door. Was there no letter for me? If there had been,
1 should have given it you^ It is a long time that I have not
had any news from my friend. I am very sad. If there be
no letter to-morrow, I shall write (comp. Future) again. It
is long since we had the pleasure of seeing (Infinitive)
you (a V^- Ex^). Have the kindness to tell me (de
me dizer) what o'clock it is. It is two o'clock. No, I am
mistaken, it is half past one. It is time for me to go home.
ConversaQao.
Onde e {or fica) a sua casa? E {or fica) ali na rua vizinha.
Ha muito tempo que mora Tenho la morado ha qiiatro
n'ella? ou cinco annos.
Onde esteve V^- Ex*- no anno Estive n'uma praia balnear.
passado?
Houve la muito movimento? Nao houve; se houvesse, nao
teria la ido.
Mas nao havendo movimento, Nao 6. A quieta^ao 6 e sempre
sera {or ha-de sfir) aborre- tem sido o melhor remedio
cido? para os nervos gastos.
» The complementary pronouns follow here immediately the
pronoun subject: eu Ih'a teria dado.
Exercises on the Auxiliarv V'erbs.
59
Ficando conherido aquella
praia, nao tardera que haja
(or nao tardera haver) mais
gente.
ya. Ex*- teve bon' resultado
da sua estada all?
Pode ser (it mat; he) que as-
sim seja; nesse caso nao
hei-de la ir outra vez.
Tive. E este anno hei-de le-
var a minha familia, para
todos nos havermos bom
descanQo, se Deus quizer.
Eighth Lesson. Li^ao oitava.
Exercises on the Auxiliary Verbs.
i Palayras.
0 quintal
[ulcln'tai]
the garden
a amendoeira
the almond-tree
s
[vmendu'vir^J
0 arbusto
the shrub, bush
florescia
bloomed,
[uer'buftuj
)
[flurtf'siuj
flourished
0 carvalho
thq oak-tree
a neve [c 'nev^J
the snow, frost
[uTcvr 'vnfiu]
crestar [hriftar]
to blast
a faia [v 'fa}v] the beech-tree
crestou-lhe
blasted it
a tilia [b 'tiliv]
0 olmofu'oimuj
the linden
[krif'ton,]
0 castanheiro
the chestnut-
0 olmeiro
the elm- tree
t(kiiftv'r)viru]
tree
[uoi'mviruj
a castanha
the chestnut
0 salgueiro
the willow
[vlvf'tvyv]
[usal' gviru]
Todos OS Santos
All Saints
0 platano
the plane-tree
f'tO&UZHf-
[u 'pUtvnuJ
'svntufj
derribaram-no
knocked it
0 magusto
embers to roast
fd^rn-
down
[mv 'guftuj
chestnuts in:
'barvunuj
the feast of
amaUa[v'matu]
the wood
chestnuts on
0 grupo
the group
All Saints
[u'grupu]
assado [v'sa&o]
comer [ku 'mer]
roasted
a drvore friicti-
the fruit-tree
to eat
fera [fru-
gostar [guf'tHr] to like
'tifdra]
0 damasco
the apricot
a cerejeira
the cherry-tree
[u&a'mafkuj
[esdvi '^BirvJ
a tdmara
the date
saboroso
savoury
[n 'tvmvrv]
[svbu'rozu]
a nespera
[n 'nef2)3rsj
the medlar.
15. Exercicio.
Quintal e drvores.
Temos urn quintal ao p6 da casa. No quintal ha muitos
grupos de arbustos e algiimas arvores velhas e altas: carva-
Ihos, faias, tilias e olmos. Perto do rio atras do nosso quintal
60
Lesson 8.
ha salgueiros. Tambem havia um platano' nmito alto, mas
OS ventos derribaram-no. Alem das arvrres de matta ha
arvores fructiferas. Esta cerejeira teve muita flbr e tera muita
fructa saborosa. Aquella amendoeira tajnbem teria mnitas
amSndoas, mas quando florescia, a neve Crestoa-lhe as flores.
0 castanheiro junto a porta da rua ha de »*iar bellas castanha^
que havemos de comer no dia de Todos o& Santos, depois de
as termos assado no magusto. Os meninos/gostam de cerejas?
Gostamos, mas mais ainda de damascos, di^ tamaras e de n6s-
peras. Tivemos grande quantidade de nesperas no anno passado.
16, Exercise.
In which street is your house ? Have/ you not a garden
near your house? Yes (see L. 2, note), a large and beauti-
ful garden with many flowers and trees. What tree is that
behind the wall? That is an elm-tree. And all these treea
are fruit-trees. We shall have very much fruit this year.
Last year we had very little. The treeij had many leaves,
but few fruits. There you have also very fine roses. Yes,
1 like roses very much ; also my mother ^likes them much.
Palavras.
0 jardim
fser'dij
vir [virj
entre [enttd]
0 vizinho
[uVB'ziyu]
a cancella
[kv 'selvj
ahre [atrd/
a rua [rruv]
0 tneio [tnvtuj
o alegrete
[weh'gretd]
a espScie
[v}J'p€8}d]
O cravo
fu'kravuj
a cor [vTcor]
branco ['brvkuj
encarnado
[inkvr 'na&iij
amarello
famv 'rduj
(de) cor derosa
[kordj 'rozvj
the flower-
garden
to come
come in
the neighbour
the trellis-gate
opens
the street, way
the middle,
midst ; means
the flower-bed
the sort, kind,
species
the pink
the colour
White
pink
yellow ^
rose
a margarida
[vmargv 'rid^uj
0 amor-perfeito
[uv 'morpdY-
'fvituj (pi.
amores-per-
feitos)
olilaz [uli'Uf]
a dahlia
[u 'ffaliv]
0 goivo fu' goHuJ
roxo f'rrofu]
cheira [f^irv]
0 jasmim
fuses' >nij
0 ardma
[uv'roma]
0 girasol
fugirv 'soij
aliceriQa [li sesv]
offerecer
fof^rs'serj
offercccl-asia
[ofsrd 'se
iBzisJ
ndo ad fnuti so]
the daisy
the pansy
the lilac
the dahlia
the gillyflower
violet
smells
the jasmin
the aroma,
smell
the sunflower
the permission
to offer
I should ofter
them
not only
Exercises on the Auxiliary Verbs.
61
-nias [mvf] but ^
colher [ku'Her] to pick
o que quizer what(evtjr)
[ulcdki'zer] you like
{quizer = Fut. will, desire)
conj. of querer
faga favor de vir please to come
[faiiSvf^ 'vordd-
'virj
j)refiro[pryfiru] I prefer
a uva [v'uvuj the grape
a pera [v 'pens] the pear
a magd [vmv 'sv] the apple
0 meldo the melon
[umd'lvuj
0 ramalhete the nosegay
[urrvmv 'fletd]
nem . . . nem[m}] neither . . . nor
a chuva the rain.
[^ 'fuvsj
17. Exercicio.
Jardim e flares.
Tenha a bondade de vir para o meu jardim. Entre por
esta cancella que abre pp.ra a rua do meio. Ao longo da rua
ha alegretes com flores (\e toda a especie: cravos de varias
cores: brancos, encarnado,a, amarellos, cor de rosa; dahlias,
margaridas e amores-perfeitos. Estamos no verao. Na prima-
vera estavam em flor o liiaz e os goivos, que sac d'uma cor
roxa e cheiram muito bem. Tambem o branco jasmim tern
um bello aroma.. V*- Ex*- gosta de girasoes ? Talvez ja haja
um em flor. Ainda nao ha, nao. Mas quando houver {supply
um), ha de me dar licen9a de Ih'o offerecer. Ja nao temos
rosas bellas; se tivessemos, offerec6l-as-ia. Hei de fazer para
termos flores todo o anno.
18. Exercise.
(a) Oh, what nice flowers you have in your garden! If
I had some white roses, I should give them to my mother. —
I have great pleasure in offering you not only white roses,
but all kinds of other flowers. Have the goodness to pick
whatever you like. Do you like the aroma of the jasmin?
I do, but I prefer that of the pinks. I shall have a very
•fine nosegay of white roses, red pinks and violet pansies.
Please to come when(ever) you like to pick flowers and fruits.
In autumn we shall have much fruit: grapes, pears, apples,
melons, and others.
(b) Mother, I have got a beautiful nosegay to offer you!
—Oh, the fine flowers! How much {quanta) I like them! —
Look {olha) at these gillyflowers, how nice they are! And they
smell so good {bem). We had no daisies nor dahlias in our
garden; our neighbour had (. . . 6 que [as] tinha. N.B. — £ que
marks an emphasis). We also should have (some), if there
had not been so. much {tanto) rain. If we are lo have (or
If there be) fruit in autumn, we shall pick apples, pears,
and grapes.
62
Lesson 8.
Paltfvras.
0 hordrio
the time-table
a lingua ['llgwn] the tongue
[uo 'rariu]
hontem [TrntviJ yesterday
a ligdo de leitura
the reading-
ao tod( [to'.d'uj
in all
[Ui'turv]
lesson
fazer ^^
to do
a Undo de gram-
the lesson of
tOdo, ioda \
all
mdtica
grammar
todos, todas j
[qi'b 'matiku]
que [Ij, before
which, that,
a Uquo d'arith-
the lesson of
a vowel hi]
who
metica
arithmetic
(do)que
than
[duritj'mstikuj^
cada I'Jcud'uJ
each, every
a Uquo de dou-
the lesson of
a semana
the week
trina [do-
doctrine
[esc^'mvna]
trinn]
a manlid
the morning
a ligdo de
the drawing-
[nmv'yv]
desenho
lesson
a tarde [tard^J
the afternoon
[dd'smju]
a noi^,e [v 'noUaJ
the night
a calUgraphia
the caligraphy
0 djji santo
the saint's day
fk^ligre'fivj
um dia feriado
a holiday
OS lavores
the needle-
[fm 'a&u]
[U 'vortfj
work
as ferias
the holidays,
a ligdo de coisas
the intuitive
rfEru>f]
vacation
lesson
um dia de semana
ia working-day
dar ligdo
to give or to
um dia util
say a lesson
I'utilJ
a tosse ['tJSd]
the cough
tanto [ivntuj^
so much, so
0 problema
the problem
tanta, tantos,
many
[pru 'blemv]
tantas
0 algarismo
the cipher,
quanto[lcwvntu], how much, how
faigv'ri^muj
number
quanta, quan-
many?
0 numero
the number
tos, quantas
f'numaruj
tanto(s) quan-
as much (as
hoje [osfj
to-day
to(s)
many).
10. Exercicio verbal.
Conjugate: a) Eu tive (tenho tide, tivera) uma liijao de
leitm-a (deaenho etc.)
b) que (qiiantas) liQoes terei (teras etc.). hoje ? etc,
c) hei de ter iima li^ao de . . ., duas li^oes de
. . . etc.
d) teria (tido) mais tempo, se nao tivesse (tide)
tantas liQoes.
e) se tiver tempo, hei de fazer o meu them a
(desenho etc.).
20. Exercicio.
0 Jiordrio.
Quantas li^oes tivestes {or tiveram) hoje? Tivemos uma
li^So de doutrina, outra d'arithm^tica e duas de desenho:
Exercises on the Auxiliary Verbs.
63
quatro ao todo. Haviamos de ter cinco, mas o professor de
calligraphia tinha tosse e nao veio (did or had not come).
As segundas e quintas feiras sempre tenho nma li(jao de gram-
matica francesa : as terras e sextas [feiras] ^ uma de lingua in-
glesa, e as quartas e aos sabbados uma ligao d'alemao. A
5ta fa (quinta feira) 6 meio feriada, os domingos e dias santos
sao dias feriados. As li^oes sac das oito horas de manha at6
ao meio dia e das duas ate as quatro horas da tarde nos dias
uteis. Se tivessemos mais tr6s licjoes nas quintas, teriamos
seis li(j6es em cada dia. 0 menino gosta da liQao de coisas?
Gosto mais do que dos problemas; nao tenho memoria para
OS algarismos e os niimeros grandes. E a menina, de que
ligao gosta mais? A de que mais gosto, minha senhora, e
de lavores, que temos todos os dias das duas para.
a li^ao
as trfis.
William
Guilherme
fgi'/ierm9j
Joao [^u'§uj John
Helena [I'lennJ Ellen
America
[v 'merikej
0 dinheiro
[di 'jivirnj
0 pecego
f'pesagu]
I estar fatto
ffaituj de
I o moranqo
[mu'rvgu]
a uva de norte
[norU]
America
the money
the peach
to be short of
the strawberry
gooseberry
Palayras.
j a groselha the currant
I [gru'zvfiv]
geralmente generally
[^dral'mentd]
prequigoso
[prdgi'sozu]
mais [ma}f]
diligente
j [ddli'^entd]
j irreqmeto
i firrdfci' etuj
0 erro [erruj
more
diligent,
industrious
restless
the mistake
0 thema ['temvj the task
hem que [bvikd] though (conj.)
nenhum fn} 'jid] none, no (at all)
contente glad, satisfied.
[kon'tentd]
21. Exercise.
William is my friend. I am William's friend (the friend
of W.). Here is John's brother. Where is my sister Ellen?
She is in the kitchen. I had a cousin who went (see p. 36,
note) to America. W^as he still a boy? Yes, he was very
young. The children had (= got) flowers and fruits. Had
you not money enough to buy some peaches? No (I had
not), I was short of money. Are there still strawberries
[left]^? There are no more (Jd nao ha)y but we shall have
gooseberries and currants. The boys would have had a holi-
day if they had not been so lazy. Little girls generally are
* The words in [] are not to be translated or may be dis-
pensed with, while those in () are to be employed in Portuguese.
64 Lesson 9.
more diligent than little boys. These are so restless. You
have had four mistakes in your task, though it was very
easy. When you happen to have no mistake at all, you will
have a nice (and) new book. I shall be glad if you be more
industrious for the future. And you, my boy, will be more
happy.
0 professor poder4 continuar estes exercicios, at6 que os
alumnos tenham adquirido uma certa facilidade no emprego do^
verbos auxiliares em todos as suas formas.
Conversaijao.
A que horas comeijam as aulas? (As sete, oito, nove,
dez.)
Que licjoes ha de manha? (de tarde?)
Quantas liQoes de . . . teem os meninos durante a
semana?
Tiveram bom professor? (Answer: Tivemos, sim, senhor.)
Ha outras li^oes e outros professores todos os dias?
Quantos dias ha na semana, e quaes (pi. of qual which)
sao OS sens nomes?
Quantos dias liteis ha n'esta semana, visto haver (as
there is to be) um dia santo?
Ninth Lesson. Li^ao nona.
The Partitive Article.
§ 59. To indicate an indefinite quantity or an
indefinite part of a whole, the Portuguese expression
is about the same as the EngHsh : bread is pdo, cheese
is qudjo; I have taken tea eu tomei chd; give me water
de-me dgua.
N.B.— The pleonastical some, used in English, is
only translated when you wish to indicate the quan-
tity referred to as little, or if followed by the plural :
Do you want some bread? Quer poo? Have you got
some money? Tern algum dinheiro? I was some
moments late cheguei tarde de alguns momcntos.
§ 60. However, the quantity being determined by
a noun expressing measure, weight, or number, or by a
substantive adverb, the name of the substance is pre-
ceded by de: nm pedago de pdo a piece of bread; uma
The Partitive Article. 65
pouca de dgua a small quantity of water; uma garrafa
de vinho a bottle of wine; um tanto de leiU a certain
fj quantity of milk.
Here also the employrpent is the same as in English.
% Q\. If the word which denotes quantity has
not the form of a substantive, the substance is not
preceded by de (again the same as in English): Tern
muito vinho he has much wine : temos tanto leite que . . .
we have so much milk that . . . ; ha pouca fructa there
is Httle fruit; tern havido hastantes batatas there have
been a good deal of potatoes.
§ 62. (a) Nouns and Adverbs of Quantity with de.
Um metro de fazenda a meter of stuff.
Um arratel fv'rratei) de assucar [is'sukar].
A pound of sugar.
. Dots arrdteis de farinha two pounds of meal.
Um par de hotas a pair of boots.
Tres leguas ['legwvg] de distancia three miles' distance.
Um quarteirdo de ovos 25 eggs.
(Um) certo numero de cartas a certain number of letters.
Um grupo de pessoas a group of people.
(Uma) grande quantidade d'arame.
A great quantity of brass -wire.
Um pouca de paciencia a little patience.
Um nada de esperanga a want of hope.
(b) Pronouns and Adverbs of Quantity without de,
Algum tempo some time.
Muito ar much air.
Mais dgua more water.
Menos caminho less (= a nearer) way.
JPouca distancia little distance.
Bastante trabalho work enougn, rather much trouble.
Quanto dinheiro? how much money?
Quantas pessoas? how many persons?
Demasiado vinho or vinho demais too much wine.
Poucas toalhas (too) few tablecloths.
Muitas collier es (too) many spoons.
§ 63. The partitive genitive with de or d' is also
used in terms equivalent to adjectives denoting the
material of which a thing is made or its origin or
purpose, as:
Portuguese ConversaHon-Grammar. 5
66
Lesson 9.
Um vestido de seda a silk dress.
Um chapeu de palha a straw-hat or bonnet.
TJma camisa de linho a linen shirt or chemise.
Um fato de la a woollen suit of clothes.
0 kite de vacca the cow's milk.
A sola de jantar the dining-room.
§ 64. Present Tense of a Yerb of the First
Conjugation (ending: -ar).
Eu acdbo [v'kat)uj I finish
tu acdbas you finish
elUf ella, ¥'. acaba he, she finishes, you finish.
nos acdbamos we finish
vos acabaes you finish
elleSy ellas, V'^. acabam they (or you) finish.
Participles :
Pres.: acabando finishing.
Past.: acabado finished.
Palavras.
[sviv]
['vvmufj
A refeigdo
[rrafvi'svu]
chamar [fv 'mar]
o almdgo
[al'mnsu]
a ceia
vamos
f altar [fal'tar]
a comida
fku'mtd'vj
o jantar
[u$Bn 'tar]
jantar
a sala de jantar
[ts 'salvff93yn-
'tar]
a hora de almo-
Qar [Ts'oryff}-
almu'sar]
faga favor (de)
['fasvfv 'vor-
(de)]
(sej faz [faf]
favor
a cMcara
[n 'fikvrn]
0 leite [u'lnttd]
quei'ia [korin]
the refection,
meal, repast
to call
the breakfast
the supper
let us go !
to want
the food •
the dinner
to dine
the dining-room
the breakfast-
hour
please (to)
if you please
the cup
the milk
should like
a manteiqa
[Kmsn 't^lQv]
a vontada
[vvon'ta&d]
ds sets (horas)
[af'svt'zorvj]
uma fatia de
pdo
tomar ftu'mar]
cortar [kur'tar]
0 copo [u'kopuj
gosta de
['goftv&d]
0 vinho de mesa
[u 'viyu&j-
'rnesv]
levantar
[Uvvn 'tar]
a talhada
[vtv 'fia&v]
a came fvkarns]
0 presunto
[upr9 'zuntu]
nove [novd]
dez [difj
the butter
the appetite
at six (o'clock)
a slice of bread
to take
to cut
the glass
likes
table-wine
to get up, to
raise, to lift
(up)
to rise from the
table
the slice
the meat
the ham
nine
ten
The Partitive Article. 67
0 prato fu'prntiij the plate, dish
a faca [i^'fahn] the knife
a travessa the dish
agora [a'cforvj now
a sobremesa the dessert
dar fdar], irr. to give
[vsohrd 'mezv]
da [da] \ . .
de [de] 1 g^^«'
a sopa [n'sopnj the soup
a colher the spoon
me [md] me
fnkii'/lerj
a sede [se&^J the thirst
0 chd [u'faj the tea
22. Exercicio verbal.
Please to conjugate the present tenses and participles
of the verbs: chamar, jantar, gostar, levantar, cortar.—Aiter
some practice you may add a complement and employ a noun
instead of the pronoun of the 3^'<^ person. You may also prac-
tise the interrogative and negative forms.
23. Exercicio.
Befeigoes,
Chamam para o almo^o. Vamos para a sala de jantar.
Sao dez Moras. E a hora de almc^ar. Ja aqui estao os
paes*, OS tios^ e os primos®, faltam ainda os av6s\ 0 Mama,
faz favor de me dar uma chicara de leite com um pouco de
assucar? Tambem queria uma fatia de pao e manteiga.
Tenho mnita vontade, ja a tinha ao levantar-me. 0 tio gosta
do nosso vinho? E vinho de m6sa. D^-me um ovo^ e uma
talhada de presunto, se faz favor. Quantas pessoas ha a m6sa
de jantar? Nove; nao sao muitas. 0 primo Jaime nao tern
prato de sobremfisa, nem colher de cha. Tern faca a menina
Henriqu6ta? Agora tem, mas nHo tinha.
24. Exercise.
When is your dinner-hour? At six [o'clock]. Is (the)
mother already in the dining-room? Yes (she is), but (the)
father and (the) brother Henry are not yet. The soup-plates
(plates of soup) stand (= are) on the table; also dessert-
dishes, colFee-cups and tea-spoons. There is broth (= soup
of meat), a big slice of meat, and potatoes. I should like
also [some] bread and some cheese and some fruits. Give
me a glass of wine and a small quantity of water, if you
please; I am thirsty (= I have thirst). We rise from the table.
Querendo dar mais pratica aos alumnos, o professor podert\
faz§l-o, reunindo-os como para um alm690, um jantar ou uma ceia,
e fazendo-os pedir e agradecer comestiveis.
* Os paes = the parents (pae e inae) ; os tios = tio e tia;
08 primos = primo e prima; os avos = avo e avo.
* avo, ovo, porto, olho and other words which in the singular
have [o], change it into [ojiu the plural (see 2^^ Part, Lesson 5,§ 18).
5*
68 Lesson 10.
Examples:— Eatamos a mesa. Ha uraa toalha branca na
mesa. Em cima da toalha estao pratos. Nas travessas ha comida.
Tomamos a comida das travessas, pondo-a (putting itj nos nossos
pratos. Oa pratos estao em frente (in front) das pepsoas. As tra-
veasas estao no meio da mf^sa. Ellas sao ovaes. Os pratos sao
redondos. A mesa e quadrada. Tomamos ch^ n'uma chicara e
vinho n'um copo.
Preguntas: Onde estamos? Que ha na mesa? Onde esta a
toalha? Onde estao os pratos? Que ha nas travessas? Onde
est^ a comida? Para onde tomamos a comida? Que ha em frente
de cada pessoa? Que ha no meio da tnesa? Onde estao as tra-
vessas? Como sao ellas? etc. etc.
Tenth Lesson. Ligao decima.
The Complements and the Most Frequent
Prepositions.
§ 65. The Portuguese does not speak ofi a declen-
sion of nouns. He merely distinguishes subject (sii-
jeito) and object or complement (complementoj ; and as
for the latter, a complemento directo which corresponds
to the English accusative, and a complemento indirecto
which corresponds to the English dative or genitive.
The latter may also be called the restrictive complement,
as it indicates indeed a restriction in the meaning.
§ 6Q. The object (accusative) is in the form
equal to the subject (nominative). The compl. indir.
(dative) is introduced by the preposition a, which is
contracted with the definite article into ao, a, aos^ (is
and with aqudle, etc., into dqudle(s)^ dquella(s), while
the compl. restrictivo (genitive) is introduced by the pre-
position de, contracted with the article, demonstrative
;)ronoun, etc., into do(s), da(s)t dum(a), duns, deste, etc.
see First Lesson).
§ 67. The prepositions are always followed by the
accusative — that is: by the noun in its unaltered form.
There is no form like the Saxon genitive.
§ 68. Prepositions. Preposigoes.
a [e] to, at, in, within, alem de [v'lvidd] beyond,
towards, against, till, on, besides
upon, with, by, for, after, ante [vnts] before, in presence
according to. of (local)
The ComplementB and the Most Frequent Prepositions. 69
antes de [Snhj dej before
(temporal)
ao ^ado de ) i i i.r, -j
[eu'UM,]] by, by the side
aope de ( "f' "^"'^ "^y-
[nu-pcd,] I "«="■
ao longo de [vu Idgudo] along
apesar de [vpg'zards] in spite
of, notwithstanding
ap6s [v'poj] after, behind
ate [v'te:] until
atrds de [v 'tra^dd] behind (s.
tras)
\ atraves de [vtrv 'vegds] through
I com [ho] with,' at, after, upon,
I ^^
conformed [Tcdformd] accord-
ing to
contra ['kontrv] against
de [dd] of, from, for, by
dehaixo de [do 'batfit dd] under,
beneath (s. sob)
abaixo d" [v tatfu dd] below,
beneath, under
depots de [ddpofgdd] after
desde [degdo] since
diante (de) [dplntd (do)] before
durante [durmtd] during
em/^ [vi, 57 in, into, to, on, upon,
during
em f rente de [t'frentodd] in
front of, opposite to
entre ["entre] between-, among
excepto [(v)'ij' sctii] except,
save
for a [forv] except, save, besides
fdra de out of, withQut
junto a ['guntuv] joined to,
adjacent to
para ['pvrn] for, towards, to,
in order to
para com towards
por meio [mviu] de, medianfe
[medi'vntd] by means of
perante [pd'rHntd] before
por"^ [pu
by, through
ur] for,
segundo^ [sd'gundu] according
to
sob [subd] under
sem [svi] without
sobre [sobrd] on, above
trds or trds de [traj(d9)]
behind.
§ 69. Examples exemplos [i'zeynpluf].
Ante 0 perigo before (the) danger.
Perante Beus, 0 tribunal, a minha consciencia.
Before God, the tribunal my conscience.
Antes da sua chegada before his arrival.
Diante (d)a casa before the house.
Na mesa (up)on the table^ na parede on the wall, no
ar in the air.
A mesa at table.
Sobre a mesa upon or above the table.
Debaixo do banco under the bench.
Sob 0 ponto de vista under the point of view.
Para os pobres for the poor.
^ Conforme is nsed only of something very sure, undoubted,
while segundo is used also of something doubtful.
^ em is contracted with the following article or pronoun
into 110. na, nelle, neste, etc. (see l^t Lesson); por is contracted
with the following article into pelo, pela, pelos, pelas.
70
Lesson 10.
Para comer (in order) to eat.
Para o sul towards south.
Olhar para alg%iem to look at or after somebody.
Ir pela rua to go through the street.
Trocar par prata to change for silver.
Por engano by mistake.
Feito pelo pintor N. made by the painter N.
Excepto 0 vizinlto except the neighbour.
AUm do visinho besides the neighbour.
Fdra de casa out of the house.
Conforme o preceUo, as lets.
According to the precepts, the laws.
Segundo a lei, urn boato.
According to the law, a rumour.
Junto a esta carta joined to this letter.
Estar ao lado^ ao pe de cUguem.
To be (sitting, standing, etc.) at the side of somebody.
Estar com alguem to be with somebody.
Bondoso para com alguem kind to somebody.
Encostar-se contra a parade to lean against the wall.
Atrds de or trds (de) a casa behind the house.
Palavras.
Comprar
to buy
a laranja the orange
[horn 'prar]
fvlv'rvjL'J
acoisafu'kotzej
the thing
a noz [v 'nofj the nut, walnut
amigo, -a, adj.
befriended,
a aveld [a,vi)'lvj the hazelnut.
kind
filbert
a loja [v'lo^nj
the shop
diz [dif] says
a niercearia
the retail shop
vir [vcr] to see
[vm^'stv 'riu]
0 figo [u'fhju] the fig
0 caixeiro
the clerk
0 damasco the apricot
[ukat'/viruj
[u&B'mafku]
0 mostrador
the counter
acaixafn'kaifvj the chest
[umuftrv '&or]
a amendoa the almond
vdrio I'variuJ
various
[a 'menduvj
08 gdneros
the goods,
0 vidrofu'vi&ruj the glass, pane
fu 's:£n9rufj
victuals
a lata [vlatv] the tin box
a(8) pa8sa(8)
the rai8in(s)
0 pau [upau] de the cake of
Mf)pasv(f)]
chocolate chocolate
0 chocolate
the chocolate
0 cesto [u'scftu] the basket
[ufuku'Ut?]
mais [tnalfj but
me hna]
08 doces
me
aconta[vkdntu] the bill
the sweetmeats
0 lojista the shopkeeper
[us'&ogi/J
fulu'siftnj
as conservas
the preserves
0 charuto the cigar
[i/fkd's£rvh'J'J
[ujv 'rutiif
The Complements and the Most Frequent Prepositions. 71
-perto de
a rua [v'rriiv]
a praga
[v 'prasiB]
estaQdo central
do caminho
de ferro
ftftv'svu 8en-
'traidukv 'mipu
ds'ferruj
0 portdo
[pur'tvu]
em forma de
ferradura
[t'formv-
(tdfdrrv '&urvj
a escada [vif-
'ka&v]
0 elevador
futbw 'd'orj
conduz [konduf] leads
a plataforma the passengers'
[vplutie 'formv] platform
(dos viajantes)
nos [nufj us
snbimos we ascend,
[su'bimuf] mount, go up
Oi,are(French)( P^^^
estende-se extends,
[fj'tenddsd] stretches
near to
the street
the square
central rail-
way-station
the portal,
porch
in the shape of
a horseshoe
the staircase,
stairs
the elevator,
lift
a entrada
[vin'tra&v]
0 tunnel
fu'tunfij
0 monte
[u'montd]
0 comprimento
[iikomprt-
'mSntuJ
0 kil&metro
[ki 'lomdtru]
0 aluguel
fuvlu'QsiJ
uma casa de
aluguel or
d'aluguer
uma casa minha
desejar
[ddzt '^arj
mostrar
[muf'trar]
andar
[vn 'darj
pagar
[pv 'gar]
morar \
fmu 'rar] ^
viver [vi'ver] ]
apresentar
[upr^zSn'tarJ
the entry
the tunnel
the mountain
the length
the kilonaetre
the hire, rent
a house to be
let, a tene-
ment house
a house of my
own
to desire, wish
to show
to go
to pay
dwell, to live
to offer,
. present.
2o. Leitura.
Numa loja.
Deseja comprar algumas coisas para pessoas amigas e da
minha familia. Entro n'uma loja. E uma mercearia. Falo
com 0 caixeiro que esta atras do mostrador. Elle mostra-me
varies g^neros: chocolate, doces, conservas, laranjas, nozes,
avelas, e diz: «V*- Ex*^- deseja v6r mais? Ainda tenho mui-
tas caixas de passas, de figos e damascos seccos; grande nii-
mero de latas de conserva, muitos cestos de laranjas, diizias
de garrafas de vinho doce, saccos cheios de nozes e de amfin-
doas.» Compro alguns pans de chocolate, uns vidros com
doces, duas garrafas de vinho do Porto e mais coisas. Pago
a conta do lojista e apresento a um amigo o vinho e uma
caixa de charutos : a tia um arrdtel de chocolate ; a meu
primo uma lata de conservas, e umas laranjas de Setiibal a
minha irma.
72 Lesson 11.
25a. Exercise.
The Bocio.
We live in Lisbon in the Avenida da Liberdade. Near
to this street there is the Rocio, a large square. On this
square is a monument of Peter the Fourth and the Theatre.
Opposite to the theatre Dona Maria is the central railway
station Bocio. We enter by a porch in the shape of a horse-
shoe. By the side of the stairs there is an elevator. By
means of this elevator we ascend the upper passengers' plat-
form. The railway platform is behind the passengers' plat-
form and extends up to the entry of a tunnel which leads
us through the mountain. This tunnel has a length of some
kilometres.
Conversai^ao.
Onde raora(m) Va(s). Bxa(s). . . . o(s) seu(s) amigo(s)? . . . a(s)
senhora(s) Teixeira?
Mora(m) n'uma casa de alaguel ou n'uma casa sua?
A quem da V. o sen lapiz? . . a sua penna? . . . os seus
livros ?
Onde compra o sen papel? . . . os seus charutos?
Onde 6 o theatro Dona Maria?
Por meio de qu6 subimos a plataforma superior da
esta9ao do Rocio ?
Onde e o elevador?
0 caes da esta9ao do caminho de ferro, onde e? -
Como se chama a estajjao?
Que outra coisa tem o mesmo nome?
Que ha n'uma [loja de] mercearia?
Que deseja comprar?
A quem deseja apresentar o que compra?
Eleventh lesson. Li^ao decima primeira.
The Attributive Adjective in Gender and
Number.
§ 70. The Portuguese adjective is, like its sub-
stantive, variable in gender and number (cf. Lessons 2
and 3). There are 2 classes of adjectives:
1. The qualifying or attributive adjective (adjedivo
qiialificativo or attrihutivo), which attributes to the sub-
stantive any quality, thus representing the adjective in
its proper meaning: a grande torre, o homem alto^ a
mesa e redonda.
The Attributive Adjective in Gender and Number. 73
2. The determinative adjective, which renders its
substantive prominent among and distinguishes it from
others — e.g., esta casa, aquelle livro, cada cdumno, niinJia
irma, etc. These latter will be treated among the pro-
nouns (see L. 24).
§ 71. The attributive adjective divides, according
to the form, into two classes of adjectives (Please to
repeat the rules given in §§ 38 — 40):
(a) The adjectivos uniformes — i.e., those wdth only
one form for both sexes or genders and consequently
invariable. They consist of
1. Those ending in -e, -I, -ar, -az^ -«>, -02, -im^
-ea and -0, and also by -s in a syllable not accentuated
(cf. § 36).
2. Commum, common also has only one form for
both genders; and so have the Latin comparatives in
-or: anterior id., former; posterior id., latter; superior
id., upper; inferior id., lower; maior greater; menor
smaller, minor; melhor better; peor worse; etc. As for
the plural, they follow the rule of the words ending
by -r: siq)eriores, etc.
(b) The adjectivos biformes — i.e., those which have
two forms and consequently a special termination for
the feminine gender. To these belong all adjectives end-
ing by any other but the above mentioned termination,
namely:
1. Thode ending by -0 not accentuated and pre-
ceded by i, u or a. consonant: frio, mutuo^ justo, hon-
doso.
2. Those ending by -u preceded by a consonant:
nu^ cru.
3. Those ending by -do, -eu (-eo), -or (-or), -es ('ejs)y
-oni, 'Um: sdo, hehreu, tutor, ingles, bom, nenhum.
§ 72. Examples.
A. Adjectivos Uniformes.
Singular. Plural.
Leve [Uvd] light (of weight) Those ending by a vowel
verde ['verd9] green take an.s.*
differente [dif9'rent9] id. leves, verdes, differenies
74
Lesson 11.
leal [h'ai] faithful, loyal
amdvel [v 'mavel] amiable,
lovely
legivd [h's'tvsij legible
fdcil ['fitsii] easy
gentil [jen'tii] gentle
aztU [v'zui] blue
singular [sigu'lar] id.
capaz [kv'pafj capable
felUf [fd'UfJ happy
velois [vd'lof] quick
ruim [rru't] bad, naughty
sd [so] only, alone
f^mea ['femiv] female
simples ['simphj] simple
leaes or leais {al becomes aes
or ais)
amdveis (el becomes eis)
legiveis (el becomes eis)
facets (il not accented: eis)
gentis (il accented: is)
azues (ul becomes ties)
singulares (adj. ending by -r
take es)
capazes (adj. ending by aj^take
es)
felizes (adj. ending by i^rtake es)
velozes (adj. ending by ozi&kBes)
ruins (m changes into ns)
SOS (those in 6 add s)
femeas (those in ea add 5)
simples (s remains unaltered).
B. Adjectivos Biformes.
Singular.
Masculine.
Feminine.
Plural.
Masculine.
Feminine.
Quieto [ht'du]
frio [friuj
formdso (s. § 74)
mi [nu]
sao [svu]
christdo [krif'tvuj
aHewMO [vh'mvu]
aldedo [al'divu]
comildo
[humi'lvu]
heir do [hvt'rvu]
hebreu [t'breu]
judeu [gu'deuj
animador
[vmmv'dor]
portugues
tdrto [tortu]
(8. § 74)
quieta quiet
fria cold
formosa beautiful
nua naked, bare
sd healthy, sound,
wholesome
christd Christian
alemd German
aided rustic, rural
comilona glutto-
nous, greedy
beirda or beird
of the Beira
hebrea Hebrew
judia Jewish
animadora
encouraging
portuguesa
Portuguese
torta crooked,
tortuous
quietos
frios
formosos
nus
sdos
christdos
alemdes
aldedes
comUdes
beirdes
hebreus
judeus
animadores
quietas
frias
formdsas
nuas
sds
christds
alemds
aldeds
comilonas
beiroas or
beirds
hebreas
judias
animadoras
Portugueses portuguesas
tortos tortas.
§ 73. The feminine form of these adjectives is
obtained as follows:
The Attributive Adjective in Gender and Number. 75
(a) Those ending by unaccented -o change -o into
-a; hranco, hranca.
(b) Those ending by -u, preceded by a consonant,
add -a: cru, crua raw, unripe.
(c) Those ending in -ao lose the -o: vdo, va (or
van) vain.
N.B. — The adjectivos augmentativos^ form their fe-
minine in -ona : comildo, comilona. — Beirdo (native of
the province of Beira) forms heiroa or heird.
(d) Those ending in -eo (eu) change this diphthong
into -ea [viv] : hehreu, hebrea.
Exceptions. — Judeu, judia; sandeu, sandia foolish.
(e) Those ending in -or add -a: ahrasador, -a
burning.
Exceptions.— Jwco^or colourless; bicolor (tricolor) of two
(three) colours; multic(ol)or of many colours; semsabor tasteless,
insipid, which are uniforme.
(f) Those ending in -es (-ez) add -a: franceSy
francesa.
Exceptions.— CoWes courteous, polite; <?escoWes nnpoUte;
soe0 low, vile, which are uniform.
§ 74. Those adjectives which in their last syl-
lable but one have close o change this sound into
open 0 in the feminine (as well as in the plural) form^
To these belong:
1. All adjectives ending in -oso (or -oso) — e.g., for-
moso ffur'mozuj, for mesa [fur'tnozv] ; formosos [fur-
'mozuf], formosas ffur'mozvfj.
2. The adjectives choco hatched, brood(ing); grosso
big; morno tepid; novo new, young; porco dirty: iorto
crooked; fem.: grossa f'grosvj, f'mornyj, etc.
3. The past participle of ^or to put, and compound
words — e.g., posto ['poftu]^ posta ['poflv], disposto, -a;
expostOy -a.
^ Augmentativos are those adjectives (and 8ubstanti7es) which
change their ending into or add the syllable -ao, sometimes pre-
ceded by some intercalary letter or letters, thus expressing high
degrees of a quali:fcy (in substantives an augmentation of shape,
weight, etc.)— e.g., maganao (from magano malicious, knavish [per-
son]); espertalhao (from esperto brisk) cunning [fellow].
76
Lesson 11.
Preliminary Bemark. By adding the syllable -mente to
the feminine form of the qualifying adjective, we form the
adverb ;— e.g., antigo^ antigamente formerly. Comprehende-se
facilmente it is easily to be understood. N.B.— Sometimes we
may employ the adjective form instead of the adverbial, espe-
cially if accompanied by ser: £ facil de comprehender. Elle
foi direito (instead of direitamente) para casa he went directly
home. (More particulars will be found under Adverbs.)
PalaTras.
A visita [t>9 'zitaj the v;sit
a pelle [peij
the skin
passar hem
to be in good
revestir
to vest, cover
(mal)
(bad) health
[rrdvtftir]
como passou?
how do you do ?
particulartnente particularly
como tent pas-
[pTsrtikuhr-
sado?
'mentd]
oxald [ofv'U]!
would to God!
0 calgado
shoes, boots,
a importancia
the importance
[kai'sa&uj
footgear
[impur 'tvsfTs]
amollecido ^
softened
receitar
to prescribe,
[nmuh'si&u]
frrQUBi'tarJ
order
servem f'servvij
serve
deue ['dtvd]
must
tirar de [tirar
to tear oft'
a consequencia
the con-
d9]
[kosa 'kwesivj
sequence
a beterraba
red beet, beet-
ai^esar de
in spite of
[bdtd'rrabv]
root
[up9'zard9j
raspar
to scrape,
pleno [plenu]
full
[rrvf'par]
shave
diligente
diligent
a raiz [rre'ifj
the root
fd9li'sent9j
carnudo
fleshy, pulpous
estudioso
studious
[kvr'nu&u]
f}ftu&!' 'ozuj
encarnado
red
assiduo
assiduous
[ikvr tiad'uj
[b 'si&wuj
0 mel [meij
honey
premiado
rewarded
0 vinagre
vinegar
[prdnt}'adu]
[vi 'nagrd]
a alegria
the joy, merri-
azedo [v'zedu]
sour
[vh'griifj
ment
amarqo
bitter
illustrado
illustrated,
[b 'margu]
[iluf'tra(ru]
instructed
0 xarope
syrup
quadrupede
quadruped
[fB'rop9]
[kicv '(fi-up^&dj
0 vestiidrio
clothing,
a vitella
the calf
viftu'aryu]
clothes.
[vt 'tehj
20. L(
jitiira.
A V
\sita.
Bons dias
, minha senhora
! Como esta V^
I Ex* ?
Bons dias
, sr. doutor! Es
jtou boa, obrigac
a! E 0 doutor.
' The ending -ido is that of the past participle of the 2n<J
and S^fl conjugations, the 2nd conj. having the infinitive in -er and
the 3rd in .j,..
The Attributive Adjective in Gender and Number. 77
como tem passado? — Nao estou muito bom; tenho estado
{or andado) constipado ha? algum tempo. — Oxala que nao
seja nada de importancia! Quern, como o doutor, tem de re-
<3eitar saude aos outros, nao deve estar nem ser doente. —
Hei de fazer para estar bom depressa. E uma consequencia
do tempo ruim. Apesar de estarmos em pleno verao, os dias
estao frios e chuvosos como emnovembro. — E verdade, tem
sido um verao pouco agradavel. Onde esta q filho de V»-
Ex*-? — Esta na aula. — E um memno muito intelligente.
— Diligente e assiduo 6 o que elle e. Foi premiado por ter
sido 0 melhor alumno durante o anno passado. — Tera sido
nma grande alegria para V*- Ex*- — E foi. Nao estaria {or
nao havia de estar) satisfeita, se nao fosse assim. Tendo sido
estudioso em rapaz, sera illustrado quando for homem.
27. Exercicio oral e per escripto.
First repeat the rules of Lesson 2,
What is the plural of alto, mdu, orfdo, sdo, alemdo,
casfellao, aldedo, comum, portugues, simples, brutal, azul, fdcil,
hdbil, cruel, civU, ruim, irmdo, bondoso, torto, menor, maior,
superior, encantador ?
What is the feminine of the same adjectives?
What is the plural of the feminine form?
Join the uniform and biform adjectives to substantives
of different gender and number; — e.g., um pensamenfo chris-
ido, uma obra christd; missiondrios christdos; igrejas chris-
ids, etc.
28. Translation.
The quadrupeds are covered with skins. The skins of
some animals serve particularly to make shoes and boots.
The skin, after being torn off the animal, is softened and
scraped. — The beetroot is a plant with (de) [a]^ very thick
and fleshy root of white or red colour. Out of the white
beetroot sugar is made.— [The] Sugar, [the] honey and
{the] syrup are sweet; [the] vinegar is sour, and [the] beer
is bitter.
# Conrersaqao.
De que sao revestidos os (animaes) quadrupedes?
Para que 6 que nos servem as pelles dos bois, das vac-
cas, das vitellas?
Como se prepara a pelle, depois de tirada do animal?
De que plant a, produzida na Europa, se faz assucar?
^ The words in [] are not to be translated.
78 Lesson 12.
Que parte da beterraba e que serve para fazer assucar ?
Como Ǥ a raiz da beterraba?
Que qualidade tern o assucar? o mel? o xarope?
Conheceis fructos que tambem sao doces?
Que qualidade tern o vinagre? a cerveja? o sal?
Qual 6 0 gosto das coisas que sao nem doces, uem az6>
das ou salgados ou amargos?
Nomeie um liqulido que da sua natureza 6 insipido!
Twelfth Lesson. Li^ao decima segunda.
The Position of the Attributive Adjective.
§ 75. The position of the adjective is greatljr
influenced by: 1. its greater or lesser importance (if
accented or unaccented), 2. its category, and 3, the
harmony of the phrase.
§ 76. The following rules should be noted:
1. The unaccented adjective, which, being rather
ornamental than discriminative, forms a natural in-
herent characteristic, precedes its noun: um horn livro;
rtiau tempo; a branca neve the white snow; o doce m£l;
a negra sorte the dark destiny. (Here horn and man
are unaccented; branca and doce do not discriminate ;
negra is employed ornamentally and figuratively). Cf. :
um livro bom, tempo mau, papel branco^ fructa doce,
capa negra. Cf. :
A inter essarJe crianga — uma confer enda interessante.
Um simples aperto de moo a simple pressing of the
hand; uma phrase simples; um vestido simples.
Um grande homem a great man.
um homem grande a tall man.
Bemark. — To this group belong also those adjectives
employed in mere formal addresses, as in writing letters, etc.
— e.g., Illustrissimo Senhor, Excellentissima Senhora; de
ya. ji^x°- attento servidorj respeitoso aMnirador, etc.; yet in
these finishing formulas they may also follow, especially if
several are employed to accompany the same noun; — e.g., ad-
mirador respeitoso e gratissimo (abbr. : adm<^- resp. °- e grat^^).
2. The accented adjective, which, being rather
discriminative than ornamental, forms a mere accidental
characteristic, follows its noun. To this group belong:
The Position of the Attributive Adjective. 79
(a) Adjectives denoting nationality, religion, dignity^
employment, material — e.g. :
A literafura espanhola the Spanish literature.
um pintor neerlancUs a Dutch painter
a igreja cathdlica the Catholic church
a guarda municipal the town militia
0 govern ador civil the (Lord) Mayor
0 gado lanifero (or lanigero) wool-bearing animals
dgua mineral mineral water
a industria mineira the mining (industry).
(b) Adjectives denoting qualities perceptible by the
senses — e.g., colour, shape, size, taste, smell, etc. — e.g.:
Uma sola comprida a long hall
uma janella ogival a pointed or arched window
uma faca aguda a pointed knife
um vestido castanho a brown dress
uma herva aromdtica an aromatic herb
uma amtndoa amarga a bitter almond,
(but: uma amarga decepcdo, because here the adjective
is employed figuratively).
(c) The verbal adjectives or participles — e.g.:
ZIma janella pintada a painted window
a rainha reinante the queen-regent.
(d) Adjectives accompanied by an adverb or an
adverbial phrase, such as muito very, pouco little,
hastante enough, demais or dentasiado too, tdo so, etc.
Uma carta muito extensa a very long letter
uma tarefa pouco agraddvel a rather disagreeable task
uma porta demasiado estreita too narrow a door
um aluguel relativamente barato a hiring of relative
cheapness
um liomem digno de fe a man worthy of belief.
3. Many adjectives may precede or follow the noun,
this being often without any importance, but still
oftener denoting difference.
Urn horn homem a good- um homem horn an honest
natured man man
um pohre homem a poor man um homem, pdbre an indigent
(to be lamented, unhappy) man
certa noticia a certain news uma noticia cert a exact tidings
um hello homem an excellent um homem hello a handsome
man man
80 Lesson 12.
meu caro amigo my dear uma viagem cara an expensive
friend journey
uma alta personagem a high urn tecto alto a high roof
personage
um franco riso a frank a entrada franca free entry
laughter
uma leve duvida a slight doubt um fardo leve a light burden
meu proprio proceder [pru- uma maneira propria an ap-
Sdder] my own behaviour propriate manner
0 prdprio amdr real love o amor prdprio self-love.
§ 77. If a noun is accompanied by several ad-
jectives, the harmony of the phrase decides the po-
sition of the adjective, yet without contradicting the
rules above. Cf. : um hello dia — um dia hello e (and I)
soalheiro (or: um hello dia soalheiro, as a fine day gene-
rally is a sunny day; uma grande hatalha sanguinolenta
a great and bloody battle ; but : uma hatalha sanguino-
lenta e victoriosa, as in English ; os tenues ramos floridos
or OS ramos tenues e floridos the thin, blooming twigs, etc.
§ 78. Though as a rule short adjectives precede
the noun, there are also those which always follow
it— e.g.: frio, secco, gordo, quente^ ameno, etc
§ 79. An adjective qualifying two substantives
must be plural:
Patdo e Carlos estao crescidos.
Paul and Charles have grown, are talL
Minha irmd e minha prima sao appUcadas.
My sister and my cousin are diligent.
If the nouns (or pronouns) are of different genders,
the adjective is put in the plural masculine, provided
the nouns denote persons or living heings — e.g.:
Eomens e mulheres estavam satisfeitos.
Men and women were satisfied.
If, on the contrary, things sue spoken of, the gender
of the last substantive prevails — e.g.:
Contos e anecdotas honitas,—where&s:
Anecdotas e contos honiios.
§ 80. To a noun in the plural are added several
adjectives in the singular, if each adjective would be ac-
companied, when alone, by the noun in the singular:
As linguas inglesa e portuguesa.
The English and Portuguese languages.
The Poeition of the Attributive Adjective.
81
Palayras.
A habitagdo
['ettitis 'siiuj
hdbitar
0 alicerce
[uh'ssrsd]
a parede
[py 're&9j
0 pavimento
[pwi 'meninj
0 sobrado
[su'brad'uj
assentar
cresce [kref'sd]
seguro [sd'guruj
0 casco ['kafkuj
geral [^d'ral]
geralniente, em
geral
0 tijolo [ti'^olu]
the dwelling
(-place), habi-
tation
to dwell, live
the foundation,
the wall
the pavement
the floor
to rest, settle
grows up
safe
the skull
general
gene]*ally
the (burnt)
brick
0 adoho /» '&(A>u] the sun-dried
brick, adobe
the clay
baked
0 harro [ubarru]
cozido
[ku'zi&uj
cru [kru]
a madeira
mv'&Tsirv]
0 madeiro
[mv'ffeiru]
raw
the wood
the block
a trave ['travd]
a viga ['vigv]
a lenha ['lv?jvj
0 lenho [l^puj
aparar
[epB War]
0 machado
[mv'fa&u]
a face [fvsd]
0 quadrado
[kwv '&ra&u]
0 rect(Mgulo
[rre 'tvgulu]
0 telhado
[tv'/ia&uj
a telha ['tvfiv]
assente [v 'sentdj
a ripa ['rripv]
0 zinco f'zikuj
a lousa ['lozv]
tornarftur'narj
demasiado
[ddtnnzt'ad'a]
quente [kentd]
inclinado
[ikh'nad'uj
a facilidade
[fvsdU'&a&sJ
a chuva ['fuwj
the beam, joist
the little beam
or joist
the wood
the block
to cut, clip
the axe
the side
the square,
quadrangle
the rectangle
the roof
the tile
sitting; firm,
solid
the lath
the zinc
the slate
to make
too (much)
hot
inclined
the facility
the rain.
29. Leitura.
A habitagdo.
Os homens habitam em casas. Dma casa tern alicerce,
parades, pavimentos ou sobrados, e telhado. 0 alicerce
e a raiz d'onde a casa cresce. Sem bom alicerce nao ha casa
segura. As parades sac o casco da casa; geralmente sac feitas
de pedra, mas ha parades feitas de tijolos e tambem de
adobes. Os tijolos sao de barro muito bem cozido. Os ad6bos
sao tambem de barro^ mas cru. Ha barro vermelho e barro
branco. Os pavimentos ou sobrados ^ao em geral de madeira.
Os sobrados assentam sobre vigas que sao madeiros mais ou
menos grosses; e as vigas assentam sobre as traves, que sao
lenhos grosses e compridos, aparados a machado, com quatro
faces regulares em rectangulo. 0 telhado e geralmente for-
mado de telhas assentes sobre ripas. Ha telhados feitos de
zinco, e tambem os ha feitos de lousa. Mas o zinco e a
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 6
82 Lesson 12.
lousa tornam as casas demasiado quentes no verao. Os te-
Ihados sao inclinados para deixarem correr com facilidade a-
agua das chnvas.
(Trindade Coelho: 0 primeiro Livro de Leitura.)
30. Exercicio oral ou per escripto.
The verbs of the present tense of No. 29 to be change<d :
1. into the preterito imperfeito, 2. itito the futuro, 3. into the
presente do conjunctivo, 4. into the pret. imperf. do con-
junctivo.
N.B. — Cresce(r) forms 1. crescia, 2. crescera, 3. cresQa.
4. crescesse; assentar forms 1. assentavam, 2. assentarao;
3. assentem, 4. assentassem; tomar forms like assentar. —
In the Subjunctive begin each sentence by que.
Ex.: Os homens habitavam em casas. Uma casa tinha
alicerce . . .
Os homens habitarao em casas. Uma casa tera
alicerce ...
Nao ha quem duvide que os homens habitem em
casas; que uma casa tenha alicerces . . .
Nao havia quem duvidasse que os homens habi-
tassem . , . etc.
31. Tema.
(The) Portuguese literature is very interesting, but little
known. The prevailing religion in Portugal is the Catholic.
In the Museum "das Janellas Verdes" in Lisbon are pictures
of Portuguese, Spanish, Italian, Dutch^ and German artists.
On (the) Portuguese soil are to be found many springs of
mineral water. In Germany there are besides the national
wines also French and Portuguese wines and good German
beer. Men and women are small in that country. The books
and letters on the table were open. The Spanish and Italian
languages are very melodious. Cervantes was a great Spa-
nish poet, and Raphael a celebrated Italian painter.
OonversaQao.
Se fSsse rico, estaria mkis contente ou feliz?
Quando eras novo, em que coll6gio estavas?
Teremos de continuar a marcha apesar de estarmos
cansados ?
*Teve Y^- Ex* a visita d'uns parentes aflfastados (dis-
tant) antes de ir ao campo?
0 meu amigo (you) falar-lhe-ha, se ella estiver em sua
casa?
Comparison of the Adjective. 83
No caso que nao esteja, dara o meu recado?
E este o caminho para a proxima cidade?
Esteja V*' Ex*- descansado (easy), que este e o camir^o
certo (right).
Exercise: Conjugate the phrases of the conversation by-
changing persons, numbers and genders^ as well as
the interrogative form into the negative or positive,
or negative-interrogative form.
Thirteenth Lesson. Li^ao decima terceira.
Comparison of the Adjective.
§ 81. The comparison of Portuguese adjectives is
analogous to the compound form of the English. As
for the Comparative, we distinguish 1. that of a higher
degree (comparativo de superioridade) and 2. that of a
lower degree (comparativo de inferioridade). The former
is formed by putting the adverb mats (more) before
the adjective, the latter by employing the word menos
(less)— e.g.:
Positivo. Compar. de sup. Compar. de inferior,
hello, -a beautiful^ mais heUo, mais menos hello, mefws
bella more beau- bella less beauti-
tiful fal
N.B. — There is no comparison equivalent to the
simple or Anglo-Saxon form of Enghsh comparison —
e.g.: alto high; mais alto higher; Buperlativo o mais
alto the highest.
§ 82. The Superlative too has two forms; we
distinguish :
1. the relative Superlative (superlativo relativo or ex-
chisivo). This compares several objects and denotes that a
certain quality exists in one of them in the highest
(or lowest) degree relatively to others of the same kind ;
eoocluding these from this same degree. It is formed by
the words o mais and o menos (cf. § 81 N.B.), the more
and the most;
1 In the comparison the adjective is subject to the same
rules concerning gender and number as in the positive form.
6*
84
Lesson 13.
2.. the absolute Superlative (superlatho absoluto or
simples) which denotes simply that an object possesses a
quality in a very high degree. It does not compare
nor select, but attributes in an absolute manner some
quality in a very high degree. It corresponds to the
Enghsh most preceded by the indefinite article, or to
the adverbs very, extraordinary, extremely, etc.
The absolute or simple superlative is formed by
the ending -issimo added to the adjective (see the follow-
ing Lesson).
§ 83. There are some adjectives which, besides
their regular comparison, have an irregular Latin one,
as well as an absolute superlative.
Positivo. Comparativo.
Superlativo
relativo or
excluaivo.
Superlativo abso-
lute or simples
superlativo.
alto high
horn good
mau bad,
evil
grande
great
pequeno
little,
small
mais alto J su-
perior 'higher
mais bom (rare),
melhor better
fnais mau. peor
worse
mais grande
(rare), ^aior
greater
mais pequeno
more little,
menor smaller
0 mais alto, o su-\(ooYum) altissi-
premo, o summoi mo, suprSmo,
the highest | stmimo very
high, (a) most
high.
0 mais bom (rare),
0 melhor better
0 mais mau, o peor
the worst
0 mais grande
(rare), o maior,
0 mdximo the
greatest
0 mais pequeno
the most little,
0 menor, o mi-
m'mo the smallest
(o or um) dptimo
the best.
(0 or um) pessi-
mo very bad.
(o or um) mdxi-
»wo very great.
(0 or um) mini-
mo very little,
very small.
Please to notice that alto in its proper meaning,
mau in its meaning et>il, and pequeno in its meaning
little, have a regular comparison; cf.: a drvore mais
alta; a mais alia or a supretna confianga; o summo
pontifice (pope); o solo mais mau; a medida peor; o pc-
dago mats pequeno; a menor duvida.
Comparison of the Adjective. 85
As an outer characteristic of the Latin absolute
Superlative you may notice that it can be employed
not only with the definite, but (and mostly) also with
the indefinite article — e.g. : a Jwra suprema; umaprova su-
prema (or uma suprema or summa prova) de amor (N.B.
summo, -a always precedes the substantive.
§ 84. "Much" before a comparative is hem or
muito, which latter is also employed in the form of the
absolute Superlative: muito or muittssimo melhor; hem
mais alto, hem maior. These two adverbs, before a
Positive, are translated by "ver}^" or "most": hem or
mitito simples = very or m<fst simple.
§ 85. "Little" before a comparative is pouco,
equally employed in the superlative form : (muito) poucot
melhor.
N.B. — The adverbs wais and menos, employed in
the comparison, are themselves comparatives (of muito
and pouco).
§ 86. "Than" after a comparative is translated
by que or do que. By que (or do que), if the 2^^^ degree
of a comparison is employed without a verb; only by
do que if it contains a verb —e.g.:
A torre e mais alta que (or do que) uma casa.
A torre e mais alta do que nds pensamos.
§ 87. "As . . as" before an adjective in a com-
parison (comparativo dHgualdade) is translated by (tao)
. . . como — e.g.:
A casa e (tCio) alta como uma torre.
§ 88. "So (much . . .) that" in a comparativo d'igual-
dade is translated:
L by tao . . . que which immediately precedes the
adjective: Tao adversa nos foi a sorte, que ... so ad-
verse was Destiny to us, that . . .
2. by tanto que, which is employed separated from
its adjective: Tanto nos foi adversa a sorte que . . .
§ 89. "All the more (so), as," "the (more) . . . the
(more)" in a comparative is translated by tanto (mais);
quanto (or que)'^ — e.g.:
86 Lesson 18.
A nossa surpresa foi tanto maior^ tanto mats agraduvel,
quanta (or que) estavamos longe de esperiU-a.
Our surprise was so much the greater, all the more
agreeable, as we were very far from expecting it.
Quanto mais, melhor the more, the better.
Quanta mats tern, (tanto) mais quer.
The more he has, the more he wants.
Bemark. — Sometimes a Portuguese adjective has the form
of a Comparative without there being a comparison:
Uma casa par mais madesta que seja, ha de ser limpa.
However modest be a house, it must be clean.
Par menas lisongeira que fosse a nossa acolkimento . . .
Although our reception was little flattering . . .
Palavras.
A trovoada
the thunder-
eis ahi [vizv'i] that is (the
[truvu'a&ej
storm
reason)
0 pernio
the danger,
porque why
[pur' que]
a cruz [kruf] the cross
[p9 riguj
perigoso
peril
dangerous
[pary'gozu]
collocado put
a gente [s^rUd]
people
[kulu'ka&u]
0 conductor
the conductor
hem como as well as
[kdndu'torj
[be'komuj
a electricidade
the electricity
0 ponto f'pdntuj the point
[iMrdsfi'Sfa&d]
elevado elevated, high
a atmosphera
the atmo-
[ib'va&uj
[vtmuffsrv]
sphere, air
terminam terminate
a pessoa
the person
[tdr'minvu]
[pd'sov]
0 objeto the object
portanto
consequently
[ob? 'getuj
[pur'tvntu]
0 metal [md'taij the metal
a probahilidade
the probability
de preferencia with predi-
[chprgfg- lection
[prubvbQli-
'&a&9j
'rensii^J
prodmir
to produce
atacado affected
[pi'udu'zir]
[vtn 'kad'uj
a descarga
the discharge
0 local [lu'kal] the locality
fdifkargvj
0 compartimento the room
eUctrico
electrical
[kdmpvrti-
[i'letrikuj
'mentuj
isolado [izu-
isolated
afastado \
[vM'ta&u] ^i ^^
'la&uj
0 raio frrafuj
the flash of
distante. °'*^^^
lightning
[dif'ivntd]
cat [kay]
falls
a diamine the chimney
proximo (de)
next, near (to)
[fvmr'nej
f'prDsimuJ
a aUura[ai'turv] the height
Comparison of the Adjective.
87
quer dizer that is (to say)
[herdi'zer]
por €xem2^lo for instance
' [puri'zemplu]
pelo menos at least
[p9lu 'nienufj
aindaque (anh^.) though, even
[v'lnd'B Icd]
de mais a mais all the more
[ddmaiz- so, moreover
n 'maij]
aguentar to suffer, bear
fegwen'tarj
pois que as
fpot/'Jc!)]
ficar enxarcado\
[ifvr'ka&uj \ to become wet
ficar molhado [ or drenched
[mu'fia&u] I
0 fato [fain] the clothing
attreito- affected by
[v 'tryUu]
82. Leitura.
A trovoada.
E perigoso estarmos no meio de muita gente durante
nma trovoada, porque sendo cada pessoa um conductor da
electricidade da terra para a atmosphera, quanto maior f6r o
niimero das pessoas, tanto maior sera o niimero de condu-
etores e portanto a probabilidade de se produzir a descarga
el^ctrica. As arvores isoladas, os edificios altos etc. sao peri-
gosos quando ha trovoadas^ pois o raio cae primeiro no que
e mais alto, por ser o que Ihe fica mais proximo. Eis ahi por
que as cruzes altas coUocadas sobre as egrejas, bem como o
ponto mais elevado das torres — principalmente quando estas
terminam em algjjm objecto de metal mais ou menos agudo
— sao de preferencia atacados pelo raio. Dentro das casas,
0 melhor local para se estar (for people to stay) durante um^
trovoada 6 o meio das salas, dos quartos ou dos comparti-
mentos, pois quanto mais afastado se estiver das parades ou
das chamines, menor sera o perigo.
(Trindade Coelho: Pao Nosso.)
33. Tema.
In the field, the best place during a thunderstorm is the
one, where we are the most separate,^ [from] and never sonear-
[to] (de) a tree that the distance of it i>e less than its height. That
is [to say,] if, for instance, a tree has^ a height often meters,
we must be distant from it by at least ten meters. Even
if we have* to bear the rain and become^ drenched, all the
more so as (pois que de mais a mais) (the) wet clothing is
[a] better conductor than the dry [one]. (The) women are
less affected by the flash of lightning, than (the) men.
^ See § 81 footnote,
junctive. ^ Infinitive.
see § 88, 1. ^ Gerund.
Sub-
Lesson 14.
Oonyersa^ao^
Qual e o logar | ^^^^ ««g^^P \ durante uma tro-
° \ menos pengoso | voada:
(1) dentro das casas?
(2) no campo?
Onde e perigoso estarmos emqnanto ha trovoada?
Porque (por que razao)?
0 raio, onde cae de preferencia?
Porque?
Quando sera menor o perigo de sermos atacados pelo
raio?
Quaes (sSo) as pessoas menos attreitas ao raio?
Fourteenth Lesson. Li^ao decima quarta.
The Absolute Comparative and Superlative.
§ 90. As already mentioned (§ 82, 2), there is
beside the relative Superlative an absolute one, and also
an absolute comparative form of a certain number of
adjectives. This comparativo absoluto is of Latin origin
and has the accented ending -or. They are the follo-
wing:
Comparativo. Superlativo.
anterior fvnt9ri'or] former, anterior —
posterior [puftdri'or] latter, hinder, —
posterior
cUerior fsit$ri'orJ hithermost
ulterior [uit^rt'or] ulterior ultimo ['uUimu]
exterior [(v)tft9rt'orJ outer, exterior,' extremo [iftremuj
external
interior [intQrt'or] inner, inside, in- intimo ['intimu]
terior
superior [sup9r}'or] higher, superior supremo [su'premuj,
summo ['sumu]
inferior [infsri'or] lower, inferior infimo ['infimu].
§ 91. Employed in a relative sense — i.e., when
comparing several objects these adjectives are followed
by the preposition a (to)e — .g. :
A descoberta da Amh-ica e anterior d da India.
The discovery of America is anterior to that of India.
The Absolute Comparative and Superlative. 89
§ 92. The Superlatives corresponding to the ab-
solute Comparatives are employed in an absolute sense
as well as in a relative — e.g.:
A descdberta do Brasil e ulterior d das costas da Africa,
e a da India S a ultima i^^. sup.) das descobertas.
Nos ultimos (abs. sup.) siculos os Portugueses nao fizeram
descobertas de maior valia (= importance).
BemarJc. — Some of these Comparatives and Superlatives
are also employed as substantives, as in English.
§ 93. Most usual is the pure absolute Superlative,
which, without comparing, denotes a very high degree of
a quality. It is formed by adding the ending -isslmo to
the root of the adjective, and subject to the same
inflection— v.g.: altissimo, -a (from cdto) very high; for-
mostssimo, -a (from formoso) most beautiful ; extensissimo,
-a extremely vast.
§ 94. According to the ending^ of the adjective or
its root, a certain number of them undergo a shght
change in the formation of the superlativo absolute :
(a) The adjectives ending in -co change this ter-
mination into -quissimo: hranco, hrahquissimo. (Exc. :
parcOj parsiriaonious, parcissimo),
(b) Those ending in -go change it into -guissimo,
largOy larguissimo. (Exc. : amigo, befriended, amicissimo;
antigOf ancient, antiqicissimo.)
(c) Those ending in -^ change this letter into c:
felijn, felicissimo.
(d) Those ending in -do (-an) and -m change this
termination into -(aMissimo: sdo, sanissimo; bom, honis-
simo; commum, communissirno.
(e) Those in -vel form 'bilissimo : agradavel, agrada-
hiUssimo.
(f) Those in -r and -s form -issimo: particular, xmr-
ticidarissimo^ portugues, portuguesissimo.
(g) Those ending in -fico change this termination
into -ficentissin^o : magnifico, magnificentissimo.
(h) 'the following adjectives form the absolute
Superlative by adding 'illimo: fcicil, easy, facillimo;
difftcil, difficult; difficilliino; humilde, humble, liumillimo;
semelhante, similar, similimo.
90 Lesson 14.
(i) The following adjectives form the superlative
in -errimo:
acre sharp, acerrimo.
dspero rough, asperrimo
celebre famous, celeberrimo
integro righteous, integer rimo
livre free, liber rimo
miser 0 miserable, miserrimo
pobre poor, pauperrimo
salubre wholesome, salutary, saluberrimo.
(k) The following adjectives have an irregular
Superlative, derived from the Latin form:
cruel cruel, crudelissimo (beside crtieUssimo)
doce sweet, mild, dulcissimo
fiel true, faithful, fidelissimo
frio cold, frigidissimo
geral general, generalissimo
nobre noble, nobilissimo
sdbio wise, learned, sapientissimo
sagrado sacred, holy, sacratissimo
simples simple, simpliclssimo.
Note. — You must not without any further consideration
form an absolute Superlative of any adjective. There are a
good many of them that do not admit the addition of -issimo.
If not sure, it will be better to design a high degree of some
quality by employing muito, bem, summamente, etc. — e.g.,
muito meigo, bem cortes, cdtamente lisongeiro, summamente
enfadonho (most tedious).
§ 95. Present Tense of a regular Verb of the
second Conjugation (in er):
dever, must^ ought, to be obliged to, to owe.
(For the present 'tense of the first Conjug. see § 64.)
Eu devo feu 'devul I must, am obliged, owe.
tu deves [tu 'devifj ^ you must, are obliged, owe.
elle, elltty V^- deve ['devd] he, she, you must, etc.
nds devemos [de'vemuj] we must, etc.
v6s deveis [dd'vvtf] you must, etc.
elUs, ellaSy F<*« Ex<^^- devem ['devvij they, you must, etc.
Part.pres.: devendo. Part, passado: devido.
^ The verbs which in their last syllable but one have un-
accented short e [d] change this vowel, when accented into close
e [e]^ if the last syllable contains o or a; and into open e [ej, if
the last syllable has an e.
The Absolute Comparative and Superlative.
91
34, Exercise.
CoDJugate by word of mouth and in writing the Present
and the Compound Perfect (preterito indeflnido composto) of
1. parecer^ [pvrd'ser] to seem, 2. enternecer^ [tntdrnd'ser]
to affect, move; 3. estender [iften'der] to extend.
Palavras.
A regiao
the region
0 perfume
the perfume
[risVvu]
[pdr'fumd]
a eoctensao
the extension
a myriade
the myriad
[rvjiften'svuj
[m}'rw&3j
a inveja [i've^is]
the envy
enibalsamar
to embalm
0 encanto
enchantment,
[imbals'B'mar]
[i'Tcnntu]
charm
a encosta
the slope
cai»'ichar
to make a fancy
[t'koftv]
[hsprifar]
of...
prddigo
prodigal
em . . .
['pro&igu]
accumular
to heap
par toda a parte
everywhere
[vkumu 'la,rj
tudo [tu&u]
everything
enlevar [ild'var]
to rejoice
perpetiio
perpetual
amar [is' mar]
to love
[pdr'petuni]
a maravilha
the wonder
esplender
to beam,
[mvrv 'vidv]
[ifplen'der]
sparkle
raro ['rraruj
rare
0 riso ['rrizuj
the smile
a joia [so^vj
the jewel
a campina
the field, plain
lemhrar
to remember
[kvm'pinv]
[lem'brarj
a cUusula
the clause
aconchaf'kofvj the shell
['klauzuln]
a saphira
the sapphire
exequivel
practicable
[s^'firaj
[izi'kwiveij
de dia
during day-
mbtii [suWtH]
subtile
time
tenaz [td'naf]
tough,
engastar-se
to be enchased
tenacious
[igvf'tars^]
0 magistrado
the magistracy
semelhar alguem
to resemble
fmvjif'traduj
a lei [lv%]
[sdm} 'fiarj
somebody
the law
0 tdboleiro
the flower-bed
a cdlamidade
the calamity
[tntiu'lvii-u]
[kvlvmi'&a&dj
1
a esmeralda
emerald.
ingreme
steep
[tsm9'raidvj
f'igrdmdj
serpentear
to wind,
com respeito a
with respect to,
[s9rpent}'arj
meandre
concerning
encrustar
to incrust
a vista
the view
[ikruf'tar]
a residencia
the dwelling-
a crista f'kriftv J
the crest
[r9z}' densyv]
place
0 espectaculo
the spectacle
chao, eha
plain
ftfpe'takuloj
. ffyu^/^J
beijar fbufjarj
.to kiss
atroz [v'trjfj
atrocious, cruel
* c before o and a = f .
92 Lesson 14.
audaz fau'(faf] audacious I porem [pu rvi] \ i,Q^gyg,.
feroz Ifd'roj] wild, savage no entretanto (
particular particular o diadema the diadem.
fpsrttktc'larj \ [die'^emsj
35. Exercise.
Change the following adjectives, giving them the form of
the absolute Superlative. Inimigo acre. Pessoa affavel. Sabor
Bgradavel. Mao amiga. Costumes antigos. Inverno aspero.
Crime atroz. Homem audaz. Boa alma. Papel branco. Su-
jeito capaz. Autores c^lebres. Campinas chas. Delicto com-
miim. Dor cruel. Questao difficil. Palavras doces. Hora
feliz. Tigre feroz. Servo fiel. CJdusulas exequfveis. LiijSo
facil. Feia ingratidSo. Voz fraca. Agua fria. Phrase hu-
milde. Magistrado integro. Lei justa. Vista linda. Vontade
livre. Espectaculo magnifico. Mds novas. Misero estado.
Ac^ao nobre. Casos particulares. Gente pobre. Termos pr6-
prios. Cdlculo provavel. Conselho prudente. Diadema rico.
Verdade sagrada. Sitio salubre. Ares sSos. Estilo simples.
Coisa subtil. Substancia tenaz. Terrivel calamidade. Triste
situa9ao. Despfisa util. VSos cuidados.
m. Leitnra.
Portugal.
Portugal ^ uma das mais lindas regioes do mundo. Pe-
queno em extensSo, de nenhum outro deve ter inveja. este pais
de encantos. A natureza parece ter caprichado em accnmnlar
nelle bellezas de toda a ordem, que enlevam os olhos e en-
ternecem a alma. Portugal, minha patria bem-amada, es
nma pequenina^ maravilha e uma rara joia I Debaixo do teu
ceu quasi sempre azul, que lembra uma concha de saphira,
onde de dia se engasta um formosissimo sol e de noite as mais
bellas estrdUas, os tens campos semelham um taboleiro de
esmeralda, que os rios, serpenteando em todas as direc^oes,
encrustam de fios de prata. Monies verdes, cobertos d'arvores
ate as cristas, nSo os tem mais pittorescos o mundo todo; —
e beijados por um clima dulcissimo, que o perfume .de my-
riades de flores embalsamam na primavera, os tens valles, as
tuas encostas, os teus campos sdo no estio prodigos de fru-
ctos, — e por toda a parte, e em tudo, parece esplender, per-
p^tuo, 0 riso da natureza. (Trindade Coelho: P^ Nasso.)
^7. Tema.
I got (== had) a most amiable letter from the verj
learned professor. The airs of this region must be- extremely
^ Dimioutive of pequena small: a dear little . . .
The Numerals. 93
wholesome. Not only are the airs, but also the water is most
salutary. The climate of the northern countries of Europe is very
cold and rough, while that of the southern countries is extraor-
dinarily mild. The Avenida da Liberdade in Lisbon is a very
large and beautiful street with quite modem houses and
healthy habitations. In the quarter (of the) Mouraria, how-
ever, the streets are very strait and steep, showing extre-
mely poor and miserable little houses. That quarter is very
old; it is [originates] of the times of the Moors, and conse-
quently anterior to the Portuguese monarchy. Though it be
inferior as a dwelling-place, for its views, it is superior to
any other quarter.
Conyersaqao.
Que diz oescriptor Trindade Coelho de Portugal? (s^e 36).
Em que parece a natureza ter caprichado?
Que e que lembra. o ceu de Portugal?
Que semelham OS campos?
Como sao os montes?
Como e 0 clima ?
Como sao os valles, as encostas, os campos?
Onde parece esplender, perp^tuo, o riso da natureza?
Fifteenth Lesson. Li^ao decima quinta.
The Numerals.
Adjectives e Substantives ntimeraes.
§ 96. There are to be distinguished three classes
of numbers:
1. Cardinal Numbers (ntimeros cardinaes);
2. Ordinal Numbers (numeros ordinaes) and
3. Multiplicative Numbers (numeros multiplicativos).
I. Cardinal Numbers. JVimieros cardinaes.
Zero ['zeru] 0 oUo [oUu] 8
i*m, uma 1 nove [nov9j 9
dois (dous)j fem. duas 2 dez [def] 10
tr^s 3 onise [d09] 11
quatro 4 doee [dozd] 12
cinco 5 treee [treze] 13
seis 6 quatorze [kv'torzd] 14
sete 7 quinze [Mzd] 15
94
Lesson 15.
dezaseis [ddzv'svif] or dezeseis
16
dezasete [[ddzv' SEtd] or dezesete
17
dezoito [dd'zoitUy dd'zoUu] 18
dezanove [dQzv'novd] or deze-
nove 19
vinte [vintd] 20
vinte e um [vinti'u] 21
vinte e dous 22
w»<e e tres 23
f in^e e quatro 24
vinfe e ciwco 25
vm^e e seis 26
vinte e sete 27
t?i«^e e oitofvinti 'oitu, vtn 'tottuj
28
vinte e nove 29
trinta [trtntv] 30
^nw^a e um 31
^rm^a e oi^o [trtntnmtu] 38
quarenta [kwv'rentv] 40
cincoenta [slM'entts] 50
sessenta [sd'sentv] 60
setenta [sd'tentv] 70
oitenta [of'tentvj 80
noventa [nu'veniv] 90
cem, cew^o /se'?, sentu] 100
cew^o e Mm 101
duzentos 200
trezentos 300
quatrocentos 400
quinhentos [ki'yentuf] 500
seiscentos 600
setecentos 700
oitocentos 800
novecentos 900
wi^ 1000
wiZ e Mm 1001
c^ows >wiZ 2000
cem miZ 100,000
t«m mUhdo [mi'Mu] 1,000,000
(iois milhoes 2,000,000.
Mm billido a milliard.
§ 97. Observation.
1. f7m and 6?ois have a feminine form: w/wa and
(?Mas— -e.g.: Tenho um nariz e tima boca, dois olhos e
duos mdos.
2. Cento in the plural is also inflected like an
adjective: -centos, -centas — e.g.: quatrocentos soldados^
seiscentas balas.
Bemark.—A hundred, one hundred, if not followed by
another number (but mil or milhao), is rendered by cem
(without um!): a hundred men cem homens^; but: cento e
um homens 101 men; cem mil reis; cem milhdes de metres
cubicos. — Cento is also employed as a substantive — e.g.;
Quanta custa o cento d'estes 6vos? Um cento custa dois
mil reis, mas duzentos custam tres mil oitocentos.
So employed, cento must be preceded by the article and,
if followed by another substantive, joined to this by de,
3. Mil is never preceded by um.^ It must be
employed to render the English expressions: eleven
^ Cem, mU—AB, indeed, aoy other number, marking a plura-
lity— may be preceded by una, umas, which means some or about:
Uns cem homens, umas cem mulheres = some (or about) a hundred
meo, women.
The Numerals. 95
hundred, twelve hundred, etc. mil e cem, mil duzen-
toSj etc.
4. The expression "in the year" is rendered by
no anno de or simply by em: In the year nineteen-
hundred and eleven = no anno de ^or em) mil nove
centos e onze.
5. The number one being preceded by another, the
substantive follows in the plural form, as in English:
Mil e uma noites 1001 nights.
6. The units may be joined to the tenths by the
conjunction e or by a hyphen: trinta e otto or trinta-
oito, vinte-um, etc.
7. The days of the month (except "the first," o
primeiro) are expressed by cardinal numbers, preceded
by 0, a, em or no dia: the 25*^ of May em (or no dia)
vinte e cinco de maio; the 7*^ of August em (or no dia)
sete de agosto.
Nasceu a dezoito de junho.
He was born on the 18*^ of June.
In official writings the plural is usually employed :
Acs vinte e quatro dias de dezemhro.
On the 24*^ of Decembre.
Note.—T\iQ names of the months are Janeiro, fevereiro,
margo, dbril, maio, junho, julho, agosto, setemhro, outubro,
novenibro, dezemhro. They are written with a small letter.
Trinta dias tern novembro,
Abril, junho e setemhro;
Vinte-oito terd urn,
E OS outros mais: trinta e um.
The date of a letter is either given as in English,
as: Lisbon, the 4^^ of February, 1911, Lisboa 4 de
fevereiro de 1911 or: Lisboa, em (or a) 4 de fevereiro
de 1911. "What day of the month is it?" = A quantos
estamos de mes? It is the 2^*^ of November: estamos a
dais de novembro.
8. The age of a person is generally expressed by
ter . . . annos and fazer . . . annos, as: How old are you?
= quantos annos tem? (or less familiar: Que idade tern?
Que idade e a sua? Qual e a sua idade?) I am 56
years old = Tenho 56 annos.
96 Lesson 15.
Quando faz (or vae^ fazer^) annos?
When is (or will be) your birthday?
(Literally : when do you make (or when are you going
to make) /ears?)
Fago (or vou fazer) annos em quinze de margo.
My birthday is on the fifteenth of March.
Quantos annos faz (or vae fazer)?
How old will you be?
Fago (farei or vou fazer) doze annos.
I shall be 12 years old.
No meu dia d' annos or no dia dos meus (vinte) annos . . .
On my birthday, on my twentieth birthday.
Minha irma vae fazer dezdito a/nnos no mes que vem.
My sister will be eighteen years old next month.
'N.B.— Minha irma terd 18 annos would be: my sister
is about 18 years old.
Elle casou (promoveu, morreu) aos 25 annos de (sua)
idade.
He married (was promoted, died) in his 25^^ year.
§ 98. The multiplication is expressed by vez, vezes
(times) — e.g.:
Quatro vezes cinco (sSo) vinte.
Four times five are twenty.
Some (or about) 30, 40, etc. is: uns trinta, quarenta,
or trinta (quarenta) e tanios.
§ 99. Present Tense of a regular Verb of the
third Conjugation (in in) dividir [ddV9dir^] to dirfde.
Divido [dd'vidu] I divide dividimos [d^va'dimuf] we di-
divides [dd 'viddf] you divide vide
divide [dd'vidd] he, she di- dividis [ddvd'dij] you divide
vides, you divide dividem [dd 'vidvi] they divide.
Part.pres.: dividindo [dsvs dtndu] .
Part, perf.: dividido [ddV9'didu].
Exercise: Write and practise the Present Tense and the
Participles of the following verbs:
diminuir [dsmmu'ir] to diminish
repartir [rrdpvr'tir] to distribute, divide, part.
cumprir [kum'prir] to fulfil
reunir [rrdunir] to unite, join.
Ex.: Bimintio, reparto, cumpro, reuno, etc.
* 8<i pers. of ir to go. — ^ to do, make. — ' see p. 5, N.B. —
The Numerals.
97
Palayras.
A arithmetica
[arit'meitkvj
as 4 operagdes\
d'arith- \
metica, I
as 4 operagoes
funda-
mentaes
sommar
fsu 'mar]
muUiplicar
[muit^pli'ka)-]
a addigao
[adi'svu]
a suhtracgao
[uaubdtra-
'sBuJ
a diminuigao i
[n&aminui- I
'svu] J
a maltiplica-
rao [vmiiit/-
jjlike 'svttj
a divisao
[nd'9vi'zvuj
0 prohlema
[upru'blewv]
arithmetic
the first four
rules of
arithmetic
to sum (up)
to multiply
the addition
the subtraction
the multiplica-
tion
the division
the (arithmeti-
cal) problem
a parcella
[vpvr'selv]
a somvia [' somv]
mais [may/]
igual a
[i 'gwdiv]
a prova
fe 'prow]
o total [utu'taij
ao total
0 resto /w 'rreftuj
0 wimero addi-
tivofydativuj
0 numero sub-
tractivo
[si(b3tra'ticu]
e assim em
seguid^
o systema
[sif'tenvs] de
numera^ao
0 valor
povoado
0 censo
augmentar
faumen'tarj
the entry
the sum,
addition
and, plus (lat.)
equal to
proof
the totality
in the whole •
the rest
the minuend
the subtrahend
and 80 on
the system of
numaration
the value
populous
the census
to increase.
38. Leitura.
A liguo d' arithmetica.
As quatro opera(j6es fundamentaes da arithmetica sac as
seguintes: — sommar, diminuir, multiplicar e repartir, — ou
addi^ao^ subtracQao, multiplica9ao e divisao. — Exemplo de
uma somma: tenho seis (6) ma^as e dao-me mais quatro (4):
com quantas ma^as fico? Resolve-se pela somma: 6 mais 4,
dez (10).- Fico com 10 ma^as, — 6 chama-se uma parcella:
4 e outra parcella; 10 e a somma ou total. Outro exemplo:
vamos reunir os numeros sete centos e trinta e seis (736) e
quatro centos e vinte-um (421) n'um so numero: a somma ^
mil cento e cinquenta-sete (1157); isto e: 736 mais 421 e
igual a 1157. Este ultimo numero e formado de 4 algaris-
mos, dos quaes o ultimo^ 7, indica as unidades, que formam
a primeira columna; o penultimo, 5, a classe das dezenas ou
a segunda columna; o antepen ultimo, 1, a das centenas ou
terceira columna; e o primeiro a dos milhares que vem a ser
a quarta columna. — Agora vamos fazer uma subtracgao,
tirando do numero oito mil quatro centos e sessenta-oito (8468)
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 7
98 Lesson 15.
o numero cinco mil trezentos e vinte-um (5321). 0 primeiro
numero e o additivo, o segundo o snbtractivo, e o resto 6
tres mil cento e quarenta-sete (3147). Para fazer a conta
dizemos assim : de 8 tirando 1 ficam 7; de 6 tirando 2 ficam 4;
de 4 tirando 3 fiea 1 etc. Podemos tambem operar dizendo
assim: 1 para 8, 7; 2 para 6, 4; 3 para 4, 1; 5 para 8, 3.
(Trindade Coelho: Pao Nosso.)
39. Exercise.
We have ten fingers on our two hands and ten toes
on our two feet; we may (= podemos) therefore say that
ten is a natural number for numeration, and, as every one
knows, ten is the number on which our system of numeration
is based. Ten thousand plus one thousand plus one hundred
plus ten plus one, is written 11,111, that is: eleven thou-
sand one hundred and eleven. The first number on the right
signifies so many units, the next to the left so many hun-
dreds, the next so many thousands, and so on, the value
of each place increasing tenfold (see § 106), as we go from
right to left. Thus 200,000 -f 40,000 -f 5000 + 700 + 90 -f 3
is two hundred and forty-five thousand seven hundred and
ninety- three, 245,793.
At the census of 1905 the population of the ten most
populous towns of the world was the following: 1. (see § 106)
London, with 4,715,000; 2. New York with 3,476,000;
3. Paris with 2,764,000; Berlin with 2,040,000; 5. Vienna
with 1,870,000; 6. Tokio with 1,820,000; 7. Chicago with
1,699,000; 8. Philadelphia with 1,294,000; 9.* St. Petersburg
with 1,265,000; 10. Constantinople with 1,125,000 inhabi-
tants. — As Portugal at the census of the year 1900 has
5,423,132 inhabitants, that whole country has only about
708,000 more than the capital of England.
Gonversa^ao com um menino.
0 menino em que dia e mes Fa^o annos em 25 de maio.
faz annos? —
Entao ainda nao fez annos NSo fiz ainda, hei de faz^l-
n'este anno? os no proximo m6s.
Seu irmao ja tem 16 annos Ja, sim, minha senhora; ja
feitos? OS fez ha quinze dias, em
18 de mar^o.
Quantos annos tem (a) sua Tera 21 annos; nasceu em
prima Dona Virginia? 1889. E verdade (indeed),
vae fazer 22 no m6z que
vem.
The Numbers,
Ha quantos annos o menino
ja vae a escola?
Quantos alumnos ha na sua
classe ?
Nao ha classe, em que o nii-
mero dos alumnos chega a
cem?
A que hora comeQam as aulas ?
Entrei (/ entered) no primeiro
de abril do anno passado,
logo (so) ha pouco mais de
um anno que ando (J go)
na escola.
Havera 50 e tantos.
Nao ha, nao, minha senhora;
o maximo e de 60; somos
ao todo 519 em toda a escola.
No verao come^am as 7, e no
inverno as 8.
Sixteenth Lesson. Li?ao decima sexta.
The Numbers.
IL Ordinal Numbers. ]V^umet*os ordinaes.
§ 100. The ordinal numbers are formed out of
the cardinal numbers and considered adjectives— i.e.,
they are subject to the same inflection (feminine and
plural form): primeiro, -a, -os, -as. Their formation
from the units is altogether irregular; there are besides
also some modifications preceding the termination -esimo
added to the number beyond vinte, as will be seen
by the following.
The ordinal numbers are generally put before the
noun; they are:
0 primeiro [prim'viru] the 1^^
0 segundo [sd'gtmdii] the 2"<^
0 terceiro ftdr'svmij the 3^*^
0 quarto [kwartu] the 4^^
0 quinto [JcTntu] the 5^^
0 sexto [stnftu] the 6*^
0 setimo [setimu] the 7^^
0 oitavo [oftavu] the 8^^
0 nono [nonu] the 9*^
0 decimo ['desmu] the 10*^^
0 undecimo or decimo primeiro,
0 onseno [d'eenu] the 11*^
0 duodecimo [duu'destmu] or
decimo segundo the 12*^^
0 decimo lerceiro the 13^^
0 decimo quarto the 14'^
0 decimo quinto the 15^^
0 decimo sexto the IG*"^
0 decimo setimo the 17*^'
0 decimo oitavo the 18*^
0 decimo nono the 19*^
0 vigesimo [vi'jeeimu, vige-
simu] the 20'!^
0 vigesimo primeiro the 21**
0 trigesimo [tri'geeimu, jesimu]
the SOtii
0 quadragesimo [kuvdrv — ]
the 40^^
0 quinquagesimo [hwikwv — /
the 50t>^
7*
100 Lesson 16.
0 sexagesimo (aehsv —] the o quadrigenUsimo the 400^^
60*^ 0 qumgentesimo [kwi^ent — ]
0 8eptuagesimo [septuv —] the the 500*^
70*^ 0 sexcentesimo [sefsm'tezimu]
0 octog^simo [oUu —] the 80^^^ the 600*^
0 nonagesimo [nonv —] the o septingentesimo the 700*^
9(X<^^ 0 octingentesimo the 800^
0 centisimo [sen'tejsimu, sen- o nonigentesimo the 900*^
'tesimuj the 100*^ o millesimo the 1000^^
0 centisimo primeiro the 101 ''^ o millionisimo the 1,000,000**^
0 ducentesimo the 200^*^ o penuUimo the last but one
0 trecentisimo the 800**^ o ultimo the last.
§ 101. Use of the Numbers.
1. To distinguish monarchs of the same name,
ordinal numbers are used as for the units, hke in
EngHsh, but without the article— e.g.: Eduardo Setimo;
Dom Manuel Segundo, Dom Pedro Quarto. With the
tens the cardinal numbers are generally employed : Luis
Quatorze;' but Henrique Trigesimo segundo de Reuss.
2. Tq catalogue books, chapters, etc., cardinal as
well as ordinal numbers may be employed ; in this latter
case they generally follow the noun: Tomo segundo or
dois; capitulo vigesimp terceiro or vinte-tres; pagina de-
cima oitava or desoito.
3. Fractious (fracgdes) are mostly expressed by
a . . .parte — e.g.: a terga, quarta, quinta parte; as quatro
deci^nas (partes)^ etc. They may, however, also be ex-
pressed by the substantivated ordinal numbers — e.g.:
( meio, meia (without the ^U um quarto
Va I article) ^/t tres sHimos
\ (a) metade '/lo sete dScimos
Vs um'terQO '/a tres oitavos.
Partly is em parte; for the most part = pela maior part.
Examples.
Half a meter of cloth meio metro de panno.
Half a bottle of wine meia garrafa de vinJio.
I got half of the money recebi (a) metade do dinheiro.
6\/a metres of linen seis meiros e meio de panno de
lin?io.
2Va yards of silk duas varas e meia de sMa.
The Nnmbera. 101
4. Fractions smaller than a tenth sc^ vS»)met:'mes
formed by adding -avo to the cardinal numbers, as:
*/ii um on^avo (better: um undecimo, uma undecima
parte or uma decima prinieira parte ; ^/so tres dnquentavos.
5. The decimal numbers (niimeros decimaes) are:
Vio um decimo Viooo um millesimo
Vioo um centesimo Vioooo um decimo-millesimo
etc.
or uma decima, centesima, millesimal parte, etc.
§ 102. Biyision of Measures and Weights.
0 metro ['mstru] the metre
0 decimetre [dd'sim9tru] the decimetre
0 centimetro [sen'timdtru] the centimetre
0 millimetro [md'limstru] the millimetre
0 decdw^tro [dg'kamdtruj the decametre
0 hectometro [ek'tomstruj the hectometre
a medida linear [mddidv lint'ar] the lineal measure
a medida de superficie a superficial measure
a medida de volume the cubic measure
a medida de capacidade [Tcvpvsi'dad?] the measure of
capacity
a medida dp peso [pesu] the measure of weight.
0 gramma ['grvmv] the gram
0 lcilo(gramma) [kilu grvmv] the kilogram
0 decigramma [desi'grvmvj the decigram
0 centigramma [senti' grvmv] the centigram
0 decagramma the decagram
0 hectogramma the hectogram
0 metro quadrado the square metre
0 mstro cubico the cubic metre
0 litre I'litru] the liter
0 deciHtro [d'lSQ'litru] the deciliter
0 hectoiitro fehtD'Htru] the hectoliter
a tonelada [tunp'lada] (= 13V2 quintaes) the tun
0 quintal fktn'tai] the Portuguese quintal (of 58®/i kilos)
0 quintal metrico two hundredweights.
§ 103. Division of Time.
Names of the Days.
Domingo [du'mtgu] Sunday quinta feira Thursday
segunda feira [fvtrv] Monday sexta feira Friday
terga feira Tuesday sabbado ['subvduj Saturday.
quarta feira Wednesday
10*2 Lesson 16.
' * ' § 104. Observations,
1. On Monday, on Tuesday, etc. is na segunda
(feira), etc. or only segunda feira, etc.; feira is often
omitted. You may also write with a hyphen : segunda-
feira, terga-feira, etc.
2. The names of the days are written with a small
letter.
3. For the dates see § 97, 7.
4. The hours of the day are expressed by the
cardinal numbers:
'What o'clock is it? Que horas sdo?
It is one o'clock, half past one e uma hora, e kora e
meia.
It is two o'clock sdo duas horas.
It is half past three sdo tres (horas) e meia.
It is a quarter past 4 sdo quatro (horas) e (um) quarto.
At what o'clock a que hora(s)?
At 7, 8, 9 (o'clock) as sete^ oito, nove (horas).
It is a quarter «&t 5 H^ ^*«^^ T"^' ^'^ ^'^''^''•
J.L o a 4uaxtoi pnm. ^ ^ g ^^ quarto para as ctnco.
It. is noon e meio-diaf sdo as doze da noite.
It is midnight S meia noite, sdo as doze do dia.
About noon pelo meio dia.
About one o'clock pela uma hora.
About 2 o'clock pelas duas horas.
The train starts at ten minutes to 7 o combdio sae as
7 menos 10.
It is striking ten o'clock ddo or estdo a dar des horas.
Has it already struck eleven? Jd deram as onze?
It will strike immediately . . . vdo dar agora (doze horas).
It has just struck eight acabam de dar as oito.
5. Indicating a day-time by a certain hour, the
Portuguese says: da manhd, da iarde, da noite — e.g.:
as dee da manhd, da noite; as quatro da tarde, at ten
o'clock in the morning, at night; at four in the
afternoon. If the day-time is not precisely indicated,
he says de manhd^ de tarde^ etc., or pela manhd^ pela
tarda, etc., in the morning, in the afternoon: Lri dt'
tarde^ I shall go in the afternoon.
6. The expressions: a quarter of a year, half a
year, etc., should be rendered by three months, six
months, etc., as: tres meses, seis meses (ov meio anno),
The Numbers.
108
nove nieses, etc. A week : uma semana or oito dias. A
fortnight, (iiiinze dias.
§ 105. The numeral adverb is expressed by the
corresponding ordinal.
First(ly) is primeiro or prinieiramente or em primeiro
lugar.
Secondly is segundo or segundamente or em segundo
lugar.
UOi
rdl
Thirdly is ierceiro or ierceiramente or em, terceiro lugar.
Palayras.
A parte inteira
the whole
a linha ['UpeJ
the line
a parte deci- i
fractional
avatiar
to value
mal 1
number,
[vvelt'arj
a dizima
decimal
0 conjtincto
the totality
['dizimv]
fraction
! [ko'juntoj
a operagao
a ajuda
the help
decimal
the decimal
[v'swyvi
a operagao
de dizima
operation
a jJOTQcio
the portion
[pur'svu]
ao contrario de
to the con-
seccos [sekiif]
dried fruit
trary of
0 feijao
the bean
conmstir de, em
to consist of,
[fei'svu]
in
a balanga
the wages
separar
to separate
[bu'lvnsvj
a virgula
the comma
0 anno hissexto
the leap-year
['virgulul
fbt'svtftuj
a casa
the partition,
intercalado
intercalary
class
[intjrkv'la&u]
r
cada um
each (one)
0 seculo
the century
a letra
the type
f'sektduj
0 systema
the metrical
a era ['erv]
the Christian
metrico [sif-
system
christao
era
'temv 'mstrikitj
0 solsticio
the solstice
0 meridiano
the meridian
[soif'tistuj
[nidrd&j 'mm]
0 equindxio
the equinox
terrestre
terrestrial
[iki 'nokstuj
[tar 'rsftraj
bastar
to be sufficient
0 globo fgloduj
the globe
a primavera
Spring
terrestre
fprimv 'vervj
rndicar
to indicate
0 verao |
[tndiJcarJ
[vyi-vu]
Summer
0 guadrante
the quadrant
0 estio [}f'tiu] J
[ktov' &rviiti)J
0 outomno
Autumn
derivar
to derive
[o 'tonuj
medir
to measure
0 inverno
Winter
a saber
namely
[tvernu]
a exte^isdo
the extension
a Pascoa
Eastern
ft/ten 'svuj
f'pafkmj
104 Lesson 16.
0 Pentecostes Whitsuntide
! arranjar
to arrange,
[pentykoftif]
1
procure
0 dia do anno NewYear^sDay
1 em malar
to embale
the Dox
novo or do
1 a mala ['main]
amw bom
1 a guia f'givj
the luggage-
darashoas festas to send the
ticket
(pelo anno greetings of
vou fvouj
I go, am going
novo, pela the season
vd [vsl]
go!
Pdscoa, pelo
ate logo \
[vtelogu]
Natal)
till presently.
0 Natal [itr?'taij Christmas j
ate jd /jay 1
levar to take |
40. Leitura.
0 systeniQ, decimal ou metrico.
Ac contrario do niimero inteiro, o qual tern so uma parte,
o mimero decimal consiste sempre de duas partes, separadas
per uma virgula. A parte que fica a esquerda da virgula,
cbama-se parte inteira; a que fica a direita da virgula,
chama-se parte decimal e tambem dizima: e cada uma das
suas letras representa uma casa. A parte inteira indica uni-
dades; a parte decimal indica frac96es ou partes da unidade.
0 primeiro algarismo d'uma parte decimal indica d^cimas, o
segundo indica centesimas; o terceiro, se o tiver, indicara
mill^simas ; o quarto decimas mill^simas. — 0 syst6ma metrico
tem per unidade o metro. 0 metro e uma medida. Esta
medida e igual a decima million^sima parte do quarto (ou
quadrante) do meridiano terrestre. Do metro derivam todas
as medidas, a saber: 1. as medidas lineares, com que medi-
raos 0 comprimento ou extensao das coisas: das linhas por
exemplo; — 2. as medidas de superficie, com que avaliamos
no sen conjuncto as coisas que teem ao mesmo tempo com-
primento e largura, como um campo; — 3. as medidas de
volume, com que avaliamos no seu conjuncto as coisas que
teem ao mesmo tempo comprimento, largura e altura, como
e, por exemplo, uma sala, ou uma por9ao de lenha ou de ma-
deira de comprimento igual ; — 4. as medidas de capacidade,
com que medimos liquidos: por exemplo, vinho ou azeite; e
sficcos, como p. ex. trigo ou feijao; — 5. e finalmente, as
medidas de peso, com as quaes avaliamos, com ajuda de uma
balan^a, o peso das coisas.
(Trindade Coelho: Pao Nosso.)
41. Thema.
The Year and its Divisions.
The first day of a year is New Year's Day. The
year is divided into 4 seasons (Spring, Summer, Autumn and
The Numbers. 105
Winter) 12 months, (January, February, March, April, May,
June, July, August, September, October, November, and De-
cember), 52 weeks, and 365 days. A leap-year has one day
more (= a wais)— namely, 366 days. The intercalary day
is the 29*^ day of the 2°^ month, which is denominated Fe-
bruary. (The) September was formerly the seventh, October
the eighth, November the ninth, and December the tenth
month of the year ; actually (== to-day) these months are the
ninth, tenth, eleventh, and twelfth. The TAreek-days are for the
most part (pela sua maior parte) indicated by "feira"— i.e.,
fair, whereas the Sunday, as the day of the first fair^ is not
indicated as such (= como tal), but as the day of the
Lord {domingo being derived from JDominus the Lord). The
week has 7 days, and the day has 24 hours ; every hour
counts 60 minutes and every minute as many seconds. In
the year take place two equinoxes: on the 2]st of March and
the 2Z^^ of September, and two solstices : on the 22"<i of June,
2 days before Saint John's, and on the 22"<^ of Dezember,
8^ days before Christmas. On Christmas, New Year's Day, and
Easter we send greetings of the season to our friends. The
31^^ of December is the last day of the year. A hundred
years form a century. We live in the twentieth century
of the Christian era.
Conversa^ao.
No Hotel,
A que boras deseja V«- Ex''- V^- chame-me as sete e meia.
ser acordado?
E 0 almoQo a que hbras o Tres quartos de hora mais
deseja? tarde, as oito e um quarto.
ya. Exa. j^ yae partir no com- Vou. V^. arrange-me um trem ;
boio das nove e dez? quantos minutos leva ate a
estaijao ?
Levara doze minutos quando Entao basta que o carro ca
muito. esteja as nove menos cinco.
E a bagagem — V^- Ex«- le- Nao, senhor. Ja esta tudo
va-a no carro? emmalado; as malas podem
ir ja para a esta^ao. 0 senhor
leve-as para baixo!
Sim, senhor. Vou ja despa- Quando trouxer (fut. conj.
cha-las e entregar-lhe a guia. of trazer) a guia^ traga
Va Ex^- manda mais al- (imper. of trazer) tambem
guma coisa? uma chicara de cha!
As ordens de V*^ Ex^- ; ate logo ! Va com Deus ! ate ja !
106 Lesson 17.
Seventeenth Lesson. Ligao decima setima.
Numbers (Continued).
III. Mnltiplicatiye Nnmbers.
§ 106. The multiplicatiyes (numeros muUipUca'
tivos) are:
Simples simple o ddbro (de) { , , , .,
duplo, -a \ ^^^^^^ 0 duplo (de) / ^^'^^^^ ^^^"'
dob'rado, -a I o tripUcadOj triplice, pop. o
triple threefold tresdobro, the triple
quadruplOf -a fourfold (o) sextuploi septuplo, dduplo,
quintuple, -a fivefold dScuplo, centuplo (the) 6, 7,
0 inteiro the whole 8, 10. 100 fold
miiltiplu manifold.
All the other multiplicatives are not used; they
are generally periphrased (as, indeed, also most of the
mentioned may be) by the numbers of repetition (nu-
meros Uerativos); unia vez, duas vezes, etc. — e.g. 2Y.2
= 4, duas vezes dots sdo quatro. Elle e cent vezes mats
rico do que eu, he is a hundred times richer than I.
§ 107. The most important collective Numbers
(numeros coUectivos) are:
TJm par a pair, a couple (urn par de luvas; um par de
magas)
um casal de rolos a brace of doves
uma duzia a dozen
meia dueia half a dozen
duzia e meia one dozen and a half
uma groza or doze dusias a gross
uma quineena fifteen
una vintena a score
uma trintena, quarantena some thirty, forty
uma sessentena threescore, sixty
um quarieirdo twenty -five
uma centena, um cento a (or some) handred
um milhart um milheiro a (or some) thousand.
^ Vae, present of ir = to go : pom, vaes, vae, vdmos, ides, vdo.
* Fazer to do, make, is irregalar: Pres.: fa^o, fazes, faz,
etc.; Pret.: fiz, fizeste, fez, fizemos, fizestes, fizeram. Part.: feito.
The Numbers. 107
§ 108. The Augmentativ^s and Diminutives.
AugmentattVQS [aumentvtivuf] e diminutivos
[ddminu 'tivufj.
As the ending -issimo modifies the adjective, other
terminations, peculiar only to the Portuguese langu-
age, modify the original meaning of substantives: cer-
tain terminations add to the noun the idea of some-
thing unusually big (or clumsy or grotesque), they
augment some quality already prominent, while others
add the notion of littleness, daintiness; they diminish a
quaUty already existing. It is easily understood that
the former convey an idea of antipathy, while the
latter indicate one of sympathy or pity.
§ 109. To fonn the Augmentativos, we add to the
noun the syllable -ao (fem.: -owa), sometimes modified
also according to the ending of the substantive. To
Ibrm the Diminutivos, we employ the ending -inho, -inha
or -ito, -ita. Those derivations which intercalate a -jst-,
generally denote only size without any secondarj^
meaning— e.g.: cadeirajsinha = a little chair, while
cadeirinha means a sedan(-chair).
The employment of both the augmentative and
the diminutive modifications takes place only in familiar
intercourse, and may be avoided by a foreigner. Here
we bring them to the student's notice to enable him
to understand those words and for the sake of com-
pleteness.
1. Augmentativos (termination -do).
0 garrafao [gvrrv'fvu] the great bottle (of a gar-
rafa)
um hofetdo [hufd'tvu] a heavy slab (of a bofetada)
palavrao [pvl^'vruu] a long and difficult (also: an
ugly) word (of palavra) *
0 casacao [kvsv'Mu] great-coat (of casaco)
0 papeldo [pvps'lnu] thick paper, pasteboard (of
papel)
0 papao [pv'pvu] bugbear (of papar devour or papas
pap)
0 liomenzarrao [omvjzv'rrvu] the great (or important)
man
0 mocetdo [mus9'tvu] \ big fellow {oimogo young man)
0 rapa^do [rrvpv'gvu] / great boy (of rapae the boy).
108 Lesson 17.
6. Diminutivos (termination -(z)inho, -(z)ito, etc.).
Masculine. Feminine.
0 homenzinho the little man A mulhersinha the little wo-
man
a mulherinha the intriguing
woman
0 fHhinho the little- son a filhinha the little daughter
0 rapazito, o rapasinho the a rapariguita, a rapariguinha
little boy the little maid
0 caozinho the little dog a cadellinha the little bitch
0 pohrezinho the little poor a prohrezinha the poor (or
person or beggar beggar) maid.
coitadinho, -a poor darling!
Familiar language also adds to certain adjectives
and even to adverbs the diminutive endings. J5 boni-
tinha she is rather pretty; estd melhorzinha she feels a
little better; uma casa pequenina quite a small house;
die estd grandinho he is rather tall (for his age); dla e
hoasinha she is a dear little thing.
§ 110. Examples from Portuguese Authors.
Velho tao velhinho nenhum outro havia ...
Para cumprir cem annos Ihe faltava um dia,
Ha noventa e quatro que 6ra ja pastor \
Zagalzinho^ alegre, desdfe tenra infancia.
Ja de surraosito^ cheio a tiracol* —
Branqueadinho^ a neve® e doiradinho^ a sol.
Gruia 0 jumentinho^ uma velhinha errante . .
A molheirinha* atras, o jumentito adiante!
Descalcinha^^ e pobre . .
Pobres de pobres (= the poorest of the poor) sao pobresinhos . . .
Alvas ermidinhas^* sob azues magaados^^ . .
Ao filhinho a noite naO Ihe causa medo . . .
Uma igrejasinha que 6 como um pombaP^ . .
NSo se esJ^uece da vaquinha^* loira^*
Que se poz de joelhos ante a mangedoira^*,
Quando nas palhinhas^' dormitava** Deus**.
* Herdsman. ^ shepherd. ' bread-bag. * a tiracol in
bandoleer-belt. ■' branqueado whitewashed. ** by the snow.
^ doirado pfilded— i.e., made brown. ** ojumento ass. * moleira
the miller's wife. "* descalga barefooted. '^ ermida hermitage.
'* magoado = bruised ; here violet blue. " dove-house. '* vacca
cow. '^ bright yellow, fair. ^^ manger, crib. '' pnlha straw.
** slumber. '® Deus for Jesus. *
The Ni
imbere.
109
Palarras.
0 multiplicando
the multi-
tirar [tirar]
to subtract
[multdpli-
plicand
0 ultimo
the last
'kvnduj
fuHimu}
feito [fvHu]
executed, made,
0 penuUimo
the last but
done
[upd'nuitimoj
' one
0 multiplicador
multiplier
Q antepenultimo
the antepenult
[muit^plikv-
[uvntdpd-
dor]
nuitimu]
OS factores
the factors,
0 primeiro
first
[u/fa'torifj
submultiples
[pri'mviru]
0 producto geral the total (sum)
primeiro
firstly
0 producto par-
the quota
saber f'svberj
to know
cidl [upru-
seguinte
following
'ffutu pvr-
[sdglntd]
'sfaij
praticamente
practically
a unidade
the unit
['pratikv-
[vuni&a&d]
'mentej
a dezena
the ten
dar um trago
to draw a line
[v^d'zenv]
['trasuj
a conta [vlcdntv]
the account;
por baixo
underneath
bill
[pur baixuj
a centena
figure marking
chegar f/fgarj
to arrive, reach.
[vsen'tews]
the hundreds
to mount to
0 milhar
figure marking
apurar
to make clean,
[umi'fiar]
the thousands
[vpu'rar]
to obtain
a columna
the column
a virgula
the comma
[TsJcu'lunv]
['virgulv]
a tdboada
the multiplica-
a potencia
the power
[vtvbu'a&vj
tion-table
[pu'tesivj
ddo-me [dvumd] they give me,
0 numerador
the numerator
I am given
0 denominador
the denomina-
resolver
to resolve
tor
[rrdzotver]
0 resto
the remainder
vamos ['vvmuf]
we go; here:
valente
brave
we are going
ao par
at par
to . . ., we
0 principe
the Crown
shall
herdeiro
Prince.
fazer [fvzer]
to make
42. Prolblemas de multiplicai^ao.
Para saber multiplicar ^ precise saber primeiro a ta-
boada. Eis aqui um exemplo de multiplica^ao : dao-me de-
zeseis ma^as por dia dnrante qaatro dias: quantas ma^as me
dSo ao todo? Este problema resolve-se pela multiplica9ao.
0 multiplicando 16 e multiplicado pelo multiplicador 4. 0
producto 6 egual a sessenta e quatro. Vejamos (Let us see)
agora come 6 practicamente feita a multiplica9ao seguinte:
Trezentos e vinte- e oito a multiplicar por quarenta e cinco.
Collooam-se os dois factores (nome commum do multipli-
110 Jjmmm 17.
ihlwiMii' do ontro, e, tendo dado 1
: dnco vezes oito, qxiarenta.
o tiliBU algHiBM^ zerO; e yao quatro (tr.: we
ftn); emeo foes dots, des, e qoatro, qiiatorze; escre-
^VDOi qoatro e vae vbi (= «e earrjf mk); cineo vezes tr^,
qainze, e xim, ittiw if, Aporsmos aasxzs o prixneiro prodncto
parcial, e mil auatmdm e qiiarenta. Depois de aporado da
o Hgado pso&Mto paieial, de treaoiiot e
qoBiatze nul setecexttos e ses-
eertft pivte d*nm todo. Ha £rae-
ao w <»iwfm (== are written) os
dez on alguma potendft
d« — e hwt^/Sm -wwignm. 'Emqaajitoqiie as priznesaa
nulUA n'nma Hniia eom s psrte iiieini, MpBudas d^ella
pc7 Tuna Tirgala, as iiftiiBM i niiwiaw wi cm (se)
o imixierador eomo o demmaadar (lnMi2.
wmm, flwf <2eM.X com am trs^ eaJU^ 9Dm ^ = dois
i; ^« = dnco decxoio atevos. Urn £» i van TigMsa
T%^ma nona, txigfiom oa tiig<iuiMi primira psrto
de am mez. Trindade Co«Ilio: Pio
4S. Exercise.
fioir Uttie docs cac baif <^ tiic world know how the
Giker Mtf fifcs! Baw mmmj mtOKm ipgien have I than jofo,
if I kcfte ""/is of s docai, aad jim Ac xccuBiider ? 6 ia three
he fsn^ pert cT S; Imrccin Oe fiwth part of 8 ia 2,
6 ii 3 tiiMC 2L Twice tve liiMC tfc it haif ^ kimdzed.
Iwmjma^ I tiNHi^ tt«tt¥ch— iliwT jno^ (^)
twice as wise, aad aoieh
s ttoHmd toMC k^fiv than now. Portagacse
■Jijert to the dcoicl wpibtm : a hnadnd w^
Um. fwfnoBi ■■¥■ «^ «0 r^, and s tiioo-
reis— i.e., » aifflmi oif rfif — ^is a amCo. An
is wonJi aboot fear ilMwd §fc haadied rn«
tfcc adhmfs is at par. Twenty Hi» are a «Mai aad
225 fifis cooc^powl to a nhitling, wii^ atociooa ec^respoada
kiBgofPortogal, Manuel IL.
to Oc flnoM » the \^d[Yfbtmaj, 1908, the day
Charles L, and las dd«^ brother,
ttc GkowB
BLghteentli Lesson. lic&o deoima oitavi*
He^xLlar Yarte. Verh^
§ 111. £t the tenumatioQ of dw^ioiBitife nood
e di^mguii^ ^iree difiBWiutlbnasrf eonpqftfnii — ^til:
Tlie V^ oonj. mith the infinitive^ «d£i^ m >«r, aa:
"^a^pwBT to bay.
The ^^ eoDJ« vi& the infimtiTe cndimr m <€r, as:
^tder to adi
The S'^conj. wi^ ^le infinHrre cndiii^ In <«r, as:
iMUFUr to dqwit.
^^ ^ — Theee tcfxniDaticHis hape ahravs die tonoeai
§ 112. That part <d ^le Tob htfmt tt
iQaheredL Tbdse tamiDatioii ktteR idadi c^anderiBa
e di£S»<eiit petsoifts and teneas, aia ftddU to ^M root
112
Lesson 18.
§ 113. We distinguish:
1. Forms where the root has the tonical accent ; and
2. Forms where the termination has the tonical
accent.
Every verb has 11 of the former — viz.:
Pres. ind. : singular and S""^ pers. of the plural (4)
Pres. subj : „ „ „ „ „ „ „ (4)
Imperative: „ „ „ „ „ „ „ (3).
All other forms have their tonical accent on the
termination — e.g., compro, but comprdmos.
§ 114, We distinguish further:
1. Primary tenses (raizes da formagao dos tenij^os):
(a) The infinitive (infinitivo or infinito).
(b) The present indie: 1^* pers. sing, and 2"'^ per-
sons sing, apd plur.
(c) The preterite (pretcrito perfeito) ; 2^*^ pers. sin^.
2. Derived tenses (tempos derivados), which com-
prehend all the rest and are formed as follows:
(A) From the Infinitive: 1. Present, 2. Imperfect,
3. Perfect, 4. Future indie, 5. Conditional, 6. The
two participles.
The terminations are added partly to the stem,
partly to the infinitive.
Indicativo.
Inftnito',
Gomprar:
vender:
partir:
1. Pres. \2. Pret. imp.\S. Pret. perf.l 4. FtUuro.
compr-ei \ comprar-ei
vend-i \ vender-ei
\part-i Ipafiirei
compr-o \compr-ava
vend-o i vend-ia
part-o \ part-ia
5. Condicional. 6. Fart. imp. 7. Part. perf.
compr-ando compr-ado
vend-endo vend-ido
part-indo part.ido.
comprar-ia (ov compr-aria)
vender-ia (^or vend-eria)
partir-ia (or part-iria)
(B) From the Present Indie. 1^^ pers. sing.: The
Pres. Subj. by changing the ending o into -e in the
1*^* conj. and -a in the 2°^ and S*"^ conj.; and from the
2nd persons sing, and plur.: the corresponding persons
of the Imperative by dropping the -s.
Regular Verbs.
113
Fres. md.
Compr-o :
oend-o:
part-o:
1. Pres.conj.
compr-e
vend-a
part-a
Pres. ind.
tu compras:
vos compraes:
tu vendes:
v6s vendeis:
tu partes:
vos partis:
2. Imperativo.
compra (tu)
comprae (v6s)
vende (tu)
vendei (vds)
parte (tu)
parti (v6s).
JVb^e.— The 3^<^ person sing, and the 1^* and S^^^^ persons
plur. of the imperative are equal to the same of the subjunc-
tive present, except that the subiect, if employed, gene-
rally follows the verb— e.g, : compre, venda, parta V^ JSx^, o
senJior, etc. Yet it may also preceed: F«' coiw/?re, venda,
parta! The negative form of the imperative takes also the
subjunctive mood— e.g. : Nao fompres, ndo compreis! Don't
buy! Nao vendas, ndo vendaes! Ndo partas, ndo partaes!
Ndo partdmoSj ndo vendam V^« or F^* ndo vendam!
(C) From the Preterite perfeito, 2"*^ pars. sing.
(cf. § 48), by changing the termination -ste into -ra,
-sse or -r, we form the
.=..
1. Fret, mais-que-
perf.
2. Pret. imp.
conj.
3. Fut. imp.
conj.
cmnpraste:
vendeste:
partiste:
comprd-ra
vende-ra
parti-ra
compra-sse
vende-sse
parti-sse
compra-r
vende-r
parti-r.
§ 114. First Conjugation. Infinitiyo: Conviprar
to buy.
A. Simple Tenses.
Infinitive pessocU.
Para eu comprar to buy (I) para nos comprarmos to buy
(we)
para tu coi^prares to buy para vos comprardes to buy
(you) (you)
para elle comprar to buy (he) para elles comprarem to buy
(they).
Indicativo.
Presente.
Eu compro I buy, etc. nds comprdnio8 we buy, etc.
tu compras vds compraes
die compra elles compram.
Portuguese ConversatiOD-Grammar. 8
114 LesBon 18.
Imperfeito.
Comprava I bought, etc. cowpravamoj* we bought, etc.
compravas compraveis
comprava compravam.
Preterito perfeito (definidoj.
Comprei I bought, etc. comprdnios we bought; etc.
compra^ste comprastes
comprou comprarani.
Preterito mais-que-perfeito.
Comprdra I had bought, etc. comprdramos we had bought,
comprd/ras comprdreis [etc.
comprdra comprdrani.
Futuro.
Comprarei I shall buy, etc. compraremos we shall buy,
camprards comprareis [etc.
comprard comprardo.
Condicional.
Compraria I should buy, etc. comprariamos we should buy,
comprarias comprarieis [etc.
compraria comprariam.
Imperativo.
Compra! buy (thou)! compremos let us buy I
Compre V, Ex^- (o Senhor)! comprae buy (ye)!
buy! (sing.) comprem (V^^ Ex^^)! buy!
^ (plur.)
Imperativo negativo. .
Nao compres (tu) ! Nao compremos (nos) !
Nao compre (Y^)! Nao compreis (v6s)!
Nao comprem (V^^)!
Conjunctivo or Subjunctivo.
Preaente.
Que eu compre that I buy, etc. qiie nos compremos that we
que tu compres que v6s compreis [buy, etc.
que elle compre que elles compreni.
Imperfeito.
Se eu comprasse If I bought, etc.
se tu compr€isses
se elle comprasse
se nds comprdssemos
se vds comprasseis
se elles comprassem.
Regular Verbs.
115
Futuro.
Se eu comprar If I shall (or am to) buy, etc.
se tu comprares
se elle comprar
se nds compflarnios
se vos comprardes
se elles comprar eni.
Participio.
Passado.
Comprado bought.
Gerundio.
Presente. Comprando buying.
§ 115. Difference between Imperfeito and Pre
terito perfeito {cf. § 53).^
The Imperfeito is employed:
1. If t^ actions are repre- 1.
sented as being performed
at or as lasting the same
time (see Ex. 1).
2. If one action is interrupted
by another, the Imperfeito
denotes the action that was
going on when the other
began, while the latter re-
quires the Preterito perfeito.
3. In descriptions of character,
opinion, statCj'^manners, and
customs, as well as repre-
senting an action as often
repeated (see Ex. 3 and cf.
§ 120, A 3).
4. The Imperfeito is used for 4.
all actions that do not im-
mediately belong to the re-
lation, but are added as ac-
cessory circumstances or the
ovm meaning of the speaker.
The Preterito perfeito is
employed :
To mark a time positively
fixed, entirely elapsed, an
action quite accomplished.
2. To express actions following
one another, interrupting
others. It is the historical
tense, being peculiarly ap-
propriate to the narrative
style.
While the Imperfeito des-
cribes, the Preterito perf,
narrates (cf. 2); it represents
an action as performed only
once.
The Preterito denotes a
cJiangement in the state of
things; some action majck-
ingsi progress of the events.
3.
1 As these rules, already given for the most part in § 53,
are very important, we repeat them here, completing them by
adding others,
8*
116 Lesson 18
5. It marks an indefinite or 5. The Preterito marks a de-
illimited duration. finite and limited duration;
one without any reference
to another action or state.
6. It is employed in a hypo-
thetical clause (instead of
the Conditional).
7. It is used in indirect
speech.
Remark.— The Preterito perfeito is one of the most im-
portant, while most usual, tenses in the Portuguese language.
It is very often employed instead of the English Perfect (e.g.,
for "I have bought" eu cowprei of. § 53, B, d). More details
for the use of these tenses are given in the nineteenth lesson.
Examples.
1. Emquanto o cortejo passava pelas ruas, os sinos
tocavam.
Whilst the procession passed through the jtreets,
the bells were ringing.
2. Eu estudava a ligdOy quando tu chegaste.
I was studying my lesson when you arrived.
3. Quando estava na praia, tomava banhos todos os
dias.
When I was at the seaside, I took baths every
day.
Eu fui d praia, mas ndo, tomei banho.
I went to the beach, but did not take a bath.
EUe falava muito alto \ he spoke very loud (as a
I habit)
EUe falou muito alto i he spoke very loud (on a
J certain occasion).
4. Chovia or estava a chover it was raining.
Choveu, prindpiou a chover, o tempo tornou-se chu-
voso.
It began to rain, the weather became rainy.
5. Eramos amigos we were friends (and are so still).
Fomos amigos we were friends (but now no longer).
6. Eu voltava (instead of: voltaria), se me mandassem
chamar. ,
I should go back if I were sent for.
7. EUe disse-me que nao pensava em partir.
He told me that he did not think of departing.
Regular Verba.
117
§ 116. Regular Verbs of the First Conjugation,
Abotoar to button
ahrevi'ar [vtrdviar] to shorten
acahar to finish
; accordar to awake
achar [vfar] \ ^ ^ a
encontrar f ^
admirar [vddmirar] to admire
alisar to smooth
apanhar [vpuyar] to catch
asseniar-se to sit down
atirar com to fling
avistar [vviftar] to perceive
banhar to bathe
cacarejar to cackle
calgar to put on (shoes, gloves)
f, caminhar [hvmiyar] to go,
■ stride, walk
cantar [kvniar] to sing, crow
^ cansar to tire
chamar [fvmar] to call, to be
called
collocar to put
corar [ko'rar] to bleach,
redden
deitar to lay down
deitar-se to lie down
deixar [dvifar] to leave off,
t let, forbear
deleitar [ddvitarj to delight
descansar to rest
rfoir«r fdot'rar] to gild
encadernar [ikvdornar] to
bind (boohs)
enflar to thread; to put on
enxugar to dry (p. p.: enxuto)
escovar to brush
escutar to listen to
esfregar to rub
espantar [ifpvntar] to frighten
estacar fijMar] to stop
es^icar liftikar] \ . , ^ ,
es^irar /J/-^?r4 f ^^ ^^^'^^^^
/aZar ffvlar] to speak
/tar to spin
frequent ar to attend
gastar [gvftar] to expend, use,
consume
gorgeiar [gurgiar] to warble
ignorar [ignurar] to ignore
illustrar to illustrate
mi^ar to imitate -
langar to throw
Zat?ar to wash
levantar-se [hvvntars?] to rise,
get up
Ze'i?ar [Idvar] to take (away)
limpar [Itmpar] to clean
Zivrar [livrar] to free
Zo«?;ar [lovar] to praise
mandar [m^ndar] to send, to
©rder
ma«<?ar chamar to send for
mudar (de) to change
nadar to swim
oZAar to see
passar to pass, go
P^^a** em \ . . ,
tomar i ^^ ^^^^
pendurar to hang
pensar fpesar] to think
pentear to comb
praticar [pratikar] to practise
precisar to want
principiar [prtstpt 'ar] to begin
procurar [prukurvr] to look
for
projectar [prujdarj to intend,
to have in view
quebrar-se [kd'brarsd] to be
broken
receiar to fear
recreiar [rrgkrmar] to refresh,
delight
rec2^ar [rrgkuzar] to refuse
repar [rrdgar] to water
re^ar to pray
salvar [sa^var] to save
sawar [svnarj '\o cure, heal
sarar [svrar] to heal
stf/ar to soil
118
Lesson 18.
tirar to take off, draw out
viajar to travel
tomar [tumar]
to take
virar to turn
trafar to treat, deal (with),
voar [vuarj to
%
strive
voUar [voltar]
to return.
Palayras.
0 ruido
the noise
a bofboleta
the butterfly
[rru'i&u]
[burbu'letvj
0 cdbide
the rack
0 banco
the bench
[kv'U&9]
0 gftrgeio
the warbling
0 casaco
the coat
[gur's^iu]
[kv'zaku]
0 ouvido
the hearing,
0 ccUete
the waistcoat
[o 'vi&u]
ear
[ku'Utd]
0 lavatdrio
the washing-
OS calgoes
the breeches
[Ivvv'toriiiJ
stand *
[kai'soif]
'
a toalha
the towel
as ceroulas
the drawers,
[tu'afiv]
0 nd [nv]
[s9'rolvfJ
pants
the knot
a camisola
the vest
0 estabelecimento the swimming-
fkvmi'zohj
de natagao
school
as chinellas
the slippers
0 natatorio
the bathing-
[fi'n^lvf]
place
0 colarinho
the collar
0 rnestre de
the teacher of
[kulv'rijiu]
natagao
swimming
a gravata
the cravat
poe
put, he puts
fgrv 'vatvj
em sequidu \
0 toucador
[tokv 'fforj
the dressing-
table
r ''At
[89 gtovj
entao fm'tvuj
then, after
that.
cuidadoso
carefnl
depots
a esteira
the mat
[d^'poifj
ft/'tvirnj
48. L<
sitiira.
Ao deitar-se e levantar-se.
Agora, Jose, deixa de regar as tuas flores! Sao oito
■loras e tempo para acabares. Has de ir (to go) deitar-te. A
Maria ja te chamou, ella deseja levar-te a cama. Anda depressa,
mas sem ruido, para nao acordares teus irmaozinhos. Tira
0 teu fato, mas nao atires com as tuas coisas para o chao!
Oiha aquelle cabide: pendura ali o teu easaquinho, o collete
e as cal^oes. E nas costas desta cadeira deitards a tua camisa,
as ceroulas e as meias. Colloca as tuas botas ou sapatos
f6ra da porta para que o criado as limpe antes de^te levan-
tares. As tuas chinellas, essas ficam bem ao p6 da cama.
P5e o teu colarinho e a gravata em cima do toucador ! Assim
encontrards tudo no seu lugar, sem que precises procural-o
^manba de manha. Jd lavaste as maos? Bem, deita-te, reza
e dorme!
' Regular Verbs. 119
Depois de ter bem passado a noite, Jose ^ accordado
pelo criado que o chama: «0 menino, accordel Levante-se!
Sen papa ja o esta esperando no jardim! Ja sao sete horas!
E e verdade: o gallo canta, as gallinhas cacarejam e os pas-
saros gorgeiam, deleitando os ouvidos. Jos^ esfrega os olhos,
estica as pernas e salta da cama. Elle muda de camisa, cal^a
as meias, as ceronlas e os cal^oes^ enfia as chinellas e depois
lava-se bem com nma esponja ao lavatorio. Elle usa de
muita agna fria e gasta bastante sab^o. Elle gosta at^ to-
mar banho de manha, mas receia que leve muito tempo, por-
que seu pae esta a espera d'elle. Esfregando-se bem com
uma toalha, enxuga a cara e o peito; entao pega numa es-
cova para escovar os dentes, e com um pente alisa o cabello.
Depois de penteado enfia o coUete e a jaqueta, abotoa o
colarinho e ata um Undo no na sua gravata. Afinal tira as
chinellas e calcja os sapatos que o criado j4 limpou e collocoii
fora da porta do quarto. Agora esta prompto para passar
para baixo e almo<jar com o pae que em seguida o acompanha
a escola. Pois o Jos^zinho freqiienta uma escola de meninos
onde trata de aprender quanto um menino precisa saber.
Mas logo que as aulas acabam, elle toma o seu fato de banho
e caminha para o estabelecimento de nata<jao, onde ha um
grande natatdrio para os meninos nadarem debaixo da inspec^ao
d'um mestre de nata^ao.
44. Exercise.
(a) Read and write the first part of 43, changing the
2^^ person of the Imperative into the 3r<i— e.g. : Agora, Jos^,
deixe de regar as suas flores !
(b) Read and write the 2'^^ part (from : Depois de ter . . .),
changing the Present Tense (1) into the Past Tenses and (2)
into the Future.
45. Thema.
Our little brother went to bed. He took off his things
and hung them (-as) for the most part on a rack behind the bed-
room door. But his shirt, vest, and pants were carefully put on
a chair near the bed, while the slippers and stockings remained
on the mat by the bedgide. Before he lay down, he took a glass
of milk and a slice of bread and butter, for he had had no supper.
He had passed the afternoon in the garden, watering his flowers
and catching butterflies. When he was tired, he sat down on a
bench to rest, ^nddelightedhis (== thejears by listening to the
warbling of thr ftrSS"^ TferftS tftHSglf'that it would be time
to finish and go to bed. In that moment his (= the) mother
sent for him, ordering the maid-servant to take him [tr. that she
120 Lesson 19.
took him) to bed. As by working in the garden he had soiled
(imp. subj.) his clothes and boots, the man-servant will have to
clean these, while the maid- servant will brush those. When little
Joe awakes (fut. subj.) to-morrow morning, he will find his
things clean and prepared.
Conversa^fio.
A que horas ha-de o nosso irmaozinho ir para cama?
Quern 0 leva para la, ajudando-lhe a despir (undress)^
Que mais tera a criada que (to) fazer?
Como passou o Jose a tarde ?
Que fez (did) elle quando estava cansado ?
Que (e que) tomou antes de se deitar?
Onde coUocou as suas coisas? (1) a jaqueta? (2) as cerou-
las? (3) as meias? (4) o collarinho?.
Para que precisa elle de collocar tudo bem no seu lugar?
Que fara, depois de deitado e antes de adormecer {to fall
asleep) ?
A que horas ha de levantar-se ?
Como se prepara para almo(jar com seu pae?
Para onde o acompanha depois o pae?
Que faz o Jos^zinho na escola ?
E que faz depois de acabadas as aulas?
Que ha no estabelecimento de nata(jao?
Como nadam ali os meninos ?
Os meninos gostam de nadar e de tomar banho?
Que fazem depois de ter tornado banho?
Que parte de dia 6 a melhor para tomar banho ?
Ha entre os meninos algum que seja bom nadador ?
Porque nao se recommenda ficar muito tempo na agua?
Mneteenth Lesson. Licao decima nona.
Regular Verbs.
B. Compound Tenses with ter (Active Voice),
and ser (Passive Voice)*
§ 117. As the compound tenses do not offer any
difficulty, as soon as we know the auxihary verbs, we
gave their forms in the conjugation of those verbs
(of. L. 3 — 6). The compound tenses of the auxiliary
verbs and of the active voice of the transitive verbs are
formed by aid of the verb ter, joined to their past parti-
Regular Verbs. 121
ciple, while the passive voice is formed by the verb
ser, joined to the past participle. Haver is scarcely used
in compound tenses, but for the compound future and
conditional, where it is joined to the following infinitive
by de and, in contrast to the simple future or condi-
tional, expresses a necessity or intention.
Hei-de comprar I shall (I intend) to buy.
0 sol ha-de derreter a neve the sun will (= must) melt
the snow.
§ 118. Note.— The intransitive verbs follow on
the whole the same rules as in Enghsh. Their com-
pound tenses are formed by ter; yet, if you want to
express a state, the result of an action, you employ
estar — e.g. : o comhoio estd chegado; a arvore estd cahida;
a casa estd voltada para o sid (lies towards the south);
a industria estd decahida, etc.
§ 119. Ter comprado to have bought.
Indicativo.
Preterito composto.
Eu tenJw comprado I have bought, etc.
Preterito mais-que-perfeito composto.
Eu tvnha comprado I had bought, etc.
Future composto.
Hei (or tenko) de comprar [l^^f^^Y intend to buy.
terei de comprar I shall have to buy.
Futuro anterior.
Terei comprado I shall have bought.
Condicional imperfeito.
Hama Cor teria) \ 1 should have or I ought to buy,
de comprar j I should have been obliged to buy.
Co^idicional passado.
Teria comprado I should have bought.
Conjunctivo passado.
Que eu tenha comprado that I have bought.
122 Lesson 19.
Maia-que-perfeito.
Se eu tivesse comprado if I had bought.
Futuro anterior.
Quando eu tiver comprado when I shall have bought.
Infinitivo e Participios.
Tassado.
Ter comprado to have bought.
Futm'o.
Haver (oy ter) de comprar to have to buy.
Participio composto.
Tendo comprado having bought.
§ 120. As already said, the Preterite simples is
often employed instead of the Prefcrito perfeito com-
posto (the English "I have [done]"):
A. The Preterito simples B. The Preterito composto
indicates : indicates :
1. Something belonging to the 1. Something belonging to the
past: elle foi professor (he past and still continuing in
is no more). the present: Elle tern sido
professor (he is so still).
2. A past state : esteve muito 2. A still lasting state : tern
occupado he was very busy. estado muito occupado he
has been very busy.
3. An isolated singular action 3. A habit still enduring :
(even when repeated) : Es- Tern escripto com regulari-
creveu algumas vezes he dade he has written regu-
wrote sometimes. larly (and still continues
writing).
Ex.: '^Eu fuQO assim, eu tenho feiio sempre assim, in-
conscientemente ; e o que escrevi nuo e mais do
que a revelaC'do do que tenho sentido/' (Trindade
Coelho.)
As a rule you may recognise which tense to
employ by some adverb contained in the clause:
Havia cinco annos que era professor he (then) had
been a teacher for 3 years.
Ha cinco armos que foi professor he (then) had been a
teacher 3 years ago.
Ha cinco annos que tern sido professor he has been a
teacher these 3 years.
Regular Verbs. 123
§ 121. Observations.
(a) The interrogative, negative, and interrogative-
negative forms of the verb may be formed, as sdready
said, by the transposition of the noun or pronoun after
the verb, or simply by the accentuation or punctuation
— e.g.: Eu compro. Compro (eu)? Eu ndk) compro.
Noo compro (eu)?
(b) In the regular verbs the Infinitivo pessoal is
equal to the Futuro do Conjunctivo.
§ 122. The Passive Toice (VO0 passiva) is formed
by joining the auxiliary ser to the past participle of
the active verb (of. L. 4J. The past participle, when
coupled with ser, is considered an adjective and conse-
quently agrees in gender and number with the noun
or pronoun to which it refers, even when the verb ser
is omitted:
0 terxeno foi vendido the ground was sold.
A casa foi vendida the house was sold.
Os terrenos foram vendidos the grounds were sold
As casas foram vendidas the houses were sold.
Note. Instead of ser we may employ also ficar:
0 Uvro ficoii vendido, etc.
§ 123. If there be several subjects belonging to
the same participle, this latter takes the form of the
plural. If the subjects are of different gender, the
masculine is preferred- to the feminine in modifying the
participle. If the participle follows such different sub-
jects, the mascuUne ending is applied to the participle;
if preceding, this is not necessary.
Foram comprados muitas uvas e figos (or muitos figos
e uvas).
^As uvas e os figos (que foram) comprados* no mer-
cado . . .
Note. — The subject being v6s, employed for a single per-
son, the participle is employed in the singular ; also if the
subject is F^ Fx^, F«, etc. the participle agi-ees with the sex
of the person addressed:
ya ;Ex^. senhor Nogueira, foi convidado.
F« Fx^, minha senhora, foi convidada.
Vos sois adorado, Sen/wr, pelo ciu e pela terra.
124 Lesson 19.
§ 124. Ser chatnado to be called or summoned.
Indicativo.
Presente.
Eu sou chamado, -a I am called or summoned, etc.
tu es chamado, -a
elle e chamado
ella e chamada
Plur. nds somos chamados, -as
v6s sois chamados^ -as
elles sao chamados
ellas sdo chamadas.
Imperfeito.
Fm era chamado, -a I was called or summoned, etc.
Preterito absoluto.
Eu fui chamado, -a I was or have been called or sum-
moned, etc.
Preterito composto.
Eu tenho sido chamado, -a I have been called.
Preterito mais-que-perfeito.
Eu fora chamado, -a I had been called.
Preterito mais-que-perfeito composto.
Eu tinha sido chamado, -a I had been called.
Eutu/ro.
Eu serei chamado, -a I shall be called, etc.
Futuro composto.
Eu hei de ser chamado, -a I shall or must be called
etc.
Futuro anterior.
Eu terei sido chamado, -a I shall have been called.
Condicional presente.
Eu%eria chamado, -a I should be called, etc.
Condicional composto.
Eu teria sido chamado, -,a I should have been called.
Imperativo.
Sii chamado, -« (May you) be called, etc.
Participle.
Sefido chamado, -a being called, etc.
Regular Verbs. 125
Farticipio passado.
Tendo sido chamado, -a having been (or as I was)
called.
Infiniti'co passado.
Ter sido chamado, -a to have been called^ etc.
Subjunctivo.
Presente.
Que eu seja chamado, -a that I be called.
Imperfeito.
Que eu fosse cliamado, -a that I was called.
Preterito composto.
Que eu tenha sido chamado, -a that I have been called.
Preterito mais-que-perftito composto.
Que eu tivesse sido chamado, -a that I had been called.
Futuro.
Se eu for chamado, -a if I shall be called.
Futuro anterior.
Se eu tiver sido chamado, -a if I shall have been called.
§ 125. The passive voice may be and is frequently
expressed by the active form with the pronoun .se — i.e.,
reflectively; thus:
Com a farinha de milho faz-se a brda (= e feita a
broa).
Out of the flour of Indian corn is made bread of
maize.
Yet this form must only be employed, if no
ambiguity result, as — for instance : 0 delinquents enfor-
cou-se or: enforcou-se o delinquente would be rather:
the criminel hanged himself, while "was hanged" must
be rendered in this case by "foi (or ficou) enforcado."
§ 126. The preposition "by" in the passive voice
is rendered by par,
Palavras.
a tecedeira
the woman
0 linho ['lit)ul
the flax
weaver
0 no ffiuj
the thread
0 fuso
the spindle
a substancia
the substance
em seguida
afterwards
[subdf'tvsftv]
[isygi&v]
0 tear [t}'ar]
the weavers
depots de
after
loom
emfim fifi]
at last, finally
a urdidura
the warp(ing)
126
Lesson 19.
assedar
0 sarilho \
a dohadoura \
secco f'sekuj
mctgar [mv'sar]
bater [hv 'ter]
o mago f'masuj
a magadeira
[missv 'dvirv]
espadelar
[}fpv&9'lar]
sedeiro
[s^'&vtru]
a roca [rrokv] \
a magaroca \
estonietUar
[}ftumen'tarj
0 tomento
[tumentu]
to hatchel
the reel
dry
to break, brake
to beat
the flax- brake
the flax-dresser
to swingle
the flax-comb
the distaff
to hackle
the awn, chaff
(of flax)
A torre [torrd] the tower
severo [sd'veruj severe
erguer [ir'ger] to raise
0 cabadelo sandy beach
fkahv '&elu]
o ierraro the terrace
fte'rr&su]
a. descoberta discovery
fdiffcu'bsrtiij
avangar to advance
construir to construct
f'kdftru'irj
datar to date
0 dnqulo the angle
[vgiilu]
0 hexdgono hexagon
fig 'zagunuj
o cupulo
a curttna
[kur'tmvj
a ameia
/» 'mvfvj
grandioso
[grvnd}'ozu]
ornar fur'narj
0 escudo
the cupola
the curtain
the battlement
grand
a estriga
[if'trige]
a meada
[mfadvj
a estopa
[if'topv]
grosseiro
[gru'svyru]
0 tecido [td' ai&u]
0 cabo ['katuj
ordinario
[ordi 'nar}uj
a corda ['kordej
o barbante
[bTsr'bvntd]
o lengo ['lesuj
emquanto
li'kwvntu]
a cruz [krufj
a varanda
/vB 'rvndv]
0 arco ['arkuj
0 parapeito
fpvrv 'pvituj
rendilhar
[rrendi' fiar]
0 andar
a abdbada
/» 'bobv&TB]
0 pavimento
Urreo
a nervura
fnar'vurej
entrelagar
[irdrslv 'sarj
0 ingresso
[i'gresuj
0 accesso
[v'sesuj
a escada de
caracol
[kerv'koij
a guarita
[giw 'rits]
the strike (of
flax)
the skein
the (flax-)tow
coarse
the web, tissue
cable, rope
ordinary
the cord, rope
the pack-
thread, twine
the handker-
chief
whilst.
the cross
the veranda
the arch, bow
the parapet
to indent
the story
arched roof,
vault
the ground
floor
the nervure
interlace
ingress
winding stairs
to ornate j a guarita the watch-
the shield [gvm'ritv] tower.
0 lado da terra the landside |
46. Leitura.
0 linho.
0 linho e uma planta baixa de fl6r azul. Das hastes d'essa
planta util e tirade urn fio. Esse fio 6 a substancia de que 6
Regular Verbs. 127"
feito 0 panno de linho. Depois de estarem bem seccas, as
hastes da planta sao ma^adas ou batidas a ma^o pelas ma(ja-
deiras. Em seguida sao espadeladas, depois levadas ao sedeiro
e emfim fiadas na roca. 0 linho ha de ser espadelado para ser
estomentado ou para se H?e (of it) tirarem os tomentos que 6
a estopa. Os denies de ferro do sedeiro separam o linho da
estopa : esse fica assedado. Esta e mais grosseira que o linho ;
tambem e fiada na roca, e d*ella serSo feitas cordas e bar-
bantes, tecidos grosseiros, cabos ordinarios etc. Com o linho
assedado fazem-se as estrigas, e estas sao fiadas na roca. Ao
fiar, fazem-se no fuso as ma^arocas. Das ma^arocas fazem-se
meadas no sarilho. As meadas vao a lavar (go or are to be
washed) ; depois sao cosidas com cinza ; outra vez sao lavadas ;
e em seguida postas ao sol a (= to) c6rar. Depois de en-
xutas, as meadas vao a dobadoura, para se fazerem os novellos.
Os novellos v§o para a tecedeira, e esta faz com elles a urdi-
dura no tear. Em seguida, lan<jando o fio por entre a urdidura,
a tecedeira faz o panno. Para tudo isto ha tambem machinas
muito perfeitas nas fabricas de fia9ao e tecidos.
Trindade Coelho: 0 primeiro Livro de Leitura.
47. Exercise.
The Tower of Belem.
One of the -most beautiful monuments in Portugal is the
Tower of Belem, called also "Torre de Sao Vicente," magnificent
and severe, raised upon a rock on a sandy beach of the Tagus
with its terrace advancing still over the river. The tower
was built in memory of the discoveries of the Portuguese,
and its construction dates from the beginning of the sixteenth
century. The square tower shuts up the terrace from the
landside. The two angles of the terrace which are looking
upon (para) the sea are cut so that by their base is formed
an hexagon, in the little angles of which (do qual) are rising
watch-towers with cupolas, as well os from the two inferior
and the four superior angles of the tower. The terrace and
the platform of the tower are protected by curtains of grand
battlements; each of these ornated by (com) its shield and
cross of Christ. At half the height of the tower projects
an open veranda with columns, arches, and indented parapets.
Inside in every story a large central room is (to be) found
whose arched roof in the ground-floor has no nervures, while
very rich interlaced nervures are in the upper stories. By very
little doors ingress is given to the very narrow interiors of
the square watch-towers. Winding stairs give access to the
superior stories.
128 Lesson 20.
Conyersa^ao.
Que especie de planta e o linho?
Qual e a parte litil da planta?
De que servem os fios tirades da haste do linho?
Como se prepara a substancia que Sao os fios, para se
fazer o fio de fiar?
Que vem a ser a estopa? Como e? E que se faz
d'ella?
Quaes sao os processes passados pelos fios depois de
fiados na roca?
Como se chamam os apparelhos que servem nesses pro-
cesses ?
Onde s5o esses apparellos substituidos per machinas
muito perfeitas?
Como se chama urn dos mais belles monumentos em
Portugal?
Onde se encontra a « Torre de Belem»?
Com que intento (intention) foi ella construida?
De quando data a sua construc^ao?
De que duas partes consiste o monumento?
Como e construido o terrace?
Como 6 protegido o terra9o assim como a plataforma
da torre?
As ameias como sao ornadas?
Que e que projecta a meia altura da torre?
Que ^ que se encontra no interior?
Como sao feitas as abobadas no pavimento terreo? nos
andares superiores?
Come se entra nas guaritas? nos andares superiores?
Twentieth Lesson. Li^ao vigesima.
Pronominal or Reflective Verbs.
Verhos pronominaes ou reflexivos,
§ 127. As we learned in the last chapter (§ 125),
the Passive Voice may be and is often rendered by
the. reflective form of the verb. Thus employed, any
verb, even the intransitive one, may adopt thi passive
form. This form may in English be rendered either
by the saine passive form or by the active form with
the impersonal pronouns one, we, you, or they, or people
as a subject— e.g.:
Pronominal or Reflective Verbs. 129
Juntam-se os papeis the papers are gathered, you or
we gather the papers.
Esfe livro Use com agrado this book is read (one reads
or people read this book) with pleasure.
Fakt-se d'elle com muito eloglo he is spoken of (they
speak of him) with high praise.
Observations.
(a) In the last phrase we may also employ the
active form, with the verb in the plural, just as in
English :
Falam delle com muito elogio.
(b) In other cases we ma}' substitute the passive
or impersonal form by the gerund-- e.g. : instead of
^'quande se dorme, ndo se precisa comer" :
Dormindo nao se precisa comer.
When you (we, people) sleep, you (we, people) need not
eat.
(c) Here also the second reflective form might
be rendered by the active, as in Enghsh: Dormindo,
a gente nao xwecisa comer.
§ 128. The following is the whole conjugation
of the reflective verb, the 3^^ person of which we have
already learned.
As for the reflective pronouns (Enghsh: myself, etc.),
there is only the one characteristic form (se), already
dealt with, which marks the 3^^ pers. sing, and plur.
For the other persons the accusative of the pronoun
is employed, thus: me [m^], te [td], se [so], nos [mf],
vos [voJJ.
Infinitivo.
Infinitivo impessoal.
Lavar-se to wash oneself.
Infinitivo pessoal.
Para eu me lavar that I (may) wash myself, etc.
para tu te lavares
para elle se lavar
para nos nos lavarmos
para vos vos lavar des
para elles se lavarem.
Portuguese Conversatiou-Grammar.
130 Lesson 20.
Participio.
Presente.
Lavando-me washing myself.
Passado.
Tendo-me lavado (=-- depois de me ter lavado) after
having washed myself.
Indicative.
Presente.
iii'M Zat;o-me, I wash myself, etc. nds lavdmo^-nos
tu lavas-te ' vos lavaes-vos
elle lava-se elles lavam-se.
Preterito imperfeito.
Eu lavava-me I washed my- nds lavavamo^-nos
self, etc. vds lavaveis-vos
tu lavavas-te dies lavavam-se.
elle lavava-se
Preterito perfeito.
Eu lavei-me I washed myself nds lavdmo^-nos
or I have washed myself, etc. vds lavdstes-vos
tu lavaste-te elles lavaram-se.
elle lavou-se
Preterito mais-que-perfeito.
Eu lavdra-me I had washed nds lavdramo^-nos
myself, etc. v6s lavdreis-vos
tu lavdras-te elles lavaram-se.
elle lavdra-se
Preterito perfeito composto.
Eu tenho-me lavado I have washed myself.
Preterito mais-que-perfeito-composto.
Eu tinha-me lavado I had washed myself.
Futuro.
Eu hei-de me lavar or lavar-me-(h)ei or eu me lavarei I
shall wash myself, etc.
Futuro passado.
Ter-me-(h)ei lavado ov eu me terei lavado I shall have
washed myself, etc.
Gondicional.
Eu havia de me lavar or lavar-me-(h)ia I should wash
myself. «tc.
» Condicional passado.
Ter-me-(h)ia lavado or eu me teria lavado I shoald have
washed myself.
» The 8 of the 1st pens. pi. drops before the pronouns o(«),
a(8), no^, vos.
Pronominal or Reflective Verbs. 131
Imperativo,
Lava-te! Lave-se! Lavae-vos! Wash yourself!
Ndo te laves! Ndo se lave! Nao vos laveis! Do not
wash yourself.
Conjunctivo.
Presente.
Que eu me lave that I wash myself, etc.
que tu te laves
que elle se lave
que nos nos lavemos
que vos vos laveis
que elles se lavem.
Imperfeito.
Que or se eu ine lavasse that or if I washed myself, etc.
que or se tu te lavasses
que or se elle se lavasse
que or se nos nos lavassemos
que or se vos vos lavas seis
qu^ or se elles se lavass&in.
Preterito composto.
Que eu me tenha lavado that I have washed myself, etc.
que tu te tenhas lavado.
Mais-que-perfeito-eomposto.
Que or se eu me tivesse lavado that or if I had washed
myself, etc.
que or se tu te tivesses lavado
que or se e?/e se tivess^ lavado.
Future.
Se or quando eu me lavar if or when I shall wash
myself, etc.
se or quando tu te lavares
se or quando elle se lavar
se or quando nos nos lavarmos
se or quando v6s vos lavardes
se or quando elles se lavarem.
§ 129. The position of the reflective pronoun is:
1. in a simple principal phrase, if not negative, after
the verb (or the auxiliary), to which it is joined by a
hyphen — e.g.: Lavo-me; lavaste-te?
2. If however the phrase is negative, the pronoun
precedes the verb: Ndo me lavo\ ndo te lavaste? Nunca
se lavava.
9*
132 Lesson 20.
3. If an adverb, conjunction, or complement begins
the phrase or, without beginning it, precedes the verb,
the pronoun may be put before or after the verb.
"O homem precisa alimentar-se para viver: se nao
se alimentasse, morria. Os homens aUmentam-se de
carnes, e tambem se alimentam de vegetaes." \
4. In subordinate sentences the pronoun precedes'
the verb: Quero que te laves (as nidos). I want you
to wash yourself (your hands).
5. After the "verbo de realce" E que which is
employed to put an emphasis upon some word, you
may put the pronoun behind or before the verb: E que
esta lei presta-se (or se presta) a tudo quanto seja fraude.
The case is that this law complies wdth anything like
fraud.
Here also E que may be omitted or considered
as not existing, and thus the phrase becomes a prin-!
cipal one.
Note. — The same rules apply to the pronoun complement,
even if not employed reflectively, and whether accusative or
dative— e.g. :
Eu lava -a I wash her or it.
Lavaste-os? Did you wash them?
Ndo as lavei I did not wash them.
Nunca te lavou a roupa she never washed your linen
{te is here dative).
Se a lavadeira nao me tivesse lavado a roupa . . .
If the washerwoman had not washed my linen . . .
§ 130. The reflective verbs in English and Por-
tuguese languages do not always correspond to each
other. As indeed the reflective verbs in English are
rare, some neuter or passive verbs in English require
the reflective form in Portuguese. Such verbs are:
Admirar-se to wonder chamar-se to be called
afogar-se to be drowned compor-se (see § 213) to be
approximar-sey, . . comj
chegar-se } ^ approxima e contentar-se to be contented
apresentar-se a to wait upon or satisfied
{apresentar-se to offer oneself) decidir-se to decide
arrepender-se to repent , . . / to lie down,
(as)sentar-se to sit down * ' i to go to bed
atrever-se to dare descuidar-se de to neglect
calar-se to be silent dignar-seto deign, to he pleased
Pronominal or Reflective Verbs. 138
empenhar-se to endeavour lemhrar-se to remember
encontrar-se to be (found) levontar-se to get up, to rise
encontrar-se corn to meet queixar-se to complain
enganar-se to be mistaken referir-se to refer
escapar-se \ . regosijar-se to rejoice
evadir-se j ^ " resentir-se to resent
esquecer(-se de) to forget restdbelecer-se to recover
fazer-se to become retirar-se to retire
informar-se to inquire tornar-se to become, turn out
irritar-se to grow angry recwsarf'-se^ to refuse
ir-se (embora) to go away dfesawimar('-se> \ to discourage,
jaciar-se to boast desaletdar(-se) f to lose courage
^o^e. — The three last verbs may be employed as active,
neuter^ or reflective verbs ; as for esquecer, it must be follow-
ed by de if employed reflectively, and personally. Without
de, it may be used as an active verb (which is considered a
gallicism); but more frequently as a neuter and in the 8^<^ per-
son; neuter, it is employed without pronoun or de.
Esqueceu-se de alguma cousa |
JEsqueceu alguma cousa , he forgot something.
Esqueceu-lhe alguma cousa j
Eu desanimei or desanimei-me \ I god discouraged. I
Eti desalentei or desalentei-me \ lost courage.
0 seu mallogro dcsalentou-o his ill-success discouraged
him.
§ 131. Whenever the Portuguese se, nos, vos have
not a reflective sense, but express a reciprocal action,
they are translated by each other or one anothey:
Os dois irmaos parecem-se (Nos parecemo-nos).
The two brothers resemble (we resemble) one another.
§ 132. Very often we can hardly distinguish
whether a verb, employed with -se (i.e. in the 3^'<^ per-
son), is reflective or passive. In this latter case it can
always be substituted by the past participle preceded
by a form of the verb ser. 0 sifio ouve-se (= is heard).
Sometimes the difference is immaterial: 0 corpo cdimenta-
se^ the body is nourished or nourishes itself. If there is
a second pronoun, we may be sure that the verb is
employed in the passive voice — e.g.:
A cavallo dado ndo se Ihe olha o dente (= o dente nuo
e olhado).
Look not a gift-hors^e in the mouth.
134
Lesson 20.
Quando ha vento, molha-se a vela (-
Ihada) (prov.).
Strike the iron while it is hot.
Contenta-U, gato, que farta o farto.
Great wealth, great weariness.
a vela fica mo-
Palayras.
Vestir-se
t6 dress
a extremidade
the extremity
fvi'ftirs^J
[I'ftrami&a&d]
despir-se
to undress
saliente
prominent
[dif'pirs^J
fsvlt 'entpj
divertir-sd
[divdrtirsd]
a unlia
the nail
to amuse
['urjv]
recrear-se
oneself
guarnecer de
to provide with
[rdkry 'arsd]
gicvrnd' ser]
dedicar-se a
to give oneself
estar em pe
to stand
up to
[i/'tanm'pe]
guardar-se de
to beware of
pisar [pi'zar]
to tread
fgiovr 'dars9&9]
0 traballio
the work
refrescar-se
to refresh
[trE 'bafiu]
[rdfry'harsBj
oneself
0 tacto f'tatuj
the touch
cdimentar-se
to nourish
particularmente
particularly
[vlimfi^'tars9]
oneself
Ipertikular-
asxemelhar-se
to equal, to
' mentc]
[issdmi 'ftarsd]^
resemble, to
0 dedo pollegar
the thumb
parecer-se
be (alike)
[puh 'gar]
[perd'sersB]
0 dedo pollegar
the big toe
0 vegetal
the vegetable
do pe
[vd^d'tai]
opponivel
opposite
a bebida
the drink
[opu 'nivel]
fbybutvj
a gemma d'ovo
the yolk
engordar
to fatten
f'^emti '&ovuJ
[igur'dar]
a clara (d'ovo)
the white (of
sdlido ['soliffu]
solid ; thorough
an egg)
malar a sede
to quench one's
incolor
colourless
(a fome)
thirst
cozido
boiled
figurar
to figure
0 miolo
the kernel
suar
to sweat
[mt'olu]
a baga fbagaj
0 8u6r [su'dtJ
the drop
oval fu'vaij
oval
the sweat
envoi ver
to involve
0 estomago
the stomach
flvui 'ver]
[I'ftomvgu]
prdprio para
eatable
0 8UCC0 ['sukuj,
the gastric
comer
gdstrico
juice
sabordso
savoury
['gaftriku]
[svbu'rozul
digerir
to digest
nnfritivo
nourishing
[dis9'rir]
[nutrj tivu]
0 condimento
the seasoning
0 producto
the product(ion)
fkondi'mentuj
[pru'dutu]
salivar
to spit
0 reino animal
the animal
[mli'vnr]
kingdom
Pronominal or Reflective Verbs.
135
0 reino vegetal
the vegetable
0 cnixeiro
the clerk
kingdom
f'kai'MruJ
delgado
thiu
0 guarda-livros
the book-
[ddiga&u]
keeper
acastanhado
brownish
seja 0 que for
whatsoever it
[vJcyfte 'yaifuj
be
liquido['likwi&u] liquid
a respeito de
as for
Hjo f'rrisuj
hard, strong
a escri(p}tura-
the bookkeep- .
alimentar
alimentary
gdo (mercantile
) ing
a natureza
Nature, quality
em (or por) par-
by single and
0 requerente
the solicitor
tidos simples
double entry
[rraka 'rentd]
e dobrados
0 caixa
the cashier
(em) caso (que)
in case.
48. Leitura.
Alimentagd.
0 homem precisa alimentar-se para viver: se nao se alimen-
tasse, morria. Os homens alimentam-se de carnes, e tambem se
alimentam de vegetaes. As carnes e os vegetaes, chamados
alimentos solidos, ou comidas, matam-nos a fome. Ha alimentos
que nos engordam; e outros que nao nos engordam, mas pelos
quaes 6 conservado ao corpo o seu calor natural. Os animaes
e OS vegetaes fornecem-ncs os alimentos solidos; mas alem
d'estes, precisaraos tambem de bebidas. As bebidas matam-
nos a s6de. 0 nosso corpo ^ formado de muitas substancias.
Entre as substancias que formam o nosso corpo figura a agua.
Quando p nosso corpo se resente da falta d'agua, somos avisados
pela s6de de que precisa d'ella. Quando suainos perdemos
agua, pois esta sae-nos do corpo em bagas de suor. Eis ahi
porque suando sente-se (or a gente sente or porque quando sua-
mos sentimos) sfide. 0 estCmago produz um succo, cbamado succo
gastrico, muito preciso para digerir a comida. Os condimentos,
que nos fazem salivar, fazem com que se produza esse succo
em maior abundancia. 0 corpo humano carece de substancias
varias para bem se nutrir. Essas substancias encontram-se
nos varies alimentos; e d'estes, uns possuem grande niimero
de taes substancias, e outros so possuem algumas. 0 pao, a
came, os legumes verdes e seccos, as batatas, os ovos, e tambem
a agua e o leite pertencem ao niimero dos primeiros.
Trindade Coelho: 0 Primeiro Livro de Leitura (adapted).
49. Thema.
Solicitagdo d'um emprego.
Lisboa, 8 de Abril de 1908.
Ulmo e Ex"ioi Senhor:
Tenho a honra de apresentar-me come requerente do
emprego de caixeiro (guarda-livros, caixa, ou seja o que for)
' See § 18. ~
136 Lesson 20.
na estimada casa de V^- Ex^- , annunciado no «Diario de No-
ticias» d'hoje.
Frequentei durante seis annos a Escolade..., e estive dois
annos em casa do sr. A. B. a quern tenho licenQa de me
referir. Tive nma solida instruc9ao na arithmetica emquanto
a exactidao e promptidao; e esta carta informara a Va- Ex«-
a respeito da minha letra. Tambem estou bem versado na
escriptura9ao mercantil em partidos simples e dobrados.
Gaso (que) V*^- Ex*- deseje v6r-me antes de se decidir,
digne-se de m'o fazer saber, para que eu me apresente a
V*- Ex''^- a qualquer hora que marcar.
Sou com toda a considera^ao e respeito
De Va- Ex*- criado att^ e obrg^^o
Joao da Silva Nogueira.
50. Exercise.
A. The Foot and the Hand.
The foot and the hand are both members of the human
body. They are composed of bones, flesh, and skin, and are
more long than large. On their extremities they have five
prominent parts provided with nails. These prominent parts
are called fingers. Of the two, the foot is the more solid and
big and the one which has the hardest bones. With the feet
people can stand, walk, and tread. With the hands we can
execute numerous works. Of the two members, the hand is
the one in which the sense of touch is the more refined. What
particularly characterises the hand is the thumb being (infini-
tive) separated from the other four fingers and opposite to
each of them, whilst the big toe is joined to the other toes.
B. The Egg and the Nut.
The egg and the nut resemble one another by their
exterior form. Both are oval. The interior of both is en-
cased by a shell. The interior is not only eatable, but also
nourishing and savoury. The egg is a production of the
animal kingdom, and the nut is a production of the vegetable
kingdom. The shell of the egg is more or less white and
thin, and may easily be broken between the fingers. The
shell of the nut is brownish, thick and hard, and can only
with difficulty be opened by the hand. The nourishing sub-
stance in the egg is liquid, but when it is boiled, it becomes
firm. It is composed of the yolk and the white. The yolk
is yellow, and the white is colourless when raw, but white
' See § 18.
Paradigm of the Regular Conjugations. 137
after being boiled. The nourishing substance of the nut,
called the kernel, is of a firm quality.
Conyersa^ao.
A. (bate na porta.) B. Pode entrar! {or Entre quern 6!).
Abre-se a porta., dando ingresso a um homem que se approxima,
inclinando-se:
A. Va- Ex^- da- me licen^a?
B. Dou (see § 184 and p. 29, note). Chegue-se para
ea. Que e que deseja?
A. Falaram-me n^im emprego de caixeiro que se pre-
tend e preencher.
B. E verdade. E V^- encontra-se nas condi9oes . . ?
A. Atr6vo-me de solid tal-o. Chamo-me . . .
B. Sente-se! Pdde dar-me informa96es sobre alguma
collocaQao anterior?
A. Pode V*- Ex^- tomal-as com a casa dos senhores . . .,
donde me retirei ha um mfis.
B. Porque se retirou? Descuidou-se das suas obriga96es?
Nao se empenhou bastante em satisfazer os patroes?
A. Nao foi isso. Fiquei doente e tive de me ir embora
para me restabelecer. Levantei-me da cama ha dias
apenas.
B. Bem, hei-de informar-me, antes de me decidir. Mas
V^- lembre-se que tern de se contentar com pouco or-
denado e que espero dos mens empregados que nunca
se escapem a trabalho algum, nem se esque9am dos
seus deveres,
A. V*- Ex*- nao tera de queixar-se.
B. Muito bem. Caso (que) se dedique seriamente ao seu
emprego, nao terei eu de me irritar, nem V^- de
arrepender-se. Entao retire-se por emquanto (for
the present) e nao (se) desanime at^ receber a
minha decisao! Va-se (see § 217) com Deus!
A. Deus guarde a Va- Ex»!
Twenty-first Lesson. Li§ao vigesima
primeira.
Paradigm of the Regular Conjugations.
Paradigma das conjugagoes regulares.
Having in the three last lessons dealt with the
formations of the tenses and moods of a regular
188
Lesson 21.
verb and given all the fonns (including the passive and
the reflective) of a verb of the first conjugation, we
now present a paradigm of all three, thus repeating
the first, in order to facilitate a summary view, yet
omitting the EngHsh translation, easily supplied, however,
after the 18*^ lesson,
§ 133. The Portuguese calls Yerbo adjectito a verb
that unites in one word the verb ser or cstar and an
attribute, thus expressing an action, a state, or a quality
of the subject — e.g.: saltar, comer, partir; salto, I jump,
equivalent to estou saUando, I am jumping; come, he
eats, equivalent to estd comendo, he is eating, etc.
§ 134. The verbo adjedivo may be transitive
or intransitive, according to its expressing an action,
or a state; respectively a quality of the subject. Being
transitive, it has an active and passive voice (vo^ activa
or passiva). In the compound t-enses of the former, it
is conjugated with ter, in all tenses of the latter with
ser.
§ 135. Conjuga^oes regulares do verbo adjectivo.
Voz activa [voza.'\
1'*. conjugagao. 2^. conjuga^do.
Infinit(iv)os e Partii
Presente impessoal.
3". c(nijugaQdo.
icipios.
Louv-ar, to praise
Louv-ai'
louv-ares
louv-ar
louv-artnos
louv-ar des
louo-aretn.
Ter louvado.
Ter j louvado,
teres ) devido,
ter } applaudido
Dev-er, to owe,
to be obliged,
must, ought
Presente pessoal.
Dev-er
dev-eres
dev-er
dev-ermos
dev-er des
dev-er em,
Preterito impessoal.
Ter devido.
Applaud-ir, to ap-
plaud.
Applaud-ir
applaud-ires
applaud-ir
applaud-irrnos
applaud-irdes
applaud-irem.
Ter applaudido.
Preterito pessoal.
termos I louvado,
terdes 1 devido,
terem I applaudido.
Paradigm of the Regular Conjugations.
189
Harder or
Ter or haver \
teres „ haveres \
ter y, hav^r )
Louv-ando,
Louv-ado.
Tendo louvado.
Louv-o
louv-as
louv-a
louv-dmos
louv-aes
louvam.
Louv-ava
louv-avas
louv-ava
louv-dvatnos
louv-dveis
louv-avam.
Louv-ei
louv-aste
louv-ou
louv-dmos
louv-a^tes
louv-aram.
Futuro impessoal.
ter de louvar, de dever, de applaudir.
Futuro pessoal.
de louvar, ter mos or havermos\de louvar.
de dever terdes „ haver des \de dever y
de, applaudir terem „ haverem I de applaudir.
Participio imperfeito.
Bev-endo, Applaud-indo,
Participio perfeito.
Bev-ido. Applaud-ido.
Participio perfeito composto.
Tendo applaudido.
Tendo devido.
Indicative.
Presente.
Dev-o
dev-es
dev-e
dev-emos
dev-eis
dev-em.
Preterito imperfeito.
Dev-ia
dev-ias
dev-ia
dev-iamos
dev-ieis
dev-iam*
Preterito perfeito.
Bev-i^
dev-e8te
dev-eu
dev-emos
dev-estes
dev-eram.
Applaud-o
applaud-es
applaud-e
applaud-imos
applaud-is
applaud- em,.
Applaud-ia
applaud-ias
applaud-ia
app laud-iainos
applaud-ieis
applaud-iam.
Applaud-i
applaud-iste
applaud-iu
applatid-lm^os
applaud-istes
applaud-iram.
Preterito perfeito composto.
Tenho louvado, devido, applaudido, •
^ In the meaning of must or ought this tense is not used,
but is replaced bj^ the Imperfect.
140
Lesson 21.
Preterito mais-que-perfeUo.^
Loiivd-ra Devc-ra Applauctf-ra
louvdras devc-ras applaiLcl^ras
louvd-ra deve-ra applaudhra
loiwd-ramos deve-ramos applaudi-ratnos
louvd-reis deve-reis applaudi-rels
louvd-ram. deve-rani, etpplaud^ratn,
Preterito mais-que-perfeito composto.
Tinha louvado, devido, applaudido.
Louv-arei
louv-ards
louv-ard
louv-aremos
louv-areis
louv-ardo.
Fuiuro imperfeito.^
Dev-erei
dev-erds
dev-erd,
dev-ere^nos
dev-ereis
div-erdo.
Applaud-irei
applaud-irds
applaud-ird
applaud-irern os
applaud-ireis
applaud-irdo.
Louv-aria
louv-arias
louv-aria
louv-arianios
louv-arieis
louv-ariam.
Futuro imperfeito composto.
J lei or tenJio de louvar, de dever, de applaudir.
Futuro preterito composto.
Terei louvado, devido, applaudido.
Condicional.
Presente (imperfeito).
Bev-erifi
dev-erias
dev-eria
dev-eriamos
dev-erieis
dev-eriani.
Applaud-iria
applaud-ii'ias
applaud-iria
applaud-iriamos
applaud-irieis
applaud-iriani.
Louvd-ra
louvd-ras
louvd-ra, etc.
(cf. Mais-que-perfeito).
Beve-ra
Deve-ras
deve-ra etc.
Applaud-ira
applaud-iras
applaud-ira etc.
Perfeito.
Teria louvado, devido, applaudido
ou
Tivera louvado, devido, applaudido.
* For the formation of this tense cf. § 114, c.
^ For the formation of this tense cf. § 44, 1.
Paradigm of the Regular Conjugations.
141
Louv-a (til}
louv-ae (vos).
Imperativo.
I)ev-e(tu)(ot^.B.)
dev-ei (vos)
Applmid-e (hi)
applaud-i (vos).
N.B. — The verb dever in its meaning "must" has
no Imperative. In its meaning "to owe"' this form is
given periphrastically: fica deven<lo, ndo fiques devendn.
The above imperative forms of dever, one of the few
quite regular verbs in -er, is meant only for a gram-
matical model.
Gonjunctivo.
Presente.
Louve "
Dev-a
Applaud- a
louv-es
dev-as
applaud-as
louv-e
dev-a
applaud-a
louv-enios
dev-dmos
applaud-d7nos
louv-eis
dev-aes
applaud- a €s
lour -em.
dev-am.
Preterite imperfeito.
applaud-ani.
Loum-sse
Beve-8se
Applaudi-sse
louvd-sses
deve-sses
applaudi-sses
louvd-sse
deve-8se
applaudi-sse
louvd-ssemos
deve-ssemos
applaudi-ssenios
louvd-sseis
deve-sseis
appluudi-sseis
louvd-ssem.
deve-ssem.
applaudi-ssenu
Preterite perfeito cemposto.
Tenha louvado, devido, applaudido.
Preterito mais-qtie-perfeito composto.
Tivesse louvado^ devido^ applaudido.
Louva-r
louva-res
louva-r
louva-innos
louva-rdes
louva-rem.
Future imperfeito. *
Deve-r
deve-res
deve-r
deve-rmos
deve-rdes
deve-rem.
Applaudi-r
applaudi-res
applaudi-r
applaudi-mios
applaudi-rdes
applaudi-rem.
Future imperfeito composto.
Houver de louvar, de dever, de applaudir.
Cf. § 113, C.
142
Lesson 21.
§ 136. ISummary Table
of the Endings of Regular Verbs in their Simple Tenses.
First Primitive Tense, Infinitivo and Deriyed.
1. COHJ
i. 2. conj.
3. conj.
1. conj.
2. conj. 3. co>}j.
Infinite
>.
Pret. perf.
Fres. impessodl.
ei
i i
ar
er
ir
aste
ou
este iste
eu iu
Pres. pessoal.
dmos
emos imos
ar
er
ir
astes
estes istes
ares
eres
ires
dram.
eram. iram.
ar
er
ir ,
Futuro imperfeito.
armos
ermos
irmos
ardes
erdes
irdes
arei
erei irei
arem.
erem.
irem.
ards
ard
eras irds
erd • ird
Indicativ
0.
aremos
eremos iremos
Presente.
areis
aruo.
ereis ireis
erao. irao.
0
0
0
as
es
es
Condicionai.
a
e
e
aria
eria iria
dmos
emos
vmos
arias
erias irias
aes
eis
is
aria
eria iria
am.
em.
em.
ariamos
eriamos iriamos
Pret. imperf.
arieis
erieis irieis
ariam.
eriam. iriam.
ava
la
ia
avas
ias
ias
Participio imperf.
ava
ia
ia
ando.
endo. indo.
dvamos
iamos
iamos
dveis
ieis
ieis
Participio perfeito.
dvam.
iam.
iam.
ado.
ido. ido.
Second Priniitiye Tense^ IndicaUvo presente (see above)
and Derived.
1. conj.
2. conj.
3. conj.
1.
conj.
2. conj.
3. c&
Conjuncti
VO.
I
mperativo.
Presente.
e
a
a
a
e
e
es
as
as
e
a
a
e
a
a
emos
dmos
dmos
emos
dmos
dmos
ai
ei
i
eis
aes
aes
em.
am.
am.
em.
am.
am.
Paradigm of the Regular Conjugations.
14S
Third Primitiye Tense, 2°^ Pers. Sing, of the PreU perf.
(see above) and Deriyed.
Same endings in all 3 conjugations, whether regular or irregular.
Indicativo. Conjunctivo.
Mais-que-perf.
ra
ras
ra
ramos
reis
ram.
Pret. imp.
sse
sses
sse
ssemos
sseis
ssem.
Futuro imperf.
r
res
r
rnios
rdes
rem.
§ 137. Terbs of the 2°^ and 3"^ conjugations.
N.B.— Those verbs marked by * are irregular. Of
the regular ones, those ending in -cer, -ger, -guer, -guir
are subject to the well-known rules of the phonetic
law concerning c and g. Others submit to the phone-
tics mentioned in the following lesson (22).
Adoecer to fall ill
agradecer to thank (for)
amanhecer to dawn
apodrecer to make or grow
rotten
apparecer to appear
bater to beat
collier to pick, to gather
commover to move
conter to contain
converter to convert
coser to sow
coger to cook
defender to defend
desapparecer to disappear
esquecer(-se) to forget, to be
forgotten
*faser to do, make
fornecer furnish
merecer to merit
nascer to be born; to spring,
parecer to seem [rise, grow
percorrer to run through
*poder can^ to be able
proteger to protect
*saber to know
abrir to open
affligir to afflict
aggredir to attack, assault
condusir to lead ; -se to behave
consistir (de) to consist (of)
franzir to gather into plaits ;
— «s sdbrancelhas to frown
fugir to flee, to fly
Hmpedir to hinder, prevent
insistir (em) to insist (upon)
*ir ter com. to call upon, to
go to
lu0ir to light, to shine
mentir to lie
*ouvir to hear
partir to part, to divide; to
depart
*pedir to ask, beg
perseguir to persecute
possuir to possess
produzir to produce
prohibir to forbid, prohibit
proseguir to prosecute
*provir to come from
reduzir to reduce
sentir to feel, smell
144
Lesson 21,
tecer to Aveave
varrcr to sweep
*ver to see.
servir to serve, to be of nse;
— se de to make use of
sorrir to smile
4
Palavras.
0 2)oente
[pu 'ent?]
0 chao [f^u]
oc-
the west
cident
the floor,
ground
the direction
a direcgao
[dire'svu]
0 alimento the nourish-
[vU 'mentuj ment
0 legume the vegetables
[h'gumd]
a ponta [pontTs] the horn
o gado vaccum the cattle
['ga&u'vakum]
0 cervo f'servuj the stag
a armagdo the horns
[vrmv 'svu]
descangado quiet
[difkvn 'sad^u]
opapel [pv'peij the part
fazer o papel to play the part
de
as palmas
I'paimefJ
a gallinha
[gis'liyv]
a ave favdj
of
the applause
the hen
the bird
a ave de rapina the bird of prey
estudioso studious, dili-
[iftu&i' Qzu]
preguiQoso
[prdgi'sozu]
0 pato ['patuj
gent
the duck
0 obscquio
[ott'zekin]
0 trabalho de
ferias
Duarte
[du'art9],
Eduardo
precisar
[prdsi'zar]
0 castigo
[kvf'tigu]
a pregui^a
[pr9 'gisv]
a lebre ['U'brd]
a raposa
frra 'pozv]
pardo I'parduJ
rachado
[rrv 'fa&uj
0 focinlio
[fu'siyu]
as barbas
f'barbvfj
timido ['timt&u]
a casca ['kajkv]
cagar [ke'sar]
saboroso
[svbu'rozu]
0 pilo f'j^eluj
0 chapelleiro
[fvpo 'hp'uj
the favour
the holiday
work
Edward
to need
the punishment
the laziness
the hare
the fox
grey
cleft
snout, mouth
the whiskers,
the beard
timid
the bark
to hunt; catch
savoury
the hair
the hatter.
51. Leitnra.
0 sol nasce no oriente e desapparece no poente. A herva
cresce no prado, enverdecendo o chao. 0 Tejo, depois de
nascido na Hespanha, percorre este pais em direccao occidental
6, atravessado tambem Portugal, vae lan^ar-se no Atlantic©
ao p6 de Lisboa. 0 alimento ordinario do homem consiste de
pao, carne, leite, ovos e legumes. Os animaes de pontas, taes
como o gado vaccum, os cervos e outros mais, receberam a
sua arma^ao para se defender(em), ao serem aggredidos.
Guilherme devia ser mais modesto ; assim mereceria a estima de
toda a gente. 0 senhor apparega em minha casa na tarde de
amanba! Nao se esqueQal Nao me hei de esquecer, lique
Paradigm of the Regular Conjugation. 145
\&. Exa. descan9ado! A nossa melhor actriz adoeceu infeliz-
mente; se nao tivesse adoecido {or: se nao adoecesse), teria
sido muito applaudida. Ainda ante-hontem, fazendo o papel
da" Ophelia, recebeu muitas palmas, que agradecia, sorrindo
commovida. 0 alumno ja lia, escrevia e fazia contas, mas
ainda nao sabia desenhar. Nao sabias que a raposa persegue
as lebres ? Eu nao tenho duvida que ella persiga (§ 224) as
lebres, mas queria que nao perseguisse as gallinhas e os
patos. Se conhecesse um meio que o impedisse e que prote-
ge3Se essas aves, havia*de empregal-o (or: erapregal-o-ia).
62. Thema.
The Studious Pupil and the Lazy.
On the last day of the holidays Edward went to his
schoolfellow Joseph and asked him (Ihe) the favour that he
[might] let him copy his two holiday-tasks which (os quaes)
should be presented at school the following day. Joseph
asked, astonished, whether he had not yet begun them.^
Edward answered that he had had no time for it, that he
had played a great deal with his brothers and sisters, that he
had walked in the fields and woods, and that he had caught
butterflies. Then Joseph answered that Edward, having
walked so much, must be very tired and needed to rest; but
that the following day he would receive the just punishment
for his laziness.
53. Exercise, t
Change the indirect language of the above into the
direct.
Comersacao.
A Lebre.
(By aid of the words in parenthesis a whole sentence
is to be formed).
Que 6 uma lebre ? (animal quadrupede)
Que cor tern? (parda)
Como e a cabe9a? (arredondada)
Como sao as orelhas? (compridas e movediyas)
Como 6 0 beiyo superior? (rachado)
Que tern no focinho? (barbas)
Como sao os p6s anteriores? (curtos)
Como sao os p^s posteriores? (compridos)
Como e a cauda? (muito curta)
Como e a lebre? (timida)
Que come ella? (sementes, couves e cascas)
^ In indirect discourse the Indicative is to be employed.
Portuguese CIonversallon-Grftinmar. 10
146 Lesson 22.
Quaes sao 09 aniraaes que a perseguem? (raposas, gatos
bravos, aves de rapina)
Quern a ca^a? (0 homem)
Como e a carne? (aaborosa)
Quern utilisa os p6los? (chapel leiros).
Twenty-second Lesson. Li^o vigesima
"^^ segunda.
Phonetical and Orthographical Peculiarities
of otherwise Regular Verbs.
A. In the First Conjugation.
§ 137a. (a) Those verbs of the 1*^^ conj. which in
their radical syllable have a close a fvj, not followed
by m, n or nJi, change this v into open a wherever
it has the tonical accent (cf. § 5). Ex. : lavar [Iv 'var] :
lavo ['lavu]. 0 comboio para ['parvj.
(b) If, however, the v is followed by m, n or nh,
it remains close : chamar [fe 'mvr] : charm [^famu] ; sa-
nar : sano f'svnuj, apanhar : apanho fv 'pvjm].
^ACupL. ytmhar [gerjtar] : gmtlio [gajiu] L-gakf.
§ 138. (a) Those verbs of the 1^* conj. which in
their radical syllable have an atonic e [d], not fol-
lowed by m, w, nh or by one of the palatals j, eh, Ih
modify it, when tonical, into open e [e]. Ex.: con-
certar [hdsdr'tar] to m^ndi : concerto [hosertu]; confes-
sar:confesso fko'fesuj; levar; medrar; seccar; segar.
(b) If, however, one of those consonants follows,
as well as in the verb chegar, the atonic e [o or i]
becom-es close e [e] or [v] (see § 5 A, Remark): remar :
remo ['rremuj; acenar : acena [v'senv]; chegar : chego
f'f'BgiiJ, chega f 'fegvj ; desejar [ddzi' gar] : desejo [dd' s^gu] ;
fechtr [fj'farj : fecho ffi^fuj; ajoelhar [vgivi'fiar] : ajodho
[vgtvwf^u]. Except.: invejar to envy : invejo [I'vEgu]
with open e [e].
(c) On the other hand another verb belongs to this
group (b): pesar in its meaning to be sorry: pesa-me
['pezvmd] I am sorry, I worry, with close e, while the
same verb in its meaning to weight has open e [e] in
the tonical syllables: peso [pezu].
t
Phon. and Orth. Peculiarities of otherwise Regular Verbs. 147
§ 139. Verbs ending in -ear change e into ei fvtj^
whenever the e would have the tonical accent: nomear
fnmm 'arj to name : nomeio fnu 'mvtuj. Except. : the verb
rwiiiflu (or better criar) to create, breed, bring up; which
conjugates: mo, crias, cria, criam, etc., while its com-
posites follow the general rule : procrear to procreate :
procreio (but also procrio) ; recrear to delight, to recover :
recreia.
N.B. — Becriar, to recreate, conjugates like criar.
§ 140. Verbs ending in -io/r conserve the i
even when tonical: copiar : copio [Jcu'piuJ.
Yet there is a small group of verbs which follow
the rule of those in -ear: negociar to negotiate : nego-
ceio; diligenciar to endeavour, to effect, bring about:
diligenceio ; odiar to hate : odeio ; premiar to distinguish, ^ ^^
to reward ipremeio; remediar to remedy, repair : remedeia. ^^
§ 141. An atonic o fuj, not followed hy m, n ^
or nh, changes in accented syllables into open o [o]:
tocar to touch, to play (an mQiiMmeni) \ ' tocO [toku];
cortar to cut : corto f'kortuj.
If, however, followed by m, «, nh or a vowel (verbs
in -oar), the atonic o changes into close o foj: assomar
fvsu'marj to climb up, to peep out, to appear : owsdmo
fv'somuj; abonar to bail : abono [v'bonuj; sonhar to
dream : sonJio f'sojiuj iperdoar to pardon \perd6o [pdr'-
douj.
Exceptions to this rule are the verbs tomar to
take and domar to tame, which change close o into
open 0 foJ: tdmo ['tomuj, domo ['tomuj. (N.B. — Tomo
is volume; domo dome).
§ 142. The unaccented close o, which is found
before f, is modified into open o [o] : soltar [sol' tar] to
release, loosen, free : solto ['soUii].
N.B. — The nasal o [d] is and remains always
close: contar [hon'tar] to count : cow^o f'JcdnttiJ.
§ 143. The verbs in -gar intercalate u between
g and a following e: pagar to pay : pagues, pague, pa-
guemos, pagneis, paguem; pagiiei.
The verbs in -car change before e the c into gw:
tocar : toques, toque, etc.
^ ^ . A ^yo ^. . O^ m ^.
3 Ujruy^ ^^y-zl^l^
Q 0 -^^^ .
148 Lesson 22.
The verbs in -gar lose the cedilla before e: cmne-
gar : comeces, etc.
Those in -jar may change the j into g before an
e or conserve it: viagei or ^aagt^ viagemos or viimmi^.
B. In the Second Conjugation.
§ 144. Unaccented close a fvj of the radical
syllable changes, when accented, into open a {vj:
abater fvtv'terj to ahsiie : abato [v'batuj.
§ 145. Atonic e [o] of the radical changes:
1. Into accented close e [e] in the first person
sing. pres. ind. and the accented forms derived from
it (i.e.: the singular and the S*"^ pers. plur. of the sub-
junctive): gemer to groan : gemo ['s^mu], gema, gemas
['semy(f)], gemam (N.B. — a or o in the ending!);
2. Into open e [e] in the 2^^ and 3^^ pers. sing,
and in the S''^ pers. plur. pres. ind. and the derived forms
(2°*^ pers. imperative): germs ['s^m}/], geme /"'jfws/t
gemem ['jtmmj (N.B. — e in the ending 1).
§ 146. Atonic o [u] becomes in the same cases:
1. close 0 [o]: comer to eat: como f'JcomuJ, coma(s)
f'komv(f)J,
2. open 0 foj: comes ["komif], come ['homd]^ etc.
§ 147. Unaccented close- o [o] becomes open o
[o] in all those forms where 9 becomes e (cf § 145,2):
volver to turn : volvcs^ volve, volvem.
§ 148. Verbs ending in -cer take a cedilla before
a and o: conhecer to know : conJiego, conhega, etc.
§ 149. Verbs ending in -ger change g into j be-
fore a and o: proteger to protect : ^o^e;o, proteja.
§ 150. Verbs ending in -guer drop the w before
a and o : erguer to raise : ergo, erga, ergas, etc.
C. In the Third Conjugation.
§ 151. Unaccented close a fvj of the radical syl-
lable changes, if not followed by m, n or 7ih, into open
a [a] when accented: ahrir [v'hrir] to open : ahro
[' ahru].
Fhon. and Orth. Peculiarities of otherwise Regular Verbs. 149
If, however, it is followed by m, n or 7i7i, it remains
close: ganir to howl, yelp : gane f'g^njj; bramir to roar:
bramo ['br^mu].
§ 152. The atonic e [d] of the radical syllable
changes :
1. Into i in the first person sing. pres. ind. and
the derived forms (pres. subj.— N.B. — before a and o):
despir to undress : dispo, dispa, etc. (cf. § 156).
2. Into open e [e] in the 2'^*^ and 'd^^ pers. sing, and
3^*^ pers. plur. pres. ind. and sing, of the imperative
(N.B.— before e): despes^ despe, despem.
Memark. — The verbs aggredir to assault, denegrir to
blacken, to slander, prevenir to anticipate, to prevent, pro-
gredir to proceed, to thrive, remir to redeem,' transgredir to
transgress, change the e of the penultimate into i when ac-
cented: aggrido, aggrides, aggride, aggridem, aggrida(s), etc.
§ 153. Close e fej, whether oral or nasal, be-
comes i in the same forms where 9 becomes i (s. § 152,1),
remaining e feJ in all others: sentir to feel, smell : sinto,
sinta(s), sintam (s. § 156); sente(s), etc.
§ 154. Atonic o [u] becomes :
1. C7 in the same forms where atonic e [d] be-
comes i (s. § 152,1): dprmir to sleep : cZ;(r;«o, durma,
durmas^ durmam (s. § 156).
2. Open 0 [o] in those persons where atonic e be-
comes [e] (s. § 152,2): dormes, dorme, dormem.
Remark.— In the Verbs sortir to supply, cortir to tan,
ordir to warp, to plot, o changes into u wherever accented:
curto, curteSf curte, curtem, curia(s), curiam, surte, urdo, etc.
The same change occurs in cortir even in unaccented forms,
which might be confounded with those of cortar: curtdmos,
curtaes, etc. N.B. — Instead of ordir you may write urdir,
which is more modern.
- § 155. Atonic it (and 6) of the infinitive becomes
open 0 [o] in the 2°^ and 3^^ pers. sing, and the Z^^ pers.
plur. pres. ind. and in the following verbs:
Acudir to succour descobrir to discover
btdir to stu* cuspir to spit
consumir to consume desfruir to destroy
ctibrir (better: cohrir) to cover engulir to swallow
150 Lesson 22.
ftigir to flee, fly, escape svhir to mount, ascend
refugir to retrocede sumir to sink; — se to vanish
sacudir to shake (off), to toss tussir (or tossir) to cough.
Thus: acodes, acode, acodem.
Pres. ind. of consumir: consiimo, consomes, consome, consumi-
mos, consumis, consomem.
•» ■» 7> destruir: destruo, destroes, destroe, destruimos,
destruiSf destroem.
Remark.— In construir and reconstruir the ii is generally
conserved: construo, construes (or constroes), construe (or con-
stroe), construimos, construis, construem (constroem).
§ 156. The vowel of the radical syllable beiDg
close e [e] or atonic e [d] or o [u] (see §§ 152 — 154),
it undergoes the same modification in the 1'^'^ and 2"^
pers. plur. pres. subj. as in the sing, and in the 3"^*^ pers.
plur. of this form: ferir to wound : /?ramo5, firaes.
Pres. conj. of vestir to dress: vista(s), vistdmos, vistacs, vistam.
» » ■> mentir to lie: minta(s), mintdmoSj ynintaes,
mintam.
» » » donnir to sleep: durma(s), durmdmos, durmaes,
durmam.
§ 157. Those verbs, where the infinitive-ending
'ir is preceded by g, gu (or qu), are subject to the
rules of §§ 149 and 150. Ex.: corrigir : corrijo, corrija;
seguir to follow : sigo, siga, frcmquir (antiquated) to
cultivate : franco, franca.
BemarJc.—ln argu'ir, to ai^gue, the u is audible:
arguo, argues, argt'te, arguimos, arguis, arguem.
The same in delinqu'ir, to offend against a law:
delinquo, delinqiles, delinque, delinquimos, etc.
§ 158. In the verbs ending in -ahir, the h is not
a part of the radical, but serves merely to separate a
and i. So as not to leave any doubt, for instance, in the
1^* and 2°*^ pers. plur. pres. ind. the i has the tonical accent,
and not the a: sahimos, sahis. Modern orthography
drops the h, putting an accent instead, thus: sdio, saes,
saCj saimoSf sais, sdem; saia(s), satamos^ etc.; sdia(s),
saidmos, etc.
§ 159. Verbs in -uzir drop the c of tlie 3^'^ pers.
sing, pres, ind., thus condtiz instead of conduze. (N.B.
— The imperative is: conduze.)
Phon. and Orth. Peculiarities of otherwise Regular Verbs. 151
PalaTras.
0 algodao
[aigu'&vu]
,0 algodoeiro
[algu&u 'viruj
0 ourigo
[o 'risuj
the cotton
the cotton-tree
the prickly-
shell, hedge-
hog
a felpa
['fdpvj
a pennugem
[p9 'nu^v}]
0 cotdo
[ku'tvuj
macio [mv 'siu]
drodafrrod^sjde round
0 casulo
[Jcs'zuluJ
cardar
fkvr'&arj
apropriar
[vprupri 'ar]
0 tecido
[t9 'si&uj
a xyelle [peh]
0 calgado
[Teal 'sa&uj
raspar
[rrvfpar]
o tanque [tvkd]
a cantada
[hv 'ma&ej
0 ianino
[tis 'ninu]
repassar \
[rrdpu 'sarj \
amollecer
[nmtdd'serj j
a cosiureira
fkuftu rvir^]
0 vestido
[vif'ti&uj
a ronpa hranca the linen
['rropv'brvkej
6 fato ['fatuj the clothes
cortar [kur 'tar] to cut
a tesoiira the scissors
ftd 'zoruj
a fit a metrica the metric
['fitv'metrikv] measure
0 molde the pattern
f'mDl&d]
the down
smooth
round
the capsule
to card
to appropriate;
make fit to
the tissue
the skin
shoes and boots
to scrape
the tank
the layer
the tan
to soak
the seamstress
the dress, cloth
alinhavar
[vHye 'varj
a costura
[kuf'turv]
0 alfaiate
[aifvi 'aid]
0 vestudrio
[vyftu anu]
0 fio, 0 linho
a agtdha
/» 'gufia]
0 traje ['tra^}J
curioso
[kurf'ozu]
padecer |
fpv&9 's9r] I
soffrer (
[su'frerj J
exercer
[izdr'ser]
a raiz [rrv'if]
abranger
[vbrv'^er]
infelizmente
[tfdlis' mentd]
0 minhoto
[mi 'yotu]
0 ribatejdno
[rribeti' ^vnu]
0 alemtejdno
[vlvili '^Tsnu]
0 mirandes
[mirvn def]
passar para
abster [ubf'terj
aftexao
[flek'siuj
acertar[vs9rtar]
oral [o'rai]
dtono [' atunu] \
surdo f'sur&uj j
a transforma-
cdo [trvf-
furma'svuj
a modifi,cagao
[mo&dfica-
'svii]
no entanto
[num'tvntu]
to baste^ to
stitch
the sewing
the tailor
the clothiug
the thread
the needle
the costume
curious
to suffer
to practise
the radical
to embrace
unhappily
the inhabitant
of the Minho
the inhabitant
of the Elba-
tejo
the inhabitant
of the Alem-
tejo
the inhabitant
of Miranda
to pass to
to abstain
the inflexion
to hit
oral
atonic
the transforma-
tion
the modifica-
tion
the change
meanwhile, vet
152 Lesson 22.
phonkico phonetical
[fti'nstiku]
pcUenfear manifest
fputint} 'arj
hasear fbvzi'arj to rest upon
a pronuncia the pronuncia-
fpru'nuii}yj tion.
»4. Leitnra.
(a) 0 algoddo.
0 algodao e produzido per uma arvore cbamada algodoeiro.
0 algodoeiro produz uma especie de ouri9os. Estes ouri^os
abrem quando estao maduros e mostram no meio nmas se-
mentes escuras. A roda d'essas semen tes escuras ve-se uma
felpe ou pennugem macia, como cotao. Essa felpa e o algodao.
Depois de tirada do ouri9o ou casulo, a felpa e cardada e em
seguida reduzida a fio em machinas apropriadas; e com esse
fio fazem-se os tecidos ou pannos de algodao.
(b) As pelles.
As pelles servem principalmente para fazer cal9ado. Os
bois, as vaccas e as vitellas sao os'animaes que nos fornecem
mais pelles para cal^ado. A pelle depois de tirada do animal
e mettida em agua para que amollecja e em seguida e raspada
para que Ihe saia todo o pello e restos de came. Depois de
bem raspadas, as pelles se curtem, sendo mergulhadas em tan-
ques e separadas umas das outras por camadas de casca de
carvalho pulverisada. A casca de carvalho cont^m muito tanino,
e este repassa as pelles e faz com que nao apodre^am. 0 azedo
ou acre da casca de carvalho provem do tanino.
(Trindade Coelho: 0 primeiro Livro de Leitura.)
55. Exercise.
Transpose No. 52 into the corresponding forms of in-
direct language, wherein it must be remembered to employ the
indicative.
Ex.: Affirmaram-me que o algodao ira produzido . . .,
que 0 algodoeiro produzia ...
5(>. Thema.
(a) The Seamstress,
The seamstress makes clothes and linen for women. She
makes also children's clothes and men's linen. The seamstress
first cuts what she intends to sew, making use of the chalk,
the scissors, the metric measure, and the ruler, and she might,
if she wanted to, employ also patterns. Thereupon she bastes
and then she sews, making use of a needle and thread. With
a hot iron she opens and irons (tr. : correr) the seams.
Phon, and Ortli. Peculiarities of otherwise Regular Verbs. 153
(b) The Tailor.
The tailor occupies himself in making clothing for men.
The costumes of the Portuguese people are very carious
and in various regions of Portugal even very fine (sup. abs.j.
People should always wear these clothes, which do not resemble
those of other nations. Unhappily, fashion allows (fas) national
clothing to fall into oblivion (cair em esquecimento). But
the inhabitants of the Minho, the Ribatejo, the Alemtejo and
of Miranda still dress after (d) their own fashion.
Conversa^ao.
Previno os senhores que ainda
devemos exercitar os verbos
que apprenderam na ultima
li9ao. Qual a mudan9a que
soffrem os verbos da terceira
conjugaQao, cuja raiz temum
e surdo?
Dizendo a llexao do presente,
abrangeu outra mudanpa dos
mesmos verbos. Qual e?
0 senhor nao conhece verbos
da mesma categoria que nao
transformem o e surdo em
e aberto?
Como 6 que se distinguem dos
outros verbos?
Ja nao duvido que o,s senhores
conhe^am tambem os verbos
que, parecendo-se com os ja
tratados, teem no entanto um
e fechado na penultima syl-
laba do infinito.
Bem, jabasta! Naomintamais!
Exige a justi^a que, pedindo
desculpa, se rectifique o que
eu dizia: nao mentiu, dizendo
0 e surdo passa para i na pri-
meira pessoa do singular do
presente indicativo e nas tres
do singular e terceira do plu-
ral do presente conjunctivo;
por exeraplo: visto, vestes,
veste, vesttmos, vestis,vcstem.
0 e surdo passa para e aberto
n a segunda pessoa do singular
e nas terceiras pessoas do
singular e plural do presente
indicative, assim como no
singular do imperativo.
Conhe^o, sim, senhor. Sao entre
outros OS verbos aggredir,
denegrir, prevenir, progredir,
remir, transgredir.
Ellesmudamo e surdo da penul-
tima syllaba do presente do
infinitivo para i todas as vezes
que e accentuada, p. ex. pre-
vino,prevines,previne,preve'
nimos, prevenis, previnem.
Nesses verbos, o e fechado, seja
elle oral ou nasal, passapara i
nas mesmas pessoas em que e
surdo passa para ^, conser van-
do- se nas outras pessoas : min-
to, mentes, mente, men times,,
mentis, mentem; minta,
mintas etc.
0 verbo fugiry pertencendo
aquelles que no infinitivo
teem u oral, muda essa vogal
em 0 aberto na 2* pessoa e
154 Lesson 23.
a flexSo de mentir. Ate que na 3* do singular e na 3"
acertou; muito bem! Agora do plural do presente fndi-
desejo que conjugue fugir. cativo e no singular do
imperativo : fujo, fdges, fuge,
fugirnoSj fugis, fogem; foge.
A 1* pessoa sing, do pr. ind. Na pessoa mencionada, assim
d'esteverbo,sendoplionetica- como em todo o presente do
mente regular, patenteia to- Q.oii}\mQtv^o(fuja,fujas,fuja^
daviaumamodifica^aoortho- fujdmos, fujaes, fujam)^ o g
grapbica. Indique o senbor passa para j, porque precisa
em que consiste e a regra conservaramesmapromincia
em que se baseia. antes de a.
Twenty-third Lesson. Li0o vigesima
terceira.
Exercises on the Full Verbs, especially of
the Preceding Lesson.
N.B. — Here Lessons 3 — 7, especially the subjunc-
tive moods and their employment, are to be repeated.
The verbs printed in italics are to be conjugated
by word of mouth in those tenses \vhich have some
peculiaritv.
67.
As batatas*
As batatas nascent de uma planta chamada batat«ira.^
A rama^ da batateira ^ verde. A batateira da flores cor de
violeta, ou brancas. Estas flores trans formam-se em fructo-
com a forma de pequeninas bolas^ cor de viol^ta. Estas pe-
qaeninas bolas sao venenosas. Arrancada* uma batateira, o
pe traz agarradas^ [a elle] varias batatas, umas grandes, ou-
tras mais pequenas. Cada batata apresenta por fora varies
botoes^ gomos** ou borbulhas^, os quaes teem o nome de
<iiolhos^. Enterrando uma batata, nasce com o tempo uma
batateira. Partindo uma batata de modo a' separar inteiros
OS varies olhos que ella apresenta, e enterrando em separado^
cada um d'esses olhos, de cada um nasce uma batateira, que
com o tempo dard batatas.
* These excerpts 55 — 60 are taken from 0 Primeiro Livro
de Leitura by Trindade Coelho. The student is advised to care-
fully read and translate these excerpts, as well as No. 61, and
to retranslate them into Portuguese.
Exercises on the Full Verbs. 155
As batatas sao um magnifico alimento nao so para as
pessoas mas para os animaes. Depois de apanhadas^, as
batatas devem ser conservadas em sitios sficcos e frescos. A
humidade^^ fas apodrecer as batatas. 0 calor fas com que
germinem.^^ A batata, depois de germinar^^j adquire um gosto
pessimo, e nao se pode comer.
^ Potato-plant. ^ foliage. ^ ball. ^ arrancar = to pull
out, to root up. ^ agarrar = to cling (of. § 54). ^ bud. ' so
as to. ^ separately. ^ apanhar = to pick up, to gather. '^^ damp-
ness, moisture. ^^ to germinate.
58.
As fridas.
As fructas nascem das arvores fructiferas, T)u arvores de
fructo. Todas as arvores produzem fnicto ; mas as chamadas
arvores fructiferas sao propriamente as que prodnzem fructos
que podemos comer. As arvores de fructo cobrem-se de floras
na primavera. Das flores nascem os fructos, e estes sao co-
Ihidos depois de maduros.^
0 pecegueiro^ dd pScegos^, a pereira* dd peras, a ma-
cieira^ da ma^as, a larangeira^ da laranjas, a ameixoeira'^ da
ameixas, a amendoeira^ da amfindoas, a cerejeira^ ou cerdeira^
da cerejas, a gingeira^*' da ginjas^\ o castanheiro da castan-
has, 0 marmeleiro^^ da marmelos, o limoeira da limoes, o
daraasqueiro^^ da damascos, a nogueira da nozes, a roman-
zeira** da romas, a figueira da figos, a tangerineira da tange-
rinas^^, etc.
As arvores de fructo sao podadas'^^ no inverno. 0 po-
dador^' serve-se principalmente da navalha^^ do podao^^ e
da tesoura^*^, com os quaes corta os ramos iniiteis. As fru-
ctas comem-se mais por gOso^^ do que para sustento; mas
todas as fructas conieem elementos preciosos para a saiide.
As fructas comem-se geralmente emquanto frescas, e so devem
comer-se bem maduras. As fructas tambem se podem con-
servar, quer^^ seccando-as, como se faz por exemplo a ameixa,
ao figo e a pera; quer fazendo com elias os chamados doces
de calda^^, ou de compdta^^; e ainda outros variedades de
doces. Com as fructas frescas, faeem-se tambem as chamadas
fructas de conserva.'^^
^ Ripe. ^ peach-tree. •' peaches. * pear-tree. ^ apple-
tree. *^ or"Jinge-tree. ^ peach-tree. '^ almond-tree. ^ cherry tree.
^" mahaleb. ^^ mahaleb-cherries. ^- quince- tree. ^■' apricottree.
^^ pomegranate-tree. ^^ oranges of Tanger. ^^ podar = to prune,
lop, clip. ^" clipper. ^^ knife. ^^ pruning-saw. '^^ pruning-shears.
*^ pleasure. ^^ guer . . . qiier = either ... or. ^^ juice, jam.
*^ stewed fruit. ^^ preserved.
156
Lesson 23.
Coiiversa^ao.
Porque plantamos urn grao
de ma9a (urn carO^o de
p6cego, de ameixa) etc.?
Que esperamoa (desejamos),
plantando niua arvore fru-
ctifera?
Que e precise {nun nma dr-
vore fructifera dar fructa no
verao ou outOnoV
Como e que se consomem as
fructas ?
Porque sao podadas a3 ar-
vores ?
Quaes os instrumentos de que
0 podador se deve servir?
Para que fim cultivamos a ba-
tata?
Como 6 precise conserval-a?
Que seria se as batatas esti-
vessem num sitio quente?
Porque se deve evitar que
germinem?
Para que nasija uma macieira
(um pecegueiro, uma ameixo-
eira) etc.
Esperamos (desejamos) que
cre99a e que produza fru-
ctas.
E precise que na primavera se
cubra de flores.
Consomem-se (or: s5o conso-
midas) frescas, seccas, co-
zidas, feitas em doces de
calda, de compota etc.
Podam-se as arvores para as
livrar dos ramos inuteis.
E precise que se sirva (e pre-
cise servir-se) da navalha,
do podao e da tesoura.
Para que nos forne^a alimento,
a nos e aos nossos animaes
dom^sticos.
E precise que seja conservada
em sitio secco e fresco para
que a humidade nao a apo-
drecja.
0 calor as faria germinar (or :
faria com que germinassem).
Para que com a germina^ao
nao adquiram (ou ganhem)
um gOsto p^ssimo que nao se
Ihes deixe comer.
59.
A lavra.^
A lavra faz-se com o arade^ ou com a charrua.- 0
arado e a charrua sao puxados* per bois, e tambem o podem
ser por cavallos ou rauares.* 0 arado e a charrue rasgam^
a terra com a rfilha^ abrindo no cbao sulcos^ ou r^gos.^ A
terra antes de lavrada® esta mais ou menos dura; depois de
lavrada fica fofa.® So depois de f6fa, a terra esta propria
para receber a semente.** 0 lavrador** que deitasse a se-
mente na terra antes de a lavrar, pdrdia o tempo e a semente,
May be extended and varied by the teacher.
Exercises on the Full Verbs. 157
pois esta comiam-na 03 passaros, e a que nao comessem os
passaros nao nascia. A semente precisa de terra humida e
fofa para nascer e de se esconder^^ debaixo da terra
^ Tillage. '^ plough. ^ to pull, to draw. ^ mule. ^ tear.
" coulter. ^ furrow. ^ till. ^ loose. ^" seed. ^^ husbandman.
^- to hide.
(JO.
A sementeira^
Depois de lavrada a terra, o lavrador 4eita-lhe a se-
mente. A seroente vae- n'um sacco, e este debaixo do bra9o
esquerdo do lavrador, e dependurado^ do hombro. 0 lavra-
dor espalha^ a semente, jogando^-a, com a mao direita, para
a frente e para os lados, Ao mesmo tempo que semeia^, o
lavrador vae and<indo. A sementeira faz-se tambem com in-
strumentos apropriados, chamados semeadores mechanicos.'^
^ Sowing. - present of ir (s. § 214). ^ hanging. ^ to spread. '' to
throw. '^ to sow. "' sowing-machine.
€onYersa<^ao.
(See note p. 156.)
Porque se poem os bois a Para que a puxem {or: para
charrua? que seja puxada por elles)..
Para qu6 se emprega a char- E*ara que rasgue a terra com
rua ou o arado? a relha e abra sulcos ou
rfigos.
Porque e preciso rasgar-se a Para que fique fofa.
terra?
Que havia-de dizer V. se dese- Pegue com o sacco da semente
jasse ensinar a alguem a debaixo do bra^o esquerdo,
semear? de maneira que fique de-
pendurado do hombro e jo-
gue a semente, espalhando
-a com a direita para a
frente e para os lados.
61.
A grade.^
Semeada a terra, o lavrador passa a grade por cima
d'ella. A grade alisa a terra; e alisando-a, faz com que de-
baixo d'ella se esconda a semente. Encontrando-se coberta^,
a semente nao tarda a germinar. Pouco tempo depois, toda.
a terra comega a verdejar*, cdbrindo-se de uma especie de
relva.* E a seata® que comega a nascer. Cada grao que
germinou produsiu uma pequenina haste; as hastes vao^ cres-
158 Lesson 23.
cendo pouco a pouco; vdo com o tempo creando espiga^; e
na espiga vdo medrando^ os graos.
^ Harrow. - to smooth. '' P. part, of cobrir. ^ to become
green. ^ turf. ** (standing) corn. ^ Fres.oi ir (s.% 214); vao crescendo
periphrastically for crescem. ^ ear (of corn). ^ to grow, to thrive.
A monda.^
Na primavera, a seara esta ja muito desenvolvida, e ate
ondula^ em dias de vento, produzindo a vista um agradavel
aspecto.* Mas misturados com as hastes da seara, apparecem
entao, frequentemente, hervas damninhas.* Essas herves e
precise arrancal-as, pois roubam^ d terra' o sustento que 6 s5
para a seara, e portanto^ nao deixam medrar esta. 0 tra-
balho on operaQao de arrancar essas hervas damninhas chama-
se monda.
* Weeding. - undulate. ^ sight. "* weeds. ^ to rob. ^ therefore.
Conselkos d'uma mae (A) e d'um amigo idoso (B) para
um moQO (G) em vesper as^ de ir para fdra.^
A. Men filho, quando te fores embora (see § 34 foot-note
and p. 37), nao te esqnecas de te^ despedir dos tens
professores, para que te nao tenham em conta^ de
malcriado!^ Seria uma desapprobacjao que me to-
casse a mim, porque fui eu quem te criei.
C. Nao receie minha Mae, que eu nao me comports bem.
Diligenceio (§ 139) sempre fazer honra a educacao
recebida.
B. E um cuidado que sempre se premeia, pois a um
joven bem comportado acolhe^-se com prazer em
toda a parte.
A. E faze para nao chegares tarde a esta^aol Sabes a
que horas abre a bilheteira?*^
C. Acho que abre as tres menos dez, e consta-me** que
fecha cinco minutos antes da partida do comboio.
B. Se assim o deseja (or: desejar)^ tomo-lhe (or: tomar-
Ihe-ei) o bilhete e cUamo tambem um portador* que
Ihe leve a bagagem.^®
C. Muito obrigado a V«-Ex» , mas nSo sera melhor que
tome um trem de pra(ja?**
A. Ainda que tomes trem, nao escusas d'um portador
que te acompanhe ao caes {or: d plata -forma), e ate
a portinhola** do comportamento.** E escuta^*: nao
te assomes muito d janella, para nao te constipai'es**
Exercises on the Full Verbs.
159
(para que te nao constipes). E nao consintas^'' que
se abra a janella do lado do vento!
B. 0 meu joven amigo pode dormir em caminho de
ferro ?
C. Eu raras vezes durmo; receio que alguma paysagem
passe, sem que eu a perceba.
B. Teiii razao. Seria pena que Ihe escapasse coisa al-
guma. Mas entao sera precise que se erga de vez em
quando, para nao flcar (or: para que nao fique) com
somno.
A. Sim, e nao comas muito, porque isso faz adormecer.
C. Tambem sinto pouca vontade de comer emquanto
viajo.
A. Tu ainda tens (por ahi) algumas pequenas dividas
que pagar?
C. Nao tenho, minha Mae. Paguei tudo quanto devi.
A. Melhor. Prefiro que nao haja nada que te pese
(§ 138 c) na alma, Lamental-o-ia, se nao me dissesses
a verdade.
C Perdoe-me, minha Mae! Nunca Ihe menti, nem Ihe
minto agora. Nao ihe pese (§ 138c) isso!
B. Como veste em viagem?
C. Visto fato^^ de flanella e levo casacao.^^
A. E olha, ainda que parega sup^rfluo lembrdl-o: nao
cuspas no chao, nem tussas quando puderes^^ evital-o,
para nao incommodares^^ os outros viajantes.
B. Agrade90 todos os sens conselhos, minha Mae, ate
OS superfluos.
' On the point (= at the eve) of. ^ to go abroad. ^ to
take leave. * to take for, ^ ill-bred. ^ to receive. ' book-
ing-office. 8 I am told. '-* porter. ^* luggage. ^^ cab, hansom.
^■^ platform. ^^ door. ^* compartment. ^^ to hark, listen atten-
tively. ^^ to catch cold. ^^ to consent. ^^ clothes. ^^ great-
coat. ^^ fut. subj. of poder (s. § 198). -^ to molest.
Palavras.
0 vaqueiro the cowherd
fvK 'kT8%ru]
apascentar to pasture
[epv/sen'tarj
a vacca [vakvj the cow
cofitiguo contiguous
[kon 'tigwuj
attrahir to attract
[Btrn 'ir]
0 desejo the desire
trepar [tr9'parj to climb
pisar [pi'zar]
enxotar
[ifu 'tar],
corar [ko'rarj
irracional
[irrvs}u 'naij
0 appetite
a vergonha
fv9rgopvJ
indifferente
to tread
to drive away
to blush
irrational
the appetite,
covetousness
the shame
indifferent
160 Lesson 23.
soprar to blow i a consUpagrio the cold
fsu 'prar] j [ kdjtipv 's7? u]
mpero [' nfi)9ru] rough; harsh, | o corrente d'ar the draught
sharp ; estorvar to disturb.
G4. Leitura.
0 vaqueiro.
Um rapaz anda apascentando uma vacca n'um prado con-
tiguo a um jardim. N'essa occasiao y6 n'uma arvore uuias
cerejas maduras, que o attraem, e o luovem a desejos de as
apanhar. Abandona no mesmo instante o animal, e trepa a
arvore. A vacca porem, quando nao ve o pastor, entra no
jardim, come a melhor herva, e pisa muita outra com os pes.
0 rapaz desce fnrioso da arvore, enxota o animal, e bate-lhe
barbaramente. Aproxima-se logo o pae e diz-lhe: «Qnem
merece um tal castigo, tu on o animal irracional? Obedeces
ao appetite menos do que elle?» E o rapaz cora de vergonha
diante do pae.
<>o. Theiua.
I am glad that you are determined to accompany us.
If to-morrow the weather be good, we shall ascend the
mountain which offers so beautiful a view. The weather
does not appear to become good, the wind blowing from east.
1 am afraid that we shall have rough weather for some days
more. If it was not for our journey, it would be indifferent
(not matter), but as it is, it disturbs rather (it is rather
annoying). Are you not afraid of catching a cold? I gave
you this great-coat that it might protect you from the
draught. Now it is time for us to go hcjme (= it is time
that we go home), that we may sleep a couple of hours
before departing (infmitive).
Conversacjao.
Transforme o exercicio n®. 62:
1. empregando o preterite;
2. sendo o proprio rapaz que conta este case;
3. sendo o pae que conta o caso ao rapaz;
4. sendo dois rapazes em vez de um, e muitas vaccas
em vez do uma;
5. sendo os dois rapazes que contam o caso?
6. sendo o pae que conta o caso aos filhos.
On the Pronouns.
161
I
Twenty-fourth Lesson. Li^ao vig6sima
quarta.
On the Pronouns. Pronomes.
§ 160. There are six kinds of pronouns — viz.:
1. the Personal; 2. the Demonstrative; 3. the Possessive;
4. the Interrogative; 5. the Relative; 6. the Indefinite
Pronoun.
T. The Personal Pronouns. Pronomes pessoaes.
§ 161. The personal pronouns are the only words
! of Portuguese language which, like the Latin and Ger-
man, modify their original form (subject or nominative),
to express the different complements (genitive, dative or
accusative), as here represented:
I Singular, Plurai.
Nam. j Eu nds
Gen. j de mini de nds
Dat. I me; a mim nos; a nds
Ace. me nos
Norn, i
Gen.
Bat.
Ace.
Tu
de ti
te; a ti
te
vos
de vos
vos; a vos
vos
Nom. Elle, ella elles, ellas
Gen. d'elle, d'ella; de si d' elles, d- ellas; de si
Dat. Ihe ; a elle, a ella ; a si Vies ; a elles, a ellas ; a si
Ace. 0, a; so os, as; se.
§ 162. (a) The forms nos, vos, elle(s), eUa(s) are stih-
ject only wiien employed without a preposition, and may,
as well as the atonic forms of the complements, be
called conjunctive (conjunctos), as they are always joined
to the verb; while the others (mim, ti, si), being sepa-
rated from their verbs by a preposition, may be considered
absolute (absolutes).
(b) The absolute pronoun is often employed with
the conjunctive when a stress is laid on it — e.g.: dd-
llio a die, give it to him, instead of dd-lh'o, give it
him. Yet the conjunctive forms of the subject may be
also employed quite alone, in which case they are also
absolute. Ex.: Eu? Tu nao, elle ou eJJa.
Portuguese Comersation-Grammar.
II
162 Lesson 24.
§ 163. (a) Eu and ki are alivays subject; nos, ros,
elle(s)y ella(s) are, as already said, subject when em-
ployed ivithout a preposition.
When governed by a preposition, they are com-
plements of the genitive, dative, or accusative— e.g.:
lemhra-se de nos; dei a elles; 7'ecebemos para ella.
(b) Mini, ti, si are always complements and go-
verned by a preposition; elle(s), eUa(s), nos, vos are also
complements as soon as they are joined to a prepo-
sition (see a). Deu-me (a mim), he gave me; viu-me (a
mint), he saw me. Tenho-o d'elle, I have it from him.
(c) The first and second persons (sing, and plur.),
as well as the pronoun se of the third person, joined
to the preposition com, are assimilated with it and take
a new ibnn — viz. : com(m)igo, comtigo, comsigo, comnosco,
comvosco, with me (myself), thee (thyself), him(self), her-
(self), them(selves), us (ourselves) you(rself), yourselves.
Elle foi com(m)igOj he went with me.
Venha cmnnosco, come with us.
Levou-o comsigo, he took it with him.
Isso ndo e comsigo^ that is no concern of yours.
(d) Me, te, nos, vos, se do not admit of any preposi-
tion. They are forms of the accusative or dative and
correspond to the Portuguese: a mim, a ti, a nos, a vos,
a si to me, to you, to us.
Elle levou-me he took me.
Eu mostrei-te ... I showed you . . .
Nos persuadimo'vos we persuaded you . . .
Vds devolveste-nos . . . you gave us . . . back.
Eu dei-vos o conselho I gave you the counsel.
(e) Lhe, Ihes are forms of the S'"^ person, without
distinction of the gender. They express the dative-
complement and are employed without a preposition:
mostrei'lhe(s), I showed it (to) him, her, them, you.
N.B. — As lhe, Ihes are also employed in addressing
somebody, you may avoid a misunderstanding by em-
ploying a double form:
Mostre%'lhe(s) a elle (a elles) I showed him (them)
» » a ella (a ellas) » » her »
» » a voce (a voces) » > you.
On the Pronouns. 163
The prepositional form may also precede the other
•—e.g.: <iNesse meu artigo sohre o Coragdo JDoente, que
a voce Ihe agradou tanto» . . . (Tr. Coelho : Cartas).
In that article of mine on the "Sick Heart," which
pleased you so well . . .
Or it may even substitute the simple form — e.g.:
<iHomenagens que de todo a hand a me vem chegando . . .
a elle as endosso>-> (ibid.).
Homages which from all sides come to me ... I endorse
them to him.
(f) 0, a, OS, as, him, her, it, them, are complements
of the accusative of the 3^^^ person of the transitive verb
(with distinction of gender) and are employed without
a preposition.
Vejo-o (-a, 'OS, -as) I see him (her, it, them).
(g) The reflective pronoun se has the forms se, si,
'Sigo, and is employed without distinction of the number
and gender: se without a preposition ; si with the pre-
positions a, de, em^ por (per), para, sobre; sigo with com
(comsigo). Ex. :
Lava-se, he (she) washes himself (herself). (You) wash
yourself (see Remark II.).
0 komem ndo vive s6 para si.
Man does not live for himself alone.
Pensou comsigo he (she) thought by him-(or her-)self.
JRemark I. — The absolute pronouns may still be streng-
thened by mesmo or proprio : N6s mesmos we . . . ourselves,
eu propria I . . . myself, para si mesmo, comigo mesmo. etc.
Memark //.—As se is the reflective pronoun of the
S^^ person, and the person spoken to is always in the S^^ person,
se may be also "you"— e.g.:
Lembrou-se, he or she or you remembered.
Bemark ///.—Also the forms si and sigo are employed,
when addressing a person, but only in familiar style— e.g.,
Lemhrei-me de si I thought of you; irei comsigo I shall go
with you.
§ 164. (a) The forms me, te, se, nos, vos, Ihe, Ihes,
0, a, OS, as, are joined by a hyphen (-) to their preced-
ing verb:
Offendeu-me (but: elle nao meoffendeu): desculpo-te;
affirmoU'lhe(s) ; affirmei-o; perdoai-nos; feriu-se.
11*
164 Lesson 24.
(b) The pronouns o, a, os, as are changed into lo,
lay los, las:
1. when preceded by a verbal form ending in r,
s, or <8r, which ending is dropped. The vowel (a or e)
preceding these final letters may take an accent (d, e):
chamd-lOy chamdmo-las, tra^e-la, trasemo-los ; pde-lo tu? do
you put it? trd-lo! bring it or him I
BemarTc. — This modification may also be expressed thus :
A verbal form ending in r, s ov z changes into I when
followed by 0(5^, aC5> ; chamdl-o, chamdmol-os, etc. This form
is even more modern.
2. When following the pronouns nos and cos or
the adverb eis, which then also lose their final s: es-
creve-no-lo he writes it to us; ei-lo here it is.
(c) These same pronouns o, a, os, as, take the forms
no, na, nos, nas, when preceded by a nasal sound:
deixam-no, deixavam-na, deixaram-nos, ddo-no; estdo-no
fa^endo, they are doing it, pde-no he puts it or *'put
it!" Ex.:
Jehovah disse a Mouses: Fase-te uma serpente ardent e
e poe-na sobre uma haste.
Jehovah said unto Moses: Make thee a fiery serpent
and set it upon a pole.
(d) The dative-complements me, te, Ike, being fol-
lowed by the accusative-complements o, a, os, as, drop
their e, substituting it by an apostrophe: disse-ni'o;
mostrei-fas, affirmava-Wo.
(e) Lhes joined to these accusative pronouns forms
Ih'os, Was, which may be ''them to him,'' ''them to her,"
or ''them to them." JDou-lh'os, I give them to her, to him,
or to them.
§ 165. The position of the conjunctive pronoun-
complement is:
(a) In positive and simple sentences generally behind
the verb : in negative sentences and those beginning with
an adverb, a preposition,, conjunction, etc., before the
verb.
Elle disse-me; eu explico-te or eu te explico; elle me
nao disse or (elle) ndo me disse; se me ndo dissesse.
Eu dou-lhe; eu ndo Ihe dou; para que Ihe ndo de.
Nds temol-o; nds ndo o temos: hontem ndo o tinhamos.
On tbe Pronouns. 165
Remark I. — In negative clauses, the adverb nao may
precede or follow the pronoun-complement; it always precedes,
when the subject is not expressed : elle me nao disse ; nao me disse.
(b) The conjunctive pronoun-complement must be
put after the verb of a positive sentence whenever the
pronoun subject is omitted, as the former cannot begin
a sentence ^• tcnho-o, conhego-os, and not: o tenho, as co-
nhego. Yet you may say: die honrou-me or elle me
honrou.
(c) In the future and conditional tenses it is put
between verb and ending: rcsponder-te-(h)ei, dar-lh' o-(h)ia
I shall answer you, I should give it him.
(d) With the infinitive, the pronoun complement
may precede or follow it:
«0 rei ha-de te chamar e dizer-te se me nao queres
vender, mas tu nao me vendas». (Anna de C. Osorio.)
(e) It is the same with the compound tenses:
Nos temos-lhe dito; eu o tenho sahido ha muito; but
only: tenho-o sahido, etc.
§ 166. If there are several complements of different
cases, accusative and dative, in the same sentence, the
dative precedes the accusative : dcl-Wo. If the comple-
ments are only of the accusative, that of the person
or personified thing is put in the dative: Essa sonata
ouniUta focar (a ella), I heard her playing this sonata.
§ 167. In order to be emphasised, the conjunctive
pronoun-complement may be repeated by an absolute
(cf. § 162 [bj): Elle disse m'o a mini he said it to mc. This
absolute pronoun may also precede: a mim me disse or
a mini disse-me; a elle eu mo (Ihc) disse nada. (N.B. —
In this latter sentence the conj. pronoun-complement
may be omitted, but not the subject eu.)
Remark. — This construction is also employed where in
English a possessive pronoun or a preposition is used — e.g.,
Conhecia-Ihe a voz I knew his voice, or I knew him by his
voice. Tomei-lhe a mdo I took her (by her) hand.
§ 168. When a personal pronoun is followed by
an appositive noun or number, in Portuguese the ar-
ticle is generally put between:
^ In Brazil the construction <o tenho, as conhego, Ihe digo,^-
etc., is also employed.
166
Lesson 24.
Nos, OS inglezes gostamas viajar. But also: JSfds re-
publicanos somos assim.
Vamos OS dais or even: vamos ambos os dais, ambas
as duas: vamos os tres or todos (os) ires, let us go
both (or all three).
0 carvdo
JTttlU
the coal
voltar
to turn round,
[Icvr 'vvu]
to return
0 mineiro
the miner
tirar
to draw out.
[mi 'nviruj
to take from
advertir
to advertise
a pancada
the blow
[v&dv9r'tir]
[pvUdeJ
pouco a pouco
a fenda [fendvj
by degrees
0 mendigo
the beggar
the crack
[mm dign]
reparar
to repair
arrastar
to drag
[rdpvrar]
[nrref'tar]
0 espinheiro
the thornbush,
0 pantano
the pool
bfpi'yTslru]
brier
['pvntvnuj
maldoso
wicked
voltar a si
J to recover
[mai'dozu]
recobrar os
0 vime [vimd]
the osier
sentidos
cubigar
to covet
0 gemido
the groan
[kubi 'sarj
[s9mid^uj
par pS de
near to
affiictivo
afflicting
dormir a sesta
to take a nap
[vfli tivuj
[■scfU]
approximar-se
to approach
0 mollio [mjfiu]
the bottle
[yprosi-
0 feno [fenuj
the hay
'nmrsd]
atar
to tie
0 ladrdo
the robber
esfomeado
famished
[h'd'rvu[
[iffomt'adu]
enxotar
to drive away
Hermano
Hermano
[Ifu'tar]
[ir'meniij
bastante
rather
0 cortador
the butcher
[bnf'tvnt9j
fkurtv '&or]
maltratar
to treat ill
pedir esmola
to beg, 8sk
por nome
named
[is'molvj
alms
camportar'-^e
to behave
novatnente
anew.
66. Exercfclo.
Se a luz do sol nao nos impedisse, veriamos as estrellas
dmante o dia; mas assim esta luz impede que n6s as per-
cebamos. 0 carvao se encontra na terra; elle e extraido pelos
mineiros; s5o elles {or: estes) que o extrdem. 0 amigo que
te adverte para que [tu] nSo commettas uma falta, t^ aquelle
que mais te estima. Estas paredes caem pouco a pouco, por
isso que as fendas, n^ellas nao se reparam ; ^ra preciso repar^-
las. Nao quer vir comigo? Hoje nao, mas k,manha vou ter
comsigo para Ihe falar numa coisa que muito nos interessa a
On the Pronouns. 167
ambos. Entao nao me pode diz6-lo ja agora? Nao posso; so
amanha poderei dizer-lb'o.
67. Leitura.
(a) 0 espinheiro maldoso.
0 vime disse um dia ao espinheiro : «Dize-nie ca! Porque
e que cubi9as tu tanto o fate das pessoas que passam por pe
de ti? 0 que queres tu com isso?» 0 espinheiro respondeu:
«Nao quero nada. Nao Ihes quero tirar o fate, mas apenas
rasga-lo.
(b) 0 cdo e a vacca.
Um cao dormia a sesta sobre um molho de f6no que
estava mal atado. Aproximou-se uma vacca esfomeada. 0
cao, mal a viu, come^ou a ladrar, e impediu que ella comesse
do feno. A vacca, cheia de fome e de tristeza, disse: <Se tu
nao pedes comer o f^no, porque nao queres que eu o c6ma?»
68. Thema.
The Faithful Dogs.
A butcher, named Herman, went one day into the
country (ao campo) to buy some cattle. On the way a man
begged an alms from him. Herman turned round, that the
beggar should not perceive the money he had with him,
opened his purse, and took a silver coin from it. In the same
moment the man assaulted him by giving him so heavy a
blow on his head that he fell down (no chdo). The two
dogs of the butcher threw themselves immediately on the
beggar, flung him to the ground (a terra), and dragged him to
the near pool. Then they returned to their master, licking his
face until he recovered. Hereupon Herman heard a distressing
groan. He approached and found the robber whom the dogs
were about to assault anew. But the butcher drove them away
and drew that man, who found himself rather ill-treated, on
to dry ground.
ConYersa<jao.
Onde dormia o cao? (The answers to be formed
Quem se aproximou? after No. 63b).
Como se conduziu entao o
cao?
Que disse a vacca?
Aonde foi o cortador? Foi um dia ao campo (para)
comprar algumas rezes.
Que Ihe succedeu no caminho? No caminho pediu-lhe esmola
um homem.
168
Lesson 25.
0 Hermano como se com-
portou?
E depois?
Que 6 que aconteceu entao?
Que fazem entao os caes do
cortador ?
E em seguida?
Elle voltou-se para que o
mendigo nao percebesse o
dinheiro que trazia comsigo.
Abriu a bolsa e tirou(-lhe)
uma moeda de prata.
No mesmo instante o homem
aggrediu-lhe, dando-lheuma
pancada tao forte iia cabe^a
que elle caiu no chao.
Os dois caes saltam logo sobre
0 mendigo, deitam-no a terra
e arrastam-no para um pan-
tano proximo.
E seguida voltam para o seu
dono e lambem-lhe a cara
tantas vezes que elle recobra
OS sentidos.
Twenty-fifth Lesson. Li^ao vigesima
qninta.
Demonstrative and Possessive Pronouns.
A. The Demonstratiye Pronouns.
§ 169. We distinguish conjunctive and absolute
demonstrative pronouns, indicating the former, which
accompany a noun, as adjectives (pronomes adjecUvos)
and the latter, used instead of a noun, as substantives
(pronomes suhstantivos).
N.B. — The noun indicated by a demonstrative ad-
jective may not be expressed, but only understood,
which does not influence its fonu.
Pronomes adjeciivos:
Masculino Feminino
este, est a this
Pronomes suhstantivos :
isto this
esse,
aquelle,
outro,
''^^,; Ithat
aquella f
outra the other
aquillof ^^^^
outrem somebody else
0 mesmo,
tanto,
tnl,
a inesma the same
tanta so much
tal such a
0 mesmo the same
tanto so much
0, a, OS, as that or those
(which); he, she or they
(who).
Demonstrative and Possessive Pronouns. 169
§ 170. The proiionies adjectivos form their plural
alike the nouns; este, estes; tal, taes.
The pronomes suhstantivos have only a masculine
and singular form, except o, which has a feminine
and a plural form.
§ 171. (a) Este, esta, isto indicates an object near
to the person speaking or one mentioned in the last
place (= latter).
(b) Esse, essa, isso indicates an object near to the
person spoken to, or one mentioned in the first place
(= former); it may also be employed independently,
without any reference to another.
(c) AqueUe, aqtiella, aquillo indicates an object equally
distant from both persons, the speaker and the one ad-
dressed. Ex.:
Estes (mens) oihos; esses (sens) olhos ; aquelle ceu:
aquella igreja. Que e isso?
N.B. — Instead of aquelle, etc., you may also some-
times employ este, etc. — e.g.: este ceu, esta igreja.
Remark. — Esta, essa in commercial style and employed
absolutely, means : esta praga (or cidade), essa praca.
§ 172. By an alliance of oiUro with este, esse or
aquelle the compound pronouns esfoiitro, ess'outrOf
aquelVoatro, pi.: esfoutros, etc., are formed.
§ 173. These pronouns, being preceded by the
prepositions em, de, a, form a crasis with them (Port. :
erase) — i.e., they melt together:
(a) With em: n'este (or neste), n'esta, n'isto, n' aquil-
lo, etc.
(b) With de: d'este (or deste), d'esse, d'isso, d' aquel-
le, etc.
(c) With a: dqiieUe(s), dquella(s), aquillo. (Only
those demonstratives beginning with a.)
JRe/warfe.—The Englishf/zi5, that, employed absolutely, is not
always rendered by isso, aquillo, but only when no substan-
tive is to be substituted— e.g. :
What is that? Que e isso? Aquillo que e?
That is a book, iaso e um livro.
But: Who is that? Quern e esse homem, aquella senhora?
That is my father, esse (homem) e meu pae.
170 Lesson 25.
Is this your book (= is this book yours) ?
JE este 0 sen livro?
No, that is not my book, that is my brother's.
JSdo, esse ndo e o men (Uvro), e o de men irmdo.
§ 174. Este^ esta, csse^ essa, aquelle, aquella are
frequently employed for a noun or personal pronoun
strongly emphasised. Ex.:
0 Carlos, esse e que tern foveas.
It is Charles who has strength!
A natureza, essa e sempre victoriosa.
It is Nature that is always victorious.
A indulgencia d'elle ? Com essa ndo contes ! Olha o
cavalleirOy aquelle e que sahe montar!
Essa is frequently employed without any substan-
tive in the idioms: Or a essa! (Why!) Essa e hoa! Mais
essa! etc., where «graga» or «a^neira,T> etc., is to be
supplied.
§ 175. The English "he who," "she who," "they
who" are given in Portuguese b}^ o (a, os, as) que or
aqtielle(s), aquella(s) que.
B. The Possessive Pronouns.
§ 176. It is a peculiarity of these pronouns that
they are preceded by the definite article:
Are excepted: 1. Those expressing parentage;
2. Those you address a person with (men Amigo^
minha Senhora);
3. Those which constitute an essential part of a
title: Vossa Majestade, Sua Altera, Vossa Excellencia,
Sua Reverendlssima, etc.;
4. Those predicatively employed (see § 178).
Kote. — The general rule and that under 1. are not
always observed.
§ 177. We distinguish conjunctive and absolute
possessive pronouns (adjectivos e pronomes posseftsivos),
yet there is no other difference between them but that
the adjectivos are and the pronomes are not accompanied
by a noun.
Este i 0 meu chapeu ; este chapeu e o men.
This is my hat; this hat is mine.
Demonstrative and Possessive Pronouns.
171
o men, fern, a minha Plur. os mens, fern, as minhas my;
mine
0 ieu, » a hia os teus, » as tuas (thy),
your; (thine), yours
0 sen, » a sua os sens, fern, as suas his,
her, your; his, hers, yours
0 nosso, » a nossa os nossos, fern, as nossas our;
ours
0 vosso, » a rossa os vossos, » as vossasjour;
yours.
Declension.
N. (& A. 0 men vestido my dress. G. do meu vestido,
D. ao meu vestido.
» » » a tua penna your pen. G. da tua penna.
D. a tua penna.
§ 178. If predicatively employed (with s^) or,
when governed by ser or a preposition, it expresses
rather origin than possession, the possessive pronoun is
also not preceded by the article. So employed, it may
precede or follow the noun. Ex.:
^' meu it is mine.
(EUe) e meu amigo, e amigo meu.
He is my friend or a friend of mine.
\ (^ o meu amigo would mean: it is my friend.)
Onze rios sdo seus trihutdrios (do Tejo),
leven rivers are its tributaries (= are tributary to it).
A culpa e minha the fault is mine, it is my fault.
Foi culpa minha, por culpa minha.
It was my fault, for my fault.
£ ideia tua that is your idea.
E tua esta ideia this idea is yours.
Por tua causa for yjui- sake.
Com sua licenga with his (her, your) permission.
Para maior conveniencia nossa for our greater con-
venience.
Be7narJcs.
1. Your, yours ip rendered by seu, sua, etc., when no
misunderstanding can result— e.g.:
Have you got your paper? Beceheu V^- o seu jornal?
Where do you buy your pens?
Onde compra as suas pennas?
172
Lesson 25.
If, however, an ambiguity might take place, seit, sua is
supplied by o (a, os, as) de F«- Ex^^-, etc.; or on the other
side by o (a, os, as) d'eUe(s) or d'ella(s)—e.g. :
Have you lost your glove or his?
Perdeu 7"^ Ex^- a sua luva ou a- d''eUe ?
His money is safe, but yours is not.
0 dinheiro d'eUe estd seguro, mas ndo o estd o de Y'-
2. The possessive pronouns are also sometimes employed
with the indefinite article or pronoun — e.g.:
JJm amigo meu or um meu amigo.
A friend of mine, one of my friends.
Uma carta minha a letter of mine, one of my letters.
Alguns sens amigos some of his friends.
3. Also they are met together with the demonstratives:
Este meu piano this plan of mine.
Essa sua quinta that country-house of yours.
Aquelles sens parentes those parents of his.
These associations are more frequent in Portuguese than
in English.
Palavras.
A vibora
the viper
roer [rro'erj
to gnaw
f'viburBj
velar [m'lar]
to watch, to
a cobra [kobrsj the snake,
wake
'
serpent
0 naturalista
the natural
0 reptil
the reptile
[nuturis 'liftuj
philosopher
[rrey 'Hi]
0 besoiro
the beetle,
corpoUnto
corpulent,
[hd'zoyru]
chafer
[kxirpu'lentu]
thick
0 gafanhoto
the locust,
inojfensivo
inoffensive
[g^f^'yotu]
grasshopper
[inufen 'sicuj
. danwinho
pernicious
ao pcsso que
while
fdu 'niyu]
insidioso
insidious
parade
motionless
[isiftt'ozuj
[pv 'ratfu]
0 denie canino
the eye-tooth
meditar
to meditate
[hv 'ninuj
[mdtfi'tar]
oco [okuj
hollow
0 segredo
the secret
a mordedura
the sting
[to 'greduj
[mur^e'durnj
nada f'na&i?]
nothing
0 orificio
the orifice,
primeiro
first
[oro'fisiu]
opening
Justo
just
0 rato frrntuj
the rat, mouse
f'suftuj
0 ratinho
the mouse
caprichdso
capricious
[rm 'tipuj
[kvprifozu]
a ra [rrvj
the frog
encobrir
to cover, hide
0 mocho f'mofiij
the horned-owl,
[iku'brirj
wood-owl
descobrir
to discover
0 roedor
the gnawer,
excellente
excellent
[rrui'dor]
rodent
[mfs^'lcnU]
Demonstrative and Possessive Pronouns.
173
0 chapeu de \ ' averiguar to inquire, to
chma \ the umbrella I [vv^rigu' arj determine
o guarda-chuva \ j veneer to overcome
a galocha india-rubber- j ora . . . ora now . . . now
fgvlop] shoe j ['oru] either . . . or.
69. Leitura.
A vlbora e a cobra.
Deante de uma vibora e de nma cobra, qualquer pessoa
que nao conhecesse a differen^a entre estes dois reptis, talvez
temesse mais a cobra do que a vibora. Pols esta raro (instead
of raramente) tem de comprimento mais de dois pes, e aquella
6 muito maior e em geral muito mais corpolenta. A cobra e
inoffensiva, ao passo que a vibora, essa, com a sua apparencia
fraca, e um dos mais perigosos animaes. 0 veneno d'este in-
sidioso reptil e muitas vezes mortal. Elle segue por um canal
finissimo ate a raiz dos dentes caninos; e penetrando n'estes
por serem 6cos, sae, na occasiao da mordedura, por um pe-
quenino orificio. A vibora alimenta-se de ratos, ras etc.
0 mocho,
Tambem o mOcho se alimenta de ratos e outros roSdores.
Calculou um naturalista que uma so d'estas aves destroe por
anno quasi 1500 roSdores, afora insectos, como besoiros, ga-
fanhotos e aves damninhas. Como os sabios e os que estudam,
o m6cho vela tambem emquanto os outros dormem. Parado,
a posi^ao do mocho nao e outra, senao a (mesma) dos que
leem: parece dobrado sobre si mesmo^ como a meditar.
(Trindade Coelho: 0 Segundo Livro de Leitura.)
70. Thema.
My secret cannot be of any use to you, if I have not
first yours. Your wish is just, and so is mine also. I have
lost my handkerchief, please to lend me yours. Does this
lesson deal with the demonstrative or the possessive pronouns ?
It deals with one and the others. These are more easily to
be learned than those. But there is no great difficulty, neither
in the one kind nor in the other (tr. : in both). At any rate,
the difficulties are such and so many that we need all our atten-
1;ion to overcome them. Capricious children want now. this,
now that; if you offer them a pear or an apple, they take
this and ask (pedir) for that. One lie covers the other, but
one truth discovers the other. The same causes do not always
produce the same effects. Health and wealth are two magni-
ficent things: but what is the use of the latter without the
former ?
174
Lesson 26.
Conversaijao.
No guarda-roupa.
De quern e este chapeu de
chuva?
E est'outro guarda -chuva, 6 o
ten?
De quern sera? A quern per-
tence?
Este chapeu 6 o de V^ Ex*^ ?
Um amigo meu usa chapeus
taes, deixe ver, se e d'elle.
E meu. Tambem essas galo-
chas sao miahas.
Nao e. E um guarda-chuva
de senhora.
A Lucinda proeura o d'ella.
Sera esse?
Nao, deve ser de outrem. Eu
nao USD tal chapeu (or: eu
nao uso chapeus d 'esses or
d'esses chapeus).
Isso ^ muito difficil averiguar,
pois todos pareeem os mes-
mos.
Twenty-sixth Lesson. Licjao vigesima
sexta.
Interrogative and Relative Pronouns.
C. The InteiTogatlYe Pronouns.
Nom, quern?
who?
Gen. de quern?
of whom?
whose?
Bat. a quern?
to whom?
Ace. quern?
whom?
que (o que)
what?
which ?
de que of
what or
which?
a que to what
or which?
que what?
which?
qual, quaes?
which (of)?
de qualy de
quaes of
which?
a qual, a
quaes? to
which?
qual, quaes
which?
qaanto(s) ? how
much? how many?
dequanto(s) of how
much or many?
a quanto(s) to how
much or many?
quanto(s) how much
or many?
§ 179. Use of the interrogative pronouns:
1. Quern is always employed absolutely as a sub-
stantive; it asks only for persons and may be employed
with the verb in the sing, or in the plur., in direct or
indirect speech— e.g. :
Quern estd ahi? Who is there?
Quern serdo os paes d'estes meninos?
Who may be the parents of these children?
Interrogative and Relative Pronouns. 175
Ndo set a quern eu disse . . .
I don't know to whom I said . . .
De quern e esta casa? Whose house is this?
Ndo sei dizer de quern e.
I cannot tell to whom it belongs.
A quern falou nisso? To whom did you speak of this?
2. Que (que) is used interrogatively:
(a) employed substantively and generally, for things
—e.g.:
Que diz? What do you say?
De que' procede isso? What does this come from?
Para que fez isso? What did you do that for?
(b) adjectively and generally employed, for per-
sons and things:
Que tempo estd? What sort of weather is it to-day?
De que autor e este livro ? By which author is this book ?
A qtce fim? To what purpose?
3. 0 que (que) is used as an exclamation, yet also
as a real interrogation:
0 que?! What?!
0 que sdo as descripgdes dos maiores poetas em com-
paragdo da linguagem viva da natureza ?! 0 que e
a liberdade do honiem mats livre? Faeer' o seu
dever.
4. Qual, employed as a substantive and as an adjec-
tive, asks for persons as well as for things, but out of
a selection. It is either followed by a genitive in the
plural or this case is to be supplied:
Qual dos dois, das duas ? A qual d^estes senhores per-
tence o cavallo ? Quaes d'esses homens o aggrediram ?
Be qual provincia e natural?
N.B. — Here you may say: de que provincia . . .,
which has a more general meaning, while de qual pro-
vincia ... is employed with reference to a small num-
ber of provinces.
Bemark I.— Qual may be preceded by taV; in this case
it has not an interrogative, but a comparative meaning: su^h
as, the same as — e.g.:
Elle voltou tal qual foi, he came back the same as he
went.
176 Lesson 26.
Both pronouns may accompany a noun and be separated
from another:
Qual pae, tal fllho like father like son.
<^Tal tnulher me fosse ella, qual marido eu IJie sou,*
Would that she were such a wife to me as I am a
ijusband to her!
Bemark II. — Tal may be only supposed as accompaning
qual :
0 caraeter deste sujeito e qual eu desejo. <iQuaes para
a cova as providas formigas levam as provis5es.>
Qual . . . qual means the one . . . the other: qual mais,
qual menos.
5. Quanta is used interrogatively:
(a) Employed without a noun and in a general
meaning, for things:
Quanta gastou? How much did you spend?
Quanta vae do Natal a Fdschoa?
How much (time) is it between Christmas and Easter?
Here quanta remains unaltered.
(b) Employed with a noun, after persons and
things, being subject to the rules of the adjective
(feminine and plural): Quanta espagoP — quanta gente?
— quantas dias? — quantas' naitefik
Bemark III.- Quanta is ofteij employed instead ,o{tudo
0 que, meaning then "all that" or "whatever"— e.g. :
Fiz quanta pude I did all (whatever) I could (cf. the
Relative and Indefinite Pronouns.
Bemark JF.— The interrogative qtuinto is not to be con-
founded with the adverbial qtMnto, which signifies "how,
how much," being employed exclam^torily and taking the
form quao before adjectives— e.g. :
Quanta S bonita esta vista! Quao (or qus) bonita e!
Not to be confounded neither with the exclamatory qv^
which may stand instead of quao or quantOy nor this with
the adverbial que : Que de gente ! How many people ! (What
a crowd !) Q^e bonita vista / Que vista tdo bonita ! What a
nice view! ,
D. The Relative Pronouns.
§ 180. These pronouns are in part the same as
the interrogative, from which, however, they are easily
Interrogative and Relative Pronouns. 177
to be distinguished, as they refer only to an antecedent,
while the interrogative pronouns (and adjective) only
refer to something following:
1. Que who, which, that, is equally employed for
persons and things without distinction of gender and
number, as in English — e.g.:
0 homem (a mulher, aquelle, aquella) que commetteu o
furto.
The man (woman) that (he, she who) committed the theft.
Os ratos (as ras) que escaparam.
The rats (the frogs) which escaped.
0 mais hello que ha the most beautifal existing.
2. Quern is synonymous with aquelle(s), aqiiella(s) qve
he, she, they who. It refers only to persons and is
invariable:
Q;iiem tern telhado de vidro, ndo atire pedras ao do
vizinho.
Those who live in glass-houses should not throw stones
(lit. : He who has a glass roof must not throw stones
to that of the neighbour).
Thus employed, quern has the value of a relative
pronoun joined to a personal one; it is considered to
be of masculine gender and singular number.
Quern has generally the verb in the singular, but
may have it also in the plural — e.g.:
«JVao foram elles s6s quern vos mataram.*
As a merely relative pronoun, quern is employed
only joined to a preposition:
0(s) poeta(s) por quern tenho mais admiragdo . . .
Preceded by the prepositions de or a, quem corre-
sponds to the genitive and dative (or accusative) of
"who" or "he who."
De quem eu me queixo ... He whom I complain of . . .
A quem eu disse isso ... He to whom I said that . . .
A quem eu qtiero mais ... He whom I like best . . .
3. Qual "which," has only one form for the two
sexes, but it fornis the plural qu^es. It is mostly pre-
ceded by the definite article, which is dropped, however,
when qual is preceded by tal (see § 179, Remark I and II).
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 12
17S Lesson 26.
Encontrei um homem o qual me reconheceu.
Urn povo nao tern ideias, para as quaes ndo tenha pa-
lavras.
<I)eclaro que desejo occupar-me immediatamente da
questdo Hintnn, para resolver a qual deve marcar-se
successivamente sessdo todoft os dias uteis^ (Affonso
da Costa).
Generally the pronoun que is preferred to qual. Yet
you must ernploy qual and not qan:
(a) Whenever the relative depends on certain pre-
positions {durante, para, sohre, sob, em cima de, etc.):
0 inverno durante o qual estive em Lisboa . . .
(b) When by que a misunderstanding might be
caused. For instance, in the clause : A mde do pcqueno
que encontrei^ it is not clearly understood whom I met
with. So I must say: A mde do pequeno a qual en-
contrei, if I met the mother, and A mde do pequeno o
qual encontrei, if I met the boy.
(c) Whenever the relative clause is not a necessary
or ornamental complement of the antecedent, but con-
tains a new idea, a motive, etc.:
«0 sapo devora as lesmas, as quaes fazem muitos estragoa
nas hortas.^
The toad devours the slugs which cause a good deal of
damage in the kitchen -gardens.
4. Cujo "whose, of which" has different forms for
genders and numbers, in which it agrees with the
following noun.
0 aborrecimenio e uma doen^a cujo remedio e o trahalho,
Tediousness is an illness the remedy of which is laboui*.
A parede, cujas fendas ndo se reparam, cae pouco a
pouco.
The wall, whose clefts are not repaired, is falling to
ruin by degrees.
5. Quanto has the meaning of tudo o que "all or
everything that, whatever," having also different forms
for gender and number.
Fig quanto pude,
1 did everything (all, whatever) I could.
Soff'reu quantos males ha no mundo.
He suffered all the misfortunes in the world.
Interrogative and lielative Pronouns.
179
6. 0 quo is "(that) which," "what," if not inter-
rogative or exclamatory.
0 que ndo tern remedio, remedlado estd.
What can't be cured must be endured.
Elle tinha sahido o que eu ndo sdbia.
He had gone away, which I did not know.
7. In English you may separate the preposition
from the relative pronoun, putting it at the end of the
clause; also the relative pronoun may be omitted. In
Portuguese the preposition always precedes the pronoun,
which cannot be omitted.
Tudo em que faldmos all (that) we spoke of.
A carta com que F^ Ex'^- me honrou.
The letter (that) you honoured me with.
Bemark. — Relative clauses must not be confounded with
indirect interrogations. For instance:
Chegaram emfim das coldnias os generos os quaes pedira
ha muito.
There arrived at last from the colonies the goods I had
long since asked for. (Relative clause.)
Ndo sei dieer quaes (sdo) os generos que chegaram.
1 can't say which goods arrived. (Indirect interro-
gation. The direct interrogation would be: Quaes
sdo OS generos que ... or elliptically: quaes os generos
que ... or quaes (or que) generos chegaram ?
Pulavras.
0 mundo
f'munduj
a praga ['prarjuj
ser de
sandeu
fsvn'deuj,
fem. sandia
[svn'divj
Spico ['epikuj
porfiar
[purf}'ar]
0 feito ['fv}tu]
a porgao
[pur'bvuj
de ordindrio
08 Lusiadas
[u$lu'ziTsffvf]
numerar
the world
the plague
to belong to
fool, foolish
epic
to persist, per-
severe
the heroic
deed, exploit
the portion
ordinarily
the Lusiad
to mark with
cyphers
a regua nume-
rada
tra(;ar
pretender
[prdten'dcr]
0 oleado
folt'a&uj
a pasta f'psjtv]
sei /sBtj
0 mode fmoduj
temo [temuj
tenro f'terruj
sir capaz
[kv'paf]
apprehender
fttprjeii'derj
the measure,
rule
to draw
to pretend
the oilcloth
the portfolio
I know
I saw or have
seen
the manner,
mode
tender, affectio-
nate
tender
to be able
to apprehend,
seize
180
Le88on 26.
pezar ['pd'znr]
posso [phsyj
fito, part. perf.
of fitar
o ai [d}J
o fluido f'flui(%ij
0 esplendor
[ifplen dor]
a ingratidao
[igrp.ti' disu]
a estrella fixa
flf'treh 'fiksvj
miserdvel j
[mizd'ravti] I
misero j
['mizd^'uj )
elle qwr
a vitrina
[vd'trinv]
misturado(s)
[mtftu-
'ra.d'u(s)]
sorrow
I can
to fix, to stare
at
the sigh
the fluid
the splendour
the ingratitude
the fixed star
miserable
he is willing to
show-window
confu^dly,
pell-mell
quotidiano
fkCw)oti(7f-
enuj
requintado
frrdJcm'ta&uJ
a bussola
f'busulvj
0 norte [norto]
accusar
a procedencia
fprusj-
ffensyej
a petala
I'pctvhJ
verificar
[verdfikarjy
justificar
fsuftafi'kar/
desembocar
[dezimbii 'kiir]
daily
refined
the compass
the line, rule,
guide
to accuse
the origin
the petal
to verify, to
prove
to justify
to discharge
itself.
71. Ex§rcicio.
Quern criou o mundo? Foi Deus quern o criou. Quaes
foram as dez pragas do Egypto? Nao me sabe dizer, quaes
ellas sejam ? Em que logar da terra ha perfeita felicidade? Nao
conheQO logar algum em que a haja. Quern p(5de ser todo seu,
em ser d'outrem 6 sandeu (prov.). Mais faz quern quer do que
quern pode (prov.). Quem porfia mat a capa (prov.). Camoes,
cujo poema ^pico «0s Lusiadas» e um dos maiores monu-
mentos literarios de todos os tempos, cantou n'elle os feitos
dos Portugueses no oriente. Uma bahia 6 uma por^ao de mar
que entra pela terra e cuja entrada e de ordinario estreita.
As r^guas numeradas de que nos servimos, permittem dar as
iinhas que se tra^am com ellas, o tamanho exacto que se
pretende dar-lhes. A pasta sobre a qual escrevemos e onde
mettemos papeis, 6 geralmente feita de papelao. coberto de
oleado. Quanto cnstou a tua? Nao me lembra (or: nao me
lembro) ja quanto paguei, nem a quem (or: de quem) a com-
prei; ainda esta tal qual a recebi.
Eu,olhos, sei d'uns
Que, desdequeosvi,
Nfto vi mais ne-
nhuns . . .
72. Leitura.
iV'ww album.
Ve tu por ahi
Se os achas; senao,
Descubro-os em ti.
Que lindos quesao!
Que mododeolbar!
Que terna expres-
sao!
Interrogative and Relative Pronouns. 181
Ja tenho pezar Saspiros e ais Quedoceesplendor!
De OS ver, porque Foi o que tirei Tao doce, que eu
emfim ... De v6r ollios taes. Nao posso suppor
Que posso esperar? g^ ^endo-os, se ere ^ • . . . ,
ver fit^s em mim Na gra^a, na cor Q»^eex,staoutroc6u
Taes olhos, jamais ; Nofluido, oun5o sei ^^^^^ ^® ^^^^'^
Decerto, e assim,
E esta vida um mar; e n'este mar
Qaal e o astro que nos alumia?
Que norte, estrella on biissola nos guia?
Um olhar de mulher! um terno olhar (idem).
73. Thema.
Which of the boys is the one whom you like best?
What black ingratitude! What sort of wine grows in the
region of the Douro? Stars which have their own light are
called fixed stars. There is nothing so miserable as a man
who is willing to do everything and not able to anything (nada
pode). That is indeed (bem) the most beautiful existing.
Sometimes there are goods behind the show-windows of the
shops which show the most refined taste, pell-mell with that
which we need for our daily life. What did you think of
when doing this task ? What were you occupied with, and
what did you speak of? Look at those flowers, how beautiful
they are! What perfume and what tender petals! What is
he accused of? The crime he is accused of is a theft. The
things whose origin he was not able to prove were apprehended
(or seized), which is quite (muiio) justified.
ConversaqSo.
Quern e Camoes e qual (^) o poSma que escreveu?
Que 6 essa po^ma? or: Que sac os Lusiadas?
De quem canton elle os feitos?
Que (6 que) se entende por uma bahia?
Quaes saO os principaes rios de Portugal?
Em qual dos oceanos desembocam?
A quantos estamos do mez or que dia do m^z temos?
{Or: Em que dia do mez ou da semana estamos?)
Como se chama aquelle rapaz cuja mae esta doente?
Nao tem essa senhora quatro filhos, dos quaes o amigo
de V^ Ex*- e o mais novo? *
Que 6 que tornou tao triste aquella rapariga que de
ordinario esta tao alegre?
182 Lesson 27.
Twenty-seventli Lesson. Li§ao vigesima
setima.
Indefinite Pronouns. Pronomes indefinidos.
§ 181. The indefinite pronouns are either joined
to a noun (pronomes adjectivos), or they are of substantive
nature, being employed absolutely and only in the
singular number (pronomes substantivos). N.B.—The
noun may be not expressed.
I. Adjective Pronouns.
uni^ wna; uns, umas a(n), one: some
algum, alguma; alguns, olgumaH some, any; such
nenhurriy nenhiitna; nenhuns, nenhumas no, none
outrOy -a, -OS, -as another, some more
tal, toes such a (one), such
certOy -a, -os, -as (a) certain
cada (m. and f.) each
todo, -a, -OS, -as (followed by the definite article) the
whole; all
qualguer, pi.: qimesque>' any, whosoever, whatsoever
um e outro the one and the other, either
amhos, ambas both
utn ou outro one or the other
nem titn, nem outro neither one nor the other, neither
miiito, -a many a; pi. muitos, nmitaa manv
diversos \ aiff^^ent, various.
vartos j
II. Substantive Pronouns.
Alguem somebody, anybody algo something
ninguem nobody, none alguma coisa something
outrem somebody else tudo everything, all
nada nothing cada wn, cada uma, cada qual
quemquer whosoever everybody, anybody, each.
Note. — The boundary-line between the indefinite and the
demonstrative pronouns is sometimes quite vague, so that the
grammarians count some of them now to the former, now
the latter. We also have already classed some (as outro, tal)
among the demonstrative, giving here a repetition of them.
Some, as muito, tanto, are often classed among the indefinite
numbers.
§ 182. Explanatory Rules.
1. Xenhum, ninguem and nuda^ pronouns whicli
include a negation, are employed, as in English,
Indefinite Pronouns. 188
without the negative adverb "not," when preceding the
verb: nenhum d'elles veio none of them has come; nin-
gueni a viu nobody has seen her; ninguem foi visto
nobody was seen; nada aconteceu nothing has happened.
Nada as an exclamation is "Not at all!" "God
forbid!"
If however these pronouns follow the verb, this is
preceded by «w<Xo>; ndo veio nenhum Welles; ndo a viti
ninguem; ndo aconteceu nada,
Nenhum may precede the noun or follow it: ne-
nhuma regra ... or regra nenhuma . . .
2. Algum is also employed in a negative sense and
then follows the noun: em tempo algum at no time(s).
o. Cada is never employed absolutely: when an ad-
jective, it precedes the noun; when a substantive, it is
followed by the indefinite article or by qual. *A hydra
repuhlicana tern cada uma das suas sete cabegas assente
em cada uma das sete coUinas da cidade de Lishoa.*
4. Amhos is always followed by the definite article
or a pronoun in the plural: ambos os (or estes^ aquelles,
seus) rapazes; amhos elles,
5. Outro in the meaning of "another" is employed
without an article:
Este capo ndo estd limpOj di-me outro,
6. Qualquer may precede or follow the noun. In
the latter case the noun is employed with the indefinite
article— e.g. :
Qualquer dia Id irei. Dei-lhe uma coisa qualquer.
7. Certo is generally employed without an article; it
may, however, also be accompanied by one: Falou com-
certa energia. Tern um certo modo de fcdar.
8. Muito in its meaning "many a" has no plural:
Ha muita hora que se perde na ociosidade.
There is many an hour lost in idleness.
9. Algo is taken from the Spanish. It is better
to' employ alguma coisa instead. If followed by some
complement, this is joined to either of them by de:
alguma coisa or algo de hello.
184
Lesson 27.
"N.B.—Algo can be also an adverb, preceding thus
adjectives or adverbs:
Uma tarefa algo espinhosa a somewhat delicate task.
Trahalhou algo difficultosamenfe.
He worked with some difficulty.
10. Quemquer and qualquer, if accompanied by que
and expressing an uncertainty, are followed by the verb
in the conjunctive mood:
Quemquer que seja; quaesquer perigos que possa haver.
Otherwise they are followed by the indicative:
Qualquer (pessoa) p6de faze-lo. Quemquer se arremessava
d agua.
Palayras.
0 argueiro
the splint,
a comadre
the godmother
fvr'gvfruj
straw
[ku'ma&r?]
0 ocio ['ofiiuj
0 compadre
the godfather
a ociosidade
[ostuzi-
the idleness
[ko padre]
mirar [mirar]
to look at
'fra&9]
0 rasto [rraftu]
the track,
a communicagao
the communi-
trace
[kumunikv-
cation
Ignacto[ig'nvs}u
7Ignace
'avu]
entender
to be of opinion
benevolo
benevolent
apanhar
to pick up
[hd'nevulu]
[vpv'par]
recompensar
to recompense
travar-se
to come to
[rrdkompe-
[trv'varsd]
blows
sarj
a contenda
the quarrel
punir [pu'nirj
to punish
[kontendvj
determinar
to determine
a briga [brigej
the fight
fdatprminarj
assanhado
hot
dispensar
to dispense
[vse'ya&u]
[difpesar]
collocar-se
to put oneself
hemfazejo
beneficent
['kulu'karsd]
fbvtfv'zvguj
d'este modo
thus, in the
0 merito
the merit
following
['merituj
manner
queixar
to complain
0 miolo [mi'olu] the kernel; the
fksi'farj
brain
0 etitendimento
the intelligence
a casca
the shell
[entendi-
^
[kafkB]
'mentuj
guardar
to keep
fingir-se
to feign
[gmr'dar]
ff-t'sirsaj
a sentenqa
the sentence
0 hicho fubifuj
the animal,
[sen'tese]
worm
0 resultado
the result
a malicia
the malicious-
[rrdzul'ta9u]
[nw'lisyv]
ness
a demanda
the plea
a fera ['fens]
the wild beast
[dd'mvnds]
Indefinite Pronouns. 185
0 paldcio do \
aTJZ't the "town-hal.
o arrabalde tlie suburb
[vrrvtaMd]
a unificagao the unification.
municipal ' i [un9fiku 'snuj
74. Exercicio.
Ninguem v§ o argueiro no seu olho. Toda a energia se
perde na ociosidade. Alguns insectos vivem apenas um dia.
Cada um deve fazer conhecer aos outros tudo o que (or tudo
quanto) julga litil ; esta communica^ao ben^vola produzira cedo
ou tarde algans fructoa. Todo o honaem sera recompensado
ou punido segundo os sens actos. Ninguem pode ser dispensado
de ser juste e bemfazejo. Certos ventos reinam em certos
mares em esta96es determinadas. Todos os homens hao-de
morrer. Nenhuma criatura humana pode voar. Ninguem e
bom juiz em causa propria. A vontade de brilhar nao ajunta
realmente nada ao merito da pess6a. Cada um queixa-se da
sua memoria, ninguem se queixa do seu entendimento. Mais
vale pouco que nada. Nada duvida quern nada sabe. Nin-
guem se metta onde o nao ehamam. Cada qual com seu
egual.
75. Leitnra.
0 lido e a raposa.
Era uma vez um liao muito velho, e que de velho que
era ja nao ia a ca^a. Lembrou-lhe entao fingir-se doente, e
qualquer bicho que o ia visitar comia-o logo, e foi assim
comendo muito animal. Mas um dia uma raposa conheceu-lhe
a malicia, e em vez de entrar, disse-lhe da porta: 0' senhor
liao, esta melhorzinho?
— Nao, respondeu a fera, — Cada vez peor! Entre e
descanse um bocadinho, 6 comadre ♦ . . Mas diz-lhe a raposa
a mirar o chao:
— Nada, compadre! n'essa nao caio eu. Aqui ha o rasto
de muitos que entraram, mas nao vejo o rasto dos que sairam
(o»'; de nenhuns que tenham saido)!
(Trindade Coelho: 0 Segundo Livro de Leitura).
76. Tliema.
The Nut.
One day two boys found a nut. "This nut is mine,"
called out Ignaee, *'for I was the first who saw it. "Not at
all!" replied Bernard, "I am of opinion that it is mine, be-
cause [it] was I who picked it up." And both came to blows
in a hot fighi. "I shall (tr. : jfew vou) finish your quarrel,"
said another and bigger boy who passed that way. He put
186 Lesson 28.
himself in the middle of the two boys, opened the nut, and
spoke thus: "One half of the shell belongs to him who first saw
the nut; the other to him who picked it up; and the kernel
I keep for myself for my sentence." ^'That," he added
laughingly (a rir), "is the ordinary result of most pleas."
Conyersai^ao.
Que cidade 6 esta em que estamos?
Onde e situada?
Qual (6) 0 numero da sua popula9ao?
Quaes sSo as ruas mais importantes?
Quaes s5o os bairros mais bonitos?
Nomeiem alguns hoteis dos mais frequentados !
Quern sabe alguma coisa da histdria d'esta cidade?
Em que annos foi edific^do o palacio do municfpio?
Como se chamam os arrabaldes, as povoa^oes visinhas
etc.?
A que Estado pertence esta cidade?
Quaes sao as provincias d*elle?
Quantos Estados pertencem ao Reino da Gran-Bretanha?
Quem e o Rei actual?
Em que anno subiu ao thrdno?
Nomeiem quaesquer outros monarchas ingleses!
Twenty-eighth Lesson. Li^ao vig6sima
oitava.
The IrregTilar Verbs.
Os verhos irregulares,
§ 183. Note the following rules:
1. All compound and derived verbs follow the
original verb, if not indicated as an exception— e.g.;
demo(n)strar like mostrar; surprender like prender; re-
partir like paHir, etc.
2. All tenses not indicated are regular.. All irregu-
lar forms are given in italics.
The first coigugation (verhs in ar) has only two,
irregular verbs, of which one, estar^ has already beefll
dealt with among the auxiliary verbs. The second i8:i
The Irregular Verbs. 187
§ 184. nar
to give.
Indicative.
Conjunctivo.
Presente.
dou I give
de that I give
dds
des
dd
de
damos ^
demon
does
dels
dao.
deem.
Imperfeito.
dava I gave
desse that I gave.
Preterito perfeito.
4ei I gave, I have given
deste
deu
dh)i08
dSstes
dSram.
Mais-qiie-perfeito simples.
dera I had given.
Futuro.
darei I shall give
(se eu) der if I shall give, if
dardfi
deres [I am to give
dard
der
darevnoA
dermos
dareis
derdes
dardo.
dh-em.
All the rest is regular.
The irregular forms dhsc, de^-a, der are regularly
formed from deste (2°'^ pers. sg. pret.) by changing the
ending -ste into -sse, -ra, -r.
§ 185. Idioms with dar,
Dar um abraro a to embrace
dar entrada a to let in: to admit
dar fe a to believe or to have faith in
dar horas to strike (the clock)
dar occasido to offer an opportunity
dd-se a occasido de there is an opportunity for
dar parte to communicate; to impart
dar um passeto to go for a walk, to walk
dar um sdlto to jump
dar OS hons dias to bid good day
188 Lesson 28.
dar as boas festas to send or express the compliments of
the season
dar OS pesames to condole
dar OS parabens a to congratulate
dar a luz to publish (book); to bear, to bring forth
dar a to lead to, to end in
dar de espdras to spur
dar em alguem to strike one
dar em (doido) to become (mad)
dar no alvo to hit the mark ,
dar nos olhos or na vista to be evident or striking
dar pelo nome de to answer to the name of
estajanella da para a rua, o jar dim this window looks
or opens into the street, etc.
dar-se (a) to dedicate oneself; to thrive; to occur, to
happen
dar-se (bem) com to agree with
pouco se me da I care but little
quem me dera (saber)! how fain would I (know)!
§ 186. Concerning the verbs in -car, -par, -gar,
-jar see § 143.
§ 187. The verbs in -ear change e into ei in all those
forms where the radical is' accentuated — e.g.: nomear to
name, recear to fear, lisongear to flatter, gorgcar to
chirp, warble:
nomeio, nomeias, nomeia, nomeamos^ nomeaes, no-
meiam; nomeie, nomeies, nomeie, nomeemos, nomeeis^ no-
meiem (cf. § 139).
§ 188. Crear (or criar) to create, to bring up,
changes in the same forms the c in i: crio, crias, cria,
ereamos, creaes, criam; crie, cries, crie, creemos, creeis,
criem (see § 140).
N.B. — The compound verbs of crear (with the ex-
ception of recrear (better recriar) to create once more,
to bring up again) change the e into ei:
procrear to procreate, to beget : procrcio (yet also
procrio), procrda.
But: a natureza recria ; and ella recreia she diverts,
delights.
§ 189. The verbs in -iar keep their ?, in the
pronunciation as well as in the orthography: coxnar to
copy : mplo.
The Irregular Verbs. 189
190, In some verbs in -iar the modification of
the i into ei is admissible and usual. Such verbs are:
diligenciar, agenciar, reniediar, negociar, odiar, premiar:
thus: diligenceio, agenceia, etc.
§ 191. Not so in the verbs adiar, afiar, alumiar,
annunciar, aviar, contrariar, confiar, copiar, par, miar,
piar, saciar, tosquiar, varlar, which form: adio, alumia.
annunciam, etc.
Second Conjugation. Yerbs in -er.
§ 192. Haver to have; to be, to exist (see L. 6).
Eehaver follows the same model, but is used only
in the forms that have -v-: rehavendo, rehavido, rehavia,
rehouve, rehaja^ rehouvesse.
§ 193. Fa^er to do, to make, to cause, to let.
Pres. Indicat. Fago, fazes, faz, fazimos, fazeiSj fazem-.
Fres. Conjunct. Faga, fagas, faca, facdmoSf fagaes, fagam.
Fret, imperf. ind. Fazia,fazias,fazia,faziamos,faziei$yfaziam.
Fret. perf. ind. Fiz, fizeste, fez, fismios, fizestes, fizeram.
Imperfeito Conj. Fizesse, etc.
Mais-que-perf. Ind. Fizera, etc.
Futtiro Ind. Farei, fards, fard, etc.
Futuro Conj. Fizer, fizeres, fizer, etc.
Condicional. Faria.
Imperativo. Faze (tu),fazei (vds),faga( V^),fagdmos(nds).
Farticipio. Feito.
Gerimdio. Fazendo.
§ 194. Compound verhs:
(a) contrafazer to counterfeit; to imitate; to disguise.
P. p. contrafeito, also adj., false, forced,
(b) desfa^er to undo, to destroy, to abolish, to
annul;
(c) perfumer to complete, to perfect, to constitute;
(d) refazer to do or make again;
(e) satisfazer to satisfy, to pay.
, Remark. — To let is rendered by fazer whenever you wish
to express an active interference: fazer saber to let know, to
send word to, to acquaint with. Faga entrar ! Let him come
in. It is translated by deixar whenever you mean to express
admission : deixo-o falar I let him speak. {Fago-o falar would
be: I (shall) cause him to speak.)
190 Lesson 28.
§ 195. Idioms with fazer^
Fazer caso de to esteem; to care for; to attend to
ndo fazer caso to despise
fazer annos to have one's birthday, to complete . . .
years of age (see § 97, 8)
faz color, faz frio, faz vento, calma it is hot, cold,
windy, calm
faz bom (man) tempo it is fine (bad) weather
faga o favor de, faz favor de (if you) please to
fazer (com) que to cause, to oblige
Fiz (com) que elle fizesse isso I made him do that
ter (muito) que fazer to be (very) busy, to have
(much) to do
fazer em peda^,os to break or cut to pieces
fazer (or mandar) fazer alg. c. to have something done
fazer construir (uma casa) to have (a house) built
fazer tengdo to intend
fazer a harba to shave, to get shaved
fazer as unhas to clean or cut one's nails
fazer leildo to hold an auction
fazer as contas tq^ count, to calculate
fazer conta or de conta to suppose
fazer contas com alg. to make up (to settle) accounts
with a person; to argue it out
fazer justiga a alg. to do justice to a person
fazer gala de alg. c. to boast of something
fazer compras to purchase, to go shopping
fazer as pazes to reconcile (oneself)
fazer urn discurso to make (or deliver) a speech
fazer forgoes) to use violence
fazer falta to be absent, to miss, to die
faz-me muita falta I miss it very badly
fazer de bobo to make a fool of oneself
fazer de capitdo to supply the captain
0 navio faz dgua the ship is leaky
fazer cara a to defy, to face
fazer fogo to shoot, to fire
fazer honra(s) to bestow honours, to do honour
fazer horas to wait for a certain hour, spend time
waiting
fazer o papel de to perform the figure of
estd a fazer it is being done
estd por fazer it is not yet done
dd que fazer it is hard work
1880 nSo faz ao caso that is of no concern
fazer-ae to become, to turn, to grow; to occur
The Irrep:ular Verbs. 191
f'azer-se vel/to to become old
fazerse vermelho to blush
fazer-se pdllido, tDnarello to grow pale, yellow
fazerse d vela to put to sea
fazer-se ao mar, ao alto to gain the open sea, to get
the offing
fazer-se d terra to steer towards (to head for) the land
fazer-se de novas to plead ignorance
muitas vezes se faz isso that occurs often.
§ 196. JDizer to say, tell, speak, talk, relate.
Pres. Ind. Digo, dizes, diz, dizemos, dizeiSf dizem.
Pres. Conj. Diga, digas, diga^ digWrnos, digaes, digam.
Pret. imperf. Ind. Dizia, dizias, dizia, diziamos, dizieis, diziam.
Pret. perf. Ind. Disse, disseste, disse, diss^mos, disseHes,
disseram.
Imperf, Conj. Dissesse, etc.
Mais-que-perf, Ind. DissSra, etc.
Future Ind. Direi, dirds, etc.
Future Conj. Disser, disseres, disser, etc.
Condicional. Diria, etc.
Imperativo. Dize (tu), dizel (vds), diga (V^), digdmos (nds).
Pa?'ticipio. Dito.
Gerundio. Dizendo.
§ 197. Compound verbs:
condizer (com) to agree, suit, match, contradizer to
contradict; desdizer to deny; desdizer-se to unsay; inter dizer
to interdict; maldizer to slander, curse; predizer to predict,
foretell.
§ 198. Foder can, may, to be able.
Pres. Ind. Posso, podes, pdde, podimos, podeis, podem..
Pres. Conj. Possa,possas,possa,possdmos,possaes,possam.
Pret. Imperf. Ind. Podia,podias,podia,podiamosjpod{eis,podiam.
Pret. perf . Ind. Pude, pudeste, pode, pudhnos, pudestes,
puderam.
Imperf. Conj. Pudesse, etc.
Mais-quePetf.lnd. Pudera, etc.
Future Ind. Pederei, poderds, etc.
Futuro Conj. Puder, puderes, puder, etc.
Condicional. Pederia, etc.
Participio. Podido. ,
Gerundio. Podendo.
Poder-se to be possible.
192
Lesson 28.
§ 199. Saber to know, to learn, to be able, can.
Pres. Ind. Sei, sabes, sabe, sabemos, sabeis, sabem.
Pres. Conj. Saiba, saibas, saiba, saibdmos, saibaes, saibam.
Fret, imperf. Ind. Sabia, sabias^ sabia, sabiamos, sabieis, sdbiam.
Fret. perf. Ind. Soube, soubeste, soube^ soubemos, sotihestes^
souberam.
Imperf. Conj. Sonbesse, etc.
Mais-que-perf.lnd. Soubera, etc.
Futuro Ind. Saberei, sabei'ds, etc.
Futuro Conj. Souber, souberes, etc.
Condicional. Saberia, etc.
Imperativo. Sabe, saiba, sabei.
Participio. SaUfdo.
Gerundio. Sabendo.
Remark. — Can, to be able must be rendered by podei-
whenever it means a physical power or disposition; it must
be rendered by saber if signifying an intellectual capacity—
e.g., Meu irmao sabe ler, mas hoje nao pdde porque estd rouco
my brother can read, but to-day he is not able to do so,
because he is hoarse.
§ 200. Caber to be contained in, to fall to, to
belong to, to come or happen opportunely, forms like
saber, but for the 1^^ pers. pr. ind.
Pres. Ind. CaibOj cabes, cabe, cabemos, cabeis, cabem.
Palavras.
0 mel [tneij
the honey
a casinha do
the honey-cell
a ahelha
the bee
favo
[v'tvfiv]
0 alvdolo
the cell, alveole
a cSllula
the cell
[al'vevlu]
['seluhj
0 cabrito
the kid
0 tiimulo
the tomb
[kv'britu]
f'tumuluj
tornar
to give back
0 cortigo
pegar [pd'gar]
to seize
[kur'tisu]
a colmeia
the bee-hive
1
em
entrar a fazer
to begin doing
[Tcol'mviv]
alg. c.
something
0 sobreiro
the cork-oak
a flauta ['fiaiUvJ the flute
[su'brviru]
largar a fugir
to put oneself
chupar
to flight
[fu'par]
to suck
0 magarefe
the blockhead
sugar [su Qnr]
[mvgv 'refd]
adocicar
to sweeten
0 flautista
the flautist
[vffusikar],
[flau'tiftv]
adoQar
a palavra
the word of
fv&usarj
(d'honra)
honour
depositar
to deposit
outre dia
the other day
The Irregolar Verbs.
193
0 saxjateiro
the shoemaker
a vacancia
[vv "kvs}is]
a vagatura 1
0 recibo
[rrd 'situ]
the receipt
the vacancy
inteiramente
entirely
[twgv'turis] 1
urn pagamento
an instalment
seguir [sd'gir]
to continue
a conta
(the way)
o emprego
the employ-
por signal
by way of
[ini'preguj
ment
[si'naij
example
vago fvaguj
free, vacant
0 monolitho
the monolith
conferir
to confer
[monu'lituj
[hofd'rir]
lavrar
to work, to
fazer todas as
to take all
chisel
diligencias
pains
a columna
the column
fd9li'ses}vfj
[Tco'lunv]
exercer
to exercise
a licenQa
the license, per-
[}zdr 'serj
fli'sesv]
mission
fazer-se illusoes
to illude oneself
especial
especial, par-
[ilu'zdif]
[}fp98i'ai]
ticular
desanimar(-se).
to despair, to
a informagao
the information
desalentar(-se) despond
nao ha de que!
don't mention!
torcer ftur'serj
to twist
passe muitobem.
' good- bye 1
77. Ex
ercicio.
0 mel e fabricado (or feito) pelas abelhas. Estas fazem
o mel dentro dos corti90s on colmeias. Os corti^os sac feitos
da casca do sobreiro. Para fazerem o mel, as abelhas chupam
de certas fldres o succo adocicado d'estas, o qual succo se
chama nectar. Com o nectar sugado, as abelhas fazem o mel
que levam para os corti^os, depositando-o nas c^Uulas ou
casinhas dos favos, chamadas tambem alveolos. — Dize neste
mundo o que tens para dizer: o tumulo 6 mudo. Dou-me
muito bem com os ares d'esta regiao, melhor do que me dei
na Suissa. Ali se dava ds vezes que nao podia aturar os
ventos asperos que me faziam mal. Mas nao sabia que fazer,
ate que me disseram da Riviera portugu6sa e que soube que
at6 no inverno os ares aqui sao benefices.
78. Leitura.
0 cabrito e o Idbo.
Era uma vez um cabrito que se tinlia perdido num
monte. Nao sei aonde, salta-lhe um lobo para o devorar, e
elle volta-se para o lobo e diz-lhe assim:
— Senhor lobo! ja sei que me vae (see ir, § 214) comer!
Mas se faz favor, eu gostava muito de uma morte alegrel
Diz-lhe 0 lobo: — Qual?
Torna o cabrito: — Gostava muito de morrer a dan^ar!
0 lobo por Ihe fazer a vontade, pega numa flauta e poe-
se (see por^ § 212) a tocar, e o cabrito entra logo a bai-
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 13
194 Lesson 28.
lar ; — mas iins cSes que andavam perto, ouviram a flauta e
vieram (see vir^ § 218) a correr, e o lobo largou logo a fiigir
•com medo dos caes. .
— Bem feito! dizia elle entao. — Nao passo de magarefe,
para que me metti eu a ser flautista.
(Trindade Coelho: OP Livro de Leitura).
79. Thema.
I give you my word of honour that I gave those 25
pounds which my father had given me the other day, to my
tailor, in order to pay his bill. — Did you (tr. thou) also pay
the shoemaker, and did he give you a receipt? — I could not
yet entirely pay the shoemaker; I made him an instalment
and told him that I should give him the rest as soon as I
should be nominated to the vacant appointment that is to be
conferred. — How can you know whether you will be nominated
for it? — I don't know, but I flatter myself, that it will be
given to me, as I take all pains, and because there is perhaps
nobody else who is able to do the service as well. — And I
tell you what I have always told you: I fear that somebody
else will be appointed, as you, however well knowing the (tr. do)
service, cannot exercise it on account of your health. Don't
give yourself up to illusions, but also don't despair if (by chance)
you know that another has been selected for the vacancy.
OonversaQao.
A. Sabe-me o senhor dizer, por onde eu posso (or puder)
chegar ao Paldcio do Municlpio?
P. Sei, sim, senhor. Faqtu favor de se dirigir por esta
rua, que 6 a Rua do Ouro, abaixo at6 ao Terreiro
do Pa90 que da para o Tejo. Depois pode seguir a
direita pela Rua do Arsenal at6 ao Largo do Pelou-
linho, onde 6 a Camara Municipal.
A. Ora diga-me, porque se nomeia aquelle largo «do
Pelourinho».
B. Deu-lhe eate nome um monumento, por signal muito
antigo, que estd no meio do largo e defronte do
Municipio, e que 6 formado por um monolitho lavrado
(or aberto) em trfis columnas torcidas uma em volta
da (round the) ontra.
A. P6de-se entrar no Palacio?
B. Pode. At6 as 4 horas esta aberto. Depois e so com
licen^a especial.
A. Muito obrigado pelas ' InformaQoes que me deu. Boa
tarde !
B. Nao ha de qu6. Passe muito bem!
The Irregular Verbs. 195
Twenty-ninth Lesson, Li^ao vigesima
nona.
The Irregular Verbs. (Continued.)
Second Conjugation. Terbs in -er.
§ 201. Querer to be williDg, to wish, to intend,
to feel disposed, to like.
Pres. Ind. Quero, qiieres, quenfquer^moSy quereis, querent.
Pres, Conj. Qiieira, queiras, queira, queirdmos, queiraes,
queiram.
Prei. imperf. Ind. Queria, querias, qiieria^ queriamos, querieis,
queriam.
Pret. perf. Ind. Quiz, quizeste, quiz^ quizeinos, quizesteSj
quizSram.
Imperf. Conj. Quizesse, etc.
Mais-que-perf. Ind . Quizera, etc.
Futuro Ind. Quererei, quererds. etc.
Futuro Conj. Quizer, quizeres, etc.
Condicional. Qiiereria, etc.
Imperativo. Queira, queiram (only used in the 3^^ pers.
followed by an infinitive — e.g.: queira,
dizer-me in the meaning "kindly tell me".
Participio. Querido. (As an adjective it means: be-
loved, dear).
Gerundio. Querendo.
§ 202. Jtequerer to solicit is regular but for the
1^* pers. pr. ind. and derived; it forms:
Pres. Ind. Requeiro, requeres, requere.
Pret . perf. Requeri, requereste, requereu, requeremos , etc.
§ 203 Trazer to bring, to carry, to wear, to
bear.
Pres. Ind. Trago, trazes, traz, trazSmos, trazeis, trazem.
Pres. Conj. Traga, tragas, traga, tragdmos, tragaes,
tragam.
Pret. imperf. Ind. Trazia, trazias, irazia, traziamos, trazteis,
traziam.
Prei. perf. Ind. Trouxe f'trosoj, trouxeste, trouxe, trouxhnos,
trouxestes, trouxeram.
Imperf. Conj. Trouxesse, etc.
Mais-que-perf . Ind. TrouxSra, etc.
Futuro Ind. Trarei, trards, etc.
Futuro Conj. Trouxer, trouxeres, trouxei', etc.
IS*
196 Lesson 29.
Condidonal. Traria, etc.
Imperativo. Traze (tu), traga (V^), trazei (v6s).
Participio. Trazido.
Gerundio. Trazendo.
§ 204. VaZer to be worth, to be of value, to
help, to assist.
Pees. Ind. Valho, vales, vale or val, valemos, valeis,
valem.
Pres. Conj. Valha, valhas, valha, valhdmos, valhaes,
valham.
Imperativo. Used only in the di^^ pers. — e.g., Valha-me
Deusf God help mel Valha a verdade
to tell the truth!
All the rest is regular.
§ 205. I^erder to lose.
Pres. Ind. \ {■ Perco,J perdes, perde, perdemos, perdeis,
Pres. Conj. Perca, percas, perca, percdmos, percaeSy
percam.
The rest is regular.
To this group of irregular verbs belong also ser,
ter and haver, already dealt with among the auxihar}'
verbs.
§ 206. LerjQ read.
Pres. Ind. \ (LeJQ^ Us, le, Umos, ledes, leem.
Pres. Conj. 4^'«^ leias, leia, le(i)dmos, le(i)aes, leiam.
Imperf. Ind. Lia, Uas, lia, llamos, lieis, Ham.
Pret. perf. Ind. Li, leste, leu, lemos, lestes, leram.
Imp&rf. Conj. Lesse, lesses, Usse, lessemos, Usseis, ISssem,
Mais-que-perf. Ind. LSra, leras, lera, etc.
Imperativt. Le (tu), leia, le(i)dmos, lede (v6s).
Participio. Lido.
Gerundio. Lendo.
§ 207. CrSr to believe, to think, to trust, and
descrer to disbelieve, are conjugated like ler. Modem
writers use the forms creiamos, creiaes instead of the
more correct creamos, creaes (cf. ler).
§ 208. VSr to see, behold, consider, view.
Pres. Ind. Vejo, vSs, vS, vSmos, vedes, viem.
Pres. Conj. Veja, vejas, veja, vejdmos, vejaes, vejam.
Imperf. Ind. Via, vias, via, viamos, vieis, viam.
Pret. perf. Ind. Vi, viste, viu, vimos, vistes, viram.
The Irregular Verbs. 197
Imperf. Conj. Visse, visses, visse, etc.
Mais-que-perf. Ind. Vira, viras, vtra, etc.
Futuro Ind. Verei, verds, verd, etc.
Futuro Conj. Vir, vires, vir, etc.
Condicional. Veria, verias, veria, etc.
Imperativo. Ve (tu), veja, vejdmos, vede (vos).
Participio. Visto.
Gerundio. Vendo.
§ 209. Componnd Verbs:
antever, prever to foresee
entrever to have a glimpse of, to discover
rever to review, to see again
p7'ovir to provide
desprovir to deprive, to strip (of).
N.B. — Prover and desprover are regular in the Pret.
perf. Ind. (provi, proveste, proveuj etc.) and in the forms
derived from it (provesse, prover a, prover), as also in
the Past Participle (provido).
§ 210. Jazer to lie, to be buried, a defective
verb of rare use, has become regular — i.e.: it has no
longer the forms jaqo, nor jouve (pret. perf.), nor an
open e [e] in the 2°^ pers. pret. pref. and derived forms:
Pres. Ind. Jazo, jazes, jaz, jazemos, jazeis, jazem.
Imperf. Ind. Jazia.
Pret. Perf. Jazi, jazeste, jazeu, etc.
Mais-que-perf. Jazira, etc.
Aqui jaz (jasem) here lies (he).
From the 1^^ Participle the verbal adjective jazente
or better jacente is formed.
«-Essas pobres geragoes que de ha muifo jazem sem vida.»
Terras jacentes ao poente grounds lying towards the west.
Heranga jacente heritage not yet distributed.
•
§ 211. Those verbs ending in -cer, -ger and -guer
undergo analogous modifications as those ending in
-car, -gar and gar, in order to conserve the original sound
of the c and g (cf. § 136 N.B. and § 143).
§ 212. P6r to put, place, lay, set, suppose.
This verb apparently not belonging to any of the
three conjugations, is to be considered as one of the
2^*^, having lost the e of the termination (po-er).
198
Lesion 29.
Pres. Ind. Ponho, pdes, pde, pomos, pondes, pdem.
Pres. Conj. • Ponha, ponhas, ponha, ponhdmos, ponhaes,
ponham.
Imperf. Ind. Punha, punhas, p^nha, punhamos, punheis^
punham.
Pret Ind. Puz^ puziste, pbzj puzemos, puzisteSy puzSram.
Imperf. Conj. Puzesse, etc.
Mais-que-perf. Fuzera, puzeras, puzSra, etc.
Futuro Ind. Porei, pords, pord^ poremos, poreis, porao,
Futuro Conj. Puzer, puzeres, puzer, puzermoSj puzerdeSj
puzerem:
Condicional. Porta, porias, poria, etc.
Imperativo. Pde (tu), ponha (Ve), ponhdmos (nds),
ponde (vos).
Participio. Posto.
Gerundio. Pondo.
Por-se mn pe to get up. •
§ 213. Compound verbs:
antepor to set before, prefer indispdr to indispose, to unfit
compdr to compose
interp&r to pat between, in-
eontrapd?' to <
appose, to com-
terpose
pare
oppdr to oppose
depdr to state
; to depose; to
propor to propose
deposit; to
lay down
propdr-se to intend, to design
dispor to dispose
suppdr to suppose
exp^ to expose, exhibit
transpdr to transport, etc.
impor to impose
Palarras.
0 varao
the man, male
a pedra tumular the tombstone
[w 'rvuj
0 punhado the handful
0 ingenho
the skiU, talent,
[pupaiTuJ
[I's^rru]
art, wit
a campa the burying-
0 brazao
the escutcheon
['kvmpvj place
[brv 'zsuj
sauddso melancholy
herdar [ir darj to inherit
[sau'&ozu]
0 padre
0 annundo the advertise-
['pa&r9]
the father
/» 'nus^uj, ment
falar em bom
to speak aloud
a prompto on cash (pay-
som
(supply paga- ment)
0 vote [votuj
the vote
mento)
a amizade
the friendship
a prestagdes on payment by
[vmi'zadd]
[vpriftv 'soifj instalments
a infdncia
the childhood
0 escriptdrio the office
[i'fVB%v]
[ffkri'tortuj
0 tumulo
the tomb
a pddaria the bakery
[tumtduj
[pad)! 'rivj
The Irregular Verbs.
199
tres2)assar
to alienate
quehrar
to break
[trtfpn'sarj
[kd'brar]
0 lucro f'lukruj
the gain, profit
tnlhar [tv'fiar]
to cut
tratar
to negotiate,
a alvenaria
the masonry
treat, deal
[aivdnv 'riv]
as alvigaras
the finder's
a argamassa
the mortar
[ai'visvrvf]
reward
[vrgy'masv]
moivho
the mill
0 betao [hd 'tvu] the beton, con-
[mu 'ipuj
0 eolar fku'larj
the collar
0 cimento
Crete
the cement
a medalha
the medal
[gi 'mentuj
{md&afils]
a ligagdo
the binding
0 capitalista
the capitalist
[ligv 'svuj
cement
0 sdcio f'sostuj
the sleeping
0 instrumento
instrument
commanditdric
partner
0 officio
the profession
a indilstria
the industry
[u'fisiu]
•
[in 'duftr'iv]
a colher
the trowel
0 prdprio
the same (ad-
fku'fierj
(supply: an-
vertiser)
a picadeira
the pickaxe
nunciador)
[pikv '&virv]
0 ahaixo assi-
the signatory
addgagar
to thin
gnado
[is&eigv 'sarj
[vsi'na&u]
picar
to hoe
a agenda
the agency
0 estuque
the stucco
[e'sesn]
[yf'tukal
0 penhor
the pawn,
0 camartello
the cutting-
[pt'ijor]
pledge
[kvmvr'tdu]
hammer
sufficiente
sufficient
deshastar
to rough-hew
[sufisfi'entd]
[disM'i^r]
a casa de
the pawnshop
calcar fkalkarj
to fix by beat-
2yenhores
ing
montar
to establish
0 prumo
the plummet
afreguezado
well accustom-
aprumar
to plumbline
[vfrggt'za&uj
0 local [lu'kaij
ed
0 nivel ['niveij
the level
the locality
nivelar
to level
0 esclarecimento the information
horizontal
horizontal
[tfklm'3si-
[orizon'taij
'mentuj
a cantaria
the masonry;
a construcQao
the construc-
[kvntv 'rivj
the cut- stone,
[ko/tru'siuj
tion
blocking
0 pedreiro
a enxada
the spade
[pd'&rvtru]
4". Via mflenn
[l'fa&^]
0 trolha
ulic XUcIbUXI
amassar
to wet, to stir
['trofiv] 1
0 coche [kofi]
the hod.
a trolha
the handle- or
['tronv]
mortar-board
80. Ex
ercicio.
Rebello da S.ilva disss que valia mais o varao que se fazia
grande e famoso pelo ingenho e pelos actos, do que o homem
que ja nascera entre brazoes herdados. Dizia o padre Antonio
200 Lesson 29.
Vieira que se descompunha a si mesmo, quern aos mais descom-
punha. Nao leias em meia voz, l6 alto e em bom somi Dou-lhe
OS parabens ; nao caibo em mim de contente pelas boas novas de
que me deu parte. Vejo que Ihe trouxe fortuna o conselho que
algum dia Ihe d^ra. Deus queira que Ihe valham sempre os meus
votoa de boa amizade e o muito que Ihe quero. Quern me d^ra
que pudesse ir v6-loI Prop6r-lhe-ia que fossemos (see § 214)
revfir os logares da nossa infancia e os tiimulos onde jazem
aquelles a quern mais quizemos quando vivos. Que satisfao^ao
d*abna se, lendo nas pedras tumulares aquelles nomes queridos,
depuzessemos um punhado de fidres na campa dos que nos
deram a vida. Mas ja perdi toda a confian^a, descreio em que
jamais OS reveja ou que torne a v6r esses saudosos sitios os
quaes — valha a verdade ! — valem para mim o mais bonito
jardim. •
81. Leitnra.
Annuncios,
1. Piano alemao, novo, magnificas vozes, vende-se barato,
a prompto ou a pre8ta96es, Na Rua da Palma 61, escripto-
rio, se diz.
2. Pddaria, trespasse-se uma em boas condi9oes e muito
barata. Da 100 000 reis de lucro por m6s. Trata-se com
0 abaixo assignado na Padaria Bijou a rua Escola Poly-
technica 247.
3. Alt^icaras dao-se a quern entregar na Cal^ada do Moinho
de Vento 32 um colar d'ouro com medalha que se perdeu
desde a dita rua ate ao Chiado.
4. Capitalista. Precisa^se de socio capitalista ou commandi-
tario para desenvolver uma industria. Capital garantido,
lucros certos lO^/o (por cento). Trata-se com o proprio.
Carta a agencia NN. Rua dos Retrozeiros.
5. Capitalista precisa-se que entre com o capital sufficiente
para mais desenvolvimento de uma casa de penhores, ja
montada e afreguezada n'um dos melhores locaes da capital.
Esclarecimentos, rua Capellistas No. 71.
82, Thema.
Building in Portugal.
Do you see that house in construction? The mason
makes the walls and all masonry with broken, uncut
stones or with bricks, joining the materials with clay, mortar,
beton, cement or another binding. Do you know of which
tools the mason makes use in his profession? I (shall)
tell you; they are these: the trowel, with which he places
the clay and mortar; the pickaxe, with which he thins the
The Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjngation. 201
sides of the bricks, cuts the .walls and demolishes the stucco ;
the cutting-hammer, with which he cuts the stone and fixes
the materials out of which he builds the walls; the plumb,
which helps (valer em) him to plumbline the walls; the level,
with which he levels the blockings; the handle-board where
he puts the chalk; the spade he stirs the chalk with; the
hod, which serves in transporting the chalk, etc.
Conversai^ao.
Que tempo faz, {or esta)? Por emquanto tern feito (or
estado) bom tempo, mas
creio que vae mudar.
Porque cr§ isso? Porque se levantou muito
vento, e receio que nos traga
chuva.
Valha-nos Deus ! Antes queria Pois nao v6 aquellas nuvens
que continuasse enxuto, por- que se juntam no horisonte?
que com a chuva perco a Vera que kmanha teremos
occasiao de dar passeios. chuva, a nao sfir que o vento
acalme.
Oravejaojornalquetrouxeram Se quizer fazer esse favor...
e que ja prediz mudan^a de como eu nao sei Ifir . . . Corn-
tempo. Quer que Ih'o leia? tudo ja prevejo o que diz.
Pois ja ficamos sabendo que, Pois seja o que Deus quizer!
se 0 tempo se puzer a mal, Visto a gente nao pudef mos
sera por muitos dias. fazer nada . . .
Thirtieth Lesson. Li^ao trigesima.
The Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjugation,
§ 214. Ir io go (as for the compound tenses of
this verb see § 118).
Pres. hid. Vou, vaes (vais), vae (vai), vamos (imos),
ideSy vdo.
Pres. Conj. Vd^ vds, vd, vamos, vades, vdo.
Pret. imperf. Ind. la, ias, ia^ iamos, ieis^ iam.
Pret. perf. Fui, foste, foi, fomos, fostes, fordo.
Imperf. Conj. Fosse, etc.
Mais-que-perf. For a, for as, fdra, formos, foreis, fdram.
Flit. Ind. Irei, irds, ird, iremos, ireis, irdo.
Ftit. Conj. For, fores, fdr, fdrmos, fardes, forem.
Conditional. Iria, etc.
Imperativo. Vae (tu), vd, vamos (nos), ide (vos).
202 Lesson 80.
PaHicipio. Mo. (In the adjective meaning "past" there
Gerundio. Indo. is also the fern, form "ida''
and the plural forms **idoSf
idasr)
§ 215. Ir followed by an infinitive expresses an
intention, that which the English expresses by "to be
going to" — e.g.: vou fazer o men thema I am going to do
my task; iamos dar urn passeio we were just about to
take a walk.
§ 216. Idioms with ir.
Ir a pS to go on foot
ir de (or em) carruagem to go in a carriage, to drive
ir a cavallo to go on horseback, to ride
ir a melhor to grow or become better
ir-ter com alguetn to call upon somebody
vae melhor he (she, 'it) is better, it is going better
Como vae? how do you do? how is it going on?
Que vae nisso? what does it matter?
por mal que vd if the worst come to the worst
Quanto vae d^aqui a . . .? How far is it from here to ... ?
Esta rua vae ter d ponte this street leads to the bridge
Vae em tres annos about three years ago
Vae-lhe hem it suits you well
Isso jd la vae that's a thing past and done.
§ 217. Iv'se to go away, be off, to set out.
disappear, die.
Vou-m£ I go away, I am going away.
Foi-se he is gone
Vd-se emborcC! get you gone! be off!
Vamo-nos! let us go away
{Vae-se fazendo tarde (escuro) it is growing late (dark).)
Remark I. — While ir expresses a mx)vement towards a
place, ir-se expresses one away from it. The former answers
to the question "where to?", the latter to "whence?"
Remark II. — In the last example se is not part of the
verb ir, but of fazer, being joined to the former only for
the sake of harmony.
§ 218. . Vir
Pres. Ind. Venho, vens, vem, m'mos, vindes, veetn.
Pres. Conj. Venha, venhas, venha, • venhdmos, venhaeSy
venham.
The Irregnlar Verbs of the Third Conjugation. 808
Imperf. Ind. Vinha, vinhas, vinha, vinhamos, vihheis,
vinham.
Fret. perf. Vim, vUste, veio, viimos, vihtes, vieram,
Imperf. Conj, Viesse, viesses, viesse, etc.
Mais-que-perf, Viira, vUras, etc.
Fut. Ind. Vtrei, virds, vird, viremos, vireis, virao.
Fut. Conj: Vier, vieres, vier, viet^fnos, vierdes, vierem.
Condicional. Viria, etc.
Imperativo. Vem (tu), venha, venhdmos, vinde (vds),
PaHicipio. Vindo.
Gertmdio. Vindo.
Remark. — The singular of the imperative terminates by
m: vem. The same ending has the 2°<* pers. sing. pres. ind.,
when followed by an objective pronoun (-o, -a, -os, -as) —
e.g., vem-lo tu dizer? do you come to tell it? (About lo
cf. § 164 (b).)
Idioms:— Vir ds boas to reconcile oneself. Vir-se edesejar-
se com ... to be in difficulties with . . .
§ 219. Compound Terbs:
advir to intervene, to arrive desavir to disunite
contravir to contravene, in- intervir to intervene
fringe provir to come from
convir to agfee, to be fit or sohrevir to supervene.
convenient
§ 220. Bir to laugh.
Pres. Ind. Rio, ris, ri, rimos, rides, riem.
Pres. Conj. Ria, ria^, ria, rldmos, ries, riam.
Compound verbs: sorrir to smile and rir-se (de)
to laugh (at).
§ 221. The verbs medir, pedir and ouvir to hear,
are regular but for the 1^* pers. pres. ind. and derived
forms.
Medir (cf. 152) to measure, appreciate.
Pres. Ind. Mego, medes, mede, medimos, medis, medetn,
Pres. Conj. Mega, megas, mega, megdmos, fnegaes^ megam.
Imperativo. Mede, mega, megdmos, medi.
J^edir to ask, to beg.
Pres. Ind. Pego, pedes, pede, pedimos, pedis, pedem.
Pres. Conj. Pega, pegas, pega, pegdmos, pegaes, pegam.
Imperativo. .Pede, pega, pegdmqs, pedi.
Compound verbs: despedir to dismiss and expedir
to dispatch.
204 Lesson 30.
Ouvir to hear.
Pres. Ind. Ougo (oigo), ouves, ouve, ouvimos, ouvis,
ouvem.
Pres. Conj. Ouga (oiga), ougds, ouga, ougamos, ougaes^
ougam.
N.B. — The u before g may be suppHed by i.
§ 222. normir to sleep (see § 154).
Pres. Ind. Durmo, dortnes, dorme, dormimos^ dormis^
dormem.
Pres. Conj. Durma, durmas, durma, durmdmos^ durmaes,
dunnam.
§ 223. Concerning the verbs in a(h)ir see § 158.
Cair (sometimes, but incorrectly: cahir) to fall.
Pres. Ind. Cdio, caes, cae^ caimos, cais, cdem.
Pres. CofiJ. Cdia, cdias, cdia, caidmos, caiaes, cdiam.
Sahir or sair to go out, to go forth.
Pres. Ind. Sdio, saes, sue, sahimos (saimos), sahis (sais),
sdem.
Pres. Conj. Sdia, sdias, sdia, saidmos, saiaes, saiam.
All the rest is regular.
§ 224. Concerning the verbs adherir, advertir, ferir,
mentir^ repetir, seguir, sentir, servir and compound ones
cf. §§ 152, 153, 156.
The following is a model conjugation of these
verbs:
Pres. Ind. Visto, vestes, veste, vestimos, vestis, vestem.
Pres. Conj. Vista, vistas, vista, vistdmos, vistaes, vistam.
Imp. Ind. Vestia, vestias, vestia, vestiamos, vestleis,
vestiam.
Pret. perf. ind. Vesti, vestiste, vestiu, vestimos, vestistes,
vestiram.
Imp. Conj. Vestisse, vestisses, vestisse, vestlssemos,
vestisseis, vestissem.
Mais-que-perf. Vestlra, vestiram, vestira, vestiramos, vestireis,
vestiram.
Fut. Ind. Vestirei, vestiras, vestird, etc.
Fut. Conj. Vestir, vestires, vestir, vestirmos, vestirdeSf
vestirem.
Condicional. Vestiria, vestirias, etc.
The Irregular Verbs of the Third CoDJugation. 206
Imperativo. Veste (tu), vista (V^), vistdmos, vesti (vds).
Participio. Vestido.
Gerundio. Vestindo.
Thus are conjugated:
Pres, Ind. ^^f'^^^J-
and Imper.
(a) Adherir to adhere, to stick to . adhiro adhira
(b) advertir to advise advirto advirta
(c) ferir to bless firo fir a
(d) mentir^ to lie, to deceive . . . minto minta
(e) repetir to repeat repito repita
(f) seguir^ to follow . . . . . . sigo siga
(g) sentir to feel sinto sinta
(h) sertnr to serve; to be of use; to
lay (the table) sirvo sirva
(i) vestir to dress visto vista
(j) despir' to undress dispo dispa
§ 225. The verb's aggredit*, denegrir, pro-
grediVf remir, transgredir^ prevenir change
equally the radical e into i, yet not only in the 1^^ pers.
pr. ind., but in all accented forms of this tense, as
also through the whole pres. subj. (cf. 152, 2, Remark).
Aggredir to assault.
I^'es. Ind. Aggrido, aggrides, aggride, aggredimos,
aggredis, aggridem.
Pres. Conj. Aggrida, aggridas, aggrida, aggriddmos,
aggridaes, aggridam.
^Preven/ir to advise, to warn, to prepare, to prevent.
Pres. Ind. Previno, prevines, previne, prevenimoSf preve-
nis, previnem.
Pres. Conj. Precina, previnas, previna, previndmos, pre-
vinaes, previnam.
§ 226, Those verbs of the 3"* conj. whose radical
vowel is u modify this u into open o [o] in the 2°^ and
3^ pers. sing, and in the 3"^ pers. pi. of the pres. ind.,
as also in the sing, imper. (cf. § 155) — e.g.:
^ Instead of mentir you will better employ faltar d verdade.
^ For the orthography seguir and sigo, cf. § 157.
^ This verb conserves in the first and second persons pi. pres.
oonj\ its radical e: dispa, dispas, dispa, despdmoSj despaes, dispam.
206
X^esson 80.
Fugir to flee, fly.
Pres. Ind. Fujo, foges, foge, fugimos, fugis, fogetn.
Pres. Gonj. .^uja, fujas, fuja, fujdmos, fujaes, fujam.
Imperativo. ^oge, fuja, fujdmos, fugi, fujam.
All the rest is regular.
N.B. — Concerning the g changing into \; see § 157.
§ 227. After this model are conjugated:
Acudir to run, to help, to aid engulir to swallow
hdir to touch, to stir
consumir to consume
cohrir (cubrir) to cover
descdbrir to un- or discover
cuspir to spit
destruir to destroy
sacudir to shake
subir to ascend, to mount
tussir to cough
sumir to hide
sumir-se to disappear
surgir to appear, to rise.
Remark, — Construir and reconstruir to build and re-
build are also often conjugated like this, yet they better keep
their u: construes, construe, constmem instead of constroes,
constroe, constroem.
§ 228. Affligir to aflict; affligir-se to care, to
be in sorrow, to grieve; corrigir to correct; fingir to feign;
dirigir to direct, change the g before a and o into j —
e.g., que elle corrija that he may correct (cf. § 157).
§ 229. Frigir to fry, modifies moreover the i
into e in the 2^^ and 3^^ pers. sing, and the S'^ pers. pi.
Pres. Ind.v • Frijo, freges, frege, frigimos, frigis, fregem.
Participio. frito besides frigido.
Bemark.—The verbs in uzir, as: conduzir, produzir,
induzir, reduzir, (re)luzir, etc., are regular, but they lose
the e of the S^^ pers. sing, of the pres. ind.— e.g., produz;
the imperative, however, conserves the e: produze!
Palavras.
Parar to stop, to stay
0 cavcUheiro the gentleman
[knvv 'fiviru]
0 cavalleiro the rider
fkvvv IviruJ
a estrada real the high-road
{jftra&vrn'ai]
o grito f'grituj the scream
d desfilada in full speed
[adiffi'U&v]
a presen^a de
espirito
andar doente,
triste etc.
0 desastr^
[dd'z&ftra]
a (primeira)
ligadura
flige '&urv]
sentir d falta de
the presence of
mind
to be ill, sad
the disaster
the temporary
dressing (of a
wound)
to miss
The Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjagation.
207
0 apparelho
the apparatus
0 tribunal
criminal court
[vpv'rvfiu]
criminal
OS sentidos
the senses,
a instrucgao
primary in-
conscience
primdria
struction
effectivamente
indeed
a direcgdo geral central school-
a complicagao
the complica-
de instrucgao
board
[kompliJce-
tion
0 documento
the document
svuj
[doku'mentu]
de passagem
by the bye
constar
to be said or
de dia a dia
from day to day
[konf'tar]
reported
0 medico
the assistant
dcerca [a 'serknj
with regard to
assistente
surgeon
de
fracturar
to break
a frequezia
the parish
[fratu'rarj
[fr9gd'ziv]
0 requerimento
the petition
collocar
to place
[rrdkri-
[kulu'kar]
'meniuj
referido
mentioned
0 ministerio da
the ministry of
0 levantamento
the raising
justiga
justice
a suspensdo
the suspension
depots d'dmanha the day after
fsufpe'svuj
to-morrow
0 ^despacho
the despatch
a urgencia
the urgency
[difpafu]
[ur^esfiv]
0 deputado
the deputy
a sentenga
the sentence
[d9puta&uj
[sentesv]
d'aqui em diante henceforth
oficial [ofist'aij
official
assim que
as well as, also
absolvitorio
absolving
contar com
reckon upon
[vbsoivi-
algu£m
someone
'toriu]
auxiliar
to help.
a nota fnotv]
the note, list
[ausilf'arj
83. £x<
srcicio.
Meu bom Amigo!
Ha muito que nada ouqo de ti. Nam eu sei ja onde
paras e como vaes. Disseste-me que virias v§r-me um dia
qualquer de' que havias de prevenir-me. Mas nao vieste, nam
me prevenista. Sinto muito que nao tenhas vindo na semana
passada, quando demos um passeio a Cintra, sitio de que de
certo ja oniviste falar. Fui eu com mens paes a irmaos e
fomos de carruagem e nao em caminho de ferro. Alguns
cavalheiros, indo a cavallo e em bycicleta, saguiam a nossa
carruagem pela estrada real. De repente ouva-s6 um grito —
olho para tras a vajo que um dos cavalleiros caido abaixo, jaz
no chao, emquanto o cavallo foge a desfilada. Oh, sa visses
aquillo ! Mas nao perco a minha natural presen^a da espirito,
e, querendo valer ao homem jacente, qua cria ferido, ponho-
me em pe e faQo parar a carruagem. Saio d'alla pracipitada-
mente e os outros acodem. Tu sabes que geralmente ando
prevenido, como que presentindo sempre algum dasastre. Trago
208 Lesson 30.
comigo, para fazer umas primeiras ligaduras, um apparelho,
que n'aquella occasiao tambem trazia comigo. E se o nSo
trouxesse (or: trago), ter-nos-ia (or: tinha-nos) feito muita
falta. Pois o homem perdera os sentidos. Proponho que se
puzesse na carruagem, onde effectivamente foi posto, dispondo-
se de maneira que nos outros viemos a p^, at^ que nos adveio
outra carrudgem de que fizemos uso. Consome-me ainda o
receio que sobrevenha alguma complica9ao no estado do ferido
que — diga-se de passagem — sente melhoras e vae a melhor
de dia a dia. Sirvo-lhe de medico assistente, visto-o e dispo-o,
pois fracturou um bra90. EUe agora dorme e 6 bom que durma,
para que se ponha bem de todo. Se nao sobrevier febre,
espero que elle se possa levantar depois d'^manha. Na
esperan9a de te v6r brevemente, pe^o me creias
sempre teu muito amigo
Jose.
84. Leitnra.
Bequerimentos,
Requeiro que pelo ministerio da justi^a me seja enviada com
urgencia copia da senten9a absolvitoria de 26 de julho de 1907,
do tribunal criminal do Porto, dada no processo em que res-
pondeu o professor official da escola de C. senhor Paulo Fer-
reira de Azevedo.
Requeiro que pela diree9ao geral de instruc9ao primaria
me sejam enviados com urgencia os seguintes documentos:
1. Nota de tudo quanto se souber e constar kcfirca do ex-
professor primdrio da freguezia de Paranhos, do Porto, sr. P. F.
de A., actualmente collocado na escola official de C. ; 2. Copia
do requerimento do referido professor d direc9ao geral de ins-
truc9ao primaria, pedindo o levantamento da suspensao que
Ihe foi imposta, com o despacho dado pela mesma direc9ao geral.
Lisboa, 3 de junho de 1908.
0 deputado
Affonso Costa.
85. Thema.
My dear friend!
I congratulate you that you so quickly have (conj.) run
to help that gentleman fallen from his horse, and that you
could provide his injuries with temporary dressing. I appreciate
all the interest and satisfaction with which you follow the pro-
gress in the recovery of the wounded man. I beg that you will
continue to let me know how he is going on and whether he is
growing better. Also that you will tell me whether I can help
you (cf. § 204) or be of any use to you (see § 224 h). You
well know that you may reckon upon me and that I am
Impersonal and Defective Verbs. 209
good for something. Communicate to me, whatever I may be
able to do for you or your patient. I repeat that I will
come (= ir) at once as soon as you write me "Come!"
I suppose that you are (conj.) without a soul to help
you (= a soul that [may] help you) and grieve about
it. Should it be convenient, advise me, and I will run to
(your) help.
Yours most heartily (= teu do cora^ao)
James (Jayme).
86. Exercise (oral).
Instead of a conversation the student is recommended
to transfer the address "<m" in 78 and 80 into the more
ceremonious form, remembering that it may be given either
by the mere verb {^^^ pars.) or by o SenJior, o Amigo, Y^ Ex<^,
etc. (see § 32).
Thirty-first Lesson. Li^ao trigesima
primeira.
Impersonal and Defective Verbs.
03 verbos unijpessoaes e os defectivos.
§ 230. Impersonal are > those verbs the activity of
which is not exercised by persons or even by any
distinct subject, and which are only used with the
3^*^ pers. sing, and the indefinite subject it. We di-
stinguish three groups:
1. Such verbs as are always and merely used in
the 3'"<* person, the essentially impersonal ones. To these
, belong those expressing natural phenomena. Some
of them are employed with the subject o tempo; ama-
nhecer, to dawn, is sometimes accompanied by the
pleonastical subject o dia; acontecer may have a noun
for its subject.
Consta it (he, she, etc.) is chomsca it drizzles
said to . . . graniza it hails
acontece it happens neva it snows
(o dia) amanhece it dawns gela it freezes
anoitece it grows night, dar- degela it thaws
kens relampeja it lightens
chove it rains venta it blows
troveja it thunders escurece it darkens
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 14
210
Lesson 31.
0 tempo estia it (the weather) resulta it results
settles pesa-me I am sorry ^
0 tempo aclara it (the weather) apraz-me I am pleased.-
clears up
2. Such verbs as may -also be employed with a
personal subject and in all persons: the accidentally
impersonal ones — e.g.:
parece it appears
entende-se it is understood
tarda muito, leva muito tempo
it tarries
nao admette duvida it is
doubtless
nao admira it is not astonish-
ing, I don't wonder
recommenda-se it is to be re-
commended
convem it is convenient
verificou-se it was verified.
3. Compositions of the 3^^ pers. of the verbs sery
estar, faser^ haver ^ ir, etc. with an adjective or substan-
tive—e.g.:
E or estd claro it is clear
e evidente it is evident
i (im)possiv€l it is (im)possible
e preciso it is necessary
i indispensavel it is indis-
pensable
e justo it is just
S verdade it is true, indeed
e provavel, certo it is probable,
sure
e lastima it is to be deplored
e pSna it is a pity
^ (uma) vergonha it is a shame
faz arranjo it is convenient,
fit or opportune (also em-
ployed personally)
estd (or faz) calar it is hot
estd (or faz) frio it is cold
estd (or faz) lu^r it is moon-
light
estd (or faz) sol it is sunshine
estd (or faz) nevoa it is foggy
ha duvida there is some doubt
nao ha duvida it is doubtless ;
it does not matter
nao ha novidade it is all right
ha gente there are some people
ha que fazer it is much to do
ha utn anno a year ago
ha muito (tempo) long ago
vae melhor it (he, she) is
growing better
vae em tres annas about three
years ago.
vae fazer um mes nearly a
month ago.
§ 231. Rule. — Impersonal verbs and locutions
which express uncertainty, necessity, feeling or wish,
are followed by the subjunctive in the dependent clause,
if introduced by que; otherwise by the infinitive.
Examples.
E indispensavel que va levar esta carta ao correio.
E lastima que nao tenha vindo mais cedo (or: e lastima
nao ter vindo . . .).
* See pesar § 137 (c).
^ See praeer § 234.
Impersonal and Defective Verbs. 211
E jiisto que o operario ven^a um ordenado correspondente
ao seu trabalho (or: e justo o operario veneer . .).
E (uma) vergonha que um rapaz tao intelligente nao
se applique mais {or: e vergonha um rapaz . . . nao
se applicar mais).
Pesa-me que Ihe tenha feito essa injusti^a (or : p6sa-me
ter Ihe feito . . .)•
Nao admira que nao se sinta bem depois d'uma noite
d'insomnia.
Tardava muito que chegassem noticias d'elle.
Nao admittia diivida que o r^u fosse culpado (or: de o
reu s6r culpado).
Foi preciso que se Ihe fizesse uma ligadura (or : foi pre-
ciso fazer-lhe . . .).
However,: E verdade que nao veio a tempo.
E claro or certo que fe'i o seu dever.
Parece que nao deseja ser visto, etc.
§ 232. Defective are such verbs as are lacking in
some forms. Their number is very Hmited. The following
are used only in those forms where the final consonant
of the radical is followed by i (i.e., in the Inf. pers.
and impers., in the P* and 2°*^ pers. pi. pr. ind., in the
pret. imp. and perf., the future and cond., the parti-
ciples):
Adir C^ma heranga) to accept emollir to soften, mollify
(aYi inheritance) empedernir to petrify, harden
hanir to banish extorguir to extort
brandir to brandish /"oZ/eV to fail, to become bankrupt
carpii- to moan, lament ftorir to flourish
colorir to colour munir to furnish
demolir to demolish renhir to combat
discemir to discern retorqidr to retort
(/escomec?ir-se to be immoderate; stibmergir to submerge, and
to fall into a passion other rare verbs.
The missing forms of these verbs are periphrasti-
cally formed (see P. II., L. 20) — for instance: estou de-
molindo I demolish. Espero que faga par hanir esse
pensamento I hope you will banish this idea from your
mind.
§ 233. Precaver. to warn, caution, precaver-se (de)
to beware of, fremir to tremble, are employed only in
the forms where the final consonant of the radical is
followed by i or e: precavia, precavendo; fremia,
freme., frenieniy etc.
14*
212 Lesson 31.
§ 234. The impersonal verb prazer (and aprascr)
to please, to be pleased, wants the dative complement
and is employed only in the following forms:
Pres. Ind.
Praz.
Pres. Conj.
Praza.
Imperf. Ind.
Prazia.
Fret. perf.
Prouve,
Imperf. SubJ.
Protwesse.
Mais-que-perf. Ind.
, Prouvera.
Fut. Ind.
Prazer a.
Int. Subj.
Prouver.
Participio.
Prazido.
Gerundio.
Prazendo.
Examples.
0 rei disse: Praz(or apraz)-me conservar o meu govern o.
Aprazia-lhe (or aprouve-lhe) tomar essa resolucdo. Prazerd
a Deus . . . Prazendo a Deus . . . Se a Deus pfrouver . . .
Prouve a el-rei . . ,
This verb, wanting a complement (Infinitive or
objective clause with que and the subjunctive) is not
to be exchanged for agradar or gostar. For instance:
0 espectdculo agradoti the spectacle pleased; gostei do
quadro I was pleased with the picture. Prouve ao des-
tino condud'lo cd (ot que o condumsse cd) Destiny was
pleased to lead him here.
§ 235. Grassar to rage, prevail, only employed
in the 3^*^ persons- grassa a fehre amarella; grassaram
as bexigas (small-pox).
§ 236. Jazer—see § 210.
§ 237. Pesar to afflict, to grieve, is also used only
in the 3^*^ persons and completed by the dative com-
plement: Pesame I grieve, I am sorry. Pesou a famUia
erdutada ndo ter assistido aos ultimos momentos do faUe-
cido. The survivors were sorry for not having assisted
at the last moments of the deceased.
§ 238. Rehaver to get back is used only in the ]
forms which have a v: rehavemos^ rehavia, rehouve,
rehavendo, etc.
Palarras.
Sambrio gloomy, dark I a tempestade the tempest
carregado loaded | [timp}f'Ui&9j
Impersonal and Defective Verbs.
218
mUil [sub'tii]
subtil
0 guarda-Uvros
book-keeper
0 retnoinho
the whirl(wiiid)
[givardv-
[rrdmu'ifpi]
' livrufj
a ramageni
the branches
a cobrmiga
the receiving
[rry'mas^ij
[ku'brvsuj
a Mtega
sudden shower
0 pagamento
the payment
['hatogy]
[pvgTB 'mentuj
(de dgua)
0 registo
the register,
assmtador
frightful
[rrd'siftu]
list
[usuftv 'dor]
as entradas de
entrance-money
emmudecer
to grow dumb
fundos
[imu&d'ser]
as saidas de
the sale
eseonder
to hide
fundos
ftfkdn'derj
de uma (hora)
from one
Touco ['rrokuj
hoarse, hollow
em diante
0 clock
deleitar
to delight
immediatamente
immediately
[dalvi'tar]
0 correio geral
the central
incendiar
to set on fire
[ku'rryiux9-
post-office
[isendVar]
WaiJ
0 rebombo
the re-echoing,
regist(r)ar
to register
frr^'bombiij
cracking
^registfrjado*
reg^istered
tnfraquecer
to slacken
mediante
by means of;
[ifrvkd' f^cr]
\
on payment
crepitar
to crepitate
of
[krdpi'tar]
a taxa [tafv]
the tax-
0 raio [rraiu]
the flash of
0 registo
the registration;
lightning, the
frrd'siM
register-office
thunder-clap
a franquia
the postage
0 continuo
official of a
[frv'kiv]
f'kdn'tinwuj
government
a carta-postal
the letter-card
office
0 sello [seloj
the seal,
0 ordenado
the salary
postage-stamp
ford9'naduJ
tanto . . . coma
as well ... as
mensal
monthly
a cinta f'smtej
the wrapper
[me'sai]
0 impresso
the printing
desembaragado
agile
[im'prssu]
fdyztmbvrv-
a remessa de
the remittance
sa&uj
amostras
of samples
a abonagdo
security
0 arranjo
the arrange-
[Bbunv'svu]
ment
IJrocurar
to procure
0 enderego
the address,
[prukuWar]
[tnd9 'resuj
direction
a referenda
reference
0 destinatdrio
the receiver -
[rrafd'resfiv]
fdiftjnn-
a nogao
the notion
'tartuj
fnu'svuj
0 consumo
the consump-
a coUocagao
collocation,
[ko'sumuj
tion
[kuluka'svu]
ocaixaf'kaifnj
place
0 bilhete
the picture
cashier; cash-
iUustrado
post-card
book
a receita
the receipt,
0 cargo f'karguj charge, em-
[rrd'sieitv]
income
ployment
a resveito de
with respect to
214
Lesson 31.
pretender
0 competidor
fkdmp9ti'd'orJ
identico
[i 'dentikv]
preencher
[priinferj
pleno [plenu]
0 superior
fsupri 'or]
deixar-se ficar
veneer [ve'serj
aproceitar >
to pretend
competitor
identical
to accomplish
full
the superior
to remain
to earn
to profit
0 vencimento
the earnings,
salary
the instruction
a itutrucQoo
[iftru'svu]
polyteclmico polytechnical
[poli'tekniku]
mediocre mediocre
[md '&iukrd]
a mecamca
[mo'kvnihv]
0 acordo
[v 'kor&uj
mechanica
the agreement.
87, Exercicio.
Mau tempo.
0 dia amanhece sombrio. Parece que o tempo se poe de
chuva. Ja chovisca, e nao admirava que nevasse, pois esta
muito frio. Seria lastima que caisse neve ou que granizasse,
por que faria muito estrago nas arvores fructiferas que estao
em flor e que perdem muito quando gela ou venta. Sopra um_
vento gelido. Nuvens carregadas escurecem os ares. E evi*
dente que teremos tempestade. E preciso que fechfimos as'
janellas, para que a chuva nao possa entrar. Veja, come o.
p6 subtil sobe em remoinhos e como o vento sacod6 a ramdgem.
Jd caem grandes bategas de dgua. Graniza ate. Os passaros,
precavidos pela escuridao assustadora, emmudeceram e escon-
deram-se fremindo debaixo das folhas que fremem como elles.
Elles que a esta hora costamam voar e cantar alegremente,
nao Ihes apraz deleitar-nos com o seu canto. Relampeja. Acs
raios segue-se-lhes o rouco travao. Praza a Deus que nao nos
incendeiem a casa. Agora os terriveis rebombos enfraquecem.
Extinguem-se os raios crepitantes e ja nao troveja. 0 astro
de dia reapparece e sorri de novo. Faz sol e o tempo aclara.
Vejamos se ha novidade. Ha muito que nSo houve tempo tao
mau, e haverd que fazer. E possivel que a graniza tenha cau-
sado algum estrago. Deus queira que nao seja assim!
88. Leitura.
Annundos.
1. Empregado precisa-se para continuo ; ordenado reis
10000 mensaes e casa. Prefere-se homem novo e desembara-
9ado que d6 abona^oes. Carta escripta pelo proprio a agencia.
dando todas as informa^oes e onde se p5de procurar.
2. Empregado offerece-se com boa calligraphia e perfeito
conhecimento de correspondfincia em portuguGs e allemao. Da
Impersonal and Defective Verbs. 215
referSncias de 1* ordem. Qaem pretender dirija-se ao caixeiro
da casa X.
3. Commerciante estrangeiro, novo, offerece-se para casa
commercial de exporta^ao. Escreve e. fala as linguas allema,
francesa e inglesa e tern boas noQoes das linguas portuguesa
e italiana. Prefere colloca9ao como caixa ou guarda-livros,
tendo na sua posi9ao actual a seu cargo cobran^as e pagamen-
tos, assim como o registo das entradas e saidas de fundos. Para
tratar, das 6 em diante, Rua NN.
89. Thema.
Correio.
Francis, .you must at once take this letter to the post.
Read here: "Registered I" You will have it registered on pay-
ment of twopence. Here are 5 shillings : pay the registration
and the postage and bring me ten stamps at (a) a penny
and as many at a halfpenny and twopence. For the rest bring
letter-cards. It is most convenient to employ these latter for
short communications, and it is well to be provided with
them.
Actually I am altogether out of postage-stamps. And
yet I need them every day for letters for the inland post as
Well as for foreign countries (o estrangeiro), for wrappers for
book-post, for remittances of samples, etc. Also the post-card
is most convenient, especially since this new arrangement
has been made that the consigner may use half of the
front side for written communications. But it is indispensable
that you leave free the room destined to the address of the
receiver. With this innovation the consumption of the picture
post-card will be further increased, as well as the receipts of
the Post Office.
Conversa^ao.
Solicitagao de emprego.
A. Venho a respeito d'um emprSgo vago que me consta
haver n'esta casa commercial e de que se deu parte
por annuncios.
B. E 0 Senhor quem pretende ser competidor de F.?
A. Sou, sim, senbor. Vim apresentar-me e pedir o
interesse de V^ Ex a.
B. Como se chama o senhor?
A. Chamo-me Ricardo de Sousa Almeida, criado de
V^ Ex^ (your humble servant).^
^ This or something identical (seu criado, nm seu criado) is
generally added to a self-introduction.
216 Lesson 32.
B. Fa^a favor de se assentar, sr. Almeida! E natural
que ja tenha tido cdlloca^ao identica on parecida, nao
e verdadeV
A. Ja, sim, senhor; vae em oito annos que estou em-
pregado na casa d'exporta^ao de Fulano' onde tenho
tido a meu cargo as cobran9as e os pagamentos, e
posso dizer que tenho preenchido o meu logar com
plena satisfac^ao dos meus superiores.
B. E porque nao se deixa la ficar? Que e que o
determina a mudar?
A. Tenho pouco ordenado. E indispensavel que vencja
mais.
B. E quaes sao os tltulos que Ihe dao direito a um
vencimento mais elevado?
A. Falo e escrevo correctamente tres linguas, conheci-
mentos esses que nao me aproveitam na minha
posi^ao actual, tao pouco com© uma instruc(;ao poly-
technica e um talento, mais que mediocre, para a
mecanica.
B. Muito bem! Nao havera duvida que chegu^mos a
um accordo.
Thirty-second Lesson. Licao trigesima
segunda,
Verbs with a Double Participle.
^ § 239. There are a certain number of verbs which,
besides their regular participle, form an irregular one.
The former is used for the active voice, so it has the
function of a verb; while the latter is employed in the
passive voice and as an adjective. In some of these
verbs one and the other participle are employed in-
differently for the active and passive voices.
N.B. — We place before the forms an a (= aciioo)
or Si p (= passivo), adding to the 2°^^ form— wherever
this includes an adjective meaning different from that
of the participle— the EngUsh adjective. Those forms
marked * occur only as adjectives; those marked f are
unusual or incorrect, consequently to be avoided.
* Fulano (and in 2nd place Sicrano) is employed for some
name not expressed (our "What's his name?")-
Verbs \vith a Double Participle.
The most important of these verbs are
(1) Of the First Conjugation.
217
Ac(c)eitar to accept (ci,p) ac(c)eitado
^sse«i5ar to place; to (a./p^.) assentado
register
Descalga?' to pull off
(shoes, etc.)
Despertar to awake
(p.) ac(c)eito
(p.) assente sitt-
ing; firm,
solid
(p.) descalgado (ot.^p.) descalgo
barefooted
(p.) despet'tado
Dispersar to dis- (a., p.) dispersado
perse, scatter
Entregar to deliver, (a.^p.) entregado
hand
JEJnxugar to dry (<^'yP) enxugado
Escusar to excuse, (a., p.) escusado
to justify; to
exempt (see escon-
der)
Expressar to express (a., p.) expressado
(see also exprimir)
Expulsar to expel (see
also expellir)
Fartar to satiate
Findar to finish
(a.) expulsado
(a.) fartado
(a., p.) -findado
Fixar to fix (d-^P-) fixado
Ganhar to earn, gain (a., p.) ganhado
Gastar to expense, (a.) gastado
use, consume
Ignorar to ignore (c^-ypO ignorado
Inquietar to disquiet, (a., p.) inquietado
trouble
Isentar to exempt, to (a,) isentado
free
Juntar to join
(a., p.) juntado
(p.) desperto
sprightly;
intelligent
(p.) disperso
(p.) entregue
(p.) enxuto dry
(p.) escwso secret;
unnecessa-
ry
(p.) expresso
express;
explicit
(p.) expidso
(p.) farto
abundant ;
satisfied ;
weary
(p.) findo last,
past
(p.) fixo
(a., p.) ganho
(a., p.) gasto
(p.) ignoto
unknown,
obscure
(*) iyiquieto
uneasy
(p) ts^^o exempt
or free (by
privilege)
(a., p.) junto
together
218
Lesson 32.
Limpar to clean
Manifestar to mani-
fest
Matar to kill
(see also morrer)
Misturar to mix
Occultar to hide
Pagar to pay
Quietar^ to quiet,
calm
Salvar to save
Sepultar to bury
Soltar to untie, re-
lease
Sujeitar to subject,
subdue
Suspeitar to suspect
Vagar to be vacant or
void; to stroll about
(a.) limpado
(a., p.) manifestado
(a.) matado
(a.fp.) misturado
(a.) occultado
(a.) pagado
(a.) quietado
(a., p.) salvado
(a., p.) sepultado
(a.) soltado
(a., p.) sujeitado
(a., p.) suspeitado
(a.) vagado
(a., p.) limpo clean
O manifesto
manifest,
apparent
(a., p.) morto dead
(*) misto or
mixto
(p.) occulto
(a.,p.) pago
(*) quieto quiet,
calm
(a., p.) salvo safe,
(p.) unhurt
(p.) solto loose;
free
(p.) sujeito
(p.) suspeito
suspicious
(*) vago vacant,
void; vague.
(2) Of the Second Conjugation.
Absolver to absolve (a-jP') ahsolvido (p.) ahsolto
(a., p.) dbsorvido
(a., p.) accendido
(a.) corrompido
(a.) elegido
Ahsoroer to absorb
Accender to light
Corromper to corrupt
Eleger to elect
Esconder to hidt
(see also escusar)
Escrever to write
Este?ider to extend
(a.) escondido
(a.) escrevidof
(a., p.) estendido
(p.) absorto
(p.) acceso
(p.) corrupto
(a., p.) eleito elect,
chosen
(p.) escuso
Incorrer to incur (a.) incorrido
Involver to involve (a.) involvido
Morrer to die (a.) morrido
(see also matar)
Prender to seize, to (a.) prendido
catch, to arrest
Pretender to pretend (a.,p.) pretendido
Resolver to resolve (a^-yp.) resolvido
(a.fP.) escripto
(*) extenso ex-
tensive
(p.) incurso
(p.) involto
(a., p.) morto dead
(p.) preso fast,
imprisoned
(p.) pretenso
(p.) resoluto
resolute
* More usually: aquietar, which has the only participle
aquietado. In quietar as well as in vagar only the irregular par-
ticiple is used and in its adjective meaning.
Verbs with a Double Participle.
21^
Romper to break, tear
Suiyre(h)ender to sur
prise
Suspender to suspend
(a.) rompido
(a., p.) surpre(h)en-
dido
(a.) suspendido
(p.) roto ragged
surpreso
(p.) suspenso
suspense
Torcer to twist (<^-^P') torcido (p.) ^or^o crooked,
tortuous.
(3) Of the Third Coujugation.
Ahrir to open
Affiigir to afflict,
grieve
Gobrir to cover
Concluir to conclude
Contrahir to contract
Distinguir to dis-
tinguish
Erigir to erect
Espargir to spread
Expellir to expel
(see also expulsar)
Exprimir to express
(see also expressar)
(a.) abridof
(a.) affiigido
(a.) cobridof
(a., p.) concluido
(a., p.) contrahido
(a.) distingtiido
(a., p.) erigido
(a.) espargido
(a.) expellido
(a) exprimido
Lxtlriguir to
tinguish
Extrahir to extract
Frigir to fry
Imprimir to print
Incluir to include
Inserir to insert
Opprimir to oppress
afflict •
Instruir to instruct
Possuir to possess
Beprimir to repress
Surgir to anchor
Tingir to dye
ex- ((i-,P') extinguido
(a. /p.) extrahido
(a.) frigido
\a.,p.) imprimidOy
(a., p.) incluido
(a.) inserido
(a., p.) opprimido
(a., p.) instruido
(a., p.) possuido
(a.yp.) reprimido
(a.) surgido
(a.) tingido
Palavras.
(a. J p.) dberto open
(p.) afflict 0 sorry
(a., p.) cdberto
(p ) concluso
(p.) contracto
(p.) distincto
distinct
(p.) erecto erect
(p.) esparso
(p.) expulso
(p.) expresso
express,
explicit
(p.) extincto
extinct
(p.) extracto
(a.,p') frito
(a., p.) impresso
(p.) incluso
(a.^p.) inserto
(p.) oppresso
(p.) instructof
O possesso
(p.) represso
(p.) surto
(p.) Unto.
Aviuvafvt'uvvJ the widow \ o chefe [fefd] the chief; head;
principal
0 jurado the juryman
por conseguinte consequently
0 recem-chegado the newcomer
[rrdsvtfi 'ga&uj
a apparencia the appearance
0 ingrediente the ingredient
[%grd&!' 'entd]
OS pesames
['peznmf/J
o assento
0 prazo
0 conciirso
a roupa f'rropvj the linen,
clothes
the condolence
the s^at
the term, ap-
pointed day
the competition
220
Lesson 32.
a droga ['droiju]
the drug
a circular
the circular
a cocgao
the coction
por-se
to set
fkok'svu]
a dnimo
the mind
0 deputado
the deputy
f'vnimuj
0 liberal
the liberal
a oppressao
the oppression
[im'raij
emquanto
while
a offerta
the offer
continuar
to continue
apresentar
to present
0 par do sol
the setting of
cor de laranja
orange-
coloured
the) sun.
90. Exercicio.
A viuva do sr. N. tern ac(c)eitado todas as pessoas que
foram dar-lhe os pfizames pelo fallecimento do marido; foram
todas ac(c)eitas. Ea tinha-me assentado num assento baixo e la
fiquei assentada. Este mure estd bem assente. Na semana finda
tem-se findado (better: findou-se) o prazo fixo para o concurso
do empregovago. Assim que tiver entregado a carta, ella estara
entregue. 0 sol tern enxugado bem a roupa; agora ella ja estd
enxuta. 0 chefe tinha expressado aos empregados a sua vontade
expressa. Tambem tinha fixado o ordenado de todos e deter-
minado os dias fixos em que seria pago. 0 reu que foi suspeito e
preao, como inv6lto no crime, ficou absolvido; absolveram-no os
jurados; ja esta solto e salvo. A mae d'elle, a quern a desgraQa do
filho tinha affligido muito, ja nSo esta afflicta, mas quieta.
0 governo tinha suspendido as garantias que por conseguinte
estavam suspensas. E de admirar que nao tivessem distin-
guido OS reoem-ehegados, pois teem apparencia muito distincta.
0 rapaz, com medo manifesto, tinha-se escondido n'um logar
muito escuso. Para fazer esta droga tinhamos misturado varios
ingredientes bem limpos que, depois de bem mistos, foram
sujeitQS a uma cocgao cuidadosa. Viemos num comb<5io misto.
Os olhos ja muito abertos, tinham-se-lhe abrida mais ainda.
91. Thema.
Who has been elected deputy? A Liberal has been
chosen. Had you already resolved to insert an advertisement
on account of the vacant place? Yes, it has been already
inserted, and I am resolved to accept the place if it is offered
to me, for it is exempt from taxes. Enclosed I present you an
open letter of Mr. N. N., which I opened at his express desire.
In a printed circular he communicates that, his partner
having died last month, the old firm is extinct, but that he
has resolved to continue the old business under a new name.
See how beautifully the sun has dyed the clouds! Some
are rose, others are yellow, those others orange- coloured
or fire-coloured. The whole sky on (por) which they are dis-
i
The Adverbs. 221
persed is covered by them. Also the masts of the ships
anchored in the harbour are gilded by the setting sun. Calm
your minds! Those who were oppressed are safe and free
from oppression, while the oppressors have been expelled.
Thirty-third Lesson. Licjao trigesima
terceira.
The Adverbs. Ad/verhios fa&'verbmfj.
§ 240. The adverbs express the circumstances in
which an action, a quality, or a state has occurred, and
so determine either a verb, an adjective, or another
adverb. We distinguish: 1. original adverbs; 2. derived
adverbs ; 3. those which in their form are equal to the
adjective; 4. adverbial expressions.
§ 241. The original adverbs are divided into:
1. Interrogative and Relative
(interrogativos e relativos).
These generally are the same when relating to place
or time: onde (d'onde, aonde)^ quando. Onde estd? Aonde
vae? jyonde vem? No jar dim, onde estive, aonde fui,
d^onde vim . . . Quando veto? No dia quando veto . . .
2. Adverbs of Place (de logar).
These answer to the- questions "where, whither,
whence?" onde? d'onde? aonde? por onde?:
aqui, cd here ahaixo, debaixo down, below
aJii, cdi, Id, acold there aquem on this side
atrds, detrds behind alem on the other side
adiante, deante before_, in front ; algures anywhere
to the front nenhures nowhere
dentro within; inside perto \
fdra outside cerca ] ^^^
acima \ above longe far
arrtba ) ^' emhora away.
3. Adverbs of Time (de tempo).
These answer to the question "when?" quando?
Hoje to-day antehontein the day before
hontem yesterday yesterday
222
Lesson 33.
dmanha to-morrow
tarde late
sempre always, ever
entdo then
wmca, jamais never
dttpois afterwards
outr^ora formerly
primeiro before, first
antes sooner, before
agdra, 6ra now
logo presently, directly
jd already, now, immediately
ainda still
amiudo, amiude often.
cedo soon
4. Adverbs of Manner (de maneira).
These answer to the question "how?" como?
Bern well
antes rather
mal badly
melhor better
sequer at least
assim so, thus
peor worse
assim assim so so.
aparte separately
6. Adverbs of
Quantity (de quantidade).
These answer to the question "how much?" quarvto?
qttdo?
Too, tanto so, so (or as) much
muito much, very
(o) mats more, most
pouco little
(o) menos less, least
demais, detnasiado too (much)
hastante \ i
/ enough
assaz ] °
quasi almost, nearly
um hocado de a little, some-
what
apenas hardly, scarcely
quanto mats . . . tanto niais
the more . . . the more
so, sdmente only
nada nothing.
6. Adverbs of Affirmation (affirmattvos), of Negation
(negativosX and of Doubt (de duvida).
Sim yes
certamente certainly, to be sure
ati even
ainda moreover
alias else, moreover
realmente really, indeed
7ido no, not, neither
nem not even; nor; neither
no more
nada not at all
jd ndo
ndo
nunca never, ever
acaso perhaps
i ndo \
do . . . jd )
\unca never
caso perhaj
§ 242. Derived Adverbs.
These adverbs are formed by adding the S3'llable
'tnente to the feminine form of the attributive adjective
(in the positive degree as well as in that of the absolute
superlative) or to that of the past participle of the pas-
The Adverbs. 223
sive voice, employed as an adjective : justamente justly,
exactly, at that very moment; devidamente duly; assi-
gnaladamente remarkably; riquissimamente most richly,
etc. In some adjectives ending in -es (formerly having
been uniform), the adverb is composed with the mascu-
line form: portuguesmente in a Portuguese manner.
N.B.— It is understood that uniform adjectives add the
ending -mente to their form common to both genders: feliz-
mente happily.
§ 243. Of two or more adverbs following one
another, only the last adds the ending -mente, while
the preceding take only the feminine forn? : darei franca^
sincera e lealmente o men voto. I shall give my vote
frankly, sincerely, and truly.
§ 244. The derived adverb is as subject to com-
parison as the adjective, being governed by the same
rules^ Fiquei ainda mais agradavelmente surpre(h)endido.
I was still more agreably surprised.
§ 245. As already stated, the Portuguese prefer,
wherever possible, the simple form to the complicated.
They like to employ the adjective instead of the derived
adverb or the adverbial locution. The adjective so
employed is put with or without a preposition imme-
diately behind the verb and is called:
Idjectivo apposto ou circumstancial.
Examples.
0 tempo passa rdpido (instead of 'com rapidez or ra-
pidamente).
0 povo escuta dvido (instead of com avidez or avidamente).
• 0 pulso hatia desordenado (instead of em desordem or
desordenadamente) .
Saltou de contente (instead of de contentamento).
Quando se respira fundo, o ar enche completamente os
pulmdes.
When you breathe deeply, the air completely fills the
lungs.
In some locutions the use of the adjective instead
of the adverb is obligatory;— e.g.:
Falar alto,, haixo to speak loud, low
voar alto (baixo) to fly high, deep
224 Lesson 33.
andar direito to go upright or straight on; to act
honestly
ir direito a to go straight on
ir seguro to go or be safe
ir or andar ligeiro to go quickly
vender caro to sell dear
comprar barato to buy cheap
levar caro to charge (too) much
custar caro to be expensive.
§ 246. BemarJcs to § 241.
1. The comparative of hem is mdhor or mais hem;
the one of mat is peor or mais mdl. The latter form
is used before a participle: mais hem feito; men^s mal
peitsado.
2. After ai^tes (= rather) "than" can be ren-
dered by que or do que: Antes quero isto (do) que
aquillo.
3. Certain adverbs correspond, with respect to their
origin or meaning, to certain pronouns — e.g.:
aqui, cd corresponding to the demonstrative este
ahi » » » •» esse
alli,ld, acold » » » » aquelle.
Such adverbs are therefore denominated adverhios
pronominaes and divided into:
(a) demonstrativos : aqui^ ahi, ally acold, entdo, t&o,
tanto;
(b) relativos: onde, d'onde;
(c) interrogativos: onde? quando? com>o? quao?
quanto?
(d) indefinidos: algures, nenhures.
4. Too and qu^o correspond to tanto and quanto
(see Pronouns), with the difference that the former
determine adjectives and other adverbs, while the latter
only modify verbs.
N.B. — Instead of quao you may in most cases
put que.
Falmi tdo alto que . . . Falou tanto que . . . Era tdo rico
que . . .
Era tdo amante da verdade que nem zombafido (not even
in joke) mentia.
The Adverbs.
225
Nao faz ideia qiiao (or que) hella e a vista e quao (or qtie)
sagazmente aproveitada! (and how cleverly taken ad-
vantage of).
Elle hem sabia quanto eu o estimava.
Beside the true adverbs, there are a great many
adverbial locutions (locugoes adverbiaes), formed out of
several words one of which generally is a preposition — e.g. :
otherwise
A custo hardly, with diffi-
culty
de cofitinuo continually
po7' Ventura happily, by chance
d moo (de) at hand
por dentro inwardly
jpor fora inwardly
do mesmo mddo in the same
way
de outro mddo
de outra fdrma
de certo, por certo certainly
de mddo algum by no means
ao cei'to exactly
d uma altogether
n'um pronto in an instant
por alto superficially
de alto a haixo from top to
toe
Jonge d'isso by far
de contente \ .,. .
deaUgvia } ^'t'' W
vainly
0 pessego the peach
ipes9guj
0 lavrador the country-
[Ivvrv'&or] man
extasiar-se to be enchanted
ftftJi 'ziarsd] with
partir-se to part with
guardar to guard
[givsr'darj
o carogo the stone
[kv 'rosuj
tocar (dig. c.) a to fall to one's
dlguem share
acudir to interrupt
guloso [gu'lozu] greedy
apanhar to snatch up
[vps'parj
Portuguese Couversation-Grammar
de fdme with hunger
de cor by heart
de halde \
em vao f
de vagar slowly
por acaso by chance
de propdsito intentionally, on
purpose
a propdsito de with regard to
a saber namely
as avessas oppositely
de bom grado willingly
de mdo grado unwillingly
mdo grado meic against my
wish
d tda at random
por acaso by chance
alem d'isso moreover
ao de leve slightly
a pressa, de fugida hastily,
hurridly
em mSdia on an average.
Palavras.
menear a cahega to shake one's
head
engenkoso ingenious
[%$i'f)0zu]
0 cdlculo the calculation
f'kaikuluj
enleiado bashful
[llv} 'a&uj
entemecido touched
[ttdrn9'si&u]
ethereo [i'tertuj ethereal
subsistir to subsist
[subsdf'tir]
0 assento
[v 'sentuj
merecer
[mdr^ 'ser]
t^e seat
to merit,
worth
15
be
226.
Lesson 33.
0 mano f'mynuj
o remedio
[rrymeMuJ
a memoria
[md'moriB]
a magna
encurtar
[ikur'tar]
a chaga ['JaQv]
a desfeita
[dlffvitv]
0 osculo
f'ofkuluj
traidor
[trai'dor]
brother
the remedy
the memory
the grief, pang
to shorten
the wound
the offence
the kiss
treacherous
0 atlas [' atlej]
provar
fpru'varj
talhar [tn fiar]
escuro
desbotar
fdi^bu'tarj
embasbacar
fibv^bv 'karj.
0 solsticio
[soif'tisyu]
revezar-ae ]
[rrdV9'zar8d]\
alternar-se
[oHsr'narsd]
the atlas
to taste; to try
on
to cut
dark
to discolour,
fade
to be quite
taken aback
the solstice
to relieve one
another, to
do ... by
turns.
87. Exercicio.
Os Pessegos.
Um lavrador que tinha quatro filhos trouxe-lhes um dia
cinco pessegos magnificos. Os pequenos, que nunca tinham visto
semelhantes fructos, extasiaram-se bastante deante das suas c6res
e da fina pennugem que os cobria. A^ noite o pae perguntoa-
Ihes: — Entdo comestes os pfissegos?
— Eu comi, Sim, senhor — disse o mats velho. — Qtie
bom que era! Gaardei cd o card^o. e hei-de planta-lo logo,
para depots nascer uma arvore.
— Fizeste bem! — respondeu o pae satisfeito.
— Eu — disse o mais novo, saltando de corUente — o
meu p^ssego comi-o logo; e a mae ainda me deu metade do
que Ihe tocou a ella. Era doce como mel!
— Ah! — acudin o pae, censurando-o brandamente —
foste um bocadinho guloso, mas na tua edada ndo admira.
Espero sinceramente que, quando f6res homem, te has-de corrigii*.
— Pois eu cd — disse o terceiro — apanhei jprow^awen^e
o earo^o que o meu irmSo deitou fora, quebrei-o a custo e
comi o que estava dentro, que era como uma noz. Vendi o
meu pfissego, e com o dinheiro hei de comprar coisas mais tarde
quando for a cidade. 0 pae nieneou a cabe9a, descontente:
— Pensaste engenhosamente, mas eu preferia menos cal-
culo e que tivesses obrado de outro modo. Dize-me cd tu,
Eduardo, acaso provaste o teu p6ssego?
— Eu, meu pae, — respondeu enleiado o pequeno, -
levei-o a casa do visinho onde o Jorge, coitado, esta com a
febre. Deixei-lh'o ein cima da cama e vim-me embdra imme-
diatamente.
* State to which class of adverbs
italics in the Exercicio 87.
belong those printed in
The AdverbB. 227
— Ora hem — perguntou o pae — qual de v<5s ^ que
empregou mdhor o pessfigo?
— Foi o mano EJduardo! disseram os tres pequenos d
uma e num pronto. Esse, entretanto, ndo dizia palavra, e a
mae abraQou-o enternecida. (After Guerra Junqueiro.)
88. Leitura.
Soneto,
Alma minha gentil, que te partiste
Tao cedo d'esta vida descontente,
Eepousa la no ceo etemamente,
E viva eu ca na terra sempre triste.
Se la no assento etbereo, onde subsiste,
Memoria d'esta vida se consente,
Nao te esq«e(?as d'aquelle amor ardente,
Que ja nos olhos mens tSo puro yiste.
E se vires que pode merecer-te
Alguma coisa a d6r que me ficou
Da magua, sem remedio, de perder-te,
Roga a Deng que teijs annos encurtou,
Que tao cedo de ca me leve a vfir-te,
Quao cedo de meus olhos te levou. (Camoes.)
Antes a pobreza honrada
Do que a riqueza roubada.
Antes a chaga feita Que a desfeita
Por amor, De um osculo traidor.
(Joao de Deus.)
8f>. Thema.
Where can my atlas be? Have you perhaps seen it?
No, I have not; if you had duly laid it on its place, you
would find it there. But look, there it is! Not there where you
look for it, but there, near the window. — When did the
tailor bring my coat? Yesterday afternoon about four o'clock.
He went hurriedly away, saying that he would come here to-day
or to-morrow, to try it on you. The coat seems to be some-
what wide. Not only somewhat but very wide, nearly too
wide; but it is most carefully sewn and well cut. How do
you like the colour? So so; perhaps it might have been a
little darker. I do not like dark colours much ; and, moreover,
this colour does not fade so much as another darker. Was
the cloth very expensive ? Good cloth is never bought cheap.
The better it is, the dearer it is sold. And also the tailor
asks rather a bigh price. By (tr. : com) his bills I have l^een
sometimes quite taken aback.
15*
228 Lesson 34.
CoiiYersa<^o.
Onde nasce o sol e onde se poe?
A que horas se levanta o sol nos dias de solsticio?
Quando temos o dia mais cumprido e a noite mais
curta?
Donde vem que ha varias esta^oes ?
Porque e que se revezam o dia e a noite?
Como se move uma locomotiva? um navio de vela? iim
autoraovel etc. ?
Onde desemboca o rio Tejo ? o rio Douro ? o rio Mon-
dego? 0 Guadiana?
Acaso me sabe dizer onde e a estaQao do caminho de
ferro ?
Quanto. tempo leva ate la?
Thirty-fourth Lesson, Li^ao trigesima
qnarta.
The Conjunctions. As Conjuncgoes [Jcdsti'sdtfJ,
§ 247. The conjunction joins sentences or por-
tions of sentences, and is invariable— e.g.: Desejo, mas
temo I desire, but fear. Here mas is a conjunction
which joins the two predicates desejo and teino, opposing
one to the other. If we say : 0 desejo e o temor inquie-
tam-me, the conjunction e joins desejo and temor, subjects
of the same predicate.
§ 248. A conjunction not only jams sentences
or parts of them, but it brings them into a certain
relation, making the one dependent on the other ac-
cording to their tenor. Therefore we distinguish:
1. According to their signification two great classes
of conjunctions: the co-ordinates (coordinativas) and the
subordinates (suhordinativas).
2. According to their form we distinguish simple
(simples) and compoimd conjunctions (locugdcs conjunc-
tivas).
§ 249. The co-ordinate conjunctions only join sen-
tences, etc. There are:
(a) copulative (coptdativas e corUiniiativas) ;
(b) explicative (explicativas) ;
The Conjunctions. 229
(c) disjunctive (disjunctivas) ;
m (d) adversative (adverscUivas) ;
'p- (e) conclusive (conclusivas) ;
(f) comparative (comparativafi);
(g) correlative (correlativas).
f § 250. The suhordinate conjunctions join sen-
tences, etc., making them dependent on one another.
There are:
(a) conditional (condicionaes) ;
(b) causative (cnusaes):
(c) final (finaes);
(d) concessive (roncessivas):
(e) temporal (fireunistanekic's do tempo);
(f) integral and dubitative (infegrantes c dnhita-
thas).
§ 251. Siinimar.y of tlie Coujiinctions.
Remark. — Those marked witli * require the verb of the clause
in the subjunctive mood; those marked with (*) may be followed
by the subjunctive or indicative, according to the certainty or un-
certainty expressed by the sentence. Those compounded with de
are followed by the infinitivo.
A. Coordenativas.
(a) Copiilativas.
ConjiincQoes simphs. Locu^oes eq^iiivalentes.
K and hem assim yet
tanibem also 71 no s6(mente) . . . mas tanlbem
nem nor ^ » not only . . . but also
nem sequer not even
tamponco no more, as little
nao . . . mas slm not . . . but
on the contrary
tatifo . . . como as well as: both
. . . and
ass'iw como as also
alem de besides
jo (que) . . . jd (que) since :
as soon as; now . . . now.
Pois well, why em or na verdade indeed
ora now, yet; why com effeito indeed; really
owrrosm also, likewise, moreover. almi d'isso besides, moreover
alem de que or do qiie except or
save that
de mais, de mais n mais moreover.
230 Lesson 34.
(b) ExplicatiTas.
Como as. usstm como \ ,,
bem cqmo ] *® ^®^^ *^
*como se as if
(*)de (tal) sorte que \ in a way
{*)de maneira que [ that;
l*)de mode (or geito) I so as
que ) to
*como quer que however
{*)scgundo (qu^) \ according to.
Cjconforme (que) I *
(c) Disjunctivas.
Om or. Oou ... OM or ... or
wc»i . . . nem neither . . . nor
ora . . . ora now . . . now
*quer . . . quer whether ... or.
(d) AdTersativas.
Mas but xipesar de in spite of
porem yet comtudo yet, however
todavia however. nao obstante notwithstanding
,em embargo de \ j^e^e^thelesa
amda asstm | ^^^^^^
{*)antes rather
nd entanto however
senao otherwise; but
quanto a with regard to.
(e> Concliisivas.
Logo j 80, therefore, con- por conseguinte } consequently
2H>ts \ sequently. 2^(^^ consequencta I ^ ''
por isso, jjor tanto accordingly
per onde, pelo que wherefore
r«m que j ^^ ^^^
(r)de maneira que \
(^)com que wherewith.
(f) CQmpai:ativas.
Mais (do) que more than *ante8 que \ ij^f^j.^
mcnos Xdo) que less than *primeiro (que) I
como as
(g) Correlativas.
asaim . . . como such as assim como . . . assim (tamhem)
tao . . . qu^ so that such as ... so also
quanto . . . tanto the (more) . . .
the (more)
qual . . . tal like . . . like
eomo se as if
{*)tal . . . que so that, etc.
The Conjunctions. 231
B. Subordinativas.
(a) Condicioiiaes.
i*)Se if, wliether.
*caso or caso que 1 if, in case
*dado caso que | of
{*)quando i
*sem que without, except
*a nao ser que |
a menos de 1 if not, unless
*a menos que | saving
salvo se 1
Cyuma vez que if ever.
(h) and (c) Cansaes e fliiaes.
Porque, que because Jd que
{*)como as ]7oi8 que
pais because, as. par- quanta que j as. considering
visto coma
{*)visto que
sendo que
*TTM that, in order to
a fim ae )
para que nao lest
por isso que by reason of, on
account of
pelo muito que for (the sake of).
(d) ConcessiYRS.
*jEmboy'a though {*)ainda que even if, though,
although
*comquanto que |
*se hem que J though
*poi8 (que) \
Oposio que ] supposed
*suppo8to que \ or provided
*dado or caso qu£ ) that
por mais (or muito) que however
much
como quer que (seja) however
(it be).
(e) Circumstanciaes de tempo,
Como \ -. {*)tanto que inasmuch as, so far
«»'"««» I 'Q^oso. «»« ) as soon as
'*)asstm que j
{pantes que j ^ ^^^^
[*)prtmeiro que ]
desde que since
{*)de2)ois que after
ao passo que ] ^^^-j^
{*)emqua7ito (que) \
232 Lesson 34.
{*)aU que until
em (witli the Gerund.) in, while
i*)sempre que whenever
l*)todas as vezes que any time
when
'""^ ! scarcely.
(f) Integrautes e dubitativas.
OQue that, if *se porventuar \ .. ..erhaDs
se if, whether *se dcaso ] ^* P^^^^^P^-
•»c if
*quando when
§ 252. BemarJcs:
(a) A great many of the conjunctions are simply
adverbs, nouns, or adjectives with prepositions:
(b) By the preposition a and the infinitive you
may supply conditional conjunctions.
A ndo haver que fazer—i.e., se ndo houver or caso ndo
haja que fazer.
(c) Se, introducing a condition or supposition, is
generally followed b}^ the subjunctive (future); employed
in an indirect question, by the indicative; if in any
other indirect speech, it may be followed by the sub-
junctive or the indicative, according to the certainty or
uncertainty it expresses — e.g. :
Se fizer horn tempo if it be good weather.
Perguntel se fazia horn tempo.
I asked if the weather was good.
Va ver (or diz-nie), se faz horn tempo.
See (or tell me) if the weather is good.
Ndo sei se faz (or faga) bom tempo.
I don't know whether the weather is (or be) good.
(d) The conjunction que most commonly introduces
a dependent substantive clause (which may be also
elliptical), as:
Creio que tern razdo I believe you are right.
Creio que ndo 1 think not.
Creio que sim I think so.
In English the conjunction "that" is frequently
understood, whereas que is not only always expressed
The Conjunctions.
233
in Portuguese, but repeated before each clause of the
sentence, as:
Creio que iem razao e que sera hetn succedido.
I think you are right and (that you) will succeed.
(e) When a conjunction governs several verbs, it
is placed before the first verb only, and que may be
used instead before the other verbs. This is especially
the case with the conjunctions compounded with que. Ex. :
Se for (or caso seja) applicado e (que) tenha intelligeneia.
If he is (or be) diligent and has intelligence.
Palavras.
Esfalfado
exhausted
0 comego
the beginning
[iffaVfacfu]
fJcu 'mesnj
mudavel
changeable
a doQura
the softness
[mu'd'avcij
[du'surv]
prescindir
to prescind,
meigo f'mviguj
soft, tender
[prifsln'dir]
to extract
presentir
to feel, anti-
0 carvdio de
the coal
[pr9sen'tir]
cipate
pedra
0 ninho [niyu]
chocar [fu"kar]
the nest
0 combustivel
full
to breed
[komhuf 'tivsij
educnr [i&u 'karj
' to bring up
0 gaz [gaf]
the gas
0 macho
the male
potavel
potable,
['mafu]
[pu'tavd]
drinkable
afemeaf'fenmj
the female
desprezar
to despise
eoctremoso 1
[dtfprd 'zar]
[iftrB'mozu] 1
loving, fond,
superior
superior
amordso
tender
a nova [now]
the news
[vmu 'rozuj
0 (navio)
the packet boat
animar
to animate
paquete
[isni'inai-]
0 acaso
the accident,
0 sentido
the sentiment
chance
[sen 'ti&u]
conformar-se
to comply with
rasteiro
low
com alg. c.
frrvf'tup'uj
custa-me
I find difficult
0 jnso fpizuj
the ground
or hard
estar irado
to be angry
0 nadudor
the swimmer
contre alg.
with someone
[wsdv '&or]
sonhar fsu'par]
to dream
0 mentiroso
the liar
mag oar
to hurt
[menti'rozu]
[mvgu'ar]
if a pique [piJcJ
to sink
0 candrio
the canary-
a cmdorinJia
the swallow
[kv'nartuj
bird
[Qndu'riijv]
0 melrof'meinij
the blackbird
domestico
tame, domestic
passar por
to be considered
[du'meftihu]
_
esperto
clever, sly
concluir
to conclude
[ifpcrtu]
afoito fff'foHuJ hardy
0 grito
the warbling
234
Lesson 34.
o chamariz the bird-call
ffvmv 'rifj
a delicia the delight
[d9'li8iv]
selvagem savage, wild
[set 'va^§tj
o cantador the singer
[Tcvntv'ffor]
pobre ['po!>r/j poor
0 fregues
ffre'ge/J
0 moQO fmosuj
fluminense
[flumi'nensd]
a revista
[rr9'vijtv]
0 troco f'trokuj
the customer
the waiter
of Rio de
Janeiro
the review
the change, ex-
change.
90. Exercicio.
0 cavallo correu tan to que ficou esfalfado. A belleza e
a riqueza sao mudaveis. 0 homem nao pode prescindir nem
do alimento nem da roupa. Nao so esta, mas tambem aquelle
sao-lhe precisos. 0 carvao de pedra emprega-se como com-
bustivel, com elle tambem se prepara o gaz. A agua do mar
nao & potavel ; nem ella pode empregar-se na cozinha. 0 ho-
mem nao deve ter demasiado cuidado no seu exterior; tam-
pouco elle deve despreza-lo. Londres e maior do que Li'sboa ;
comtudo esta cidade esta numa posi9ao superior. Assim (que)
eu me veja em porto seguro, podes estar certo que hei de dar-
te novas minhas; emquanto porem estiver em viagem, nao
havera occasiao, a nao ser que se encontre um navio (paqu^te).
Como nao se pode contar com este acaso, melhor e que nao
contes com noticias, por mais que eu desejasse mandar-t'as para
que te nao afflijas. Pcqo que te conformes com isso, posto que te
custe. 0 nadador e o mentiroso, se abrirem muitas vezes a b6ca,
ir-se-hao a pique.
91. Leitura.
A andorinha.
A andorinha e essencialmente dom^stica: nao viv« senao
(or a nao ser) ao pe do homem. Onde virmos uma andorinha,
podemos concluir, sem que haja receio de errarmos, que nas
visinhauQas ha habita^oes. E ella a toda a hora entra afoita-
mente nas habita96es, como se ella propria f6sse da familia.
Todavia, a andorinha passa metade do anno longe de nos, —
na Africa d'onde vem no com^^o da primavera, procurando a
meiga doQura do nosso clima, e para onde se retira no comedo
do outonO; logo que presente os primeiros frios. A mesma
andorinha volta ordinariamente aos mesmos logares, e ate ao
mesmo ninho ; mas se o local Ih'o consente, faz um ninho novo
ao p^ 3 por cima do anterior, e ahi vive com o seu compa-
nheiro pacifica e amorosamente : ella, a chocar os ovos, em-
quanto elle occupa e protege a entrada do ninho. Macho e
feraea sao extremosissimos pelos filhos e educam-nos maravilho-
samente: emquanto pequeninos nao cessam de Ihes trazer de
comer. Depois dao-lhes as suas li^oes de voo; e nao somente
The Conjunctions. 235
OS ensinam a voar, mas ainda os animam n 'esses exercicios
— quer com tao expressivos gorgeios que o sentido d'estes quasi
se adivinha; quer voando elles proprios (ou) adeante dos filhos
ou ao lado, para que Ihes possam acudir quando fOr preciso. —
As andorinhas vivem dos insectos; e como estes ora voam mais
alto, ora mais baixo, segundo faz mais ou menos calor, acon-
tece que a andorinha os persegue em vOos rasteiros, sobre as
folhas, sobre as hervas, e at6 no piso das ruas.
(After TrindeCoelho: 2<* Livro de Leitura).
02. Thema.
I forbid it him, nevertheless he went. Though he said
nothing, I well felt that he was angry with me, since I
had blamed him. I shall go, whether it rain or be good
weather. You do not know, you don't even dream how you
are hurting me. A canary-bird if treated as it ought to be, can
l^ve for twenty years. The blackbird is generally considered
very clever, but it is not so much (or: less) so as it seems.
Moreover, it makes its nest very often near to man and
is lured (atrair) by the bird-call, though this be only a poor
instrument. As all of us know already the warbling of the
blackbird, we can declare that it is a delight. Yet it is not
on account of its wild song that the blackbird merits the
reputation which it has as a singer ; but rather on account of
that which it learns after being taken, be it by learning by
heart what it is taught or what it hears of the elder birds,
or by imitating all it hears, consequently also the sounds
of instruments and the voice of persons.
ConTersaqao.
iSTww cafe.
Fregu^s: 6 sr. Manuel, faz o favor d'uma chavena
de cafe e os jornaes d'hoje?
M690: Pronto, senhorl Eis 0 «Commercio do Porto»,
0 «Fluminense» ^, o «Diario Illustrado* ;
tambem deseja alguma revista?
FregtiSs: Queria. Ha a clUustra^ao pOrtugu6sa» e a
«Revista de Bem»?
M690: Ha, sim, senhor. Tambem «0s Ser6es»^ o
«Branco e Preto* e outras.
^ Fluminense is the adjective formed of Rio de Janeiro,
0 Fluminense is a newspaper published there.
^ (s^SeroesTt, pi. of serdo = evening-party. Oa Serves^ Branco
e Preto and IlltistraQoo portuguesa are illustrated reviews.
236 Lesson 35.
Fregues: Bern, traga-m'as. E olhe que hei de querer
mais assucar!
M690: Quanto V* Ex^ quizer, sr. doutor. Manda
mais alguma coisa?
Fregues: Sim. Depois de ter percorrido estes jornaes,
queria escrever alguns bilhetes postaes.
Tem-nos illustrados?
M6qo: Tenho. Eil-os. Queira V^ Ex^ escolher.
Fregues: Esta bem, E estampilhas ? Como teem des-
tine para 0 estrangeiro, cada um precisa
d'uma a vint^m ou de duas a dez reis.
Aqui tem dois tostoes.
M690: Nao tenho troco ; voa trocal-6s la dentrc.
FreguSs: Deixe estar, que estao em boas maos.
M690: Muito obrigado a V* Ex*.
Thirty-fiftli Lesson. Li^ao trigesima
qninta.
Interjections. Inter jeigoes fintgr^e'sotfj.
§ 253. Interjections are cries or exclamations
which express sudden emotions. They are invariable
and mostly short. The most common are:
Ah f. Ah. \ bravo! bravo! very well!
oh! oh! oh! bless me! his! once more!
hiti! ai^! oh, dear! alas! cdspit^! the deuce
ih! lo! catrapuz! bounce! dash!
fdra! begone! hence! off! plump!
come out! (for actors) 6! oh! (used as a vocative)
irra! zounds! for shame! It's coitado! coitadinho! poor man
too much! (dear darling)!
oxalci! would to God! silencio! silence!
old, hold! holla! halloo! psch! schiu! hush!
oU, oU! zounds! didbo! \ the deuce!
zas! slap! crack! ' diacho! \ zounds!
hasta! enough! stop! that apre! hang it! confound it!
will do! arre! gee-ho! ho!
eia! sus! dnimo! cheer up! xo! shue!
viva! Long live! hurrah! hail!
* Ai de mim poor me! at de v6s (belles)! woe unto you
(them)!
Interjections.
237
§ 254. Besides these there are several interjections
which (as already the two last do) express a call for
animals — e.g.: Us-Uz!^ pussy, pussy! to call cats; jf!
to incite cats; hs! to incite dogs. — There are also a
series of imitation-sounds, as: trus! triis! tap! knock!
rap! rat-tat- tat ! ; toe! toe! tramp! tramp!; tlmi-Um; tUm-
tlom! ting! ting-tang! ding-dong! clatter!; tique-taque
tick-tack.
§ 255. Finally, other particles, especially verbs in
the imperative mood, are used as interjections.
Andal go on!
anda cd! come here!
dd cd! give hither!
tdma Id! take this!
escuta! bark!
ouve cd! listen to me!
some-te! vae-te! begone! away!
aviu-te! be quick!
Vamos! let us go on (or
(away) !
(jfira! go on! move!
pd7'a ahi! stop!
jmdSra! to be sure! I say!
wouldn't it suit (him)!
2}0is ndo! certainly! why not?
isn't it?
pais entdo! you see!
qiietn (me) dera! that would
suit me to ^ a marvel!
ai Jesus! 0 Senhor! Jesus
Senhor! mercy on us! Good
Heavens !
adeus ! farewell ! good-bye !
Examples.
pois! what next?
cautela! agua vae^I take care
or heed!
aqui d'el-rei '
Acudam ! \
6 da guarda! ] ® P'
par quern e! I pray!
par amor de Deus! for God's
sake!
Deus me livre! God forbid!
Oh, no!
valha-me Deus ! Oh Lord ! bless
me!
Amen, Jesus * ! Amen !
Deuslouvado! \r\ <• ',
par Deus! egad! by Jove I
se Deus quizer! (if it) please
God! Deo volente!
seja 0 que Deus quizet'! as
God will
Deu^ guarde a V<^ Ex^ ^f
God be with you!
sahe Deus! God knows!
good morning (or day)!
Remark. — Every interjection expresses a whole sentence
or even several sentences. Thus ai! means "how painful it is!'*
^ Biz biz, a quickly repeated "bicho, bicho!"
'^ Agua vae!, literally "water is going," a traditional warn-
ing for passers-by, survived from former times, when things were
flung out of the windows.
^ Aqui d'd-rei, elliptic al for ^'acuda aqui a gente d'el-reif
^ Amen, Jesus, popular for Amen.
^ Final form in official letters or documents.
238
Lesson 35.
or "how unfortunate I am!" So the interjection differs by
its nature, which is synthetic, from all other particles, these
being essentially analytic.
Palayras,
0 theatro lyrico
the opera
atar
to tie
(-house)
0 palco f'paiku]
rugir [rru'^irj
the stage
a enchente
the fulness
to roar
[l'Jent9]
a procella
the storm,
desmaiar
to faint, swoon
[pru'selvj
hurricane
[dijmnt ar]
0 sino I'sinuJ
the bell
0 scenario
the scenery
OS sinos a defun-
the tollint?-
[s9'nanu]
tos[d9'funtufJ
bells
aprimeira dama the prima
bemdito
deceased
donna
[bn'dkuj
hisar
to repeat
guiar [gi'ar]
to lead, guide
sisudo [si*zu&u] judicious
0 jumento
the ass
impor
to impose
[gu'mentuj
0 baritono
the baritone-
a reboque
in tow
[bv 'ritunuj
singer
[rryt>okJ
0 baiodo
the bass-singer
0 cocheiro
the coachman
as palmas
the applause
[Icu'fviru]
hear palmas
to be applaud-
obedecer
to obey *
ed
doer
to ache, hurt
um sem numero
innumerable
tocar as
to chime the
de (vezes)
(times)
trindades
Angelus
a coroa
the garland
[trln'da&if]
a festa ariistica the benefit
0 toqm [tdk] das
the chimes of
a pomba
the pigeon,
dove
trindades
the Angelus.
93. Ex
ercicio.
keatro.
Hontem no theatro lyrico foi tal a enchente que algumas
senhoras, coitadas, desmaiavam. Mas oh, se* visse aquillo!
Ai, que Undo scenario! E os artistas? A esses levantavam-se
muitos «vivas», e os espectadores gritavam «bravo!» e «bis!» a
nao poderem mais (till they could not any more). A primeira
dama teve de bisar uma aria — ol6, ole! — e depois tornaram a
romper os « vivas* e os «bis», para obriga-la a repetir segunda
vez. Mas entao o publico mais sisudo fez «psch!» e «schiu!»,
para imp6r silencio. Tambem o baritono e o baixo levaram
muitas palmas e foram pedidos «f6ra» um sem numero de
vezes, at^ alguns gritaram «basta!» Mas, caspitd, que bell as
vozes! Atiraram-lies rauitas flores e cor6as, visto que tiveranr
a sua festa artistica, e ate soltaram pombas, as quaes, atadas
a duas e luas — zas! — foram cair no palco.
Interjections. 239
94, Leitnra.
E em Novembro, rugem procellas . . .
Dens nos acuda, nos livre d'ellas!
Ai, que ditosos os lavradores!
Sinos a defuntos! ai, quern morreria!
Viverao sempre na eterna luz,
Pobres bemditos, amen, Jesus! ....
Pela estrada plana, toc^ toe, toe,
Guia 0 jumentinho uma velhinha errante,
Como vao ligeiros, ambos a reboque,
Antes que anoitece, toe, toe, toe,
A velhinha atras, o jumentito adiante ! . . .
Toe, toe, toe, Undo burriquito,
Para as minhas filhas quern m'o dera a mim!
(Guerra Junqueiro.)
05. Thema.
Xa rua.
Take care! Come here! Be quick! Don't you see that
a carriage is coming along? Lord, bless me! Take heed not
to fall (Olhay se cues I) Oh, coachman, stop ! The coachman
calls to the horses: ''Gee-ho! ho!" and then "Shue!" But they
do not obey him. Help! help! There they (tr.: eil-os que)
stand, thank God ! But you have fallen (pret.), poor darlingi
Are you hurt? No, thank Heaven! Give hither your little
hand! Let us go on! Cheer up! Zounds, v^hat a fright!
Nothing hurts you, does it? Hark! Do you hear the bells?
Ding-dong! They chime the Angelus (or: it is the chimes of
the Angelus). Listen! Come, say an Ave-Maria! Well! Amen!
240
Second Part.
First Division: Flection,
First Lesson.
The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns.
(Cf. 2na Lesson of Part. I.)
§ 1. The gender of the noun may be recognised
by its meaning or by its ending or by both. By
their meaning are
(a) Masculine. — 1 . The denominations of male
persons and their professions: Jose, o rapaz^ o jar-
dineiro, o doutor, o monarcha, o patriarcha, etc.
2. The cardinal points, the winds, the seasons,
the months and those days as are not indicated by
^^feira": o Teste or este (also: nascente^ oriente^ levante%
0 oeste (also: poente or occidente), o norte (also: se(p)-
tentriao, o sul; o verao or estiOy o onto(m)no, o inverno:
0 Janeiro, o fevereiro, etc.; o sabbado, o domingo (but a
segunda feira, etc.).
Exc: a primavera Spring.
3. Mountains, capes, rivers and seas: o EtnUy
0 Gerejs, o Caho da Boca; o Mondego, o Lima, o Gua-
diana, o (oceano) Atldntico^ o (mar) BdUico.
* The names of the cardinal points (with the exceptions of
those in parenthesis) indicate also the .winds blowing from there
— e.g. : 0 norte or septentriao (poetical name) is employed for north
and north-wind. Another denomination for north-wind (rarely
for north) is a tramontane!. Feminine are also a Msa the breeze,
a aragem, a veragao gentle breeze.
The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns. 241
N.B. — If the name of mountains is preceded bv serra,
the article, etc., concords with this noun : a serra da EstreUa^
a serra do Gerez.
4. Metals: o oiiro, o ferro, o cohre, o zinco, etc.
Exc. : a prata, a platina, a lata or folha de Flandres
sheet-iron.
5. Characters and notes: o A, o B, o L, dois cc;
0 do, 0 re.
6. Man}^ names of trees and shrubs: o carvcdho,
0 freixo, o salgtieiro, o sohreiro, o tremoceiro. N.B. Fruit-
trees are generally feminine: a pereira (pear-tree).
7. Those words (adjectives, infinitives, participles)
converted into a substantive: o hello, o falar, o sim.
N.B. — If by an adjective so employed a female person
is indicated, it is naturally preceded by the feminine article:
a bella, a vellia.
(b) Feminine.— 1. The denominations of female
persons and their professions: Maria, a mae; a leiteira,
a autora.
Exc: 0 mulherao the strong and stout woman.
2. Continents, and generally towns, countries,
provinces and isles, especially those ending in a:
a Africa, Lishoa, Londres, a Dinamarca; a Beira,
a Guine; a Isldndia; however: o Brasil, Portugal (mas-
cuHne, but without article), o Trds-os-Monfes , o Sao
Thome, o Porto, o Funchal, o Rio de Janeiro, Paris m.
3. Arts, sciences, professions, moral qualities and
abstract nouns: a music'a, a historia, a olaria (pottery),
a esperan^a, a fe, a moralidade, a discregdo.
Exc: 0 amor Love, o vicio Vice.
§ 2. To indicate the natural sex in persons and
animals, the Portuguese language has either a different
expression or a different ending (cf. § 3 of this Lesson
and L. 2 of the 1^^ Part.).
Masculine. Feminine.
0 rapaz the boy A rapariga the girl, maid
6 Iwmem the man a mulher the woman
0 pae the father a mde the mother
0 padrasto the stepfather a madraste the stepmother
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 16
242 Lesson 1.
0 rei the king a rainha the queen
0 dom = a title of nobility, a dona = title bestowed upon
employed before the Christ- any lady and followed by
ian name the Christian name.
0 genro the son-in-law a nora the daughter-in-law
0 frade the monk a freira the nun
0 didcono the deacon a diaconisa the deaconess
0 avo the grandfather a av6 the grandmother
0 tsar or cear the czar a tsarina the czarina
0 gallo the cock a gaUinha the hen
0 cavallo the horse a egim the mare
0 carneiro the ram, mutton a ovelha the sheep
0 bode the buck- goat a cahra the goat
0 awoo the dwarf a and the female dwarf.
§ 3. By their ending are:
(a) Masculine. — 1. Those nouns ending in un-
accented -0 or in any accented vowel — e.g. tio, dedo,
alvard (charta), cafe, aleli (gillyflower), javali (wild
boar), do (pain), no (knot), avo.
Exc. : a pa (shovel), a chamine, a fe, a gale (galley),
a Hire, a mare (tide), a pole (pulley), a rale, a re (the
female prisoner or defendant, but o re the D [musical
note]), a se; a avo, a enxo (adz[e]).
2. Those nouns ending in -en, -em (exc. those in
-gem)y -im, -om, -wm, -do (cf. b, 3): o germen, o hem, o
armaeem, o setim, o som, a atum, o orgdo.
Exc: a ordem the order.
3. Those nouns ending in -ae (-at), -ao (au), -e'o
(-eu), €0 (eu), -oe, -oi — e.g.: pae (pai), pdo (pau), ceo
(ceu), breo (breu), heroe (heroi), boi.
Exc: a ndo (ndu) the ship.
4. Those in -oZ, -eZ, -il, -ol^ -id: o areal, o amiely
0 funil, 0 paiolj o paul (swamp), o consul.
Exc: a cat the chalk, a vogal the vowel, as well
as cathedral and credencial, which properly are ad-
jectives, to be supplied by se and carta.
5. Those in -ar, -er (-er), -ir, -or^ -ur: o altar, o
talher, o prazer, o elixir, o senhor, o andor (beer for
saints), catur (Uttle Indian man-of-war).
The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns. 243
Exc: a heira-mar (properly: a heira do mar the
seashore), a collier (spoon), a cor^ a dor^ a flor.
6. Those in -az, -oz, -oz^ -us, -uz: o cabaz (basket
of twigs), 0 algoz (hangman), o arroz^ o-jus (jus, law),
0 capuz (hood), o dbestruz (ostrich).
Exc. : a pa,z (peace), a tenaz (tongs), a foz (mouth
of a river), a noz (nut), a voz (voice), a cruz (cross), a
luz (light).
Remark X— Are masculine also those norms in -05, em-
ployed only in the plural: as hredos (notch-weed, spinage) ;
OS brocolos (broccoli).
(b) Feminine. — 1. Those nouns in -a or -a^: tia,
alma, la, maga.
Exc: 0 dia^ o helga^ o persa, o planMa, o cometa,
0 enigma (riddle), o capitalista, o cambisia (money-changer)
and all those, mostly taken from the Greek and indi-
cating a male person, as poeta, monarcha, democraia,
atheista^ etc.
2. Those in -e, and -ei: a merce (mercy), a lei (law).
S. Those in -ade, -gdo, (-c)q&o, -sao, -ddo (cf. a, 2):
adoragOOy direcgao, extensdo, confusOo, aptiddo (aptness),
multiddo (multitude).
Exc: 0 coragdo (heart).
4. Those in -gem: a imagerft, a irnpigem (tetter), a
ferrugem (rust).
Exc: 0 pagem (page, cabin-boy), o almargem
(meadow).^
Remark //.—Are also -feminine those nouns ending in
•as and employed only in the plural, and also the proper
names ending in -as; e.g. — as exiquias (exequies), as nu-
pcias (wedding), as hodas (de prata, de oiro the silver or
golden wedding); as calcas (trousers), as vitualhas (yictMsls);
Bruxellas (Brussels), Athenas (Athens).
* The ending -a may be also written -an: larij tnagan. But
this latter is feminine only when identical with -a, otherwise it
is masculine: o afan (toil), o ademan (generally employed in the
plural ademanes gesture).
^ Personagem is employed now and then as a masculine,
but the correct form is feminine.
16*
244 Lesson 1.
§ 4. As for the denomination of animals and plants,
their species is partly indicated by the masculine,
partly by the feminine gender — e.g., o corvo (raven), o
rouxinol (nightingale), o cordeiro (lamb), a dguia (eagle),
a ovelha (sheep), a lehre (hare), a raposa (fox), o myrto
(myrtle), o castanheiro (chestnut). To indicate the
natural sex, you have to supply the name of the
species by macho (male) or femea (female)— e.g., a femea
do rouxinol^ o corvo femea, a dguia macho, etc.
^.B.— The words of the reading and translating tasks
should now be looked up in the vocabulary at the end of
this book, or — as this, being chiefly intended to furnish
typical examples of a correct pronunciation, does not pretend
to be complete — from a dictionary. In the Pocket Dictio-
nary of the Portttguese and English Languages hy H. Michaelis,
an abridgement of the larger Dictionary of the same author,
published by BrocTihaus; Leip/sig, and the best of its kind
we know of, the reader will find everything that is required.
1. Beading Lesson.
I.
A le'bre corre. 0 peixe nada. A andorinha voa, 0 cabrito
pula. 0 ca^ador ca^a. 0 juiz julga. 0 homem pensa. 0 boi
rumina. 0 6rgao soa. A luz alumia. 0 general commanda. A
torre 6 alta. 0 sdvel 6 um peixe A aguia e uma ave de
rapina. 0 cysne 6 uma ave aquatica. A plaina 6 um instru-
mento. 0 cravo 6 uma fldr. Diz-se vulgarmente que o sol e
a Ina estao no c^u. 0 altar esta na igreja. A nuvem esta no
ar. 0 vento (o norte, a tramontana) sopra. 0 trovao brame
ou estrondeia. 0 leSo ruge. 0 mar brame. A ovelha bala.
0 cavallo rincha ou relincha. 0 cao.ladra, uiva ou geme (gftne).
0 rouxinol e o melro cantam. A rS grasna. 0 burro zurra.
A serpente silva. 0 porco grunhe. 0 lobo uiva. 0 pardal
chia. A raposa regouga. 0 touro berra. 0 gato mia. 0 mos-
quito ^umbe. A r6la geme. 0 pato e o ganso grasnam. 0
gallo cucurita e canta. A gallinba cacareja.
II..
Caule, tronco ou haste (piy pedunculo).
0 caule 6 o que n6s vulgarmente chamamos tronco ou
haste. Um carvalho tern tronco; a papoula e o trigo teem
haste. * 0 caule d'uma fl6r tambem se chama pe (ou pediinculu).
0 caule (ou tronco) de algumas arvores chega a ter 400 metros
de altura: o dos musgos tern apenas alguns millimetros. 0 caule
The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns: 245
e pois a parte da planta que se eleva no ar. Eleva-se ver-
ticalmente, ou mais ou menos inclinado, E do caule que nas-
cem as folhas, as flores e os fructos. 0 caule das arvores
compoe-se de cinco partes: por fora a casca; por baixo da
casca 0 liber, que 6 uma camada branca e tenra; por baixo
do liber outra camada que se chama alburno; ainda outra^
a mais interior, chamada cerne; e ao centro a medulla. Para
aguentar o caule, algumas plantas teem gavinhas, tambem
chamadas elos ou abra90s. Veem-se na videira, no melao, na
ervilhaca etc. Algumas gavinhas teem na ponta uns pequeni-
nos discos. Estes discos introduzem-se as vezes nas fend as
das paredes, e incham dentro das fendas. Inchando, os discos
nao saem, e as gavinhas aguentam melhor o caule. Essas
gavinhas que teem disco, chamam-se adhesivas (air roots).
(Trindade Coelho: Terceiro Livro de Leitura.)
2. Thema.
Indicate the gender of the following nouns, by placing
in front the definite or the indefinite article:
The horse, — cavallo. The pear, — pera. The metal,
— metal. A winter, — inverno. The spring, — primavera.
The chestnut, — castanheiro. The apple-tree, — macieira.
The gold, — euro. The platinum, — platina. The vapour,
— vapor. The working, — trabalhar. The author, — autora.
The ship, — navio, — nau. The prophet, — propheta. The
sun, — sol. The moon, — lua. The image, — imagem.
The sparrow, — pardal. The fox, — raposa. The he-fox,
— raposa macho. A lion, — liao. A region, — regiao. The
heart, — cora9ao. The modesty, — modestia. The faith, —
f^. The foot, — p^. The chimney, — chamin^. The vowel,
— vogal. The pair, — par. The peace, — paz. The piece,
— peda90. The Belgian, — belga. The mercy, — mere
The hare, — lebre. The wool, — la. The sound, — soir!.
A frog, — ra. A swamp, — paiil. The chalk, — caL. The
salt, — sal. The sky, — c^u. The eagle, — aguia. The
bird, — ave, — passaro. The trousers, — cal^as. The
wedding, — mipcias. Asia, — Asia. Italy, — Italia. Nor-
mandy, — Normandia. Portugal, — Portugal. Brazil, —
Brasil. The Thames, — Tamisa. The Tejo, — Tejo.
3. Thema.
Write down the translation and the feminine of the
following nouns. . The neighbour; the prisoner; the dwarf;
the grandfather; the monk; the doctor; the author; the
gardener; the lion; the hare; the nightingale; the bode;
245 Lesson 2.
the cousin; the stepfather; the son-in-law ; the cock; the
bull; the Jew; the prince; the master; the Portuguese; the
German; the boy; the dof^; the orphan; the wolf; the hus-
band; the son; the godfather; the horse.
ConTersa<jao.
Quaes sao os principaes quadnipedes dom^sticos?
Quaes sao os principaes quadnipedes bravos ou as priu-
cipaes feras?
Qual e 0 movimento da lebre?, do peixe?, da dgnia?,
do homem?
Qual e a voz da ovelha?, do cavallo?, do cSo?, do
porco?, etc.
Quaes sao as principaes aves dom6sticas?, as aquaticas?,
as de rapina?
Quaes sao as vozes das aves?
Que se entende per "caule"?
Como se chama tambem o caule d'uma flor?, d'uma
drvore?, d'uma espiga?
De quantas partes se compoe o caule d'uma drvore e
quaes sao?
Que 6 que nasce do caule?
Que teem algumas plantas para aguentar o caule?
Diga(m) alguns exemplos!
, Second Lesson.
The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns
(continued).
§ 2. Nouns with a Double Gender.
(a) With special ending for the feminine (cf. P. I,
§ 21):
(a) The ending o changes into a: pombo^ pomba.
Exc: didcono^ diaconiza.
(p) The ending ao changes into 6a : patrao principal,
patroa.
Ex.: bardOi baroneza; cidaddo, cidadd; irnulOy
irmd, etc. (see § 21).
(t) The ending or (or) adds a: leitor. Iritora.
Ex.: actor, actriz, etc. (see § 21).
The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns.
247
(b) The ending es (ez) adds a: portugues, portuguisa,
Exc: (only for adjectives) cortes, which is
the same for both genders,
(e) Nouns with any other ending do not follow de-
terminate rules.
Abbade abbot
abbadessa
alcaide alcalde, mayor
alcaidissa
archiduque archduke
archiduqueza
avo grandfather
av6
cgar czar
czarina
c<mde count
condessa
dem god
deusa
diique duke
dugue^za
herde hero
heroina
hdspede host; landlord, guest
hdspeda
infante infant; foot-soldier
infanta
mestre master, teacher
mestra
parente parent
parenia
inarques marquis
marquesa
monge monk
monja
peru turkey-cock
perua
poeta poet
poetisa
principe prince
princesa
propheta prophet
prophetisa
reo criminal, delinquent
ri
aacerdote priest
sacerdotisa
visconde viscount
viscondessa.
(b) Without changing their ending or meaning the
following words are (Bstinguished only by the article
(o for the masculine, a for the feminine). As they are
common to both genders, they are called "communs de
dois."
Artista artist
regente \ ,
governante f *
gerenie manager
suicida suicide
regidda regicide
conjttgicida conjugicide
consorte consort
mdrtir martyr
espia spy
compatriota country-man,
country-woman
persa Persian
belga Belgian
commensal \ table fellow,
conviva / commensal
cumplice accomplice
convalescente convalescent
pateta blockhead
parasita parasite
indigena indigenous
herege heretic
guia guide
Jdven youth, young girl.
248
Lesson 2.
(c) Besides these ''communs de dots'' which still are
distinguished by the different gender of the article,
there are others which are indiscriminately employed for
both genders, ones with the masculine, others with the
feminine article. They are called in Portuguese ''sohre-
communs." Please to note the following:
0 conjuge the married man a testemunha the witness
or wife
0 gemeo^ the twin boy or girl
0 interprete the interpreter
a crianga the child
(d) Without changing
different meaning:
0 guarda the watchman,
keeper, guard
0 cdbega the chief, leader
0 planeta the planet
0 trombeta the trumpeter
0 corneta the horn -blower
0 vogal the voter
0 crescenfe the crescent, half-
moon
0 atalaia the sentinel
0 vigia the guard
0 capital the capital, principal
0 lingua the interpreter
0 cura the parson
a sentinella the sentinel
a criatura the creature— e.g.,
«o grande estilista e infelie
criahira . . .».
of the ending, but with a
a guarda the guard, defence
a cahega the head
a planeta sort of chasuble
a trombeta the trumpet
a corneta the horn
a vogal the vowel
a crescente the flood
a atalaia the watch-tower
a vigia the watching
a capital the capital
a lingua the tongue
a cura the cure, healing.^
(e) With changing of the ending or meaning, gene-
rally indicating in the masculine a greater idea of size.
(N.B. — Sometimes the contrary; we mark these by *.)
0 banco the bench ; shop-board
B — Exchange, bank
0 barco* the bark, boat
0 cesto* the basket
0 fosso the ditch, trench
0 carvalho the oak
0 caleiro the gutter
0 horto* kitchen -garden
0 caldeiro* the kettle
0 madeiro the block
0 mosco* the mosquito
a banca the writing-table;
bar; basset
a barca the bark, ferry-boat,
lighter
a cesta the basket, maund
a fossa the pit, hole
a carvalha the little oak
a caleira the gutter
a horta the kitchen-garden
a caldeira the kettle
a madeira the wood
a mosca the fly
^ Employed also as an adjective: irmaos gemeos.
The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns.
249
0 pio the basin, winepress
0 poQO the well
0 riso* the laughter, smile
0 sacco'^ the bag
a pia the basin
a poga (poga) the pool
a risa the shout of laughter
a sacca the bag.
§ 6. Please to pay attention to the gender and
meaning of the following nouns, different in their ter-
mination and consequently in their gender:
Masculine.
0 aro the hoop
0 arco the bow; arch
0 barbo the barbel
0 barro the clay
0 bico the beak; bill; thorn
0 bolo the cake
0 bolso the pocket
0 boneco the doll; fig. puppet
0 bordo the board
0 cabego the top of a moun-
tain; chief
0 cabide the rack
0 cabido the chapter of a ca-
thedral
0 campo the field
0 cargo the office, employment
0 carogo the stone of a fruit
0 carpo the wrist
0 carrasco the hangman
0 carreiro the narrow path;
carter
0 carreto the waggonage;
freight
0 carreteiro the cart- man, carter
0 carteiro the postman
0 casco the skull; cask; hull
0 caso the case
0 castello the castle, tower
0 caudal the rapid
0 cavallo the horse
0 cepo the stump, block
0 cerco the circle, circuit ; siege
0 cevo the bait; decoy, lure
0 choco the brooding
Feminine.
A ara the altar(- stone)
a area the chest, coffer
a barba the chin; beard
u barra the bar; spar
a bica the water-pipe
a bola the ball
a bolsa the purse ; 5— Exchange
a boneca the doll, baby
a borda the border, edge
a cabega the head
a campa the grave
a carga the load, burden,
freight
a carroga the coach
a carpa the carp
a carrasca red-oak
a carreira the run, race, road ;
career
a carreta the cart
a carets the grimace, mask
a carreteira the lighter
a carteira the pocket-book
a casca the bark, rind
a casa the house
a Castella Castilian
a Cauda the tail, train
a cavalla the mackerel
a cepa the vine -stock, vine
a cerca the enclosure, hedge
a ceva the masting; food; lure
a choca the bowl; cattle-bell;
brood-hen
250
LesBon 2.
c cigarro the cigar
0 dmo the top; summit
o cohertor the blanket; quilt
0 colchdo the mattress
0 colchite the clasp
0 collo the neck, lap
0 conto the tale, story
0 cdrte the edge ; cut ; incision
o cunho the ^tamp, coin
0 custo the cost, expense
0 espinho the thorn
0 esquadro the square
0 estado the state
0 /oeld the fate ; popular song
0 fordo the burden, pack
0 fecho the bolt, bar
0 ferro the iron
0 folho the flounce, frill
o fdlio the folio; page
0 poiro the gillyflower
0 pd^ the draught
0 gorgUe the half-shirt
0 ^a<fo the will, accord
0 j^rro the jet, shoot of water
0 lance the throw, cast; trait,
lucky chance
0 Zawfo the throw; suit; space;
turn
o Imho the flax, linen
0 lixo the filth, dirt
0 lomho the loins, reins
0 ItUo the mourning
0 mago the mallet
0 malho the mall, mallet;
sledge
0 mango the handle of a flail
0 meado the middle, half
0 medo the fear
0 meio the half, middle ; means
o modo the mode, manner
a cigarra the balm-cricket,
grasshopper
a cima the top
a coberta the co ver(ing) ; shelter
a colcha the counterpane, quilt
a colcMta the eye(let)
a colla the glue
a conta the bill, account
a cdrte the court; as Cdrtes
the Parliament
a cunha the wedge, quoin
a custa the cost, charge
a espinha the fish-bone; spine
a esquadra the squadron
a estada the abode
a fada the fairy, fay
a farda the uniform
a fecha the conclusion
a ferra the* fire-shovel
a folha the leaf, sheet
a fdrma the form, shape
a forma the matrice, model
a goiva the gouge, hollow
chisel
a gola the throat, gullet
a gorgUa gratuity, tip
a grade the harrow, grate
a jorra the tar
a langa the lance, spear
a linha the line; row
a lixa the sea-calf; seal(-skin)
a lomba the hill, eminence
a luta the wrestling, combat
a maga the mace, club
a malha the mash; stitch;
speck
a manga the sleeve
a meada the hank, skein
a meda the stack of straw or
corn
a meia the stocking
a moda the fashion
The Gender of this Portugueee Nouns.
251
0 mdfo the mould
0 monte the mountain
0 mdrto the dead man^ corpse
0 mote the motto, device
0 moto the motion, impulse
0 novel(l)o the clew; ball
0 pago the reward
0 paVmo the span
0 papo the maw, crop
0 papa the pope
o partido the party, faction ;
resolution
0 passo the step
0 pasto the pasture, feed
0 pato the duck
0 pego the whirlpool, pit
0 pd(l)o the hair, down
0 pinheiro \ the fir-tree, pine
0 pinho I tree
0 pinto the chicken
0 pito = pinto ; pipe
0 ponto the point, stitch
0 porte the freight, postage ;
deportment
0 porto the port, harbour
0 poste the stake, pillar
0 posto the place; post
0 prdtico the pilot
o 2>reso the prisoner
0 quarto the room, quarter;
watch
o queixo the jaw(-bone)
0 raio the beam, ray; flash;
spoke
0 rato the rat
0 risco the danger; stroke of
a pen
a mofa the mockery
a monta the amount, quan-
tity
a morte the death
a mota the terrace; dam,
rampart
a novella the novel
a paga the pay
a palma the palm-leaf, palm-
tree
a(s) papa(s) the pap
0 papd the pa(pa), daddie
a partida the part, lot ; match
a passa the raisin
a pasta the portfolio; paste
a pata the female duck; paw,
claw
a pega the handle, ear, tedder
a pega the magpie
a pella the ball, tennis-ball
a pelle the skin
a pinha the pine-cone
a pinta the spot, mark
a pita the fibre of the aloe
a piteira the aloe
a ponia the point; top, tip
a porte the bridge
a porta the door
a posta the slice, cut; post-
Cage); courier
a prdtica the practice, ex-
perience
a presa the prey, booty
a quarta the fourth part or
class
a queixa the complaint; pro-
cess, action
a raia the stroke, dash; bor-
der; ray
a rata the she -rat; share
a risca the dash; parting (of
the hair)
252
Lesson 2.
0 rodo long stick to heap up
corn
0 rolo the roll(er), ball; taper
0 roUte the small roll
0 seguro the insurance
0 sello the stamp, seal
0 sino the bell
0 siso the good sense
o solo the soil, ground
0 telho the earthen cover
0 tenia the counter ; maulstick;
care
0 <es^o the cover, lid
0 tiro the shot
0 toldo the covering; awning
0 forwo the turn(bench)
0 ^nwco the latch.
0 troco the change, small coins
0 t'aso the vase, vessel ; urn ;
pot
0 villo the fleece
0 vento the wind
0 verbo the verb, word
a roda the wheel; circle;
round slice
a rdla the turtle-dove
a roUta the roulette
a segura the hoop -knife
a sella the saddle
a sina the flag; fate
a sisa the excise
a sola the leather; sole
a telha the tile, brick
a tenia the probe
a /esfa the forehead
a tira a strip
a tolda the quarterdeck ; awn-
ing
a torna the return; compen-
sation
a trinca a series of three ana-
logous things
a troca the truck, ' exchange
a vasa the slime, mud
a veldja the candle; sail
a venta the nostril
a verba the clause, article
§ 7. There are a few nouns which by the mas-
culine gander indicate the individual and by the femi-
nine the collective sense— e.g. :
0 fructo the fruit a frticia the fruitage, fruit
0 grito the scream a grita the crying, clamour
0 marujo the mariner a martija the crew
0 ramo the bough, twig a rama the foliage, branches.
§ 8. There is some affinity between these nouns
(§ 7 and § 5 (e)) and
(a) the so-called augmentativos, formed by the trans-
formation of the final syllable of certain nouns into
-^Oy which adds to the noun an idea of bigness and
sometimes that of deformity and ugliness; and
(b) the so-called dimunitivos, which attribute to the
noun an idea of smallness, of somebody or something
needing protection, and therefore that of a certain
tenderness (cf. P. I, L. 16).
The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns. 253
4. Thema.
This boy tears his stockings so that there is no possibility
of darning them. In the Botanical Garden of Lisbon are palm-
trees of more than sixty spans height. As this needle has
no point, not a stitch can be done \7ith it. The duck filled
its maw with pap. Please to give me some small coins, I
want to buy a few stamps. Of the whole crew only one
mariner was saved. Waiter, there are some guests who have
not yet had a slice of fish; you ought to be more attentive.
In the action brought (movida) against that spy, several
witnesses were summoned; amongst them as [an] interpreter
a native of Africa. Our globe, the moon, and other stars
are planets; the sun is a fixed star. When the moon is vi-
sible in the sky, we have moonshine. She renews her light
in the phases of each revolution and is a satellite of the earth.
Her four phases are; new moon, half moon, full moon, and
waning moon. The ebbtide and flood are phenomena in
connection with the crescent and the wane. Where there is
the most capital and paper currency (papel moeda) is in
the banks of the capital of England. As you so warmly take
the part of the Portuguese republicans, are you a republican
yourself? I do not belong to any political faction, but I sym-
pathise with the republican party and its leaders. An English
squadron performs its maritime manoeuvres in the bay of
Lagos on the Portuguese seashore. A square is used at
drawing. The crickets chirp during the hot season (a calma)
in the months of June, July, and August. Flies and mosqui-
tos may be driven away by the smoke of a cigar or a ciga-
rette. Consorts are often martyrs of society, and the children
of the married couple sometimes are unconsciously the cause
of domestic strife.
5. Leitura e Versao.
Nao 6 saudavel para gente sadia, quanto m6nos para gente
doente, a estada n'uma casa d'um estado mdnos salubre. A
prisao nas cidades portugufisas encontra-se muitas vezes na
melhor e maior pra^a: Chama-se terracjo ou eirado 0 telhado
piano d'uma casa ou seja 0 espa^o descoberto sobre uma casa
ou ao nivel d'um andar d'ella. Chama-se chifres, chavfilhos ou
pontas as excrescencias comiformes ou arma9ao do gado corni-
fero {or comuto). Na partida do deputado do partido pro-
gressista estiveram na gare os correligionarios e amigos pessoaes
d'elle. Neste anno ha pouca fructa : nao vingaram os fructos
das madeiras e pereiras. Em compensacjao d^ram boa colheita
os castanheiroS/ Por isso se veem agora muitas castanheiras
na rua a venderem castanhas assadas.
254 Lesson 2.
6. Para decorar (to be learnt by heart).
Voees d^animaes.
Palram p§ga e papagaio Opardal,damninhoaoscampos,
£ cacar^a a gallinha, Kao aprendeu a cantar;
Os temos pombos arrulanif Como os rates e as doninhas,
Oeme a r6la innocentinha. Apenas sabe chiar,
Mtige a vacca, herra o touro; 0 negro corvo crocUa\
Grasna a rS, ruge o le&o; Zune o mosquito enfadonho;
0 gato mia, uiva o lobo; A serpente, no deserto,
Tambem uiva e ladra o cao. Solta assohio medonho.
Belincha o nobre cavallo; Chia a lebre, grdsna o pato;
Os elephantes dSo urros; Oavem-se os porcos grunhir;
A timida ovelha Mia; Libando o succo das flores,
Zurrar 6 prdprio dos bnrros. Costuma a abelha zumbir.
Beg(yuga a sagaz raposa Bramam os tigres, as on9ag;
(Brutinho muito matreiro): Pia, pia o pintainho;
Nos ramos cantam as aves; Oucurita e canta o gallo;
Mas pia o mocho agoureiro. Ldte e gdne o cachorrinho.
Sabem as aves ligeiras A vitellinha da herros;
0 canto seu variar; 0 cordeirinho bdlidos;
Fazem gorgeios ds vezes, 0 macaquinlio dd guinchos;
Ab vezes poem-se a chUrar, A creancinha vagidos,
A faUa foi dada ao homem
Bet dos otUros animaes,
Nos versos Udos acima,
Be eneontranif em pobre rimay
As voees dos principaes.
(Pedro Diniz.)
Conversa^So;
Qne se entende per sabstantivos <commims de dois»?
Quaes (sSo) os snbstantivos que teem a mesma fdrma
para ambos os sexos?
Qae desinfincia da f6rma feminina teem os substantivos
commons : irmSo, barfio, lefto, ladrfto, propheta, monge,
rapaz, imperador, mestre . . .?
Qaal a diflferen^a entre nm c6sto e uma cesta? nm
hdrto e uma horta? o tromb^ta e a trombeta? am
vogal e uma vogal?
Quaes sfio os substantivos que, designando indivfduos,
sSo masculines, e femininos quando exprimen um
sentido de collectividade?
The Gender of the Portagueee Nouns. 255
Come se formam os augmentativos? os diminutives?
Qual 0 sentido accrescentado ao substantive pela syllaba
augmentativa ? e pela syllaba diminutiva?
Third Lesson.
The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns
(continued).
Compound Nouns.
§ 9. The Portuguese language does not contain so
many compound words as the English. It substitutes
them in different ways:
1. By adding a determinative noun, preceded by
-de to the appelative — e.g., oculo de m-ao eyeglass; amo-
lador de tesouras (e ^mvalhas) knife-grinder; escuma de
mar meerschaum; caixa de correio letter-box; chapeu de
palha straw-hat; criada de quarto house-maid; homba de
fogo fire-eugine.
2. By joining an adjective to the noun — e.g. bilhete
postal post-card; ministerio publico Attorney-General;
cal^o caseiro house-shoe; mina hulhifera coal-mine;
pinheiro tnanso nut-pine; empregado subalterno subaltern
functionary.
Note. — Sometimes the noun drops altogether (as also in
English), taking the adjective in its form and meaning;— e.g.,
0 postal; 0 subalterno.
3. By a genitive: casa da fructa fruit-cellar; costa
do mar sea-coast; empregado do correio post-official;
assento do cocheiro coach-box; porta da cidade town-gate.
4. By two nouns joined by another preposition than
de: compartimento para fumistas smoking-compartment;
banho aos pes foot-bath; papel para cartas letter-paper;
correspondencia por cartas epistolary intercourse; colher
para paixe fisht-rowel; medo a morte ieai of Death.
5. By the junction of any other particles— e.g.
OS afazeres (= a fazer) the business; os parabens
(= para bem) the congratulation ; a sempre-verde the
evergreen.
256 Lesson 8.
§ 10. Yet there is a certain number of compound
nouns, formed by various particles. Their gender cor-
responds, for living beings, to the natural sex or to
the conventional one. For inanimate things the
gender corresponds to that of the noun in such
compound words as are formed by a noun and another
particle (cf. however hate-folha, saca-rdlha, quebra-noz,
etc.). In substantives compounded of two nouns, the
gender mostly corresponds io that of the last or the
one which logically is of the greater importance.
BemarJc. — As there are a great many exceptions the
only means of attaining proficiency is by learning the article.
If you are in doubt, please to consult a dictionary.
§ 11. Examples of Compound Nonns formed:
(a) by two Substantives:
0 mestre-escola the schoolmaster
0 mestre-sala the master of ceremonies
0 mestre sapateiro the master shoemaker
0 goma-gut(t)a the gamboge
a goma-lacre the gumlack
0 guarda-portdo the door-keeper
0 guarda-iouga the cupboard
0 (or a) guarda-roupa the (keeper of the) wardrobe
0 guarda-livros the bookkeeper
a porta-cocheira the gateway
0 tenente -general the lieutenant-general
0 consul geral the consul-general
0 tenente-coronel the lieutenant-colonel
0 logar-tenente the lieutenant
a mao'tenente the small distance
0 paquete the packet-boat, — ship
0 pontape the kick, spurn
a pedm-iman the magnet
0 usufmcto the ijsufruct
0 varapau the (shepherd's) staff
a heir a- mar the sea -shore
a couve-fldr the cauly-flower;
also a great number of nouns compound with jxin
(pdurbalsamo, pdu-barro, pdu-canela etc.), designating trees
and shrubs and. being all of masculine gender.
(b) by Substantive and Adjectives:
a dguardente (dgua ardente) the brandy
a dguaforte the aquafortis
The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns. 257
0 amor-perfeito the pansy
0 cantochdo the church choir
0 cavallo-marinko the hippopotamus
0 porco-marinho the dolphin
a quinta-feira santa' the Maundy Thursday
0 terrapleno the terrace
a idade-media the middle age
amaomorta I the mortmain
hens de mao morta f i^iuaiu.
uma mdo-cheia a handful
0 morddmo-mdr the Lord Steward of the Household
0 porto-franco the free port
a pedra-infernal the nitrate of silver
0 terra-nova Newfoundland (dog).
(c) by Adjective and Substantive:
a centopeia the centipede
0 gentilhomem the gentleman
a machorfemea the (door-)hinge (and hasp)
0 meia-dia the midday
a meio-noite the midnight
a meio-corpo the bust, half body
a meia-lua the half moon, crescent
a menoridade (minoridade) the minority
0 salvo-conducto the safe conduct
0 porto franco the free port.
(d) by Verb and Substantive:
0 guarda-pd the dust-cloak
0 guarda-chuva the umbrella
0 guarda-fato the wardrobe, clothes-press
a lesa-majestade the I6se-majest6
a lesa-poesia the offence against poetry
a lesa-bom-gosto the offence against taste,, tactlessness
0 poHalandeifa the standard-bearer
0 porta-cocheira the coach -gate
0 porta-chaphis the hat-box
0 porta-lapis the port-crayon
0 porta-reldgio the watch-stand
0 porta-voz the speaking-trumpet
o lavapes the maundy, nipter
o lavapratos the dish-washer
o catavento the weathercock
0 chupa-fldr, obeija-flor the humming-bird
o hatefolha the gold-beater
0 chupamel the honeysuckle; humming-bird
Portuguese CJonversation-Grammar. 17
258 Lesson 3.
0 girasol the sunflower
0 para-raios the lightning-conductor
0 passafempo the pastime
0 passaporte the passport
0 quebramar the breakwater, pier
0 quebra-lus the light-screen
0 saca-rolha(s) the corkscrew
0 salva-vidas the safety-buoy; life-preserver, life-boat
um papa-Uguas a stout walker
0 pesa-cartas the letter-balance
0 pesa-dgua the watergauge
0 or a papamoscas the gaper
0 or a papa-jantares the sponger, parasite
0 or a papa-nostias \
0 or a papa-missas \ the devotee; hypocrite.
0 or a papa-santos J
(e) by two Verbs:
0 bule-hule (or bole-bole) the quaking-grass
0 ganhaperde sort of play at cards in which the winner
loses.
0 vae-vem the to and fro; up and down
0 passe-passe the jaggling(- trick).
(f) by Preposition and Substantive:
a antecdmara \ ,■, , , , ,
a antesala ( ^^^ antechamber, anteroom
a untemurulha \ ^
0 antemuro \
a ante-data the antedate
0 antepasto the first dish
a anteporta the double door, screeu
a antepopa the forepart of the stern
a antivespera the day before the eve
0 antipapa the antipope
0 antidoto the antidote
a. antithese the antithesis
a contrabanda the contraband
a contra-escritura the counterbond
a contra- or dem the countermand
a contrasenha the watchword, counter-ticket
0 contratempo the annoyance ; vexation ; inconvenience
a entrefolha the inter-leaf
a entrelinha the interlineation
0 entremeio the insertion
OS pardbene the congratulation
The Gender of the Portuguese Nouns. 259
a semrazao the groundlessness
0 semsahor the insipidity, disgust
0 sobresalto the (sudden) emotion, fright
a sub-ordem the subdivision
0 posf-escrito the postscript
0 concidaddo the fellow -citizen
0 consoeio the companion, associate.
(g) by Adverb and Substantive:
0 bemfeitor the benefactor
a malquerenga the malevolence
0 malgrado the displeasure
0 malnascido the one who is born under an evil star,
unlucky fellow
0 acima-mencionado the aforesaid
0 abaixo-assignado the undersigned.
(h) by three words:
o mal-me-quer (malmequer) \ ■, .
0 bem-me-quer (bemmequer) f ^ ^
0 ndo-me-deixes the forget-me-not
0 pe-de-gallo the hop(s)
0 pe-de-lido the lion's-foot
0 pdu-de-lacre the gumlac-tree
0 pdu'de-cabelleiro the milliner's block
0 rabo-de-gallo the thunder- cloud
0 valete de pdu the knave of clubs
uma tuta-e-meia an insignificance.
7. Thema.
Hamburg is a free port since 1888. The countermand
of the lieutenant colonel concerned only the subdivision
of the pioneers who were about to open a ditch near the bul-
wark. The congratulation of his book-keeper gave pleasure to
my partner; but the postscriptum of his letter containing,
the news of the bankruptcy of a bank, caused him a sudden
emotion and was a great annoyance to him. It is indeed an act
of tactlessness giving such news in a letter of congratulation.
In the great kitchen-garden is still much cauliflower and other
vegetables; but in the small kitchen- garden there is only to
be found quaking-grass, daisies, forget-me-nots, and pansies.
The Newfoundland dogs are dogs belonging to a race which
is said to originate (que dizem procedente) of Newfoundland.
The gum-bearing croton (arvore gummifera) and the gam-
boge-tree (guteira) are trees of the tropics from which the
gumlac and the gamboge are extracted.
17*
260 Lesson 3.
8. TersSo.
Quando estavamos na beira-mar, vimos muitas vezes os
porcos-marinhos, como vulgarmente se chamam os delfins ou
golfinhos, a saltar fora das ondas da resaca. Um catavento 6
urn aparfilho que indica a direc^ao dos ventos; tern a forma
d'uma bandeirinha, geralmente de ferro ou lata, enfiada n'uma
haste, 6 coUocada no alto dos edificios. 0 para-raios e iim
apar6lho, formado principalmente de uma haste metallica e
destinado a attrahir as descargas electricas da atmosphera, li-
vrando d'ellas os logares ou edificios proximos. Na quinta-feira
santa ha lavap^s em muitS,s igrejas catholicas, executado pelos
prelados ou outros altos saoerdotes. No Porto vi o cardeal,
em LisbOa o patriarcha a celebra-lo. Os muitos afazfires pro-
prios do acima-mencionado, assim como do abaixo-assignado
nSo Ihes permittem occuparem-se dos afazfires alheios.
9, Leitura.
A Lusitdnia.
Antes de haver aqui hespanhoes e mouros, n'um peda^o
do que e hoje Portugal, havia os lusitanos. Esses lusitanos
eram os naturaes de uma regiao chamada Lusitania, regiao
que occupava especialmente, a principio, os territorios entre o
Douro e o Tejo, e depois chegou a alastrar-se pelos que formam
hoje as provincias todas de Portugal, menos o Minho, Tras-
os-Montes e parte do Douro. Estes lusitanos viviam muito
descan^ados ca em sua casa; mas com o rodar dos tempos,
OS carthaginfises, que eram uns povos oriundos da cidade
de Carthago, ao norte da Africa, chegaram a domina-los, at6
que esses mesmos carthagin6ses foram tambem vencidos
pelos r Oman OS que passaram depois a dominar elles s6s.
Esses romanos viram-se e desejaram-se com os lusitanos, princi-
palmente com um tal Viriato que a frente da rapaziada
lusitana Ihes deu que fazer, e os venceu em muitos combates
at^ que o mataram a trai^ao quando dormia. Dizem que
Viriato era um pastor da Serra da £]strella e ainda hoje ha
em Vizeu um sitio a^ que chamam «Cava de Viriato», por
ser fama que morou ali esse valente capitao, que e o mais
antigo dos heroes portugufises.
(Trindade Goelho: 3^. Livro de Leitura.)
Conyersac^fio.
The answers to be given with the wording of No. 9.
Quaes foram os habitantes de Portugal antes dos Por-
tugueses ?
1 See P. II, L. 11, §48 (a) (P).
Formation of the Plural of Nouns. 261
Quando ainda nao havia hespanhoes e mouros, quern
habitava o pais?
Donde eram naturaes os lusitanos?
Qual era a regiao comprehendida, a principio, pela Lu-
sitania ?
E quaes eram os temtorios que occupava depois?
Como viviam os lusitanos?
Quern chegou a domina-los?
Quern eram os carthaginSses ?
Que tempo durou o dominio dos carthagineses ?
Com quem se viram e desejaram os romanos, principal-
mente ?
Como morreu Viriato?
Onde ha a chamada «Cava de Viriato » ?
Porque se chama assim esse sitio?
Que dizem que Viriato era?
E como e considerado?
Fourth Lesson.
Formation of the Plural of the Nouns.
The general rules for forming the plural of the nouns
have been given already in the 2°^ Lesson of the First
Part. They will here be repeated in coherence and duly
completed.
N.B. — The same rules apply to the adjective.
§ 12. (a) By adding an -s is formed the plural
of all those substantives (and adjectives) which end in
a vowel, an w, or a diphthong — e.g., rede(s), Xiae(s)^ ir-
md(s), germen(s), pau(s), grdo(s). Exc: o canon the
church law, canon, catalogus, forms the plural cdnones;
0 ademan the gesture, ademanes.
Remark. — Of those words ending in accented -do only
a few take an -s without changing the form of the singular;
— e.g., irmdo(s), christdo(s)f cidaddo(s), mdo(s), bengdo(s) (this
only if accented on the first syllable, else iengdes. Those
ending in unaccented -do (allowed to be written also -am)
follow the general rule: o orfdo, orfdos (orphans).
(b) Some words in accented -ao change their ter-
mination into -des—e.g.: pdo, pdes; alemao, alemdes] es-
C7'ivd0f escrivAes] cdo^ caes.
262 Lesson 4.
(c) Most words in accented -do change this termi-
nation into -oes: condao gift, magic wand condoes; coragdo,
coragoes; lido (le&o), lioes; alde&o^ aldedes; cangdo, cangoes;
mddo, meloes etc.
(d) The nasal endings -em, -im, -om, -urn change -m
into -?^ before adding -5, thus: -ens, -ins, -ons, -uns] ar-
maeem, armasens', hem, hens; fim^ fins; som, sons; atumy
atuns.
(e) Nouns ending in -r, -5 or -z add -es — e.g. : doutor
doutores; mulher, mulheres; portugues, Portugueses, pass,
pazes.
'^.B.^Cardcter modifies its accent in the plural: ca-
racUres.
(f) Remain unaltered those nouns ending in -s pre-
ceded by an unaccented vowel or falling diphthong —
e.g.: o(s) alferes the ensign(s); o(s) simples the simple-
ton(s), (ihQ ^ImxbX simplices being antiquated); o(s) lapis
the pencil(s) ; o(s) caesihe quay(s); o(s) arrais the master(s)
of a boat.
Exc. : calis (or calix) forms calis or ccdices; dem
forms deuses.
Those few nouns in -x with preceding unaccented
vowel change -x into -ces: 0 appendix (or appendice); 0
index (or indice), indices. See also calix.
(g) Nouns ending in -aZ, -ol, -ul drop the -I and
add -es: animal, animaesi sol, soes; paHl, paues.
Exc: Consul (vice-consul, proconsul) and mdl keep
the 'I in the plural: consules^ males; 0 real forms reis,
(h) Those words ending in -el loose the -I, adding
-is: annel, anneis; fiel, fieis,
(i) Those in accented -il drop the -Z, adding -s:
funil, funis, civile civis.
(j) Those in unaccented -il change -il into -eis:
projectU, projecteis; fdcil, fdceis.
§ 13. Proper names and foreign words form their
plural regularly by adding -5 or changing the ending
after the rule: Os Bragangas, os Gamas, as tndias, os
Formastion of the Plural of Nouns.
Algarves, cts Americas; os deficits^ as erratas^, as quotas,
OS quocientes^ etc.
N.B.— Names of towns ending by -s are singular: a rica
Londres; a sdbia Athenas; Bruxellas foi ftmdada no sectdoVII
(cf. § 3, Eemark II).
§ 14. Some nouns are used only in the Plural
at least in their meaning here given:
as dncias sickness
as andas stilts
as andadeiras leading-strings
OS ambages subterfuge, excuse
OS amoricos flirtation
OS annaes annals
as bddas \ -,,.
as nupcias / ^^ ^^^
OS brSdos notch-weed, spinage
OS hrdccolos broccoli
OS cdnones church-law
es cereaes cereals
OS c^^tus cirrus
OS cmmes \ . ■,
OS Gumidus (or cumuios^ cu-
mulus
as entradas the beginning and
as sahidas the* end in the
connection of: desejar boas
sahidas do anno velho e boas
entradas do anno novo wish-
ing a happy new year
OS espinafres spinage
as exequias exequies, funeral
OS imponderdveis imponderable
matters
OS midlos brains
OS nimbus (or 7iimbns) nimbus
OS dculos spectacles
OS parabens felicitation
as sei4cias ill treatment, cruelty
OS stratus stratus
OS trdpicos tropics.
N.B. — There may also be read funeraes instead of funeral;
bnt the plural, being a gallicism, is to be avoided as in-
correct.
§ 15. Only in the Singular are employed the
names of sciences, arts, qualities and other abstract
nouns, of metals, elements and materials, as also the
infinitives applied as nouns and in their proper meaning.
Being used in the plural form, they have another,
though cognate, meaning. Ex.:
0 direito the right, law, juris-
prudence
0 desenho the (art of) drawing
a pintura the (art of) painting,
picture
a bondade the kind(li)ness
Plural: duties
* drawings
» pictures
» kindnesses
^ So according to modern grammarians. Others indicate
errata as mbst- f, pi. and employ the singular o errata after the
mod«ii 0 problema, o dilemma, o x>rogrammay etc. Errata is also
enipl%'ed as subst. f. s. in the meaning of English errata.
264 Lesson 4.
0 amdr the love Plural: beloved ones ; flirtation
a saude the health » toasts
0 cohre the copper » coins or objects of
copper
0 fogo the fire » fireplaces
a sida the silk » silks; bristles
0 mdro the glass » window-panes
0 trigo the corn, wheat » cereals; bread
0 panno the cloth ; shawl ; » shawls
sails
0 ferro the iron -> chains
a tinta the ink » colouring, colours
0 ar the air > prevailing winds ; cli-
mate
a dgua the water > medicinal waters ; wa-
tering
0 gesso the gypsum ■> figures in plaster
0 dever the being obliged; » duty, obligation
duty
0 andar the striding » stories, floors.
10. Oral £xercise. Exercioio oral.
Please to put the sentences of the Reading Lesson I. in
the first Lesson into the Plural.
11. Thema.
Those gentlemen are German teachers and well instructed
authors. Some courteous Englishmen have been our amiable
guests these last months. On those fertile fields where a few
weeks ago still grew green seeds, are now only faded grasses
and flowers to be found. Among the quadrupeds there are
wild beasts and domestic animals. (Os) Dogs^ cats, cows,
sheep, horses belong to the domestic animals; (the) lions,
will cats, panthers, lynxes are beasts of prey; (the) hares,
foi:es, stags, roes and other horned animals are game. The
magic wands are said to have the gift of finding the springs
oat in the ground. There are many villages in the Alemtejo
T/ith less than a hundred fires. Of glass are made drinking-
^lasses, panes, spectacles, eyeglasses and telescopes, as well
as many other things. The funeral of the infant followed
very fast (= de perto) her wedding. The climate of the Isle
of Madeira is most beneficent for consumptive people. Also
the climate and the medicinal waters of the Gerez in northern
Portugal are most famous. The State has the right to collect
new duties. The community sang a church-choir, while a
group of young men, boys and girls entuned in a loud voice
(pi.) Christian songs and hymns.
Formation of the Plural of Nouns. 265
12. Yersao.
0 tigre e o lobo sac animaes ferozes. 0 chumbo e o
ferro sac metaes pesados. A aguia e o abutre sao valentes
aves de rapina. 0 ferro e a pedra sao duros. A torre e a
casa sao altas. A legoa e o kilometro sSo dist^ncias com>
pridas. 0 cao e o gato sao animaes dom^sticos liteis. 0
diamante e a esmeralda sao pedras preeiosas. 0 sal e a pi-
menta sao temperos necessarios. As floras naturaes e as
(flores) artificiaes sao bonitas. A marinha inglfisa e a (ma-
rinha) francesa sao fortes. As balei^s e os tubaroes sao
grandes. 0 vinho e a cerveja sao bo£^8 bebidas. Os proj^cteis
tinham-lhe penetrado os pulmoes.
13. Leitnra.
Nuvens.
Da terra e do mar elevam-se vapores que se espalham pela
atmosphera. Nas regioes elevadas daiatmosphera eases vapores
encontram um ar frio; e ao contacto d'esse ar, os vapores
resfriam: resfriando, formam as nuvens. Da mesma maneira,
quando no espaQO se encontram duas massas de ar, nma mais
quente e hiimida do que a outra, a mistura d'essas duas
massas de ar tambem da origem a nuvens. Estas sao pois
pequenas gdttas d'agua suspensas na atmosphera e provenientes
do resfriamento do vapor. Apertando o frio com ellas, essas
gOttas, reunindo se, caem em chuva ; ou esfriando mais, tomam-
se solidos, caindo em forma de neve ou geada.
As nuvens teem vdrias formas: — quando semelham mon-
tanhas d'algodoes, arredondadas, umas encastelladas per cima
das outras, chamam-se aimulus. Quando lembram pequenos
filamentos desligados de la cardada, denominam-se cirrus.
Quando formam camadas delgadas e continuas, mais ou menos
extensas, limitadas por linhas horizontaes, teem o nome de
stratus. E quando lembram um panno cinzento-escuro, fran-
jado ou esfarrapado nos bordos, chamam-se nimbus.
Os cumulus denominam-se tambem algoddes, e sao mais
frequentes no verao do que no inverno. Formados de manha,
desapparecem geralmente de tarde, quando se nao misturam
uns com os outros e dao chuva. Os cirrus, chamados tambem
rabos-de-gallo, sao as nuvens mais elevadas. Annunciam mu-
dan^a de tempo: chuva no verao, e frio ou g6lo no inverno.
Os stratus veem-se em geral ao p6r-do-sol, perto do hori-
zonte. Os nimbus chamam-se vulgarmente nuvens de chuva,
e sao conhecidos ainda pOr aguaceiros.
(Trindade Coelho: Terceiro Livro de Leitura.)
266 Lesson 5.
ConTersa<^ao.
Como se chama a mulher de um abegao? de urn archi-
duque? de um barao? de um camponfis? de um
cidadao ? de um conde ? de um czar ? de um duque ?
de um embaixador?' de um imperador? de um
marques ? de um principe ? de um rei ? de um sultSo ?
de um visconde?
Qual 6 a forma feminina de doutor, auctor, artista, in-
t^rprete, hospede, mestre, deus^ martyr, conviva, in-
digena ?
Como se chama a fSmea do bode? do boi? do cao? do
carneiro? do cavallo? do gallo? do pato? do leao?
do pavao? do peni? do veado? do l6bo?
Fifth Lesson.
Formation of the Plural of the Nouns
(continued).
§ 16. Difference of meaning between the singular
and plural forms.
(a) Besides those nouns mentioned in § 15 and
other analogous words, there are such the Plural of
which has a second meaniug besides that of the Sin-
gular. Please to notice:
a artna the weapon, arm as armas arms, weapons
a hexiga the bladder as bexigas small-pox
a cdrte the court as Cdrtes House of Commons
a entranha the bowels as entranhas heart, character
ft f^i-ia the pay^ salary^ list as fh'ias holidays
of appointments
0 folle the pair of bellows os folles bagpipe
a fonte the spring as forties temples
0 ghiero the gender os gSneros victuals
a letra the letter, character as letras literature
o midlo the crumb, brain os midlos brains •
0 dculo the telescope os dculos spectacles
0 zelo the zeal os zelos jealousy
a venta the nostril as ventas nose
a vispera the eve as vhperas vespers.
Formation of the Plural of Nouns. 267
(b) Some substantives indicate in the singular form
the male individual and in the plural the totality of
the respective male and female persons:
0 pat the father os pais the parents
o filho the son os filhos the children
0 irmdo the brother os irmaos the brothers and
sisters
0 criado the man-servant os criados the men- and maid-
servants
o avo the grandfather os avds the grandfather and
grandmother
0 Ho the uncle os tios the uncle and aunt
0 conde the count os condes count and countess
0 hdmem the man os hdmens mankind.
§ 17. For the Plural of the Compound Words
sure and satisfying rules cannot be given. However, it
may be noticed that:
(a) those words compound by an unalterable par-
ticle and a noun, add an -5 to the latter: antedataSy
sohrenomes, ahaixo-assignados;
(b) those compound by a verb and a noun, add
the -s of the plural only to the noun: passa-tempos,
porta-handeiras^ guarda-chuvas, girasoes^ quebramares ;
(c) words compound of two nouns add the -s only
to the last: guarda-portoes^ beiramares, coiive-flores,
mestre-salas. On the contrary : a porta-cocheira (= 2^orta
de cocheira), portas-cocheiras; tenentes-generaes; tenentes-
coroneis; capitdes-tenentes.
(d) Those formed of a substantive and an adjective
take the -s of the plural partly only at the end, partly
for both elements — e.g.: as aguardentes, os cantochdlos,
as mdo-cheiaSy os meio-dias^ as meia-noites, os salvo-con-
du^tos. But: os amores-perfeitos; os cavallos-marinhos.
(e) Those formed of two verbs take the -s at the
end: os bule-bules, os vae-vens.
(f) Of nouns compound of three words, those joined
by de generally take the plural form for the first word,
this being a substantive; the others add the -s on their
end: os paus de cabelleiro] os paus de lacre; but mal-
me-queres.
268 Lesson 5.
§ 18. Observations on the Pronunciation of the
Plural of Certain Nouns.
A certain mimber of substantives ending in -o,
whose accented vowel of the penultima is a close 6 /o/,
change this 6 in the plural into open 6 [dJ — e.g. : o 6vo
fovt^ the egg, ovos fovuf] (cf. Part. I, § 74).
These substantives to which belongs also avo are:
abrolho cliff, rock, avo grandfather, cachopo boy; cardgo
kernel, atone; choco cuttle-fish, brooding, adj.: hatched;
0 choro weeping, composto mixture, corcovo jump, ca-
priole, corno horn, coro choir, chorus, corpo body, corvo
raven, despojo cover, destrogo ruins, escolho reef, esforgo
effort, esposo husband (pi. also esposos besides espdsos)^
estdrvo hindrance, fogo to fire, fdl(e)go breath, rest, fdrno
oven, foro jurisdiction, forro lining, fosso ditch, imposta
duties, jogo play, miolo brains, olho eye, osso bone, dvo
egg^ pescogo neck, pogo well, porco pore, porto harbour,
posto post, pdvo i^eoiple, preposto or proposto substitute,
reforgo supply, renovo shoot, spring, rogo demand, soro
whey, serum, soccorro succour, supposto supposition,
iijolo brick, tdjo gorse, tordo throstle, torno lathe,
tremdco grain of lapine, troco small coin, trogo stump,
fragment, body of soldiers, etc.
Thus: ahrolhos^ avos, cachopos, carogos etc.
This modification does not take place in the words
adorno ornament, a tire, amor love, holsa purse, holso
pocket, estojo case, box, folha leaf, folho flounce, frill,
globo globe, gosdo grease, fat, go^m cap, gorro hood,
cape, goso joy, enjoyment; gorto taste; gota drop; molho
sauce, tronco trunk, stump; thus: adornos, holsos, esto^
jos, etc.
14. Thema.
Among the persons who assisted at the funeral (exequies)
cf the brother and sister, there were bopides their parents,
their grandparents and the servants, more than a hundred
men, but only a few women. All men are mortal. Of what
died the children of the count and countess? They are said
to have succumbed to the measles or small-pox. The arms
over the chief entry has been covered with crape in sign
of mourning. — To make these tasks correct, every care is to
Formation of the Plural of Noons. 269
be employed and particular attention to be bestowed upon gender
and number of the nouns. The shopkeeper of the next corner
sells victuals and other goods of all kind? . I bought there
5 pounds of sugar, 2 kilos of coffee, 3 litres of wine, and
6^3 meters of ribljon, as also half a dozen pairs of gloves
and three dozens and a half of handkerchiefs. — In Lisbon
there are in the halls (= portal or vestihulo) of the better
houses doorkeepers sitting behind ornamental tables, to give
information to the visitors and to receive and hand over to
the residents visiting-cards or any kind of commissions. The
Portuguese peasants like to eat boiled grains of lupine. (The)
tastes differ: while some like pork, others prefer eggs,
and others still like sauces best. The Portuguese woods are
full of gorse, a prickly plant of which there are various kinds.
These gorses generally grow on dry ground and bear (== dar)
yellow blossoms.
15. Versao.
Todas as segundas e quintas-feiras os guarda-livros d^aquel-
las casas d'exporta^ao teem mais que fazer do que rios outros
dias da semana, por serem v^speras da partida dos paqufites.
As vezes nao bastam os esfor^os d'esses empregados para
senhorear todos os trabalhos, mas 6 preciso pedir ref6r(jo aos
prepCstos e mais empregados. Destes troQos d'arvore reben-
taram alguns renovos, e por entre estes destro^os de tijolos e
esses abrolhos ha muitas gavinhas de hera agarradas as fendas
pelas adhesivas. Os zfilos muitas vezes sao signal, ou de poucos
miolos ou de poucas entranhas. Chama-se Cortes ao parla-
mento portuguSs, assim como ao edificio, onde estd o parla-
mento; de ordinario sao abertas no dia dois de Janeiro, Em
Lisboa ha guarda-portoes em todas as melhores casas particu-
lares. Nos mercados compram-se muito baratas todas as hor-
tali^as, taes como as couve-flores, os brdccolos, os espinafres,
as az6das, os brfidos e outras hervas; e os mal-me-queres e
amores-perfeitos as mao-cheias.
10. Leitura.
Tomada de Santarem^ (1147).
Na noite do sabbado, destinada para o assalto, tornava-se
probabilissimo que os atalaias.e roldas^ estiv.essem descuidados.
Se, como parece, o calculo foi este, cdlculo na verdade nao
^ Santarem, a town upon the Tagus in the province of
Estremadura, the ancient Scalabis of the Eomans and once one
of the strongest bulwarks of the Saracens.
' Molda, antiquated, modernly ronda = patrol.
270 Lesson 5.
exempto de perfidia^ as esperaiKjas dos christaos falharam em
parte. No logar onde habitualmente nao havia sentinellas,
descobriam-se agora duas, que mutuamente se espertavam
a vozes.
A pequena hoste, cuja rectaguarda o principe ^ fechava,
parou entao no meio de uma seara, esperando que os vigias
adormecessem com a modorra do quarto d'alva. Largas horas
Ihes deviam parecer estas em que esperavam; mas os dois
musulmanos cederam por fim ao somno. Pelo tecto da casa
de um olleiro contigua ao muro, Mem Ramires coseu-se com
este e procurou com a ponta da lan^a segurar uma escada ^s
ameias; mas, falhando-lhe o tiro, a edcada caiu com grande
ruido. Nao titubeoa elle entre a vida e a morte e, curvando-se,
ergueu sobre os hombros um soldado, que lan^ou as maos a,
aresta da muralha, e, pulando acima, p6de amarrar a escada
a uma das ameias. N'um relance o alferes subiu com o pendao
real e hasteou-o. Quasi a um temgo Mem Ramires se achou
ao pe d'elle. Tudo isto foi obra de um instante; mas o ruido
despertara, de feito, as sentinellas. Olharam : o pavoroso estan-
darte do tyranno Ibu Errik estava la como o espectro da morte.
Estupefactos, perguntaram ambos com voz tomada: — Quern
sois? — Fora impossivel enganal-os. Tr6s vozes clamaram em
brados confusos: Nazarenos! TrSs eram tambem os christaos
que se achavam no adarve. Mem Rodrigues respondeu com
o grito de guerra: — Santiago e rei Aflfonso! (Continua.)
ConyersaQao.
Que ^ Santarem? Como se chamava antigamente?
Que importancia tinha sob o dominio dos saracenoa
(mouros) ?
Por quem foi tomada? E em que anno?
Quem 6ra Afifonso Henriques? E quando reinava?
Qual era o calculo dos assaltadores ?
Quem deu o primeiro assalto? e como?
Qual foi o resultado d'essa tentativa?
Como reparou Mem Ramires o mallogro?
Como se descreve o encontro dos portugufisens com os
saracenos ?
» Aflfonso Henriques, first king of Portugal, 1128—1185.
Use of the Article. 271
Sixth Lesson.
Use of the Article.
§ 19. The definite Article (artigo definido) is not
only employed before nouns (nomes communs] but also
in the following cases:
(a) It substantivates any other particle, any letter
or even a whole sentence employed as a subject, attri-
bute, or object, nameh^:
(a) attributive adjectives: o hello, o licito, o
sublime;
(P) infinitives: A naturesa fez o comer para o
viver. 0 gahares-te de sdhio mostra seres igno-
rante;
(t) prepositions: adverbs, conjunctions, letters—
e.g.: Defender o contra d^uma questdo. 0
coma, 0 qua/ndo, o porque^ o A(hc) ;
(b) phrases: 0 nao posso dos negligentes e o nuo
quero dos contumazes, valem quasi o mesmo.
(b) It changes appellatives into proper names; for
instance o Forto (= harbour); a Extremadura (= the
extreme border); a Beira (= brink, bank); o Funchal
(= a field set with fennel) ; a Bahia (== bay) ; o Bio de
Janeiro ; a Granja {= farm, grange), o EspinJio (= spine)
Portuguese bathing-places; a Terceira (= the third),
island of the Azores.
(c) On the other hand, it changes proper names into
appellatives : os Alhaq;uerques, os Castros, os Camdes — i.e.
prominent naval leaders such as Affonso d' Albuquer-
que and D. Joao de Castro, or famous poets like Camoes;
for instance : Gil Vicente foi chamado o Plauto portugues
Gil Vicente was called the Portuguese Plautus.
N.B.— Also family names indicating totality may be em-
ployed in the plural.
(d) The definite Article is also employed with proper
names preceded by an adjective (young, old, little, poor
included) or followed by an apposition — e.g. : o eloquente
Cicero ; Guilherme o Conquistador, young Henry o joven
Henrique.
272 Lesson 6.
Are excepted from this rule santo (Santo) and sdo
(Sao) Saint, as also the ordinary numbers employed
with names of regents, and several other appositions:
Santo Antonio e o padroeiro de Lisboa. A hihlia, tradu-
Ma por Sdo Jeronymo, e conhecida pclo nome de, « Vid-
gata^. Luis Quatorze, Carlos-Quinto^ Alexandre Magno\
Deus Poderoso.
(e) The definite article is employed with the names
of the seasons : a primavera Spring, no verdo in Summer,
durante o inverno during winter.
(f) Sometimes the definite article is found without
a substantive, which is to be substituted. It then often
corresponds to our that^ tJwse. Ex. : As merces que receM
sao manifestos a todos; aos de fora com esponto da sua
grandesay aos de casa com inveja de minJia fortuna.
(g) Contrary to the English, the definite article is
generally employed before a possessive adjective, not
indicating parentship : o meu jardim, a vossa casa etc. ;
but minha prima, seu marido etc.
N.J3.— This rule is not alway strictly observed.
The word indicating possession being a pronoun,
it has no article : Este livro e meu [this hook is mine) ;
esse e teu^ aqiielle n&o e nosso.
(h) The definite article is employed with parts of
the body or its clothing, bodily qualities or states,
and also wherever the relation between possessor and
possession is evident (in English there is employed the
indefinite article or the possessive adjective instead)..
Mia tern as cabellofi lour as e as olhos pretos.
She has fair hair and black eyes.
Falava corn a- cabega erguida e o brago estendido.
He spoke with his head raised and his arm extended.
Maria i muito parecida com a mde.
Mary is much resembling her jnother.
Tiraram as chapeus.
They took their hats off.
Calgdmos as lavas we put our gloves on.
Ella tern a garganta inflammada.
She has her throat inflamed.
Use of the Article, 273
Elle tern a bocca rasgada, as pernas compridas, a cinta
delgada.
He has a large mouth, long legs, a fine waist.
Ter uma dor de denies, uma ddr de cabSga.
To have a tooth-ache, a head-ache, as in English, but in
the plural form: ter ddres de denies, de cabega,
§ 20. The definite Article is omitted:
(a) before proper names (cf. however § 19, (b), (c)
and (d).
N.B. — In familiar speech the article is often employed
before names of persons : 0 Carlos fox levar a carta. 0 Ber-
nardino Machado ^ republicano. Also the article may be put
before the names of well-known artists— e.g., As Bddas de
Cana, pintadas pelo Veronese, e a Kermesse do Rubens . . .
Exc. : Are excepted from this rule the names of the
seas, rivers, mountains and continents, as well as certain
countries and provinces which are always employed
with the article (o Atldntico, o Mcmdego, o CaramulOy
a Europa^ a Alemanlia^ a Japdo, a Extremadura etc.;
but without the article: Portugal^ Trds-os-Montes). Also
the article is found always before a plural name of
countries: as tndias; os (dois) Algarves; os Est ados
Unidos (do Brasil) etc.
(b) before houns, especially abstract ones, which (a)
are quite generally employed, or (p) as an attribute —
e.g. : Pobrejsa nao e vileza poverty is no crime. Fadecer
por fbrga e fraqueza; n&o desanimar nos trahalhos^ neces-
sidade. Yet you may also read and say: Inveja e urn
vicio envy is a vice.
(c) in vocatives — i.e., addressing persons or personi-
fied beings : Filhos (my sons) jd sei que ndo posso 4u^ar
muUo. Hervas do prado^ vossa vida e morte e innocente
Ye herbs of the meadow, your life and death are in-
nocent.
(d) with the names of the months: Estamos em
novevifiber, Foi em margo do anno passado que . . ,
However : Todo o (mez de) Janeiro esteve frigidissimo.
(e) with the names of diseases, generally employed
in English with the article: Elle tern hexigas (the small-
pox), tinha saranipo (the measles) : tem typho he has the
typhus.
Portuguese Conyersatlon-Gramiuar. 18
274 Lesson 6.
§ 21. The article, though generally omitted before
names of islands and towns, is employed:
(a) when they are accompanied by an adjective or
some other attributive determination — e.g. : 0 terremoto
de 1755 destruiu quasi completamente a velha Lishda; da
qual a Lishda d'Jioje e muito differente.,
(b) with those proper names formed by an appel-
lative (cf. § 19, (b): a Madeira, a Guarda (town of
Portugal); 0 Cairo (formed after the Arabian).
§ 22. Contrary to the EngHsh, the definite article
is generally employed:
(a) before material and abstract nouns in the nomi-
native (as a subject, sometimes also as a predicate). 0
ar e mais leve do que a dgua air is lighter than water;
Cf.: 0 vinJio e feito de uvas . . . esse liquido e (o) vinho
... 0 vinagre e vinho azedo . . . o vinagre e feito de
vinho . . . Tambem se fas vinagre de cerveja . . . da beter-
raha se faz assucar. 0 chumbo e mais pesado que o ouro.
0 medo 6 mau conselheiro;
(b) before nouns which, in contrast to § 20, (b),
are employed in a restrictive meaning — e.g.:
A pobreza de bens materiaes nao e villeza, mas sim a
pobriza de dignidade.
Poverty of material goods is no disgrace, but poverty
of dignity is.
Antes a pobreza honrada,
Do que a riqueza roubada.
Rather honourable poverty than robbed riches.
A rega ou a chuva excessivas prejiddicam as plantas.
Excessive watering or rains damage the plants.
(c) before the cardinal points North and South and
before the names of the feasts— e.g.: para o sul, para
0 norte, ao sul, ao norte ; e.g. : da norte para o sul from
North to South; but: de teste or d'este^ a (or ao) deste
from East to West; pela Pdsc(h)oa about Easter, ao
Natal at Christmas;
(d) with collective names of corporations, govern-
ments, the names of sciences, rehgious creeds, seasons^
metals, etc., as:
nobility a nobrSza monarchy o monarchia
government o govSrno . history a histdria
Use of the Article. 275
geography a geographia Judaism o judaismo
philosophy a philosophia winter o inverno
posterity a posteridade spring a primavet^a
mankind a humanidade gold, silver o ouro, a prata
Christianity o christianismo iron, steel o ferro, o uqo,
(e) With nouns denoting a whole class, genus, or
species, as:
Man is mortal o homem e mortal.
The voices of animals are very different.
As vozes dos animaes sao muito differentes.
The rich (men) are not always happy.
Os ricos ndo sao sempre felizes.
(f) before the following and other nouns taken in
a general sense:
Man 0 homem hell o inferno
men os homens tea o did
Nature a natureza dinner o jantar
heaven o ceu breakfast o almogo
earth a terra supper a ceia.
(g) also in compositions of adjectives and abstract
nouns, which in English are used without the article,
it cannot be omitted (cf, (b) examples) — e.g.:
human understanding o intendimento humano
human power a fdrga humuna ,
human nature a natureza humana
human life a vida do homem
high life a alta roda or sociedade
ancient history a historia antiga
modern history a histdria moderna
universal history a histdria universal
high treason a alta traigdo
royal favour a real graga
divine religion a divina (or santa) religiao
English history a histdria inglesa
English poetry a poesia inglesa
kingly power o poder real.
(h) "Town" in the terms "to go to town, to live
in town," etc., is ir a (viver na) cidade. Also the names
of streets, squares and public buildings are employed
with the article. A rua de Garrett, do Ouro, Garrett
Street, Gold Street; a Praga de Dom Pedro Quarto, o
Rocio Rocio Square; Largo de Camoes Camoes Place.
18*
276 Lesson 6.
(i) Geographical names are, contrary lo the English,
generally employed with the article (cf. § 1, (a), 3; (b), 2
§ 20 (a) Exc. and § 21): a Inglaterra England, o Vesuvio
Vesuvius, a Alsdcia Alsace, a Britanha Brittany, etc.
The terms Western, Southern, etc., which form one idea
with the following names, are rendered in Portuguese
by do oeste, do sid, etc. or occidental, oriental, septentrional,
meridional — e.g.: Eastern Africa a Africa de leste or
oriental. Southern Portugal o Portugal meridional or
de sul.
(k) as in English the names of the months are
employed without article, if not meant in a restrictive
sense: Janeiro, geralmente e frio: o Janeiro d'este anno
esteve excessivamente frio.
(1) with the article are employed todo all, the whole,
every, ambos, ambas both, and qual which, when rela-
tive. Todo 0 pais the whole country; todo o liomem
every man, o mesmo autor o qual jd citei the same
author whom I cited already. Todos os mares os quaes
percorri All the seas I ran through. Ambos os irmdos,
ambos as minhas mdos both the brothers, both my hands,
(m) The article is employed in certain idiomatic
expressions, as:
dar 08 bans dias to say good morning
* dar as boas festas (os parabens) to send the compliments
of the season, to felicitate
dar OS pSsames a alguem to condole with a person
fazer as suas despedidas to bid good-bye
pela manhd, pela tarde in the morning, in the after-
noon
ds sete haras at 7 o'clock
ao meio-dia at midday
saber o portugues to know Portuguese (cf. : falar par"
tuguis).
a maioria, os mats dos homens most men
as mais das vizes mostly
viver da muo d bdca to live from hand to mouth.
ds armas! to arms I
17. Tema.
The ostrich has long legs, a long neck, and very short
wings. The fox has a more slender form than the wolf. My
children have fair hair and blue eyes. Do you know that
girl with the brown eyes? Yes, I know her; she is the
Use of the Article. 277
daughter of a German in Alsace. In Germany people have
mostly light eyes; the more towards south, the more dark
eyes are met with. In Northern Europe most persons have
flaxen hair. America is bathed in the east by the Atlantic
Sea, and in the west by the Pacific. Do you learn French?
Not yet; I shall learn it as soon as I know Portuguese. I
thought I had already heard you speaking Portuguese. In-
deed, but I do not yet know it well. Folar, from the French
poularde (= fattened poultry), is a present given in Portugal
at Easter, in some places also at Christmas. At Christmas time
you may send the compliments of the season from Christmas
Eve until Epiphany (dia dos [tres] reis [magos]). I wish you
a happy New Year with all my heart (see § 14). My sister
has her throat inflamed and my friend has a head-ache.
January was very cold. Japan is now a great Power. The
Emperor of China died young.
18. Versao.
Portugal continental e insular.
Portugal, a Lusitania dos antigos, e um dos estados da
Europa occidental. Elle occupa quasi toda a parte d'oeste da
peninsula iberica, tendo por limites ao norte (N.) e a leste
(E.) 0 reino de (a) Espanha, ao sul (S.) e a oeste (0. or W.) o
oceano. 0 sen maior comprimento, desde Chaves junto a
Melga90 ate ao cabo de Santa Maria no Algarve, 6 de 103
leguas, a sua maior largura de nascente a poente desde Campo
Maior at^ ao cabo da Roca, e de 44 leguas. A superficie 6
de 3150 16guas quadradas. A popula9ao no continente 6
pouco mais de 5 milhoes. A capital 6 a cidade de Lisbda
sobre o Tejo. Outras cidades importantes sao: o Porto,
Coimbra, Vizeu, Braga, Setiibal. Comprehende este reino,
al^m do continente, as ilhas chamadas adjacentes, que sSo as
dos Azores, da Madeira (vulgarmente denominada «a Ilha>) e
Porto Santo. Outras ilhas sSo o archipelago de Cabo Verde,
as ilhas de Sao Thom6 e Principe. 0 archipelago de Cabo
Verde forma dois grupos, a saber: o de Barlavento ao norte
que se compoe das ilhas de Santo Antao, Santa Luzia, Sao
Vicente; Sao Nicolau, Sal, Boa Vista; e o de Sotavento ao
sul, 0 qual consta das ilhas de Sao Thiago, Maio, Fogo e
Brava. Na Ocea,nia ha a ilha de Timor, que serve de degrSdo.
Conyersat^ao.
Onde esta (ou flea) situado Portugal?
De que peninsula faz parte?
Quaes sao os sens limites?
Qual 6 0 sen maior comprimento?
278 Lesson 7.
E qual e a sua maior largura?
Qual 6 a sua snperficie?
De que mimero 6 a popula^ao?
Quaes sao as cidades mais importantes ?
Quaes sao as chamadas ilhas adjacentes?
De quantos grupo§ se compoe o archipelago de Cabo
Verde?
E quaes sao?
Seventh Lesson.
Use of th6 Article (continued).
§ 23. The Definite Article before the Attribute.
(a) The nouns nome, titulo, mes, falta are joined to
the following noun or proper name (if this be not a geni-
tive) by de without article, o nome de Defensor^ titulo
de rei^ mes de ahril, a falta d'dgua. (Cf. : 0 titulo do rei
de Portugal era ''FideUssimo" ; Mingua e a falta do ne-
cessdrio),
(b) The appellatives ^7/^a, cidade, villa, reino, estado,
provincia, porto, rua, imperio, regido, serrjx, caho, etc., are
joined to the following proper name by de with or
without the article (see Task 18).
N.B.— In a mere enumeration of names the appellative
with de and article is omitted (id.).
The employment of the article and its form after
these appellatives depends on the following proper name
being used, w^hen alone, with or without the article,
and whether this be in the masculine or feminine, sin-
gular or plural form — e.g.:
A ilha de Timor, do Fogo, do Haiti, da Madeira^
da Trindade, as ilhas de Hyercs, dos Agores, das Ca-
ndrias. Yet withoi-it article: a ilha Terceira (i.e., the
third);
A ddade de Setubal, do Forto, do Funchal, da
Guarda, da Figueira da F02, de Sao Cosme, das Fedras
Salgadas, das Torres Vedras, etc.
The same with villa, porto, if these appellatives
are not a part of the proper name — as, for instance, in
the following:
Use of the Article. 279
Villa Franca, Villa Franca de Xira, Villa Franca
do Campo, Villa Fria, Villa Vigosa, Porto- Alegre, Porto
Cdbreiro, Porto de Mos, Porto da Guarda, etc.
0 Cdbo^ de Sdo Vicente, da Roca, Caho Ddgado,
Caho Negro, do Norte, da Praia, da Boa Esperanga, das
Formentas.
A rua (travessa, escada, calgada, praga, o heco, ca-
minho, largo, caes, passadigo) de El-Bei, de Joao de Beus,
de D. Fernando, do Forno do Tijolo, da Fdbrica das
Sedas, das Cavallarigas do Infante, dos Cardeaes de Jesus,
do Sodre, do Terreiro Publico.
0 itnperio de Allemanha, do Japao; o reino de
Portugal, os Estados Unidos do Brasil, o iniperio da
India.
As provincias da Beira, da Estramadura, do Alem-
tejo, de Trds-oS'Montes.
(c) Rio is always employed without de if indi-
cating a river — e.g.: o rio Dour 6, o rio Tejo, o rio Lima;
but 0 Bio de Janeiro.
§ 24. The Definite Article and the Apposition.
1. A noun in apposition is generally employed wit-
hout the article, when following the name: A rainha
D. Leonor, regente do reino, confidra o governo do Alem-
tejo a D. Jodo, Mestre d'Aviz. Estivemos no Porto,
cidade episcopal, a segunda da monarchia em populagao.
2. The apposition is employed tvith the article in
the following cases:
(a) When the proper name is preceded by a title
(not being Bom, Dona, Frei, Sor, etc.): 0 doutor Nogu-
eira; a menina Maria; o padre Jose. (But Dom Carlos
Berquo, Dona Carolina Michaelis; Frei Luis de Sousa;
Sor Marianna.) N.B. — If these titles are preceded by
senhor, senliora, ret, rainha, they too are employed with
the article:
a ex-rainha Dona Amelia, a ex-rei (El-rei) Dom Ma-
nuel, etc.
A senhor a Dona Beatriz Angela foi a primeira fnulher em
Portugal que em 1911 votou nas eleigdes parlaynentares.
^ Caho, making part of the name, is written with a capital
letter, as also Villa, Porto, Bio in the same case.
280 Lesson 7.
(b) When it is an historical addition after a personal
name, without being an ordinal number — e.g.:
Dom Jodo II (Segundo), o Principe perfeito, iniciou n,
epoca dos grandee descobertas dos Portugueses.
(c) As a superlative (which, not being one ending
in -or, may also follow the noun):
Trindade Coelho, o melhor contista moderno e um dos
caracteres mais nohres que Portugal teve, morreu em
9 de agosto 1908,
<tOs LusiadasT> S o titulo do poema de Camoes, poita
portugues o mais cUehre do seu tempo.
(d) When indicating something notorious or famous.
Foi Vasco de Gama, o gra^ide navegador, que descobriu
0 caminho maritimo das Indias.
§ 25. The Indefinite Article and the Predicatire
Noun.
1. The predicative noun is employed without
article and preposition, when indicating in a general
way a state, profession, title, parentship, office or em-
ployment, dignity, character, nationality, etc., with the
verbs :
(a) ser, ficar., fazer-se, tomar-se, dizer-se^ nascevy
morrer, parecer, padecer etc. Ex.:
Dizia-se correligiondrio dos monarchistas, para ficar
deputado.
He passed himself off as a partisan of the monarchists,
in order to remain a deputy.
Meu amigo S portugues e auctor; tomou-se saoio.
My friend is a Portuguese and an author; he became
a learned man.
Bern que tivesse nascido filho do povo, morreu presidente.
Though he was born a child of this vulgar, he died a
president.
(b) nomear to nominate, appoint, acclamar^ pro-
clamar to proclaim, eleger to elect, crer^ consider ar, jul-
gar to think, armar cavdlleiro to create a knight.
Dom Jodo I. foi eleito Mestre da ordem de Aviz e armado
cavalleiro por seu pae, (o rei) Dom Pedro I. Em
1385 foi acclamado rei de Portugal.
Use of the Article. 281
2. The predicative noun is employed without ar-
ticle, but with preposition after the verbs escolher (se)
parq, io chose (to be chosen); passar por, ser tido por
to pass for, to be taken for ; tomar or ter por to think,
consider.
Escolheram-se os homens mais resolutos para comhatefites ;
escolheu-se para general um capitao experimentado,
Passava por homem capaz e recto, sempre o tinha tornado
(or tido) por tal.
3. The indefinite article is omitted with a noun in
apposition, as:
A Ceia dos Cardeaes, comedia por Julio Dantas.
The Cardinah' Supper, a comedy by Julio Dantas.
4. Omitted also on the title-page of a book:
Qrammdtica portuguesa a Portuguese Grammar.
Histdria da Inglaterra a History of England.
5. Af an when used in the sense of "per" is ren-
dered by por or the definite article:
Five pounds a month cinco Uhras por (or o) mSs.
So much a lesson tanto por (or a) ligao.
To give so much a head dar tanto por (or a) cabe^a.
§ 26. Repetition of the Article.
(a) The article, as also its substitutes— e.g., the
possessive or demonstrative adjectives, is repeated before
several nouns or adjectives — expressing diversity of
meaning: Vird a julgar os vivos e os mortos. Os soldados
moQOs e OS vellios.
(b) The article is not repeated when those words
do not express diversity, but similarity, even though
their gender be different — e.g.: ""Entre as ruinas e mo-
numentos antiguissimos que se encontram ainda pelo
pais . . ."
(Concerning the adjective in the plural see Lesson 9.)
19. Thema.
Harbours, bays, capes, provinces and totvns of Portugal,
(See the map in the innerside of the front cover of this book.)
Portugal being a shore-land (pais d beira-mar), it has on
its coast some important harbours, where ships may sail into
282 Lesson 7.
and cast anchor in order to embark and disembark passengers
and goods. The principal harbours of Portugal are: that of
Lisbon, the best of all and one of the largest and most beau-
tiful in the world. There may enter it at any hour of the
day or night ships of any size, and there would be room
for (= cab^r) all the ships in the world. Following the
coast from north to south, we meet with the following
harbours: that of^ Caminha, Vianna, Espozende, Pdvoa de
Varsim, Leixoes, an artificial hr^bour near the fishing-
villages of Lega and Mattosinhos ; Sao Jodo. da Foz near
Oporto; Aveiro, Figueira da Fos^ Vielray S. Martinho; those
of (da) Ericeira, of Cascaes, a beautiful bay called "the Por-
tuguese Riviera"; o^ Settibal, a very ancient commercial town
situated on the Ria^ do Sado; of Sines, Villa Nova de Mil-
fontes, SagreSy a harbour made famous by the Infarct Dom Hen-
rique with the surname "the Navigator"; Lagos, a bay where
the English fleet used to have its manoeuvres; Villa Nova de
Portimdo, Faro, Tavira, Villa Jieal de Santo Antonio.
As Portugal is a littoral, the land stretches now and then
into the ocean (tr.: pelo mar dentro), forming greater and
smaller capes or points. The principal capes of Portugal are
the following: The cape of Mondego, of Carvoeiro, da Boca,
the most occidental cape of Europe; the cape of Fspichelf
of Sines, of Saint Vincent, of Santa Maria.
Portugal has eight provinces, each of which has its capital:
that of the Minho, the most northern province, is called
Braga; that of Trds-os-Montes : Braganga; that of the province
of Douro: Oporto; that of the Beira-Alta: Vizeu; of the Beira-
Baixa: Guar da; of Fstremadura: Lisbon, at the same time
capital of the country; of Alemtejo: £oora; and that of Al-
garve: Faro.
20. Tersao.
Portugal ultramaHno.
(Vide 0 mappa na parte antero-interior da capa d'este livro.)
As provincias ultramarinas, vastos territorios situados na
Africa, Asia e Oceania ^ e sujeitos a um regimen adminastra-
tivo especial, comprebendem : na Africa: al^m das provincias
insulares de Cabo- Verde (see Less. 18), S. Thome e Principe, as
continentaes de Guine, Angola e Mozambique; na JLSia: o
* Substitute always "that of."
2 Ria is the mouth of a river enlarged to a sea. (Cf. on
the map : Sado, Tejo; Bia de Vigo (in Spain).
^ Oceania or Oceania. The former accentuation is scientific,
the latter popular.
Use of the Article. 283
estado da India e a provincia de Macau; na Oceania: o dis-
tricto autonomo de Timor.
A provincia da Guin6 compoe-se de territories na costa
occidental da Africa, e de muitas ilhas. D'essas ilhas, as mais
importantes sao: Bissau, Bolama, Jatte, todas perto da costa;
e mais ao largo as 12 ilhas do archipelago de Bijagos. — A
provincia de Angola esta quasi toda no continente da A.-
frica, pois defronte da costa apenas tem uma ilha de areia.
0 seu territorio 6 enorme, e alguns o avaliam em urn milhao
e 300 mil kilometros quadrados. A capital de Angola ^ a
cidade de Loanda; e as suas prineipaes povoa^oes, alem de
Loanda, sao as segaintes : Cabinda, Ambaca, Malange, Benguella
e Mossamedes. — Mo9ambique, provincia ultramarina na costa
oriental da Africa, e formada por extensos territories litoraes
e ainda por muitas ilhas fronteiras, proximo e ao longo da
costa. A provincia comprehende os districtos de Mo9ambique,
Zambezia, Inhambane e LourenQO Marques etc. A capital
e a cidade de Mozambique, situada na ilha do mesmo nome.
As suas prineipaes povoa^oes, alem da capital, sao: Quelimane,
Inhambane, Louren^o Marques, Sofala. — 0 Estado da India
comprehende os territories de Goa (capital: Nova Goa oa
Pangim), de Damao e de Dia. A provincia de Macau d for-
mada de parte de uma peninsula a entrada do rio de Gantao, e
de duas ilhas muito proximas d'aquella: Taipa e Colovane. A
cidade de Macau, capital d'esta provincia, occupa quasi toda
a parte pertugu^sa da peninsula a entrada de rio de Cantao.
0 districte de Tim6r consta de parte da ilha de Tim6r e de
uma pequena ilha, chamada de Pulo-Cambing. A ilha de TimOr
^ uma das ilhas do archipelago de Sonda, archipelago que
alguns geographos modernos entendem pertencer a Asia e nae
a Oceania. Dilly, capital do districte portugu6s de TimOr fica
na costa septentrional da ilha.
Foi durante o reinade de D. Joao I e sub a direcgao de
D. Henrique o NavegEfdor, seu filho, que se descebriram mais
de 360 l^guas da costa africana, desde o cabo Bejador at4 a Serra
Leoa, e as formosas ilhas do Atl^ntico, de que foram ventu-
rosas primicias as ilhas de S. Miguel, S*^- Maria, Terceira,
Azores, Porto Santo e Madeira.
C.onversaQao.
Quaes sao os portos prineipaes de Portugal?
Quaes sao os sens prineipaes cabos, seguindo do norte
para o sul?
Quantas provincias tem esse reino?
Quaes sao os nomes d'ellas e das suas capitaes?
Que se entende por Portugal ultramarine?
284 Lesson 8.
Quaes sSo as suas colonias africanas?
Como se chamam as principaes povoa^oes de Angola?
de MoQambique ?
De que territdrios se compoe o Estado da India?
De que e formada a provincia de Macau?
De que consta o districto de Timor?
Eighth Lesson.
Omission of the Article.
(Cf. §§ 20, 21, 24 (1) a, 25, 1 and 2).
§ 27. The article (or its substitute) is omitted:
(a) in mere numerations (cf. § 23 (b) N.B.) — e.g.:
Roubou'lhe reldgio, corrente, anneis, tudo.
(b) often with nem . . . nem neither . . . nor (also oft^n
omitted in English):
N'isto nao ha nem honra nem proveito. Eu vi nem casa
nem jardim.
(c) after jamais and nunca' before the subject, if
not determinate:
Nunca honra maior foi offer ecida a ninguem.
Never a greater honour was offered to anybody.
Jdmais haverd amigo mais leal.
(d) in sentences denoting doubt, negation as well
as in questions expressing uncertainty, supposition, or
negation :
Duoido que hajcC qualidade melhor.
I doubt whether there be a better quality.
Ndo havia coragdo mais nohre do que o d'elle.
There was no heart more generous than his.
Tens amigo dedicado, em que possas fiar-te?
Have you a devoted friend that you may depend upon?
<t.Cab€Qa de rapaz sabre a qual esses olhos admiraveis
potcsassem um instante, era cahega perdida.*
Any young man's head those admirable eyes rested upon
for a moment, was lost.
Jd se viu pessoa mais ingrata?
Was there ever seen a more ungrateful person?
Omission of the Article. 285
(e) before a noun or substantivated participle
employed in a general meaning — e.g.:
0 estado S de gueri'a.
The situation is that of war.
0 pais nao se resigna jd d situaqdo de vencido.
The country resigns itself no longer to the situation
of a vanquished (nation).
(f) before the adjectives too, outro^ tal, qual^ tal
qudly qual outro, semelhante, igual, meio, certo, tamanho
(also subst.), and the substantives numero, parte, porgdo,
quantidadey quantia^ somma, gente, pessoa, coisa.
(N.B. — Before the nouns and certo the article may be
employed.)
Em certa occasido a indignagdo foi tamanha que . . .
On a certain occasion indignation was so strong that . . .
Ndo, querendo dar-lhe amdtada quantiay deu-lhe rneia
promessa.
Not feeling inclined to give him a big sum, he gave
him a half promise.
Houve grande quantidade de genie e muita somma de
intelligencia.
There was a great number of people and a large
amount of intelligence.
Grande parte dos pedintes recebeu porgao igual d dos
asylados.
A great part of the poor got a portion equal to that
of the inmates of a charitable institution.
DS-me outro cdpo d^agua.
Give me another cup of water.
0 caracter deste sujeito i qual eu desejo.
The character of this man is such as I desire.
Tal mulher me fosse ella, qual marido eu The sou.
Were she such a wife to me as I am a husband to her.
Elle abriu caminho qual outro Amaldo de Winkelried,
He made a way like a second At W.
(g) before coisa in connection with alguma or nen-
hwma.
Viu alguma coisa? Nao vi coisa alguma (or nenhuma).
(h) often in titles and headings; Tomo segundo;
CapUtdo primeiro; Descoberta da tndia;
286 Lesson 8.
(i) before nouns employed predicatively : 0 sr. Jose
e primo do Carlos. Carlos e amigo do primo. Francisco
d' Almeida foi vice-rei da India;
(k) with parts of the body spoken of in a general
meaning: (cf.§ 19(h)): 0 corpo humano tern dots bragos,
duas pernas, cabega e tronco. Temos niao direita e mdo
esquerda, pe direito e pe esquerdo;
(1) in dates : LisMa^ (em) 18 de junho, Lisbon, June
the 18^^. An exception to this is the official dating;
Lisboa, aos dezoito dias de junho de 1861
(m) in phrases like these:
prestar juramento to take an oath
pre&tar servigo to do a service
por termo or metier caho a to put an end to
foliar (a) verdade to tell the truth
fazer de hoho to make a fool of oneself
fazer boa (md) figura to make a good (bad) figure
fazer numero to elevate or complete |^ number
dar bom resultado to give a good result
tirar bom lucro to get a good profit
exhalar man cheiro to exhale a bad smell
dbrir banca to establish an office
ter (par) costume to be in th6 habit
convocar cortes to convoke the House of Commonp
dbrir caminho to make a way
estar a ponto c?e . . . to be on the point of
e costume it is the custom
fazer aposta to lay a wager
a pretexto de under a pretence
morrer de febre to die of the fever
morreu victimu da revolugdo he fell a victim to the re-
volution
ir a acto to go in for an examination.
fazer examen to pass an examination
viver em casa de . . . to live in the house of
ndo dizer palavra to say not a word
ter costume to be in the habit
correr risco to run a risk.
J^ (uma) pena it is a pity
ter appetite to have an appetite
estar com pressa to be in a hurry
estar com raiva to be in a fury
iicar com raiva to fly into a passion
Omission of the Article. 287
ter fim to have an end
fazer harulho to make a noise
ter vontade to have a mind
ter como regra to make it a rule
(em) termo medio on an average
com vista with a view
fazer signal to make a sign
fazer presente (de) to make a present (of)
dar batalha to fight a battle
tomar exemplo to take an example
falar em voz haixa (alia) to speak in a low (loud) voice
ndo ha meio de there is no means of.
e moda it is the fashion
e fdra de questdo it is out of the question.
Note that the indefinite article is not used with que:
What a noise you makel Que harulho estd a fazer!
What a misfortune! Que desgraga!
§ 28. The article may be omitted:
(1) In enumerating several substantives which are
joined by e, ow, etc., or separated by a comma, and
not denote a contrast (cf. §26) however being of diffe-
rent gender— e.g.:
Os hdbitantes dos vdrios hairros, aldeias e arrdbaldes.
It is the same for several adjectives which acom-
pany the noun:
A prim£ira, segunda e terceira classe or : as classes pri'
meira, segunda e terceira.
N.B. — If such a noun precedes, it is used in the plural.
So with such adjectives as, by their nature, follow the noun :
As linguas portuguesa e inglesa.
The Portuguese and English languages.
The noun not being employed in the plural, the article must
be repeated:
A lingua porttigtcSsa e a inglSsa.
Equally repeated is the article, if living beings of different
sex are spoken of:
Os bois e as vaccas. Os burros ou as jumentas.
§ 29. The partitive article is omitted after the
prepositions com, sem, por, in certain idiomatic ex-
pressions; also after de denoting the instrument or
cause. Ex. :
Lesson 8.
com prazer with pleasure
com paciencia with patience
com cuidado with care
com elegancia elegantly
sem dinheiro without money
sem ceremdnia without cere-
mony
sem mats nada with no more
ado
por dia daily, a day
por anno yearly, a year
por mis monthly, a month
por mar by water, by sea
pw terra by land
por tal forma in such a manner
por 6ra for the moment
por causa de for the sake of
por Ventura by chance
sob pena de morte on pain of
death
encher de heneficios to load
with benefits
viver de pdo to live upon
bread
tnorrer de fome to be starved
to death
saltar de alegria to jump with
joy.
§ 30. No article is used (a) before a substantive
which is repeated with a preposition, as:
gdta a gdta by drops
fdlha a folha leaf upon leaf
dia a dia day after day
de dia para dia from one day to another
promessas sdbre promessas promises upon promises
de tempo(s) a tempofs) from time to time
de sSculo em sSculo from age to age.
(b) In the following expressions, where the noun
forms an indivisible unity with the verb, the article is
omitted in both languages:
ter razdo to be right
nao ter razdo to be wrong
ter vontade to have a mind
ter precisdo to want
langar dncora to cast anchor
levantar dncora tq weigh
anchor.
ter cuidade to take care
ter fome to be hungry
ter side to be thirsty
ter sdmno to be sleepy
ter boa cara to look well
ter piedade to have pity
ter vergdnha to be ashamed
ter m^o to be afraid
(c) In certain expressions formed with de, em, o,
sohre, as:
estar em risco to be at stake
estar sobre dncora to be at anchor
pegar em armas to take up arms
ser de opinido to be of opinion
pdr em fugida to put to flight
perder de vista \^ lose sight of
comprar em segunda moo to buy second hand
Omission of the Article. 289
ir a cavallo to go on horseback
ir de camidgtm to go in a carriage
estar em casa to be at home
ir a casa to go home
estar de (or em) pe to be standing
estar a pS to be up
tomar parte em to join in
tomar cuidado to be upon one's guard
tomar assento to take a seat
tomar sentido to be aware
tomar fogo to catch fire
tomar folego to breathe
dar gragas to say grace
dar (or fazer) aitengdo to pay attention
fazer caso de to value
fazer mengdo de to mention
fazer fortuna to make one's fortune
pedir licenga to ask leave
pedir perddo to beg pardon
dar credito a to give credence
por-se em pe to rise
vir a pe to come on foot
estar em paz to be at peace.
§ 31. In some expressions the indefinite article is
employed, as in English, in the sense of one — e.g.:
d'um fdlego in a breath
n'uma palavra in a word
d'uma assentada i „
d uma vez )
d'um trago at a draught.
§ 32. Employed in the plural, the indefinite article
has the meaning of some or about:
Uns dias depots; durante umas haras ;
Serdo preciso uns sets metros de fazerAa.
21. Thema.
Virtue is the highest good. Men are mortal. Modesty
adorns youth. Human life is short. Man is liable to a variety
of changes. Gold and silver cannot render man happy.' Beer
is sold at fivepence a pot. This coffee costs two shillings a pound.
The love of glory and the fear of shame are often the cause
of great valour. Summer is warm, but winter is cold. Geo-
graphy is a very useful science. Good and bad seem to be
blended together through the whole of nature. Do you know
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 19
290 Lesson 8.
General Knox? Yes, T know him. The knife and fork are
broken. Let us go to church. The boys were at school this
morning, but now they are at home. When did they come
home? After two o'clock.
What books have you got there ? Langenscheidt, a Por-
tuguese pocket- dictionary and Ey, a Portuguese conversation-
grammar. What cold weather to-day! Did you find some
means of saltisfying him? I do not know, he said not a
word. His mother made us a sign to leave the room. The
poor woman was dying from hunger and cold. You are
always right; Lhave been wrong. Have pity on my weakness.
I must ask your leave. Many poor people live on bread and
potatoes only. The rent of this house is twenty pounds a
year. We expected our friend every day (say: from day to
day), but day after day elapsed without bringing him. Cha-
rity begins at home (by itself). Necessity knows no law. Games,
conversation, theatre, nothing entertains him.
Mr. Teixeira Lopes is a Portuguese and a sculptor. He
lives at Villa Nova de Gaya, in front of Oporto, on the left
side of the Rio Bouro, Bua Direita. He is a most famous
artist. Some of his most important works are in Lisbon — for
instance, the monument to Ega de Queiros, one of the most
eminent novelists, the so-called Portuguese Zola; it is erected
on the Largo do Quintella. In Catholic countries it is the
custom to hear the Mass every day.
22. Versao.
Jdo I (primeiro).
Dom Joao I, rei de Portugal, cognominado o de Boa
Memdria, mas mais conhecido pelo seu titulo de Mesire d'AviZj
foi filho de el-rei D. Pedro I e de D. Thereza Louren^o. Nasceu
em Lisboa a 15 de abril de 1358, e na idade de 11 annos foi
eleito mestre da ordem de Aviz e armado cavalleiro por seu
pae. A prudencia e valor deste monarcha deveu Portugal a
conserva(jao da sua independencia, que esteve a ponto de perder
com a morte de D. Fernando 1. 0 Mestre de Aviz, a quern
a rainha D. Leonor, regente do reino^ confiara o governo do
Alemteyo, para o afastar de Lisboa, aonde era benquisto do
povo, foi ao pa<jo a pretexto de conferenciar com ella. Em-
quanto fazia espalhar a noticia de que ali o retinham prisio-
neiro, apunhalou o conde de Ourem, valido da rainha, vingMido
assim a affVonta de que este f6ra crimin6so autor. N'um ins-
tante appareceu armada a popula^ao dd Lisb6a. D. JoSo
publicou a morte do conde, e foi logo acclamado regente e
defensor do reino, que jurou defender contra Castella.
D. Leonor retirou-se para Alemquer, villa da provinda de
Exiremadura, e o monarcha castelhano entrou em Portugal,
Congruence. 291
empenhando todo o sen poderio, para tomar Lisbda. • Por6m
as bem acertadas medidas e o valor de D. Joao e do grande
condestavel D. Muno Alvares Pereira, inseparavel companheiro
das suas glorias militeres, fizeram com que os portuguSses
sustentassem o sitio, ate que o grande ex^rcito sitiador se viu
obrigado a retirar-se. (Continua.)
Conyersa^ao.
CoDio foi cognominado D. Joao I?
Qual o titulo pelo que era ainda mais conhecido?
Quando nasceu?
Que e que Ihe deve Portugal?
Quern foi D. Leonor?
Qual foi 0 acto com que o Mestre d'Aviz vingou a af-
fronta feita ao povo e a memoria do rei pela rainha
viuva e o sen favorito castellao?
Que succedeu depois d'este acto?
Quern foi o companheiro d'armas de D. Joao I?
Qual foi 0 resultado das medidas e do valor de ambos ?
Second Division: Syntax.
Ninth Lesson.
Congruence.
§ 33. The adjective, the article and the past
participle conjugated with ser or estar agree in gender
and number with their noun or pronoun — e.g.:
0 amigo certo conhece-se na occasiao incerta.
Exceptions. — 1. The subject being the pronoun v6s (or
qiie referring to v6s), and indicating only one person, those
words are in the singular: Vos sereis feliz. V6s sois amado
or amada.
2. The subject being quern followed by the verb ser and
a substantive in the plural as a predicative noun, the verb
agrees with the latter (as in English): Quern foram os pro-
genitores de D. Jffonso I. ?
3. See L. 16, § 72, N.B.
Contrary to the English, the verb ser, when used im-
personally, agrees with the following predicative noun: Sao
quatro haras it is 4 o'clock. Sao dezoito do mis it is the
19*
292 Lesson 9.
eighteenth of the month. Quern e? Sou eu. Who is it?
It is I.
§ 34. (a) Several nouns in the singular being
accompanied by the same adjective or past participle,
the latter takes the form of the plural: a lingua, (a)
grammdtica e (a) literatura portuguesas. Sao necessdrias
a circumspecgao e a prudencia. A senhora e a crianga
estavam cangados. Com as suas tdo apregoadas probidade
e distingao teem tecido toda esta trama.
(b) The nouns being of different gender, without
diversity in their meaning, the adjective or participle,
when employed in the singular, agrees with the next
to it: 0 am^r e amizade verdadeira or: a amizade e
amor verdadeiro. Com verdadeiro amor e amizade. J^
necessario o esforgo e a vigilancia. E necessaria a vigi-
lancia e o esforgo.
(c) Those nouns being of different gender and
meaning, or the adjective (or participle) being in the
plural, it agrees with the mascuUne noun: Um diu e
uma noite eram passados. Nem o sangue, nem a^ lagrimas
estavam enxutos. A cortiga e os couros foram declarados
de comm£rcio livre.
(d) The same adjective or participle referring to
several nouns in the plural and of different gender, it
agrees with the next to it: Seus temores e esperangas
eram vds, or: eram v&os seus temores e esperangas*
(e) The same adjective referring to a noun in the
plural and another in the singular, it generally agrees
with that of the plural: As f agendas e o dinheiro eram
muitas.^
§ 35. (a) The verb agrees with its subject in
person and number:
0 tempo foge; eu escrevo; nds vamos.
* Cf. <^No dia 6 horas indicados, as imias dirigiram-se ao
Vaticano». (Manual Politico by Trindade Coelho). For these rules
given in § 34, there are many contrary examples met with even
in the classics, as, e.g.: Rosto e cabega descoberta. ''Porque essas
honras vds, ess^, ouro puro, melhor ^ tnei'ecel-os sem os ter que
possuU-os aem os merecer."
Congruence. 298
(b) Several subjects belongiDg to one verb, this is
used in the plural. If these subjects belong to different
grammatical persons, the first is preferred to the second,
the second to the third — e.g.: Eu e tu (tu e eu) terms
saude. Tu e Maria estaes tons.
(c) If there be several subjects of the third person,
the verb is also
(a) in the third person and plural when the sub-
jects are in the plural:
Andam sempre de companhia os erros e as desculpas,
(p) in the third person plural when the subjects are
in the singular and precede the verb:
A comida, a bebida, a vigilia e o somno sem certa me-
dida ndo aproveitam.
(y) in the third person singular when the subjects
follow the verb:
Sent certa medida ndo aproveita a comida, a bebida, etc.
(see Note I).
(b) in the first person plural if the person who
speaks belongs to the subjects:
(0 mestre e) todos os ofjficiaes somos teus amigos (cf. :
0 mestre e todos o officiaes sois mens amigos.
Note I.— With following subjects the verb is also met
with in the plural:
Fallecem-nos (or fallece-nos) o pdo e a agua.
Note II. — If two or more subjects indicate only one and
the same person or thing, the verb agrees with that next
to it:
Este soldado valente, este poeta sublime, esta gloria national
(Camoes) foi desamparada no leito da dor.
(d) The impersonal verbs, except haver, which is
always employed in the singular, agree with the logical
subject — v.g. :
Chegaram muitos viajantes there arrived a great many
travellers. (French : il arriva beaucoup de voyageurs.)
Ha muitos homens que . . . there are many people who . . .
Houve muitas pessoas there were many persons.
294 Lesson 9.
§ 36. (a) If the subject be a partitive collective
in the singular with following genitive in the plural,
the verb and attribute are generally in the plural.
[N.B. — The genitive may not be expressed) — e.g.:
Parte (dos soldados or dos quaes), para fugir ao ferro
dos nossos, se langarem a uma lagoa a nado.
(b) If the subject be a general collective — i.e., one
only to be considered as a totahty— the verb is employed
in the singular, even if a genitive plural accompanies
the subject:
0 exercito dos inimigos foi derrotado.
§ 37. (a) In relative clauses the verb agrees in
its person not with the relative pronoun, but with its
antecedent:
Tu que nunca estiveste no estrangeiro . . .
Eu sou aqueile mesmo (aquella mesma) que sempre te amei,
(b) It is the same for the relative que which, joined
to the verb ser, is employed as Particula de realce after
a personal pronoun (cf. L. 16, § 64 (c)):
Fdste tu (o) que disseste . . . fomos nds quern dissSmos,
(c) However, if a relative clause is introduced by
quern, in order to render a personal pronoun prominent,
the verb agrees with quern.
Fiu eu quern disse; es tu qtiein ouve; fdmos nds quern
disse.
23. Thema.
I play the piano, you write letters. You are satisfied, my
son, but your sister is not satisfied. During the fine season
concerts are often given here. Most of the Portuguese content
themselves with two daily refections. I and my children will
pass the summer in the country and the autumn at the sea-
side. You (V6s) wanted to deceive me, but perhaps it is
you who will have been deceived. His cold blood and intre-
pidity amaze the bravest men. The earth, the stones, the
animals, the plants, all are the work of God. Incredible things
succeed every day. The refined fashion and taste of the last
season created quite a new branch of industry. His brother
and 1 made this discovery. Was it you who helped that pooy
family? It was I who made *he suggestion, but it was you
who have given the necessary money. It was the women who
made the great revolutions.
Congruence. 295
24. Versao.
Joao I (continna(do).
Ja antes d'isto tinha D. Nuno desbaratado os hespanhoes
na batalha dos Atoleiros, junto a Fronteira. ^ Convocadas
c6rtes em Coimbra, n'ellas discutiu com agudeza e resolveu
com liberdade o c^lebre jurisconsulto Joao das Eegras, que a
coroa portugu6sa estava vaga, que podia o povo eleger prin-
cipe que o governasse, e que nenhum Ihe convinha mais do
que D. Joao^ Mestre de Aviz. A 6 de abril de 1385, nSo
tendo ainda completes 27 annos, foi D. Joao acclamado rei
de Portugal. Elevado ao throno mostrou-se logo digno d'elle,
nao so pela esc6lha que fazia das pessoas para os diversos
cargos, como pelo valor com que defendeu o reino. A vict6ria
de Trancoso e outras, seguiu-se a de Aljubarrota, dada a 15 de
agosto de 1385, e na qual com 6500 homens derrotou o exer-
cito castelhano que se compunha de 30 000 homens. N'este
niimero se contava a fl6r da nobreza castelhana e o proprio
monarcha, que so deveu a vida a velocidade do seu cavallo.
Em commemoraQao d'esta batalha, e no proprio sitio d'ella
edificou 0 novo rei, para cumprir o vOto que fizera, o sump-
tuoso templo de Santa Maria da Victdria, vulgo da Batalha.
Nao contente com as victorias terrestres, D. Joao I meditou
fazer o seu nome immortal com as navaes, e preparando uma
armada de 200 velas, n'ella embarcou com sens filhos D. Duarte,
D. Pedro e D. Henrique, e tomou em 1415 a pra(?a de Ceuta.
Quatro annos depois (1419) os descobrimentos das ilhas de
Porto Santo e da Madeira vieram abrir a Portugal as portas
das suas vastas conquistas. (Lacerda.)
Conyersaijao.
Qual e a regra fundamental de concordancia com relaQao
ao adjectivo, o artigo e o participio?
Para que niimero vae o adjectivo ou participio, ha-
vendo 2 ou mais substantives no singular?
Quando concorda o adjectivo com o substantive mais
proximo?
Quando concorda com o substantive do genero masculine ?
Quando concorda elle apenas com o ultimo?
Qual a regra da concordancia do verbo ?
Havendo varies sujeites de differentes pessdas, qual a
pessoa com que concorda?
Qual o niimero de verbo, havendo varies sujeites da
3. pessoa do singular?
— ,_, — _ ■■
* Villa e freguezia no Alemtejo, districto de Portalegre,
296 Leeson 10.
Em que mimero esta o verbo, sendo o sujeito um col-
lective ?
Com que palavra concorda o verbo em phrases relativas?
Tenth Lesson.
Intransitive and Transitive Verbs.
I. Intransitive Verbs.
§ 38. The intransitive verbs generally form their
compound tenses, as in the English language, with the
auxiliary ter or haver:
Tenho andado uma legoa todos os dias.
I have walked a mile every day.
Mle sempre tern ido (vindo) chegado, voltado) a tempo.
He has always gone (come, arrived) to time.
§ 39. Yet some take also the auxiliaries ser or
estar or ficar^ but only when a condition or the result
of an action is to be indicated. The participle with
ser, estar or ficar has the value of an adjective. If,
however, you want to indicate, not a condition, but an
action continually going on, you must employ ter or
haver.
As in English, a great many verbs are employed
transitively and intransitively.
Examine the following examples, distinguishing the
transitive from the intransitive meaning of the same verb.
Sdbe que elle estd de voUa?
Do you know he is returned?
As actrizes esiavam voltadas para os espectadores.
The actresses stood (with their faces) turned to the
spectators.
A caneca estd or ficou partida.
The jug is gone or went asunder.
He has departed, is gone can only be rendered by:
elle partiu or foi('Se) ; elle tern partido would be : he has
broken or he belongs to a faction; elle e partido he is
party.
Estao idos aquelles tempos those times are gone.
Ella tinha adormecido.
She had lulled (somebody) to sleep; she had fallen asleep.
The Complements and their Cases. 297
Ella estava adormecida she was asleep.
Nos temos corrida muito we have run fast.
N6s temos carrido mundo we have travelled about.
N6s estamos (or ficdmos) corridos.
We are (or became) vexed.
Tern caido hastante chuva there has fallen much rain.
Estd caido he is dejected.
A sua fortuna tern augmentado consider avelmente.
His fortune has been increasing considerably.
A sua fortuna estd consideravelmente augmentada.
His fortune has been considerably increased.
II. Transitive Verbs and their Complements.
§ 40. Every transitive verb requires a complement
—i.e., an object on which the activity of the subject
passes over directly or indirectly; — e.g.:
If directly, the complement is the accusative
(complemento directo or ohjedivo propriamente dito), and
generally employed without preposition; if indirectly, it
is the dative (complemento indirecto), generally employed
with the preposition a (to). N.B. — Personal pronouns
have special forms for the complements (cf. P.I, L.23).
Dam Affonso Henriques conquistou Santarem aos
Portugueses.
The Complements and their Cases.
A. The Complement of the Accusative.
(Complemento directo.)
§ 41. As a rule, this complement, as in English,
has no preposition:
Eu comprei um livro I bought a book.
§ 42." With a certain group of verbs, however, it
may be joined by a preposition, especially if referring
to persons; — e.g.:
Vejo a elle I see him.
Amae aos vossos prdximos love your fellow-creatures.
As coisas que possam interessar aos mens designios.
The things which may influence my intentions.
Ninguem' pdde servir ao mesmo tempo a dois senhores.
Nobody can serve two masters at the same time.
298 Lesson 10.
This a is always employed in Amar a Beus (cf.
L. 11, §48 (a)p) and in the locution urn a outro one
another : defendem-se um ao outro they defend one another.
With the verb chamar, when this has two comple-
ments. The complement of the person or the per-
sonified object is generally employed with the prepo-
sition a (or the pronoun in the dative).
EUe chamava amigo a quern ndo o era.
He called friend a one who was not.
Chamaram ^^Principe Perfeito'^ ao rei Dom Joao 11.
0 que ganhei com o meu trahalho, chamo-lhe meu.
What I earned by my work, I call my own.
The preposition a with the accusative is found also
with the verbs ouvir {dieer), ver, saber, cheirar, and otiiers:
Ouvimos dizer ao sr. Fulano.
^^Paris a Helena rouhou" (Camdes).
^'Querendo vSr a. DianttfActeon perdeu a vida" (id.).
Este pao sabe (cheira) a mofo this bread tastes (smells)
of mould.
Note I.— The complemento directo is the one which, the
active voice being changed into the passive, becomes the sub-
ject: 0 livro foi comprado por mim the book was bought by me.
Note II. — There are verbs that have two constructions;
80 you may say : misinar alguma coisa a alguem (algunia coisa
is the complemento directo), and ensinar alguem a fazer uma
coisa (alguem is the complemento directo).
B. Other Complements without Preposition.
§ 43. There are transitive verbs which, besides the
complemento directo, require the addition of an adjective
(or some word thus applied) or substantive referring,
as a qualification, to the complemento directo and serving
to complete the signification of the verb ; — e.g. :
Nomear alguem ministro, fazer alguem felie. A cdrte
suppunha o duque de Bragan^a, D. Joao, incapag
de qualquer pensamento ousado.
This qualifying word is called nome predicativo do
complemento directo, predicative noun of the accusative.
The active voice being changed into the passive,
the predicative noun of the complement becomes the
predicative noun of tbe subject; — e.g.:
0 duque de Braganga, D. Joao, era pela c6rte supposto
incapaz de qualquer pensamento ousado.
The Complements and their Cases. 299
§ 44. The chief verbs thus constructed, are:
fazer to make appelidar \ , . ,
tornar to turn, become cognominar / ^ ^^^ name
eleger to elect achar to find, judge
nomear to name considerar to consider
jurar to swear crer to believe, think
declarar to declare julgar to judge
constituir to constitute reputar to repute
institiiir to institute suppor to suppose
sagrar to consecrate descrever to describe
MW^tr to anoint pintar to paint
coroar to crown representar to represent.
cJiamar to call
Remark 1. — With some of these verbs the predicative
noun may be joined to the verb by the particle cowo— e.g. :
considerar justa uma coisa or considerar uma coisa como Justa.
With some verbs the qualification of the complemento
directo, instead of being a simple predicative noun, may be
ruled by the preposition por, and also para (expressing an
aim) — e.g.: instituir alguem por herdeiro. The employment
of por (or como) is obligatory with the verbs ter and haver
in their meaning to judge, think, suppose, and with the verbs
dar &ndtomar and their synonyms— e.g.: ter alguem por feliz.
Remark 11. — Instead of the predicative noun, an equi-
valent expression may form the complement of the above verbs:
Os historiadores rejmtam D. Jodo III de intelligencia
apoucada.
§ 45. As an adverbial complement the accusative
without preposition is employed to indicate:
(a) the price or value with the verbs custar to cost,
valer to be worth, avaliar (em) to value, to tax, apreciar
to appreciate, conceituar to value, think, etc. — e.g. :
Entdo a vida em Lishoa custava os olhos da cara,
(b) the manner:
Elle passeava o chapeu na nu>ca e as moos nas algiheiras.
He walked about with his hat on his neck (at the back
of his head) and his hands in his pockets.
§ 46. Elliptically the accusative is employed in
colloquial language:
Eil-o! there he is!
Desgragado gxie est Unlucky man!
Boa tarde, minha senhora! Boas festas!
300 LesBon 10.
25. Exercise.
Serve your fatherland whenever it is threatened or its
dominions are invaded by enemies. Do not contradict those who
wish you well and advise you. They will help you (passive
voice), and you will thank them for your rescue. Do not be-
lieve, however, those who flatter you. Imitate always those
who precede you with a good example. Follow them, and
all true friends will felicitate you (pass. v.). Here it
smells of fresh hay. This cake tastes of lemon. The poli-
cemen summoned the crowd to disperse, but they were not
obeyed. They menaced the public with their arms, but the
people even defied the gun-barrels. Fool that you are, to be-
lieve that you will be considered a victim of the intrigues of
your adversaries. Thou shalt love God above all things and
thy fellow-creature as thyself.
26. Leitnra.
Tomada de Santarem (see Less. 16).
A voz do rei, sobrelevando as do tropel que o cercava,
retumbou entao por cima de estnipida.^ Bradava por Santiago
e pela Virgem, e ao mesmo tempo dizia aos que estavam no
adarve: — Eis-me aqui! eis-me aqui! Mettei-os a espadal
Nem um escape do ferro! —
Entretanto tinham arvorado outra escada, e 25 homens
d'armas estavam em cima. A vozearia dentro e f6ra do cas-
tello era ja confasa e medonha. Affonso dividiu as suas pe-
quenas for^as em dois corpos, um que tentasse escalar o muro
pela direita, outro que tomasse o caminho do arrabalde assen-
tado na margem do rio, para que os sarracenos nao viessem
por aquella parte impidir-lhe o approximar-se da entrada. Ao
mesmo tempo os 25 esfor(jados tentavam quebrar as portas,
arremessando pedras contra ellas, mas debalde, at^ que, ati-
rando ao de fora um malho de ferro por cima do muro, pu-
deram os que se achavam dentro, partir com elle os ferrOlhos.
Despeda9ado o dique, a torrente precipitou-se dentro do
castello. Afifonso, movido pelo impeto do enthusiasmo religioso,
ajoelhou no limiar d'aquellas portas que mal cuidava se haviam
tao facilmente de abrir para o receberem vencedor.
Segniu-se uma resistencia inutil e uma larga carnificina.
Os raio3 do sol, que nascfira entretanto, nao encontraram ji
sobre o roqueiro castello o estandarte do Islam ,derribado n'essa
noite (15 de mar9o), para nunca mais se erguer sobre as torres
da opolenta Santarem. (Alexandre Herculano).
^ Estrupida b. estr^pito.
The Complements and their Cases. 301
CoiiTersa<^ao.
Que se diz da voz do rei Affonso?
Por quern bradava e que dizia?
Que tinham feito entretanto?
Como dividiu Affonso as suas for^as?
Que deviam fazer os d^s corpos?
Que tentavam fazer os esforQados ao mesmo tempo e com
que effeito?
Que fez Affonso, quando a torrente dos sitiadores se
precipitou dentro do castello?
Que se seguiu a entrada for^ada d'elles?
Que 6 que ja nao encontraram os raios do sol?
Em que dia e anno houve.logar a tomada de Santar^m?
Eleventh Lesson.
The Complements and their Cases (contmued).
C. Complements with a Preposition.
(Complemento indirecto.)
§ 47. The Complement preceded by the
Preposition de.
The preposition de is employed:
(a) With nouns:
(a) as a genitive complement of the subject: o
amor de Deus, the love of God (God loves);
(P) as a genitive complement of the object: o
temor de Deus, the fear of God (God is feared) ;
(y) to indicate property: o xm^o d'el-rei, the king's
palace ;
(5) to denote time, place, material, form, price,
character, extension: na era de Christo; o com-
mercio do Porto; uma perna de pdu; luvas de
seda; chapeu de tres hicos (three-cornered hat);
cadeira de hragos; charuto de vintenf'; coisa de
valor; esquadra de quince velas; cinco metros de
altura (or de alto) por tres de largura (or de largo);
(e) in a partitive condition (cf.L.9 ofP.I): wn copo
de dgua; um pouco de assucar; nada de bom;
tudo quanto ha de mats hello;
302 Lesson 11.
(I) before an attribute (cf.P.II, §23): o rei da Ingla-
terra; o imperio daAlemanha; homem de itUrigas;
(r\) to express a destination: a sola de jantar; uma
penna de escrever; papel de cartas; quarto de
dormir; estar de gugrda;
(%) to indicate a characteristic: o homem das harhas
negras the man with the black beard ; uma sa-
lada dliervas finas (de alface) a salad of fine
herbs (lettuce);
(b) After certain adjectives and participles which
mostly indicate physical or moral qualities:
cego de ambos os olhos blind of both eyes
surdo do ouvido direito deaf of the right ear
alegre de semblante with a merry face
sou mais velho de cinco annos I am older by 5 years.
Such words are:
leve de (dinheiro) short of (money)
tranquillo de (alma) quiet of (mind)
provido de provided with
capag de capable of, etc.
(c) With verbs such as: ter de, haver de with a
following noun or infinitive: accusar de, arrepender-se
de, ser de to belong to, to come from; vingar-se de,
desforrar-se de to revenge oneself on and others, in
English mostly employed with of.
accusar de to accuse of precisar de to (be in) want
arrepender-se de to repent of (of)
ser de to belong to, to come abster-se de to abstain of
from desconfiar de to distrust of
ter de \ to have to queixar-sc de to complain of
haver de f to be obliged to soffrer de to suffer from
aproveitar-se de to profit by morrer de to die of
acahar de fazer to finish doing tremer de to tremble with
vingar-se de to revenge oneself ncU) passar de not to pass
of beyond
desforrar-se de to pay back passar-se <^ to do without
for gostar de to like
felicitar de to wish joy for vestir de to clothe with or in
gozar de to rejoice for revestir de to invest with
prevenir de to inform of ornar de to furnish or trim
with.
The Complements and their Cases. 808
(e) After the past participle of the passive voice of
verbs expressing a feehog, de may be employed instead
of por: ser amado de to be loved by.
(f) In elliptical phrases like: aqui d'el rei! (a cry
for help); ai de mim woe unto mel pobre de mini poor
me! felizes de nos! infeliz d'elle! etc.
(g) As an expletive in familiar language: a hoa da
midher the good soul, o garoto do rapaz the naughty
boy; 0 pobre do homem the poor man; o malandro do
jardineiro the sluggard of a gardener.
(h) In comparatives de may be employed before
que: Mle sdbia mais do que outros.
(i) In absolute superlatives as: o rei dos reis the
king of kings; o cdntico dos cdnticos the Song of Songs.
Remark. — De may join several complements to one noun
without being repeated: Berlim tern uma academia de sciencias
mechanicas e architectura ; muitas sociedades de sciencia e lite-
ratura; gahinete de histdria natural e de medalhas^ galeria de
quadras e estdtuas.
(k) In adverbial locutions, such as:
de or por certo to be sure estar de castas or de barriga
de cima from above para o ar to lie on one's
de dentro from within back
de novo anew de manha in the morning
de fdra from without de tarde in the afternoon or
de todo altogether evening
de joelhos kneeling de noite at night
de pressa quickly de madrugada at dawn
de vagar slowly de vez em guando sometimes
de vivas (deviras) indeed de accordo com in agreement
de propdsito on purpose with
de facto really de mans(inh)o softly
de resto besides de chapeu na mdo with one's
de modo so that hat in one's hand
de repente, de salto suddenly de brago dado arm in arm
de justiga right(ly) de bragos abertos with open
de verao in summer arms
de vez at once de moo a (or em) moo firom
estar de volta to be back hand to hand, etc.
§ 48. The preposition a is employed:
(a) Before nouns, thus indicating:
804 Lesson 11.
(a) the dative complement: o jardineiro deu uma
magd ao filho;
(p) the accusative complement of the person after
certain verbs which need two complements, one
of the person and another of the thing, and
always in the phrase amar a Deus.
Examples: Bevemos amar a Deus sohre todas as
coisas e ao prdximo como a nos mesmos. '''A partilha do
mundo" chamou B. JoOo II ao convenio que se estava
negociando. A nagdo acclamou rei de Portugal a B.Jodo,
Also if a misunderstanding is to be avoided : Be que
soffre? perguntou o medico a meu amigo. Pede ao que
for mais leal (cf. §42).
N.B. — After como we employ a when without this pre-
position it is not evident whether como refers to the subject
or to the object:
Tratei-o como a homem de hem.
I treated him as a man of honour.
Tratei-o como homem de hem.
I treated him as a man of honour.
(f) space and direction: a cinco Jcilometres d'dqui;
vou a casa (home) a direita (a esquerda) to the
right (left);
(b) time: a que horas? as seis horas; aos vinte an-
nos; ao por de sol;
(e) instrument or means: morto a hala; impresso a
muitas cores \ aberto ao dnzel; pintado a oleo, a
esfuminJio (stump), a crayon;
(I) aim: sais a ver; partir a negocios importantes;
(r\) manner: a pe, a cavaUo, a nado, a medo, a cos-
tume, ao parecer, etc.;
(%) measure, price, tax: comprar or medir a metros;
pesar as arrohas; comprar or vender a vintem;
juro or cdmhio a cinco por cento;
(i) measure of time or space: a tiro de hala; a tres
Uguas de distancia; d*aqui a dez annos; a tantos
dias;
(k) a near future: o comhdio estd a chegar;
(X) a repetition or duration: andar a saltar; ensinar
a ler; continuar a falar (cf. d of this §).
The Complements and their Gases.
305
(b) After adjectives, such as;
acostumado a favoravel a
aff^igoado a
ajfeito a
agradavel a
anterior a
attento a
horn a
caro a
conforme a
contrdrio a
desagradavel a
disposto a
ensinado a
equivalente a
fiel a
hostil a
identico a
igual a
inclinado a
indifferente a
(in)docil a
inferior a
inexoravel a
insensivel a
necessdrio a
nocivo a
ohediente a
parallelo a
posterior a
preciso a
prejudicial a
prestes a
propenso a.
rebelde a
semelhante a
sdbranceiro a
superior a
surdo a
util a
(c) After verbs, such as: agradar a, antorizar a,
comprar a, conquistar a, falar a, fazer hem a, faltar a
(faltar as obrigagoes, ao dever, a sua palavra to neglect
one's duties, break one's word), orar a, succeder a, pedir
a, pertencer a, ensinar a, ohrigar a, pintar a (oleo), tra-
bcdhar a (agulha) etc.
N.B. I.— If the verbs fazer, deixar, mandar, ouvir, vir,
sentir are followed, not only by an accusative of the person,
but also by a transitive infinitive with an accusative of things
or a complementary clause, the complement of the person
is generally put into the dative: Fiz-lhe perceber a nao-razao-
dos seus escrupulos; mandei-lhe copiar a carta; but: mandei-o
eonduzir a casa; fizeram-no proclamar regente.
N.B. II. — Cheirar a to smell of; saber a to taste of
(saber a meldo, cheirar a vinho),
(d) Before the infinitives of the verbs: estar^ ser,
andar, ir, passar, ouvir etc.: estar a sair, a chegar, a
morrer; andar a procurar, a estndar; passar (o tempo)
a ler^ a ndo fazer nada; ouvir passar os a cantar, fontes
a correr; ''Como se fosse apenas a deitar-me . . . j e o teu
olhar ainda a ensinar-me j a morrer com amor e con-
flanga".
Cf.: estar a espera to be waiting; estar a morte
to be dying; andar a procura de to be looking for.
(e) Instead of a relative clause: o melhor a fazer
the best to be done; o primeiro a entrar the first enter-
Portugueae Conversation-Grammar. • 20
806 Lesson 11.
ing; "a tua vida a rir na minha vida' your life smiling
into my own.
(f) In adverbial locutions, such as:
a tempo in due time a s6s alone by oneselves
d pressa in a hurry a vontade at ease
a contento with satisfaction a mdo at hand
(i/rawcesa in a French manner a pedagoSj aos hocados in
a conselho (de) on the advice pieces
(of) ao certo surely, exactly
pouco a potcco little by little, ds vezes sometimes
by degrees ds escuras at dark
a mats e mats more and more ds claras openly, evidently
dia a dia day by day d espera de waiting for
folha a folha leaf by leaf a ser assim in this case
gotta a gotta drop by drop a ndo ser assim (or isso) in
a um, a uma one by one the other case
dois a dots \ ^ i^ . a dizer a verdade to tell the
duos a duos i '"^ ''y *''° truth
a par de beside, in comparison isso ndo faz ao caso, (ao ne-
with gdcio, d questdo) that does
salto a salto by leaps and not matter
bounds d vista dHsso thereupon
a tremer trembling a menos de if not, unless
a suar sweating a propdsito by the bye.
(g) EUiptically in exclamations: a saude de V^ Ex'^ !
ds armas! to armsl a memoria dos grandes heroes!
27. Thema.
Oxford has a university which counted among its professors
Max Miiller, Mattew Arnold, and Sir Hubert von Herkomer (cf.
§42). Will you have the kindness to give me the €l>idrio de No-
ticiasT> and the «Pnm6iro de Janeiro^^ In Portugal newspapers
are bought at the price of ten reis from the sellers or the boys (ga-
rotos) in the streets. The <Gommercio dd Porto* is sold at a
vintem a copy. In summer or on hot days you may sometimes see
gentlemen with their hats in their hands walking in the Ave-
nida da Liberdade. It does no good to the nerves to be
too sensible to impressions of any kind. If you want to
enjoy good health, you must be deaf and indifferent to im-
pressions injurious to health. If we walk so slowly, we shall
not arrive home before evening. Let us walk quicker, so as to
be back sooner than our sluggard of a cousin, who, to tell
the truth, needs a reprimand. The least we can do is to profit
by the experiences of others and to be attentive to all things
The Complementa and their Cases. 307
that may be favourable, pernicious, or adverse to our projects.
By the bye: On the 5*^ of March of next year— that is,
in three months from to-day — you have to pay the bill of ex-
change of ;£ 50. Abstain from any superfluous expenses and
content yourself with what you have. If, however, you need
money, communicate with me in due time. Who is that lady
in the violet dress? That one with the fair hair? No, that
one with the red hair and the lace-trimmed dress with a train.
28. Yersao.
De, preposi^ao que denota o logar d'onde vem ou sae
alguma pessoa ou cousa (venho de Roma; cartas, noticias de
Londres); a origem (lei de Deus); a rela(j5o (parente, amigo
de)', a propriedade (livro de Antonio); a materia de que ^
feita alguma cousa (annel de ouro, copo de crystal) o estado,
as qualidades de alguma pessoa ou cousa (anno de fome, dia
de calma, homem de honra, coberto de chagas); o modo (andar
de pressa, fazer alg. c. de caso pensado); a causa, o motive
(morrer de feme, tremer de medo) ; o uso ou destino (tribunal
de justi^a, tempo de estudo); o tempo em que se faz, ou
succede alg. c. {de dia, de noute, de verSo, de inverno).
De serve tambem de particula extractiva (peda90 de pao) ;
e designativa (prodigio de virtude, exemplo de valor, cidade
de Coimbra). Faz as vezes de outras preposi^oes, como desde
{de Madrid a Lisboa, de tempo immemorial), tocante, sobre
(falar cfe . . .), por (amado de todos). Serve para ligar dois
verbos (acabar de Ifir, de escrever; gosta de estudar); um verbo
e um substantivo (ambi^ao de reinar) ; um verbo e um adjec-
tivo (difficil de cr6r, fdcil de entender). Precede os infinitos dos
verbos para formar o fiituro composto (quem ha de ganhar honra,
nao se ha de entregar ao descanso) ; e antepoe-se aos adverbios
{de perto, de longe, de baixo, de cima) ; ou a outras preposi^oes
(de sobre a porta). Algumas vezes, por eleg^ncia e propriedade
da lingua, usa-se esta preposi^ao entre dois substantives (o
ladrao do mo(jo, a embusteira da velha) ; ou entre um adjective
ou substantivo e um substantivo ou pronome (o man de Thyo-
neu, 0 pobre do homem; triste de mim, coitados de n6s). Pela
mesma razao tambem se poe depois de alguns verbos e antes
da dic9ao em que elles passam a exercer o sen significado;
mal se faz de cr6r o que se nao cuida nem espera.
(After Lacerda: Diccionario encyclop^dico.)
20*
308 Lesson 12.
Twelfth Lesson.
Eemarks on the Prepositions.
(Cf. L. 11: de and a.)
§ 49. The frequently employed prepositions a, de^
em, por are generally repeated: Folio a elle e ao irm&o
d'elle; pensei nHsso e n'aquiUo; fago-o por ti e por elle.
§ 50. Several prepositions may be joined to the
same noun or pronoun. If joined to a pronoun, all
prepositions precede; if to a noun, one precedes, the
other follows, the noun being repeated by a pronoun:
with or without him com ou sem elle; coffee with or
without sugar cafe com assucar ou sem die; before and
behind the house deante da casa e atrds d'ella.
§ 51. Sometimes several prepositions are joined
with one another or with adverbs: atrds de, atraves de
deante de, para com, por debaixo de, de ao pe de (from
the neighbourhood of).
§ 52. Some Portuguese Prepositions in English
Translation.
(1.) Mifiv (no, na, velle, neste etc.) in, at, on:
Em Londres; na Inglaterra, em Forttigal. Em casa at home.
Na casa in the house; em casa delle, em nossa casa;
num dia, em um instante : nesse tempo; numa palavra;
em breve; em breves lirihas; ensinar em musica; estar
em fdrias, em agosto ; no ar ; em geral; em particular ,
em extreme (to the atmost); em cumprimenio ou exe-
cugdo das or dens; d sombra d'um carvalho.
fia mesa; na praga, no chao, no mar alto (in the
offing, on the high seas, at the main); encostar-se no
cotovello, na esperanga; metter-se em cavallarias alias
(to mount the high horse); avaliado em cinco mil rHs.
Estd'lhe 0 vestido em (her dress comes to) duas libras;
insistir em.
illustre em famxi; rico em conhecimentos ; pobre em
bens; agarrar-se em, pensar em; em si (in the abstract,
in itself); no sdh(b)ado, nesse dia.
em castigo de; em signal de; em honra de; em pro-
veito de, em damno de; passar de mao em mdo (to go
from hand to hand) ; de boca em Kdca; numa assentada
at one pull.
Remarks on the Prepositions. 309
vir 'etn soc(c)6rro, no vapor; em todd a hora.
em (or por) ddio da pessoa ; em razao de amizade.
Que horas sdo no seu reldgio?
Em is also sometimes employed before the infinitive or the
gerund of a verb : o dominio do mundo ndo consiste em
0 poss^uiVy con»iste em o pisar. Em estudando a gram-
mdtica da prdpria Ungua, fica o homem apto para aprender
com facilidade outro qualquer idioma.
(2.) I\ira indicates direction, aim, use (after estar)
somethiiig imminent; it answers to the question: where
(to)? whither? what for? to what purpose? when?
Examples.— Par^iw para Inglaterra. Esta madeira e
boa para navios. Os portuguSses sdo hons para ma-
rujos. Para a semana next week; para o mSs que
. vem next month. Para o sul, o norte; para a direita.
Estavamos para dar a vila. Estou prompto para fazer
0 ajuste. Das plantas umas dirigem os ramos para
0 ar, outras para a terra. Estuda para medico, para
letrado, a fim de ter um modo de vida decenie. Estas
luvas sdo para a menina. Vem para o Natal. Serd
para sempre. Ha sets para sete annos.
(3.) Idioms with para:
Ser para ... to be fit for ; este sujetto e para pouco . . .
Estar para to be disposed or appointed for: ndo
estou para isso, para aturdl-o: Essa quinta estd para
vender. De mim para mim, de si para si unto me,
unto him. Pensei de mim para mim. Para vergonha
nossa for our shame.
(4.) Before an infinitive para corresponds to "in
order to":
Fil'O para llie ser agradavel. Ndo e para admirar it
is not to be wondered at. Para dizer a verdade.
(5.) Para is sometimes joined to com and has the
meaning of towards.
Ser bom, affavel, justo para (com) os companheiros, dis-
cipulos ou para com todos.
(6.) Para may be employed for por (see (7.) of this
paragraph) in order to express the cause of an action
or an intended effect:
Procurou cortar a conversagdo para (or por) ndo expor-se
a dizer mais do que qtcizera.
310 Lesson 12.
There is, however, a difference between para and
por: para hints to the effect as being certain, por as
being uncertain:
Movo OS pes para andar ; ando muito por vSr se posso
dormir melhor. Saio de casa para ir ao campo, onde
darei um passeio por dissipar a melancolia.
(7.) IPor has a manifold employment expressing,
however, in spite of apparent diversity, its original
meaning— i.e.: the space between the subject and its
aim, a space which may be considered as such, or as
a way or means for its design.
Examples. — Ir por mar, por terra (by sea, by land),
po^' um lado, por caminho direito, ' por todo o reino.
Entrar por ttma rua, por um rio ou porto. A bala
entrou pelo (== por o) muro (beat through the wall).
A espada entrou por elle (pierced him). Ir p&r al-
guem to call for or go to meet somebody; ir por
dinheiro. Pelos annos de mil nove centos about 1900.
Por outra parte somewhere else, on the other side;
por outro lado on the other side. 0 mez por vir
next month ; o (tempo) por vir or porvir the future.
Vm por um one by one. Cada am por sen turno
each by his turn. Deixar por morto to leave for
* dead. Comegar por to begin with. Passar por aUe-
moo to be taken for a German.
Por isso therefore; por isso mesmo for that very reason;
nem por isso nevertheless. Pot mim as for me, for
my part; por quern e I say! Por qtiem me toma?
Whom or what do you take me for? Por falta de
for want of. Por medo que for fear of, lest. Feito
por mim, por elle done by me, by him. Isto estd
por fazer this is still to be done. Por pouco que
ndo alcangasse o combdio he had nearly lost the train.
Por rico que seja however rich he may be.
Por essa razdo, por falta (de), por isso, por ordem, por
mandado, por culpa. Foi condemnado por wna pe-
qu^na falta; por commodidade; por costume; por in-
veja; por forga ou por vontade obliged or of one's
own accord. Por hem ou por mal. Por (ov pelo)
am^r de Deus, por amor do prdximo. Por ser amigo
d'elle because he is his friend. Por carecer, por merecer,
Mandar por embaixador to send as an ambassador.
A obra ficou por acabar . . . remained unfinished; as
Remarks on the Pre{>o8ition8. 309
vir 'efn soc(c)drro, no vapor; em toda a horq,.
em (or por) 6dio da pessoa ; em razao de amizade.
Que horas sdo no sen reUgio?
Em is also sometimes employed before the infinitive or the
gerund of a verb : o dominio do mundo ndo consists em
0 pos»uir, cansiste em o pisar. Em estudando a gram-
mdtica da pf-dpria lingua^ fica o homem apto para aprender
com facilidade outro qualquer idioma.
(2.) JPara indicates direction, aim, use (after estar)
somethiiig imminent; it answers to the question: where
(to)? whither? what for? to what purpose? when?
Examples.— Par^iw para Inglaterra. Esta madeira e
boa para navios. Os portuguSses sdo hons para ma-
rujos. Para a semana next week; para o mis que
, vem next month. Para o sul, o norte; para a direita.
Estavamos para dar a vMa. Estou prompto para fazer
0 ajuste. Das plantas umas dirigem os ramos para
0 ar, outras para a terra. Estuda para medico, para
letrado, a fim de ter um modo de vida decenie. Estas
luvas sdo para a menina. Vem para o Natal. Serd
para sempre. Ha seis para sete annos.
(3.) Idioms with para:
Ser para ... to be fit for ; este sujeito e para pouco . . .
Estar para to be disposed or appointed for: ndo
estou para isso, para aturdl-o: Essa quinta estd para
vender. De mim para mim, de si para si unto me,
unto him. Pensei de mim para mim. Para vergonha
nossa for our shame.
(4.) Before an infinitive ^ara corresponds to "in
order to":
Fil-o para Ihe ser agradavel. Ndo e para admirar it
is not to be wondered at. Para dizer a verdade.
(5.) Para is sometimes joined to com and has the
meaning of towards.
Ser bom, affavel, justo para (com) os companheiros, dis-^
cipulos ou para com todos.
(6.) Para may be employed for por (see (7.) of this
paragraph) in order to express the cause of an action
or an intended eflfect:
Procurou cortar a conversagdo para (or po?') ndo expdr-se
a dizer mais do que quizera.
312 Lesson 12.
30. Leitura.
A emigragao portnguesa para o Brasil.
Queixam se numerosos proprietarios territoriaes da escassfiz
de operarios campestres, apesar do angmento de salarios. Era
natural que ao mesmo tempo se pedisse como remedio o er-
guer obices a emigra^ao; comtudo nao me recordo que se
levantassem jamais importantes clamores tao desarrazoados que
c^gamente a combatessem. Pedia-se reforma da lei do recru-
tamento per modo que a lavoura nao soffresse com a manu-
ten^ao da for9a militar. Chegou-se a pedir isen96es para o
jornaleiro campestre, por «e entender que o imposto de sangue
era uma das principaes causas, senao a maxima, de emigra-
rem para o Brasil tantos rapazes. lam clandestinamente ou
arratijavam passaportes por maneiras fraudulentas. Esta repug-
n&ncia ao serYi90 militar, innata em todo o Minho, € bem expli-
cdvel, por isso que o filho, ajudando desde crian^a sens paes nos
diversos grangeios agricolas, e d'elles violentamente arrancado,
com grave prejuizo do casal agricola. Prefere, pois, tentar em
regioes desconhecidas a sua independencia a servir a patria no
exircito. A repugu9,ncia pela vida militar vfimol-a confirmada
na emigragao claudestina, que em tao grande escala se effectaa
n'esta regiao, constituida em grande parte por mancebos fu-
gindo ao recrutamento. Esta repugnancia, habilmente explo-
rada pelos engajadores, que enxameiam na regiao, facilitando
passaportes para os critninosos fugirem a justi^a e os mancebos
se esquivarem ao servi^o do ex^rcito pelo modica quantia de
nove mil reis, 6 em extremo auxiliado pela facilidade de trans-
portes e extensa raia da provfncia. Supponha-se modincada
a lei do recenseamento militar a contento dos lavradores, e
extincto portanto a principal origem da clandestina sahida de
moitos Portugueses. Bestava saber se nao augmentaria ipso
facto (= por isso mesmo) a sahida legal. Por outras palavras ;
todos OS que se expatriam clandestinamente, baveriam deixado
de tomar o caminho do estrangeiro, desde que nao ficassem
Bujeitos ao servi^o no ex^rcito, ou elle se tomasse compativel
com os labores campestres? Cuido que muitos dos emigrantes
dandestinos iriam ds claras para o Brasil, e, sendo assim, as
modifica9ae8 na lei do recrutamento poderiam ser seguidas por
accr^scimo da emigra9ao legal. Na corrente exportadora de
portugufis'es estd um caracteristico signal da nossa decadfincia
economica, (Rodrigues de Freitas).
CoiTersa^ao.
Em que circumstancia se yd a principal causa da emi-
gra9fto portugu^sa?
Prepositions Continued. 313
Qnal 6 a consequ^ncia immediata d'essa emigrapSo?
Que remMio se Ihe pediu?
Em que se baseava o pedido de isen^ao?
Qaal a maneira de emigrarem os rapazes?
Come se explica a repugnancia ao servi90 militar?
Que e que os mancebos preferem?
Per quern e como 6 explorada essa repugnancia?
Que v6 0 economista Rodrigues de Freitas na emigra^So
para o Brasil?
Que cuida elle, suppondo-se modificada a lei do recru-
tamento ?
Thirteenth Lesson.
Prepositions Continued.
§ 53. How to express Certain English Prepositions*
(a) About.
About: 1. in the sense of "round" is to' be rendered
by em volta de, em roda de, em redor de; 2. in the sense
of "concerning" by com respeito a, sghre, acerca de;
3. in speaking of things which people carry about them,
it is translated by com or may be not translated at all;
4. when it means near a certain number or quantity,
by pouco mats on menoo, cerca de, por ahi; 5. when ex-
pressing nearness to a particular time, it is translated
by perto de, por.
(1) All thronged about the orator.
Todos acotovellavam-se em volta do orador.
f (2) I will speak to him about this aifair.
Hei-de Ihe falar com i^espeito a este negocio.
He could not give me any information about what had
happened.
Elle ndo poude dar-me Informacdo atgicm,a acerca do que
se tinha passado.
(3) I had no money about me.
Eu ndo trazia dinheiro (commigo).
(4) We are about 300 people.
Somos pouco mats ou menos (or por ahi) trezentas pessoas.
The dinner lasted about two hours.
0 jantar levou perto de (cerca de) duas horas.
314 LesBon 13.
(5) The train arrived about three o'clock.
0 comhdio chegou pelas tres horas.
(b) At.
At: 1. is most commonly rendered by ti or em
with or without an article; sometimes it is not trans-
lated at all; 2. after nouns or verbs denoting derision,
anger, surprise, sorrow, etc., it is rendered by de (or
com); 3. "at," meaning "at the house" is em casa de;
"at the shop" is na loja de or a (or de) with the article.
(1) At six o'clock we were at home and at dinner.
As sets horas estavamos em casa e a jantar.
Do you play at cards? joga as cartas^
(2) She laughed at him ella riu-se d'elle.
To tremble at tremer de or com.
1 am surprised (angry) at what you say.
Est&u sttrpreendida (zangada) do que diz.
(3) We were at our aunt's estavamos em casa da tia.
We buy our coffee at the grocer's.
Compramos o nosso caf4 ao (or do) merceeiro.
(c) By.
By: 1. Denoting the agent or cause, is translated
by de or por:
An honest man is respected by everybody.
Um hom£m honrado 4 respeiiado por todas.
We are beloved by our parents.
Som^s amados de nossos paes.
I took the child by its hand.
Tomei a crianga pela mdo.
2. After verbs denoting to sell, to buy, to work, etc.,
and preceding a noun of weight or measure, day,
week, month or year, "by" is rendered into Portuguese
by a with the definite article or by por:
How much do you sell the tea by the pound?
A quanto vende o chd por arratel?
We work by the hour or by the day.
Irabalhamos d hora ou as dia.
3. When preceding a numeral immediately followed
by an adjective of dimension, "by" is rendered by ''por':
Prepositions Continued. 316
This room is fifteen feet long by ten wide.
Esta sola tern ^mize pes de comprido por dez de largo,
4. "By" following verbs denoting to kill, to wound
etc., is translated by diim golpe de, com or de um ataque
de-, etc., to express the use of the instrument by which
a man was wounded or the disease he was killed of:
The officer was wounded by the sword of his adversary.
0 official foi ferldo por um golpe de espada do seu ad-
' versdrio.
His father was killed by an inflammation of the lungs.
'Seu pae morreu com um ataque de pneumonia.
If the blows have been repeated, a golpes de (a
setadas, apedradcis) is used, in which case it is most com-
monly rendered in English by ''with." Ex.:
They knocked him down with a stick.
5. "By" is employed in the following idiomatic ex-
pressions :
By day de dia; day by day by the way | ,
'dediae,ndL ' ^ by the bye } "^^ ^«'^*"
by night de noite hard by pegado, proximo (a)
by means of a meio de, medi- by that time nisso, entao
ante by this time twelvemonth
one by one um por um d'aqui a um anno
two by two dots a dois by name de nome, pelo nome
by turns por turnos by myself por mim mesmo, sd
by the bulk em grosso, por by Jove par Deus!
grosso by to-morrow evening pela
by heart de c6r noite de dmanha
by letter por escrito by four o'clock pelas quatro
by no means de modo algum horas.
by and by logOj ao depois
' 81. Thema.
1. My father was not above (mais de) twenty-two years
old when he was married. My uncle's country-house is very
handsome, but it cost him above eighty thousand francs. It
is about a year since my friend set off for America. Rome
was buUt by Romulus. The pooK man has been driven out
of his house by his creditors. 1 will get up to-morrow at
six o'clock. Were you at Mrs. D.'s ball last night? Yes,
I was there. I Will pay you at the end of this month.
316 Lesson 18.
2. I rejoice greatly at yotir good luck. She always
smiles at everything that is said. Where was your sister this
morning? She was at her aunt's. My box is one foot and
a half deep by two wide and four long. Harold was wound-
ed by a sword. William the Second was killed by an arrow
in the New Forest. He is so strong that with his fist he
could knock down an ox. They killed the dog with stones.
The soldiers kill one another with bayonets.
(d) From.
1. "From" after or in connection with the verbs
to come, to send, etc., is generally rendered by da
parte de, de ao pe de, when followed by a noun or pro-
noun denoting a person:
Many compliments from Dr. 0.
Muitos ciimprimentos da parte do senhor doutor 0.
I come from him or her.
Venho da parte d-elle or d^ella. Venho de ao pe d'eUe
or d'ella.
Tell him from me diga4he da minha paHe.
2. "From" with a possessive == ("from someone's
house,") is da casa de:
I come from my uncle's, aunt's, etc.
Eu venho da casa do meu tio, da minha tia.
3. "From . . to . .", when denoting progress from
place to place or time to time, is rendered by de , , .a
(para, em, ate):
He went from street to street, from town to town.
yj, n . \ de rua a riia, de terra a terra.
' \ duma rua a out?'a, duma terra a outra.
From day to day, from time to time.
De dia a (or em) dia, de tempos a tempos.
4. "From" is rendered by desde (or de), and "to"
by ate, when speaking of extent or time.
From Easter to Christmas.
Desde a Pdscoa ate ao (or at4 o) Natal.
From the Rhine to the Ocean.
Desde o Rheno at^ o oceano.
From Lisbon to Porto.
Desde Lisboa ati ao (or atS o) Porto,
Prepositions Continued. 817
(e) On or upon.
1. "On" or "upon" generally = em, em cima de,
para cima de, sobre:
Your gloves are on the table.
As suas luvas estdo em cima da misa.
I am sitting on a chair.
Eu estou (assentado) numa cadeira.
A cover is spread on the bed.
Uma toberta estd estendida sobre a cama.
"On to" with verbs of motion = para dma de.
The cat sprang on to the table.
0 gato saltou para cima da mesa.
2. After the verb "to play," ow or upon is not
translated; after "to live," "to depend," and the like,
"on" or "upon" is rendered by de:
You play on the violin, and I play on the flute.
F* Ex** toca rebecca e eu toco flauta.
The prisoner lives on bread and water.
0 preso vive de pdo e dgua.
A good end often depends on a good beginning.
Um bom fim muitas vezes depende d'um bom principio.
3. "On" before the days of the week is rendered
by em with the article; in letter-dates, it is dropped in
Portuguese:
Come on Sunday or Monday.
Venha no domingo ou na segunda feira.
On the 19*^ of April.
No dia dezanove de Abril, etn 19 de . . .
Lisbon, on the 7^ of May lAsboa, 7 de Maio.
People go to church on Sundays.
Vae-se a igreja aos domingos.
4. "On," followed by a substantive expressing
action, or meaning "when" with a verb, is translated
by a and em:
On his marriage (when he married) ao seu casamento.
On that occasion nessa occasido.
818 Lesson 13.
(f) Over.
1. "Over" generally is translated by em (or a) cima
de, sobre when it signifies a stay; by por cima de, when
it means movement:
The looking-glass hangs over the chest of drawers.
0 espelho estd em cima da cdmmoda
The cat passed over the live coal.
0 goto passou por cima das brasas.
2. When it is equivalent to "more than" or "longer
than," it is rendered by tnais de, diem de:
The fight lasted over four hours.
A luta durou mais de quatro haras.
Note. — Distinguish carefully from this the use of "over"
as an adverb:
As soon as the rain is over.
Logo que a chuva tiver passado.
Is dinner over? Jd acdbou o jantar?
That's over and gone isso passou, isso jd Id vae.
(g) With.
1. "With" is rendered by de (or com) after verbs
denoting to die, to meddle, to do, to dispense, to load,
to cover, to fill, and after adjectives meaning pleased,
contented, etc. Ex.:
He is dying with cold elle morre de frio.
The waggon is loaded with goods.
0 carro estd carregado de mercadoria.
2. "With" is expressed by a without the article
before nouns denoting the means by which a thing is
done or made. Ex.:
To draw with a pencil desenhar a lapiz.
To "fight with" (a weapon) is : bater-se a {espada etc.).
3. "With" must not be expressed after certain
verbs, such as: to meet with encontrar (with direct ob-
ject; but: encontrar-se com); to trust with confiar alg. c.
a alg. ; to supply with fornecer alg. c. a alg. , to reproach
with langar em rosto, reprehender dig. c. a. alg. Ex.:
We shall supply him with everything.
Havemos de Ihe fornecer' tudo.
Prepositions Continued. 319
I reproached him with his ingratitude.
Eu reprehendi'lhe a sua ingratiddo.
4. "With" governing a noun together with which
it forms an adjective phrase in translated by de.
A bonnet with feathers um chapeu de plumas.
The boy with black hair o rapaz de cabellos pretos.
5. "With" meaning amongst, in, is rendered by
com and em:
With us, said the Frenchman . . .
Comnosco, dizia o frauds.
With woman, maternal love is the strongest feeling.
Na tntdher o amor maternal e o sentimento muis forte.
Remark.
As already stated, prepositions must always come before
the words they govern, and never (as often in English) at
the end of a sentence :
Whom are you speaking to? A quern fala?
What's that for? Para qui i isso?
The man whom you are interested in.
0 homem em que estd interessado.
32. Thema.
1. Go to Mr. Smith and tell him from me that I am
expecting him. From whom do you come? I come from
Miss B. I never received such an (=^ tamanho) insult from a
Frenchman. Charles was wounded in his arm, and not in his
leg. I will call upon you in the afternoon, and in the evening
(I will) go to the play. Upon what instrument does your
sister play? She plays the piano. That happened on the
12^ of March. I am in the habit of taking a cup of coffee
as soon as dinner is over.
2. Do not meddle with my affairs ; attend to your own.
Is that house covered with slates or tiles? It is covered with
tiles. This picture seems to be done with pencil. When you
meet with a poor man, never reproach him with his poverty.
France extends from the Bhine to the Atlantic Ocean. What
does he complain of? We have travelled from Switzerland to
Italy. You spend all the day in going from house to house,
from street to street, from place to place. Those labourers
work from morning to night. I walk every day from twelve
to three.
320 Leseon 18.
33. Leitura.
0 aiUomdvel.
0 automovel, como a propria palavra o esta a indicar, e
um carro que se move por si mesmo, ou independente de qual-
quer f6r9a exterior. Para comprehendermos facilmente o me-
cbanismo do automovel, notemos, antes de mais nada, certos
factos conhecidos de todos, que nos levarao, sem o menor es-
fOr^o, a comprehensao d'aquelle mechanismo. Qaando pomos
em movimento a roda de uma bomba, acontece que o movi-
mento que imprimimos a essa roda faz com que o fimbolo da
bomba Buba e des^a ; o que e o mesmo que dizer que o movi-
mento da roda se transmittiu ao fimbolo; — e suppondo o
caso inverso, isto e, que, em vez de fazermos girar a roda da
bomba, faziamos subir e descer, com o auxilio das maos, o seu
6mbolo, tambem o movimento d'este faria com que a roda en-
trasse a girar. Por outra: o movimento do fimbolo transmittir-
se-hia igualmente ao volante da bomba.
Quer isto dizer que se uma roda pode p6r em movimento
um fimbolo, tambem este pode p6r em movimento uma roda.
Ora no automdvei e precisamente o movimento de um Smbolo
(movimento rectiUneo alternativo, ou de vae-vem) o que foz
mover as rodas d'este vehiculo. Se n'um apparelho fizermos
com que o fimbolo se desloque n'um movimento de vae-vem,
subindo e descendo constantemente, 6 claro que a roda, que
esta ligada a esse embolo por uma haste, entrara a girar, e
girard emquanto o 6mbolo estiver em movimento.
Conversai^So.
Que 6 um automdvel?
D'onde ja deduzimos que se m6ve por si mesmo?
Que havemos de notar, para comprehendermos o seu
mechanismo?
Que acontece quando p6mos em movimento a roda d^uma
bomba ?
E que se daria, suppondo-se o caso inverse?
Que quer dizer isso?
Qual 6 0 movimento que faz mover as rodas d'um auto-
movel?
Como entrarSo as rodas a girar?
E durante que tempo continuarSo a girar?
Syntactic Peculiarities of Certain Parts of Speech. 321
Fourteenth Lesson.
Syntactic Peculiarities of Certain Parts of
Speech.
Pronouns.
A. Possessive Pronouns. ^Pronomes possessivos,
§ 54. Like the article, the possessive pronoun is
repeated before all nouns when designating persons or
things of different kind; equally before all adjectives
when referring to beings of different kind and preceding
the noun. Ex.:
Os mens desgostos e as minims cdegrias. JPartilhet comtigo
OS teus bons e os teus mans momentos.
§ 55. If there be no contrast of kind, or if the
adjectives do not refer to the same noun, the poss.
pronoun is not repeated:
Todos admiram as nossas vastas e hellas ftoresias.
§ 56. The gender of the nouns being different,
the possessive pronoun agrees witli the one next to it:
0 meu poder e gldria; a minha gldria e poder.
§ 57. A poss. pronoun which belongs to several
adjectives is not repeated if one or all of them follow
the noun:
Partilhei comiigo os teus bons momentos e os matts (os
teus momentos bons e maus).
§ 58. The poss. pronoun may be strengthened:
(a) By adding ^roprio: vi-o com os meusproprios olhos.
(b) By adding a demonstrative pronoun:
Ouvi por estes meus ouvidos dizer aqueUe seu amigo,
§ 59. Contrary to the English, the Portuguese
employs instead of the poss. pronoun:
(a) The definite article in those cases where the
relation between owner and object is evident:
Escreveu d av6 (to his grandmother).
Vendeu a ca>sa (his house).
Estendo o brago (my arm).
Tapa a boca (your mouth).
Cala a boca hold your tongue.
Portuguese ConyersationGrammar. 21
322 Lesson 14.
N.B. — If the object is an abstract noun in the plural,
the article may be omitted:
Jtecobrei (os) sentidos: redobrdmos (as) diligencias.
(b) Be or another preposition after certain verbs:
Miidar de fato to change dress.
Mudou d' aviso he changed his mind.
Cumpri corn a (minha) palavra I kept my word.
Ella caiu de joelhos she fell on her knees.
(c) De with the personal pronoun of the S'"^ per-
son, whenever the poss. pronoun sen, sua might cause
a misunderstanding:
Vi a irma d'elle, d'ella (his, her sister).
Fomos a casa d'elles (to their house).
§ 60. Before the same noun two poss. pronouns
are not admissible:
Os sens amigos e os mens.
Your and my friends, your friends and mine.
§ 61. If to a noun belong a poss. pronoun and
a possessive genitive, the latter must be preceded by
0, a, OS, as, esse, aquelle or the like:
Li as tuas cartas e as (essas, aquellos) de tua irmd.
I read your and your sister's letters.
§ 62. If the noun depending on the poss. pronoun
expresses a quality, the definite article may be employed
instead, while to the verb will be added the respective
personal pronoun in the dative:
Estranhei-lhe a franqiiesa I wonderad at his frankness.
Adfniro-lhes o sangue-frio I admire their self-possession
(or coolness).
Como te conhego a indole ... as I know your character*
Reconheci-lhe imia boa voz.
I noticed him to have a good voice.
N.B.— This construction may be employed with persons
and must be employed with things:
Avistdmos a cidade: jd se Ihe distinguiam (jd Ihe
distinguimos) as torres.
We got a sight of the town: its spires could already
be distinguished.
§ 63 While the adjective and participle always
agree with the possessive in gender and number, titles
Syntactic Peculiarities of Certain Parts of Speech. 323
of which the possessive forms an essential part, are
excepted from this rule, the adjective agreeing with the
natural sex of the person:
Vossa AlUza que e horn e justo (respectively : l)oa e
justa).
Sua Santidade estci hem lenihrado.
34. Thema.
He sacrificed his and his sister's fortune, though an ac-
quaintance of mine warned him. If he had doubled his efforts,
and if somebody had come to his help, he might have succee-
ded in saving his family from ruin. As I know his honesty, I
did whatever I could to guide his steps. But alas ! my friend,
all my measures were in vain. His own father gave him up.
I am wet through, I must change my dress. My friend changed
his mind, he will remain at home with his parents. My head
aches. I wrote a long letter to my aunt, who had asked me
to give her soms news from me. May 1 also give her your
kind regards? The woman fell on her knees. I have a
thorn in my foot. I have only lived a fortnight in this town;
so I don't yet know all its places and streets.
35. Leitura e yersao.
Carta ao Sr. G. P. sobre Feminismo.
Nao imagina V"^ Ex* o prazer que me deu a sua carta,
sabido como ^ que da discussao intelligente e sincera t6m sahido
as mais claras verdades; conhecido como e quanto se ganha
em fazer interessar pelas nossas opinioes, ainda os adversaries
que mais as combatem. E nao sendo V* Ex* um adversario,
mas um confesso adepto, embora moderado, maior prazer o
men em Ihe vir expor serenamente as ideias fenainistas, taes
como as comprehendo e preconiso. Diz V* Ex* que e femi-
nista, embora moderado, que o e, como todos os illustrados
nao poderao deixar de o ser, segundo a sua propria phrase.
Eis o nosso primeiro triumpho, a nossa principal batalha ven-
cida . . . Que victoria immensa nao representa essa sua simples
phrase! E se pensarmos que esta primeira, mas definitiva
conquista do espirito masculino. representa o trabalho de quasi
meio s^culo, temos vontade de dizer . . . que as mulheres,
apresentando as suas ideias e luctando pela educa9ao que as
superiorize, lembram a paciencia das alluvioes que fazem re-
cuar o mar e mudam o aspecto de um pais. Entendo que o
ser humano que pertence ao sexo femininO; nao deve ser coa-
gido (influenced) pela educa9ao, nem pelos costumes, nem pelas
21*
824 Lesson 15*.
conversas, nem pelos paes — que tfini' a mania de talhar muito
discrecionariamente o future dos filhos — a vfir no casamento
um fim, um ideal complete e unico, quasi uma obrigaQao.
Assim como o homem pdde ser professor, jornalista, 8ai3io,
artista, empregado, operario, tudo emfim, sem que ninguem Ihe
pergante pela certidao do matrimonio, sem embargo de serem
quasi todos chefes de familia, nao vejo inconveniente a que
a mulher procure a sua colloca9ao, tenha o seu curso scien-
tifico, estude, trabalhe para si, para o seu future, para a sua
vida autdnoma, sem se Ihe inquirir do seu estado . . .
(Anna de Castro Os6rio: As mulheres portuguftsas.)
Fifteenth Lesson.
Syntactic Peculiarities of Certain Parts of
Speech (continued).
B. Personal Pronouns.
§ 64. To put an emphasis upon a personal (or
demonstrative) pronoun (or a substantive), the Portu-
guese employ:
(a) The indefinite pronoun mesmo, (-self):
Escreveu elle mSsino he wrote himself (cf.: escreveu corn
o seu prdprio punJio he wrote with his own hand or
autographically).
Vimo-la a ella mismo we saw her herself.
Vimo-la nds mesmos we saw her ourselves.
(b) The verb ser with the pronoun o (a os as) and
a relative clause: ser o que (a que, etc.) or ser quern:
Tu fdste 0 que me salvaste (instead of "tu me salvaste'*)
it was you who saved me.
N.B. — "0" may be dropped ijTw 4 que me salvaste.
(c) The periphrase e (era, foi, etc.) que:
Tu i que me salvaste. i a ti que devo a minha salvagdo.
Here que is not a relative, but a particle of emphasis
C'Particula de realce"). In both periphrases (b) and (c)
the dependent verb generally agrees with the personal
pronoun: tu salvaste.
It was not we who said that
Syntactic Peculiarities of Certain Parts of Speech. 325
If, however, a pronoun so emphasized is followed
by quem, the verb agrees with this latter — i.e., it is put
into the S'*^ person singular. Ex.:
( JEu fui (o) que afp,rmei isso
It was I who affirmed that f '. ^ que uffirmeiisso
Fut eti (o) que affiiinei tsso
Fui eu quern affirmou isso.
Nos e que o ndo dissenios
Nds ndo fomos (os) que o dis-
seram
Ndo fomos nds (os) que o
disset'am
Ndo fomos nos quern o disse.
(d) The particle to be emphasized may be also put
at the beginning of the sentence, being generally
repeated by a personal pronoun. Ex.:
A tnini reputo-me um pohre filho de povo que por acaso
veto ter cd cima.
Essas hervas e preciso arrancd-Ui8 .
AqueUes individuos que desejarem orientar-se no estudo
dum tal prohlema ndo deixarei de Ihes recommenda7'
a leitura de dots hellos livres, (Jue venho de comptdsar.
§ 65. When two or more subjects (noun or pro-
noun) of different persons belong to the same verb,
this agrees with the plural of the most prominent per-
son (the 1^^ pers. is more prominent then, the 2^^ and
this more than the 3"^):
Eu, tu e elle partiremos juntos. Tu e elle partireis juntos.
Eu e meti irmdo partimos juntos.
Note.— In southern Portugal and in familiar speech the
verb is employed in the 3*^ person pi. instead of the 2^^:
Tu e ten irmdo partirao juntos.
§ ^Q. The absolute reflective pronoun is si, which
does not distinguish number or gender. It is employed
with the prepositions a, de, em, por (per), para, sohre.
With com it assimilates to comsigo. Sometimes it is
strengthened by mesmo:
Ndo estar em si to be out of one's mind
esta?' muito em si \ , , . « ,„
estar senhor de si / *^ ^« conscious of oneself
326 ' Lesson 15.
cair em si \ . . ' it*
tornar sobre si ] *^ "^^'^ *^ ^^^^^^^ ^^^^^
fazer alg. c. de per si, to do something separately
fazer para si to do for oneself
0 immdo em si the world by itself
pensar de si para si to think by oneself
tomar sohre si to take upon oneself
trazer comsigo to carry about oneself
ndo caber em si de . . . to be beside oneself with . . .
§ 67. "5i" depending on another preposition may
be translated by elle(s), ella(s):
Elle(s) tinha(m) todos contra elle(s) or si.
He (they) had everybody against him (them).
Viram o ceu azul por cima d'elles (or de si).
They saw the blue sky above them.
N.B.— The same translation takes place when "s2,'' being
in familiar speech employed also for "you," might cause a
misunderstanding. Pensa sempre em si may be: he thinks
always of you or . . . of himself. So, to express the latter, it
is better to say: 2^e/?sa sempre em si mesmo.
§ 68. The conjunctive reflective pronoun is se, which
takes the forms me, te^ nos, vos, according to the person
and number. Its place is:
(a) In an affirmative direct capital phrase after
the verb:
J£lle apresetitoii-se ; eu lenibro-me ; nds a/fastamo-nos,
(b) In such a phrase beginning with an adverb
or some complement, se may be placed before or after
the verb:
Hontem lemhrei-tne; Id se ficou ; pouco a pouco nos
aproximd?nos.
(c) In a negative and interrogative capital phrase
and always in a dependent clause before the verb:
JElle ndo se app'oximou; tu ndo ie applicas; a ecpta e
que se ndo esquecia; nem me fale nisso.
§ 69. How to translate "it is" with a predicative
complement :
(a) This being a noun with an article, possessive
or demonstrative pronoun, an adjective or a noun
Syntactic Peculiarities of Certain Parts of Speech. 327
employed as an adjective and followed by qiie or an in-
finitive, "it is" is translated by e:
E uma lastima it is a pity.
E meu it is mine ; e isto that's it.
E 0 ten dever. E certo, e verdade que se foi emhora.
E facil a gente enganar-se a si mesmo.
Seria jiisto (seria Jiistica) que fosse ahsolvido.
(b) The predicate being an adverb or a noun which
designs a transitory state, "it is" is rendered by "esta':
Estd hem it's all right; estd um horror it's a horrible
thing; estd uma helleza it's a beautiful sight.
§ 70. "So" or "that'' supplying the place of an
adjective, or of a noun used adjectively, or of a phrase,
is translated by o or isso or remains untranslated:
Portugal e um povo triste, e e-o ate quando sorri (and it
is so even when smiling).
Durante algum tempo, o sy sterna liberal foi uma palavra.
Hoje 7iem isso L
For some time the Liberal system was (but) a word.
To day it is not even that.
36. Thema.
Louis Philip, King of the French, wrote most of his
letters with his own hand. It's to you that I owe my liberty
and my life. Mrs. S. speaks always of herself and blames
everything she did not do herself. Have you your spectacles
about you ? Yes, I never go out without them. I never saw these
gentlemen in your house. Are they your nephews? Yes,
they are. She will think of us when she is unfortunate,
for she will certainly become so. Is that your house? Yes,
it is. Are those your shoes? Yes, they are. "Is it you, my
friend?" exclaimed I, when I heard somebody come up the
stairs. "Yes, it is I," answered he; "I bring you good news."
Was it you, my boys, who planted this tree? Virtue by it-
self is worthy of esteem; but vice by itself is hateful. I and my
children will pass the summer in the country. Then you and
your friends will no longer stay there.
37. Leitura,
Nao perdia o seu tempo aquelle veneziano que viera re-
commendado a S"alomao Zacuto e se disfar^ava em mercador
flamengo. Era um espirito perspicaz e observador. Desagra-
828 Lesson 16.
ddra-lho o caracter de Salomao. NSo era evidentemente o judeu
que elle suppozera encontrar.
Um outro Ihe parecera excellente para informador e auxi-
liar, em terra que tao completamente Ihe era desconliecida.
De um relance d'olhos o avaliara e Ihe percebera os meritos.
Esse outro era Ananias, o cdmico judeu, que a canalha de
Lisbfia apupava cruelmente.
Que importava ao yeneziano que elle fdsse ridiculo ? Sabia
muita cousa da yida de Lisb6a, conhecia e apreciava perspi-
cazmente os homens de Villa Nova da Gibraltar, seus corre-
ligiondrios, e nSo seria difficil conseguir que falasse desassorb-
bradamente.
Aquelle seria o seu precioso guia. Leu -Ihe a alma no
olhar, sentiu-lhe vibrar a ambiijao em breves referencias re-
passadas de malicia, em palavras soltas que vinham esbraze-
adas de ranc6r. Comprehendeu a especie d'homem que a for-
tuna Ihe deparava, e logo procurou acercal-o bem de si,
lisongeando-lhe as cobii^as e malqueren9as, tao rapidamente
surprehendidas. (Campos Junior: Guerreiro e Monge.)
Courersac^ao.
Que nos diz Campos Junior d'aquelle veneziano no seu
c^lebre romance «Guerreiro e Monge ?»
Quaes foram as relaqoes d'elle com SalomSo ZacutoV
Como vinha disfar^ado?
Qual foi 0 juizo que o seu espirito observador formou do
judeu que o acolhera?
Quem Ihe parecia melhor para informadoi:?
Como Ihe tinha percebido os meritos?
Que circumstancia tornava Ananias precioso aos olhos
dp veneziano?
Que procurou elle fazer em seguida?
Por 5^e meios o acercou de si?
Sixteenth Lesson.
Syntactic Peculiarities of Certain Parts of
Speech (continued).
Personal Pronouns (continued).
§ 71. If the modal verbs [querer, saber, dever,
poder, ir, deixar, fazer, mandar, vir, ouvir, sentir, etc.)
are followed by an infinitive and a personal pronoun,
Syjitactic PeculiariticB of Certain Parts of Speech. 829
this latter is placed in a direct sentence, whether affir-
mative or interrogative;
(a) After or before the infinitive, if it is its object:
Devo-o fazei' or devo fazSl-o? vou huscdl-o; posso dizer-
Ih'o or posso-Wo dizer ; tnandei-a abrir; vi castigdU-o.
(b) Before the infinitive, when it is its subject:
Mandei-o buscar pdo; vi-o castigar o coo; ouQO-a chamar
a fUha; fago-o vir ; ouviram-no falar; mandaram-me
entrar.
§ 71. In negative sentences the place of the pro-
noun is before the verb:
Nao rn'o tinhas dado; nao Wo deste?
In the case of § 70 (a) also in a negative sentence
the pronoun may be placed before the verb or after
the infinitive:
Nao 0 devo fazer (?) ; nao devo fazil-o (9).
In a dependent negative clause, the pronoun may-
precede or follow the ''nao':
"Jd porqiie me nao (or nuo me) esquego que S pobre,
miiito pobre, o nosso povo."
§ 72. If the phrase begins by a complement (ad-
verb, conjunction, relative pronoun, etc.) the conjunctive
pronoun is generally put before the verb or its auxiliary:
Emqnanto o nao vejo . . .; quantas vezes IKo nao
tenho dito!
Deus vol'O pague! (Here the conjunction "jwc" is
omitted.)
N.B. — The verbs ver, ouvir, deixar, mandarj fazer being
followed by an infinitive and an accusative complement of
the S'"^ person (Oj aj os, as)j the dative pronoun (Ihej Ihes)
may be employed instead (see § 62):
Eu vejo-lhes langar Idgrimas tristes.
The same is to be said of the verb chamar: chama-lke sever o;
clmmo'lhe meu. (See also § 62.)
§ 73. Conjunctions of the Pronouns.
(a) A pronoun of the dative or accusative may be
joined to a gerund, but never to a past participle:
Dizendo-Uie isto; tenho-Wo dito (but not: tenho dito-Wof)
830 Lesson 16.
(b) "5e" may be joined to another conjunctive
pronoun :
Nao se me tira da cabega que foram injustos comnosco,
(c) In the future and conditional tenses the pro-
noun complement is intercalated between the root of
the infinitive and the termination:
fechdl-o-d; sel-o-ei; far-lhe-ia falta; vel-o-emos ; dir-Wo-ei.
Popularly, these forms are not employed, but are
replaced by others — for instance:
Eu digo-Wo ao depots ; vamos vel-o.
(d) Sometimes a dative complement (especially of
the pronouns) is joined to a verb instead of a possessive
pronoun before a noun:
Ficava-nos tambem na amada terra o coragdo.
Also our heart remained in our beloved country.
(e) The EngHsh * 'there were four of us," instead
of "we were four," is rendered in Portuguese by:
JS?'amos quatro ao todo.
(f) In familiar speech the pleonastical "me" is used
in sentences like this:
Porque ndo me estiida? Why don't you study?
Ndo me saias d'aqui! Don't go out of this place.
(g) To the pronouns nos and vos is added some-
times an also pleonastical outros:
N6s-outros Portugueses we Portuguese,
(h) In famihar speech seu, sua are employed with
a following noun or an adjective used as such:
Seu garotoi Naughty boy!
Seu feliza7'do ! Fortunate man that you are !
Seu tola! Fool that you are!
88. Thema.
From where do you get your coffee? I get it sent from
Guatemala. Is it good? I have always heard it hghly praised.
I have also noticed it always to have the best flavour (cf.
§ 62). Some time ago there was a revolution in Catalonia,
but the Government succeeded in suppressing it. That province
strives to render itself independent, but until now it has
not yet succeeded. Get up! You intended to rise at cock-crow.
Don't yoa -hear it crow? I have heard it crowing already
Syntactic Peculiarities of Certain Parts of Speech. 831
half an hour ago. To this poor woman a letter was given
in which she was informed of her son's misfortune. She
melted into tears (= desfazer-se em pranto) so that she was
not to be calmed. Saint Anthony, the patron saint of Lisbon,
is said to have been preaching when a raving madman entered
the church and with wild words and gestures demanded the string
that fastened his hood. The saint immediately took it off, and
as soon as he clasped it round the madman, this latter changed
into one of his most attentive hearers.
39. Leitura.
Bia no campo.
A tarde principiava a coar-se atraves das grandes arvores
da nossa dev6za. Os campos estavam solitarios; neste, na-
quelle, dois ou tres bois como esquecidos. Tinhamos passado o
dia pouco communicativos e repassados de uma doce saudade
maguada: e, sem me sentir com coragem de Ihe dizer que
abrisse o piano, po>sei sobre a cadeira a rabeca que quiz fazer
cantar e que gemeu em torn menor uma amargura. Eramos
tres ha dez mezes e somos so dois agora. E, como o peque-
nito morr^ra aqui, desde entao a nossa casita de campo, aldea
e branca, no declive d'um monte verde, entre pinheiros, fechou-se
e nunca mais falei n'ella.
Quando me pediu que voltassemos, quiz dissuadil-a ter-
namente; mas ella tinha o riso nos labios; e um ramo de floras
outonaes para a campa do nosso fllho, uma visita matinal ao
cemiterio que e como uma singella quadra campestre, a missa
conventual dita pelo tio Jos6 na egreja fresca, o alm690 na
nossa salita de jantar rescendendo ainda a lua de mel ... 6
cora9ao egoista! attraiste-me e nao fui superior ao encanto
dum dia recolhido com ella na pacificadoi;a natur^za. Ainda
para mais a quadra ia deliciosa e eu amo 'o tempo em que
as arvores se despem dos sens atavios e entram na medita^ao
e na penitencia.
0 dia estava bellisimo, os caminhos cheios de sol e ainda
hiimidos das chuvas anteriores. De manhasinha atravessamos
a aldeia com o nosso ramo de flores na mao. Uma pontita
de pallidez dava-lhe mais realce ao rCsto meigo.
0 cemiterio estava alegre, tinha muitas rosas de toucar
e 0 seu muro caiado, ao fundo, d'onde se descortina o rio e
um panorama de verduras. Ajoelhamos piedosamente na campa
do nosso filho : cantara n'esse memento uma avesita n'um car-
valho proximo, e o sino dava as primeiras badaladas. Ella
limpou OS olhos e fomos entao beijar a mao ao tio Jose e
ouvir-lhe a missa. (Guilhermo Gama.)
382 Lesson 17.
40. Para decorar.
A Cigarra e a formiga.
Tendo a cigarra em cantigas « Amiga (diz a cigarra),
Folgado todo o verao, Prometto, a fe d'animal,
Achou-se em pennria extrema, Pagar-vos antes de agosto
Na tormentosa esta^ao, Os juros, e o principal. »
NSo Ihe restando migalba, A formiga nunca empresta,
Que trincasse a tagarella, Nunca da, por isso ajunta.
Foi valer-se da formiga, «No verao, em que lidavas ?>
Que morava perto d'ella. A pedinte ella pergunta.
Eogou-lhe que Ihe emprestasse, Responde a outra : «Eu cantava
Pois tinha riqueza e brio, Noite e dia, a toda a hora».
Algum grao, com que manter-se « Oh ! Bravo ! (toma a formiga)
T6 Voltar 0 acceso estio. Cantavas? Pois dan^a agora».
(Bocage.)
Seventeenth Lesson.
Syntactic Peculiarities of Demonstrative,
Relative and Indefinite Pronouns.
§ 74. The demonstrative "this," "that," "these,"
"those," "the one(s)," followed or not by a relative, is
rendered :
(a) By este(s), esta(s) for objects near the speaker;
(b) By esse(s), essa(s) for such near the person
spoken to;
(c) By aquelle(s), aqueUa(s) for such distant to the
one and the other;
(d) By o(s), a(s} in any case, but only with a
following relative:
JK este (esse, aquelle, o) gue ve it is the one you see.
N.B, — These pronouns, being employed adjectively and
referring to nouns of different gender, agree with the nearest:
Estes homens e mulheres; estas mulheres e homens.
§ 75. "This," "that," employed without a noun
which, however, is to be supplied, is rendered by este,
esse or is altogether omitted:
Esse ndo ^ o meu livro. E esta a minha porta,
aquella e (a) do meu amigo. Quern e? who is that?
^J meu pae. That is my father.
Syntactic Peculiarities of Demonstrative, etc., Pronouns. 333
§ 76. If "this," "that" does not refer to a deter-
minate person or object, it is rendered by isto^ isso,
aqiiillo.
Que e isto (isso)? Ndo percebo isso (aquillo).
§11. "That which" or "what" is rendered by o que.
0 que vi ndo me agradou.
That which (what) I saw did not please me.
Remarh.—Isto, isso, aquillo, tudo, o que (= aquillo que)
are masculine and singular. If, however, followed by the
verbs ser or parecer with a noun or pronoun in the plural,
the verb generally agrees with the predicative noun: Isto ndo
sdo palavras de animacao: 0 que vimos pareciam drvores.
JEram tudo memorias de alegria.
§ 78. The difference between outro and outrem is
this: the former is an adjective and variable; the second
is a noun and invariable. The former refers to per-
sons and things; the latter only to persons and in a
general and indeterminate manner:
<iMas como entdo ndo havia no mundo outro amor, nem
outrem a quern amar, que faria Adda para provar o
amor que desejava encarecer?»
§ 79. "He who" is rendered by aqueUe que, o que
or quern. The latter is always employed in proverbs
and in a general meaning:
Quern tern capa, escapa. Quern porfia, mata caga. Quern
com cdes se langa, com pulgas se levanta (cf. § 180, 2
of the 1st Part).
§ 80. Tal, taes without distinction of gender, is
the English "such," "hke"; it is employed conjunctively
or absolute:
Taes desgosios soffreu e taes foram as suas ddres . . .
Such troubles he suffered and such were his pains.
Tal amo, tal criado like master, like man.
§ 81. Also quem> may be employed for "such":
Ndo faltard quern por alguns punhados de dobras de
oiro OS favorega e acclame.
There will be no want of such who for some handfuls
of doubloons will favour and acclaim them.
§ 82. The pronoun que in certain conjunctions is
employed predicatively and may not be translated:
334 Lesson 17.
Os ribeiros quasi ndo murmuram de debeis e exhaustos
que vao.
The rivulets flow so feebly and exhausted that they
don't even murmur, or the rivulets hardly murmur
with debility and exhaustion.
§ 83. Qtianto as a pronoun is correlative; it is
employed either with tcmto or with Uido, antecedents
which also may be only understood:
Dei-lhe (tanto or tudo) quanta tinJia. Foi sonho (tudo)
quanta vi.
§ 84. The relative ciijo whose, of whom, corre-
sponds to ''do qiiol,'' expressing the preposition de with a
possessive meaning. It is immediately followed by the
noun, with which it agrees in gender and number:
Este e 0 homem cujo talento admiramos.
If, however, this noun does not express possession,
but is a predicative, "whose," "of whom" must be
rendered by de quern (dos quaes), de que (do qnal).
Os viajantes de quern (or dos quaes) foi companJieiro.
0 pais de que (or do qual) era rei . . .
§ 85. The relative que ("which," "that") may refer
to persons or objects. In the latter case it may be
preceded by one of the prepositions em, a, or de.
0 papel em que escrevo; o livro de que me faJou; a coisa
a que se refere.
If, however, "which" or "that" is employed with
another preposition, it must be rendered by o qual (see
§ 180, 3 of. P. I).
41. Thema.
The Whistle.
I was still a child of seven years of age, so related the
famous Franklin, when my parents on a holiday filled my
pockets with coppers. I went directly to a shop where they
sold toys for children. Yet the sound of a wlilstle that I saw
by the way in the hands of another boy charmed me so much
that I voluntarily offered him all my money for this one ob-
ject. The boy consented. Satisfied with my bargain, I ran
home, where I went whistling all over the house, for my
whistle gave me as much pleasure as it disturbed the whole
family. When my brothers and sisters knew of my bargain,
Syntactic Peculiarities of Demonstrative, etc., Pronouns. 835
they affirmed that I had given for times as much four it as
it was worth, and they laughed at me so much for my folly
that I began to cry with vexation. At the same time it came
to my mind what good things I might have bought with the
rest of the money ! Repentance then caused me more chagrin
than the whistle had given me pleasure. As this occurrence,
however, had made on me an ineradicable impression, it was
afterwards of great use to me. Often when I was tempted to
buy some unnecessary thing, I said to myself: "Don't give too
much for the whistle!" and so I saved my money.
42. Leitnra e versao,
0 trabalho physico e o mental.
Todo 0 homem deve ter uma profissao, uma arte ou um
officio: n'uma palavra, uma occupa9ao ou modo de vida. O
trabalho e um beneficio para a propria saiide, tanto do corpo
como do espirito, e ^ o unico remedio efficaz para as necessi-
dades. 0 homem que trabalha 6 litil a si, aos seus e a so-
ciedade; 6 e do trabalho de todos, seja qual for, que depende
0 progredso e o bem-estar geral.
A unica nobreza actual e a do trabalho : um artista, um
artifice^ um operario, um commerciante, um industrial, um
lavrador, 6 tao indispensavel ao bem geral, como o sacerdote,
0 mestre, o medico, o engenheiro, o advogado, o magistrado»
0 escriptor ou o sabio. Perante a virtude de trabalho sao
todos iguaes, e mais se distingue o que mais ou melhor produz.
Aquelles que pelo sen trabalho concorrem para facilitar^
desenvolver e tornar mais productivo o trabalho dos outros,
isto e, para os ensinar e educar, habilitando-os a serem bons
e felizes, esses sao benemeritos no mais elevado grau : e nesse
gi'upo esta 0 sabio. 0 que' no seu gabinete, sosinho, pensa e
medita no que convem ao bem geral, e escreve o resultado
das suas cogita^oes, no proposito de ensinar coisas ignoradas
que elle descobre, ou de aperfei^oar ou propagar pelo seu
trabalho as ja conhecidas, esse 6 o obreiro por excell6ncia,
por que e o mestre dos mestres, a luz e o guia dos traba-
Ihadores.
Gloria e esses, e em geral aos trabalhadores do pensa-
mento, que a sua vida consomem no mais alto e difficil labor
que nenhuma remunera9ao material saberia pagar nem paga;
— e depois d'esses, gloria aos seus apostolos que sao os pro-
fessores, os mestres, os que ensinam e explicam ao povo os
livros e a obra dos pensadores.
Neste momento, as profissoes, artes e officios mais com-
muns em Portugal sao os seguintes, — e a especialidade de
336 Lesson 18.
cada uma d'estas occupa9des aprende-se em livros^ que os ha
a respeito de tudo e que tudo ensinam.
(Trindade Coelho: Peqneno Dicciondrio de profissoes, artes e
officios, app^ndice do 3* Livro de leitura.)
Conrersaf^So.
The preceding task 40 may be varied: 1. by having the
story told to the school-fellows by one of them (Franklin era
ainda uma crianga).
2. By allowing the father of Franklin to tell it himt
(Tu ainda eras . . .).
Eighteenth Lesson.
Syntactic Peculiarities of Adjectives
and Participles.
§ 86. The adjective and the participle employed
as an adjective (= verbal adjective) serve:
(a) To determinate the noun (pronominal adjective;
see pronouns) or
(b) To describe it (predicative or attributive ad-
jective)— Ex.:
Alguns peixes teem formas singulares,
(c) To quahfy- the action or the state of a noun:
A empresa saiu felie, A aurora rompeu meiga e serena.
In the latter case the adjective is employed ad-
verbially or in apposition — i.e., it is added to the noun
or the verb to explain and complete it (see P.I, §245).
(Cf.: Como era a aurora? Meiga e serena.
Como rompeu a aurora? Meiga e serenamente).
§ 87. The verbal adjective agrees with its noun
in gender and number like a predicative adjective. Ex. :
As ondas vinham espraiar-se preguigosas no areal da
bahia.
Sentiu a fronte aquecida por febre ardente. Eu vim
cansado.
0 soldado, temeroso on irresolutOy deu parte do negdcio.
The adjectives of the last example express cause
(por temor ou irresolug&o). In such a case you may
Syntactic Peculiarities of Adjectives and Participles. 337
have the adjective preceded by de in order to put an
emphasis upon a state or quality (cf. § 82):
Elle cahiu de cansado he fell down with weariness.
A crianga salta de contente the child jumps with ^ :)y.
De alegres que estavam, ndo pensavam em mal algxA,m.
They were so merry that they did not think of any evil.
§ 89, The position of the adjective or participle
in apposition may be before or after the verb, according
o its meaning (see the preceding examples):
Entramos em uma batalha, onde vencidos (= se fdrmos
vencidos) honraremos nosso Deus com o sangue.
(a) If accompan}dng a noun, the adjective precedes it:
Acabada a refeigao, saifnos.
The repast over, we went away.
(b) The past participle, acompanied by a comple-
ment, is placed after the noun and before the com-
plement; yet in elevated stile it may even be put after
the complement:
«... Com exclusdo dos trechos indicados pela mesma
commissdo ...»
« Depots de eliminados as trechos pela commissdo technica
indicados ...»
Those excerpts which the technical commission had in-
dicated having been eliminated.
(c) The past participle may even take the plural
form before a subject in the singular, if this latter is
one of the pronouns coda um, cada qiial, nenhum, ninguem
and refers to persons or things already mentioned:
Sobresaltados com esta vista, procurava cada um a toda
a pressa por-se a salvo.
N.B. — Many participles may be employed as mere adjec-
tives; others may have an active meaning in spite of their
passive form ; for instance ido {tempos idos times past), vindo
(noticia vinda de fdra), lido (homens lidos well-read or learned
men).
This is especially the case with participles of reflective
verbs: arrependido from arrepender-se ; lembrado, etc. Ficd-
mos arrependidos we repented or changed our mind. Ella
fistd lembrada she reminds herself.
§ 89. Sometimes the adjective as well as the par-
ticiple is employed substantively:.
Portuguese Con versa tion-GrAmmar. 22
388 LesBon 18.
Mtiros de dois metros de alto (= de aliura) e nieio
metro de largo (= de largura).
Da esmolas ao poire, consola o afflicto e (o) abandonado.
Give alms to the poor (jnan), comfort the afflicted and
abandoned (one).
(N.B.— Here pobre, afflicto and abandonado are singular,
and not, as in English, plural, though they have a plural
meaning. The Portuguese adjective, when substantively Em-
ployed, has the verb in the plural only if it has itself the
plural form: Os pobres pedem esmola the poor ask for alms.)
§ 90. In certain cases you may employ instead
of an abstract noun, complement to a verb, an adjective
preceded by de, or supply the verb ser or estar:
Accusar alguem de negligenie, de desleal (= de negli-
gencia, de deslealdade or de ser negligent e etc.) to
accuse somebody of negligence or of being negligent.
Deu mostras de (ser) insofrida, de (estar) nervosa.
She gave proofs of being impatient, of feeling nervous.
§ 91. A small number of adjectives may be used
adverbially in the singular and masculine form — i.e.,
unaltered (see P. I, § 245) :
Luctas ndo raro esth-eis; ligdes demasiado fdceis; fdlar
serio.
§ 92. A verbal adjective is, besides the past par-
ticiple employed with ser, estar, ficar etc., the form on
-ante, -ente, -inte (the so-called Farticipio active), derived
from the gerund (-ando, -endo, -indo). While the gerund
is invariable (see the following Lesson), the Farticipio
active and the passive are subject to all the rules go-
verning the adjectives:
Ficar am castigados. Ndo estamos lembrados.
Aguas dormentes; plantas dormentes; judeu err ante.
Cf. the adjectives presidenie (= presidindo), amante
(= amando), previdente (= prevenindo) provident, previdente
foreseeing (= prevetido), proponente (= propondo), abstinente
(= abstendo), subordinante (— subordinando), corrente, nas-
cente, andante, ridenie (= rindo), luzente, constituinte, seguinte,
servente.
In the case of many of these words their derivation has
fallen into oblivion, so that they are considered qualifying
adjectives. Some of them are : brilhante, constante, impoi'tante,
distantc, regente, doente, contente, eminente, exceliente, etc.
Syntactic Peculiarities of Adjectives and Participles. 339
Others have become substantives, as for instance:
Corrente current, vertente slope, regente regent, fabricante,
disponente, correspondenie, descendente descendant, ascendentej
proponentCj lente, etc.
43. Thema.
At war less brilliant than his brother, and at peace less
foreseeing than his father, Dom Affonso the Third neverthe-
less united the qualities of the one. and the other in an eminent
degree. The most prominent feature of his character seems
to have been cunning obstinacy, which did not exclude an
excessive indulgence towards his favourites, especially for those
who had helped him to arrive to the brilliant position of
king. His reign was a period of real social progress, in which
civilisation extended and the popular class made important ac-
qnisitions.
Weary with constant disappointments, Peter the First,
Emperor of Brazil, retired unexpectedly at night-time on board
the English man-of-war, where he abdicated in favour of his son on
the 7*^ of April, 1831. Dumbfounded by this sudden resolution,
the higher officers retired to their houses, repentant of their
behaviour. The people dispersed in silence (see § 87) during
the night, while the most prominent functionaries, from fear
(see § 87) of the consequences of the abdication, decided the
following morning to proclaim the prince constitutional em-
peror, appointing him a regency composed of three members.
In virtue of the Reform Law of 1834, a single regent then
governed Brazil until a decree of 1841 declared the majority
of the emperor.
44. Leitura e versao.
0 Terremoto de Lisboa (1775).
Na manha do primeiro de novembro a cidade estremeceu,
abalada profundamente, e come^ou a desabar. Eram nove horas,
dia de Todos os Santos: nas casas ardiam as velas nos orato-
rios, e as egrejas regorgitavam povo a ouvir missa.
Toda a gente, numa onda, correu as praias ; mas, rolando
em massa, estacou perante a onda que vinha do rio, galgando
a inundar as ruas^ invadindo ' as casas. Por sobre este en-
contro ruidoso, uma nuvem de p6 que toldava os ares e es-
curecia o sol, pairava, formada ja pelos detritos (= destro9os)
das construc9des e das mobilias, que o abalo interno da terra
vasculhava (= varria), e os desabamentos enviavam, em esti-
Ihas, para o ar.
A. onda do povo afflicto, retrocedendo, . a fugir do mar,
trope9ava nas ruinas; e as quedas, e a metralha dos muros
22*
340 Lesson 18.
que tombavam, abriam na floresta viva^ agitada pelo vento
da desgra^a, clareiras de morte, montoes de cadaveres e poQas
de sangue, dos membros decepados^ com mauchas brancas dos
cerebros derramados contra as esquinaa. E as casas erguiam-
86 com as parades desabadas, os tectos abertos sobre o esque-
leto dos tabiques, mostrando a nii todos os interiores fanestos,
neste dia em que, para muitos, Deus julgara e condemn ara
Lisbda.
Por isso o rouco trovao dos desabamentos se ouvia cor-
tado pelos ais dos moribundos, e pelos gritos dos homens e
das mulheres, abra9ados as cruzes, aos santos^ as reliquias,
solu^ando ladainhas, nngindo moribundos, parando esgazeados
a cada novo abalo da terra, que nao cessava de tremer, ar-
rostando-se pelo chao de joelhos, e com as maos postas, a face
em lagrimas, a clamar:
— Miseric<3rdia! Miseric6rdia!
Casas, palacios, conventos, mosteiros, hospitaes, egrejas,
campandrios, theatres, fortalezas, porticos, tudo, tudo caia,
«Se visses somente o palacio real, diz uma testemunha, que
singular espectdculo, men irmao!» Os varoes de ferro, tor-
cidos como vimes, as cantarias estaladas como vidros!
A onda do rio sorvia n'um momento o caes do Terreiro
do Pa^o, com os barcos atracados, coalhados de gente. Dos
andares altos precipitavam-se sobre as lages das ruaa. 0 medo
crescia, vinha a loucura: viam-se mortos arrastados pelos vivos,
Tiam-se mutilados coxeando, gente correndo desgrenhada, semi-
nna, homens e mulheres, velhos e crean^as dilacerados, san-
grentos, arrestando uma pema fracturada, esvalndo-se em
sangue por algum membro decepado.
Gritos, chores, clamores, imprecayoes, ais, preces, um bor-
borinho de vozes desvairadas acompanhava os gemidos com
primidos dos soterrados nos escombros. No turbilhao das mas
havia qu^das e mortes, abra90S e agonias.
A mesma loucura dos homens era o desvairamento dos
brutos: os machos, desbocados, arrastavam os cavalleiros e a
cale^as, precipitando-se nos despenhadeiros da cidade montu-
osa; e as massas de gente, viva, moribunda e morta, de en-
volta com os entulhos, rolavam ng^ ruas ladeadas pelos esque-
letos das casas como uma imagem desolada do que seria o cahos.
Quando a terra se subvertia, quando o mar vinha subindo
afogar a terra, quando no ar faiscavam as linguas flammiferas
rutilantes, que lembran^a podia haver das inven(;6es humanas?
Abra9ado8, conftmdidos, na communidade do pranto, fidalgos
e freiras, mendigos e senhores, viloes e cavalleiros, abra^avam-
86 na communidade da fome, do frio, da nudez, do terror.
The Gerund and the Periphrastical Conjngation. 341
De rastos a cidade inteira, sacudida pelo abalo formidando
(= formidavel), rennia toda a sua eloquftncia n'uma palavra
linica :
— Misericordia I Misericordia ! (Oliveira Martins.)
Nineteenth Lesson.
The Gerund and the Periphrastical
Conjugation.
§ 93. The participle in -ndo or gerund is in-
variable. It is employed:
(a) Referring to the subject of a verb:
Caminhando vagarosamente^ e pfirando a espagoSy tinham
seguido os dois ao longo do rio.
(b) Referring to the object or some adverb (of
cause, manner, etc.):
Encontrou-os dormindo (= que dormiam; see N.B. — ).
Olha OS cSus, olha a terra, a luz do dia expirando
(— que expira) nas vagas.
N.B. — When it may be doubtful whether the gemnd
refers to the subject or to the object, another form must be-
chosen; for instance:
Encontrei-os vindo da minha casa may be:
I met them when I came from mj house, or:
I met them when they came from my house.
Such a phrase had better be expressed thus:
Encontrei-os ao virem (elles) da minha casa.
Encontrei-os ao vir (eu) da minha casa.
(c) In absolute form — i.e., independent of any part
of a phrase and with its own subject. In this case it
expresses a circumstance (cause, time, etc.) of the verb
of the principal sentence. Ex.:
D, Jorge, parecendo-lhe (= a quem parecia or como Ihe
parecia) opportuna a occasido, determinou tentar a
fortuna. Isto aconteceUj estando tu (= while you
were) na India.
N.B. I.— An absolute participle may be employed without
a subject:
342 Lesson 19.
(a) when employed impersonally: chovendo ndo sairei
(if it rains . . .) ;
(b) when, the verb being a personal one, the subject is
not expressed:
7550 esclarecer-se-hd indagando a causa.
That will be cleared up by inquiring the cause.
N.B. II. —The composed gerund is subject to the same
rules :
Havendo elle falado, todos resolveram partir.
After he had spoken, everybody resolved to go away.
Tendo Augusto Cesar {or A. G. tendo; see Remark) capti-
vado em guerra Adiatorix, trouxe-o a JRoma.
Eemark. — When the subject of the gerund is at the same
time tha^ of the verb in the principal sentence, it may pre-
cede or follow the gerund; otherwise it only follows: Tendo
OS Portugueses descoberto a caminho maritimo da India, o
oriente abriu-se a cultura do occidente.
§ 94. If the gerund expresses a circumstance of
time, a supposition or condition, while the verb of the
principal sentence designs something as happening in
future or as a habit, the gerund may be preceded by
the preposition em:
Em elle entrando (= as soon as he will enter), falar-
Ihe-ei.
Ndo ha amigos nem inimigos poUticos em se largando o
mando.
§ 95. The simple gerund expresses a simultaneous-
ness with the action of the principal verb ; the composed
gerund something preceding it. Yet the former is often
employed instead of the latter, if there be no misunder-
standing:
Musa, 0 emir d^ Africa, desemharcando (for tendo de-
sembarcado) nas costas de Hespanha com um novo
exercito, rendia Hispalis.
The Periphrastical Conjugation.
§ 96. Most frequent is the employment of the
gerund in the periphrastical conjugation (conjugagdo
periphrdstica) — i.e., joined to a form of the verbs estar,
andar^ ficar, ir, vir, ter, Imver. Thus employed, it adds
to the verb the meaning of certain circumstances:
The Gerund aad the Periphra«tical Conjngation. 343
(a) With the verb estar the gerund expresses an
action commenced but not yet finished:
Estava estudando; estd chovendo; estd-me parecendo que
tudo serd em vdo.
N.B. — The same meaning is expressed by estar followed
by the preposition a and an infinitive : estava a estudar ; estd
a chover. Estar followed by para and an infinitive expresses,
however, an action immediately impending : Estou para partir.
(b) With the verbs andar, ficar the gerund ex-
presses lasting action or state:
Ando estudando; die andava meditando; ficou gosando,
N.B.— The same meaning is expressed by an infinitive
joined by a to these verbs: ando a estudar; andava a medi-
tar; ficou a gosar.
(c) With the verbs ir and vir the gerund expresses
the gradual realisation of an action:
A vermelhiddo foi avultando; vinha amanhecendo.
<tjd estds a ver que as terras que o genro do ret fosse
tomando aos Mouros, iam, e verdade, augmentando o
condado, mas iam ficando tambem terras de Ledo,
porque de Ledo era o condado, e vasalo do rei
espanhol o D. Henrique.^
<iPercorrendo o corpo do homem, o sangue vae espa-
Ihando por este a sua substdncia.-^
Se for estudando diligentemente, pode'rd um dia saber
hem a lingufi portuguesa.
N.B.— Employed with an infinitive without any prepo-
sition, these verbs mark an immediate future: vou levar esta
carta ao correio; vae abrir a porta!
(d) The auxiliary verbs ter and have^', with following
de and infinitive, express necessity:
Tenlio (or hei-)de escrever uma carta.
N.B.— Cf. haver in the future and conditional tenses.
The singular and the S^^ person pi. of haver may be joined
to de hj & hyphen:
Hei-de, has-de, ha-de ir^ havemos de, haveis de, hdo-de ir.
(e) A conjunction of vir and an infinitive preceded by
a has nearly the same meaning as these verbs employed
absolutely:
344 Lesson 19.
Isto vem a significar is hardly to be distinguished from
isto significa (= isto por fim signiflca).
Isso vem a ser o mesmo that is rather the same.
N.B.— Fir a ser often means iomar-se to become.
45. Thema.
Brazil.
(See the map on the inner front-side of this book.)
Brazil has for limits in the north the French, Dutch and
English GuianaSj Venezuela and the republic of Columhia; in
the east Equador^ Peru, Bolivia and Paraguay; in the south
Argentinia and Uruguay ; in the south-east, east and north-east
the Atlantic ocean. It is well known that the discovery of
this country was due to chance, and that Pedro Alvaras
Cabral, after having circumnavigated the Cape of Good Hope,
when sailing (fazer viagem) to the Indies, was thrown there
by a tempest in 1500. From that moment this vast region
belonged to the Portuguese crown, though it was little
known before the year, 1534 when D. Joao III. divided.it
into several provinces (capitanias)^ of which he made grants
to various private persons who undertook to populate and
cultivate them. Yet the shipwreck of some, the frequent
incursions of the Indians, and various other accidents which
the recipients of these grants experienced, and at last their
death, were so many obstacles to the prosperity of these
various States. Martim Affonso de Sousa was the only one
who remained to witness the prosperity of his province, to
which he gave the name of Sao Vicente, because he had
anchored there on the 22"^ of January, the day on Tvhich the
Church celebrates the memory of S. Vicent the martyr. The
remainder of the coast of Brazil was after that time infested
by innumerable adventurers of different nations who came to
purchase and traffic with the Indians.-
46. Leitura e TersSo.
0 Brasil.
Desejando el-rei D. Jolio III dar uma certa consist^nda
itquellas capitanias, creou o titulo de governador, e o conferia
a Thom6 de Sousa, a quem os donatarios foram sujeitos, e
quern em 1549 fundou a cidade de S. Salvador da Bahia. Morto
el-rei D. Sebastiao em Africa, Filippe II, tendo-se apoderado
de Portugal por fallecimento do Cardeal-rei, se tornou tambem
de facto senhor do Brasil. Em 1624 os hollandfises invadiram
a maior parte d'este pais, por^m Filippe IV, tendo recobrado
a cidade da Bahia, despachou a D. Jorge de Mascarenhas^
The Gernnd and the Periphraetical Conjugation. 345
marqufis de Montalvao, com o titulo de vice-rei; o qual foi
deposto pouco tempo depois, quando os Portugueses, sacudinda
o jugo dos espanhoes, pozeram no thrOno de seus avos o
duque de Bragan^a com o nome de Joao IV (1640). Nesta
6poca varias concessoes haviam entrado naturalmente nos do-
minios da coroa, outras foram mais tarde compradas aos her-
deiros dos primeiros donatarios, e a colonia, inteiramente res-
taurada em 1654, foi administrada por govemadores generaes
de provincia, e um vice-rei na Bahia. ao qual eram sujeitos
05 primeiros, conservando todavia a faculdade de communi-
carem directamente com o soberano. Era entao bem pouco
conhecido o sul do Brasil, e o interior ainda m^nos. Assim
todo 0 maritimo tornou a ser dividido em cinco governos:
Pard e Maranhao na costa septentrional, e Pernambuco, Bahia
e Rio de Janeiro na oriental; e o chefe da dynastia de Bra-
gan^a houve por bem conferir a colonia o titulo honroso de
principado, ordenando que d'ali em diante o herdeiro presump-
tivo da coroa tomaria o tftulo de principe de Brasil.
Com a chegada em 1808 do principe regente, D. Joao,
foram todos os portos do Brasil franqueados as na^oes estran-
geiras, e uma carta regia de 2 de dezembro de 1815 elevou
o principado do Brasil a dignidade e cathegoria de reino. Falle-
cendo em 1816 a rainha D. Maria I, o creador da primeira
monarchia hereditaria da America, vendo-se a ponto de perder
na Europa o throno de seus av6s, se transferiu a Lisb6a em
1821, deixando no Brasil D. Pedro, seu filho primog^nito, em
qualidade de principe regente. Porem os acontecimentos obri-
garam este principe a separar-se de Portugal e a erigir o
Brasil em imp^rio independente, sendo acclamado imperador
na cidade do Rio de Janeiro em 12 de outubro de 1822; e
depois de haver dado uma constituiijao ao imp^rio, foi reco-
nhecido nesta nova qualidade por el-rei seu pae, por um tra-
tado celebrado em 1825. Desde entao o Brasil viu seus portos
coalhados de navios mercantes de todos as na^oes ; sua cultura
6 industria come^aram a desenvolver-se. 0 caf6, a9ucar e
algodao, tendo uma extrac9ao rapida, e o pre^o d'estes g^neros
indo gradualmente subindo, os proprietarios e agricultores tra-
taram de augmentar a produc^ao, ao passo que o luxo se foi
introduzindo nas cidades, nas villas, e at6 nas propriedades
ruraes no meio dos campos.
Conrersa^ao.
Quaes sao os limites do Brasil, ao norte? a oeste? ao
sul? a leste?
Como se deu o doscobrimento do Brasil? E em que
anno?
846 liesson 20.
A quem ficou pertencendo?
Quaes foram as medidas tomadas por D. Joao III rela-
tive ao pais?
Que obstaculos se Ihes oppozeram?
Qual foi a primeira capitania prospera?
Que aconteceu ao restante da costa?
Qual foi a primeira cidade fundada por urn portugufes?
e come se chamou?
Nas maos de quem foi ter o Brasil, depois da morte de
D. Sebastiao e do rei-cardeal?
Em que data e contemporaneo a que acontecimento em
Portugal, foi dep6sto o primeiro vice-rei, instituido
por Filippe IV ?
Que dynastia conferiu o titulo de principado ao Brasil ?
E quem o elevou a dignidade de reino?
Quem emfim foi o primeiro imperador do Brasil?
Quem foi o ultimo e quando ficou deposto?
Que esp^cie de gov^rno tem o Brasil actualmente?
Twentieth Lesson.
Tenses of the Indicative.
(See P. I, L. 18 and 19.)
Present Tense.
§ 97. The Present of the Indicative is used:
(a) To denote, as in English, that a thing is now
taking place, or habitually takes place. In the first
case the periphrastical form may be employed, as in
English. Ex.:
Saio; estou Undo. Saio sempre depois do jantar,
(b) In narrative instead of the Preterite, in order
to give more vivacity to the description, and to make
the event, as it were, present. This is called the
historical or narrative Present. Ex.:
A Bastilha 6 abandonada d demoligdo; d^ahi a pouco
um montdo de ruinas indica o logar onde estava . . .
iodos correm para por a cidade na defensiva — ar-
ranca-se o calgado das ruas, fanem-se barricadas . . .:
(c) For an action or state marked as having con-
tinued for some time up to the present:
Tenaet< of the Indicative. 847
Desde quando estd aqui ? How long have you been here ?
Estou aqui ha tres dias.
I have been here these three days.
Jd ha muito que esfuda o portugues?
Have you already been long studying Portuguese?
Ha muito que o ndo vejo (que me ndo escreve).
I have not seen him (he did not write me) for a long time.
(d) For the Future, when speaking of actions which
are to be completed in a short time, as:
Volto jd I shall come back directly.
Amanhd vou a praia to-morrow I shall go to the sea-
side.
§ 98. The Future Tense:
(a) Denotes that something will happen, as:
Estudaremos esta ligdo. Digo-o, sustento-o e sustentd-
lo-hei.
(b) It is used as a softened form of the Imperative,
impl}dng the expectation of fulfilment. Ex.:
Se pa vier alguem, dir-lhe-has que ndo estou.
If anybody comes (you will) tell him, that I am not
at home.
Honrards pae e mac honour thy father and thy mother
Ndo matards thou shall not kill.
(c) It is used to express uncertainty, an approximate
statement, a possibility, or a modest form of declaration..
Ex.:
Haverd paz no tumulo?
Will there be peace in the tomb?
Tive aviso, haverd qunize dias, que adoeceu.
I was advised about a fortnight ago that he has be-
come ill.
Sera tempo de ir a casa it is time to go home.
Assim serd. It may be so.
Uma coisa vos confessarei. I beg to confess to you
something.
§ 99. The immediate future is expressed by the
Present of ir (eu van) or vir (venho) and the simple
Infinitive (see §96, (c)N.B.):
You contar-lhes um conto. I shall tell you a tale.
Vem convidd los para um passeio he invites them for
a walk.
348 Lesson 20.
Bemark.— After the conditional se — if, whether, quando
when, and emquanto while, as well as after como, assim que,
logo que the Future of the Subjunctive is to be employed
(see L. 23).
§ 100. The Preterite Imperfeito (see P. I, §115) is
used :
(a) To express what was customary or habitual, or
to describe an action as simply going on in the past,
or a state as existing in the past — whether in principal
or subordinate sentences. Ex.:
Era tdo poderosa no primeiro quartet do sSculo XVI a
esquadra portuguesa, que J). Manuel trazia de ordi-
ndrio trezentos ndus nas conquistas da Asiaj da Af-
rica e da America.
(b) In familiar speech it is employed instead of the
First Conditional:
Se a apanhassCj eshofeteava-a if I could seize her, I should
box her ears.
§ 101. The Preterite perfeite is used: *
For an action occurred in the Past; it serves as
the ordinary narrative tense for past time:
Estive no theatro (h)oniem; fui ver o Othello.
Em virtude da lei das reformas de 1834, um regenie
wnico governou o Brasil, ate que um decreto de 1841
declarou a maioredade do imperador.
N.B — Of dever the Imperfect is always used instead of
the Perfect:
Elle divia (not: deveu) ser (or ter sido) (h)ontem mais
attencioso para comtigo.
He ought to (or should) have been more attentive to
you yesterday.
§ 102. ' Two simultaneous actions of the Past are
put into the Imperfect, while two actions following one
another are put into the Perfect:
Eu escrevia o que o professor disia.
I wrote what the teacher said.
Uma ielha caliiu-lhe na cahega • e elle morreu em seguida.
A tile fell on his head and he died at once.
Tenses of the Indicative. 349
§ 103. When a lasting action is interrupted by a
new one, the former is expressed by the Imperfect,
while the latter by the Perfect:
Eu lia quando recebi a tua carta.
I was reading when I got your letter.
§ 104. With regard to the translation from Eng-
Hsh into Portuguese, it may be summarised that the Per-
fect is to be employed whenever you may add one of
the adverbs then., noiv, thereupon, thereafter; and the
Imperfect when still, already, just may be added < or
when the verb may be rendered by would, used to and
the infinitive. Ex.:
Aggredimos o inimigo que recuou we attacked the ene-
my, who (then) retreated.
Perseguimos o inimigo que recuava we pursued the
enemy, who (already) was retreating.
§ 105. The difference between the Preteritos im-
perfeito and perfeito is with certain verbs quite keen in
its meaning. Ex.:
Eu tinha I had (possessed) Eu five I had (I got)
havia there was houve there arose, began, hap-
pened
eu sabia I knew (already) eu soube I learned, heard
eu conhecia I knew eu conheci I made the acquain-
tance of
„ ..1 J J eUe vestiu be put on
die vestia he was dressed ^„^ ^^,.^,^^ ^^ ^^^^^^
elle trazia he carried, he was elle trouxe he brought
dressed
ella dizia she would say ella disse she said
levantdvamo-nos we used to levantdmo-nos we got up, rose,
get up etc.
§ 106. Most frequently the Preterito perfeito is
employed where in English the Perfect is used. Ex.:
Ghegou he has arrived. Vi-o I have seen him. Tive
uma carta I have got a letter. Deram-me noticias delle they
have given me news from him. Esteve no concerto de (h)ontem?
Were you at the concert last night?
§ 107. The Preterito indefmido, however, expresses
repetition or continuation of a fact from a certain point
of time until the moment of speaking. (In English
the Present may sometimes be employed instead). Ex. :
350 Lesson 20.
Iddas as constituigdes teem facultado a certas autoridades
0 direito de perdoar.
All constitutions have given (or gave or give) to cer-
tain authorities the privilege of absolution.
Sometimes this tense serves only to emphatically
declare an action as altogether finished for the speaker:
Tenho dado fim as minhas investigagdes.
I put an end to my investigations.
§ 108. The Pluperfects (Preteritos mais-qiie-perfeitos
composto and simples) express an action preceding
another. Ex. :
JEu jd tinha jantado quando meu irnmo chegou.
I had already dined when my brother arrived.
Faldramos em negocio . . . We had spoken of business.
§ 109. The Mais-que-perfeito simples may be
employed instead of the Condicional as well as instead
of the Imperfeito Suhj. (the latter especially in the first
part of the conditional sentence) and instead of the
Presente condicional in the second part. Ex.:
Quiver a (= queria) ser-lhe agradavel.
I should like to be of some use to you.
Se 0 contentamento fisSra (== finesse) milagres, tivera-me
(— ter-me-hia) nesta hora a sens pes.
If joy did wonders, you would have me . . . at your feet.
But it is also absolutely employed, especially in
popular interjections:
Quern (me) dera!
Would it were so! That would be a good thing!
Pudera! I say! Wouldn't it! To be sure!
Prouvera Beus! God grant!
§ 110. The Imperativo expresses request, order,
permission, or prohibition. It is formed out of the Pre-
sente Suhj., but for the 2^^ persons which are formed
out of the Presente Indicativo^ if they are not in nega-
tive sentences. Ex.:
Nao tebas coisa que ri^o vejas, nem assignes coisa que
nuo leias.
Don't drink what you do not see, nor sign what you
did not read.
Tenses of the Indicative. 351
§ 111. The Condicional expresses:
(a) That something soon happened or would have
happened on certain conditions. Ex.:
Se ndo fossemos orgulhosos, nao nos queixariamos do
orgulho dos mais.
If we were not proud, we should not complain of
the pride of others.
Elle teria sido felis, se tivesse sabido moderar os sens
desejos.
He would have been happy if he had known how to
moderate his desires.
N.B. I.— The Presenie Condicional (or even the Imper-
feito Ind.) is sometimes employed instead of the JPreterito
condicional, the verb of the dependent clause being put into
the Preterito comp. indie, instead of the Mais-que-perfeito.
«-Caso e que se eUe ndo tern (= tivesse) sido demittido
tdo depressa, o roubo dava-se (instead of dar-se-ia or
properly ter-se-ia dado) com certezay> there is no doubt
that, if he had not been dismissed so suddenly, the
robbery would certainly have taken place.
<iiSe a teem (instead of tivessem) visto ali haveriam apor-
tado certamente e encontrariam (instead of teriam
encontrado) confirmados as informagoes de Pedro da
Covilhd, que d^aquella povoagdo dera preciosas in for-
magoes na sua carta a D. Jodo II, pois ali fora
poucos annos antes . . . Em Sofala certamente en-
contrariam (for teriam encontrado) navios da costa
do Malabar. T>
(Campos Junior: Guerreiro e Monge.)
N.B.— The Preterito condicional, composed with tivera
or houvera, may be employed in conditional clauses instead
of the Mais-que-perfeito Subj.:
Teria ido, se tivera (for tivesse) sabido que . . . (cf. § 109).
(c) In certain cases the Conditional (or the M.-q.-
perfeito simples instead) is used to express astonishment,
avaliation, or a softened form of declaration:
Seria verdade? Can that be true? Haveria no theatro,
quando muito, trezentas pessoas, there may have
been at the most in the theatre about 300 persons.
Vim-me embora seriam dez horas I went home at
about ten o'clock. Ndo diria isso I should not say
so. Antes diria. I should rather say, as in English.
352 Lesson 20.
(c) Frequently the Presente condicional (without a
dependent clause) is used to express an expectation, an
arrangement, the fulfilment of which depends of the
future. Ex. :
Esse manual ser-lhe-hia guia seguro pelos caminJios tor-
tuosos da politica.
This handbook was meant to be a reliable guide to him
on the tortuous ways of politics.
Eu far-lhe-hia ver as hellezas do men pais.
I intended to show him all the beauty of my home,
47. Thema.
Extract from Portuguese History.
The history of Portugal properly begins with the reign of
the Count Henry of Burgundy. All that is anterior to this
belongs more to the history of Lusitania and in a more gene-
ral meaning to that of the peninsula. When in Leon Al-
phonse the Sixth was reigning, the Count Henry, a descendant
of Hugo Capet (= Gapeto) offered (= came to offer) his ser-
vices to that monarch, and received from him in reward the
hand of his daughter D. Thereza and the country of Portugal.
Is is certain that they were already married in 1095 and
that the Count Henry already in 1097 governed Portugal
from the Minho to the Tagus. The successor of this first Portu-
guese regent was his son Dom Affonso Henriques, who, after
having conquered many tracts of land from (see § 48 c) the
Moors, was victorious at last on the 25^^ of July, 1139, at the
famous battle of Campo de Ourique against five Moorish
tings, while the day before he had been (gerund) proclaimed
king by his soldiers, [a] title that was confirmed to him
by the nation in the Parliament (as Cortes) of Lamego in
1143. Already the monarch had caused the independence of the
kingdom to be recognised by the King of Leon. The suc-
cessors of Affonso Henriques continued their conquests:
D. Sancho the First conquered Algarve, 2>. Affonso II. Alcacer
do Sal, and D. Sancho II many tracts and places of the
Alertejo.
The kingly power then began [to be] in fight with the
ecclesiastical state, [which was] most powerful at those times
and from that fight resulted the deposition of D. Sancho II
hy [a] bull of the Pope Innocence IV, and the government
of I). Affonso III, his brother. B. Dinia strove especially to
make Agriculture and Science flourish, to which purpose he
created the first university in Lisbon. His successors conti-
Tenses of the Indicative. 35b
nued the work of civilisation until the unfortunate reign of
D. Fernando I, last monarch of the first dynasty.
The nation united in Parliament proclaimed in 1583 King
of Portugal, John, Grandmaster of the Order of A viz {Mester
de Aviz), who settled the independence of Portugal which was
attacked by Castile, and by his valour and good administration
he obtained the love of his people. The descendants of this
monarch reigned until 1580, when the Cardinal King Dom
Henrique died. This is doubtlessly one of the most beautiful
periods of Portuguese history.
48. Leitura e Tersao,
Os descobrimentos dos portugufises, as suas victorias na
Asia 6 Africa, tornaram o sen nome temido e respeitado em
t6da a parte. Dfisde a gloriosa tomada de C^uta em 1415 ate
a desgraijada batalha de Al9acer Quivir em 1578, este povo,
dotado de uma actividade sem exemplo, descobre os archi-
pelagos da Madeira, (das) Azores, (das ilhas) Canarias e (do)
Cabo Verd^, (a) costa e ilhas de Guine ; explora e faz muitos
estabelecimentos no literal da Africa occidental: dobra o
Cabo das Tormentas; submete ou faz tributaries os principes
moaros da costa oriental africana ; arrebata aos arabes a
navegaQgio da India e (do) Mar Vermelho; e assombrando
os povos do Oriente com prodigies de valor, estabelece-se em
Ormuz, Diu, Damao, Goa, Bombaim, Cochim, Geylae, Malaca,
abrindo-se caminho pela Oceania para Java, Borneo, Timor,
Molucas, China e Japao, ao passe que descobre a Nova
Hellanda, Nova Guine e outras terras. Pedro Alvares
Cabral descobre o Brasil (1500) e em mfinos de um seculo,
os vastos e ferteis terrenes entre o Amazenas e Prata, se
acham submettides ao dominie portuguSs. Mais de cinceenta
reis ou regulos feram tributaries de rei D.Manuel, e os mais
poderosos monarchas da Europa e de Oriente selicitaram a
sua allian^a.
Nao foi mener o cuidado pelas l6tras neste gloridso
periode. D. Affonso V forma a bibliotheca de Evora; D.
Manuel I manda reformar e aperfeiijoar a legisla^ao. Fei
neste periode e no reinado de Joae III que se introduziu em
Portugal a inquisi^ao (1540) e a Companhia de Jesus (1541).
— A morte do cardeal-rei D. Henrique (1580) seguiu-se a
occupa9ao castelhana, que durou at^ 1640 : e Portugal, que
no reinado de D. Manuel chegara ao maior grau de esplenddr,
caiu nesse periode na maior prostra^ao.
No anno de 16-40 recuperou esta na^ao a sua independencia
pela gloriosa revolu9ao que eleven ao throne D. Joae IV, tronco
dadynastia deBragan^a ha pence ainda reinante. Portugal alliou-
Portuguese Conversation -Grainmar. 23
354 Lesson 21.
§e depois com a Inglaterra e Hollanda contra Espanha na
c^lebre Guerra de Successao. Esta guerra terminou pelo Tra-
tado de Utrecht em 1713. Naqiielle tempo e reinando
D. Joao V, construiram-se obras grandiosas, come foram o
mosteiro, templo e palacio de Mafra e o aqueducto das Aguas
Livres. Mas o tesouro ficou exhausto e a na9ao em deca-
dencia, de que so a poderia tirar um g^nio e perseveran<?a
como odo marques de Pombal, ministro de D. Jos^ I (1755 — 1777)
em cujo reinado se reorganisaram as finan^as, o ex6rcito e a
marinha, foram expulsos os jesuitas, e a inquisi^ao levou o seu
primeiro golpe, at^ ser de todo extincta em 1820.
Em 1807 OS franc^ses • invadiram Portugal, mas foram
repellidos pelo exercito anglo-portugu^s, que Ihes deu severas
119068 em Vimieiro, Bussaco, Badajoz etc. Em 1820 uma
revolu^ao estabeleceu 0 systfima constitucional. A rainha
D. Maria I, tendo ido em 1807 ao Brasil com o principe regente
D. Joao e a c6rte, la fallecfira em 1816. D. Joao VI entao
voltou a Portugal em 1821, sendo-lhe negado 0 desembarque,
ate elle ter confirmado 0 systfima constitutional, que foi des-
truido em 1828. Em 1833 porem foi restabelecido por
D. Pedro IV (como D. Pedro I imperador do Brasil), filho de
D. Joao VI, 0 qual pelo seu valor e constancia soube reivindi-
car 0 thrOno para sua filha, a senhora D. Maria II, fallecida
a 15 de Novembro de 1853. Foi ella a bis-avo de Dom
Manuel II, ultimo rei de Portugal, destbronado em 1910.
Twenty-first Lesson.
The Subjunctive Mood.
§ 112. The Subjunctive denotes an action or a
state as existing in the mind of the person speaking,
and not as a fact:
I do not think he is so old. Ndo creio que seja tao velho.
We feared he would go. JRecedmos que se fosse emhora.
It is the mood of uncertainty, and is employed after
verbs expressing desire, tendency, order, hope, merit,
fear, doubt:
Desejo (espero, quero, duvido) que Carlos esiude.
§ 113. The Subjunctive is used:
A. In principal clauses (oragOes principaes or suh-
ordinantes):
The Subjunctive Mood. 355
(a) In the Imperative mood for the first and third
persons when affirmatively, and for all three persons
when negatively employed:
Estude (elle, 79, estudemos, estudem!
Nao pegas a qmm pediu, nem sirvas a quern serviu.
Que esteja ou nao horn tempo.
N.B.— In the third person que may precede the verb;
que estude(m)!
(b) In clauses where talve^ precedes the verb:
Talve2 elle diga perhaps he may say. Yet here the
Indicative may be employed.
(c) In clauses expressing wishes or interjections:
Fraza a Deus que assim seja! Viva! Morra! Deus
0 salve! Possa eu urn dia pagar-lhe as suas finezas!
Assim as suas prendas fossem devidamente desen-
volvidas!
(d) In clauses of admission being equivalent to a
conditional clause:
Falle elle (= se elle falar), tudo se calard.
B. In subordinate clauses (oragoes suhordinadas)
beginning with que^ and not representing indirect speech.
The conjunction que requires the Subjunctive:
(a) After all verbs, substantives, adjectives and
other particles which express cause or impediment of
an action or occurrence, an admission, approval or dis-
approval, hope, convenience, etc., such, as: Desejar^
querer, pedir, aconselhar, consentir,' admittir, impedir,
ordenar, approvar, propor, suppor, merecer^ prohibir^
decretar, resolver, esperar, convir, desapprovar, acJiar mat
(bom, melhor, peor).
Examples.
Fiz com que elle visse o seu erro I caused him to re-
cognise his error.
^ ''Que'" may be omitted in the complementary accusative
clause whenever the verb is also accompanied by a dative com-
plement which is the subject of the accusative clause ;— e.g.,
^Candida de Figueiredo propunha d Academia das Sciencicts, en-
carregasse uma comissdo da reforma (ou revisaoj da ortografia,
antes que se comegasse o famigerado Dicciondrio (in spej, de que
era director Latino Coelho^ (Carol'' Michaelis de Vasconcellos).
23*
356 Lesson 21.
Impediram (or ohstaram) que enirassemos.
They opposed our entrance.
Aprovo (desaprovo) que faga isso.
I approve his doing so.
Suponhdmos que esse facto se de.
Suppose that will happen.
Ndo Ihe aconselho que parta. I don't advise you to part.
Ndo se pdde admitir (or e inadmissivel) que se digam
taes coisas. Such things cannot be allowed to be said.
Elle merecia que se Ihe concedessem todos as honras.
He would be worthy of all honours bestowed upon him.
(b) After the expressions (verbs, substantives, ad-
jectives) of fear:
Beceei que o meu amigo estivesse doente.
Tinha medo (estava com medo) que perdesse o combdio.
De medo que lest, for fear.
Ndo temas que fiques castigado!
Estou a tremer (e de receiar) que haja mallogro.
I tremble for fear there may be a failure.
(c) After expressions of astonishment, surprise,
joy, grief—e.g.:
Admiro (-me) que elle venha (or (enha or tivesse vindo).
I wonder that he will or has come.
Fiquei surpreendida que tivesse chegado.
I was surprised he had come.
Folgo (or estimo) que tenha recuperado a saude.
I am glad he is well again.
Sinto que ndo Ihe possa valer.
I am sorry I can be of no use to you.
(d) After verbs or impersonal idioms expressing
that it is agreeable or deplorable, rare or frequent,
possible, probable, astonishing, important, just, necessary,
useful, etc.— e.g.:
J^' de sentir it is deplorable, a pity
e de ever \ j^ ^ ^^ assumed
e admtssivel f
e de desejar it is desirable
e raro (vulgar) it is rare (common)
e possivd (provdvel) it is possible (probable)
e admit dvd (or de admirar) it is astonishing
parece incrivel it seems incredible
importa it is a matter of consequence
Thb Subjunctive Mood. 357
e justo it is just
e necessdrio (util, perigoso) it is necessary (useful,
dangerous)
a nao ser que unless, except.
Ex.: Importa que se comprehenda e exercite bem o em-
pr^o do conjufictivo, para que haja nella a maxima
facilidade.
To this group belong also the nouns predicatively
employed :
e honra it is an honour
e vergonka it is a shame
e tempo j .^ -^ ^-^^
sao noras \
e justica it is justice
e asneira it is foolishness
caso e que the question is.
(e) After duvidar and other terms expressing doubt,
when employed Affirmatively, the English "whether" is
translated by que:
Duvido que elle saiba I doubt that (or whether) he knows.
£ muito duvidoso que seja despachado o requerimento
It is rather doubtful Whether the request will be
agreed to.
However : Nao ha duvida (ninguem duvida) que Cintra
e urn logar das mais honitos da Europa. There is
no doubt that Cintra is one of the finest places in
Europe.
N.B. I. — Sometimes, however, the subjunctive is employed
even with duvidar in a negative clause: Nao duviddmos que
0 sr. Jose diga a verdade.
N.B. II. — After ignorar the subjunctive may be employed:
Ignorava que vivesses (or que vivias) na aldeia I did not
know that you lived in the country.
N.B. III.— After the verbs expressing knowledge or
meaning of something happening or existing (verbos sensitivos),
as ver^ saber, julgar, and those declaring something as happen-
ing or existing (verbos declarativos), as dijser, declarar, an-
nuncmr, the verb after *^q^^e'^ may be in the subjunctive mood,
in case the verb of the principal clause is employed negatively
or in a negative interrogation.
Nao digo que elle nao saiba.
I don't mean to say that he does not know.
358 Lesson 21.
Entuo ndo achas que fosse melJior ter mats cuidado?
Don't you think it would be better to be more
careful ?
N.B. IV.— In an interrogative accessory clause the verb
may be in the subjunctive.
Nao sabia quaes fossem as suas ideias e medidas.
I did not know which were his ideas and measures.
N.B. v.— In the same case after se whether, with dever,
haver de added in thought, the verb may be employed in the
subjunctive :
Ndo sei se diga (= ndo sei se devo or deva dizer or:
ndo sei se hei-de or haja de dizer) I don't know
whether I am to say.
49. Thema.
It is not advisable that during a thunderstorm many people
should crowd together in a church unless there is a lightning-
conductor. It is indispensable that a nation should fulfil its
destiny and always strive after high ideals. I should have
rendered him this service, if I had had the means to do so.
These flowers would not have faded if they had been watered.
I shall do what he wants me to, provided he behaves well.
Do not go upon the lake while the ice is not solid, lest you
break through. He will give it you on condition that you shall
give it back to him to-morrow. It is impossible that he should
have written that. It is convenient for you to go to find him.
It is a pity that you have not seen him. It is a shame that
you should deny thus what you have done. It would be a
crime if you should let him do that. What would they say
if I should send them this parcel? We should comfort her
if she needed it. However sad the news is, I shall impart
it to her. You ought patiently to endure these trials, until
a time will come when you will no longer be oppressed. It
is just that you should be rewarded. Do not believe him,
whatever he may say. God grant (= querer) he may suc-
ceed. Tell him, so that he may know it. Even if he should
come to-morrow, he would no longer be in time.
50. Leitnra e versao.
Passeio a Riviera portuguesa.
Visto qu3 ja conhecemos o mappa de Portugal nos sous
tra^os geraes, vamos agora fazer uma visita aos arrabaldes
da capital. Como esta calor, recommenda-se que tomfiinos o
combdio de Cascaesj para que nos leve a Riviera. Pois sigam-
The Subjunctive Mood. 359
me, se forem do meu parecer. Vejam, alem esta o comboio
prestes a partir. Nao se demorem! Corram e subam, para
que nao o percamos. Eis-nos installados! Ainda bem que o
alcan9amos, pois duvido que haja outro antes do meio-dia. Sen-
tem-se e descansem da corrida ! Ora querem ver que o Carlos
esta sem folego! Nao se precipitasse tanto! Agora reparem:
Do lado esqufirdo do comboio v6-se o Tejo e as margens da
Outra Banda. D'ali se gosa um panorama encantador de Lisboa
e do rio, por tal forma magnifico que sera muito para lasti-
m^r que nao seja visto pelo estrangeiro que visite Lisboa.
Ora por pouco que tivessemos passado, sem a v6r, a Torre
de Belem, uma das maiores maravilhas de architectura, que
ha no mundo. E que uma fabrica de gaz impede que se
veja, a nao ser do lado do rio. Que p^na que se tenha dado
licen9a de coUocarem essa fabrica de maneira que seja tao
difficil obter um relance d'olhos d'um monumento erigido para
que sempre relembre os feitos dos Portugueses no seu period©
de maior heroismo e gloria.
0 comboio agora vae passando pelas povoa^oes de JDdfundo,
Pedroucos, Pago d'Arcos, Alges, praias consideradas de mar,
visto que o rio aqui leva agua salgada, e freqnentadas pela
melhor gente de LisbCa, comquanto nao estejam longe da
capital. E que ha tantas e tao boas praias por todo a costa
portugu6sa que facilmente se Ihe encontra onde nos sintamos
bem e fiquemos curados dos nossos males.
Agora permittam que Ihes chame a atten(jao para o sitio
que estamos atravessando e que se chama Caxias. Nao e senao
justo que aqui se mencione um instituto pedagogic© que faz
honra ao pais: ^ a Casa de CorrecQao, estabelecida n'aquelle
vasto edificio que, " se bem que tenha sido um mosteiro e por
conseguinte nao destinado desde logo ao seu fim actual, e um
modelo no genero. E raro o alumno que ali nao se sinta (or,
sentisse) bem e em que os esfor^os dos professores, tendando
a que todos cheguem a ser bons e uteis, nao consigam (or
conseguissem) o seu fim.
E nao esque9ilmos que aqui ha ainda outra coisa a ad-
mirar: uma casa de campo, deshabitada, que foi do rei, ou seja o
quintal que llie pertence, uma especie de parque com avenidas e
alegretes contornados de buxo artificialmente copado, e em
, parte do tamanho de um homem. Foi, como ja disse, d'el-rei,
que porem nunca habitou aqui que eu saiba. Outra quinta
real, e essa lindissima, no que diz respeito ao palacio em estilo
de renascen9a, esta situada nao longe d'aqui na estrada de
Cintra, em Quelus. Tambem tem parque rococo com altas
sebes de buxo. Mas o maior attractivo que eu Ihe conheQO,
6 o pro f undo' silfincio em que esta mergulhado.
360 Lesson 22.
Ja estamos a beira-mar. Notem aquelle grande edificio
sobre os rochedos lambidos pela quebran^a ! Nao 6 como quern
quizesse atirar-se ao mar? E o Sanatorio de Carcavellos cons-
tniido em 1902 para que d6 acolhimento a meninos de 4 para
12 annos. Nao longe d'ahi esta outro sanatorio, o de Sanf Anna
de Parede que, tendo cem camas, recebe tanto adultos como
crian^as que sejam tuber culosas. E ha quern affirme que cada
cama custou 16.000 marcos, a ser verdade que o sanatorio,
edificado em 1904, tenha custado 1.600 000 marcos approxima-
damente.
Do nosso lado direito devia-se v6r outro edificio, mais
antigo e nao menos interessante, se as verduras e alguns
grnpos de casas nao no-lo occultasse. E o palacio do marqufis
de Pombal que foi o grande ministro de D. Jos^ I. Estamos
em Oeiras.
E ja vamos passando Sao Jodo d'Estonl, Estoril e MonV
Estorily onde nos encontramos na parte da Bahia de Cascaes,
mais restrictamente chamada Biviera portuguesa. Proponho
que des^amos para lanchar no Beal Hotel MonV Estoril d'onde
se gosa uma vista formOsa a nao poder ser mais linda. De-
pois daremos um passeio ate Cascaes, para vfir a cidadella, resi-
dftncia d'el-rei quando ca estd, e uma forma^ao das mais
curiosas de rochedos, em forma de cratera, aberta no fundo,
e chamada <B6ca do inferno*.
Twenty-second Lesson.
The Subjunctive Mood (continued).
C. In Adverbial Clauses (oragdes circumstanciaes).
§ 114. The subjunctive is employed after the
following coDJunctions (cf. P. I, L. 34) :
(a) The concessive (concessivas): ainda que, posto
que etc., as soon as the clause expresses only supposition
and not a reality:
Nao me queixaria d'elle, ainda que me maltratasse.
But:
Ainda que o amava, por ser valor oso, nao era cega pelos
seus defeitos.
N.B.— Sometimes the concessive clauses may have the
subjunctive, even when expressing a reality,:
Se hem que (or comquanto que) os Alpes sejam mais
altos que OS Pyrenees, elks sdo mais fdceis de at-
travessar.
The Subjunctive Mood. 361
(b) The final (finaes):
Obedecei as lets, para que vos ohedegam,
(c) The consecutive (consecutivas) : que:
Os generos de mais necessidade devem ser too haratos
que estejam ao alcance de todos os bolsos.
'^.B.—Sem que and que nao always require the subjunc-
tive. Ex.:
Caso venha e que nao (or sem que) chegue a hora . . .
(d) Nao porque^ nao que:
Procedeu assim, nao porque gostasse, mas por eniender
ser este o sen dever.
(e) Contdnto que^ a nao ser que, siipposto que, dado
que, dado caso que, caso que, caso always require the sub-
junctive. Ex. :
Pdde ir contanto que nao se demore.
(f) Se if, whether, expressing condition; como se
as if; quer . . . quer; como quer que (cf. se followed by
the future in the following Lesson, §115 (a)):
Se nao fosse a grande distancia, iri a vel-o.
Falou como se tivesse perdido o juizo.
N.B. I.— Instead of como se in the preceding example
might be employed como quem (see E).
N.B. II. — Se, introducing an indirect interrogation, is
followed by the indicative: preguntou-me se era grande a
distdncia.
Sa(k)irei quer chova quer nao chova . . . whether it be
raining or not.
Como quer que seja however it may be.
Como quer que o nao visse as he did not see him anyhow.
(g) Ate que, depois que and antes que, when ex-
pressing a future, an intention:
Esteja em casa ate que seu irmdo volte.
Depois que tenha chegado, saiam amhos antes que se
feche a porta.
(h) Como, when, employed with the imperfect or
pluperfect, it expresses a series of events; sometimes
also when expressing the reason:
Napoledo, como tivesse sido vencido e aprisionado pelos
aUiados, foi levado para a ilha de Elba.
Como nao quizesse acompanJiar-me, sai so.
362 Lesson 22.
D. Ill Relative Clauses.
(a) When expressing a supposition and not a reality:
Pompeo aspirava a honras que o distinguissem de fodos
OS capifdes do seu tempo.
Se enconfrar um livro que Ihe agrade, compre-o.
Se ndo chove, a raiz duma plartta ndo encontra na terra
dgua que sugue.
(b) When expressing a quality which restricts the
generality of an idea, this idea belonging to a negative
or interrogative-negative attribute:
Ainda ndo encontrei homem algum que ndo tivesse (or
tenha) sido logrado nos seus sonhos de felicidade.
Quern ha que tenha sido sempre feliz?
N.B.— Po2(CO is considered as attributing a negative
meaning :
Ha poucos homens que saibam aproveitar hem o tempo.
(c) Expressing purpose:
Envieilhe uma pessoa que o avisasse do que havia aeon-
tecido.
Eemarlc. — Relative clauses which do not belong to any
of the groups above require the indicative : Elle sahe os meios
de que pdde dispor e sahe os deveres que tern de cumprir.
Conhecia perfeitamente a sociedade em que vivia.
E. Quern in the meaning of "somebody who" or
"people who" and depending on ha^ apparece or the
like, or following coma (cf. C (f ) N.B.) equally requires the
verb in the subjunctive mood:
Ha quern assim pense; havia quern assim pensasse.
Falou com quern tivesse perdido o juizo.
However: Ha algumas pessoas que assim pensam.
Also expressions as seja qiiem for que, qucm quer
que seja and the like require the subjunctive:
Elle estd innocente, seja quern for que diga o contrdrio.
F. Finally, the subjunctive is employed in the for-
mulas que eu saiha as I know, and queira ou ndo queira
whether he wants to or not:
Ndo ha, que eu saiha, expressdo mais suave.
The Subjunctive Mood. 863
51. Thema.
I should want to find a book that might serve me as
a guide on my travels. Man is the only sentient being that
in a state of freedom may destroy itself. Please to send me
a servant who knows how to wait upon people. I should be
very sorry if you should depart without bidding me good-bye.
It will be well that you may know why I kept silence. Per-
haps it will be sufficient if you tell him that he will be dis-
missed immediately if he should not do his duty. It is
time that we return home, for it begins to rain. It may
be assumed that to-morrow the weather will be good. I
promised that I should keep her company, in case you should
be obliged to remain here. Dom Joao de Castro, a brilliant
modern author and a descendant of the famous Portuguese
viceroy of the same name, says in the preface to his <i-Jor'
nados no Minho^ : "The reader who will like substantial
treatises, may halt here with his curiosity, for my 'Jornadas*
are nothing but a slight beating of wings . . . When I should
be a man — so I intended when still a child — I should
rove through old castles; on my command (= voz) the draw-
bridges were to sink and the confined ladies of the castle
should hail me as their invincible deliverer ..." You do not
know whereby the ancestor of this author has become an his-
torical person, and you ask me whether I do. May I ask
leave to tell you briefly in the following paragraph the his-
tory of this hero, so intimately connected with that of his
country.
62. Leitnra e yersao.
Dom Joao de Castro,
D. Joao de Castro seria immortal na historia de Portugal,
ainda que nao tivesse si do vice-rei da India e como -tal feito
fa^anhas como havera poucos as tenham feito. Talvfiz elle
seja mais conhecido pela sua probidade e desinteresse, que
nao ha quern Ih'a possa negar ou Ihe levasse a palma. Nasceu
em Lisboa no anno de 1560; e como descendesse de uma fa-
miUa illustre, passou a India no vice-rei nado de D. Antonio
de Noronha, e era governador de Ormuz quando foi chamado
para vice-rei da India. Tinha ja militado em Tanger e acom-
panhado o imperador Carlos Quinto na tomada de Tunis. Por
essa occasiao, como este monarcha quizesse dar-lhe a sua parte
dos despojos, D. Joao de Castro recusou, nao porque despre-
zasse todo o premio material da sua valentia, mas por entender,
dizia, que so pertencia ao seu soberano recompensal-o como
merecesse. Quando D. Joao de Castro tomou conta do gov6rno
da India, era Diu governada por I). Joao de Mascarenhas que,
364 Lesson 23.
posto nao dispuzesse de mais de 300 portugu6ses, a defendeu
valorosamente da for^a cem v6zes maior com que a amea^dra o
rei de Cambaia. 0 n6vo vice-rei nao hesitou em Ihe man-
dar alguns soccorros de soldados, assim como sens dois filhos,
dos qnaes um morreu na pra9a pela explosao duma mina.
Defendia-se Diu heroicamente haveria seis mezes, quando D. Joao
de Castro chegou (1546). Posto que nao f6sse facil illudir o
inimigo, consegoiu faz6l-o, entrando na pra^a com 4000 homens.
Alguns dias depoia fez uma sortida e, agredindo as trincheiras
dos sitiantes, ganhou completa victoria, uma das mais sangui-
nolentas e memoraveis, que nos tem transmittido a hist6ria.
Ficou a cidade arruinada, visto que o combate abrangesse
mas, largos e arredores. Era indispensavel que se reconstru-
issem as fortifica96es, mas nao havia dinheiro que chegasse.
Neste apuro O. Joao de Castro cortou alguns cabellos da barba,
e sobre este penhor pediu (que) Ihe emprestassem 20 000 par-
daus^ OS habitantes de G6a, os quaes Ihe forneceram o di-
nheiro preciso e sem que tivessem de se arrepender da sua
confian^a, pois a singular hypotheca foi resgatada no praso
fixo. E nunca houve, nem nunca haverd homem que possa
gabar-se de barbas tomadas em mais alto val6r. Foi esse
rasgo de magnlfico aprumo que, mais do que os feitos com
que honrou a sua espada e as armas do seu pais, Ihe gran-
gearam a popularidade de que, passados quasi 4 seculos, ainda
gosa 0 nome de D. Joao de Castro.
Mai tinha conseguido restabelecer a boa ordem no vice-
reino, quando a morte o veio surprehender a 6 de junho de
1547. Teve de ser enterrado a custa do publico, visto nao
se achar nos sens cofres mais do que um cilicio, e tres reaes'^,
por isso que D. Joao de Castro, nao aspirando a bens que nao
fdssem os do seu pais, em v^z de amontoar tesouros, despendia
generosamente os seus ordenados no servi^o do Estado.
Twenty-third Lesson.
The Subjunctive Mood (continued).
A. The Future Tense.
§ 115. The Future of the Subjunctive is employed,
instead of the Future indie, whenever you want to ex-
press the uncertainty of some future event:
* Indian coin of about 360 reis or Is. 4<^. in value.
2 Old Indian coin of different value. There neeve silver
and copper reaes
The Subjunctive Mood. 365
(a) After the conditional conjunction se:
Se vier if he should come ; se nao desejar mats nada in
case you don't want anything more ; se Beus quizer
please God.
However: se vejo (se vi) whenever or if I see (saw),
because here se is not conditionally employed and does
not express a future, but a repetition.
(b) After quando when:
Quando vier when he will come; quando formos a casa
when we are to go home.
(c) After emquanto while, as long as:
Emquanto fleer este trahalho . . . Emquanto nao puder
contar com augmento de ordenado ... Ordeno que
nao saia emquanto nao tiver estvdado a ligao (cf. B,
§ 118 c).
(d) After segundo, conforme, assim como, assim que
according to, corresponding to, thus, so as to:
Serds ou nao hem succedido, segundo te houveres.
You will or will not succeed according to your mode
of procedure.
Conforme fizerdes, far-vos-hao.
As you do, you will be done to.
Por onde vds, assim como vires, assim fards.
FUho eSj pae serds, assim que jfieereSj assim terds.
(e) In relative clauses which refer to something
uncertain in the future:
Aquelle que vier he who may come.
Traga o trahalho que estiver feito bring the work that
will be ready.
Seja 0 que JDeus quieer be it as God pleases (God's will
be done).
(f) Often after the relative crnio as and quem (he)
who (cf. (d)):
Cdmo quieer as you please; como Ihe parecer as you
think.
Quem hoa cama fizer, neUa se deitard as you make
your bed, so you lie on it.
§ 116. The Perfect Future subj. is employed instead
of the same tense of the indicative, on the same con-
ditions as the Imperfect Future:
Avisem-me quando os cavallos tiverem chegado.
Let me know when the horses will have arrived.
366 Lesson 23.
B. Agreement of Tenses.
§ 117, In the Subjunctive Mood the agreement
of tenses is, as a rule, the same as in the Indicative.
Therefore only some exceptions may be noted:
(a) There is no Preterito perfeito definido in the
Subjunctive (corresponding for instance to the .verbal
form fui), but only a Preterito perfeito indefinido (cor-
responding, for instance, to tenJio sido-.tenha sido) and a
Preterito imperfeito, which, according to the character
of the clause, may alternate with the former. Ex.:
Example: Elle esteve hontem doente; nao creio qiie esti-
vesse hontem doente.
Example: Elle tern estado (or esteve) doente; nao creio
que tenha estado doente.
§ 118. The Future tenses of the subjunctive are
only employed in the above mentioned cases (see A).
However, it should be noticed that:
(a) An action to be done in the future is expressed
by the present tense, in an accessory clause, if it de-
pends on a verb employed in the present tense of the
principal phrase:
Ordeno que elle vd amanhd.
(b) Such an action depending on a preterito in the
principal clause, must be expressed by the imperfect
subj.:
Ordenei que elle fosse amanhd.
(c) If the action is relatively future — i.e., if it will
be already past when another, equally future, action is
to be or will have been done, this future tense ia thus
expressed:
Ordeno que ndo saia, emquanto nao tiver estudado a
ligdo.
Ordenei que ndo saisse, emquanto nao tivesse estudado
a ligdo.
§ 119. In certain cases the imperfect may supply
the pluperfect:
Ndo puzesses (=^ ndo tivesses pdsto) a mdo num velhof
You ought not to have laid your hand upon an old man!
Quern me dissesse (or dirja) issol
Who might have told me so before 1
The Sabjunctive Mood. 367
§ 120. On the other hand, the Preterito perfeito
indefiiiido is sometimes employed instead of the Pluper-
fect subj. (see §111, N.B.I).
53. Thema.
I cannot believe any longer in ycnr promises unless yon
give me the necessary securities. If you had been more thought-
ful, you would have spared us these painful discussions.
A thoughtless man never profits by those lessons which Life is
giving him at any moment, although he has to pay for them
dearly. Also there are many people who remain ignorant even
after having travelled (personal form) through the most cul-
tured countries. They pass, as if they were blindfolded, be-^
fore the greatest wonders of Nature or the most beautiful
monuments which Art may have created, if they are not
accompanied by somebody who will open for them their eyes.
Now the thunderstorm is over; as soon as the sun will
come forth, while the rain is still continuing, we shall see a
rainbow. Also if you place yourself before a fountain, with
your back against the sun, you will see forming itself in the
falling drops a bow like the rainbow, which proves that this
phenomenon is due to the sun. If we want the proof that
the sunlight is formed out of various colours, it will be suffi-
cient that we cut a disc of pasteboard on which the seven
colours are put in strips of paper, disposed from the centre
to the circumference, so as to complete a certain number of
successive spectrums. If then we cause the disc to turn round,
this will appear white. That is the so-called ''experiment of
Newton."
54. Leitura.
0 grande erudito Consiglieri Pedroso, quando presidente
da Sociedade de Geographia de Lisboa, submeteu a delibera9ao
da assembleia com o intuito de estabelecer um accCrdo luso-
brasiliense uma serie de propostas, de que extraimos as seguintes ;
Estudar a forma mais adequada de se realisarem con-
gresses periodicos luso-brasileiros, que devam em prazos a'fixar
reunir-se alternadamente em Lisboa ou Porto e no Rio de
Janeiro ou outras cidades brasileiras, com o intuito de discutir
todos OS assumptos de ordem intellectual e econdmica, que in-
teressam em commum e exclusivamente as duas na^oes, e onde
haja de fazer-se a propaganda das delibera^oes que pelos mfis-
mos congresses e pelos govfimos dos dois paises tenham de
ser tomadas a beneficio de ambos os povos respeitando-se
escrupulosamente a independencia de cada um d'elles, e ev^i-
tando-se toda e qualquer interferencia, por minima que seja;
368 Lesson 24.
na vida interna e no modo de ser dos dois paises respectiva-
mente.
Estudar a forma de se ultimar um tratado de comncercio,
ou antes um largo entendimento commercial entre as duas
na^oes, procurando-se a maneira — ate onde f6r possivel veneer
as difficuldades naturaes inherentes ao assumpto — de que
uma a outra concedam respectivamente vantagens especiaes,
que deixem de ser transmittidas aos outros estados^ nao sendo
portanto attingidas pela clausula de «na9ao mais favorecida*,
inscripta actualmente nos tratados ja existentes tanto de Portu-
gal, como do Brasil com os paises estrangeiros.
Twenty-fourth. Lesson.
The Infinitive.
I. General Use of the Inflnltive.
§ 121. Portuguese language distinguishes two
forms of the Infinitive:
(a) the impersonal and (b) the personal.
While the former expresses an action quite generally,
without saying by whom, the latter includes in its
ending at the same time the subject.
§ 122. The impersonal or simple infinitive occurs
purely (without preposition) or prepositive (= depending
on a preposition)— e.g.: escrever; de, para, por escrever.
Sometimes it substitutes (with or without the article) a
noun, and may be subject, object, or predicate:
Viver e um henefwio da natureea, commum a todos.
EdiLcar os fllhos e o dever mais sagrado dos paes.
Nao Ihe resta sendo pedir esmola.
Gosto de cantar.
6 vida da minlia vida
6 vida do meu viver
Viver sem ti nao e vida
Viver sem, ti e morrer. (Portuguese folk-lore).
§ 123. The subject infinitive may also be placed
after the predicate:
Praia i o hem falar, ouro i o hem calar.
Mais vale calar que mal falar,
£ melhor ir por aqui.
The Infinitive. 869
0 grande defeito do rato e ser muito guloso
£ fdcil faeer
Bom saber e calar, aU ser tempo de falar,
J& uma vergdnha (uma Idstima) nao saber ler
A sua velha poUrona onde Ihe e grata dormir urn curto
s6(m)no benefico . . .
§ 124. The Infinitive is employed as a complement:
(a) As a direct complement:
Nao sei (que) fazer I don^t know how (or what) to do.
Esse homem de Estado quer ser chefe do governo (— quer
a chefia) this statesman wants to be the head of
Government.
Elle pediu de beber he asked for a draught.
(b) As an indirect complement of verbs or adjectives,
answering to the question: of what, to what, etc.:
0 homem S capaz de se enganar (= de engano). Elle
prepara-se para fugir (= para a fuga)
Pensa em partir (— na partida).
§ 125. The simple Infinitive is also employed as
an attribute; as such it is preceded by de after nouns
of which it is the complement. In English it is generally
rendered by the gerund. Ex.:
A arte de escrever S jd antiga. A Austria tinha inten-
gdo de ficar neutral (the art of writing . . .).
0 publico nao tem interesse em os ouvir. Elle fee
mengdo de se retirar (. . . no interest of hearing . . .).
0 pais estd numa situagdo de se lastimar.
§ 126. The Infinitive employed as a substantive
may express any part of a proposition:
0 andar cansa walking tires. Era urn nao acabar de rir
there was no end of laughing. Soava um correr
de cavallos a trot of horses was heard. Desde o ama-
nhecer ate ao anoUecer from dawn to nightfall.
§ 127. The Personal Infinitive has its own
subject which may or may not be expressed by its
termination. It may also be accompanied by a noun
or pronoun:
Seria justo confessarmos o nosso erro
Nao ha maior Srrd que nao reconhecer um homem seu
erro (or nao reconhecerem os homens . . .)•
Ao ouvir OS pdssaros cantarem no bosqtie ...
Portuguese Conversatioi-Grammar. 2i
370 Lesson 24.
§ 128. The subject of the Personal Infinitive may
even be an indefinite, an impersonal one. The action
then is expressed by the third person plural. In Eng-
lish this form may be rendered by the passive voice:
Calei-me por nao me accreditarem I remained silent be-
cause they did not believe me (or because I was not
believed.
Betiro-me para nao me importunarem.
I retired that I might not be bored.
See also the Infinitive as representing a dependent
clause, Lesson 28 § 151.
N.B. I.— As may be seen by the examples^ the Infinitive
may also be accompanied by complements of any kind; e.g.:
0 suave decorrer do tempo . . . urn longo agonizar . . . o
agraddvel passear pelos campos.
N.B. II. — Generally the substantivated Infinitive is em-
ployed only in the masculine and singular form. With a
small number, however, the employment of the infinitive as a
substantive is so natural that even the plural is formed of
it; e.g.: o jantar dinner, jantares; as dieeres, os podereSy os
devereSf os haveres, os andareSj os saberes etc.
55. Thema.
Water is an indispensable element : for men and animals
to drink ; to cook foods ; to fertilise the ground ; to water the
plants ; to produce steam that causes the locomotive to go on
land and the powerful steamers on sea. "What future
awaits us," exclaims Trindade Coelho, **if we do not assist
agriculture? Continuous impoverishment of our race, which will
be undermined by disease; our impossibility of creating
new industries or of developing those already existing, which
all depend on the mother- industry; the impossibility of our hav-
ing commerce, for want of (= for not having) something in which
to exercise it; misery and hunger not very far oflF, when, in
exchange for products indispensable to Life, we shall have given
the last crumbs." Is there anything more lamentable than
not knowing how to read and to write? Can you tell us
how to reach the railway-station? I have a great pleasure
in being of use to you. Please come along with me;
for I have to go the same way. When do you think of
coming back? I don't know yet, but I hope I shall not
be long.
The Infinitive. 371
66. Leitnra e yersao,
Bodrigues de Freitas.
Quern estudar com atten^ao as pequenas obras-primas
reunidas n'este volume (Pdginas Avulsas de J. J. Modriguse
de Freitas), curvar-se-ha per certo com respeito e sympathia
perante o autor. Notara nao so o vasto saber positive e a
justSza das doatrinas expostas, mas tambem as variadas apti-
does literarias, e a arte rara de narrar acontecimentos e exte-
riorizar ideias, com precisao e sobrtedade ... Se em seguida
rememorar os factos principaes da sua vida publica, come lente
na Academia polyt^chnica, eximio publicista, chefe de partido
6 deputado. penso que deve ficar impressionado pela obre
rectidao da sua indole e pela perfeita unidade que st ipre
houve entre o sen pensar, o seu dizer e o seu obrar . . .
Picariam, comtudo, incompletos os breves tra^os lan^ados n'este
singelo monumento, erguido a mem6ria de Rodrigues de Freitas
pelas maos piedosas que o ampararam e acariciaram em vida,
se alguem dos poucos- que tiveram a ventura de serem ad-
mittidos na intimidade do seu lar, nao manifestasse a profunda
e consoladora impressao, produzida pela sua personalidade no
trato familiar. Alguem que pode seguir a evolu9ao das ideias
e dos ideaes de ambos . . . e leu em admiraveis cartas a es-
posa, medita^oes . . . fragmentos e esbo90s infelizmente, mas
tao bellos que provocam um doloroso pesar por o destino nao
Ihe haver concedido tempo e fori^as para terminar as suas in-
vestiga^oes sociaes, nem para coordenar as suas ideias filoso-
fico-religiosas . . . Quando em vida, em horas de desalento,
procurava alguma ideia suTjlime que o avigorasse, era na Ora-
Qao de Benjamim Franklin que a encontrava, repetindo:
«0h bondade todo-poderosa, pae miserieordioso^ guia in-
dulgente. Augmenta o meu saber de sorte que eu reconhe^a
OS mens verdadeiros interesses. Firma-me na resoluQao de
seguir os conselhos que esse me der. Acceita os servi^os que
eu possa prestar a teus outros filhos, como signal unico de
reconhecimento que me e dado offerecer-te pelos favores que
me concedes sem cessar.»
(Carolina MichaSlis de Vasconcellos : pre^mbulo (dbbr.) das
«Paginas avnlsas» por J. J. Rodrigues de Freitas.)
24*
372 LesBon 25.
Twenty-fifth Lesson.
The Infinitive (continued).
II. Use of the Personal and the Impersonal Forms
of the Infinitive.
§ 129. Whenever the pure infinitive is employed
in quite a general meaning, without referring to some
subject, the impersonal' form is used:
Os preceitos do direito sdo : viver honestamente, ndo em-
pecer a outrem, e dar o sen a cada urn.
§ 130. When the infinitive has its own subject
expressed, the personal form is employed (cf. § 127).
Ao chegarem os fugitivos a planicie, um dos desconhecidos
esiava all.
§ 131. The personal form is employed also when-
ever an action is spoken of which has a special though
unexpressed subject (cf. §128): Fassei sem me verem.
§ 132. The impersonal form is employed when-
ever the infinitive has the meaning of an imperative
(cf.§136,b).
§ 133. After the verbs mandar, falser, deixar-se,
the simple and pure infinitive is employed:
Mcmdei'O entrar. Fal-o-hei subir. Deixou-se prender.
N.B. — If, however, the infinitive is separated from the
subordinating verb, the personal form may be used : Mandeis-o
em dia e hora marcados seguirem o seu caminho.
§ 134. The impersonal form of the infinitive is
used after the following verbs:
Acdbar de, andar a, cessar de, comegar a (or de), con-
tinuar a, costumar, chegar a, desejar and the verbs
of similar meaning deixar de, entrar a, dar em,
estar a, ser feito para, haver de, ir a, langar-se a,
metter-se a, ser mandado, ousar, poder^ pdr-se a,
querer, recusar, saber, soer, ter de, trafar de, tornar
a, vir a. (Also for these verbs see § 133, N.B.)
§ 135. .In any jother cases the personal as well as
the impersonal forms may be employed, considering
always that the use of the one or the other is subject
The Infinitive. 373
to the clearness, the emphasis, and the harmony of the
clause. Ex.:
Accrescentava que as noticias recehidas do Alentejo
continuavam a ser favor dveis. Ensinou a ser reis
OS reis do mundo. Por esta pergunta nos ensina a
sermos euriosos. Obriga os cercados a lidar. Obri-
gdra os Mossulmanos a concederem-lhe ... As aves
aqudticas pareciam, nos sens voos incertos, ora vaga-
rosos, ora rdpidos^ folgarem com os primeiros dias
da estagdo dos amdres. Viam-se lampejar as annas
e ajuntarem-se ondas de vultos humanos.
III. The Independent Infinltiye.
§ 13G. The Infinitive is employed independently:
(a) When substituting a noun — e.g.:
0 hem fazer floresce^ e todo o mal perece.
Mais oust a mal fazer ^ que hem fazer.
Bem parece o hem fazer (see § 123—125).
(b) When substituting an imperative:
Companheiros, despedir esta noUe da montanha e das
tristezas, e apparelhar para dmanhd me seguird^s !
N.B. — In this case the subject (tu, v6s) is never expressed.
(c) In exclamations expressing surprise, disillusion,
astonishment:
Ndo haver quern me salve! Pensar que tudo seria
em vdof
57. Thema.
To err is human. To obey is the duty of youth. Rea-
ding, writing and arithmetic are the most elementary attain-
ments which ought to be taught to everybody and which all
ought to learn. The strong beating of his heart prevented
him from going fast. To recognise the limits of one's knowledge
is to be wise. It is not virtue never to err, but avoiding
error as much as possible may well be called so. It is easy
to blame, but difficult to make it better. I want to see this
work finished, for it is easily to be done (cf. § 146, 2 ; N,B. III).
Already you have often promised to improve yourself, yet I do
not yet see that you have succeeded in doing so. It must be
acknowledged that in the last decennium the women's rights
movement has learnt how to convince the righteously and justly
thinking people of the justice of its existence and advocacy.
874 Lesson 26.
Rowing is a good exercise, as, by putting the arms to strong
movement, it obliges us to breathe deeply. For it is not
enough for us to breathe good air and well nourish ourselves;
it is also necessary to take some exercise and to be clean.
68. Leitura e versao.
(a) 0 rate e um animal muito intoressante e engra^ado; e
nSo obstante (elle) ser o mais incommodo e atrevido dos nossos
visinhos, costumamos gostar d'elle, porque a sua viveza e in-
telligencia nao deixam de faz6l-o sympathico. 0 rato seria at6
de estimar, se nao fosse tao guloso e prejudicial; pois al6m
de devorar tudo o que topa, e de furtar para levar aos filhos,
parece que tern o prazer de destruir o que pode alcan(jar, e
nao ha nada que resista ao seu dente afiado. A brincar, o
rato domestico da Cabriolas muito engra9adas e sabe tomar
posi96e3 e fazer momices que lembram os dos palhacjos. E
para ir ter com uma gulodice, tanto 6 capaz de ir pelo chao
como por uma corda. Apanhado e mettido n'uma gaiola, a
principio assusta-se muito, ignorando o que Ihe vae succeder.
Task: The preceding to be put in the plural: Os ratos
sdo dnimaes muito interessantes, etc.
(b) Um leao dignou-se travar conhecimento com uma lebre
muito lepida. A lebre perguntou-lhe, se era verdade que um
misero gallo pudesse com o seu canto afugentar facilmente
um leao. 0 leao respondeu que era verdade sem duvida, e
que nao era raro terem os grandes animaes quasi sempre al-
gum fraco. E assim, por exemplo, ja teria ella ouvido dizer
que 0 grunhir de um porco causava assombro e terror a um
elephante. A lebre interrompeu-o, dizendo que era agora que
ella comprehendia a razao porque as lebres se assustavam
tanto a ouvirem ladrar um cao
Twenty-sixth Lesson.
The Infinitive (continued).
IV. The Dependent Infinitive.
A. Without a preceding preposition.
§ 137. Those verbs which according to their meaning
require to be completed by another verb with the same
subject, are followed by the simple (impersonal) infinitive:
Ninguem pdde fugir d morte.
The Infinitive. 375
With the simple infinitive and without a preposition
are employed:
Foder, parecer^ custumar, soer (to be in the habit)
saber (in the meaning of "to be able'O, ousar^ ndo
duvidar, recear, propor-se, tencionar, emprehender,
intentar, meditar, projectar and similar verbs, tentaVj
recusar, merecer;~e.g.:
A lingua hi-partida da vibora agita-se too furiosamente
fora da bocca, que parece phosphorejar e despedir
faiscas.
0 macaco pdde receber uma verdadeira educagao.
Propoz-se tentar fazel-Oy sem bem saber projectar urn
piano.
N.B, — In relative clauses the infinitive may sometimes
precede the personal verbal form; — e.g.: . . . cortando o esteiro
0 mats abaixo que ser possa.
§ 138. Without a preposition the infinitive is em-
ployed also after the following verbs:
ver, ouvir^ sentir, deixar, mandar, faeer though the
infinitive has not the same subject with these verbs,
but refers to their object; — e.g.:
ouvi cantar = I heard (somebody) sing.
Ouviram-no falar; manddram-me entrar; (in passive
form: elle foi ouvido falar ^ fui mandado entrar),
N.B. I.— After deixar, mandar^ fazer^ vir, ouvir the ac-
tive infinitive may be understood in a passive meaning; then
its subject is governed by por or de. In English the infinitive
is rendered by one of the participles: Deixei-me tyrannizar
por ella I allowed myself to be tyrannised by her. 0 principe
fazia-se respeitar (made himself respected) dos vassallos.
Ex.: Ouvimos bater o tambor^ tocar a rebeca, cortar a
madeira; vimos arder a casa We heard thfe drum beaten, the
violin played, the wood sawn ; we saw the house burning.
It may be noticed that when these verbs are followed, be-
side the infinitive, by an accusative of the third person, this
is substituted by the dative:
Eu vejo-lhes verter Idgrimas tristes (instead of: eu as
vejo . . .).
§ 139. Most of the verbs of saying and thinking
(verhos semitivos. e declarativos), as pensar, j^^gd'^'i contar^
declaraK, affirmar, negar, duvidar, perdoar, dizer, entendeVy
876 Lesson 26.
etc., may be followed by the pure infinitive, instead of
a clause depending on que; — e.g.;
Julgas saber (= que sabes); affirmou ndo haver perigo
(= que ndo havia p.).
Rule. — The infinitive is generally simple when
its action relates to the same subject as that of the
capital verb.
N.B. — After some verbs the infinitive may be preceded
hyjle;—e.g.:
• Jurou exterminar (or de exterminar) os inimigos.
§ 140. The transitive verbs querer, preferir, desejar,
gostar, ahorrecer and those analogous are followed by an
infinitive pure and simple whenever both actions have
the same subject: JDesejo entrar.
(The subjects being difierent, a dependent sentence
with que is employed instead: Besejo que elle entre.)
^.B.— Desejar may be followed by de: desejo de ir; but
desejo ir is more popular.
§ 141. The transitive verbs diligenciar, procurary
evitar, conseguir^ ohter, decidir, resolver and those ana-
logous are followed by the pure infinitive, whether the
two actions have or have not the same subject:
Gonsegui ser premiado; consegui ser elle premiado.
I succeeded in getting a prize; I obtained a prize
for him.
N.B. — In the latter case you may say: consegui que elle
fosse premiado,
§ 142. The infinitive pure and simple is employed
in final clauses after the verbs ir and vir; the subjects
of these verbs and of the infinitive are the same:
Fui procurd-lo I went to call on him. Veio ver-me he
came to see me. Indo encontrd-lo a dormi'r ... to find him
asleep. Ir ter or vir ter (com) = to turn to, to call on, to
fall in (with). Esta rua vae ter d ponte. Fui ter com elle;
veio ter comigo.
§ 143. The expression ndo fazer sendo is equally
followed by the infinitive pure and simple:
Ndo faz sendo brincar he does not do anything but
play.
The Infinitive. . 377
§ 144. The pure infinitive follows as an accusative
complement the verbs ser^ ter por origem^ dar em re-
sidtadOy ter por consequencia^ haver por galardao (^= to
get as a prize) and those analogous [N.B. here in its
personal form], as also the verb fazer in its meaning
"to cause." Ex.:
Isto deu em resultado serem tddos castigados.
The result of it was that all of them were punished.
Se hrincares com o lume^ terd isso por consequencia
qtieimares-te.
If you play with the fire, the consequence will be your
burning yourself.
Tdo grande e a sua desgraga que faz cJiorar as pedras.
So great is her misfortune that it causes the stones to
weep.
§ 145. Without any preposition or with de the in-
finitive follows the verbs dever (= must, ought) and
dignar-se (to deign, to be pleased). Ex.: ~
Elles deviam (de) contentar-se.
They ought to be satisfied.
Dignae-vos, senhor, (de) ouvir o vosso servo.
Be pleased, 0 Lord, to hear thy servant.
§ 146. The pure infinitive (subject) follows certain
adjectives and substantives employed as a predicate
(see § 123), such as: precise, fdcil, claro, difficil, jusfOy
possively horn, melhor, vergonha^ Idstima etc. — e.g.: e fdcU,
foi precise, sera melher sdir (but cf. § 148, 3, N.B. Ill),
as also the impersonal verbs, such as:
importa it is important custa-me it is painful to me
convem it is convenient ndo custa nada it is not diffi-
cult.
§ 147. The pure infinitive is employed after some .
prepositions, such as:
por (e.g.: ndo saiu por ndo ter que vestir he did not
go out, because he had nothing to put on).
sem (e.g. : sem pestanejar without twinkling).
para (e.g. : para ndo o melindrar that I may or might
not offend him . . .)
. . . 'para elle me dizer that he may or might tell me.
378 Lesson 26.
69. Thema.
On the Education of Children.
There will be no lack of those who will laugh on hearing
speak of education of a child only three or four years old.
Nothing, however, (is) more serious and necessary than to
understand how to profit by the sincerity of this age, which
does not yet know how to lie, in order to recognise the future
man in the child.
It offers the best opportunity for improving all good
qualities of character — yea, even to make the best of its
defects, to change them into virtues, without twisting the will
or wronging the individuality. From the infant-school, where
the mother had placed the child, because (see § 147), it
was impossible to have it at home from its third (tr. : since
the third) year, it passes over to attend the public schools.
It has its compendiums which speak {a with inf.) to it of things
that it had not the slightest idea of. Each step is a diffi-
culty (see § 147) to be vanquished ; each matter a novelty the
meaning of which the teacher, amongst so many pupils requir-
ing his attention, has had no time to explain to it. With
tears in its eyes and the book in its hands, the child will
seek her whom it loves best, that she may (see § 147) ex-
plain to it what it cannot understand. And the poor mother
will not be able to help it, but will have to confess her igno-
rance. How often when finding the child nodding over a book
which it does not understand, would not the mother have
the wish to take it out of its hands and by clear reading
and intelligent explanation teach it how to understand the
meaning! But the "poor mother" cannot do so (fut.), because
she also does not know. And from day to day the conviction
of its mother's inferiority will take root in the child's mind
in the same measure as it acquires (see § 148, 2) knowledge
and develops its intelligence.
(Anna de Castro Osorio: As nttdheres portuguesas).
60. Leitura e versao.
A ^ignordncia* do povo portugues.
Ninguem de boa-f^ contesta ser o povo portugufis igno-
rante. Todavia nao devemos exaggerar as consequfincias so-
ciaes d'este facto, mfismo porque nao acredite o senhor F. que
o pOvo francos saiba chlmica, o povo inglfis resolva equacjoes
e 0 povo allemao discorra sobre metaphysica. Se o cuida,'
illude-se completamente ; e de saber ler e escrever, e certo
que esse 6 meio caminho andado para o p6vo adquirir a ver-
The Infinitive. 379
dade, mas e tambem meio caminho andado para a turba se
imbuir de quanta mentirola e de quanta prot^rvia goza do
hoje commum privilegio da letra redonda. A ignorancia e
mal, mas a meia-sci6ncia e peor; e, nas condi^oes genericas so-
ciaes actuaes, nunca o povo pode attingir a plenitude do saber.
NSo tern tempo para estudar, nem vagar nem disposi^ao nas
horas livres que Ihe restam, desde que sa(h)e moido do seu
trabalho exhaustivo. — Assim, f6r9a Ihe 6 recorrer aos e con-
fiar nos profissionaes ; confiar nos lettrados, nos publicistas e
nos politicos ... A independencia do espirito seguira tambem
08 trdmites de sens progressos. Conv^m nao desatender ao
facto significativo de que em Portugal o registo civil tem sido
adoptado de prefer^ncia pelo proletariado fabril, e 6 de notar
o avance civilisatorio da nossa gente nas artes e nas indus-
trias . . , Por o. facto de o pOvo estar desconfiado, nao se
segue que elle seja insusceptivel de enthusiasmo . . . Por-
tanto, resumindo, nao me pareceram procedentes aquellas accu-
sa^oes verberadas contra o povo portugties pelo sr. F., o qual
se mostrou desgostoso a ponto de dizer, alto e bom som, que,
emquanto uns nascem para ser ricos e outros para ser sdbios,
elle nasc6ra para levar pancada e dar pouca.
(Bruno: Os modernos publicistas portugufises.)
Twenty-seventh Lesson.
The Infinitive (continued).
The Dependent Infinitive (continued).
B. With the preceding preposition de the infinitive
is employed:
§ 148. 1. After substantives to which it is a com-
plement (see § 125).
2. After many verbs of which it forms the com-
plement, such as:
acdbar to finish, having just comegar, principiar to begin
done deixar to forbear
accusar to accuse desculpar-se to excuse
acertar to hit encarregar(-se) to take upon
admirar-se to wonder oneself
advertir to inform esquecerse to forget
affligir-se to grieve excusar-se to withdraw
cUegrar-se to rejoice fugir (de or a) to fly from
cessar to cease gabar-se to boast
880 Lesson 27.
gostar to like provir to come from
haver to be obliged parar to stop
impedir to hinder qudxar-se to complain of
lembrar-se to remember ter de to be obliged
pedir to ask trata-ae the question is
prometer to promise vangloriar-se to boast.
3. After adjectives, also followed by the genitive,
such as:
dvido eager digno worthy
cansado tired difficil difficult
capais capable fdcil easy
certo sure impaciente impatient
cidso, ciumento jealous insacidvel insatiable
contente satisfied raro rare
descontente dissatisfied susceptivel susceptible.,
desejdso desirous
N.B. 1. — Some adjectives, expressing cause or design, may
be followed by the infinitive preceded by por; — e.g.: impa-
ciente, (des)contente, causado por . . .
N.B. 2. — Some infinitives preceded by demay be employed
in the meaning of an adjective ending by -vel; — e.g.: Pare-
dam menos de temer (= temivel), E'de presumir (= presu-
mivel). Foi acgao muito de louvar (= louvdvel).
N.B. 3.— Certain adjectives (as /Jici?, diificil, raro), when
adverbially employed, are followed by the infinitive preceded
by de, the substantive determined by the adjective being the
object of the infinitive;— e.g.:
Enigmas difficeis de decifrar (= de serem dedfrados)
riddles difficult to be guessed.
Compare, however: com esta natureza e fdcil crearem-se
OS poHas — here fdcil is a predicate.
N.B. 4.— In some cases the infinitive thus employed is
still followed by a complement: sao fructos de enlevar olhos
fruits to gladden the eyes.
Eram lindas de fazer inveja they were so beautiful as
to cause envy.
4. In clauses of circumstance after certain pre-
positions coujunctionally employed:
alSm de besides antes de before
afim de that a ponto de so that
d fdrga de with much apesar de in spite of
The Infinitive. 381
depois de after perto de near to
em vez de instead of por falta de by want of
longe de far from sob condigao de on condition
tliat.
Cotno 0 sr. Theophilo Braga alem de haver classificado
em generos poeticos as composigoes incluidas no Campo
de Flores — as classificou tamhem por epocas chro-
noUyicas . . .
5. After e— e.g.:
J^ de crer (advertir, mencionar etc.^ que . . .
61. Thema.
Dear Friend,—
Weary of travelling, I have just come back to my Penates
(recolher a Penates), dissatisfied with myself for having stayed
away for so many months that I ought to have been more
profitably employed. Yet such is our nature. We pine for
the opportunity to scamper through the world, with an in-
satiable appetite for seeking excitements we feel to be lacking
in the cramped surroundings of our home. And we go to
find— what? A climate that does not agree (dizer) with
our nervous system, nor with our northern customs; a bed
fit only to break oar bones, after having tired them by con-
tinual walking; people as indifferent to our presence as we are
insensible to their company; a hotel room destitute of every-
thing that hitherto seemed impossible to be done without. Only
in our home have we the opportunity of enjoying the calm
and the happiness that we vainly seek away from its doors.
But you will be surprised, dear friend, to hear thus
speak a man who, although having already finished his thirty-
seventh year, yet remains a bachelor. I know, of course,
that you consider me a theorist whose theories are all the
more difficult to understand, the longer he is in bringing
about their realisation. But I am determined to go on
theorising. It has occurred to me to invite you, my good
friend, to come here and stay some time with me, instead of
going to Italy. Also I hope you will bring your family. We
shall pass a couple of weeks so agreeably that they will com-
pensate me for all the vicissitudes of my travels, and I am
confident that you will have no cause to regret having ac-
cepted my invitation. Don't delay in letting me know that
you will come, and at the same time tell me the day and
hour I may expect you. I am longing to see you here.
Please remember me to your family.
Your sincere friend,
Henry.
382 Lesson 28.
62. Leitnra e versao.
A respiragao.
0 horaem precisa respirar para viver.
Vamos estudar no seguinte as vias da respiragao.
Todo 0 sangue do corpo, depois de circular por este,
volta pelas veias ao cora^ao, donde torna a partir, saindo do
coraQao pelas art^rias. No sen giro pelo corpo, o sangue vae
deixando por este a sua substancia. A substancia e dada ao
sangue pelos alimentos e tanabem pelo ar. 0 ar entra pela
b6ca e pelo nariz e vae aos pulmoes. 0 sangue, depois de
percorrer o c6rpo do homem, e de deixar n'este a sua sub-
stancia, passa pelos pulmoes onde recebe mais ar. 0 ar que
ahi recebe torna a dar ao sangue substancia, para este a es-
palhar outra vez por todas as partes do nosso organismo.
0 sangue quando chega aos pulmoes vae quasi escuro.
Quando sae dos pulmoes, depois de ser ahi bafejado pelo ar,
torna a ser vermelho-claro, isto ^, torna a carregar-se de sub-
stancia para ir espalhar pelo corpo. 0 sangue nao para de
circular. Se parasse, o homem morria. Como 6 o cora9ao que
faz andar o sangue dentro dos canaes, se o cora9ao deixasse de
bater, o sangue deixava de andar, e sobrevinha a morte.
0 ar, depois de entrar pela boca e pelo nariz, vae em seguida
passar para o tubo da garganta chamado larynge; e como este
tubo 6 continuado por outro chamado trachea, o ar segue pela
trachea e chega aos pulmoes. Como os pulmoes sao dois, a
trachea divide-se na raiz da garganta em dois ramos, cada um
dos quaes vae dar a seu pulmao. Esses dois ramos em que
a trachea se reparte, chamam-se bronchios, e estes penetram
pelos pulmoes : — penetrando, o ar que vae dentro d'elles, en-
contra-se com o sangue nos pulmoes e a^i o bafeja. Bafejado,
0 sangue torna a ficar vermelho, porque o ar transmittiu-lhe
parte dos sens elementos, os quaes elle vae em seguida espa-
lhar pelo corpo, para o medrar e dar-lhe vida.
(Trindade Coelho: Terceiro Livro de Leitura.)
Twenty-eighth Lesson.
The Infinitive (continued).
The Dependent Inflnitiye (continued).
C. With the preceding preposition a.
§ 149. The infinitive preceded by a expresses:
1. When following a verb, the manner or some
circumstance of its action:
The Infinitive. 388
Viemos a correr we came running.
Diss^ isso a rir he said so laughing.
Pediu-m'o a chorar he asked me crying for it.
Deteve-se a examinar um q%iadro he stopped to examine
a picture.
Encontrei-a a dormir I found her asleep.
2. When following a substantive, a design, the
object of which is the same substantive — e.g.:
Havia grandes difficuldades a veneer there were great
difficulties to be overcome.
Ha muitas pequenas industrias caseiras a cultivar e a
fazer resurgir no nosso pais there are a great many
small home-made industries in our country to be
cultivated and revived.
N.B.— Sometimes the infinitive joined by a or de to a
verb is equivalent to a verbal adjective and must be render-
ed by the past participle:
Uma occasiuo a ndo perder an occasion not to be lost.
0 caminho a trilhar the way to be taken.
E'uma fonte de receita muito de aproveitar it is a source
of income very much to be profited by.
3. In abbreviated clauses the infinitive preceded by
a serves to express an admission or condition:
A ser isto verdade (= se isto fosse porventura verdade)
ndo tornariamos a falar-lhe. — A acreditd-lo teria
havido uma enchente.
4. The infinitive is preceded by a after the following
verbs :
animar-se a chegar a ser . . .
apparelhar-se a (or para) tornar a fazer
anticipar-se a atrever-se a
estimular-se a preparar-se a
excitar-se a dbalangdr-se a
principiar o* langar-se a
comegar a see (§ 148, 2) obrigar a
appressar-se a aventurar-se a
tardar a or em metter-se a
continuar a por-se a
habilitar a resolver-se a
aprender a decidir-se a
entrar a determinar-se a
habituar a annuir a
^ But, principiar or comegar par (dizer) to begin by (saying).
384 Lesson 28.
concorrer a ajudar a
cooperar a entreter-se a
ensinar a attender-se a
autorisar a convidar a
€tccostumar-se a vir a
costumar a levar a
€onde(m)nar a arrojar a
comegar a
as well as after all those which may be followed instead
by an abstract noun preceded by a— e.g.:
Se continuasses (nao tar dosses, prindpiasses, entr asses,
te appressasses, tornasses, te abalangasses) a estudar ;
chegarias a ser insiruido. AbaJangou-se a luctar (= d
lucta) ; resolveram-se a partir (d partida). Quern dd
0 seu antes de morrer, apparelha-se a hem soffrer.
5. The infinitive preceded by a follows the verbs
of movement:
Corri a salvo-lo I hurried to save him.
Arrojou-se a deter o cavdllo he rushed to stop the horse.
IJ.B. — Cf. the verbs ir and vir which, being employed
as auxiliary verbs of the periphrastical form, may be followed
by the gerund instead (see § 96 and § 142 : use of these
verbs with the pure infinitive).
6. The infinitive preceded by a after the verbs
estar and andar, equally auxiliary verbs of the peri-
phrastical conjugation, as well as iicar^ passar, etc. in-
dicates essentially manner or duration and may be
supphed by the gerund (see § 151):
Ando a estudar or ando estudando.
Estas coisas ficam a pertencer or ficam pertencendo ao
seu foro intimo.
7. The infinitive preceded by a follows the verbs
ensinar, autorisar, convidar, etc., being itself followed by
the direct object:
Ensinou o coo a faeer habilidades he taught the dog to
perform tricks.
Convidou-a a dangar he invited her to dance.
Autorisou-me a publicar as cartas he authorised me to
publish the letters.
8. In an analogous way the infinitive with a joins
the verb dar, expressing, however, an action practised
The Infinitive. 385
by the dative complement of dar; and the verb por,
expressing the action practised by the accusative com-
plement of por.
Dar a alguem vma coisa a provar (alguem is dative
complement of dar and subject of provar).
Por OS fUhos a estudar (os filhos is accusative comple-
ment of por and subject of estudar).
§ 149. The infinitive may not only be preceded
by a or de^ but by any other preposition (em, par, para,
com^ sem, antes de, depots de, apesar de, nao obstante
etc.), having the same meaning as abstract nouns,
governed by these prepositions — e.g.:
Beconsiderou depots de ter falado aos paes e antes de se
comprometer . . .
He changed his mind after having spoken to his parents
and before engaging himself.
Entrei sem me verem I entered without being seen.
Pedi-lhe para me acompanhar I asked him to accom-
pany me.
Ella estava aborrecida por nao saber como (or em que)
empregar o tempo.
She felt bored^ as she did not know how to spend her time.
Beixdmo-nos ficar por jd ndo haver tempo de alcangar
0 comboio.
We stayed because there was not time to catch the
train.
Com ser velho ndo deixa de sentir com a gente moga.
Though he be old, he is able to feel with young people.
Andamos (or estdmos) mortos por ir para fdra.
We are dying to go abroad.
§ 150. After the verbs consistir, insistir, perseverar,
persistir, teimar, porfiar, hesitar, tardar, attentar, confiar
and those analogous the following infinitive is preceded
by em.
Persistem (or teimam) em resistir they persist in resisting.
Hesitei em confiar n'elle I hesitated to trust him.
§ 151. The infinitive is employed for the English
gerund and to shorten circumstantial clauses:
(a) The verbs perdoar and agradecer are followed
by the personal infinitive without preposition, and not
by a dependent clause with que:
Portuguese Couveraation-Grammar. 26
386 Lesson 28.
PerdooU'lhes o haver em-no offendido he pardoned them
their having offended him.
Agradecerem-nos o te-los protegido they thanked us for
(our) having protected them.
N.B.— The same is to-be said of the impersonal verb
haver ]~Q.g.:
Ndo ha (= ndo e possivel) vdLer-lhe there is no ex-
celling him.
(b) The subject being the same in the principal
and the dependent clause:
instead of a personal form
with the conjunctions:
afim de que
para que
sent que
antes que
depois que
de modo (fdrma, maneira) que
por que
the infinitive is employed
after :
afim de
para
sent
antes de
depois de
de modo (fdrma, maneira) a
por.
N.B.— So it would be wrong to say: Cultivar a terra
de maneira a produsir, as terra in the first clause is the
complement : cultivar a terra de maneira que produza would be
right.
§ 152. Instead of a dependent clause with que
the personal infinitive without preposition may be
employed after those transitive verbs expressing ad-
mission, permission, suffering and those of opposite
meaning, such as : conceder, permit(t)ir, adm,it(t)ir, prohibir,
sof(f)rer, tolerar etc.:
Frohibiu entrarem os navios de noite (instead of: pro-
hibiu que os navios entrassem he prohibited the ships
coming in at night.
63. Thema.
Women as Silkworm-breeders in Portugal.
If at some not very distant date the industry of silk
manufacture in Portugal should happen to be revived, it will
be due to the initiative of Mrs. Anna de Castro Osdrio, the
excellent writer, who is always eager to see her country
prosperous: Her idea is at the same time to provide working
women with better facilities for gaining a livelihood, an object
which the promoter of this industry never fails to keep in mind
Construction. 387
This lady has recently explained to the president and
other aldermen of the municipal council of Setiibal how she
was led to conceive the idea referred to, and has requested
the assistance and protection of the council. She does not
deny that there are some difficulties, but she affirms that the
obstacles are not great, and hopes to overcome them with the
aid of the authorities.
She is of opinion that the industry of the sericulture
(i.e. of the breeding and selection of silk-worms) is one that
the women of Portugal must not allow to die out. With
five weeks' work of so slight a nature that it is rather a
pleasant distraction than an irksome task, each housewife or
daughter could realise a profit which to the one would provide
assistance towards the house -rent, and to the other additional
funds for increasing the stock of clothing. To the young
ladies this latter is generally a matter of great importance;
and with some reason, indeed, for their greatest concern is
how to make themselves appear most beautiful and attractive.
The beauty of women is a tribute to Art and Nature which
a cultured people should not allow to depreciate.
64. Leitura e versao.
A mulher portuguesa como seri(Gi)cuU6ra.
Se esta indiistria se desenvolver em Setiibal, como 6 de
esperar, como indiistria caseira que deve ser, ali mesmo sera
montado um filatorio dos que o governo vae montar official-
men te. N'esse filatorio terao trabalho algumas mulheres, o
que vem a ser ainda uma grande vantagem, visto as fabricas
de sardinha em que andam a trabalhar, sofFrerem ja muitas
crises de falta de peixe e as operarias sentirem a falta de
trabalho, que 6 a mais dolorosa das faltas. Todos aquelles
que desejarem experimentar esta indiistria, deverao dirigir-se
a presidente da Liga Eepublicana das Mulheres Portugu6sas,
a acima mencionada escriptora e propagandista D. Anna de
Castro Osorio; porque a iniciativa pertence a esta benemerita
associa9ao que por todo o pais esta levantando (or a levantar)
0 espirito da mulher portugu6sa e fazendo-a entrar no caminho
do dever, apontando-lhe o trabalho como a linica fonte da
independencia e do brio individual.
Do norte ao sul do pais muitas socias da Liga se estao
preparando (m' a preparar) para iniciarem nas suas casas esta
indiistria. 0 que e necessario e saber cada uma a por^ao de
sirgo que podo criar para se fazer a dictribui9ao das f6lhas
das amoreiras cedidas pela Camara e tomarem os criadores as
respcnsabilidades exigidas pelas esta^oes officiaes, sendo a
25»
388 Lesson 29.
principal a de se compromet(t)erem a destruir toda a semente
que nao seja seleccionada, isto e : a escolhida e fornecida pela
esta^ao official. 0 intelligente professor da Escola Liberal de
Setubal de boa vontade se presta a fazer na escola uma cri-
a9ao de experiencia, cujo product© revertera a favor da m6sma,
que tanto necessita de numerario para se poder sustentar e
poder continuar a exercer a sua missao.
Twenty-ninth Lesson.
Construction. Collocagao.
§ 153. The simplest construction is: beginning by
the subject and what relates thereto; then the predi-
cate and its extensions; the determinative follows the
word it determines (e.g.: desejoso de gloria); the ac-
cusative complement generally precedes the dative.
Interrogative clauses begin with the interrogative
word — i.e., the thing asked for— and what pertains to
it; the dependent clauses by the conjunction or a rela-
tive pronoun — e.g.:
Sdo altas as drvores que ha no jar dim? (The height
of the trees is asked for.)
§ 154. These general rules have numerous ex-
ceptions, based on the harmony of the speech or the
emphasis bestowed on one or the other part of it. In
the preceding lessons these exceptions, as well as those
rules of construction inseparable from the subject spoken
of, have been mentioned.
It may still be noticed that an absolutely employed
participle precedes its noun. Ex.:
Arrancada uma batateira, o pe traz agar r ados vdrias
batatas.
If a potato-plant is pulled out, its root bears various
potatoes clinging to it.
Yet when the participle is preceded by em, the
subject may be placed before:
Em a mina rebentando or em rebentando a mina.
BemarJc. — Though the gerund generally precedes the
nouU; it may in elevated speech also be placed behind;— e.g.:
A revoluQoo abriu as portas da histdria, ap(p)elando para
0 povOf fechou-as, para o povo ap(p)elando.
Construction. 389
65. Thema.
Preparation of Olive-oil.
Olive-oil is extracted from the olive, which is the fruit
of the olive-tree. In some regions the olive is beaten down
with a pole (= varejar); in others, it is picked by hand.
After having been picked, the olive goes to the olive-pit,
where it remains for some time. While it is still in the pit,
the olive secretes (== escorrer) a watery fluid (uma agtta-
dilha), dark and bitter, called olive-water (alpixe). From the
pit the olive is taken to the olive -crushing mill, which is a
sort of round stone tank in which one, two or three vertical
wheels, equally of stone, are moving, generally dragged by
an ox.
In the crushing-mill the olive is crushed. The pulp as well
as the stone of the olive is completely ground (— desfazer)
forming a dark paste. On the surface of this paste, when still
in the mill, a great quantity of oil appears. This oil, con-
stituting the first virgin oil, may be taken off (= recolher-se).
From the mill, the paste is taken in wooden porringers
to the olive-press (lar or lastro de lagar). In the press the
paste is put into baskets (= ceira), disposed one above the
other. Upon the topmost basket are placed some blocks
(= madeiro) and then is lowered (= fazer haixar) upon the
latter the so-called cross-bar of the press (viga do lagar) ,
which descends by means of an axle-tree in a spiral line or
in form of a screw (= fuss). This screw of the olive-press
ends in its lower extremity by a big stone weight. In pro-
portion to its coming down, the cross-bar presses (periphra-
stical form) upon the blocks which cover the baskets and
squeezes the paste contained in them*.
66. Leitnra e versao.
Assim espremida, a massa larga um liquido. Este liquido
^ ainda azeite virgem que, seguindo por umg, calha ou sulco
aberto no lar, vae cair dentro de uma talha de pedra. Ao
lado d'esta talha ha outra tambem de pedra, e as duas sSo
ligadas superiormente por um sulco ou r6go; mas o azeite
virgem fica todo na talha que esta em communica9ao directa
com o lar. Em seguida, faz-se elevar a viga do lagar, e as
ceirag ficam d'este modo desapertadas. Desapertadas as
ceiras, a massa de cada uma ^ caldeada, isto 6, intimamente
misturada com agua a f^ver. Caldeadas todas as ceiras, de
novo tornam a ser espremidas como o fSram da primeira vez.
Espremidas, o liquido que ellas largam segue pela calha do
390 Lesson 29.
lar para a primeira talha, onde encontra o azeite virgem que
a massa escorreu quando foi apertada a primeira vez.
Com 0 azeite proveniente do segundo aperto das ceiras
vae misturada uma por9ao de agua, que e a agua que caldeou
a massa; e como o azeite vem sempre d tona da agua, o 11-
quido logo que cae na talha reparte-se em duas camadas: em
baixo a agua, a qual se chama alpixe ; e em cima ou a tona
do alpixe, o azeite. Entre o azeite e o alpixe ficam as borras
do azeite. —
As borras sao as fezes do azeite, e v5o-se formando na
primeira talha, entre o fundo do azeite e o cimo do alpixe.
A medida que o azeite se vae escoando para a segunda talha,
as borras vao subindo na primeira; e tomariam para a se-
gunda, se 0 lagareiro nao tivesse o cuidado de as fazer depo-
sitary isto e, de as fazer baixar ao fundo da primeira talha. —
Depois de bem assentes, as borras ainda apresentam a super-
ficie uma certa quantidade de azeite, embora impure. Este
^zeite das borras e aproveitado: serve para a candeia; para
untar os eixos dos carros; e para varios fins industriaes: fa-
brico de sabao etc.
Depois de completamente espremidas as ceiras, o que fica
dentro 6 o baga^o. 0 baga^o 6 o residue da pelle e do ca-
roQO das azeitonas. 0 baga^o da azeitona serve para alimen-
ta(jao dos porcos e das gallinhas, e ainda de combustivel. No
proprio lagar, a dgua para caldear a massa 6 tambem aque-
cida com lume de bagago. Este arde muito bem per ser oleoso.
Para todas estas opera9oes do fabrico do azeite ha hoje mecha-
nismos muito perfeitos.
891
Supplement,
Idioms.
Sou ingles. F« E<^ e por-
Sou, sim, senhor. Para um
estrangeiro F" E*^ falla ra-
zoavelmente o portugues.
Como se chama isso? Como
se diz , . .?
Isso ndo se pdde; isso ndo
p6de ser!
Entdo que tem? Ndo estd horn?
Isso passa; ndo S nada.
Ndo passou hem a noite ? Olhe,
que ndo tem hoa ca?'a.
Passei a noite em claro.
Ndo se dd hem aqui? Estra-
nha 0 clima?
Ndo estranho, ndo, senhor. Bou-
rne hem aqui.
E gosta de cd estar ?
Gosto muito. Estou mdrto por
vir tdda a cidade, tddo o pais.
Onde e a pardgem mais prdxi-
ma do carro electrico?
Qual e 0 caminho mais curto
para Id?
Ndo ha pardgem mais perto ?
Julgava que houvesse uma im-
mediata ao hotel.
I am English. Are you a
Portuguese ?
Yes. For a foreigner you speak
Portuguese rather well.
What is this called ? How do
you say . . . ?
That can't be (done)!
What's the matter with you?
Aren't you well?
It will pass over ; it's nothing.
Didn't you sleep well? You
do not look well, indeed.
I passed the night awake.
Don't you feel well here?
Does not the climate agree
with you?
It is not that. Indeed, the
climate agrees with me.
And do you like to stay here ?
I do indeed. I am dying to
see the whole town, the
whole country.
Where is. the next stopping-
place of the electric car?
Which is the nearest way
to it?
Is there no stopping-place
nearer ?
I thought there was one
next to the hotel.
Supplement.
AU logo! ate breve! ate d se-
mana (que vem) ! ate d proxi-
ma sexta-feira!
Ndo faltava nada que eu per-
desse o combdio.
Deixe ver isso!
Jd estd de caminho.
Estou com pressa.'
Jd deram onze horas.
Sao horas do correio.
0 co7nb6io jd nao tarda; estd
a chegar.
Sa(h)iu-lhe hem a empreza ?
Com licenga! A vontade! •
Nao faca cerimonia!
Eu tinha vergonha de Ihe fallar.
Nao tem troco ?
Nao ha remedio.
Vamos embora!
Isso e conforme! Depende!
Estd bem? Que Ihe parece?
Em que ficdmos?
Segundo o meu parecer . . .
Ha alguem que procura o
senhor.
Quern me procura ?
Diga que nao estou.
Espere ahi! Mande entrar
para a sala.
Nao fallemos mats nHsso!
Jd folia menos mal.
Estou constipado. \
Apanhei uma constipagdo. f
Logo que eu me apanhar no
campo . . .
Em que Ihe posso eu ser agra-
ddvel ?
Faga favor de se servir do meu
limilado prhtimo,
Tudo quando puder fazer^ serd
com todo 0 gosto.
Good-bye for the present I
Until very soon! Until next
week! Until next Friday!
I was very near losing the
train.
Let me see that.
He is already on the way.
I am in a hurry.
It has already struck eleven.
It is post-time.
The train must be here di-
rectly.
Did you succeed in your en-
terprise ?
With your leave ! Be pleased !
Don't make any ceremony!
I was shy to speak to him.
Have you any change ?
There is nothing to be done.
Let us go away!
That's all according! That
depends !
Is it well so? What do you.
think of it?
Where did we stop? What
did we agree upon?
According to my opinion . , .
There is somebody calling on
you.
Who is. calling?
Tell him that I am not at
home.
Just wait! Show him into
the drawing-room!
Don't let us speak any more
of that!
You speak already rather well.
I have caught a cold.
As soon as I am in the coun-
try.
In what may I be agreeable to
you?
Please dispose of ray modest
services.
All I can do will be done with
the greatest pleasure.
Some Portuguese Proverbs.
Some Portuguese Proverbs equivalent to
English.
Antes so que mal acompanhado.
Com taes me acho; tal me fa^o.
Chega-te aos hons, serds um
delles: chega-te aos maus,
serds peor do que elles.
Duro com dura, ndo faz horn
muro.
Dd Deus 0 frio conforme a
roupa.
Quem primeiro anda, primeiro
apanha.
Hora a hora, Deus melhora.\
Atrds de tempo, tempo rem. /
Quem porfia mata caga.
A cavallo dado ndo se the olha
0 dente.
0 olho do amo engorda o ca-
vallo.
Faze-me as harhas, far-te-hei
o cahelo.
Como canta o db(b)ade, assim
responde o sachristdo.
De noite d candeia a hurra
parece donzella.
Casa rouhada — trancas d
porta,
Tantas vezes vae o cdo ao moi-
nho, que Id Ihe fica o fou-
cinho.
Malhar no ferro emquanto
estd quenie.
Qiicmdo ha vento, molha-se a
vela.
Emquanto o pdu vae e vem,
folgam as costas.
Contenta-te, gate, que farta o
farto.
Filho de peixe sabe nadar.
Better alone than in bad
company.
Birds of a feather flow to-
gether.
Tell me whom you associate
with and I will tell you
who you are.
Hard with hard never made
any good wall.
Aptness comes with the office.
First come, first served.
After rain comes sunshine.
Patience overcomes all things.
Look not a gift horse in the
mouth.
The master's eye makes the
horse fat {or: the cattle
thrive^.
One good turn deserves an-
other.
The young pigs grunt like th©
old sow.
When candles are out, all cats
are grey.
To lock the stable-door when
the horse is stolen.
The pitcher goes so often to
the well that it comes home
broken at last.
To strike the iron while it is
hot.
To make hay while the sun
shines.
When the cat is away, the
mice will play.
Great wealth, great weariness.
What is bred in the bone will
come out in the flesh.
894
Supplement.
Pintura e peleja de longe se
vija.
Filho is, pae serds, assim como
fizeres, assim achards.
Ndo ha dgua mats perigosa
que a que ndo soa.
Santos de casa ndo fazem mi-
lagres.
Prata e o horn fallar; oiro i
0 bom calar.
0 seguro morreu de velho.
Mais vale um *toma* que dois
<^te dareiy>.
Quern ndo vae d gu&ra, ndo
morre n'ella.
Nem todo o matto i ourSgdos.)
Nem tudo o que luz e oiro. \
Nem tddo o hranco S farinha]
Nem zomhando, nem deveras,
com teu amo jogues as peras.
Picture and battle to be seen
from afar.
Do unto others as you would
be done by.
Still waters run deep.
A prophet is not without ho-
nour, save in his own coun-
try and in his own house.
Speech is silvern, silence is
golden.
Prevention is better then cure.
A bird in the hand is worth
two in the bush.
Who plays at bowls must be
prepared for rubbers.
All is not gold that glitters.
Those who eat cherries with
great persons ^will have
their eyes squirted out with
the stones.
Short Notes.
1.
Aos Ex°io3 grg. Conselheiro A. de Lima e Ex^a- Esposa,
D. Maria Jose Moreira da Silva
e 0 Coronel Nogueira da Silva e Mattos
apresentam os seus cumprimentos, pedindo a honra da sua
companhia para um copo de agua que, na occasi5o do casa-
mento de sua filha D. Beatriz com o ex™® Sr. capitao Antonio
de Lemos e depois da ceremonia, se offerece na 4* feira, 15 do
corrente, as 2 hs. da tarde na ma dos Bem-casados No. 3.
Lisb6a, casa de V^s Ex^, 8 de maio. •
2. Resposta
(on a visiting-card).
A Ex™a Sr» D* Maria Jos6 Moreira da SilVa e 111™° e
Ex™o. Sr. Coronel N. da Silva e Mattos, agradecendo em sen
nome e no de sen marido a insigne honra do convite de
Short Notes. 395
D. Eugenia de Lima
apressa-se em partipar-lhes que Ihes dara a maior satisfa9ao
poder assistir ao auspiciOso enlace da sua Ex™* Filha.
3. Outra resposta.
Cumprimentando a Ex™o Sr. Coronel Nogueira da Silva e
Sua Ex°i* Esposa, os Condes de Valfldr teem o maximo pesar
de nao poderem assistir a tao fausta festividade, visto estarem
de lute recente por uma parenta sua muito chegada. Fa-
zendo os mais sinceros votos pela felicidade dos Noivos e pe-
dindo a V^s Ex^^ acceitem d6sde ja os seus cordiaes parabens,
pedem desculpa da sua nao-comparftneia.
4.
Men illustre Amigo:
Por este pe^o lien^a para Ihe apresentar o meu particular
amigo, Dr. Fulano, exi'mio escriptor e deputado da na9ao, cujo
noma nao sera de todo desconhecido de V* Ex*. Nao precise
dizer que as atten96es que a sua generosidade dispensar ao Dr. F.
tomar-me-hao ainda mais seu devedor. Nunca poderei pagar
nem mfismo agradecfir bastante, tantos e tao immerecidos fa-
vores, dos quaes ainda assim me sinto digno pela muito dedi-
cagao que Ihe consagro e na convic9ao que o melhor premio da
amizade e: acceitar-lhe as provas com a mfisma naturalidade
como sao dadas.
5.
Meu bom Amigo,
Caso 0 meu Amigo disponha de algum memento vago
^manha entre uma e as quatro horas, pe90 o insigne favor de vir
falar-me a esta sua casa. Trata-se d'um assumpto urgente e que
merecerd todo o seu interesse.
6.
Ex™o Senhor e Amigo:
Desconsolado de so h6je receber o seu bilh6te d'ante-
*liontem, por ter estado ausente, por este pe90 desculpa de nao
ter apparecido ahi, e licen9a de poder falar-lhe hoje a qualquer
bora que V' Ex* se digne determinar e que mais Ihe convier.
Supplement.
Poetry to be learnt by heart.
Popular Stanzas of Four Yerses.
«Amar e ser amado, que ventura!
Nao amar, sendo amado, e um triste horror:
Mas na vida ha uma noite mais escura,
E amar alguem que nao nos tenha am6r!>
(Gon^alves Crespo.)
Ja nao tenho corapao,
Que m'o tiraram do peito;
No logar onde elle estava
Nasceu um amor-perfeito.
Tu dizes que Bao tens cruz
Para resar o rosario;
Casa-te, . minha menina,
E teras cruz e calvario.
0 dia tern duas horas,
Duas horas, nao tern mais:
Uma 6 quando vos vejo,
Outra, quando me lembraes.
Os teus olhos sao escuros .
Como a noite mais cerrada;
Mas apesar de tao nfigros,
Sem elles nao vejo nada.
A folhinda do salgueiro
E a primeira novidade;
Quem madraga nao alcan9a.
Que fara quem se ergue tarde ?
Ninguem descubra o Seu peito
A nenhama amiga sua;
Quem o seu peito descobre
Seu segredo deita a rua.
Quem 6 pobre, sempre e pobre
Quem 6 pobre nada tern;
Quem § rico, sempre 6 nobre,
E as v6zes nSo 6 ninguem.
A qui tens meu cora^ao,
Fechadinho com tres chaves;
Abre-o, mette-te 14 dentro
Que tu sosinha bem cabes.
Eu nao quero nem brincando
Dizer adeus a ninguem:
Quem vae^ leva saudades,
Quem fica, saudades tem.
Amorsinho da minh'alma,
Ensina-me a tua arte:
Ensina-me a aborrecer-te,
Que eu nao sei senao amar-te.
Se OS meus olhos te incommo-
dam,
Quando os v^s na tua frente,
Manda entao que m'os arran-
quem,
Para eu te amar cegamente.
Ando triste como a noite,
Nada me alegra o sentido;
Ninguem sabe o bem que perde ;
Senao depois de perdido.
Ai quem me d^ra ter mSe,
Inda que fosse uma silval
Inda que ella me arranhasse,
Sempre eu era a sua filha.
Ja morreu a minha mae,
Ja la vae minha alegria;
Caixinha dos meus segredos,
Espelho donde me eu via.
Vae-te, carta venturosa,
Ver um bem que Deus me deu;
Antes tu, carta, ficaras,
No ten logar fora eu.
Carta, vae onde te eu mando.
Que uns lindos olhos vaes ver;
Carta, p6e-te de joelhos,
Quando te forem a ler.
Poems of Modern Literature.
397
Aqui estou a tua porta,
Como 0 feixinho da lenha,
A espera da resposta
Que dos teus olhos me venha.
0 amor e o respeito
Nao fazem boa uniao;
Quando amor diz que sim,
Diz o respeito que nao.
Poems of Modern Literature.
0 corvo e a raposa.
E fama que estava o corvo
Sobre uma arvore pousado
E que no s6frego bico
Tinha um queijo atravessado
A taes palavras o corvo
Com louca, estranha afouteza
Por mostrar que e bom solfista,
Abre o bico e solta a pr6sa.
Pelo faro aquelle sitio
Veiu a raposa matreira,
A qual, pouco mais ou mfinos,
Lhe falou d'esta maneira:
Bons dias, meu Undo corvo,
Es gloria d'esta espessura:
Es outra ph^nix se acaso
Tens a voz como a figura.
Lan^a-lhe a mestra o gadanho
E diz: «Meu amigo, aprende
Como vive o lisongeiro
A custa de quem o attende.
Esta li(jao vale um queijo,
Tem d'estas para teu uso.»
Rosna entao comsigo o corvo
Envergonhado e confuso:
Velhaca! Deixou-me em branco,
Fui tolo em fiar-me n'ella.
Mas este logro me livra
De cahir n'outra esparrela.
(Socage.)
0 Sol e 0 Vento.
0 Vento desafiou
0 Sol, um certo dia,
Para v6rem dos dois
Qual mais poder teria.
E logo, n'um memento,
Sem mesmo ao repto esp'rar
pela resposta,
0 maluco do Vento
Com a sua maneira descom-
posta
Deitou-se a v6r se despojava
Da capa que trazia .
Um homem que passava.
Soprando rijo e agreste,
Na fiiria d'um sudoeste,
Tudo revolve e agita n'um es-
carceu . . .
— Logo a primeira rabanada
Vai-se ao homem, e leva-lhe
o chapeu.
E riu, e riu de gosto, a gar-
galhada,
Zombando do homenzi-
nho
Que seguiu sereno e descuidado
0 seu caminho.
898
Supplement.
Este, por^m, assim jd, avisado^
Acautelou-se:
Puxou a roupa a si, abotoou-se . .
Mesmo que — pondo tudo em
corrupio,
0 Vento iroso, por ali abaixo —
Estava frio,
Urn frio bd diachol
Como 6 de calcular,
— Nao de espantar —
Contrariado o Vento exasperou-
se,
E n'uma fiiria tal
Que ja nao 6ra, Vento, antes
dir-se hia
Um vendavall
As rabanadas,
Aos empuxoes,
As sapatadas,
0 Sudoesteteimavaretumbante
Tirar a viva for9a a grossa capa
Ao triste viandante.
Mas quanto mais soprava
E esbravejava
0 Sudoeste insoffrido,
Mais o homem na capa se em-
brulhava,
B, 6 claro, at6 mais esta se
collava
Ao corpo do transeunte assim
batido.
0 Sol, do alto, que esta
scena via,
Ria de puro g6so, ria,
ria . . .
Nao porque a aposta, emfim,
o intereasasse
(Era bem mais que certo),
Mas uma li^aosinha dar quizesse
Ao Vento fiirio e esperto.
Por sua vez se foi ao bomen-
zinho
Da capa, e gravemente,
E sem mdus tratos
Nem espalhafatos,
Quasi amigavel, delicadamente,
Devagarfnho . . .
Dobrando a sua for9a apenas
de cal6r,
Mas pouco a pouco, lento e
lentamente . . .
0 homem d'ali a pouco se despia.
Quasi insensivelmente
Da capa que trazia,
Da sua capa rica,
— Por tal modo suava,
Em bica!
E concluiu, falando sentencioso
Para o Vento raivoso:
«Se mais for^a e poder que tu
eu tenho,
Nao sei . . .
Tu o diras!
Por mim, direi
Que faz
Muito mais do que a colera, a
paciencia.
Que mais vale a brandura que
a violencia*.
(Paulino de Oliveira.)
A cigarra e a formiga.
Como a cigarra o seu gosto
E levar a temporada
De junho, julho e agosto
N*uma cantiga pegada,
De inverno tambem se come
E ent^ rapa frio e fome . . .
Um inverno a infeliz
Chega-se d formiga e diz:
— Venho pedir-lhe o favor
De me emprestar mantimento,
Matar-me a necessidadel
Poems of Modern Literature.
399
E, em chegando a novidade*,
Fa 90 ate um juramento,
Pago-lhe, seja o que for!
— Mas, pergunta-lhe a formiga,
0 que fez durante 0 estio?
— Eu . . . cantar ao desafio.
— Ah! cantar? Pois, minha
amiga,
Quern leva 0 estio a cantar,
Leva 0 inverno a dan9ar.
(Joao de Deus.)
Bosas.
Trazeis-me rosas; d'onde as beis trazido,
Boa velhinda e minha boa amiga?
Rosas no inverno! permitti que 0 diga,
Sois feiticeira: d'onde as beis colhido?
Na primavera de mens annos^ olho,
Mas vejo abrolhos e nao vejo flores:
E vos colbeil-as, como as eu nao colbo . . .
Sois feiticeira — enfeiti9aes d'amores.
Enfeiti^aes que a formosura, cr6de,
Nao vem da face avelludada e bella;
A formosura vem so d'alma; 6 d'ella
Que brota a fonte que nos mata a s6de.
Vos sois velhinha, ja nao tendes cores
Que 0 rosto animem e que os olhos prendam,
Mas tendes prendas que 0 amor accendam,
Tendes ainda no inverno . . . fl6res. (Joao de Deus.)
Can-do das tres gotas de dgua.
Trfis irmas, tr6s gotas de agua e um passarinho bebeu-a;
que 0 infinito condensa,
sua mae, nuvem do c^u,
la d'aquella altura immensa
desprendeu :
vem uma e cae sobre a flor
que a mingua de agua morria,
e mal a gota sentia,
voltava-lhe o vi^o e a cor;
caiu outra ao p6 d'um ninho,
Mae,
mas a terceira, tombando
no mar, dizia chorando:
«Nestas ondas arrogantes
desapare90 mesquinha ...»
Responde a onda marinha :
« Ja sou maior que era de
antes. »
(Affonso Lopes- Vieira.)
Ella velava perto
Po filho que dormia,
E Candida sorria
Ao lyrio entreaberto.
Da lua um raio incerto
No quarto se perdia;
E a mae olhava 0 Dia
E a Luz do seu deserto.
No ber90 fluctuante
Moveu-se agora o infante
E acorda pranteando . . .
Nao ha quadro mais bello
Que a mae, solto 0 cabello,
0 filho acalentando!
(Gon9alves Crespo.)
The first fruits of the year.
400 Supplement.
Consulta.
Chamei em volta do men frio leito
As memorias melhores de outra idade,
Formas vagas, que ds noites^ com piedade,
Se inclinam, a espreitar, sobre o meu peito.
E disse-lhes: «No mundo immense e estreito
Valia a pena, acaso, em anciedade
Ter nascido? dizei-m'o com verdade,
Pobres memorias que eu ao seio •estreito ...»
Mas ellas p«rturbaram-se — coitadas!
E empalidecerem, contristadas,
Ainda a mais feliz, a mais serena . . .
E cada uma d'ellas, lentamente,
Com um sorriso intimo, pungente,
Me respondeu: — «Nao, nao valia a p^na».
(Anthero de Quental.)
Ao cahir da folha.
Quando cahir a folha e ta to tores
A ter com minha mae que ja morreu,
Se nao Ihe posso dar mais que flores, •
Leva Ihe beijos, abraqos^ — Que sei eu!
Diz-lhe que eu ainda sou como era d'antes
Assim sem esperauQas, sempre sem amores.
— Mens pobres olhos, sempre agonisantes,
Vao se mirrando mais — so pisam dores. —
Dize que os mens versos sao atormentados
Como so sabem rimar os desgra9ados, ^
Diz-lhe que em breve . . . NSo, mas deixa la, '
Podia a santa affligir-se. E agora,
Sempre sao maes — quando te fores embora^
Nunca Ihe contes o que vae por ca.
(Albino Forjaz de Sampayo.)
0 ccdenddrio.
E n'um instante a vida! . . . Dia a dia,
Desfolho 0 calendario com saudade.
A gdtta e gotta cde na eternidade
Esta por^ao de vida fagidia.
Poems of Modern Literature. 401
Assim caminha em breve romaria
0 prazo em que gastei a mocidade
E so me traz mais p6na cada dia,
Mais pranto, mais angiistia e mais edadel . . .
A manso e manso c tronco se desfolha
Do tempo que resume esta negrura
Onde se fazem brancos os cabellos . . .
E OS dias vao cabin do, folba a folba,
E embora todos feitos de amargura
Oh, quern pudesse ainda reviv6l-os!
(Conde do Casal Ribeiro.)
Bocage.
No seu corpo tao fragil quanta vida,
Cheia de luz, cheia de for(ja ingente!
Luz que cegava e que inda cega a gente . . .
For9a que a todos leva de vencida . . .
Foi-lhe a curta existencia uma comprida
Vida de lucta, e erabora o Amor florente
E a Gloria Ihe sorrisse ternamente,
Foi-lhe penosa estrada dolorida ...
Seu g^nio impetuoso de inspirado,
Que 0 fez tao grande e t5o inf'liz o fez,
Minou-lhe o d^bil corpo arrebatado.
Ramo florindo em fiammas muita vez,
Ramo que pela Morte desfolbado
Todo em perfume, em alma, se desfez.
(Paulino de Oliveira.)
Preguiga.
A pregui^a, inda de peito, Pregui^a foi conf6ssar-se;
Muito custou a criar! — «Fez exame de conscien-
Quasi que morreu de feme, cia?» —
Com preguiQa de mamar. — «Nao fiz, meu padre! mas
Preguica, ia crescidinha, . "^^^^"^
Qaando por seu p6 andava Amanha^ . . Tenha pacien-
Nao era andar! mais par'cia ^^^'^
Que toda se espreguivava . . . p^^^^;^^ aprendeu costnra,
PreguiQa foi a liQao: Mas, sempre que costurava,
Ler, escrever e contar? So para nao por dedal,
Deixava a memoria em casa, Sempre os sens dedos pi-
Oom preguiQa de a levar! cava.
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar. 20
402
Supplement.
A mSe ralhou a Pregui9a,
Porque se nao penteara;
Torna-lheella: — «Haquaiitos
dias
E que a mae nao lava a cara?»
Preguiija, morta de somno,
Quasi de somno morria;
So por nao fechar os olhos,
Quantas noites nao dormial
A Pregui9a abria a bocca,
Coisa em que ellaeramaiscerta:
Mas depois — p'ra a nao fe-
char —
Ficou sempre «bocca-aberta».
Pregui9a e o Desmazfilo
Juntarem-se em casamento:
Levando os dois, em bom dote,
Uma mao-cheia de vento.
A Pregui9a teve dois filhos:
Oh que santa gera9?io!
A mais velha, Dona Fome;
0 mais novo, Dom Ladrao.
Quando a Pregui9a morrer,
At6 0 monte maninho,
At6 fraguedos da serra
Darao rosas, pao, e vinho.
(Antonio Corr^a d'Oliveira.)
Ingratiddo.
Era uma vez um moleiro
Que estava no seirmoinho . . .
Come9ando seu caminho,
Vinha na serra Janeiro
Com longo acompanhamento
De sombras, de neve e vento,
Para honrar (se bem me lembro)
Desepedidas, bota-fora
Do velho e pobre Dezembro.
Inda estavam, — a tal hora!
Ao borralho da lareira,
Moleiro e mais a moleira,
Depois de bem consoados,
Bem fartos e regalados . . .
Que minguas, la no casal,
Fome ou s§de, nao havia:
Pois, segundo se dizia,
0 moleiro, como tal,
Mettia a mao na maquia . . .
Mas, n'isto, ouviram —
truz! — truz! —
Bater a porta . . .
— « Jesus !
Quem sera? . . . Quem e?!>> —
Eesponde,
Fora, uma voz arrastada:
— «Alguem que pede pousada,
E uns restos de lume aonde
Se possa ainda aquecer ...» —
Torna, soberbo, o moleiro:
— «Andar! andar, caminheirol
Esmola? . . . Nao pode ser!»
Diz a voz:
— «Nao me conheces,
De certo! Se conhecesses . . .
Sou 0 Anno Velho: Eu sou
Quem para ti foi tao bom
Que tudo 0 que te fartou
Por minha gra9a e meu dom
0 lograste, dia a dia:
Alvo pao que tu comeste;
Doce vinho que bebeste;
0 azeite que te alumia;
Sol que seccou tua lenha , . .
Pois ha ingrato no mundo
Que negue pao d'um segundo
A quem um anno o mante-
nha?!»
Volta 0 moleiro:
— 0 paspalho *
Do velho! Pois nao se atreve? . .
Faz* la a cama na neve,
Que ha de ser bom agasalho!
De que me eerves, agora
Que ja vaes de p^s a cova?
0 Anno Novo, sim! E nova
Amizade, nova vinha:
Poems of Modern Literature. 403
«E taleiga venerada Poe-se a choverl a chover!
De respeito e valimento, Come<ja o rio a crescer;
Pois me dara da farinha ... * — A crescer de tal feitio,
Que logo ao moinha, o rio
Ora, foi neste momento Levou o rodisio e a mo!
Que 0 Anno Novo chegou; E nao ficou aqui so
Vae, ouviu tado, e pensou: 0 castigo:
— «01ha 0 cora^ao ruim! Desde entao,
Alma damnada! 0 mofino! Tanto Ihe correu avesso
De aqui a um anno p'lo visto, Anno de tao mau com690 :
Fazia-me o mesmo a mim . . . Que no moinho (de noma
Espera! que eu ja te ensino: «Moinho da Ingratidao»)
Has de pagal-as!» — 0 moleiro soberbao
E nisto, Acabou, morrendo a fome . . .
(Antonio Corr§a d'Oliveira: Parabolas.)
A Ldgrima.
Manha de junho ardente. Uma encosta escalvada,
Seca, deserta e nua, a beira d'uma estrada.
Terra ingrata, onde a urza a custo desabrocha,
Bebendo o sol, comendo o p6, mordendo a rocha.
Sobre uma folha hostil d'uma figueira brava
Mendiga que se nutre a predegulho e lava,
A aurora desprendeu, compassiva e divina,
Uma lagrima etherea^ enorme e cristalina.
Lagrima tao ideal, t5o limpida que, ao vel-a,
De perto era um diamante e de longe uma estrella.
Passa um rei com o seu cortejo de espavento,
Elmos, lan9as, clarins, trinta pendoes ao vento.
No meu diadema, disse o rei, quedando o olhar,
Ha safiras sem conta e brilhantes sem par.
Ha rubins orientaes, sangrentos e doirados,
Como beijos d'amor a arder, cristalisados.
Ha perolas que sao gotas de magna immensa,
Que a lua cbora e verte e o mar gela e condensa.
Pois brilhantes, rubins e perolas de Ophir,
Tudo isso eu dou, e vem, 6 lagrima, fulgir
N'esta c'roa orgulhosa, olimpica, suprema,
Vendo o globo a mens pes do alto do teu diadema.
26*
404 Supplement.
E a lagrima celeste, ing^nua e luminosa,
Ouviu, sorriu, tremeu, e quedou silenciosa.
Coara9ado de ferro, epico e deslumbrante,
Passa no sen ginfite um cavalleiro andante.
E o cavalleiro diz a lagrima irisada:
Vem brilhar, por Jesus, na cruz da minha espada!
Far-te-hei relampejar, de victoria em victoria,
Na terra Santa, a luz da F^, ao solda Gloria!
E a volta lia-de gaardar-te a .minha noiva, 6 astro,
Em sen collo auroreal de rosa e de alabastro.
E assim alumiaras com ten vivo esplendor
Mil combates de heroes e mil sonhos d'amor.
E a lagrima celeste, ingenua e luminosa,
Ouviu, sorriu, tremeu, e quedou silenciosa.
Montado n'uma mula escura,^ de caminho,
Passa um velho judeu, avarento e mesquinho.
Mulas de carga atras levam-lhe o thesoiro,
Grandes areas de cedro abarrotadas d^oiro.
E 0 velhinho andrajoso e magro como um janco,
0 cr^neo calvo, o olhar febril, o bico adunco.
Vendo a estrella, exclamou: «0h Deus, que maravilha!
Como ella resplandece e tremeluz e brilha!
Com meu oiro em montao podiam-se comprar
Os imp^rios dos reis e os navios do mar.
E por esse diamante espl6ndido trocara
Todo 0 meu oiro immenso a minha mao avara.»
E a lagrima celeste, ingenua e luminosa,
Ouviu, sorriu, tremeu, e quedou silenciosa.
Debaixo da figueira entao um cardo agreste,
Ja ressequido, disss a lagrima celeste:
«A terra, onde o lilaz e a balsamina medra,
Para mim teve sempre um cora9ao de pedra,
Se a queixar-me, ergo ao ceo os brayos por acaso,
O c6o manda-me em paga o fogo em que me abraso.
Poems of Modern Literature. 405
Nunca junto de mim, ulcerado de espinhos,
Ouvi trinar, gorgeiar a miisica dos ninhos.
Nunca junto de mim ranches de namoradas
Debandaram, cantando, em noites estrelladas . . .
Voa a ave no azul e passa longe o amor,
Porque ai! nunca dei sombra e nunca tive flor! . . .
6 lagrima de Deus, 6 astro, 6 gota d'agua,
Cae na desola9ao d'esta infinita magoa!»
E a lagrima celeste, ingenua e luminosa,
Tremeu, tremeu, tremeu . . . e cahiu silenciosa.
E algum tempo depots o triste cardo exangue,
Reverdecendo, dava uma flor cor de sangue,
D'um roxo macerado e dorido e desfeito
Como as chagas que tem No3so Senbor no peito . . .
E ao calix virginal da pobre flor vermelba
la buscar, zumbindo, o mel doirado, a abelba! . . .
(Guerra Junqueiro.)
406
English -Portuguese Vocabulary.
(The gender is indicated by f. (feminine) and m. (masculine). The
principal word is substituted by — (a dash), when repeated.)
4 alley avenida f., alia f.
allow permitir, dar licen^a para,
consentir em
almost quasi
already jd
also tambem
always sempre
ambitious ambicioso
amiable amdvel, bondoso
among (par) entre
amuse divertir
ancestors antepassados m. pi.
anger zanga, despeUo, eolera^
ira
angry zangado; to be or get —
zangar-se
answer resposta f; — v. res-
ponder
any algum; (neg.) nenhum
anybody alguem ; (neg.) ninguem
any more mats algum; (neg.)
nao . . mats
appear aparecar
apple magd f.
apply to aplicar, empregar em
approach ajtroximar
April abril (in dates A — ) m.
archer besteiro m.
arm brago m.
army exercito m.
arrive chegar
arrow frecha f.
art arte f.
artist artista m. & /*.
as como; — . . — assim que
ashamed envergonhado
ashes cinzas f. pi.
ask preguntar, pedir
assiduity assiduidade f.
assist assistir, socorrer
above em cima de, por cima de
about ao redor de, cerca de
able capaz, hdhil
absolve absolver
abstain abster-se
abundance abunddncia f.
abuse abusar, insultar
accept aceitar
accompany acompanhar
accustom acostumar
account conta f., lista f.
acquaintance conhecimento m,
acquire adquirir
act obrar, operar; s acgdo f.,
acto m.
action a(c)cao f.
add acrescentar, adicionar
address dirigir(-se a); endere-
gar
admirable admirdvel
admiral almirante m.
admit admitir
advance adiantar, promover
advantage vantdgem f.
advice conselho w., aviso m.
affair negocio m., assunto m.
affect impressionar, afectar
afraid, to be — , ter medo
after depois, conforms
afternoon tarde f.
again de novo, mais uma vez
against contre
age idade f.; old — velhice
agree convir
agreeable agraddvel
alike semelhante, igual
all tudo pr., todo adj.; — that
tudo quanto
English-Portuguese Vocabulary.
407
assistance assistencia f.
associate with frequentar, as-
sociar-se com
astonishing surpreendente
at Gf em\ at home em casa; at
first 710 principio: at once
duma vez; at last 2^or fim;
at all de todo
attack agredir
attain alcangar, conseguir
attentive atento, atencioso
attract atirar
August agosto (in dates A — ) m.
aunt tia f.
author autor m.
avarice avareza f.
avaricious avaro, avarento
avoid evitar
avow confessar
await aguardar, esperar.
B.
bad m<m, md; — ly mal
ball bala f., baile m.
bare nu, despido; — ly apenas
bark v.y ladrar; s. casca f., cor-
tiga f.
barley cevada f.
battle hatcdJia f.
beard larha f.
beat hater
beautiful formoso^ Undo
because porque
become ficar, tornar-sc
bed cama f., leito m.
bee dbclha f.
beer cerveja f.
before antes, ante, deante
heg j^edir (esmolaj, mendigar
begin principiar^ comegar
behind atrds (de)trds
believe crer, acreditar
belong to pertencer a, ser de
better melhor
between entre
beyond alem de
big grande, grosso
bird a/ce /., pdssaro m.
bite morder
bitter amargo, acre
black preto, negro
blame censurar, repreender
blessing hengao f.
blood sangue m.
blush corar
boarding-house casa f. de Iws-
pedes
body corpo m.; every — cada
um, todos; no— ninguem
boil ferver
bonnet chapStt m.
book iTvro m.
boot bota f.
born nascido; to be — nascer
bottle garrafa f.
box caixa f.
boy rapaz m., menino m.
brave valente, corajoso
bread pdo m.
break romper, partir, quebrar
breakfast almogo m.
bring trazer, levar
brother irmao m.
build construir
burn arder, queimar
business negocio m.
but mas, porem
butter manteiga f.
buy coniprar
by por; — heart de c6r; — the
way (— the — ) de passdgem ;
— and — logo, ao depois;
hard— 7miito perto.
cab trem de praga m.
cabbage couve f.
calf vitela f.
call chamar; — to mind lembrar;
— at ir ter com
camel camelo m.
camp campo m.
candle vela f.
cane bengala f.
cap harrete
carnival carneval m., entrudo m.
care cuidado m.
carpenter carpinteiro m.
carriage camiagem f.
carry carregar, levar
cast (away) deitar (fora)
castle castelo m.
408
Enjjlieh-Portuguese Vocabulary.
cat gato m.
cattle gado bovino m.
cease cessar, acabar
censure censurar
celebrated celebre
certainly certamente, com certeza
chair cadeira f.
chamber qiiarto, sola
chase caga f.
chastise castigar
cheese queijo m.
cherry cereja f.
child crianga f.
china louga f..
choose escolher
chorus coro m.
church igreja f.
city cidade f.
clamour clamor m., brado m.
class classe f., aula f.
clean limpo
clear claro, limpido
cloak capa f., capote m.
cloth pane m. ; clothes vestudrio
m., roiipa f.
clothe vestir
cloud nuvem f.
coach carrudgem f., trem m.,
carro m.
coast costa f.
coat casaco m.
coffee cafe m.
cold frio (m.)y constipagao
colour cor f.
come vir ; — in entrar ; — outsatV
comfort conforto m., comodidade
f.; — V. confoj'tar, consolar
command ordem /'. (co)ma'ndo
m.\ — V. (co)mandar, ordenar
comDjCuce comedo m.
commerce comercio m.
complain queixar-se
compel obrigar
compound compusto
corirade camarada m., compa-
r.heiro m.
conceal esconder
conceive conceber
condemn conde(m)nar
conduct conducta f., proccder m. ;
— V. conduzii'
confess confessar
confidence confianga f., con-
fidencia f.
conquer conquistar
conqueror conquistador m.
conscience consciencia f.
consent consentir
consequence consequencia f.
consider consiierar
constrain constranger
construct construir
contain conter
contented contente
continue continuar
convince convencer
cook cozinheiro; coser
cool fresco (m.)
copy-book caderno m.
corn gruo m.
correct correcto; — i\ corrigir
cost custar
country pais m.
courage cordgem /., dnimo m. .
course curso m., corrida f.
cousin primo m., prima f.
cover coherta /'., cobertor m.^
tampa f.
cow vaca f.
creator creador »i.
creditor credor m.
crime crime m.
cry grito m., clamor m.
cultivate trultivar
cup chicara f, taga f.
currant groselha f.
custom costume m., hdbito m.
cut V, costar, talhar\ s. c6rte
w., talhe m., golpe m>.
damp (hjumido
danger perigo m.
dark escuro, sovibrio
dart V. dardeiar, s. dardo
daughter filha f.
dawn madrugada f, aha f.
day dia m.
dead morto; — ly morfal(mente)
deaf surdo
dear querido, caro
death mortc f.
debt divida f.
English-Portuguese Vocabulary.
409
deceive enganar, lograr
December december (in dates
I>— ) m.
decision decisdo f.
deer viado m., gado m.
defect defeito m.
defend defender
delight in deleitar-se em
demolish demoUr
dense denso
deny (de)^iegar, recasar
depart partir
departure partido
depend depender: — upon des-
cansar em
describe descrever
description descrigao
deserve merecer
desire desejar
despise desprezar
destroy destrulr
die morrer
difference difercnga
difficult dificil
difficulty dificuldade f.
diligent diligente
dine 1 . . , ^
dinner l-^^^^^^^' <'''-^
direct v. dirigir, enderegar; a.
directo, direito; — ly jd, im-
niediatamente
direction direcQdo f., ende^-e^o m.
disappear desaparecer
disciple discipulo m)
dissatisfy desagradar
dissipate dissipar^ desharafar
dissolve dissolver
distinguish distinguir
distress afllgao f.
divide dividir, ^jar^iZ/iav
do fazer
dog cao in.
door porta f. ; — way portal m.
doubt V. diivid<ir; s. ducida f.
dozen diizia f.
draw pitxar, tirar : — (pictures)
desenhar; — upon oneself
atirar-se
dream v. sonhar; s. sonlio m.
dress v.vestirC-se); s. vestido m.,
fato m.
drink heber
drop V. gotejar, deixar cair: s.
gota f.
drunk behedo; to get — emhria-
gar-se
dry seco, enxuto
duchess duquesa f.
duck pato m.
dumb mudo
during durante
dust p6 n., poet r a f.
duty dever m., obrigagao f.
dwell morar, residir
dye tingir.
E.
ear orelha f., ouvido m.
early cedo
earth terra f.
easily facilmente
easy fdcil
eat comer
edition edigdo f.
egg ovo m.
elect elegei'
ell (measure) vara f.
elm (tree) olm(eir)o m.
elsewhere algures
embarrass v. embaragar; s. em-
bar ago m.
embellish embe(l)lecer
emperor imperador
empire imperio
employ impregar
end fim m., cabo w., con-
cluscio f.
enemy inimigo m.
engine (steam — ) mciquina
enough hastante, assaz
enrich enriquecer
enter entrar (em)
entertain entreter, regal ar
entertaining divertido
envy iuveja
equal igual
equality igualdade f.
error erro m.
escape v. escapar, fuqir\ s. es-
capada f., fugida f.
esteem estima /., consideragcuo f.
evening tarde f., noite f.
event sii(c)cesso w., acontecimento
m.
410
English-Portuguese Vocabulary.
ever sempre
everybody cada um, todos ;
everything tudo; everywhere
em toda a parte
evil mal m.
example exemplo m.
execute executar, cumprir
exercise exerctcio, prdtica
exhaust esgotar; — ed exhausto
exist existir
expect aguardar
extinct extinto
extinguish extingiiir
extract v. extrair; s. extracto
extreme extremo
eye olho m.
fable fdbiila f.
face face /"., car a f., rosto m.
fail faltar, falhar, errar
faint desfalecer
faithful jfiely leal
fall cair
false falso
falsehood falsidade f.
family familia f.
fan leqiit w.
far Iqnge
fat gordo
fate fado m., destino m.
father pai ov ijae m.; — in-law
sogro m.
fault defeito m., falta f.
fear medo wi., receio »n.
fearful recedso
feather pena f., pluma f.
February fevereiro (in dates F — )
m.
feed comida f., alimento nu
feel sentir
feign fingir
fellow-traveller companheiro m.
de viageni
ferocious feroz
fertilize fertilisar
few poucos
field campo
fight luta /"., combate m.
fill encher
find encontrar
fine honito, fino
finish acabar, terminar
fire s. fogo m.; v. desfechar
flag bandcira f.
flatter lisongear, adidar
flatterer adulador m.
flee fugir
flock rebanho m.
florin fiorim m.
flour farinha f.
flourish florescer
flower flur f.
fly V. voar^ fugir; s. mosca f.
fog nevoeiro m.
follow seguir
folly tolice f., pdndega f.
fool tola m.
foolishness ioUce f., asneira f.
foot pe m.
for (prep.) para; (conj.) par que:
as — enquanto a
forbid prohibir; God — ! Deus
nao qiieira!
forehead testa f.
foreign estrangeiro
foresee prever
forest floresta f., bosque m.
forget esquecer, olvidar
forgive perdoar
fork garfo m.
formerly antes, outrora
forsake abandonar
fortify fortificar
fortnight, a — quinze dias
fortune fortuna
forward(8) para diante, na
dianteira
found V. fundir
freeze gelar
French f ranees
frequently freqiientemente, a
miudo
fresh fresco
Friday sexta-feira f.
friend amigo, aniiga; — ly ami-
gavel
friendship amizade f.
fruit fru(c)to m., fru(c)ta f.
fugitive fugitivo
fulfil cumprir
full cheio,, pleno
furniture mobilia f.
English-Portuguese Vocabulary.
411
0.
gaiety alegria f.
gain V. ganhar; s. ganho m.
game jogo, caga f.
gape bocejar, abrir a bdca
garden jardim m.
gardener jardmevro m.
gate porta f., portal m., cance(l)la
gather collier^ apanhar
general a. geral; s. general m.
generous gefieroso
genius genio m., talenfo m.
gentleman cavalheiro wi., senhor
m.
gentleness gentileza f., delicadeza
/•.
get procurar, ter; — up levan-
tar-se
gift dddiva f., prenda f.
girl menina /"., rapariga f.
give dar
glad cwitente, alegre ; — \jgostosa-
mente
glass vidro m., copo m.
glitt'er reluzir
glory gloria f.
glove luva f.
go i/r; — away ir-se (embora);
— out sai/r; — far from afastar-
se; — for proctirar; — on
continuar
God Deus m.
gold ouro m.
good a. bom, boa; s. bem m.
goodness bondade f.
good-will boa vontade f.
govern governar, reger
gown vestido m.
grammar gram(m)dtica
grandfather avd m.
grandmother avo f.
grant conceder
grass herva jf., relva f.
graze pastar
great grande
green verde
grief desgosto m.j mdgoa f.
grind moer
ground chao m., solo w.
grow crescer; — lean emma-
grecer; — old envelhecer; —
pale empalidecer; — red corar
— tall crescer, estar crescido;
— thin emmagrecer; — worse
peorar — better melhorar
— rich enriquecer
guilty culpado
hail V. granizar ; aclamar, saii-
dar; s. graniza f. — ! vita!
hair cabelo m., pelo m.
half s. metade f.; a. meio, meia
hand mao f.; — v. passar
handsome bello
happen acontecer
happily felizmente
happiness felicidade f.
happy feliz
hard duro, dspero
hardly detodo, apenas; — ever
quasi nunca
hare lebre f.
harvest colheita f.
haste pressa f.
hasten apressar-se, aviar-se
hat chapeu m. ; to put on (take
off) one's hat por (tirar) o
chapeu
hate odiar
hatred odio m.
hay feno m.
head cabega
heal curar
health saude f.
healthy saudavel, sua
hear ouvir
heart coragao w. ; by— de cor
heat calor m.
heaven ceu m.
heavy pesado
helm leme m.
help ajudar, so(c)correr
henceforward d'aqui para diante
here aqui
hide esconder, occtdtar
high alto, elevado
hill co(l)lina f.
hinder impedir
history historia f,
hit dar um golpe em; acertar
412
English-Portuguese Vocabulary.
hive colmeia f.
hold segurar
hole huraco in.
holiday ferias f. pi.
holy santo, sagrado
home casa ; go — ir a or para
casa; at — em casa
honest (hjonrado, (h)onesto
honour s. honra if.; — v. lionrar
hope s. esperanga; — v. esperar
horse cava(l)lo m.
hot quente; it is — estd calor
hour (hjora f.
house casa f.
how como, que:, — long (since
when)? desde quando?; —
much (many) quanto(s)?
however no entanto
human (hjumano
hunger fome f.
hungry esfomeado; to be — ter
vontade (de comer)
hunter cagador m.
hunting caga f.
hurt ferir, prejudicar
husband marido m.
I.
ice gelo m.
idea ideia f.
idle preguigoso
if se, caso que
ill a. docnte; adv. mal
illness doenga f.
image imdgem f. •
imagine imaginar
imitate imitar
immediately i(fn)mediatamente,
immortal i(m)mortal
importune importuno
impossible imposstvel
improve progredir
in cm; into para dentro de
inch po(l)legada f.
increase crcscer, au(g)mehtar
incredible incrivel
incur incorrer em
indeed na verdade; — ! e ver-
dade !
inhabit habitar
inhabitant habitant e m.
injure prejudicar
ink tinta f. ; — stand tinteiro m»
inquire inquirir, indagar
inquisitive curioso
inscribe increver
insensible insenstvel
instantly instantdneamente
instruct instruir
insult insulto m.
intend intender
interrupt interromper
introduce introduzir, apresentar
invade invadir
invent inventar
iron ferro m.
irreproachable irrepreetisivel
island ilha f.
ivory marfim m.
J.
January Janeiro (in dates J—)
jealous ciumento
jealousy ciume m.
jewel joia f.
join juntar
joy alegria
judgment julgamento m.
jug cdntaro m., caneca f.
July julho (in dates J—) m.
June Junho (in dates J — ) m.
just justo, exacto
just as no momenta em que
justice justiga f.
keep ficar com, segurar, observe
kill matar
kindness bondade f.
king rei m.; kingdom rei)io m.
kitchen cozinha f.
knee joelho m.
knife faca f., navalha f.
know conhecer, saber
knowledge sciencia f., co-
nhecimenio(s} pi. m.
labour trabalho m., lavor m.
laborious trabalhoso
lady senhora f., dona f.
English-Portuguese Vocabulary.
413
lamb anlto m.
land s. terra f.; — v. desembarcar,
arrihar
langaage lingua f., lingudgem f.
large grande, largo
last V. durar, continuar; adj.
ultimo
late adj. defunto; adv. tarde
laugh rir
laughter riso m.
law lei f.
lawyer advogado
lazy preguigoso
lead s. chumho in.
lead conduzir; — into induzir
leaf folha f., folho m.
league legua f., liga f.
learn aprender, estudar
learned sdbio, erudito
least s. menos; at — ao menos',
in the — de todo
leave licenga f.\ take — of
despedir-se de
left a. esqiierdo: s. esquerda f.
leg pern a f.
lend empi'estar
less menos
let deixar, arrendar; — us go!
vamos! — him know! faga-lJie
saber !
letter carta f., — case carteira f.
liar mentiroso m.
liberty liberdade f.
lie estar (deitadoj; mentir
life vida f.
lift up levantar
like gostar de; a. semelhante;
adv. como
likely provdvel
lily lirio in.
limit Umitar; s. limite m.
line linha f.
linen Ztn/io m.
lion Ztao w.
listen escutar, ouvir
little adj. pequeno; adv. pouco,
apenas, mal
live v«rgr, morar
loadstone, lodestone iwian m.
locksmith serralheiro m.
long adj. longo^ comprido; adv.
wmtYo tempo
look at oZ/ia?-; — for procurar
looking-glass espelho m.
lose perder
loss ptJ/ia /*.
love s. amor: — v. amar
low haixo, vil
luxury luxo m.
M.
mad tolo, alienado
Madam minha senhora
magnificent magnifxco
maintain manter, suster
make fazer ; — haste apressar-se
man homem m.
manners maneiras f. pi.
many muitos; so — tantos; as
— as tantos como; too —
demais
map ma(p)pa m.
March margo (in dates M — )
mark out marcar, tragar
marriage casamento m.
marry casar
master s. mestre, patrao, amo m. ;
— V. senhorear, conquistar
matter assumpto in., nego'cio m.,
cousa f.
May m^io (in dates M — ) m.
meadow prado m., devesa f.
meal refeigdo f., farinha f.
means meio m.
meat came f.
meddle (with) entremtter-se (em)
medicine remedio m., medicina f.
meet encontrar
melt fundir, derreter
member membro in.
memory memoria f.
mend eniendar ; — (a pen) aparar
merchant negociante , comerci-
ante m.
messenger mensageiro m.
metal metal m.
middle meio m.
mild ameno, suave
milk leite m.
miller moleiro in.
minute minuto m., minuta f,
misfortune desgraga f.
mislead desencaminhar, induzir
414
English-Portuguese Vocabulary.
Miss menina, senJwra Dona
mist nevoeiro m.
mistake v. enganar-se: s. erro,
engano tn.
mistrust desconfiar de
mock trogar de
modern moderno
modest modesto
modesty modestia f.
Monday segunda-feira f,
money dinheiro m.
month mes m.
moon lua f.
more mats
morning manha f.
mother mae f. ; — -in-law sogra
motive motivo m.
mourning luto m.
mouse rato m., ratinho m.
mouth boca f.
move mover(-se)jComover,mexer
much tnuito; too — demasiado;
how — qiianto?: as — ta'Mo;
as — as tanto que
murder assassinar; assassinio m.
murderer assassino tn.
music musica f.
mutton carndro m.
nail unha f., prego m.
naked nw, nua
name nome tn.
namely nomeadamente; a. saber
napkin guarda-napo m.
nature natureza f.
naughty ruim^ mal-creado
near prdximo, perto
nearly quasi, aproximadamente
necessary necessdrio, preciso; to
be — precisar-se
necessity necessidade f.
neglect v. descuidar; s. descuido
m.
neighbour visinho m.
neighbourhood visinhanga f.
neither . . nor nem . . nem
never nunca, jamais
new novo, fresco
news noticia f.\ — paper jornal
next proximo, seguinte
nice bonito, gentil
niece sobrinha f.
night noite f.
no nenhum, ndo
nobility nobresa f.
noise barulho, ruido m.
noon meio-dia m.
nose nariz m.
nothing (nao . .) nada
notwithstanding nem par isso,
nourish alimehtar. nutrir
November november (in dates
N—) m.
now agora
number numero m.
numerous numeroso.
0.
oak carvalho m.
oats aveia f.
obedient obediento
obey obeir
oblige obrigar, obsequiar
obliging obsequioso
observe observar, atender
obtain obter, alcangar
occupy oOOcupar
October outubro (in dates 0—)
m.
odious odioso
offend o(f)fender
offer s. o(f)ferta\ — v. offer ecer
often muitas vezes
officer offjficial
oil 6leo m., azeite m.
old velho, idosOy — age velhice
f.; how — are youV quantos
annos tern?
omen augouro m.
omit ome(t)ter
on sobi'e, em cima e
once uma vez; — on a time
outr'dra; at — de repente
only s6, unico
open V. abrir; adj. aberto, franco
openness sinceridade f.
opponent adversdrio ni.
opportunity ofp^portunidarle
oppose o(p)p6r(-se)
opposite ofpjposto, em frente de
English-Portuguese Vocabulary.
415
orange laranja f.
order s. ordem f,; — v. mandar
other, an— outra
otherwise alias, d'outra inaneira
over sohre, por cima dc; it's
all — acdbou-se
overtake a(t)tingir
owe dever
owl coruja f.
own propria
owner proprietdrio m.
ox boi m.
pagan pagao m., paga f.
pain pena, dor, trabalho; on —
of death sob pena de vida (or
de morte)
painful penoso, dolorosa
paint pintar
painter pinto r m.
painting pintura f.
palace paldcio m.\ (king's — )
pa^o m.
pale pdlido
paper papel m.
pardon v. perdoar; s. perdao m.
parents paes m. pi. ; parentes m.
pi
part parte f. ; to take — m
partilhar em
party partido m., parti da f.
pass V. passar\ s. passdgem f.,
passo m., imssapoi'te ni.
passage passdgem f., irajecto in.
patient s. doente m.; ad], paciente
pay V. pagar; s. piaga f., paga-
mento m.
peace paz f.
peach pessego m.
pear pera f.
peasant lavrador^ aldedo m.
pebble seioco m.
peculiar particular
pen penna f. ; — holder canela f.
pencil lapis m.
penknife canivete m.
people povo m., gente f.
perceive perceber
perfectly perfeitamente
perform fazer, cumprir
perish perecer
permit permi(t)tir
persecute perseguir
person pessoa f.
persuade persuadir
philosophy filosofia f.
picture quadra m.
piece pega f., bocado m.
pierce furaVy atravessar
pig porca m.
pill pilula f.
pin alfinete m.
pity piedade f.; it is a — d uma
pena
place logar, assento; — v. cola-
car
plain planicie f.; adj. piano
plan projecta m., piano m,
plank prancha f.
plant plant a f.
plate prato m.
play s. jogo ni., comidia f. ; — v.
jogar^ brincar
plaything brinqueda m.
please agradar a; if you please
— se faz favd'
pleasing agraddvel
pleasure prazer m. ; to take —
in comprazer-se
plum ameixa f. '
pocket algibeira f., bMso m.
— handcherchief lengo m.
—book carteira f.
poet paeta m.
poison veneno m., envenenar
polite corles
politeness cortesia f.
poor pahre
pope pdpa m.
poplar alamo m., choupo m.
populous povaada
portion parte /"., pargdo f.
position posigda f., situagdo f.
post-office carreia m.
pound arrdtel m.; libra f.
powerful poderoso
praise v. lauvar, enaltecer: s.
louvor m.
pray resar, arar
prayer resa f., oragdo f.
precious precioso
precision precisdo f.
prefer preferir
416
English-Portuguese Vocabulary.
prescribe prescrever
presence presenqa f.
present adj. present e; s. i^re-
senie, regalo m.
preserve preservar, confeitar
pretence pretexto m.
pretend pretender^ fhigir
pretty adj. bonito; adv. bem,
bast ante
prevent impedir
prey presa f.
pride orgulho m.
principle principio m.
print itnprimir
printing, act of — imprensa f.
prison cadeia f., prisao f.
prodigious prodigioso
produce produzir
project project 0
promise s. promessa ; — v. pro-
meter
proof prova f.
proper proprid, conveniente
property propriedade f.
proposal proposigdo f.
propose propor
prove provar
province provincia f.
punctuality pontuaXidade f.
punish castigar
punishment castigo m.
pupil aZMm>w>, — a; discipulo, —a
purchase s. compra; — v. com-
prar
purpose fim m., designio m.;
on — de proposito
purse balsa f.
pursue 2^6rseguir
put meter.
quarrel contenda, altercagao f.
queen rainha f.
question 8. pregunta f., questao
f.; — preguntar
quiet quieto, tranquillo
quite todo, inteiramente.
R.
railroad caminho m. de ferro
rain chuva f.
rainy chuvoso
raise levantar, elevar
rally mote jar
rather antes, bastante
ray raio m.
reach atingir, cliegar a.
read ler\ to — again toi'nar a
ler
ready pronto
reason razao f.
rebuild reconstruir
recall (rejlembrar
receive receber, acolher
recognise reconhecer
recollect lembrar-se
recompense recompensa f.
reconnoitre reconhecer
recover restabelecer
red vermelho
reduce reduzir
reed ca(n)7ia f.
reflect reflectir
refuge, to take — refugiar-se
refuse recusar
regular regtdar
reign reinar
rejoice regosijar
relate coniar, referir
j-elieve socorrer
rely fiar-se, contar em
remain ficar
remedy remedio m.
remember lembrar-se; me to
him diga-lhe muitaa lembran^as
minhas
rend rasgar
render devolver
renounce renunciar a
repair concertar, reparar
repeat repetir
repent arrepender-se
reply responder, replicar
report avisar, informar, referir :
s. relatorio m.
repose descansar, repousar
reproach censurar, repreender
repulse repulsar
require requerir, exigir
resemble assemelhar, parecer-se
(com)
reside residir, morar
resolve resolver^ decidir
English-Portuguese Vocabulary.
417
rest descansar, ficar
restless desassocegado
\ restrain restringir
1 return voltar, tornar, restitnir
reveal revelar
revenge vinganga f.
reward recompensa f.
ribbon fita f.
rice arroz m.
rich rico
riches riqueza f., bens m. pJ.
ridiculous ridiculo
right Justo, direito; —hand
direita f.; you are — tern
razao
ring annel m., argola f.\ —v.
(the bell) tocar
ripen madurecer
rise levantar-se
risk risco, perigo m.
river rio m.
road estrada f.
rob roubar
robber lad/rao m.
roof telhado m.
room espago m., aposento, quarto
m.
rose roi^a f.
rotten podre, putrido
round redondo
ruin ruina f.
rule regra f.
run correr ; — away fugir ; — to
acorrer; — over percorrer;
— a ground frustrar-se.
S.
sad iriste
safe salvo
sage sdMo
sail V. ira vela; s. vela f.
salad salada /"., alface m.
sale venda f.
salt sel m.
mesmo
satisfy satisfazer
Saturday sd(b)bado m.
savage selvagem
save salvar
s&y dizer
scarce apenas
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar.
scholar alu(tn)no m.
school escola f., aula f.
scold ralhar
seal V. selar; s. selo m.
season estagdo f.
seaman maritiheiro m.
seat logar m., assento m.
secret segredo m.
seduce seduzir
see ver
seek procurar
seem parecer
seize apanhar
seldom raramente
sell Vender
send mandar, enviar; — away
mandar embora, despedir\ —
for mandar^ buscar
sense sentido m.
September setembro (in dates
S-) m.
servant criado, — a
serve servir
set off, — out partir
settle arranjar
sew coser
shade, shadow sombra f.
shame vergonha f.
share partilhar em
shed (blood) derramar
sheep ovelha f., carneiro m.
sheet folha f. (of a bed), lenqo
■m.
shine brilhar^ luzir
ship namo m., ndii f., vapor m.
shirt camisa f.
shoe sapato m.
shoemaker sapateiro m.
shop loja f.
shore margem f.f praia f.
short breve^ curto
show mostrar, manifestar
shrub arbusto m.
shun evitar, fugir de
shut fechar; — in encerrar
sick doente
side lado m.
sight vista f.
silence silencio m.
silk seda f.
silly parvo
silver prata f.
27
418
English-Portuguese Vocabulary.
simple simples
since desde (que)
sincere sincero
sing cantar
sister imia; — in-law cunhada
sit (down) sentar-se
skate patinar
skin pe(l)le f.
slander dizer mal de
slaughter matafiga f.
sleep r. dormir; s. s&tnno m.
slide, slip escorregar
small pequeno
smile sorrir; s. sorriso m.
smoke fumo m.\ — v. fumar
snow neve f. ; — flakes frocos de
neve: — v. nevar
so assim, tao\ — that tanto que;
— many tantos
soap sabdo m., sdbonete m.
sober sobrio
soft mo(l)le, meigo
soil solo m., cliao m. ; — v. sujar
soldier soldado m.
solve (dis)solver
something alguma coisa, algo
(de)
song canto m.
soon hreve, logo, cedo
sorrow desgosto »n., mdgoa f.
sorry triste; I am — sinto, tenha
pena
soul alma f.
sound sdo, rijo; s. som
source fonte f.
south sul m.
speak falar
spell aoletrar
spite, in — of apesar de
spoil estragar
spoon colher f.
sport esporte m.
spot logar
spread espalhar
spring 8. primavera f., mola f.;
— V. saltar
spy espia f.
stagger cambalar
stain mancha, nddoa f.; — v.
manchar
staircase e8cada(rxa) f.
stake paste m., estaca f. : to be
at — estar arriscado
star estrella f.
state estado m., condirao
stay iicar
step passo m.
stick pdu m., hengala f.
still ainda
sting morder
stir mover, mcxer(-se)
stocking meia f.
stone pedra f.
stop imrar
storm tempestade f.
strange estranho, estranjeiro
strawberry morango m.
street rim f., caminJio m.
strength forga f.
strike hater, ferir; (clock) dar
horas
strong forte
study estudar; s. gahinete
stuff estofo VI., materia f.
subdue suhjugar, amansar
subject sujeito m., assumpto m.
submit submeter
subtract subtrair
succeed su(c)ceder, lograr
success su(c)cesso in.
successful bent su(c)cedido, felts
such tal
suffer sofrer
suffice bastar
sufficient suficiente
sufficiently bast ante
sugar assucar m.
T.
thunder trovdo m.
Thursday quinta-feira f.
thus assim
tiger tujre m.
till atS'(a)
time tempo m., vez f.
timid timido
tired cansado
to a, para; to-day hoje; to-
morrow dmanha
too, — much demais, demasiadOy
muito
tooth dente m.
English-Portuguese Vocabulary.
419
top cimo m.
towards para (com)
toweh toalka f.
tower tor re f.
town cidade f.
tradesman negociante
•tragedy tragedia f.
transgress infringir
translate traduzir, verier
translation tradufcjgao /"., versaof.
travel viajar
traveller viajante m.
treasure tesouro m.
treat tratar; ill — maltratar
treatment tratamento m.
treaty tratado m.
tree drvore f.
tremble tremer
trouble inquietar, desa^socegar,
inco(m)modar
true verdadeiro; it is — e ver-
dade
trust confiar em, descansar em
trutb verdade f.
try experimentar^ p^'ocurar
Tuesday tcrga-feira f.
Turkish turco
turn volta f.
tutor preceptor, tutor m.
tyrant tyra(n)no m.
U.
ugly feio
umbrella parasol m., guarda-
chuva m.
unawares inesperadamente
uncle tio w.
understand coinpre('h)ende>'j en-
tender
undertake empre(h)cnd€i'
undo desfazer
unfortunate desgragado
ungrateful ingrato
unhappy infeliz
unheard of inaudito
unknown desconhecido
unless a nao ser que
unsettled incerto
upon em, sobre, em cima de
uprightness rectidao f.
use tiso m., lidbito m.; — v.
costumar
useful lUU
usually de ordindrio
utter (cries) dar (gritos).
V.
vainly debalde
valley val(le) m.
valour valor w., valentia f.
variety variedade f.
various vdrio
vast vasto
velvet veludo m.
very muitOj bem.
vessel vaso m., navio m.
vice vicio m.
victory victoria f.
village aldeia /"., vila f.
vinegar vinagre m.
violet violeta f.
virtue virtude f.
virtuous virtuoso
visit s. visita f.; — v. visitar,
freqiientar
voice voz f.
volume volume, tomo m.
vow voto m.; — v. votar
voyage viugem f.
W.
wait es2)erar
walk passear; s.passeio m.
wall muro in.
walnut noz f,
want falta; — v. precisar; to
be — ed jfdltar
war guerra f.
warm quente
watch relogio m.; — v. velar,
observar
water dgua f.
way caminlio m.
weak fraco
wear trazer, trajar, vestir
weariness cansago, aborrecimento
m.
wearisome 1j^„^,.^
weary j
weather tempo m.
Wednesday quarto-feira f.
week semana f.
27*
420
English-Portugaese Vocabulary.
weep chorar
weigh pesar
well hem; to be — esiar hem
or horn
wheat tHgo in.
when quando
where onde
whip chicote m.
white hranco
whole iivteirOf todo
why porque?
wicked ruim
wide largo
widow viuva f. ; — er viuvo m.
wife esposa f., mulher f,
wild selvdgem
willing prompto ; to be — querer
willingly gostosamente
win ganhar
wind vento m.
wind up (a watch) dar cor da a
window janela f.
wine vinho m.
wing asa f.
winter inverno f.
wipe esfregar
wisdom sabedoria f.
wise sdbio, erudito, prude^Ue
wish desejar
without sent
witness testemunha f.
woman mulher f.
wonderful admirdvel, maravi-
Ihoso
wood hosqtie, madeira f., pdu m.
wool Id f.
word paXavra f.; to keep one's
— cumprir com a sua pala-
vra
work ohra f., trahalho m. ; — «•
trahalhar
workman operdrio m.
world mundo m.
worm verme m.
worse pear, pior
worth digno; to be — valer
wound ferida f.\ — v. ferir
wretched desgragado, miserdvel
write escrever
writing letra f.
wrong injustiga; to be — ndo
ter razdo.
year anno m.
yellow amarel(l)o
yesterday (h)ontem
yet ainda
yield ceder
yoke jugo m.
young novo, mogo
joxxth. juventude, mocidade f.
Z.
zeal zHo m.
zealous zeloso
zero zero m.
zounds! porDeus!
com a hreca!
-^
421
Portuguese-English Vocabulary,
A.
Ahaixo [Ts'^ba^fn] down; under
abalar [vbv'larj to shake
abandonar [vtundu na,r] to
abandon
abCb)ade [is'ta^?] m. abbot
abelha [v'tisCiv] f. bee
obenQoar fabensu'arj to bless
aberto [v'bsrtuj open
abolir fabu'lirj to. abolish
aborrecer f^burr^ 'serj to abhor,
displease
abragar [vbrv'sar] to embrace
ahreviar fvbr9v} 'arj to abbreviate
abrigar febH'gar] to shelter
abrigo [v'brigu] m. shelter
dbril [v'brii] m. April
abrir fv'brirj to open
abuso /» 'buzuj m. abuse
acabar [nkv'barj to finish
acaso [e'kazu] m. chance
acautelado fvkauta'laduj cau-
tious
acautelar-se [nT^autd'larsD] to
provide
acQao [a'svii] f. action
a(c)cento [is'sentu] m. accent
a{c)c€so fv'sezuj lighted
a(c)crescentar fvkrgfsen 'tar] aug-
ment, increase
a(c)cusar [vku'zar] accuse
aceitar fesvi'tarj to accept
acender [vscn'der] to light,
kindle
acertar [■esgr'tar] to hit
achar f's'far] to find
acido i'as^d'u] acid, sour
acima ["e'simv] over
aclarar fvkl^'rarj to clear
ago f'asuj steel m.
acolher [vku'fier] receive
acompanhar [vkomp^'jiarj ac-
company
aconselhar fekostTiar J to advise
acontecer [vkontd'ser] to happen
acordar [vkur'darj to awake
acostumar [vkuftu'mar] to ac-
custom
acre ['akrd] =, sour
acreditar [vkre&i'tar] to believe
activo [a'tivuj active
acto f'atuj m. act, action
actor fa 'tor] m. =
actriz [a'trif] f. actress
actual [a'tuaij =
addigao [e&i'svu] f. addition
adiante [nd}'vntd] before, for-
ward
adiar [v&i'ar] to adjourn
adivinhar [v&9vVjiar] to guess
adoecer [v&ui'ser] to fall ill
adormecer [v&urmd'ser] to fall
or lull asleep
advertir [vffdvdr'tir] to advise
afadigar [vfvdi'gar] to fatigue^
tire
afamado [vfts'ma&u] famous *
afastar [vfvf'tar] to remove
afazeres [vfv'zerij'] m. pi. busi-
ness
a(f)fecto [«'fetuj m. affect
aCPfeigdo [vfvi'svu] f. affection
a(f)firmar [y fir' mar] to affirm
a(f)flicto fv'jlitu] afflicted
a(f)fligir fi-'fli' (jir] to afflict
422
Portugiiese-Engliah Vocabalary.
af(f)luente feflU'ent^J m. affluent
agarrar [vgv'rrsir] to seize
igasalho fvg.v 'zafiu] m. lodging,
shelter
agradccer [^girisS^d'ser] to thank
agradecido [vgrvda'siduj thank-
ful
agradeclmento [isgrvOdsi 'mSntuJ
m. thanks
agrado fe'gra&u] m. liking
dgua f'figws] f. water
aguardar [legic^r'dstr] to await
ii^udo [u'gxi&u] sharp, pointed
aguia ['a'jinj f. eagle
agulha [j^'gufiv] f. needle
ahi [y'i] there
ainda [n'ind'B] still
ajoelhar [^^ui'fiar] to kneel
ajuda [e'^uffv] f. help
ajudar f^gu'd'arj to help
alar gar [vlvr/gar] to enlargen
alcangar [alkv'sar] to reach,
obtain
aldeao [aldl'^u] m. peasant
aldeia [al'dv}^] village.
aUgre [is'ligri] gay
alegria feh'grivj f. gaiety, joy
alSi [a'lvi] beyond
alfaiate [alfBi'ate] m. tailor
alfandega[al'fvnddffB] f. custom-
house
atfinete [alffnetd] m. pin
algibeira [al^i'tvtra] f. pocket
cdgodao [digu'&vu] m. cotton
alguem [ai'gvi] somebody
algum [al'giij some
alimento [I'lfmentu] m. nourish-
ment
Al(l)emanha jvh'majiv] f. Ger-
many
al(l)emdo [^Id'tnvuJ m. German
al(lji [v'lij there
alma f'aimvj f. soul
ahnofjar [ahnu'sar] to break-
fart
almoQO fai'tnosuj m. breakfast
alto ['aUu] high, tall
altura [ai'turv] f. height
alugar [vlugar] to hire, let
alumno fv'lunuj pupil, student
alvo [aivu] m. white, aim
dmanfia [amv'jnv] to-morrow
amar [n'mar] to love
amarelo [em^'rdu] yellow
amargo [v'margnl bitter
amdvel [v'mavsij amiable
ambigdo fembi'svuj f. ambi-
tion
anibicioso [vmbisi'ozuj ambi-
tious
ambos ['vmbufj both
ameaga [vmy'as'e] f. threat,
menace
ameagar [mnw'sarj to threaten
amendoa [v'mHtidunJ f. almond
americano [vmeri'kvnuj Ameri-
can
amigdvel ['emi'gavsij amicably
amigo [n'miguj m. friend
amiudo [vmi'u&u] often
amizade [vmi'za&d] f. friend-
ship
amo ['vmu] m. master
anwr [n'mor] love
amostra [Ts'mostve] f. pattern,
sample
ancido [vsi'mij m. old man
dncora ['ykuraj f. anchor
andar fvn'darj to go, walk
andorinha [vndu 'rijiv] f. swallow
dngulo ['vgidu] m. angle, corner
angustia [v'gnftjTs] f. anguish,
pain
anho ['isjiuj m. lamb
animal [eni'mai] m. =
dnimo /'vnimuj m. valour, cou-
rage
anjo ['i'suj m. angel
a(n)nel [v'nei] in. ring
a(n)nexo [v'neksu] annexed
a(n)niversdrio funiv^r' sar^uj m.
anniversary
a(n)nual [y'nuai] annual, yearly
a(n)nunciar f^nus^'arj announce
a(n)nuncio fv'7ius}uj advertise-
ment
anoitecer fenoH^'serJ to grow
night, darken
anlever [Qnt^'verJ to foresee
antigo [vn'tiguj ancient
antiguidade [vtitigi' ff&C^d] anti-
quity
apagar [vpv 'garj to extinguish,
quench
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
428
apanhar fspv'jiarj to grasp,
catch, pick
apartar ,[vpvr'tarj to separate
apear, apiar ['spi'ar] to alight
apenas [e'penvf] scarcely
aperfeigoar [vparfHsu ar] to ac-
complish
apertar [^pdr'tar] to bind, tie,
press, squeeze
aperto /» 'pertuj m. crowd, throng
apoderar-se [vpu^?' rarse] to
seize, to take possession
apontar [epon'tarj to point,
aim at
aposento [ispuzentu] m. room
aposta [n'poftej f. wager, bet
apostolo [e'poftuluj m. apostle
a(p)parecer ['ep'Brd' ser] appear
<i(p)parelho^[ypv'ryfiu] m. ap-
paratus
a(p)pelido [ep9'lid'uj m. surname
a(p)plauso[v 'plaiczuj m. applause
a(p)plicaQao [splikv 'svujf. appli-
cation
aCpJplicado f^pli'ka&uj diligent
a(p)proximar [yprosi'mar] to ap-
proach
aprego [^'presu] m. estimation
aprender [epren'derj to learn
aprendiz [upren'di:/] m. ap-
prentice
apresentar [vptdzen'tar] to pre-
sent, introduce
apressado [ypre'sa&aj hasty
aproveitar [spruVBi'tar] to profit
aptiddo [apti'&yu] f. aptness
aquecer [^ke'serj to warm,
heat
uquelle [^'keh] that
aqui [v'kij here
aquietar [ekis'tarj to quiet
aquillo [e'kiluj that
ar [arj m. air
arbitrdrio [srbi 'trariuj arbitrary
arhusto [vr'buftu] m. shrub
arcehispo [ursd'tifpu] m. arch-
bishop
arco ['arkuj m. arch
areia [i^'reinj f. sand
argola [vr'golv] f. ring
arguir [vrguHr] io argue
aria ['arw] f. aria, air, song
drido f'ari&uj dry
arma f'armvj f. weapon
armazem [iBrmy'zvt] m. ware-
house, magazine
arranjar f^rrv'^arj to arrange,
dispose
arrdtel [a'rratei] m. pound
arredores [vi'r9' (forif] in. pi, en-
virons
arrefecer [vrrdfe'cer] to cool,
catch cold
arroz [v'rrof] m. rice
arte ['artd] f. art
artigo [vr'tigu] m. article
artilharia [vrtifiTs'ri:^] f. ar-
tillery
artista [vr'tift^] in. artist
drvore ['arvurd] f. tree
asa ['azTs] f. wing, handle
asno f'a^nuj in. ass
dspero f'afpdruj rough
assado f^'sa&uj m. roast-meat
assaltar fesai'tarj to assault
asseio [v'sviu] in. neatness
assentar [vsen'tarj to seat, put
assento [v'sentu] m. seat
assignatura [vsinv 'tur^J f. signa-
ture
assim [v'sij so
assistir [vsif'tir] to assist
assucar [y'sukarj m. sugar
assunto [v'suntu] m. subject
aasustar [vsuftarj to frighten
astro I'aftruJ m. star
atirar [vti'rar] to throw,
fling
atraigoar [ntratsu'arj to betray
atrds f^'trafj behind, after
atraso [v'trazu] m. delay
atravessar [Hravd' sar] to cross
atento [v'tentu] attentive
au(g)mento [au'mSntuJ m. aug-
^ mentation, increase
Austria ['auftrtvj f. =
autor [au'tor] m. author
dvido ['avicfuj covetous, greedy
aviso [v'vizuj m. communication,
advice
avo [v'voj m. grandfather
avo [ts'vo] f. grandmother
azedo [v'ze&uj sour
azeitona [ezvi'tonvj f. olive
424
Portugnese-English Vocabulary.
aztd [is'zui] blue
azulejo [vzu'l^^u] m. Dutch
tile glazed.
B.
bacalhau [bvkv'dau] m. cod-
fisli
hacia [bv'slvj f. basin
baga ['bag's] f. berry, drop (of
sweat)
bagdgem fbv'gagvij f. luggage
bago f'bagu] m. grain of a
grape
bahia [bv 'ivj f. bay ; B—
Bahia
baUar fbat'larj to dance
baile [ bath] m. ball
bainha [b'e'ijiv] f. sheatb
bairro ['bairru] m. quarter of
a town
baixa ['ba^p] decrease; leave,
B — part of Lisbon
baixar [bay' far] to sink, fall
baixella, [bai felv] f. furniture
for -the table , silver-plate
baixio [bay' fin] m. low water
baixo fbai'fu] low
bala f'balv] ball
balanca [bis'lvsa] f. balance,
scales
balango [bv'lvsuj m. belance
balcao fbai'kvu] m. balcony,
counter
baldado [bat'da&u] void
balde ['baldd] m. bucket
baloigar [baloi'sar] to balance
bancada [bv'ka&s] f. pew,
bench
baiico ['bvTcu] m. bank
bandeira [bvyi'dvtrv] f. flag,
ensign
bandeja [bvn'dv^] f. tray, tea-
board
bando f'bvndu] m. band
banho f'bvjiu] m. bath; — s. pi.
banns
baptismo [ba'tigmu] m. bap-
tism
harato [bv'ratu] cheap
barba f'barbv] f. beard; chin
barbear [bvrhy'ar] to shave
barca, barcaga ['barks, bsr'kage]
f. bark, ferry-boat, lighter
bar CO ['barkuj m. bark, boat
barra ['barrv] f. bar, m^uth of
a river; trimming
barriga [bv'rrigv] f. belly;
— da perna calf of the leg
barril [b's'rrii] ni. cask
ba7'ro I'barru] clay
barulho [bv'rufiu] m. noise
bastante [bvf'tvntd] enough ;
rather
bastar [ bvf 'tar] to be sufficient
batalha [bv'tativ] f. battle
batata [b's'tatv] f. potato
hater [bn'ter] to beat
beber [bd'ter] to drink
bebida [bd'bi&s] f. drink, potion
heigo ['brnsu] in. lip
beijar [b^fgarj to kiss
beijo ['bTSi^u] m. kiss
beira ['bvirvj brink, shore; B —
Province of Portugal
beiramar [bvyrTB'mar] f. sea-
coast
belga ['bsigsj m. and f. Belgian
Belgica ['bdjjks] f. Belgium
beleza [bd'lezs] f. beauty
bein [bv}] well
bemfeitor [bvifui'tor] m. bene-
factor
bemquisto [bv}'ktftv] well-
beloved
bengdo ['besmi] f. blessing
benefko [bd'ncfyku] beneficial
benevolo [b9'n£vuln] benevolent
bento ['beniu] consecrated
benzer(-se) [be'zer(-sd)] to con-
secrate, to make the sign of
the cross
berrar [bj'rrar] to scream
besta ['befte] m. beast, brute
biblia ['biUtv] f. Bible
bicho [bifuj m. worm
bico ['biku] m. beak, bill
bife I'Ufd] m. beef
bilha ['bh-r.e] f. earthen pot
bilhete [bi'detd] m. note,
billet
bispo ['bifpu] m. bishop
boato ['buatu/ m. rumour
boca I'bokv] f. mouth
Portugnese-English Vocabulary.
425
bocado [hu'ka&'uj m. mouthful,
piece
boi [bofi] m. ox
boia ['bolts] f. buoy
bola ['bolv] f. ball
holo f'boluj m. cake, biscuit
holor fbu'lorj m. mould
bolsa f'boisvj f. purse
bolso f'boisuj m. pocket
horn, boa [bo, bov] good
bondade [bdn'da&9] f. goodness
honito [bunituj nice
borboleta [burbu'letvj f. butterfly
bordo f'borduj m. board
borraefia [bu'rrafv] f. leather
bottle
hota I'bofe] f. boot
bot&o [bu't^u] m. button
botar [bu'tarj to cast, throw
bote f'botdj m. boat
botica [bu'tikv] f. apothecary's
shop
broQO f'brasuj m. arm
bradar [br^'&ar] to shout
bramar /brv'marj to roar
branco f'brvJcuJ white
branquear fbrvki'arj to whiten,
bleach
brasdo [brv'zvu] arms
brasileiro [brvzi'lviru] Brazilian
bravo f'bravu] brave, wild
breve ['brsm] brief
brilhar [bri'fiar] to shine, excel
brincar [brt'har] to play
broa I'brovJ f. bread of millet
bronze ['brozd] in. brass
burgues [bur'gej] m. citizen
burro f'burruj -w. ass
buscar fbuf'karj to fetch
buxo f'bufuj m. box-tree
C.
cdbega fke'besvj f. head
cabe(l)lo [kv'behi] m. hair
caber [kv'ber] to find room (in)
cabo f'kabuj m. end, handle
eabra f'kabrvj f. goat
cabrito [kv'britu] m. kid
caga ['kasvj f. chase
cacho [kafu] m. grape
caco f'kakuj m. potsherd
cada I'k'o&Ts] every, any
cadeia [kn'ffvw] f. chain
cadeira fka'dvtrvj f. chair
cadertio [h^'&ernu] m. copy-
book
caes fkaifj m. quay
cafS [kv'fe] m. coffee-house
ca(h)ir [kv'ir] to fall
caixa ['ka}fv] f. box
caixdo [kai'fvu] m. coffin
calar [hs'lar] to keep secret
calqada fkai'sad'ej f. pavement
calQodo [kal'sa&u] f. shoes and
boots
calqar [kai'sarj to put on
shoes
calculo ['kalkulu] m. calculation
caldeira [kai'dvyrv] f. kettle
caldo fkaidu] m. broth
calice, calls f'kalifj m. chalice
callo ['kalu] corn, hard skin
calmo f'kaimuj calm
calor [kv'lor] m. heat
cama ['kvmv] f. bed
camara ['kvmvrv] f. chamber
camarote [kvmTs'rotd] m. cabin^
box
cdmbio fkemhiuj m. exchange;
letra de — bill of exchange
cambUta fkim'biftvj w. money-
changer
caminho [kv'mijiu] m. way
camisa fka'mizvj f. shirt
camjiainha [kvmp^'ijt^J f. bell
campo f'kvmpuj m. field ; no —
in the country
caneca [k'e'nek^] f. miig, can
can€l(l)a [k^'nelej f. cinnamon
canhdo [kps'jfivu] m. cannon
canna ['kvnv] f. cane, reed; de
asudcar sugar-cane
cano I'k iBnu] m. pipe, tube
canon fkunonj m. cannon
cansaqo [kv'sasu] m. weariness
cansar [kv 'sar] to tire
cantar [kvn'tar] to sing
canto I'kvntuJ m. song
cdo [kvu] m. dog
capa ['kapvj f. cloak, cover
capaz [kv'paf] capable
capel(l)a [k^'pdv] f. chapel
capital fkvjpt'taij =
426
Portaguese-English Vocabulary,
capitdo [kypi'tvu] m. captain
capUulo [kTs'pitulu] m. chapter
ca(p)tivo [Tce'tivu] m. captive
oara ['kar'e] f. face
caracol [kierv"kolJ m. snail;
helix
ear deter [kv' rater] m. character
carda f'kardaj card ing-comb
cardeal fk^rdi'aij m. cardinal
cardo ['kardu] m. thistle
carga [Izargv] f. load, burden
cargo ['kargu] m. charge
caridade [kvri'&ad9] f. charity
carjie ['karnd] f. meat
carneiro [kvr'n^iruj m. mutton,
ram
caro I'karuJ dear
carril [k^'rriij m. track ; pL
carris rail
carro ['harm] m. car, carriage
carrudgem [kvrru'a^vi] f. car-
riage
carta ['kartv] f. letter
cartcira [k^r'tvirv] f. pocket-
book
carteiro fkur'tmru] m. postman
carvalho [kvr'vafiu] m. oak
carvdo [kvr'vvu] m. coal
casa ['kazv] f. house
casacdo [kvzv'kvu] m. great-
coat
casamento [kvzTs 'mentu] m. wedd-
ing
casar [ku'zar] marry
casca [Icafkv] f. bark, rind
cascata [kvf'katv] f. cascade
caso f'kazuj m. case, accident
easte(l)lo [kvf'telu] castle
castigar [kvj'tigar] to punish
easulo [kazulu] m. hull, husk
Cauda fkaud'e] f. tail, train
causa f'kausa] f. cause, plea
cautela [kau'telv] caution,
ticket
cavalariga [kewlu'risuj f. stable
cavallo [kv'valu] m. horse
cear fs* 'arj to sup
ceMla [sd'tolv] f. onion, bulb
cedo fseO'uJ soon
cego ['seguj blind
ceifar [sei'farj to harvest, cut
(corn)
celebrar [sdh'brarj to celebrate
celebre f'sehbrdj famous
cem [svij a. hundred
censura [se'surv] f. censure
centra f'sentruj m. centre
eera [' serv] f. wax
cerco ['serkuj f. circle, circuit
cerebro f sevdbru] m. brain,
head
cereja [sd'rvjv] f. cherry
cerejeira [sdr}'svyrv] f. cherry-
tree
cerrar [sd'rrar] to shut, close
up
certeza [ssr'tezej f. certainty
certiddo [sdrtt'd'vu] m. certifi-
cate
certo f'sertuj sure, certain
cessar [sd'sar] to cease
ciu [seuj m. heaven, sky
chdcara ['fakvrv] f. Bras, farm,
country-house
chaga [ fagv] f. wound
chamar ['fvmar] to call
ehamnta [femnj f. flame, blaze
chdo [fyuj m. ground, soil^
floor
charuto [fv'rutu] cigar
chato r/atu] flat -
chave ['Sav9] f. key
chegar ff}'garj to arrive
cheio f'fvf'uj full
cheirar [fvi'rar] to smell
chicara ['fikvrvj f. cup
chim, chines [Jl, fi'nef] m.
Chinese
chita ['fitv] f. printed calico
chorar [fu'rarj to cry, weep
chourigo [fo'risu] m. sausage
chover [Ju'verJ to rain
chrisido [kriftvuj (m.) Christian
chronista [kru'nijtu] m. chro-
nicler
chumbo f'junibuj m. lead
chuvoso [J'u'vozuJ rainy
cicatriz [sikis 'trifjf. cicatrice, scar
cidade [si'&a&j] f. town
cigarro [si'garru] m. cigar
cima [simv] f. top; em — on,
upon
cinco f'siku] five
cincoenta [st'kwentul fifty
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
427
circo ['sirkuj m. circus
circular [s.Hrhu'larJ to circulate
circulo f'sirkulu] m. circle
civil fs9'viij civil, polite
clarear, clarificar [klvri'ar^
Izlvrffykar] to grow light, to
clear
claro f'klaruj clear
classe ['klas9j f. class, species
clima ['klimv] m. climate
coharde [ku'f)ardd] (m.) . coward
coberta [ku'bertvj f. cover
cobertor [kut)9r'torJ m. blanket,
quilt
cobertura fka^^r'turvj f. cover-
ing
cobre ['kobrgj m. copper
cobrir [ku'brir] to cover
coclie f'kofij m. coach
coelho ['kuvTiu] m. rabbit
collier [ku'^erj to gather, pluck
collegial [kuli^i'al] collegiate
collo f'kjluj m. neck, lap
collocar [kulu'kar] to put
tolonia [ku'lonfv] f. colony
colza ['koizTs] f. barley
combater [kombv'ter] to combat
combinagdo [kOmbinv'sauJ f.
combination
comboio [kom'boiu] m. train
combustivel [kOmbuf'tivci] (w.)
combustible
comegar [kumd'sar] to begin
comedia [ku'ms&iv] f. comedy
comer [ku'mer] to eat
co(m)memorar [kumdmu'rar] to
commemorate
co(m)mercial [kumdrsi'al] =
co(m)merciantefkum9rs} 'vntd] m.
merchant
co(m)m€rcio fku'mersfuj m. com-
merce
com(m)eUer fkunid 'terj to commit
co(m)migo [kii'migu] with me
co(m)misao [kumi'svuj f. com-
mission
c6(m)moda ['komu 'dv] f. chest of
drawers
co(m)modo[komuOu] commodiiQXJi^
co(m)mover f'kumuverj to move
coCm)muntcagdo [kumunikv 'svu]
f. communication
eomnosco [ko'nofkuj with us
coma ['komu] how
companheiro [kompv'jiutruj m.
companion
comparagao [kompvrv 'sva] f.
comparison
comparecer [kompisry ser] to
appear
compartimento [kompvrti 'men-
tuj m. division, compartment
compasso [kom'pasuj m. com-
pa8s(e8)
compatriota fkompv 'triotv] m.
and f. country-man (-woman)
compendio [kom'pendiu] m. com-
pendium
completar [komph'tar] to conj-
plete
complicar [komplt'karj to com-
plicate
composto [kom'poftuj compound
comprar [kom'prar] to buy
compre(he)nder [komprien 'derj
to comprehend
comprido [kom'pri&u] long
concdho [kd'svfhu] m. council;
district
concertar fkds^r'tarj to mend,
repair
concha ['kofej f. shell
concorrer [koku'rrer] to concur
concorrencia fkoku'rresivj f.
competition
concurso [ko'kursu] m. con-
course, crowd
conde(m)nar [kondd'nar] to con-
demn
condigao [kondp'svuj f. condition
condisciptdo [kondtf'sipulu] m.
school-fellow
condiicta [kOn'dutv] f. conduct
confessar [kofd'sarj to confess
confianga fkdffvsvj f. con-
fidence
con forme [kd'form9] like, con-
form
confuso [kO'fuzu] mixed, con-
founded
congratular [kOgrvtu'lar] to con-
gratulate
conhecimento [kojidsi' mentu] m.
knowledge
428
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
conquista [ko'kiftv] f. conquest
consciencia [kdfsf'esivj f. con-
science
conseguir [kosd'gir] to reach
eonselho [ko'svfiu] m. advice
consentir [kosen'tirj to consent
consideragdo [kosiffdrv 'svuj f.
consideration
consider ar [kosi&d'rar] to con-
sider
consist i?' [kOsjs'tirJ to consist
consoante [kosu'vntd] f. con-
sonant
consocio [ko'sosiu] m. com-
panion, associate
cansolo [ko'solu] m. consolation
CQnstaivte [kdf'tvntdj steady
consiar [kof'tar] to appear, to
be said
constipado [kofW pad'nj , estar —
to have a cold
constiiuigdo [koftitui'svitj f.
constitution
constnicQdo fkoftru'svuj f. con-
struction
consuUa [ko'suitv] f. consulta-
tion
c(mta ['kontv] f. account, bill
contagioso [kdntv^'ozu] con-
tagious
contar [kon 'tar] to count, reckon
contente [kon'tentd] content
contar [kon'ter] to contain
contettde [kont^'uffu] m. contents
continuar [kontinu'arj to con-
tinue
conto f'kdntuj m. tale, story;
— de reis = 1000 milreis
contra [^kontrv] against
convento [ko've ntuj m. convent
conversa, conversagdo [ko'versv,
kdv9rsv's^uj f. conversation
convicQdo [kovik'svuj f. con-
viction
convidar fkovi'&arj to invite
copia f'kjpiaj f. copy
dor fkorj f. colour
c^r [korj, de — by heart
coragOo fkurn'svuj m. heart
cor 6a [ku'roe, 'krov] f. crown
cor oar jku'ruar] to crown
corpo f'korpuj in. body
correio [ku'rretuj m. post,
courier; — geral chief post
office
corrente [ku'rrent?] f. current,
stream
correr [ku'rrerj to run, flow
corresjJonde^icia fkurrtfpon'de-
s}vj f. correspondence
corrigir [kurro'sir] to correct,
to mend
cortar [kur'tav] to cut
corte fkortd] m. edge, cut •
cdrte ['kortd] f. court
cortejo [kur'tvju] m. train, at-
tendance
cortes [kiir'tef] polite
cortesia [kurt9'zi:u] f. courtesy,
bow
cortiga [kur'tisu] f. rind, bark
cortigo [kur'tisu] m. bee-hive
cortir [kur'tir] to tan
corvo f'korvuj m. raven
coser [ku'zer] to sew, coabt
along
costa f'koftvj f. coast, shore
costumar [kuftu'mar] to be ac-
customed
costura [kuf'turv] f. sewing
qostureira [kuftu'rvfi'v] f. seam-
stress
couro f'koruj m. leather
couve ['kovd] f. cabbage
cova ['kovTs] f. hole, grave
c6xa ['kofe] f. thigh
cozer [ku'zer] to cook, boil,
bake
cozido fku 'zi&r] m. boiled meat
cozinha [ku'zijiv] f. kitchen
crdneo [krvnyu] m. skull
cravo I'kravxi] m. pink, clove
creagao [krjv'svu] f. creation
creador [kr}v'&or] m. creator
crear [kr} 'ar] to create
creatura fkrw'turv] f. creature
cridito ['kreifitu] m. credit, re-
putation
crenga f'kresv] f. faith
crer fkrerj to believe
crescer [krdf'serf to grow
criado, a [kry'adu, krt'a&s] 8.
servant
crianga [krf'vss] f. child
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
429
criar [kri'arj to breed, produce,
educate
crime ['krimaj m. =
criminoso [kr^mi'nozuj criminal
am [km] raw
cruel [kru'et] =
cruz [kru'.f] f. cross
cuidado [kuy d'adu] m. care
cujo f'kuguj whose
culpa f'ktiipiej f. fault
cultivar fkuUi'varJ cultivate
cumplice fkUmplisoJ m. accom-
plice
c^mtilo f'kumulu] m. heap
eunhado, (-a) pcu'jia&uj s.
brother-(8i8ter)-iii-law
cunho f'kujiu] m. stamp, coin
cura [ kurv] s. cure, curate
curaiivo [kurv'tivuj curing
curioso [kuri'ozuj cu?ious
curral [ku'rraij m. sheep-fold,
pen
curso ['kursuj m. course, race
curto ['kurtuj short
cxispir [kuf'pir] to spit
c\i8ta ['ku/tsj f. cost, expense,
pain
custo ['kuftuj m. cost, diffi-
culty
cutelo [ku'telu] »n. knife
cutilcida [kilty la&v] f. cut, wound
czar [kd'zar] m. =
D.
dddioa f'dadivvj f. gift
dado [ da&u] die
dama ['dvmv] f, dame, lady
damasco [dv 'majku] m. damask ;
apricot
da(m)no [dsnuj m. damage
dansa ['dvsvj f. dance
dar [darj to give
data f'datvj f. date
debaixo [dd'tatfuj under
debalde [dd'tald?] in vain
dihil I'detii] weak
dihito I'debituJ m. debt
decencia fdd' sesiv] f. decency
decidir [ddsd'&ir] to decide
decifrar [ddsi'frar] to decipher
decima . [' d€»imv] f. tenth
declaragdo [ddklvrn'svuj f. de-
claration
decUnar [dsldi'nar] to decline
declive [dd'klivd] m. steep
decoro [dd'koni] m. decorum
decorrer fddku'rrerj to elapse
decreto [dd'krstu] m. decree
decuplo f'dekupluj tenfold
dedal [da'&al] m. thimble
dedicar [de&i'kar] to dedicate
dedo ['ded'uj m. finger
defeito [d9'faituj m. defect
defender [ddfen'derj to defend
deferir [ddfd'rir] to defer
defesa [ddfeza] f. defence
defeso fdd'fezuj m. forbidden
definitivo [ddfdnd'tivu] definitive
defronte [dd frontd] opposite
defunto [d/funtu] defunct
degredo [dd'gre&u] m. exile
deitar [dni'tar] to lay down,
cast
deixar [dvi'far] to let, leave
deleitar [ddl^i'tar] to delight
delgado [dd'ga&uj thin
deliberar [ddlitd'rar] to de-
liberate
delicado [ddli'kaffu] delicate
demais, demasiado [do'maif, dd-
m'BZt'a&uJ too (much)
demente [dd'mentd] foolish, mad
demi(t)tir [ddmd'tir] dismiss
democrata[ddmu'kratv] m. demo-
crat
demora [dd'moris] f. delay
demostrar [ddtnuf'trar] to de-
monstrate
denso f'desuj dense, thick
dentado [den'tadu] toothed
dente ['denta] m, tooth
dentista [den'tiftv] m. dentist
dentro ['dentruj within
dependente [ddpen 'dentd] depend-
ing
deplorar [ddplu'rar] to deplore
depor [dd'porj to deposit
depdsito [dd'poz^tu] m. deposit
depressa [d9 presaj quick
derradeiro [ddrrv 'cfviru] last
derreter fdarra'tcrj to melt
derrota fdd'rrotvj f. defeat
430
Portuguese-Englieh Vocabulary.
desafogar [ddZBfu'gar] to free,
clear
desagraddvel [d9zvgrv 'davd] dis-
agreeable
desalento ff^^'lentu])^^
desanimo [de zmiimuj j -^
desapparecer [dQzvpvrd'ser] dis-
appear
desapprovar fdjzapru'varj dis-
approve
desarmamento [ddzamiv 'mentuj
m. disarming
desarranjo [ddzv'rrv^u] m. con-
fusion, disorder
desastre [d9 'zajtrd] m. disaster
desatar [dpzu'tarj to untie,
loosen
desa(tJtengao [ddzvte' svu] f. want
of attention
desa(t)tencioso \
[ddzutesi 'ozuj I impolite,
desa(t)tento | inattentive
[ddzv 'tentii] J
desharatar [djgbvi'v 'tar] to waste
desbastar [dl^tvf'tar] to rough-
hew
desbotar [df^tu'tarj to dis-
colour
descalgar fdffkai'sarj to pull off
(shoe or glove)
descalgo [d^f'kahu] bare-foot-
ed
descansar [dtfkv'sar] to rest
descanso [d}f'hvsu] m. rest, re-
pose, ease
descurga [d}f'kargv] f. discharge
descqscar [dt/kvf'karj to peel,
husk
descender [dijsen'der] to des-
cend, proceed
descer [dff'ser] to descend
descida [d}f'si&v] f. declivity
descoberta [dyfkubertv] f. dis-
covery
descobrir [dffku'brir] to dis-
cover
desconfianga [dtfkdff 'vsv] dis-
trust
desconkecido [dyfkojfid' si&u] un-
known
desconsolo [dffko'solu] m. af-
fliction
descontente [difkon tentd] dis-
contented
descoser [difku'zer] to unsew
descredito [d}f'kr€d}tu] m. dis-
credit
desciado [dyj'kut&u] m. descuido
desculpa fdi/'kuipvj f. excuse
desde ['de^^d] since
desdem [df^'&v%] m. disdain
desejo [dd'zvgu] m. desire
desembarago [ddzimhis 'ram] m.
ease, quickness
desencaminhar [ddztkemi 'jiar]
to mislead
desengano [dQze'gvnu] m. un-
deceiving
desenho [dd'zvjiu] m. drawing
desenvolver [ddzwoi'ver] to de-
velop, display
desertar [ddzdr'tar] to desert
desespero [ddz}J'p6ni] m. des-
pair
desfazer [diffv'zer] to undo
desfeita fdtf'fvitv] f. insult
desgraga [d}$'gras^] f. disgrace
designar [ddzi'jiar] to design
deslumbrar [d}glum'brnr] to
dazzle
desmaio fdig'mafu] in. swoon
despacho [djf'pafu] m. dispatch
despedir [dtfpd'&ir] to dismiss
despir [dif'pir] to undress
destine [dif'tinu] m. destiny
destruir [diftru'ir] to destroy
deter [dd'ter] to detain
determinado [ddtdrmi'naffu] de-
cisive
detrds [dd'iraf] behind
devagar [daw 'gar] slowly
dever fdd'ver] m. duty
deveras [dd'vervf] really, indeed
devolver fdavoi'ver] to restore
dez [dsf] ten
dezembro fd^'zembruj December
dia f'diaj m. day
didlogo fd}'alugu] m. dialogue
dictado [di'ta&ii] dictation, pro-
verb
di(f)ferenga [difd'rensv] differ
rence
diCfXicU [dyfisil] difficult
dignidade [dignt' ffaih] f. dignity
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
431
diligente [daU'^entd] diligent
'^diminuir [d^mi 'nuirj to diminish
direcgdo [dire 'svuj f. direction •
direito [di'rvitu] straight, direct,
m. right, law; pi. duties
dirigir [ddry'^ir] to direct
discipido [difsipulu] m. pupil,
disciple
dispensar fdjfpen'sarj to dis-
pense
disponivel fdifpu'niveij dis-
posable
dispdr [dif'por] to dispose
disputa fdif'putisj f. dispute
dissolver [disol'ver] to dissolve
distdncia [d'lf'tvs'tv] f. distance
distincto [d^f'tintu] distinct,
distinguished
diverso [di'versu] diverse
divida ['divid'ej f. debt ,
dividir [ddva'&ir] to divide
divino [dd'vinu] divine
dizer [di'zer] to say.
d6 [do] f. pain, compassion
dobra [ ddbra] f. plait
dobrar [du'trar] to double
dobro f'dobruj double
doce f'dosoj m. sweet(meat)
docil f'dosjij docile
doenca [du'esv] f. illness
doerde [du'ent?] sick
doloroso [dulu'rozu] painful
dom [do] m. gift
domestico [du'msftiku] domestic
domicilio [dumD'silju] m. dwell-
ing
dominar [dumt'nar] to lord,
command
doming 0 [du'migu] m. Sunday
dominio [du'minju] m. dominion
dona ['done] f. (land)lady,
owner
dono ['donu] m. owner, land-
lord
dor [dor] f. pain
d[ormir [dur'mir] to sleep
dourar [do'rarj to gild
doutor [do' tor] m. doctor
droga ['drogv] f. drug
droguista [dru 'giftv] m. druggist,
grocer
duplo ['duplu] double
duque, duquesa ['dvkd, du'Tceze]
duke, duchess
duragao [durv'svu] f. duration
durante [du'rvntB] during
durar [du'rar] to last
dureza [du'rezv] hardness
duro ['duru] hard
duvida ['duvid'e] f. doubt
duvidar [duvi'&ar] to doubt
duvidoso [duvi'&osuj doubtful
duzentos [du 'zentus] two hundred
duzia ['duziv] f. dozen.
ebuli^Iio [ibuli'svu] f. ebullition
economico [iJcu 'njintku] econo-
mical
ediQuo [idi'snu] f. edition
edificar [iffj^'kar] to edify
edificio [i&^'fisiu] m. edifice
edital [idi'taij m. edict
editor [i/fi'tor] m. =
educar [x&u'kar] educate
e(f)fectivo [ifs'tivu] effective
e(f)feito [i'fmtu] effect
c(f)ficaz .[ifi"kaf] efficaqious
Egi(x>)to [i'situ] m. Egypt
ei-lo(s), eil-a(s) or eila [vilu(]),
'mln(f)] there is, there are
eira ['v\rv] threshing-floor
eis [yff] there is
electrico [i'letriku] electric(al)
elegante [iWgvnt?] elegant
eleger [iU^^r] to elect
eleigao [ilet's^u] f. election
eleito [i'leitu] m. elected
eleitor [ilyi'tor] m. elector
eleoar [ih 'var] to raise, elevate
elogio [ilii'^iu] m. elogy
eloquente [ilu'kwentd] eloquent
embaixador [imbaifv 'ffor] m.
ambassador
embarago [tmbu'rasu] m. em-
barrassment
embarcar [mb^r'kar] to emhsLvk
embeber [imhd'ber] to imbibe
einbolsar [imboi'sar] to put into
a purse, pocket
embolso [im'bolsu] pocketing up
embora [tm'borv] m. neverthe-
^ less; ir —, se — to go away
432
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
enibranquecer [tmbrvkd 'serj to
whiten, to grow white
embriagar ftmbrjv'garj to in-
toxicate; to transport
embrulhar [tmbru'^arj to wrap
up
embrydho [Tm'bru^uJ tn, parcel
emendar [imen'dar] to mend
emigragdo [imigrv 'svuj f. emi-
gration
emmagrecer [imvgrd'sdr] to grow
lean
emmalar [imv larj to embale
emmudecer [imu&d'ser] to silence
emogao [imu'svu] f. emotion
empalUdecer [impvli&d 'serJ to
grow pale
empenhar [%m'p9'jfiar] to engage,
pledge
empenho [im'pejiuj m. pawn,
engagement
emplastro [im'plaftru] m. plaster
empregado [tmprd'gadfu] m. of-
ficial, functionary
empregar [Imprdgar] to employ
emprego [im'pregu] m. employ-
ment
empre(h)ender [mpr}dn' der] to
ucdertake
empresa [im'prezv] f. enterprise
emprestar [imprdf tar] to lend
emprhtimo fitn prsfttmuj m.
loan
empurrao [impu'rrvu] m. push
empurrar[impu'rrar]\^ ^
empuxar [impu far] \ ^
encadernar [ikvd'ar nar] to bind
(books)
encaminhar [tkvm} 'jiar] to direct,
guide
encanar [ikis'nar] to canalise
encanto [t'kvntu] m. charm
encargo [i'karguj m. charge
encarnado [tkvr'na&u] incarnate
encarregado [ikisrrd' ga&u] char-
ged
encerrar [Ud 'rrar] to shut or lock
up ^ ,
enchente [tfent9] m. inundation,
swelling
tncher [i'fer] to fill, to rise
encobrir [tkubrir] to cover
encolher [iku'/ier] to shrink,
shrug
encommendar [tkumen 'dar] to
recommend
encontrdo [ikon'trvu] m. shock
encontrar [ikon'trar] to meet
encontro [i'kontru] m. meeting
encosta [I'kostv] f. declivity
encostar [tkuf'tar] to lean
enderego [idd'resu] m. direction
endireitar [idirvy'tar] to make
straight
en4rgico fi'ner^ikuj energetic
enfadonho ftfv '&opu] tiresome
enfasUado [ifvft}'a&u] weary,
loathful
enfeitar [ifvt'tar] adorning
enfeite [i'fvitp] m. garb, attire
enfermar [ifdr'mar] to grow
, sick, fall ill
enfermo [i'fermu] sick, ill
en for car [ifur'kar] to hang
enfraquecer fifreka 'serf to
weaken, slacken
enganar figv'nar] to deceive
engano fi'gvnu] m. error, mis-
take
engarrafar ftgvrrv'fa)] to bottle
engenho fl'^vjiu] m. engine,
machine
engommar ftgu'marj to starch,
iron
engraqado figrv 'sa9u] merry,
graceful
engrandecer ftgrvnda'serj to en-
large
enguUr [igu'lir] to swallow,
devour
enigma fi'nigmv] m. =
enjoar fl^u'ar] to be sea-sick
enlagar [Uv'sar] to interlace,
entangle
enleio [I'lviuJ m. perplexity;
charm
enlutar filu'tar] to cover with
mourning
ennohrecer finubra'serj ennoble
enredo fi'rreffuf m. intrigue
enrolar firru'lar] to roll, to
wrap
enrouque^er firroks 'serf to make
hoarse
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
433
ensaio [I'saiu] m. essay, rehear-
sal
entalhar [TntisTiar] to carve
entdo [in'tvu] then; well?
£nte ['entd] m. being
entender [mten'der] to under-
stand, mean
entendido [mten di&o] initelligent
enterro [in'terroj m. burial
entoar [intu'ar] to tune
€ntrada [tn'tra&e] f. entrance
entranhas [in'trvjivf] f. pi
bowels, heart
entrar [in'trar] to enter
entre ['enird] among, between
entregar [intrd'gar] to hand,
deliver
entregue [m 'tregd] delivered up
entreter [mtrd'ter] to divert,
amuse
entrevista [mtr9'viftv] f. inter-
view
entristecer [mtriftd'ser] to sad-
den
entrudo [in'trud'a] m. carnival
enumeragdo [inumars 's§uj f.
enumeration
envelhecer [ivefiD'ser] to make
or grow old
envenenar [ivdno'nar] to poison
enverdecer [ivdrda'ser] to make
or become green
envolver [wol'ver] involve
enxame [I'fvmd] m. swarm
enxerto ft fertuj m. graft, scion
e)ixdfre [i'fofrd] m. brimstone
enxupar [ifu'gar] to dry,
wipe
enxuto [i'futu] dry
4pico f'epikuj epic
epidemia [ipd&i'mia] f. epidemy
epiderma [ipi' (fermv] f. epi-
dermis
epigraphe [i'pigfvfd] f. epigraph
epilogo [i'pilugu] m. epilogue
epistola [i'pistulvj f. epistle,
letter
epoca ['epiikv] f. epoch
equilihrio [iki'li:fir}u] m. equi-
librium
equipdgem fiJci'pa^viJ f. equi-
page, furniture
Portuguese Conversation-Grammar,
eqiiivaler [ikivv 'lerj to be equi
valent
equivoco [i'hiviiku] m. ambiguous
ermida [ir'mi:&v] f. hermitage
ermitdo firmi'tvuj m. hermit
errar [i'rrar] to err
erro ['erru] m. error
erudito [iru'&itu] well-read
erupgdo [irup'svuj f. eruption
ervilha [ir'vifiv] f. pea
esboqnr fijbu 'sarj to sketch
escada [if'ka&v] f, stairs
escdla [if'kalvj f. ladder, scale
escaldar fifkaidarj to scald, bum
escapar [ffkis'par] to escape
escarlate [ifkvr'latd] scarlet
escarnecer fifkvrnd 'serj to scoff,
rail
escdrneo [ifkarniu] m. mockery
escasso [yf'kasu] scanty
esclarecimento [yjklvrdsi 'mSntu]
m. clearing
escola [if'kolv] f. school
escolher [ifku'^erj to choose
esconder [ffkon'derj to hide
escosses [ifku'sej] m. Scotch
Escossia [ifkosiv] f. Scotland
escova [}'Jko:vv] f. brush
escraviddo ffjkrvvi 'dvujf. slavery
escravo [if kravuj m. slave
escrever fffkro'ver] to write
escripto fff'kritu] written
escriptor ftfkri'torj m. writer,
author
escrivaninha fifkrivv 'nijiaj f.
writing-desk
escrivdo [ifkri'vvu] m. clerk
escrofulas fyf'krofulvf] f. pi.
scrofula
escrupulo fif'krupulu] m. scruple
escudeiro fifkii 'd'^yru] m. squire;
upper servant
escudo ftf'kud'uj m. shield
esculptor f}fkui'torJ m. sculptor
escumoso ftjku'mosu] frothy
escurecer fifkurd 'serJ to darken
escuro ftf'kuiruj dark
escusa f}f'kuzvj f. excuse
escusado fifku 'za&u] superfluous
escutar fyfku'tar] to hearken
esforgar fiffur'sar] to streng-
then; — -se to endeavour
484
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
tsforgo [if'forsu] m. effort
esgotado [y^gu'ta&u] exhausted
esgrima [t^'griimv] f. fencing
esguio [i^'giiu] lank
esmagar [i^mv'gar] to bruise
eamaltar [ys^^al 'tar] to enamel
esm^ro /?j meru] m. care, dili-
gence
esmola [ig'molv] f. alms
espago [if'pasu] m. espace
espagoso [tfpv'soizu] espacious
espada [if'pa&Te] f. sword
espalhar ['tfpv'harj to scatter
Espanha [i/'p^ji^J f. Spain
espanhol [ifpv'jiotj Spanish
espantar [ifpyn'tar] to startle
espanto fif'pvntuj m. fright
especial fifp}s*'aij =
especialidade [ifpis^vli'&ad^d] f,
speciality
espide [j/'peistid] f. species
espectador [tfpetv &or] m. spec-
tator
especulagao [ifpdkvlv 'svu] f.
speculation
espelho [}f'pvfiu] m. mirror,
looking-glass
esperanga fifpd'rvsvj f. hope
esperar [ifpd'rar] to wait, hope
espertar [ifppr'tarj to awake
esperto [i/'pertuj Bp-nghUj, brisk
espesso [ifj'pesu] thick, close
esphera [i/'feirvj f. sphere
espiga [if'pi'.gv] f. ear (of com)
espingarda [}fpl'gar&v] f. gun
espinha f}f'pijivj f. spine
espinho [ff'pijiuj m. thorn
espirito [ifpiriitu] m. spirit
espirrar [ffpi'rrar] to sneeze
esplendido [if'plendi&u] splendid
esponja [}f'pO$Ts] f. sponge
espontdneo [}fpon'tisn}u] spon-
taneous
tspora [yf'porv] f. spur
esposo, -a fif'pozu, tfpozvj s.
husband; wife
espreitar [jfprvi'tar] to spy
espremer [tfprd'mer] to press,
squeeze
esquadra [tf'lcwa&rsj'f. squadron
esquecer ftfke'serj to forget
esquecido fifke'sid'uj forgetful
esquerda fif'kerdej f. left hand
esq^ierdo [ifkerdu] left
esquina ftf'kinvj f. corner
esseficial [isS'sfiai] essential
estabelecimento [jftvtdhsi 'mSntuJ
m. establishment
estagao ffftv'svtij f. station
estada [if'ta&vj f. abode
estado [{f'taOu] m. state
estaldgem [}ftv'lagvi] f. inn
eatampa [ff'timpv] impressioo,
print
estampilha [if'tvmpifiv] f. stamp
estanciu [}f'tvsivj f. station;
abode
estanho f}f'tvjiuj m. tin
estante [}f'tvntd] f. book-shelf
estar [ij'tar] to be
estdtua [if'tatuv] f. statue
estdtuto [tfte'tutu] m. statute
eaUf -a ['eftd, 'estv] this
estender ftften'derj to extend
estSril [ff'terii] sterile, barren
estilo [ff'tiilu] m. style
estima [tf'tiimv] f. esteem
estimar [tfti'mar] to estimate
esUmulo [}f'ti:mulu] m. stimulus
estio [}f'ti:u] m. summer
estival [ifti'tai] =
estofo fif'tofuj m. stuff, cloth
estojo [}f'to:$u] m. case, box
estomago [ff'tdmvgu] m. stomach
estorvo [tj'torvuj m. obstacle
estrada ftf'tra&ej f. road
estrado [yf'tra&u] m. estrade
estragar fiftrv 'gar] to spoil
estrago fytragu] m. damage
estrangeiro [}ftrv 'gvfru] foreign-
(er)
estranhar[}ftrv 'jiar]to wonder at
estranho ff/'trvjtu] strange
estrebaria [}ftr%hTs'fi:v] f. stable
estreitar [iftrvi'tar] to straiten
estreito ftf'trvitu] m. narrow,
strait
estrella [tf'trelv] f. star
estremecer f}ftrdma'ser] to shake,
tremble
estrondo [yf'trondu] m. cracking
estudante [}ftu '&vnt9] m. student
estudar [tftu'dar] to study
estudioso [}ftu' Srtozu] studious
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
435
estudo l)J'tu:&n]m. learning
estufa hf'tufvj f. store, hot-
house
estupidez [tjtupi'def] f, stupidity
estupido [y"tu:pi&uj stupid
eternidade [Uarni'&ad'sJ f. eter-
nity
* eterno [i'Urnu] eternal
ether ['stsr] m. =
evaciLar [iw'kwar] to evacuate
evadir [ivTs'Siir] to avoid, es-
cape
evangelho [ivv'^vfiu] in. gospel
evasdo fivv'zvuj f. evasion
evidente [ivi'&entdj evident
evitar [ivi'tar] to avoid
exacto [(v)i'zatu] exact
exagerar [(v)izv^9'r ar] to ex-
aggerate
€xce(i)lencia [(v)if8d'lens}vj f. ex-
cellence
exce(l)lent€ [(■B)ifsd'lentd] excel-
lent
€xce(p)gdo [(v)ifse'svuj f.exce^
tion
exce(p)tq ['if'sstu] except
excluir [ifkluirj to exclude
executar [izdku'tar] to execute
exemplo [i'zemplu] m. example
exSrcito [i'zsrsitu] m. army
exigir [izi'^vr] to claim
exiliD [i'zi:l}u] m. exile
existir [%zif'ti:r] to exist
exito f'vfzituj m. success
expectativa [ijpettt'tivv] f. ex-
pectation
expedir [}fpd'9i:r] to dispatch
experiincia [yfp^r}' esiv] f. ex-
perience
experimento [tfpdri'mentu] m.
experiment
expirar [yfpi'rar] to expire, ex-
hale
expUcar ftfpU'karJ to explain
exportar [}fpur'tar] to ex-
port
expressivo [ifpr9'si:vu] expres-
sive
expresso [if'presu] express
expulsar {ifpul 'sar] to expel
eoctenso [if'tesu] extensive
extracto [if'tratu] m. extract
extraordindrio f}/trsordi'nar*uJ
extraordinary
eodrimo [}J'tre:mu] \ .
extremoso [iftrd'mozu]] ^^^^^e^^^-
fdbrica ['fat>rikn] f. fabric
fabricdr [fvtrikar] to manu-
facture
fdbnco [fe 'briikuj m. fabrication,
manufacture
fdhula rfaf>ulvj f. fable
fabuloso ffvibu'lo.'zuj fabulous
faca ['fakv] f. knife
facada [f'e'ka&v] f. stab
faganha ffv'svjivj f. exploit
face ['fasd] f. =
fachada [fv'fadv] f. fa9ade,
front
facho ['fafu] m. torci , fagot
fdcil f'fasiij easy
facilitar [fvsali'tar] to facilitate
facto ['factu] m. fact
factura [fa'turvj f. facture; bill"
fada f'fadv] f. fairy, fay
fadiga [fv '&i:Qv] hardship,
fatigue
fado i'fadu] m^ fate, popular
song
faia [fa}v] f. beech
faisca ffv'ifkvj f. flake, flash
falar [fv'lar] to speak
falcdo ffai'kvuj m. falcon
fa(l)l€cer [field 'ser] to die
fa(l)lecimento [fvldst'mentuj tn.
death
fa(l)lencia [fv'les/tv] f. failure
fa(2)Udo [fv'li:&u] in failure
faUo ['faisu] false
falta ['faUv] f. want
f altar [fai'tar] to want
falto f'faituj (de) bare (of)
fama f'fvmvj f. fame
familia [fv'miiltvj f. family
faminto ffv'mintuj hungry
famoso Ifv'mo.'zuJ famous
fanal [fv'nal] m. lighthouse
farda f'fard'e] f. uniform
fardo I'farduJ m. pack
farejar [f^rt'^ar] to scent
farelo [ps'relu] bran
28*
436
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
farinha [fn'rijivj f. meal, flour
faro ['faru] m. scent
farpa ['farim] f. harpoon,
grapnel
farpear [farpy'drj to harpoon
farrapo [fu'rrapu] m. rag
fartar [fvr'tar] to satiate
farto [ fartu] satiated
fastio [fef'tiru] m. loathsome-
ness
fatal [fv'tai] =
fatia [fy'ti'vj f. slice
fatigar [fvti'gar] to fatigue
fato ['fatuj m. clothes
fausto f'fauftuj fortunate
fava ['favis] f. beau
favo [ faviij m. honeycomb
favor [f^'vor] m. favour
favordvel [fwu'raveij favourable
faxa [fajv] f. band
fazenda [fn'sendv] f.farm; cloth,
goods
fazendeiro [fvzen'd^tru] m. co-
lonist
fazer [fTs'zer] to make, do
fe [fe] f. faith
febra f'febrnj f. fibre
febre ffcbrs] f. fever
fechar [f}'far] to shut
f^cho [ fTsfu] m. bolt, bar
fecundo [fykUndu] productive
feigao [fvi'svu] f. form, feature
feijao [jf^}'svuj m. French beans
feio [fviu] ugly
feira ['f^}ra] f. fair
feitio [fni'tiu] m. fashion, make,
shape
feito ['ftiHu] m. fact, deed
feitoria [fvitu'riv] factory
feixe ['f^fiJ 1^' faggot
fel [fel] m. gall
felicidade [fdljsf'O'ad'^J f, felicity
felicitar [fMs}'tarJ m, to felici-
tate
Fmx ['felifj Felix
feliz Ip'lif] happy
femea ffemiv] f. female
feminino [f?mo' ninu] feminine
fenda f'fendv] f. chink, crack
fender ffen'derj to cleave
feno [ fenu] m. hay
fera ['fer^J f. wild beast
feretro f'ferdtruj m. bier
feria ['feryv] f. daily wages;
pi. holidays
ferida [f? 'ri&e] f. wound
ferir [fd'rir] to wound
feroz [fd'rof] fierce
ferradura [fdrra ffurv] f. horse-
shoe
ferrdgem [f<f'' rragv}] f. iron-
work
f err amenta. [fdrrv'menfB] f. iron
tools
ferrar [fQ'rrarJ to shoe
ferreo ['ferryu] iron ■
ferro ['ferruj m. iron
ferrdlho [fd'rrofiu] m. bolt
fertil ['fertiij fertile
ferver fpr'verj to boil
festa f fe/tr^J f. feast
festejo [fff'tv^u] m. \ fp_|- _i
festivo^ [ftf'tivu] J festival
feto f'fetu] m. fern, fetus
feudo f'fevxlfu] m. fee, fief
fever eiro [fQVo'rviruJm. February
fezes I'fezif] f. pi. dregs
iiagao [fiv'svuj f. spinning
fiador ffiv'd'orj m. bail
fianga [fi'vs^] f. security, bail
fiar [fi'ar] to spin
flcar [fi'har] to remain, become
fidalgo [fi'ffaiguj m. nobleman
fid [f}£i] faithful
figado f'figs&uj m. liver
figo ['figuj m. fig
figueira [f^'g^fr^J f. fig-tree
fUa, fileira [filv, fi'lmrvj f,
file, rank
filha ['fifiv] f daughter
iilho f'fi^uj m. son
filial [fili'aij f. =
fUtro f'fiitruj m. filter
fim [ft] m. end
fmado [fi'naOuJ dead
final [fi'naij =
findar ffln'dar] to terminate
fineza ffi 'nezvj f. fineness, civility
fingir [fi'jirj to feign
fio ffiuj m. thread
firvia /'firmvj f. firm, signature
firmar ffir'marj to settle, to
sign
firme ['firmjj firm
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
437
fiscal ffif'kaij =
fita f'fitvj f. ribbon
fiocar [fUc'sar] to fix
fixo ['fixsu] fixed
flexivel ffleJc'sivsiJ flexible
floco f'flokuj m. flock, flake
iior [florj f. flower
florescer [flurff'ser] to flourish
floresta [flu'reftv] f. forest
flucttiar [flutu'arj to float
fluido ['flui&u] m. fluid
focinho [fu'sijiu] m. snout
foco ['foicuj in. focus
fdfo [ fofuj soft, spongy
foffdo [fu'gmi] m. hearth, stove
fogoso [fu'^ozu] fiery
foguete [ftt'getd] m. rocket
folar [fu'larj m. Easter-gift
folgar [foi'gar] to rest, rejoice
fdlha ['fofi-e] f. leaf
folhear [fofly'ar] to turn over
the leaves
folheto ffu'^etuj m. pamphlet
fovne ['fojmd f. hunger
fonte ['fdnt9] f. fountain, spring
fora ['forv] abroad ; — de with-
out
foral [fu'ral] m. charter
fdrca fforhv] f. gallows, gibbet
forga ['forsTs] strength, force
forgado [fur'sadu] m. galley-
slave
forgar [fur'sarj to force, compel
forgoso [fur'sozu] necessary
forja ['fors^J f. forge
fdrma ['formv] form
fdrma ['formv] f. mould
formar [fur' mar] to form
formiga [fur'migvj f. ant
formdso [fur'mozu] beautiful
fornaTha [fur'naJiv] f. furnace
forno ['fornu] m. oven
forrar [fu 'rrar] to line
fdrro ['forru] m. lining
fortaleza [furtv'Uzv] f. fortress
forte [fortd] strong
fortificar [furtdfi'karj to fortify
fortuna [fur'tun'e] f. fortune
fosso ['fosu] m. ditch
foz [fof] f. mouth •
fraco I'fraku] weak
fractura [fra'tury] f. fracture
frade f'frad'^J m. monk, friar
frdgil ['fra^rij fragile
franco ['frvku] frank, loyal;
post-paid
frango, -a ['fr^gu, -'g] chicken
franqueza [frv'kezvj, f. frank-
franquia [fry'ki.'e] f. post-pay-
ment
fraqueza [fr^'Jcezv] f. weakness
frasco ['frafku] m bottle
fraternal, fraterno [frvtdr 'rial,
frv^ernu] fraternal
frecha ['fref'e] f. arrow
fr^cheira [frs fvirTs] f. loop-
hole
fregids [fn'gef] m. customer
frei [frvi] m. monk, brother
freio [frviu] m. bit, bridle
freira ffrvirtfj f. nun
freioco f'fr^ifiij m. ash-tree
frente ['frentej f. front-side
frequentar [frokwen'tarj to fre-
quent
frequente [fr9'kwente] frequent
fresco [frefku] fresh
fretar ffrd'tar] to freight
frete [ frete] m. freight
frieza [fr}'ezv] f. coldness
frio [friu] cold
fronteira [frOn'tvirv] f. frontier
froia [Jrotv] f. feet
froiixo ffrofuj slack, loose
fructa f'frutvj f. fruit
fructifero [frii'tifdru] fructi-
ferous
fructo ['frutuj m. fruit
fuga ['fugis] f. flight
fugir [fu'sir] to fly
fulminar ffuimt'narj to fulmi-
nate
fumar [fu'mar] to smoke
fumo ['fumu] m. smoke
fundagdo [fundy'smi] f. foun-
dation
fundar [fUn'dar] to found
fundigao ffiindiseu] f. melting,
fusion, casting-house
fundir [fun'dir] to found
funeral [fimd'raij m. =
funil [fu'niij m. funnel
funileiro [funi'lviru] m. tinker
438
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
furia f'furivj f. fury
furidso [furi'ozuj furious
furtar [fur 'tar] to rob, steal
furto [ furtuj m. theft
fuso f'fuzuj m. spindle, spool
futU ffuUiJ futile
futuro [fu'turu] m. future
fuzilar [fuzi'lar] to shoot
gdbar fge'barj to praise
gdbinete fg^bi 'net9j m. study,
closet
gado ['gaffuj m. cattle
gaiola [gay'dlv] f. cage
gaivao [gai'vvuj m. martinet
galgar [jal'gar] to climb up
galgo [gaigu] m. greyhound
gadjlego fg^'leguj m. porter
Gd(l)lia ['galiv] f. Gaul, Gallia
ga(l)Ucismo [gvli 'si^muj wi.Galli-
cism
ga(l)Un}iu [g^'UjivJ f. hen
ga(l)linheiro [gvli'jimruj m.
poulterer
ga(l)^ [g^lu] wz: cock
galope [gv'lopd] %\ gallop
game(l)la [gm 'meU] f. porringer,
bathing- vat
gancho ['gvfuj m. hook, hair-
pin
gangrene [gv 'grenvj m. gangrene
garihar [ga'jiarj gain, earn
ganho f'gajiuj m. gain, profit
ganir Igv'nir] to howl
ganso f'gvsuj m. goose
garfo ['g&rfu] m. fork
gargalhada [gvrgv'dadvj f.
laughter
garganta [gvr'gvntv] f. throat
garoto [gv'rotu] m. street-arab
garra [garrv] f. claw, paw
garrafa [gv'rrafv] f. bottle
garrido [gv'rri&u] nice, smart
gastar [g^ftar] to spend
gcisto f'gaftuj m. expense
goto i'gatu] m. cat
gatuno fgv'tuno] m. rogue
gdvea ['gavtvj m. scuttle
gaz Igaf] m. gas
gazeta [gv'zetv] f. gazette,. news
paper
gazua [gn'zu:^] pick-lock
geito f'gvHuJ m. turn, skill
geitoso fjet'tozuj fit, apt
gelar [^9'lar] to freeze
gelea [^d'lvw] f. jelly
gilo f'xeluj m. ice
gemer [gd'mer] to lament
gemido [ss'mi&u] m. groan
ge(m)ma f'^emvj f. yolk
ginero f'jendruj f. gender
generoso [^dnd'rozu] generous
ginio f'stntu] m. genius, dia-
racter
gengiva fse'^iivvj f. gums
gen7-o (serruj m. son-in-law
getite f'^enta] f. people
gentil [$Sn'ti:l] genteel
gentio [^en'ti'u] m. heathen,
pagan
geral f^j'rai] general
germdnico fj9r'in'BnikuJGeYm3.n
germinar [^9rmi'narJ to germi-
nate
gesso f'^esuj m. gypsum
gesto ['s^^ftu] m. gesture
ginja f'siS^J f- common cherry
girar f^i'rarj to turn, move
round
girasol [^iru'soi] m. =
giro ['^iru] in. circulation
glacial fgln'sfalj =
gldria ['ghnv] f. glory
glorificar [glurdji'kar] to glorify
glorioso [glurt'osu] glorious
goivo fgcivu] m. gillyflower
gola ['golvj f. collar
golfo I 'goifuj m. gulf
goUso fgu 'lozuj lickerish
golpe [goip^] m. blow
g6(m)ma ['gomvj f. gum
gordo f'gorduj fat, greasy
gordura [gur'dtirvj f. grease
gorgeta [gur'^etej f. gratuity
gdrro fgorruj m. cap
gosar [gu'zarj to enjoy
gdso fgozu] m. enjoyment
gostar [guf'tar] to like
gusto f'goftuj m. taste, pleasure
gostosamentelguftjzv 'ment?] with
pleasure
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
439
gostoso [guf'tozu] savoury
g6(t)ta ['gotTs] f. drop
go(t)tejar [guti'^ar] to drop
governar [guvdr'nar] to govern
governo [gu'vernuj m. govern-
ment
graqa f'grasvj f. grace, elegance
gracejar [grvs}'^ar] to joke, jest
gracioso [grvsfi' ozu] graceful
grade [gra&d] f. grating
graclo f gra&uj m. rank, will
granadeiro [gr^ny' d'ettu] m.
grenadier
grandeza [grvn' dezTs] f. grandeur
grangear [grv^t'arj to obtain
graniso [gr's'mizu] m. hail
grdo fgrvuj m. grain, corn
grasnar [grTs^'nar] to croak
gratidao [grTstVdvu] f. gratitude
grato ['gratu] grateful
graluito [gre'tuytu] gratuitous
grave ['gravd] =
gramira [gr'e'vu'.rv] f. engraving
graxa ['grafv] f. blacking
grelha ['gr^sdv] f. roaster
gremio ['gremjuj m. guild, cor-~
poration
grtllo ['griliij m. cricket
grisalho [gri'zafiu] greyish
grito ['grUu] m. scream, cry
grosa ['grozv] f. gross
groselha fgru'zvdvj f. currant
grosseiro [gru'sviru] clumsy
grosso ['gromj big, thick
•unhir [ '
grumble
grunh ir fgru 'jiir
J to
grunt,
grupo [grupu] m. group
guarda ['gnardv] f. guard
guarda-chuva [gwar&v 'fu:vv] m.
umbrella
guarda-livros [gwar&Ts 'livru/J m.
book-keeper
guardanapo [gwardv'najmj m.
napkin
guarda-iwrtao [givar&epur 'tvuj
m. porter
guardar [gicvr'dar] to keep,
preserve
guerra f'gerrvj f. war
guerreiro [gd' rrvi-rii] m. warrior
guia ['gi:v] m. and f. guide
gxiiar [gi'ar] to guide
guindaste [gm'dafte] m. crane
gy(m)ndsio [gi'naziu] m. gym-
nasium
gijCmJndstico [^i'naftiku] gym-
nastic.
H.
(li)dhU ['amj able
(h)ahilitar [vddli'tarj to enable,
qualify
hahitagdo [atitv-' svu] f. habitation
hdhito ['abituj m. habit
habitual [ebitu'aij =
habituar [vMtu 'arj to accustom
hdlito f'alituj m. breath
harmonia [vrmu'nin] /".harmony
hasta ['affej f. spear, lance
haste ['aftd] stem
hastear [vfti'ar] to hoist
haver [v'ver] to have
haver es [^'ver}f] m. ph fortune
hebria, -a [i'breuj Hebrew
hedimido ft&t'dnduj hideous
Mlice ['elisd] m. helix, screw-
propeller
helvetica [H'vetiku] Helvetic
liera ['srv] f. ivy
heranga [i'rv&v] f. inheritance
herdade [ir'da&9] f. heritage
herdar [ir'dar] to inherit
herdeiro [ir'da}ru] m. heir
herde [i'roi] m. hero
heroico [i'roiku] heroical
herca f'erwj f. herb, grass
hesitar [izi'tar] to hesitate
(h)iate ['laid] m. yacht
hilaridade [ilvri'dadd] f. hilarity
hippddromo [i'po&rumo] m. race-
course
hirto f'irtuj stiff, rigid
historiador [ifturi'e'd'orj m.
historian
historico [if'torikuj historical
historia [iJ"tor}v] f. history
hoje ['o^ij to-day
hollandes folvn'defj rn. Dutch
(h)ombro ['dmbruj m. shoulder
homem ['omv}] man
homendgem [om9'nagviJ m. honi-
age
homicida fum9'si:d'ej m. and f.
murderer
440
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
homicidio [uvid 'si:&fu] m. murder
honesto [u'nestu] honest
honrado [o'rradu] \ i^^^^urable
honroso [o rrozuj )
(hjontem f'dntvtj yesterday
Tiora ['orTs] f. hour
horta ['orfe] f. kitchen- garden
hortaliga [ortv'lisvjf. vegetables
hortela [ortd'lv] mint
hortelao [ortd'lvu] m. gardener
horto f'oHuJ m. garden
hospeddgem [oJp9' cfa^vi] f. hos-
pitality
hospedaria [ofpd&v 'H-.tb] m. lodg-
ing-house
Iwspede ['ofpddd] m. guest
hospital fofpi'tal] m. =
hostil [of' tit J hostile
humano fu'mvnoj human
h^mid'o f'umi&uj damp
humilde [u'miidd] humble
hungaro [itg^ruj m. Hungarian
Hungria fu 'gri:^] f. Hungary
I.
Iberico [i'bsrilcuj Iberian
igar [i'sarj to hoist
ida l'i:&nj f. going
idade [i'&atd] f. age
idioma [i&^'omv] m. idiom
iddlatra [i'&olHry] idolatrous
idolo f'i'duluj m. idol
idoso [i'ffozu] aged
ignobil [ig'nobiij ignoble
ignorante [ignu'rvntjj ignorant
igndto [ig'notu] unknown
igualar figwv 'larj to equal
igualha [i'gicafiv] f. like
Uha f'i'nvj f. isle
ilharga [i dargv] f. flank, side
i(l)legal fil9'gaij =
tmpeto ['impdtuj m. impetuosity
impettiosofimp^tu'ozuJitDpetuoxis
impio [lm'pi:o] impious
implorar [tmplu'rar] to implore
itnpdr [tm'por] to impose
importardo [impurtv' svu] f. im-
portation
importante [impur'tvntd] im-
portant
importar [impur'tar] to import
importe [im'portd] m. cost, sum
importuno [tmpur'tunoj m. im-
portune
impossivel [impu'siveij impos-
sible
imposto [im'poftu] m.- duty
impostor [impuf'tor] m. =
imprensa [%m 'presvj f. press
impressao [tmprd'svuj f. im-
. pressi6n, print
impresso [im'presitj printed
imprimlr [unpr^'tnirj to print
improviso [zmpru'viizu] un-
foreseen
imprudente [impi'u' &entd] im-
prudent
impune [im'pune] unpunished
inaudito [inau'&itu] unheard of
incendio [t'sendfu] m. confla-
gration
ince^iso [z'sesuj m. incense
inchar [tfar] to swell
incidente. [isi'dentd] m. inci-
dent
inclinado [ikli'na&u] inclined
incluir [iklu'ir] include
indusQ [i'kluzu] enclosed
inco(in)modo [I'komud'uJ inconve-
nient, s. m. molestation
incorrer [iku'rrer] to incur
incredulo [t'krs&uJu] incredulous
incrivel [i'Tcrivei] incredible
inculto [I'hultu] incult
Incumbir [ikum 'birj to charge
indagar [tndv'gar] to inquire
indemnisar [inddmni 'zarj indem-
nify, compensate
independente [independent?] in-
dependent
indice ['indis?] m. index
indiCf)ferenQa [indifd'TesTs] f. in-
difference
indigena [in'disdn'e] m. indi-
genous
indigente [indi'^ent^] indigent
indigno fin'dignuj unworthy
indio ['tndiuj Indian
indistincto [indof'tintu] indis-
tinct
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
441
individuo [tdd'vi&wu] m. indi-
vidual
imdizhel [md9' ziivsi] unutterable
indole f'induUJ m. character
irnddmito fm'cbmituj untamed
indulto [i'duituj m. privilege
industria [in ' du:ftr}v] f. industry
mduzir [tndu'zir] to induce
ifUddto [i'ne&itu] un printed
infa(l)Uvel [if^'lvvsij infallible
infdncia [I'tysin] f. infancy
infante [I'fvntd] infant
inferior [Ifdn'or] =
inferno [i'fsrnu] m. hell
i/nfimo f'ifimuj verymean,
meanest
influir [iflu'irj to influence
influencia [iflu'eswj f. influence
informe [%'forme] formless
ingenue [i'^enuo] ingenuous
ingrato [i'gratu] ungrateful
inhospito [in ^ofpituj inhospitable
inimigo [ind'imgu] m. enemy
injusto [i'^uftuj unjust^
i(n)noc€nte finu'sent?] innocent
inquieto [tki'etu] uneasy
inquirir [ikd 'rir] to inquire
insaluhre [isv 'luibrdj insalubrious
insecto [i'setu] m. insect
inserir [iso'rir] to insert
insignificante [is9gnifi'Mnt9j in-
significant
insipido fi'si'pid'u^ insipid
instar [ij'tar] to insist
instrucQoo [tftru'svuj f. in-
strucion
instruir [iftru 'irj to instruct
instia f'isuej f islet
insulto [i'suitu] m. insult
insurgente [isur'gentdj insurgent
Integra [intdgru] entire, righ-
teous
inteiro [in'tetru] ire, whole
inte(l)ligivel[lntdlf 'ji-vsij intelli-
gible
intengdo [tnte'svu] f. intention
intender [inten'der] to intend
intento [in'tentuj m. intention
interesseiro [intdvd' sviru] selfish
inter jeigao [intdr3^}'svu] f. in-
terjection
interlocutor [intprluhu'torj m. =
intermedia [intdr'ms&iuj m. me-
diation
interna [in'terno] m. internal
interprete [in'terprdtd] m. in-
terpreter
interrogar [mterru 'gar] to inter-
rogate
interromper [tnt9rrdm 'per] inter-
rupt
interrupto [mte 'rrutu] inter-
rupted
intestino [intdf'tiinu] m. intestine
intimo fintimuj intimate
intripido [in'trspidu] intrepid
intruso [in'truzo] m. intruder
inundar [inun'dar] to overflow
inutil [i 'nu:tiij useless
invadir [iw 'dir] to invade
invdlido [I'valiMi] invalid
invasdo [ive'zvu] f. invasion
inveja [i've^v] f. envy
invenqao [ive'svu] f. invention
internal fivjr 'nal] winterly
inverno [i'vsrnu] m. winter
investir [ivif'tir] to invest
invocar [tvu'karj to invocate
ir [i:r] to go
ira firs] f. wrath
irmd [ir'mv] f. sister
irmayiar firms 'nar] to match
irracional [irrssiu 'nai] irra-
tional
irregular [irrdgu'lar] =
irritar [irri'tar] to irritate
irrupgao firrup 'siu] f. irruption
isento [i'zentu] exempt, free
J.
Jd fsa] already
jacintho f^v'sintu] m. jacinth
jacto f'gaktu] m. throw
jamais fga'maif] (n)ever
Janeiro f^v'msiru] m. January
jane(l)la [gv 'nelv] f. window
jantar [gvn'tar] m. dinner
Japdo fs^'pso], a — Japan
japones fsspu'nef] Japanese
jardim fssr'di] m. garden
jarra f'sarre] f. jar
jazer f^v'zer] to lie
jaziga /j» 'ziigu]. m. grave
442
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
to fast
jejuar fs9su'ar]
jeowm. /js»'jm7 »"• fasting
Jerdnymo [^d'ronimu] Jeroni-
mo
Joao [jw'vu] John
joelho ['^wvfiu] m. knee
J090 Tjo^m/ w. play
joia I'soiTs] f. jewel
Jorge ['s^^S^J ^- George
Jornada [gur'naffv] f. journey
jornal fgur'naij m. journal
Jose [$u'ze] m. Joseph
joven ^ovvt] m. and f. young
man or woman
judeo, judia [gu'&eu, gu'd'i:v]
Jew, Jewess
jugo t'suguj m. joke
juiz fgu'if] m. judge
jtdgar fsui'garj to judge
julho ['zuHu] m. July
junco f'^uTcuJ reed
junta ['guntej f. juncture, as-
sembly
jurar fgu'rarj to swear
juro ['guru] m. rent, interest
justiga [guj'tisv] f. justice
justificar [guftafi'karj to justify
Jiisto fguftuj just
juventude [suven'tud?] f. juveni-
lity
L.
L&bio f'labfuj m. lip
lago f'lasuj m. knot
lacrar [Iv'krar] to seal
ladear [Iv&t'arJ to flank
ladeira [le'&mrv] f. declivity
lado ['ladu] m. aide
ladrao, ladra [h'&rvu, la 'd'rv] s.
thief
ladrilho [Iv'&rirm] m. brick,
tile
lagar [In' gar] m. wine-press
lagarta [Iv'gartv] f. caterpillar
lagarto [Iv'gartuJ m. lizard
lage f'lasuj f- flagstone
Ixigo ['laguj m. lake
Idgrima ['lagrimv] f. tear
lama [IvmvJ f. dirt, mud
lambareiro [Ivmbu ivsiru] glut-
tonous
lamber flnm'berj to lick
lamentar [Ivmen'tar] to lament
Idmpada ['Umpv&v] lamp
lampejar /Ivtnpi'garJ to shine,
lighten
langa f'lvsvj f. lance
langar [Iv'sarJ to throw, vomit
lance [Ivsd] m. throw, occasion
lancha [IvfvJ f. launch
langa f'lvsuj m. throw, distance
languir [ly'gir] to languish
lanifero [Iv'nifdru] wool-bearing
lanterna [Ivn'ternv] f. lantern
lapa f'lapv] f. cave, den
lapidar [Ivpi'&ar] lapidary
laranja [Iv'rvgv] f. orange
lareira fle'rvirvj f. fireplace
largar [Ivr'gar] to let go
largo [larguj large, ample
larguesa [Ivr'gezv] f. largess,
generosity
largura [Ivr'guruJ f. wideness
lasca ['laJTcTB] f. fragment
Idstima ['laftimej f. pity
lastro [ laftru] m. ballast
lata f'tatv] f tin-plate
latdo [Iv't^u] m. brass
lateral [Ivtd'rai] =
latido fln'ti:(TuJ m. yelping
latim [Iv 'ttj m. Latin
latino [Iv'tiinu] m. Latin
latoeiro [Ivtu'viru] brazier
lavadeira [lvvv'dv}rv] f. laund-
ress
lavar flv'varj to wash
lavatorio [Ivvv'toriu] m. washing-
stand
lavoura flv'vorvj f. husbandry
lavrador [Ivvru &or] m. peasant,
husbandman
lavrar [h'vrar] to work, to till
leal [U'ai] faithful, loyal
ledo [U'vu] lion
lebre ['hbr^J f. hare
lectivo [le'ti'.ou] scholastic
legal [h'gaij =
legar [h 'gar] to leave, bequeath
legenda [h'^-en&B] f. legend
legivel [h'giivfl] legible
legna ['hgice] f. mile, league
lei [let] f. law
leildo [Ivi'lt'uJ m. auction
leitdo [Ivi'tvu] m. sucking-pig
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
443
leite [Ibitd] m. milk
leiteira [Ivi'tvirv] f. milkmaid
leito flvUuJ bed, couch
leitor [Ivy' tor] reader
leitura [lv}'turv] f. lecture,
reading
lembranga [lem'brvsv] f. re-
membrance
lenibrar [lem'hrar] remember
leme ['IsmdJ in. helm
lefiQO ['lesuj m. handkerchief
lengol [le'soij sheet
lenha ['IvjivJ f. wood
lente [ 'lentd] s. f. = ; s. m. pro-
fessor, reader
lento f'lentuj slow
leque f'lskdj m. fan
ler [lerj to read
lesma ['le^mej f. slug
leste ['IsJhJ m. East
letra [leti'v] f. letter, type,
change
letreiro [h 'try}ru] m. inscription
levantar [hv§n 'tar] to raise, lift
levar [la'var] to carry
leve ['lev?] light
liber dade [libdr'dad^?] f. liberty
libra ['Ivbrv] f. pound
licenqa [li'sesv] f. permission,
leave
licito f'li:situ] lawful
lida ['li:&e] f. toil, labour
lide I'li'd'dj f. combat, fight
liga [liigis] f. garter; alliance
ligadura [ligv'cfu:rv] f. ligature
ligar [li'gar] to tie
ligeiro [Wgefru] light, slight
lilaz [li'laf] f. lilac
lima ['limv] f. file
Umao fli'mvuj m. lemon
limite fli'mit^] m. limit
limoeiro [limu'struj m. lemon-
tree
limpar [lim'par] to clean
limpo f'limpti] clean, neat
Undo I'lindu] beautiful
lingiia f'llgun] f. tongue, lan-
guage
linha fUjis] f. line
linho f'lijiu] w. linen
liquido ['IvM&u] liquid
liriOf lis flirtu, Ii:f] m. =, lily
liso f'li'zu] smooth
lisongear [lizdgt'ar] to flatter
lividD ['lim&u] livid
livrar [li'vrar] to deliver, save
livraria [ivrv'ri:^] f. library
livre ['liiv^d] free
lixo ['U:fu] m. filth,
lobo f'lobu] in. wolf
lodo f'lodu] m. mud
logo [logu] directly
lograr [lu'grar] to obtain, suc-
ceed
logro [logru] m. cheating, fraud
lonibo I'lombu] m. loins
Una [lone] f. sail-cloth
longe [log}] far
longinquo [Id'gikwu] remote
longo ['l6gu] f. long
louga ['lost'] f. table-plate, china
louco ['loJcii] mad
louro ['loru] fair; m, laurel
lousa ['lozv] f. slate
louvar [lo 'var] to praise
lucro ['luh'u] m. profit
lugar [lu'gar] m. spot place
lume ['luimd] m. fire
lusitano, luso [liuzu] Portuguese
lustre ['luftre] m. lustre, gloss
luta ['lutv] f. fight
luto ['lutu] m. mourning
luva ['Iwvn] f. glove
luxo ['lufu] m. luxury
luz [In:/] f. light
luzir [lu'ziir] to shine
lyceu [li'seuj 771. lyceum.
M.
Magd [mu's^] apple
macaco [ma'kaJcuJ m. monkey
magada [nns'sa&e] f. blow with
a mace
mdchma ['makinv] f. machine
macio [mTs'siiu] smooth, soft
madrugada [m'ed'ru' ga&e] f. day-
break
maduro [mV&uroJ ripe
mae [mvi] m. mother
magnifico [mag'nifiTcu] magnifi-
cent
magna ['magiiv] f. bruise;
grief
444
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
magro fmagruj m. meagre, lean
maioria [m'eju'riiv] mayoralty,
majority
mats [maif] more
malentendido [malentgn'did'uj m.
misunderstanding
malholo[m'B'levulu]mjXid\QYo\eni
malha fma^aj f. mash.
malldgro [mv'logru] m. failure
malvado [mal'va&u] m. wicked
mamifero [m^'tnifaruj m. mam-
miferous
mancebo [mv'sebu] m. youth
mancha ['mvfv] spot, stain
manco ['mvku] lame
mandar [vwn 'darj to command,
send
maneira [mv'nvirv] f. manner
manga ['mvgv] f. sleeve
manha ['rmsjnv] f. handiness,
cheat
manha fmv'ji§J f. morning
mania [mv'ni:Te] f. mania,
madness
manifestar [mvndfif'tarj mani-
fest
mano, mana f'mvnu, 'mvnv] s.
brother, sister
manso ['mvsu] f. tame
mania ['mvntv] f. blanket, horse-
cloth
manteiga [mvn 'tvigv] f. butter
manto f'mvntuj m. mantle
moo fmvuj f. hand
mar [mar] m. sea
maravilha [mvrv'vi^v] marvel;
wonder
marca ['markvj f. mark
margo ['marsnj m. March
mare [mv'rs:] f. tide
mdrgem ['mar^vi] f. border
marido [mv'ri:&u] m. husband
marinha [mv'rijiv] f. marine,
navy
marinheiro [mvri'jiviruj m.
mariner
marmelo [mvr'mdu] m. quince
maroto [mv'rotuj m. knave
marqius fmvr'ke:/] m. marquis
martello [mvr'telu] m. hammer
mas [mvf] but
mdscara / mafkvrvj f. mask
massa ['masv] f. haste
mastigar [mvfti'garj to chew
mastro ['maftruj m. mast
niata fpiatej f. wood, forest
matahorrao fmatshu'rrvuj m.
blotting- paper
matar [mv'tar] to kill
maternal [mm9r'nal] \ j^^ternal
matinal [mvti'nal] early
mato I'maiuJ m. thicket, wood
mdximo ['masimuj greatest,
principal
mediano [md&i'vnu] middling
medico ['me&iku] m. medical
medida [md'&v.&n] f. measure
medir [md'&ir] to measure
m^do ['me&uj m. fear
medrar [md'&rar] to thrive
meigo ['mvigu] gentle, meek
meio [mviu] m. half, middle
mel fmcij m. honey
melao [m9'lvu] m. melon
tnelhor [mi'fior] better
m^tnbro ['membruj m. member
memdria fma'nijrtvj f. memory
mengao [me'sdu] f. mention
mendigo [mgn'diguj m. beggar
menor fmg'norj minor
menos ['menu/ J less
mensal [me'sai] monthly
mente ['menta] m. mind
mentir [men'tir] to lie
tnentira [men'tirej f. lie
mercado [m<yr'ka&u] m. market
mercadoria [mdrkv&u 'ri:^J f.
ware, goods
merce [mpr'sej f. mercy
mercieiro [rndrs} 'vtruj m. mercer,
retailer
merecer [m9rd'ser] to deserve
merenda [md'rendv] f. afternoon
tea
mergulhar [msrgu'^arj to sub-
merge
mes [mefj m. month
mesa f'mezvj f. table
mesmo fme^mu] same
mestre, mestra I'mejtrd, 'meftrv]
s. master, teacher
metade fm»'ta&9] f. half
m^trico f'metrikuj metrical
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
445
meter [md'terj =
mexer [m}'fer] to move
miar [m}'ar] to mew
migalha [mi'gv/iv] f. crumb
milagre [mi'lagrs] m. miracle
milha ['mv.fivj f. mile
milho ['mi:fiu] m. millet
7nimo ['mi:mu] caress, mimic
mimoso [mi'mozu] tender
nvina ['mi:nv] f. mine
mineiro [mi'nviru] m. mineral
Minho I'mijiu] m. Minho, pro-
vince and river of Portugal
minimo ['mi:nimu] least
miolo [mt'olu] m. crumb; brains
mirar [mi'rarj to look at
miseria [mi'zerjv] misery
missa f'misvj f. mass
mister [myj'tsr] necessary
misturar [mtjtu'rar] to mix
m6 [mo] f. mill-stone
mohil ['mdbH] movable
mobilia [mut>i:l}v] f. furniture
moclw f'mofuj m. owe
mdQO fmosuj young
moda ['mo&v] f. fashion
moderar [mu&d'rar] to moderate
modesto [mu'&eftu] modest
modico ['mo&iku] moderate
modista [mu'diftv] milliner
modo ['mod'u] m. mode, manner
moida [mu'e&is] f. coin
moer [mu'er] to grind
mola f'molaj f. spring
moldiira [mol'duirv] frame
molhar [mu'^ar] to moisten,
wet
molle [mold] soft; lax
momento [mu'mentuj m. moment
monarc(h)a [mu'nark^J m. mo-
narch
mwije [md^J m. monk
monstro ['moftru] m. monster
inontanha [mOn'tvji'e] f. moun-
tain
monte fmOntdJ Mount
morada [mura&aj f. dwelling,
abode
mor alidade fmwreli'dadd] f. mo-
rality
morango [mu'rvgu] m. straw-
berry
morar [mu'rar] to dwell
morder [mur 'derj to bite
morrer [w.u'rrer] to die
morte ['myrtd] f. death
morto f'mortuj dead
mosca ['mofk'e] f. fly
mostarda [muf'tardvj f. mustard
mosto f'moftitj m. must
mostrador [muftr^ 'd'orj m. coun-
ter, dial-plate
mostrar [mus'trar] to show
mouraria fmor^ 'ri:vj f. quarter
of the Moors in Lisbon
mouro I'moru] m. Moor
movel f'moveij m. piece of fur-
niture
mover [mo'verj to move
movimento [movi'mentu] m. mo-
vement
muar [mu'arj m. and adj.
mule, mulish
muda ['mu&e] f. change
mudar [mu'&ar] to change
mudo I'mu&u] dumb, silent
mugir [mu'^irj to low, to roar
muito I'mtimtu] much
mula I'mul^J f. (she-)mule
mulher [mu'fier] f. woman, wife
mitUa ['muUv] f. fine
mundano [mundvnu] worldly
mundo f'munduj m. world
muralha [mu'raR's] f. wall
murchar [mur 'far] to wither
murmurio [mur'mu:r}oJ m. mur-
mur
muro ['muru] m. wall
musgo ['mu^gu] m. moss
musica ['muzik^J f. music
mutuo ['mutwuj mutual
myope ['mi:upd] short-sighted
mysterio [mi['ter}u] m, mystery
Naho ['nat>uj m. turnip
nada ['na&e] nothing
namorado [namu'ra&u] amorous
ndo [nvu] no
nariz [ms'rif] m. nose
narraQox) [n^rr^'svuj f. narra-
tion
446
Portuguese-English Vocabulary,
nasceriQa [nvf'sesvj f. birth,
origin
nascente [nvf'senU] m. spring
nascido [nvj'si&u] m. born
nascimento [nvfsi 'men tuj m. birth
nativo fnv'ti:vuj native
natureza [nvtu'rezv] f. nature
naufrdgio fnau'fragiuj m. ship-
wreck
ndufrago ['naufr^guj m. ship-
wrecked
naval [nv'val] =
navalha [nv 'vafiv] f, razor,
pocket-knife
nave f'navsj f. =
navegdvel [niBV9 'gaveij navigable
navio fne viuj m. ship
nebuloso [natiu'lo.'zuj foggy
necessidade [ndsdsi' ffaffd] f. neces-
sity
negar [nd'gar] to deny
negociante f7i9gus}'int9j m. mer-
chant
negro ['negru] {m. =), black
nenhum [n9 'jiumj none
neto ['netuj m. grandson
nevar [n9'var] to snow
neve [nevd] f. snow
nevoeiro [navu'^fruj m. fog
ninho f'ntjiuj m. nest
nitido ['niiti&u] neat
n6 ['no] m. knot
ndbre ['nolird] noble
noqao fnu'svuj f. notion
nddoa f'no&tcTe] f. spot, stain
nmte ['noHd] f. night
noiva ['naive] f. bride
nojo [no^u] m. tedium, disgust
nome ['nomQ] m. name
nomear [numt'ar] to name
nor a ['norv] f. daughter-in-law
nos [nof] we
no8 [nufi us
nota [notv] f. note
notar [nu'tar] to note, mark
notdvel [nu'tavei] notable
noUcia [nu'ti.-swj f. notice
nova ['njvv] f. news
novSllo [nu'velu] m. clue
ndvo ['novu] new
nii [nu:J bare, naked
nuca ['nukv] f. neck
nu(l)lo ['nulu] null
numero ['numdru] m. number '
numeroso [numd'rozu] numerous
nunca ['nukvj never
nupcias ['nups^vf] f. pi. wed-
ding
nutrir [nu'trir] to nourish
nuvem ['nu.'vv}] f. cloud
0.
Obedecer [dbdSfg'ser] to obey
obediente [Obd&i'ents] obedient
dbito I'obitu] m. death
obrar [o 'brar] to work
obrigagao [obrig^'svu] f. obli-
gation
obrigado [obri'ga&u] obliged
obscuro [obtf'ku:ruJ dark, obs-
cure
obsequiar [ob9Z9Jc*' ar] to oblige
observagdo [ob9S9rvv'svu] f. ob-
servation
obstdculo [obtf'tahulu] m. ob-
stacle
obter [ob?'ter] ta obtain
o(c)casiao [okvzt '%u] f. occasion
o(c)cidente [os/i'dentd] m. west,^
Occident
o(c)correr [ohu'rrer] occur
6cio fosiu] m. leisure
dculo ['okulu] m. eyeglass
6dio ['o&yu] m. hatred
oeste ['weftd] west
o(f)fender [ofSn'der] to offend
o(f)fensa [o'fesv] f. offense
o(f)ferecer [ofdr9'8er] to offer
o(f)ficial [ofds}' ai] official, officer
o(f)ficina [ofd'simv] f. office,
(work) shop
o(fJficio [o'fi:s}u] m. charge
olhar [o nar] to look at
olho ['o^ii] m. eye
oliveira [oli'vvtrv] f. olive-tree
o^ide ['Ondd] where
opinido [optny'vu] f. opinion
o(p)por [o'por] to oppose
o(p)portunO [opwr'tumuj oppor-
tune
6(p)timo ['otimu] best, very good
ora ['orv] now
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
447
oragao for^'svuj f. prayer,
clause
orar [o 'rar] to pray
ordem ['ordmj f. order
ordenado [ordd'nadu] m. salary
orelha [u'rvde] f. ear
orgao ['orgvu] organ
orgvXho [or'gudu] m. pride
oriente [or}'entd] m. orient, east
orificio [on'fi-.stu] m. orifice
origem [o'ri:^vi] f. origin
ornar [or'nar] to adorn
orvalho for'va/iuj m. dew
osso f'osuj m. bone
ourives [o'ri:v}f] m. goldsmith
ouro [o'ru] m. gold
ousado [o'za&u] bold, daring
ousar [o'zar] to dare
outono [o'tomu] m. autumn
outrem f'otrvij somebody else
outro f'otruj another
ouvido [o 'vi-S'uJ m. hearing, ear
ouvir [o'vir] to hear
ovelha [u'vvfiv] f. sheep
ovo fovuj m. egg
oxald [ojv'laj would to God!
Pachorra [pjs'forrv] f. forbea-
rance, patience
paclfico [pv'si.'fikuj peaceable;
pacific
pacote fp^'kotoj m. packet
pago f'pasuj w, palace
pddaria [pad'v'ri:vj f. bakery
padecer fp's&g'serj to suffer
pddeiro [pa'&Bjru] baker
padrdo [pv'&rvu] m. pattern
padrmho [pe'&rijiu] m. god-
father
pai [pai] m. father
paga [pa-gv] f. pay(ment)
pagamento [pvgv'mentuj m.(j^Sky-)
- ment
pagdo fpv 'gvuj m. pagan
pdgeni [paseij m. page
paisdgem [pai'za^v}] f. lands-
cape
pais [pvi:/] m. country
paixdo [pai'fvu] f. passion
paldcio [pv'lagyu] m. palace
2)alavra [pv'lavrej f. word
palha ['paCiTs] f. straw
pdllido ['pali&u] pale
palma ['paimv] pal m(- tree)
palmeira [pal'mvirv] f. palm
tree
pdlpar [pai' par] to touch
pdlpebra ['paijjdbrv] f. eyelid
pancada [pv'katfv] f. blow
panella [pn'iiehj f. kitchen-pot^
cooker
2)anno f'pvnuj m. cloth
pdo [pvuj m. bread
papel [py'i^d] m. paper
para ['pvr^] for
parabens [pierv 'tvif] m. pi. fe-
licitation
pardgem fp'^'ra^vij f. halting-
place; abode
paraiso [pvrv'ijzu] m. Paradise
parar fpv'rarj to halt, to dwell
pardal [pvr'dai] m. sparrow
pardo I'parduJ grey
parecer [pwd'ser] to seem
parecido [pur/ situ] alike
pareddo [pvrd'&vu] m. big walU
mole
parede [pv're&a] f. wall
pa/relha [p^'rvlh'ej f. pair, team
parente [p'e'rentd] related (re-
lation
pardchia, parSquia fpn'roJav] f.
parish
pdroc(h)o fparuku] m. son
par que f 'parka] m. park
parreira [x>'is'rr'Birv] f. vine
parte f'partaj f. part
particij>ar [pvrtdsi' par] to par-
ticipate, partake
particular [pwtiku'lar] =
partida [pyr'tidv] f. depart
partido [pvr'ti&u] m. party
partir fpvr'tir] to depart; to
break
pascer [pvf'ser] to pasture
Fdscoa ['pafkw^J f. Easter
pasmar [p^s 'fnar] to puzzle, to
be stupefied
passa ['pass] f. raisin
passdgem fpv'sagvt] f. passage
passar [pis 'sarj to pass
pdssaro ['jiasvruj m. bird
448
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
passear [pvs'i'ar] to (take a)
walk
passeio fpv'svtuj m. walk
passo ['pasuj m. step
pasta [paftTs] f. portfolio;
paste
pastar [pvf'tar] to pasture
pastel Ipvf'tei] m. pie, pastry
pasteleiro [pvfta'lHru] m. pas-
try-cook
pasto ['paj'tu] m. pasture
pastor [pef'tor] m. shepherd
pata f'patvj f. claw
paterno [ps'fernuj paternal
pato f'patitj m. duck
patrao [pv'trvu] patron
pdtria ['patri'e] f. native country
patricio //;» 'tri:s}uj m. patrician
patroa [p's'trov] f. mistress
pauta fpautv] f. tariff; lines
paiUado [pau 'ta&o] ruled
pacao [pv'vmi] m. peacock
pavilhao [pvvi'livu] m. pavilion
paz [paf] f. peace
pe [pe] m. foot
peao [pl'vu] m. pedestrian
Xieqa ['pssv] piece, play
peccado [pd'ka&u] in. sin
peda^o [p9'dasu] m. piece, bit
pedido [pq'Mi&uJ m. request,
commission
pedinte [pd'&tntd] m. beggar
pedir [pa' &ir J to ask, beg, desire,
order
liedra [pe'^rvj f. stone
pega ['pegv] f. magpie
pegar [pa' gar] to glue, to lay
hold of
peito fp^ftuj m. breast
peixe ['p^}/}] m. fish
pel(l)e ['pd/] f. skin
pel(l)ica [pd 'likvj f. kid-leather
pel(l)o ['pelu] m. hair
pena ['pmv] f. pain, punish-
ment; ter — to be sorry
pender [pen 'derj 1 to hang,
pendurar [jpSndu'rarJ J suspend
penedo [pd nedu] m. rock
penetrar [pmd'trarj to penetrate
penhdr [pi'jior] m. gift, talent
penhorar [pijiu'rar] to engage,
oblige
penitencia [pan'i'ies}'e] f. peni-
tence
penna ['pen's] f. pen, feather
penoso [pd' nozu] painful
pensar [pe'sar] to think
pente ['pentd] m. comb
pentear [penti'ar] to comb
p>equeno [pd'kenu] little
pera ['perv] pear
perante [pd'r^nto] before
perceber [pdrsa'ier] to perceive
percwrer [pdrku'rrer] to run
through
per da ['perdv] f. loss
perdao [par'dau] m. pardon
perder [pdr'der] to lose
perdoar [pdr'dwar], to pardon
pereeer [pdra'ser] to perish
pereira [pd'rmry] f. pear-tree
perfeito [por'fvitu] perfect
perfume [pdr'fuimd] m. =
perigo [pd'rvgu] m. danger
periodo [p9 'riu&u] m. period
permissao [pdrmi'svu] f. per-
mission
perna ['perny] f. leg
perola ['psrulv] f. pearl
persa ['psrss] m.&f.& a. Persian
perseguir [porsd'gir] to per-
secute
persiano [porsyvnu] a. Persian
pertencer [parte 'ser] to belong
perto ['psrtu] near
pesado [pa'za&u] heavy
pesar [pd'zar] to -weigh
pesca ['psfkis] f. fishing
pescogo [pifkosu] m. neck
peso ['pezu] m. weight
pessego ['pesagu] m. peach
Ijessimo ['pssimuj worst, very
bad
pessoa [po'sov] f. person
pez [pef] f. pitch
pharmdcia, farvndcia [fvr masin]
f. pharmacy
photdgrapho, fotografo [fu'to-
grvfu] in. photograph
physico, fisico['fi:ziJcuJm. physical
pia [pi.ti] f. trough, basin
picar [pi'kar] to sting
pimenta [pi'mentv] f. pepper
pinheiro [pf'jtV^u] in. pine-tree
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
449
pinho ['pijiuj m, pine-wood
pintainho [pintTs'ijfiu] m. dab-
chick
pintura [pin'tura] f. picture,
painting
piano f'plvnuj m. project
planta f'plvntvj f. plant, sole,
ground-plan
pluma ['plum's] f. feather
p6 [po] f. dust, powder
pobre ['pobre] poor
p6co ['posuj m. well
poder [pu 'ffer] m. might, power
poHa, poetisa [pu 'eiVj pui 'tiz^J
s. poet
pois [poif] now, afterwards,
then, well
pdlvora ['poivumj f. powder
pomba ['pdmhv] f. pigeon
pombal [pom'hal] m. dove-cot
ponta ['pdnfej f. point, top
ponfe ['pdnt'j] f. bridge
ponto ['pdntuj f. stitch, point
pontual [pontw'al] punctual
por [porj to put
2)6rco ['porkuj dirty, m. hog
porque I'purkd] because; why
porta ['port's] f. door
portador [purtv'&or] m. bearer
portanto [pur'tvntu] conse-
quently
portdtil [pur'tatii] bearable,
pocket ....
porte ['portd] m. post- pay, depart-
ment
portugues [purtu gef] Portuguese
posse ['posd] f. possession
possivel [pu'sl'vei] possible
possuir [pusu'irj to possess
posta ['poftvj post
poste ['poftdj m. stake, pillar
pdsto ['poftu] m. place, post
pdsto que [poftu'ko] though
jpmico ['poku] little
poupar [po'psLr] to spare
povoado [pu'vuadu] populous,
inhabited
pra^a ['prasv] f. place
prado i'pra&u] m. meadow
praia ['praiv] f. shore
pranto ['prvntu] m. weeping
prata ['prafe] f. silver
Portugnese Convorsallon-Grammar.
prato ['pratu] m. dish
prazer [prs'zerj m. pleasure
prazo ['prazu] m. term
preceder [prdsd'der] to precede
precioso lpr98}'ozu] precious
preciso [prd'sizu] necessary,
precise
2)rego ['presu] m. price
prefdcio [p-i-i' fas}u] m. preface
pregar [pre' gar] to preach
pregar [prd'gar] to nail
prego ['pregu] nail, hat-pin
preguigoso [prdgi'sozu] lazy
pergunta [pdr'gunfB] f. question
prejuizo [prdgto'lzu] m. pre*
judice
piSmio ['premnij m. premium,
prize
prenda ['prend'e] f. present,
talent
presa ['prezv] f. prey
presents [prd'zhitd] (m.) present
pressa ['pres^s] f. hurry
prestar [pr}f'tar] to lend, give
pr^stitno l'pr€ftimu]m.^iueB8, use
presunto [prd'zwitu] m. ham
pretexto [prd'teftu] m. pretext
preto ['pretu] m.^ negro, black
primavera [primv'verv] Spring
primeiro [pri'mvpru] first
pHncipe ['pri^pd] m, prince
prindpiar [pr%sdp}'ar] to begin
prisdo [pri'zvu] f. prison
problema [pru "blem'e] m. problem
procissao [prusi'svu] f. pro-
cession
procurar [pruku War] to procure,
seek
prodigio [pru'&v^iu] m. prodigy,
marvel
prddigo ['pro&igu] prodigal
profissdo [prufi'svu] m. profes-
sion
profunda [pru'fun&u] profoimd
progresso [pru'grssu] m. pro-
gress
projictil [pru'getil] m. projectile
prdlogo ['proluguj m. prologue
p>rome(t)ter [prurrw 'ter] promise
pronto [prontu] ready
pronuncia [pru'nusiv] f. pro-
nunciation
29
450
Portugaese- English Vocabulary.
propor [pru'porj propose
prdprio ['propftu] proper
proseguir [prusd'gir] to pro-
secute
prova ['profe] f, proof
provawl [pru'vavd] probable
proveito [pru'vvHu] m. profit
prdximo ['prosimuj next; m.
fellow- creature
Prussia ['prusfivj f. Prussia
Xyrussiano fprus}'vnuj m. Prus-
sian
(pjsalmo ['salmu] m. psalm
publicar IpuNi'karJ to publish
jmJmao [pul'mvu] m. the luDgs
pulo ['ptduj tn. leap, jump
pulsagao [puisfB 'svuj f. pulsation
pulso ['ptiisu] m. pulse
punho f'pupu] m. fist; ruffle
puro f'puruj pure
puxar [pu'farj to push
Quadrado [hwv'ffra&u] square
quadragesimo [kuv&rv '^ezimu]
fortieth
quadro ['kwa&ru] m. picture
quadrupede [kwv '^rupd&d] in.
quadruped
qual [kwai] which
qualidade [kwvW ffaffd] f. quality
qualificar [kicvhk'kar] qualify
qualquer [kwai' Jeer] any
quando ['kwvndu] when
quantia [kwvn'ti:n] f. sum
qiiantidade [kwvnii'&a&d] f.
quantity
quanta ['kwvntu] how much?
as much as
quarenta [kwv'rentv] forty
quarto ['kwartu] room
quasi ['kwazi] almost, nearly
quatorze [kv'torz^J fourteen
quatro [ kivatru] four
que fky, kij which; that; what?
qucbrar [ka'trar] to break
queda ['kedv] f. fall
queijo ['kvigu] m. cheese
queimar [kvt'm&r] to burn
queixa [ kvtfvj f. complaint
queixo ['kvyfu] m. chin
quern pcvtj who
quente ['kentd] hot
quer . . quer [ker] whether . . or
querer [ka'rerj will, want
querido [To'ri&u] beloved
questao [kif'tvu] f. question
quieto [ki'etu] quiet
quinhentos [ki'jientufj five
hundred
quinquagesimo [kwikwiB '^ezimuj
fiftieth
quinta ['kmtvj f. fifth; farm
quintal [km tal] m. —, garden
quinto I'ktntu] fifth
quinze ['kizd] fifteen
quotidiano [kot9d't'vnu] daily
R.
Eabeca [ri'v'bekv] f. violin
rdbo f'rrat>uj m. tail
raga ['rrasv] f. race
rachar [rre far] to rend, cleave
raciocinio [rrvsfu 'sinju] m. rea-
80n(ing)
radiante [rrisdi'Qntd] radiant
rainha [rfe'iyis] f. queen
raio f'rratu] m. ray, beam;
flash of lightning
raiva [Wraivv] f. wrath
raiz- [rrv'if] f. root
ralhar [rrv dar] to scold
ramalhete [rr^mv' fietd] m. nose-
gay
ramo [Wramu] m. branch
rapariga [rrispa'rigv] f. girl,
lass
rapaz [rrv 'paf] m. boy, lad
raposa [rrv'pozv] f. fox
raro [rraru] rare
rasgar [rrv ^' gar] to tear
rasgo ['rra^gu] m. stroke, trait
raso ['rrazu] shorn
raio ['rratuj m. rat
razao [rrv'zvu] f. reason
real [rry'al] =
rebocar [rrobu'kar] to tow
rccado [rrd'ka&u] m. message,
errand
reca(hjir [rrekv'ir] to relapse
recebedor [rrossb^ &or] m. col-
lector
Portaguese-English Vocabulary.
451
receber [ms/berj to receive
receio [rr9'sv}u] m. fear
receoso [rrdsi'ozu] apprehensive
receita [rr9'svitv] f. income
recente [rrd'senta] recent
recepQao frr9se'svuj f. reception
reciho [rd'sibu] m. receipt
reciproco frr/siprukuj reciprocal
recita ['rrssitv] f. representation
reclamo [rrd'ld^mu] m. bird-call
recobrar frrdlcu'brarj to recover
recollier [rrdlcu'fier] to gather,
with draw
recolhimento [rrdkufii' mentu] m.
gathering
recompensa [rrshUm'pensv] f. re-
compense
reconciliar [rrahdstji'arj recon-
cile ^ [ful
reconhecidofrr9 'Jcujv> 'sidujtha.nk-
recordagdo [rrdkur&v'seu] f. re-
membrance
recreio [rrd'Tcrvtu] m. recreation
rectidao [rreti d'vuj f. rectitude
recto ['rreluj righteous
recuar [rrd'hwar] to draw back
recusa rrd'kuzv] f. refusal
rede ['rred?] f. net (work)
redempQao [rrddvi'svu] f: re-
demption, ransom
reduzir [rrd&u'zir] reduce
reflectir [rrdfle'tir] reflect
reflexao [rrdfls'smi] f. reflection
reftexo [rrd 'flehsuj m. reflex
refugio [rrd'fu^uj m. refuge,
shelter
rega f'rregvj f. irrigation, wa-
tering
regago [rro 'gasuj m. lap, bosom
regador [m 'gs '&or] m. watering-
pot
regoLo [rrd'galu] m. pleasure,
muff
jregar [rrd' gar] to water
regateira [rrdgv'ta'irv] f. huck-
^teress
regedor [rr}sd'ffor] m. governor
regeneragdo [rrt^on^rv 'svu] f.
regeneration
reger [rry'^er] to govern
regicida [rr}gd' si&is] m. and f.
regicide
regist(r)o frrt' sift(r)uj m. re-
gister
rego f'rreguj m. furrow
regosijofrrdgu ziguj m. joy, mirth
regra f'rregrvj f. rule(r)
regressar [rragrg'sarj to return
regua frregicvj f. ruler
regular [rr?gu'larj =
rei [rrvi] m. king
reinado [n'v}'na&u] m. reign
reinar [rr,ii'nar] to reign
reino ['rrvjnu] m. kingdom
rHs Irrif^J] m. pi. Portuguese
(copper) coin
reitor [rrv%'tor] m. rector
rejeitar [rry^vi'tarj reject
relagcLo [rrdln'svu] f. relation
reldmpago [rrd'lympvgu] m.
lightning flash
relatorio [rraln'toriuj m. report,
account
relevo [rrd'levu] m. relief
reUgio rrd'hjtuj m. watch
relva ['rrsiwj f. turf
remar [rrd' mar] to row
remate [rrd' maid] m. conclusion,
cornice
remediado [rrdmdd"} 'ad'u] well-off
remediar [rrdmddi'ar] to remedy
remedio [rrd'mediu] m. remedy
remessa [rrd'mesv] f. remittance
remeter [rrdmd'ter] to remit
remo ['rremu] m. row
remorso [rrd'morsu] m. remorse
remoto [rrd'motu] remote
renda ['rrendis] f. lace
rendeiro [rrSn'dviru] m. tenant,
renter
render [rren'der] to render;
subdue
rendimento [rrendi'mentuj m.
revenue
rendoso [rren'dozu] productive
renegar [rrdnd'garj to disown
renovar [rrdnu'var] to renew
renovo [rrd 'novu] shoot, offspring
renunciar [rrdnHsf'ar] to re-
nounce
reo [rrei] m. accused
repafdv [rrop^'rar] to repair
reparo [rrd'paru] m. satisfaction,
attention
29*
452
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
repartigdo [rrdpvrti' svu] f. re-
partition
repente [rr9 'pen*9/,(<^^—) suddenly
repentino [rrdpen'tinu] sudden
repetir [rrdpd'tir] to repeat
repleto [rrd'pletu] overcrowded;
fat
repdlho [rtd'poflu] m. headed
cabbage
reposteiro [rrdpuf'tvvru] m. cur-
tain
repouso [rr9 'pozu] m. repose, rest
repre(h)ender[rrdpr}ender]teT^Te'
hend
represa [rrd'prezvj'f. lock, sluice
reproduzir [rrdpruifu' zir] repro-
duce
repuoco [rrd'pufu] m. spout
requerer [rrdkd'rdr] to solicit
res [rref] f. cattle
res [rrEf] (do chao) m. groundfloor
resentir (-se) [rr9sen'tir(-8d)] to
resent
resfriar [rryffri'ar] to cool
resina [rre'zimv] f. resin
resistir [rrdzif'tiir] to resist
resma f'rregmnj f. ream
resoluto frrdzu'lutuj resolute
resolver [rrdzol'ver] to resolve
respeito frry'pvituj m. respect
respirar [rryfpi'rar] to breathe
responder [rrffpon 'derj to answer
restituigao [rr}ft}tui svu] f. res-
titution
resto ['rreftu] m. rest
resumir [rrdzu'mir] to resume
resurgir [rr98ur'$ir] to revive
resusdtar [rrdsufsi'tar] resusci-
tate
retalho [rrd'tadu] m. remnant
reter [rrd'ter] to withhold, re-
strain
retirar [rrdti'rar] to retire
retrato [rrd'tratu] m. portrait
reiiniao frrtuni'vuj f. reunion
reverente [rrovd'rSntd] reverent
reverso [rrd'versu] m. opposite,
back-side
revez [rrd'vef] m. reverse, mis-
fortune
revtzar [rrdvd'z&r] to do by turns
revisao [rr9vi'zvuj f. revision
revistar [rr9mf'tar] to revisit;
reza ['rrezv] f. prayer
rezar [rrd'zar] to pray
r(h)eumatismo [rreum ib 'ti^m u] m .
rheumatism
ribeira frri'bvtrvj f. brook, bank
ribeiro [rri'bviru] m. rivulet
ridiculo [rrd'&tkulu] ridiculous
rifa f'rrifv] f. lottery
rijo ['rri$u] strong, hard
rim frrij m. kidney
rima ['rrimv] f. rime
rio f'rriuj m. river
riquesa [rri'kezv] f. riches,
wealth
rir frrirj to laugh
risca [rrif'ica] f. stroke
riso ['rriizu] m. laughter
roca f'rroTcaJ f. distaff
rocha f'rrof^] f. rock
rocio [rru'siiu] m. square
roda ['rroffvj f. wheel
rodear [rrulh'ar] to turn round,
encircle
roer [rru'er] to gnaw
rogar [rru'gar] to entreat
rogo f'rroguj m. request, en-
treaty
rol [rroi] m. roll, list
rola ['rrolv] f. turtle -dove
rolo f'rroluj m. roll, cylinder
romance [rru'mvsQj m. =
romano [rru'mvnu] (m.) Roma^
rosa ['rrozv] f. rose
rdsto f'rrojtu] m. face
roto ['rrotuj torn
rotuJo f'rrotiduj m. label
rotibar [rro'tar] to rob
rovi>o f rrot>uJ m. robbery
rouco f'rrohuj hoarse
roupa ['rropa] f. clothes
rouxinol frrofi'noij m. nightin-
gale
roxo f'rrofu] violet
rua frruivj f. street
rude ['rrutfd] =
rugir [rru'^ir] to roar
ruido [rru'itfu] m. noise
ruivo f'rruivuj ruddy
rumo f'rrumuj m. rhumb-line
russo f'rrusuj Russian
rustico ['rru/tihuj m. rustic
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
453
Sabdo [sv'bvuj m. soaj)
sd(h)hado ['saibv&u] Saturday
saber fsv'berj to know
sdbio f'sabtu] wise, learned
sabonete [sebu'neidj m. soap
sabor [av'bor] m. taste, savour
sabre ['sabrdj m. sable
sacar [sv 'kar] to draw, pull
saca-rolhas [sakis'rofivf] m. cork-
screw
sa(c)co I'sakuJ m. sack, bag
sacrificio [svkrdfiigiujm. sacrifice
sacudir [svTzu'&ir] to shake
sadio [sa'MmJ healthy, sound
safar (-se) [sv'farisd)] to run
away
sagrado [sv'graduj sacred
sa(h)ir [sn'irj to go (out)
saia [saiiv] f. petticoat
saibro f'saibruj m. gravel
Sal [saij m. salt
salada [sv'lad'v] f. salad
saldrio fsv'larfuj m. salary
salgar [sal' gar] to salt
salitre [sv'liitrd] m. saltpetre
saliva [sv'lvvv] f. =
salmdo [sal'mvu] m. salmon
salsa [salse] f. parsley
saltar [sal 'tar] to jump
saltear [saUy'ar] to assault
salto f'saltu] m. jump
salvar [sal'var] to save
salm f'salvu] safe
sanar [se'nar] to cure, heal
sanear [svny'ar] to make whole-
some
satrgria [s^'griiv] f. bleeding
sangue [ siegd] m. blood
santificar [s§nt9fi'kar] to sanctify
santo I'sintu] m. saint
sapateiro [svpv'tvtru] m. shoe-
maker
sapato fsv'patu] in. shor
sapo ['sapu] m. toad
saque ['sakd] m. pillage, (drawing
of a) bill of exchange
saraiva [sv'rviw] f. hail
sardinha [svr'dijiv] f. sardine
satisfa(c)Qdo [siBtiffv 'smi] f. satis-
faction
satisfazer [svtyffv 'zer] to satisfy
saiidade [svu &ad'd] f. melancho-
ly, longing
saudar [s^u'&ar] to salute
saude [sv'u&9] f. health
saudoso [svu'&ozu] melancholic
scenario [sd'nariu] m. scenery
sce(p)tro ['s€tru] m. sceptre
sciencia.fsi'estvj f. science
scientifico [sfen'tiflku] scientific
scismar [sis 'mar] to muse^ medi-
tate
se [se] f. see, cathedral
sebe ['sebd] f. hedge
sebo ['sebuj m. tallow
8e(c)ca ['sekv] f. dryness
se(c)co I'sekuJ dry
secreto [sd'kretu] secret
seculo ['sekulu] m. century
seda ['sed'v] f. silk
side ['se&dj f. seat
sede ['se&9j f. thirst
sege ['segf] f. chaise
segredo [sd'gre&u] m. secret
seguir [sd'gir] to follow
segundo [ss'gundu] m. second
seguro [sd'guru] secure
seio [sisiu] m. bosom, lap
sets [svif] six
seiva ['s^tvvj f. sap, juice
seixo ['sstfuj m. pebble
se(l)la ['seln] f. saddle
se{l)lo ['seluj m. stamp
selvdgem [ssl'va^v}] savage
sem [sii] without
semana [sd'unvriv] f. week
semear [sdtnt'ar] to sow
semente [sd'mentd] seed
semi . . . ['sdmi . . .] =
sempre ['seprd] always
senao [sd'nvu] except, safe
senha psvjiv]f. sign, mark, watch-
word
senhorio [s%jiu'ri:u] m. landlord
senslvel [se'sivel] sensible
sentenga [§Sn'tesv] f. sentence
sentir [sen'tir] to feel
separar [sdpv'rar] to separate
siquito [sekitu] m. suit
ser [ser] to be; m. being
serao [sd'rvu] m. evening (party)
sereno [sd'renu] serene
454
Portugaese-Englieh Vocabulary.
serio ['serfu] serious
serpente fsdr'pentpj m. serpent
serra f'serrsj f. saw; chain of
mountains
serralheiro [sarre 'fiviru] m. lock-
smith
sessdo [s'/svu] f. session
Hessenta [s9'sentv] sixty
severo [sd'veru] severe
sexo f'ssksuj m. sex
sexta-feira [svtftv'fvim] Friday
silencio [si les}u] m. silence
si(l)laha ['siht)ej f. syllable
sim [si] yes.
sincero [st'seru] sincere
singelo [st'^du] simple
singular [sign larj w. =
sino ['si:nuj m. bell
sitio ['siitiuj m. spot, place
sit(uad)o ['sit(ua&)u] situated
s6 [so] alone, only
soar [su'ar] to ring, sound
soh ['scibd] under
sohre [sdbrd] upon, on
sdbremesa [sotrd 'mezv] f. dessert
sobrenome [sotrd'nomd] m. sur-
name
sobrinho [su'brijiu] m. nephew
sobrio ['sobriu] sober
s6(c)co ['sokuj m. sock; blow
so(c)cdrro [so 'Icorru] m. succour
socio ['sosfu] m. member, partner
so(f)frer [su'frer] suffer
so(f)frivel [su'fri.vci] tolerable
sogra ['sogrv] f. mother-in-law
sogro ['sogru] m. father-in-law
sol [s^] m. sun
sola ['solv] f. sole
solar [su'lar] m. mansion-house
soldado [soi dad'u] m. soldier
soldo ['soidu] m. (soldier's) pay
sole(m)ne [su'Und] solemn
soliddo [suli'dvu] f. solitude
solido ['soli&u] m. solid
soliturio [suit' tar iu] solitary
solo ['solu] m. soil
soltar [soi' tar] to free, loosen
solto [ soitu] free, loose
8om [so] m. sound
sombra ['sOmbrv] f. shade
sombrio [som'briu] shady, dull
8o(mJma ['somv] f. sum
8o(m)no ['sonu] m. sleep
sonho ['sojiu] m. dream
sopa ['sopv] f. soup
soprar [su'prar] to blow
sopro ['sopru] m. blowing, breath
sorrir [su'rrir] to smile
sorte ['sortd] f. sort^ fate
sossego [su'segu] m. calmness
suar [su 'ar] to sweat
sub . . . [sub] . . .] =
subida [subii&e] f, ascent
subito ['subitu] sudden
sublime [su'bli-nw] =
subme(t)ter [submd'ter] to subject
submisso [sub'misu] submissive
subscrt(pJgqo [subykri'svu] f.
subscription
substdncia [si(b}f'tvsfiv] f. sub-
stance
su(c)ceder [susd'&er] succeed
su(c)cesso [su 'sesu] m. success
sueco ['sweku] m. Swedish
sufficiente [sufdsi 'entd] sufficient
suicida [sui'siid's] m. f. suicide
Suissa [sw'isv] f. Switzerland
sujeito [su'xeitu] subject
sujo ['su^vj m. dirty
sul [sul] m. South
su(m)mo ['sumu] highest
siMT [su'dt] m. sweat
super ficie [sup9r'fi:s}9] f. super-
ficies
superfluo [su 'perfluu] superfluous
superior [sup9'r}or] m. =
superstigdo [supdrfti' svu] f. su-
perstition
st^pjplemento [supld'mSntu] m.
supplement
su(p)pdr [su'por] suppose
su(p}portar [supur'tar] support
supremo [su'premu] supreme
supra . . . [^suprv] . . .] =
surdo ['surdu] deaf
surdo-mudo [surdu -mu&u] deaf-
mute
surpresa [sur'prezv] f. surprise
surto I'surtu] anchored
suspeito [sujpvitu] tn. suspect
suspiro [suf'pi'ru] nt. sigh
sustento [suftentu] m. sustenance,
food
susto ['suftu] m. fright
Portuguese- English Vo cab ul ary.
455
Tdbacaria [tvivk-e'riiv] f. to-
bacco-shop
tdbaco [tv'taku] m. tobacco
tabe{l)liao [tvhd'lyvu] nu notary
taholeiro [tvt)u'lv}ruj m. fray,
gaming- board
tahuUta [tvtu'letv] sign (board)
tdbua ['tatuv] f. table(t)
taga ['tasv] f. bowl
tacdo [tv'kvu] m. heal
iacto I'tsLtu] m. touch
talhar [tv'fiarj to cut
talhe ['taftd] m. form, shape
talho f'tafiuj m. cut, chopping-
block
talvez [tai'vej] perhaps
tamanho [tv'mvjiu] (so) great
tanto f'tvntuj so much
tao [tvuj 80, such
tajHir fte 'par] to cover
tapete [tv 'pet 9 J m. carpet
tardar [tur'dar] to tarry
tarde ['tardd] f. afternoon, eve-
ning
tarefa [tv'refv] f. task
taxa ['tsifv] f. tax, rate
tecelao [tdsd'lvu] m. weaver
tecer [td'ser] to weave
tecido [td'si&u] m. tissue
tecto ['teiuj m. roof
tela ['telv] cloth, linen
telegrapho [td'legrvfu] m. tele-
graph
telha [ fed^] f. tile
temer [td'mer] to fear
tempo I'tempuJ m. time
temporal [tempu raij m. =
tenaz [td'nafj f. tenacious
teng&o [ie'svu] f. intention
tencionar [tesiu'nar] to intent
tenente [td'nentd] m. lieutenaut
tentar [ten' tar] to tempt
tSpido ['tepi&w] tepid
terminar tdrmi'nar] terminate
terra ['terra] earth, ground
terreiro [ta'rrsfru] m. terrace,
square
terremoto [tdrrd'motu] m. earth-
quake
tesoura [td'zorv] f. scissors
testa ['teflTs] f. forehead
iestemunha [tijtd 'mujiv] f. testi
mony, witness
texto ['teftuj m. text
tia ['ti:v] f. aunt
tijolo [ty'solu] m. brick
timido I'timi&u] timid
tingir [ti'^ir] to dye
tinteiro [tm'tEtru] m. inkstand
tinto ['tintu] dyed, red
tio ['tin] 771, uncle
tirar [ti'rar] to draw
toalha [tu'afiis] f. towel
tocar [tu'car] to touch
todo ['tod^uj (adj.) all
tomar [tu 'mar] to take
tomo ['tomu] m. tome
tonel [tu'nd] m. tun, cask
tormento [iur 'mentu] m. torment
iornar [tur'nar] to (rejturn
torre ['torrd] f. tower, steeple
forrente [tu'rretitd] f. torrent
torto ['tortu] crooked, tortuous
tortura [tur'ture] f. torture
tosse ['tosd] f. cough
toucinho [to'sijiu] m. bacon
touro ['toru] m. bull
trabalho [trv'bafiu] m. work
trago ['trasu] m. touch, sketch
traduzir [trvd'u'zir] to translate
trdfego ['trafggu] m. \ . .n
trdfico ['trafiku] m. J ^^^^^^
traidor ['traid'orj m. traitor
trajo ftra^u] m. garb
tranqui(l)lo [trv 'kwilu] tranquil
transcrevei' [trvfkrd'ver] trans-
cribe
transporte [trvf'portd] m. trans-
port
transtoi'no [trvf'tornu] m, distur-
bance
tratar [trv 'tar] to treat, deal
trato [train] m. treasment
trave ['travd] /". beam
travessa [trv 'vesv] f. cross-
beam
trazer [trv'zer] to carry, bring
trecho ['trsfu] m. excerpt
trem [trvt] m. carriage
tremer [tr^'mer] to tremble
trevo ['trevu] trefoil
treze ['trezd[ thirteen
456
Portuguese-English Vocabulary.
trezentos [tr^'zentuJJ ihxeQ hund-
red
trigo f'triguj m. wheat, corn
Trindade [tnn 'da&d] f. Trinity
trtplice f'triplis?] triple
triste ['triftd] sad
trocar [tru'kar] to change
iroco I'trokuJ m, change
tronco f'troku] m. trunk
tropa [' trope] f. troop
tropel [tni'^^el] troop, multitude
trovyo [tru'vyuj m. thunder
trovejar [triiv}'$ar] to thunder
tudo I'tuffuJ the whole, all,
everything
tumulo f'tumuluj m. tomb
turco f'turkuj m. Turk
turro f'turim] muddy
U.
ultimo ['ultimu] last
undnime [u'nvnimd] unanimous
unlia f'ujiv] f. nail
uniao [unf'vu] f. union
unico f'unikuj only, sole
unidade [uni'&a&d] f. unity
unir [u'nir] to unite
urbano fur benuj civil
urgente [ur'gent9j m. urgent
urso ['ursu] m. bear
urze I 'urzdj f. sweet broom
uso f'uzuj m. use
usual [uzu'al] =
usura [u'zuru] f. usury
util I'util] useful
uva I'uvn] f. grape
T.
Vacca ['vakvj f. cow
vacuo f'vakwu] void, empty
vaga ['vagv] f. wane
vagar [vv'gar] m. leisure
vago ['vagu] vacant, vague
vaidade vai'&a&d] f. vanity
vaidoso [va^'ffozu] vain
vale ['vahj m. post-office order
valente [w'lentQ] valiant
valer [vB'ler] to be worth
vdlido f'vali&uj valid, efficacious
valido [vv'lifuj m. favourite
valor [vv'lor] m. value
valsa f'vaisvj f. valse
vantdgem fvvn'tageij f. advan-
tage
vantajoso [vvniv 'sosu] advan-
tageous
xao [vvu] void, vain ; m. void
vdrio f'variu] various
varrer [vv'rrer] to sweep
vasa ['vazv] f. slime
vasar [vis'zar] to empty
vaso ['vazu] m. vase, vessel
vasto [ vajtu] vast
vazio [vv'zim] empty
veado [vt'aduj m. deer
vegetal [vf^d'taij m. vegetable
vela ['velv] f. sail
velho I'vefiu & 'vvfiu] old
ve(l)ludo [v9'lu&u] m. velvet
veloz [v9'lof] swift
veneer [ve'ser] to vanquish
venda ['vendv] f. sale
vender [vender] to sell
veneno [vd'nenu] m. poison
vento fventuj m. wind
ventre ['ventrgj m. belly
Ventura fven'tura] f. fortune
verdade [v9r'dv&9] f. truth
verdadeiro [vdrdvdv^ru] true
verde ['verdd] green
vergonha [vdr'gojiv] f. shame
verme ['vermd] m. worm
vermelho [vdr'mvfiu] red
versdo [vdr'seu] f. version
verier [vgr'ter] to spill; trans-
late
vtspera ['vs/pdrv] f. eve
vestido fvtf'tidu] gown, dress
vestir [vyf'tir] to dress
vez fvefi f. time
via f'vi'v] f. way, passage
vidgem [v}'a$v}] f. journey
vicio f'visiu] m. vice
victima fvitima] f. victim
victdria [vi'torfv] f. victory
vida ['vidv] life
vide f'vtjd'ij f. vine
vidro f'vi&ru] glass
vi(l)la f'vilv] f. village
vinagre fvi'nagr^] m. vinegar
vinda ['vindv] f. amval
vindima [vm'di:mvj f. vintage
Portugnese-English Vocabulary.
457
vingar [m'gar] to revenge
vinha ['vijiv] f. vineyard
vinho f'vijiuj m. wine
vintem [vin'tvi] m. Portuguese
coin of 20 reis
violento fviu'lentuj violent
vidleta [mu'letv] f. violet
vir [virj to come
virar [vi'ra,rj to turn
virgtda ['virgulv] f. comma
mril [vi'ril] manly
virtude [vir'tu&d] f. virtue
vista f'viftej f. view
visto ['riftuj seen
viuvo fvt'uvu] m. widomer
mvo ['vivuj alive
vizinho [vd'zijiu m. neighbour
voar [vu'ar] to fly
rolta ['vcitv] f. turn
voltar [vci'tar] to (re)turn,
volume [vu'lumd] m. volume
volver [coi'ver] to go back, to
stir
vontade [von'taffd] f. will, wish
voo [vou] m. flight
voto ['vjtu] m. vote
voz [vof] f. voice
Z.
Zanga ['zv^v] f. anger
zangar [zv gar] to irritate
zelo ['zeluj m. zeal
zero I'zeru] m. zero
zombar [zom'barj to mock
zumbido [zum'hi&u] m. 1 hxim-
zunido [zu'ni&u] m. j ming.
29**
.^^
RETURN CIRCULATION DEPARTMENT
TO— ► 202 Main Library
1 DAN PERIOD 1
9 '^
HOME USE
4
5 6
ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS
1 -month loans may be renewed by calling 642-3405
6-month loans may be recharged by bringing books to Circulation
Desk
Renewals and recharges may be made 4 days prior to due date
DUE AS STAMPED BELOW
AitiaotsufU^l
? YM
OD
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, BERKELEY
FORM NO. DD6, 40m, 3/78 BERKELEY, CA 94720
®s
LD 21-100m-8,'84
U.C. BERKELEY LIBRARIES
coDM'jbuafli
(pry(\o^i
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY